Clara 80 PDF

CLARA 80 High Flow
Technical Documentation
This page is intentionally left blank

Table of Contents

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.1. Safety warnings

2. COMPLIANCE DECLARATIONS

2.1. Declaration of Conformity

3. GENERAL INFORMATION

3.1. Requirements on operating water

4. PROCESS INFORMATION

4.1. P&ID - CD01140 - R08

5. UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

5.1. Connection list - 9660001297 - R03

6. INSTALLATION MANUAL

6.1. Installation manual - 598886-02 - R03

7. OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

7.1. Operator manual - 140006 - R08

7.2. Operator’s manual - 598887-02 - R0

7.3. Service & Maintenance manual - 598889-02 - R01

8. ITEM LIST / COMPONENT LIST

8.1. Component list - 9660006060 - R00

9. MECHANICAL DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS

9.1. Layout drawing- 9660003213 - R06

10. ELECTRICAL, AUTOMATION & DOCUMENTATION

10.1. Electrical drawing - 9699630000 – R00

10.2. VFD - FC302 - Danfoss

10.3. Safety relay - 2963802 - Phoenix

10.4. Power supply – 2866750 - Phoenix

10.5. PLC - X20 - B&R (only in softcopy)

10.6. Emergency stop - XB4BS8442 - Schneider

11. COMPONENT DOCUMENTATION

11.1. Strainer –- Fig 16 - Spirax Sarco

11.2. Sight glass - 7005 - Kieselmann

11.3. Flow restrictor – REG - Kobold


11.4. Pressure gauge - 233.50 - Wika

11.5. Pressure Switch – PN5004 - IFM

11.6. Butterfly valve - LKB - Alfa Laval

11.7. Actuator - 9428 - Gemu

11.8. Manual diaphragm valve - 673 - Gemu

11.9. Sample valve – PEC–15L - Parth

11.10. Electromagnetic Flowmeter – H250 – M40

11.11. Impeller pump - A & T Schneider

11.12. Solid receiving unit - Johnson pump

11.13. Backpressure valve SDPVRQ

11.14. Ball Valve- Unison

11.15. Turbidity transmitter – Phase Guard T – Sigrist

11.16. Solenoid valve – VX21 - SMC

12. SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

12.1. Spare part manual - 598721-02 - R0

13. DECOMMISSIONING

14. CONTACT ALFA LAVAL SERVICE
1. Safety instructions
1.1. Safety warnings
© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

SAFETY WARNINGS
FOR HIGH SPEED SEPARATOR SYSTEMS
All Personnel involved in the operation, main-

tenance or repair of separators or separation plants
must read this manual thoroughly. This is essential
for their safety.
The forces created due to the size,

weight and high speed of the rotating
components of a centrifugal separator
are extremely great. Incorrect
operation, maintenance and assembly,
or use of non-original parts can cause
serious damage to property and injury
to personnel.
CONTENTS
1. General requirements 6. Stopping
2. Project planning and installation 7. Dismantling, assembly and manual
3. Pre-checks for the initial start of new cleaning
or overhauled separators 8. Maintenance
4. Checks before and during each start App.A Bowl types
5. Operation
WARNING: NON-COMPLIANCE MAY

CAUSE A SERIOUS ACCIDENT!
Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 1 (11)

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 ALWAYS observe the Safety
Warnings exactly. 1.10 A separator has maximum and
minimum operating temperature
1.2 ALWAYS follow the instructions in limits. Operation above or below
the Instruction Manuals carefully these temperatures will reduce
concerning installation, assembly, bowl strength. A weakened bowl
operation and regular may disrupt with grave risks to
maintenance. people and the surroundings.
Therefore, strictly abide by the
1.3 NEVER operate a separator until it instructions concerning operating
is properly mounted. procedures that can alter bowl
temperature (e.g. cooling time after
1.4 Ensure that all operators who sterilization or running a separator
operate and service a separator for long time in stand-by without
are well-trained and cooling).
knowledgeable concerning the
machine and the work to be 1.11 Separators for high
carried out. temperature use and
sterilizable separators
1.5 NEVER neglect alarms. have uninsulated
Find out what caused surfaces which can cause burns if
the alarm and remedy it touched.
before the alarm is
reset. 1.12 NEVER work on mech-
anical equipment such
1.6 ALWAYS use genuine Alfa Laval as valves or pumps
spare parts and tools. with the electric power
or instrument air supply
1.7 ALWAYS follow local Safety on. There is a mechanical hazard.
Regulations concerning lifting
devices, electric equipment, pres- 1.13 NEVER work on electri-
sure vessels, inflammable, toxic or cal equipment with the
corrosive process liquids, etc. main power supply on.
There is an electric
1.8 Place information and warning shock hazard.
notices in prominent places.
1.14 ALWAYS set the main
1.9 NEVER use the separator for switch to OFF and lock
separating liquid which is more it in this position if you
corrosive or erosive or has higher are going to
density, higher temperature, disassemble the
different characteristics of the separator or parts of the auxiliary
solids, etc., than originally equipment.
specified. If your needs change,
consult your ALFA LAVAL
representative.

2. PROJECT PLANNING AND
INSTALLATION
2.1 ALWAYS check with an Alfa Laval 2.4 Ensure that the foundations are
representative that the separator strong enough for the separator.
you plan to buy or use is suitable
for the application. Elements that 2.5 If the starting equipment containing
are important to consider are, e.g., the main switch is placed in such a
process liquid density and position that it cannot be seen from
temperature, corrosion the separator, most local safety
characteristics, sludge regulations require that a separate
characteristics, solids contents of safety switch must be installed in
the process liquid, toxicity, the power supply to the separator
inflammability, degree of motor.
automation, etc.
2.6 As the separator stands on soft
2.2 ALWAYS check with an Alfa Laval rubber mountings, ALWAYS
representative that the installation design the pipe-work to and from
is properly planned. Things that the separator in such a way that
should be considered are, e. g.: there will be sufficient flexibility.
Possible vibration should not be
• A clear area around the equipment allowed to be transmitted via the
is required for servicing. piping.
• A lifting device of sufficient
capacity and that can be 2.7 If the local safety regulations
positioned exactly over the centre prescribe that the installation has
of the bowl spindle is needed to to be inspected and approved by
remove the bowl assembly. responsible authorities before the
separation system is put into
2.3 Ensure that all service media service, consult with such
(compressed air, electric power, authorities before installing the
operating, cooling, and safety equipment and have the projected
liquids, etc.) required for the installation approved by them.
separator have the correct quality
and capacity. In cases where 2.8 NEVER transport or lift a separator
supply failure of the service media with its bowl installed as bearings
might cause damage, automatic and the bowl spindle could be
supervision is recommended. This damaged.
applies to operating media for
solids discharging separators 2.9 Only motors (including necessary
where a failure could cause monitoring equipment) specified by
unbalance and/or the cooling water Alfa Laval may be fitted to the
for mechanical seals where a fault separator. Violation of this can
could cause hot spots or water cause severe damage and create
leakage into the lubricating oil. a safety risk for the personnel.
Motor drives of variable speed
must not be used unless approved

by Alfa Laval and used in For separators with paring tube for
combination with appropriate concentrate discharge (e.g. UX type)
safety devices.
2.14 ALWAYS design the concentrate
2.10 Design the system in such a way outlet line in such a way that there
that there is always an open outlet is an open outlet for the
for liquid from the bowl casing concentrate. If the separator
drain outlet. operates against a closed outlet
damage may occur.
2.11 If the sediment from the separator
is discharged into a tank, this tank For separators equipped with a
must be sufficiently ventilated. The cooling jacket on the bowl casing or
connection between the separator cyclone
and the tank must be of the size
and configuration specified. 2.15 Ensure that the pressure of cooling
liquid in the jackets cannot exceed
For nozzle separators the specified limit. Excess
pressure will cause damage.
2.12 ALWAYS use strainers in the feed
lines for the process liquid, For separators working in a closed
cleaning liquid and water. Their system
mesh size must be smaller than
the nozzle diameter. 2.16 If the solids are discharged from
the separator bowl casing into a
2.13 Design the system in such a way closed system, ensure that this
that the feed can never be system cannot be overfilled or
accidentally cut off while the bowl closed in such a way that the
is rotating. A safety water/liquid solids cannot leave the bowl
supply of sufficient flow rate must casing. This could cause a
be provided so that (to prevent hazardous situation.
unbalance) the bowl can be kept
filled if the ordinary supply fails. 2.17 Ensure that the gas pressure
(This does not apply to UX type inside the bowl casing stays within
separators). specified limits. Otherwise the bowl
casing might disrupt.

3. PRE-CHECKS FOR THE INITIAL START
OF NEW OR OVERHAULED
SEPARATORS
3.1 Check that installation of the
rubber vibration dampers between 3.5 Make sure that the
the frame and foundation has been motor rotates in the
carried out according to the direction indicated
instructions. by the arrow on the
separator frame. If
3.2 Make sure that the the bowl rotates in
drive unit contains the wrong
the correct quantity direction, the
of suitable oil. left-hand threaded lock ring(s) may
unscrew. This could cause a
serious accident!
3.3 Check that all electric supervision
signals and interlocks are 3.6 Make sure that the
connected and that they operate frequency and
correctly. voltage of the
current to be
3.4 Make sure that the connected is in
separator frame, accordance with
control boxes and separator
cabinets are specifications. Too
connected to earth high a bowl speed
(ground) in accordance with local can create danger!
regulations. This is especially
important in hazardous areas to 3.7 Check that the actual operating
reduce the risk of ignition due to rpm with an empty bowl is the
static electricity. same as that specified in the
Operator's Manual.

4. CHECKS BEFORE AND DURING EACH
START
4.1 NEVER operate a separator if 4.5 Check that all lines for service
screws, nuts or other parts are media are open and that safety
missing, worn or damaged. Check liquid is available.
that all clamps, pipe couplings and
other fastenings have been 4.6 Supervise the entire starting cycle.
securely tightened. If starting time is longer or power
consumption higher than usual,
4.2 NEVER start the separator without stop the separator. The cause
being sure that the bowl is clean. must be found and action taken to
correct the fault before a restart.
4.3 If the separator is equipped with a
vibration alarm unit, check the 4.7 To avoid overheating the motor, do
setting and do not set it to a higher not restart the separator more
level than recommended. The frequently than permitted in the
pre-warning signal level may be applicable Operator's manual.
adjusted to individual process
conditions.
4.4 ALWAYS check

that the brake is in
the OFF position
before a start (if
applicable).

5. OPERATION
5.1 Wait until the bowl has reached its
correct operating speed before the 5.6 The solids
process liquid is turned on. are dis-
charged
5.2 Check that there is no leakage from the
from pipe connections on or bowl at
around the separator. intervals,
the length
5.3 If there is of which are dependent upon feed
an unusual rate, solids content of the process
noise or liquid and characteristics of the
vibration, solids. To avoid unbalance and
stop the risk of damage the solids must be
separator. discharged before they become
packed hard or the solids space
5.4 As the separator bowl rotates it is becomes overfull.
heated by air friction. Normally, Before introducing the process
this causes only a slight increase liquid, check that the discharge
of the process liquid temperature, interval time is set at a suitable
but, if the liquid flow is interrupted, rate and the discharge volume, if
the liquid remaining in the bowl will adjustable, is set at a suitable size.
be heated to a temperature in Operating times between
excess of 100°C. This can cause a discharges has a maximum limit
dangerous situation if the process determined by the compacting of
liquid is inflammable or can the solids and a minimum limit for
decompose. mechanical reasons or motor
In such cases, ensure that the flow overload.
to the separator is not interrupted The discharge volume must be
long enough to cause a dangerous large enough to avoid incomplete
increase in temperature. emptying of solids from the bowl.
For separators with solids discharge 5.7 Do not adjust the discharge
nozzles placed close to the periphery system in such a way that the
of the bowl (e.g. SX, QX, TX, DX solids will become so thick and dry
types) that there is a risk of clogging the
bowl cover and/or the cyclone
5.5 ALWAYS run and stop the outlet. Serious damage may occur
separator with a sufficient flow of if the solids cannot escape.
liquid into the bowl to keep it filled.
This reduces unbalance should 5.8 A separator with a variable
nozzle blockage occur. discharge programme used for
partial discharge should NEVER
For separators with intermittent solids be changed to total discharge
discharge from the periphery of the before consulting your ALFA
bowl (e.g. PX, AX types) LAVAL representative.

6. STOPPING
6.1 ALWAYS stop the separator with 6.4 If the separator is equipped with an
the bowl full of liquid. automatic safety liquid system do
not shut off the main power to the
6.2 If the separator is not equipped system until the bowl has stopped
with an automatic emergency and the manual valve for safety
shut-down procedure, a manual liquid has been closed.
procedure suitable for your
installation must be used. Normally 6.5 NEVER feed any liquid to a
this means that if unusual vibration stationary bowl.
occurs the separator must be
stopped with the feed (or safety 6.6 Do not leave the bowl idle for any
water) on and the brake applied. length of time with corrosive liquids
in it.
6.3 NEVER
loosen any 6.7 NEVER let a separator stand still
part of the more than a few weeks (less in an
separator area with high floor vibrations)
and do not without removing the bowl.
open in-
spection or 6.8 If the separator has been stopped
cleaning hatches until the bowl has because of vibration, do not use it
come to a complete standstill. again until the cause of vibration
Standstill is indicated by a lamp on has been established and
the control panel and/or that the corrected.
revolution counter is not rotating.

7. DISMANTLING, MANUAL CLEANING
AND ASSEMBLY
7.1 Check that the bowl is stationary, NEVER
that the main power switch is hose down
turned off and, if possible, locked a separator
or fuses removed before starting with a
any dismantling work. Hang up a direct water
warning sign to prevent the power jet. Totally
being turned on. enclosed
motors can
7.2 ALWAYS use the special tools be damaged by direct hosing to
supplied by Alfa Laval when the same extent as open motors.
working on a separator. The use of Be careful even when the motor is
improper or makeshift tools can equipped with a protecting hood.
cause accidents. NEVER direct the water jet on the
ventilation grills.
7.3 Position the hoist exactly when
dismantling and assembling. Do 7.8 Do not clean bowl parts with
not use a hoist that works jerkily or solutions that may be corrosive to
too fast. the particular materials of these
parts.
7.4 When working on a separator with
a hinged cover, ALWAYS be sure 7.9 When assembling a bowl, always
to lock the cover securely in the make sure that the threads on
open position. bowl components are thoroughly
clean, free from grit and properly
7.5 When using the disc stack lubricated.
compression tool as a lifting tool,
ALWAYS follow the procedure 7.10 A separator bowl is balanced as a
exactly as described in the complete unit. Components of one
Maintenance & Repair manual. bowl must not be interchanged
with those of another bowl (unless
7.6 Handle components with care. Do definitely permitted). Make sure
not place parts directly on the floor. that no parts are left out during
Use a clean rubber mat, assembly and that parts with
fibre-board or a wooden pallet. alignment marks are positioned
Protect all parts against damage, correctly. All major parts are
dust and dirt. Make sure that they marked with the full serial number
are clean and free from burrs when or the last three digits for
assembling. identification purposes.
7.7 Do not use high pressure hoses or 7.11 NEVER start a

excessive amounts of water when separator without
cleaning the inside of the bowl its bowl. This might
casing as this can cause water to damage the
enter into the spindle bearings. bearings.

8. MAINTENANCE
8.1 ALWAYS use the proper operate the separator but consult
equipment such as chain hoists, your ALFA LAVAL representative.
dollies, etc., when lifting and/or
moving heavy components such 8.4 Ensure that the bowl is fitted with
as motors, bowl bodies, bowl the correct number of discs to
assemblies, etc.. obtain appropriate disc stack
compression. If you remove a disc
8.2 At each service, or at least every ALWAYS replace it with a new one
third month, the most important to avoid unbalance.
parts should be checked for fatigue
damage. Special attention should 8.5 NEVER
be given to the bowl pillars for the heat bowl
solids discharge ports, nozzles, parts, such
threads of bowl body/large as bowl
lock-ring as well as the frame and body, bowl
the upper frame part which are hit hood, lock
by ejected solids and/or operating rings, etc.,
liquid. If process or cleaning liquids with a naked flame or attempt
are corrosive or erosive the repairs by welding. This could
inspection interval must be destroy the mechanical and
shortened. structural strength of the material.
8.3 Note that the assembly mark Φ on 8.6 On separators equipped with a
the main lock ring must be aligned friction brake, make sure that the
or pass the Φ mark on bowl body pad is in a good condition.
or bowl hood when the lock ring is
fully tightened. In this position 8.7 Many separators are equipped
there must be proper compression with a paring disc liquid discharge.
of the disc stack. Check that all It is important that the paring
parts are device/feed tube assembly has the
securely correct height adjustment. It is
tightened. If especially important to check this
the Φ mark on new or overhauled separators.
on the large
lock ring 8.8 Periodically inspect and test by
passes the operating all the automatic shut-off
correspon- devices and monitoring systems
ding mark provided to make sure they will
on the bowl body/bowl hood by function correctly when required.
more than 25 degrees, do not
IF YOU ARE IN ANY WAY UNCERTAIN, CONSULT YOUR ALFA LAVAL REPRESENTATIVE!
For reliability and maximum safety we strongly recommend that an ALFA LAVAL Service
Engineer inspects your separator at regular intervals, recommended by the ALFA LAVAL
Service Engineer.

APPENDIX A: BOWL TYPES
The following figure shows schematic characteristics of different bowl types. The bowl type
is stated in the separator designation, in most cases as characters no. 3 and 4.
Example: CHQX 320 B-31CGR.

2. Compliance declarations
2.1. Declaration of Conformity

CE Declaration of Conformity for Machinery
We:
Søren Svendsen, Best Practice Manager, Engineering & Supply

Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
Maskinvej 5
DK-2860 Søborg - Denmark
Declare that machinery

Type : CLARA Disc stack type centrifugal separator module,
Designation : CLARA 15, CLARA 20, CLARA 80, CLARA 200, CLARA 250
(including all sub-variants)
Serial number : 4xxxxxM
Complies with the requirement of the following EC directives:
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC,

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Following harmonized standards has been applied at the design of the machinery:
Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004/108/EC
Following other technical standards and specifications have been applied at the design of the
machinery:
Electrical equipment of machines, part1 EN 60204-1
Acoustic determination ISO 3744
Safety of machinery – Principles of risk assessment EN ISO 14121-1
Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design EN ISO 12100-1,-2
The technical file for the machinery is compiled and retained by the authorized person Gaurav Akut
within the Legal entity Alfa Laval Support Services, Pvt. Ltd, India. By reasoned request all relevant
technical documentation will be sent by post to national authorities.
Alfa Laval Support Services, Pvt. Ltd.

rd
Date: 03 August 2015
Gaurav Akut
Product Responsible in Engineering & Supply for CLARA modules
© Copyright Alfa Laval

3. General information
3.1. Requirements on operating water

Document Title Document ID Version
Quality specification water 553406 10
Issued by Department Page
Andreas Rundby HSS 1(1)
Approved by Approval date Approval Status
Anna-Karin Karlsson 2013-04-16 APPROVED
Operating water is used in the separator for

several different functions: e.g. to operate the
discharge mechanism, to lubricate and cool
mechanical seals.
Poor quality of the operating water may cause

erosion, corrosion and/or operating problem in
the separator and must therefore be treated to
meet certain demands.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactory purified operating water
supplied by the customer.
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
1. Turbidity free water, solids content <0.001% by

volume.
Deposits must not be allowed to form in certain
areas in the separator.
2. A maximum particle size of 50 µm.
3. A total hardness of less than 180 mg CaCO3
per litre, which corresponds to 10°dH or 12.5°E.
Hard water may with time form deposits in
the operating mechanism. The precipitation
rate is accelerated with increased operating
temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe as the
hardness of the water increase.
4. A chloride content of maximum 100 ppm NaCl
(equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l).
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/l is not
recommended.
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the
separator surface in contact with the operating
water, including the spindle. Corrosion is
a process that is accelerated by increased
separating temperature, low pH, and high
chloride ion concentration.
5. pH>6
Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the risk
for corrosion; this is accelerated by increased
temperature and high chloride ion content.
Template ID: 9004871 Version 3
This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval AB (publ.) and protected by laws governing intellectual property This document may constitute a
and thereto related rights. Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, contractual obligation on the part of Alfa
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise), or for any purpose, Laval AB only to the extent expressly
without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent agreed upon.
of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.
4. Process information
4.1. P&ID - CD01140 - R08

5. Utility requirements
5.1. Connection list - 9660001297 - R03

Connection list Clara 80 Std or Clara 80 HF Cooled version
For connections to the separator, please see the connection list in the instruction book for the separator.
PROCESS CONNECTIONS
Connection Description Requirements
201.1 Inlet Process Liquid ● allowed temperature: 0 - 100°C

● max allowed density: 1100 kg/m3
● flow range: 500 - 8 000 l/h
● pressure: 30 - 200 kPa
201 Out let unclarified process liquid ● Connected to 201 on Separator
220.1 Outlet clarified liquid ● flow: 500 - 8 000 l/h

● available pressure: 0 - 700 kPa
220 Inlet clarified process liquid from ● Connected to 220 on Separator

Separator
Solids outlet from cyclone or ● volume/discharge: 2.2 litres

222 solid receiving unit ( Optional )
222.2
222.1 Solids inlet solids receiving unit ● Connected to 222 on Separator

( optional )
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
300 Inlet Water supply ● required pressure: 30 - 300 kPa,

● flow, momentary: 1.5 l/minute , Cooled version – 7.5 l/minute
● consumption: 0.8 l/discharge
● max allowed density: 1000 kg/m3
● quality requirements: see 553406
● allowed temperature: 0 – 35 °C
302 Outlet to separator for Flushing ● Connected to 302 on separator

above the bowl ● Flow controlled by solenoid valve SV302-1 and orifice FC 302 -2
375 Outlet for discharge and make up ● Connected to 375 on separator

liquid ● required Pressure – 100 – 600 kPa
● Discharge liquid flow – 16.5 ± 3.3 liters/minutes
● Make up water Liquid flow – 5.5 ± 3.3 liters/minutes
405 ( Only for HF Cooled Outlet to separator for cooling of ● Connected to 405 on separator
version ) Frame parts ● Max Pressure – 50 kPa
● flowrate set value – 6 liters/minutes
● Pressure to be set using PRV405-2
● Pressure is shown by manometer PI
462 Drain out let separator frame top ● no back pressure allowed
parts, lower ● possible to drain liquids by gravity
Electrical power supply: 3x400-460V 50/60Hz Min 25A. Max 32A
CONNECTION LIST Clara 80 H STD / Clara 80 S / Cooled version
Document: 9660001297
Revised for: Temperature range for water supply updated.
Rev. No: Rev Date: Complementary information: Project: Prepared: Checked: Appr: Date: Page: Total:
03 09-Jun- Flowcharts STANDARD INPAGPT INPAGATA INPAKHN 01 Mar 2010 1 1
2015 CD01267, CD01140
6. Installation manual
6.1. Installation manual - 598886-02 - R03

Installation Manual
High Speed Separator
VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS
Product No. 881222-01-04/2

Book No. 598886-02 Rev. 3
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax:+46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB June 2013

The original instructions are in English
This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
2
Contents
1 Safety Instructions 9
1.1 Warning signs in text 14

1.2 Environmental issues 15
1.3 Requirements of personnel 16
1.4 Remote start 16
2 Technical Reference 17
2.1 Product description 17

2.1.1 Directives and standards 18
2.2 Technical data 19
2.3 Bowl sealing diagrams 21
2.3.1 Introduction 21
2.3.2 Bowl 567723-05
(standard, disc 190) 21
2.3.3 Bowl 567723-06
(standard, disc 220/190) 22
2.3.4 Bowl 567723-07
(axial, herm seal, disc 190 22
2.3.5 Bowl 567723-08
(axial, herm seal, disc 220/190 23
2.4 Performance data for in- and outlet device 24
2.5 Power consumption 26
2.6 Operating water interface 26
2.7 Basic size drawing, standard 27
2.7.1 Separator 27
2.7.2 Connections 28
2.8 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal 29
2.8.1 Separator 29
2.9 Basic size drawing 31
2.9.1 Separator 31
3
2.10 Basic size drawing, standard, cyclone 33
2.10.1 Separator 33
2.11 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal, 
cyclone 35
2.11.1 Separator 35
2.12.1 Separator, cyclone 37
2.13.1 Separator w. flushing, cyclone 39
2.14.1 Separator w. flushing 41
2.15 Connection list, axial hermetic seal 43
2.16 Connection list, standard 45
2.17 Connection list 47
2.18 Connection list, 
with flushing 49
2.19 Foundation drawing 51
2.20 Interface description 53
2.20.1 Scope 53
2.20.2 References 53
2.20.3 Definitions 53
2.20.4 Goal 54
2.20.5 Description of separator modes 54
2.20.6 Handling of connection interfaces 56
2.21 Quality of operating water 62
2.22 Electric motor 63
2.23 Guidelines for frequency converter drives 65
2.24 Dimensioning of a frequency converter 69
4
2.24.1 Dimensioning and programming of a
frequency converter 69
2.24.2 Selecting the motor with correct voltage 
and frequency for a variable frequency 
drive 69
2.24.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter 
for an actual application 72
2.24.4 Programming the frequency converter 73
2.24.5 Braking methods 74
2.24.6 Brake chopper and braking resistor 75
2.24.7 DC braking 76
2.24.8 Regenerative drive - IGBT solution 
braking: 76
2.25 Calculation of DC-brake unit 77
2.26 Interconnection diagram 78
2.27 Unbalance sensor kit (optional) 80
2.27.1 Unbalance sensor 82
2.28 Speed sensor kit 83
2.28.1 Speed transmitter, complete 85
2.28.2 Inductive sensor 86
2.28.3 Inductive analogue sensor 87
2.29 Lifting instructions 89
2.29.1 Separator 89
2.29.2 Bowl 90
2.29.3 Other parts 90
2.30 Storage and installation 91
2.30.1 Storage and transport of goods 91
2.30.2 Planning and installation 93
2.30.3 Foundations 96
5
6
Read and understand instruction manuals
and observe the warnings before installation,
operation, service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents.
In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions

have been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for
situations arising from the unintended usage of the machine and its
tools.
7
8
1 Safety Instructions
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high

speed. This means that:
 Kinetic energy is high
 Great forces are generated
G0010421
 Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
apply:
 Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval. Applies not only to the process
but also to cleaning and service liquids.
 Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
 Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
S0151211
 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

and the special tools supplied.
9
Disintegration hazards
 When power cables are connected,

always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
S01512F1
 If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
S01512N1
Alfa Laval.

S01512P1
 Check that the gear/pulley ratio is correct
for power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
serious break down.
S01512L1
 If the separator is run by a variable
frequency drive, it is extremely important
that the frequency does not exceed the
allowed maximum. This is to avoid
serious break down caused by too high
speed.
 Welding or heating of parts that rotate
can seriously affect material strength.
S0151241
 Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. -mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite -mark by
more than specified distance.
S01512G1
 Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process or cleaning liquid is corrosive or
erosive.
S01512H1
10
Entrapment hazards
 Make sure that rotating parts have come 

to a complete standstill before
accessing parts inside the machine or
starting any dismantling work.
S01512O1

If there is no braking function the run
down time can exceed two hours. 

 To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
S0151261
dismantling work.

Assemble the machine completely
before start. All covers, connections and
guards must be in place.
Electrical hazard
 Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding).
S0151271
dismantling work.
11
Crush hazards
 Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.


S01512M1


Do not work under a hanging load.
S01512Y1
Noise hazards
 Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0151291
Burn hazards
 Lubrication oil, machine parts and

various machine surfaces can be hot and
cause burns. Wear protective gloves.
S01512A1
12
Skin irritation hazards
 When using chemical cleaning agents,

make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation, personnel
S01512D1
protection etc.
 Use of lubricants in various situations.
Cut hazards
 Sharp edges, especially on bowl discs,

retaining-rings and threads, can cause
cuts. Wear protective gloves.
S01512B1
Flying objects
 Risk for accidental release of snap rings

and springs when dismantling and
assembly. Wear safety goggles.
S01512C1
Health hazard
 Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust
S01512V1
13
1.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
DANGER
Type of hazard
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Type of hazard
WARNING indicates a potentially

could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Type of hazard
CAUTION indicates a potentially

may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage.
14
1.2 Environmental issues
Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with local
regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant. If not available they
should be disposed to a suitable licensed land fill
site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent to
a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings and friction linings should be disposed
to a licensed land fill site. Check your local
regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be
sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
15
1.3 Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed to
operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
 Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
 Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
1.4 Remote start

If the separator is operated from a remote
position, from where it can neither be seen nor
heard, the power isolation device shall be
equipped with an interlocking device. This is to
prevent a remote start command which could
result in some liquid being fed to the separator
when it is shut down for service.
The first start after the separator has been taken
apart or has been standing still for a long time
shall always be locally manually supervised.
16
2 Technical Reference
2.1 Product description

Alfa Laval ref. 598141, rev. 2
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system including a monitoring
system. If the technical data in the system description does not agree with the technical
data in this instruction manual, the data in the system description is the valid one.
Product number: 881222-01-04

Separator type: VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS.
Application: Wine clarification.
Technical design: Clarifier.
Belt drive.
Seals available in nitrile.
Alternative Machine top part with cooled sludge channel.
Conversion set to VNPX 507 SGD-31CGS, axial
hermetic design.
Designed in accordance with directives and standards:
See ‘‘2.1.1 Directives and standards’’.
Operational limits:
Hydraulic capacity: 8 m3/h
Feed temperature: -5 °C to +100 °C.
Ambient temperature: +5 to +55 °C.
Discharge interval: Min. 1 minute, max. 4 hours.
Maximum allowed density of operating liquid: 1000 kg/m3
Frequency drive equipment required.
Maximum allowed speed: 8400 r/min
Only land based installations are permitted.
Risk for corrosion and erosion has to be investigated in each case by the application
centre.
17
2.1 Product description 2 Technical Reference
2.1.1 Directives and standards

Declaration of Incorporation of partly

completed Machinery
The machinery complies with the relevant,
essential health and safety requirements of the,
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive
To meet these requirements the following

standards have been used.
EN ISO 12100 Safety of machinery - General principles for design -
Risk assessment and risk reduction.
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines,
part 1: General requirements
ISO 3744 Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels of
noise sources using sound pressure
Declaration of Conformity
The machinery complies with the following
Directives.
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
To meet these requirements the following

standards have been used.
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic
standards - Immunity for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic
standards - Emission standard for industrial
environments
Declaration of Compliance
The machinery complies with:
EC 1935/2004 Regulation on materials and articles intended to come
into contact with food
18
2 Technical Reference 2.2 Technical data
2.2 Technical data

Weight of separator (without motor): 603 kg

Motor power: 11 kW
Power consumption;  
- idling 5,4 kW
- max. capacity: 10,1 kW
- start-up, max.: 17,5 kW
Starting time, min./max.: 3/ 4 minutes
Stopping time;  
- with brake: 5 minutes
- without brake, average: 30 minutes
Max. running time without flow;
- empty bowl: 180 minutes
- filled bowl: 180 minutes
Sound power: 9,9 Bel(A)
Sound pressure: 81 dB(A)
Vibration level: 7,1 mm/s RMS
Lubricating oil volume: 1 litres
Motor speed, synchronous, 60 Hz: 3600 r/min.
Gear ratio, 60 Hz: 112:48
Bowl speed; - synchronous, 60 Hz: 8400 r/min.
Bowl inner diameter (max.): 312,9 mm
Fixed discharge volume: 2,1 litres
Discharge interval, Max./ min.: 1 / 240 minute(s)
Density of operating liquid: 1000 kg/m3
Feed temperature min./ max.: -5/ 100 °C
Bowl liquid volume: 6,2 litres
Sludge volume:
- for bowl 567723-05/-07 3,2 litres
- for bowl 567723-06/-08 1,9 litres
Allowed speed, (max) 8400 r/min.
Weight of motor 73 kg
19
2.2 Technical data 2 Technical Reference
Data for bowl 567723-05;

- max. density feed/sediment 1100/ 1625 kg/m3
- bowl weight 134 kg
- Jp reduced to motor shaft, 60 Hz 12,79 kgm²



Bowl material AL 111 2377-02
20
2 Technical Reference 2.3 Bowl sealing diagrams
2.3 Bowl sealing

diagrams
2.3.1 Introduction
The diagrams illustrate the operational conditions
required under which satisfactory sealing can be
expected in solids-ejecting PX-type centrifugal
separators.
No aspects of separation capabilities are included
in the diagram.
The Y-axis shows the density of the sediment, i.e.
the density of the solids/liquid mixture that
accumulates at the bowl periphery during
operation. Accordingly, this is a lower value than
that of the density of the solid particles only.
The X-axis shows the density of the feed. The
triangular area called the “Operational envelope”
illustrates the permissible combinations of
densities where no leakage should occur.
2.3.2 Bowl 567723-05

(standard, disc 190)
Alfa Laval ref. 568097, rev 0
s = Sediment density
f = Feed density
1 = Admitted operational area

2 = Sealing not possible within this
area
3 = Non physical area (feed density
higher than sediment density)
A = Max. admitted density of wet solids

(1625 kg/m3)
B = Max. admitted density of feed
(1100 kg/m3)
Note!The max. admitted values of

densities refer to the properties of
the bowl. See ‘‘Technical data”
on page 19 for the max. values
G0957111
admitted for the system, which

normally are lower.
21
2.3 Bowl sealing diagrams 2 Technical Reference
2.3.3 Bowl 567723-06

(standard, disc 220/190)
Alfa Laval ref. 568098, rev 0
f = Feed density

area

(1854 kg/m3)
(1100 kg/m3)

G0957211
normally are lower.
2.3.4 Bowl 567723-07

(axial, herm seal, disc 190
f = Feed density

area

(1326 kg/m3)
(1100 kg/m3)

G0957311

normally are lower.
22
2 Technical Reference 2.3 Bowl sealing diagrams
2.3.5 Bowl 567723-08

(axial, herm seal, disc 220/
190
f = Feed density

area

(1424 kg/m3)
(1100 kg/m3)

G0957411
normally are lower.
23
2.4 Performance data for in- and outlet device 2 Technical Reference
2.4 Performance data for

in- and outlet device
Limits for distributor overflow and air free liquid as a function of throughput
G0956911
A. Counter pressure (kPa) Pmax distributor overflow

B. Throughput (m3/h)
Pmin air free liquid
24
2 Technical Reference 2.4 Performance data for in- and outlet device
Inlet pressure as a function of throughput
G0957011
A. Pressure (kPa)
25
2.5 Power consumption 2 Technical Reference
2.5 Power consumption

Power consumption as a function of throughput and counter pressure, Pmin
G0956811
A. Power consumption (kW)
2.6 Operating water

interface
Closing of bowl after start-up

Make-up water period: 22 seconds.
Discharge
Discharge water period: 0,5 seconds.
Make-up water period (after discharge): 6,5
seconds. (Discharge and make-up periods to be
connected (without interruption).)
Operating water level maintenance

To maintain the operating water level supply
make-up water for 2 seconds every 15 minutes.
26
2 Technical Reference 2.7 Basic size drawing, standard
2.7 Basic size drawing,

standard
Alfa Laval ref. 597869 rev. 2
2.7.1 Separator
G1035851
A. Tightening torque: 80 Nm
Connection 201 is turnable 360°.

Connection 220 is turnable 360° in 45° steps.
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
27
2.7 Basic size drawing, standard 2 Technical Reference
2.7.2 Connections
G1035921
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible.
Data for connections, see ‘‘2.16 Connection list, standard” on page 45.
28
2 Technical Reference 2.8 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal

axial hermetic seal
2.8.1 Separator
G1035671

29
2.8 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal 2 Technical Reference
2.8.2 Connections
G1035721
Data for connections, see ‘‘2.15 Connection list, axial hermetic seal” on page 43.
30
2 Technical Reference 2.9 Basic size drawing
2.9 Basic size drawing

2.9.1 Separator
G1035441

31
2.9 Basic size drawing 2 Technical Reference
2.9.2 Connections
G1035521
Data for connections, see ‘‘2.17 Connection list” on page 47.
32
2 Technical Reference 2.10 Basic size drawing, standard, cyclone

standard, cyclone
2.10.1 Separator
G1035251

33
2.10 Basic size drawing, standard, cyclone 2 Technical Reference
2.10.2 Connections
G1035311
A. DIN 11850 Size 65
Data for connections, see ‘‘2.16 Connection list, standard” on page 45.
34
2 Technical Reference 2.11 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal, cyclone

axial hermetic seal,
cyclone
2.11.1 Separator
G10348N1

35
2.11 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal, cyclone 2 Technical Reference
2.11.2 Connections
A. DIN 11850 Size 65 G1034911
Data for connections, see ‘‘2.15 Connection list, axial hermetic seal” on page 43.
36

Alfa Laval ref. 597811, rev.2
2.12.1 Separator, cyclone
G1035031

37
2.12.2 Connections
G1035111
38

2.13.1 Separator w. flushing,

cyclone
G1047461

39
2.13.2 Connections
G1047421
40

2.14.1 Separator w. flushing
G1047451

41
2.14.2 Connections
G1047441
42
2 Technical Reference 2.15 Connection list, axial hermetic seal
2.15 Connection list, axial

hermetic seal
Connection No. Description Requirements/limit

201 Inlet process liquid
- Density See ‘‘2.2 Technical data” on
page 19
- Flow Max. 8 m³/hour
- Temperature -5 °C – +100 °C
- Pressure See ‘‘2.4 Performance data
for in- and outlet device” on
page 24
220 Outlet clarified liquid
- Counter pressure See ‘‘2.4 Performance data
page 24
222 Outlet solid phase
- Discharge volume See ‘‘2.2 Technical data” on
page 19
- Discharge frequency Max. 60 discharges/hour
The outlet from the frame
top part must always be
arranged to prevent the
connected device (i.e.
cyclone) from being filled up
with sludge. Solids are
discharged by gravity.
302 Flushing above the bowl
(Normally used only in the discharge
sequence and/or for cleaning)
- Pressure 100-600 kPa
- Pressure (recommended) 400 kPa
- Flow (momentary at recommended 20 litres/hour
pressure)
(401) Inlet for cooling, general See ‘‘2.20 Interface
description” on page 53
- Pressure Min. 200 kPa
43
2.15 Connection list, axial hermetic seal 2 Technical Reference

375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See ‘‘2.6 Operating water
interface” on page 26
- Quality requirements See ‘‘2.21 Quality of
operating water” on page 62
- Density 1000 kg/m³
- Temperature Max. 80 °C
- Discharge liquid flow 16,5 ± 3,3 litres/minute
- Make up liquid flow 5,5 ± 1,1 litres/minute
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to drain
liquids by gravity
821 Plugged connection (Also connection 305 and
 838)
(305 Flushing in cyclone)
(838 Connection for level sensor)
701 Motor for separator Electric motor to be
operated with frequency
converter
- Time period for acceleration 180 seconds
- Maximum amperage 1,4 x rated amperage
- Allowed frequency variation in “running” ±1%
mode
- Recommended braking method DC brake
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle See ‘‘2.20 Interface
- Type Inductive proximity switch
- Supply voltage, nominal 8 V DC
- Current consumption; 
- with sensor activated (near metal) 1 mA
- with sensor not activated  3 mA
(far from metal)
- Pulses per revolution 2
752 Unbalance sensor, vibration  See ‘‘2.20 Interface
(position sensor for bearing housing) description” on page 53
- Type Inductive analogue sensor
- Supply voltage 15-30 V DC
- Operation range (mild steel) 2-5 mm
- Output voltage within sensing range 1-9 V DC
- Load resistance, RL 470 Ohm
44
2 Technical Reference 2.16 Connection list, standard
2.16 Connection list,

standard

- Density See ‘‘2.2 Technical data” on
page 19
- Flow Max. 8 m³/hour
- Temperature -5 °C – +100 °C
- Pressure See ‘‘2.4 Performance data
page 24
220 Outlet light phase, clarified liquid
- Counter pressure See ‘‘2.4 Performance data
page 24
- Discharge volume See ‘‘2.2 Technical data” on
page 19
- Discharge frequency Max. 60 discharges/hour
connected device (i.e.
cyclone) from being filled
up with sludge. Solids are
(Normally used only in the discharge sequence
and/or for cleaning)
- Pressure (recommended) 300 kPa
- Flow (momentary at recommended pressure) 55 litres/hour
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See ‘‘2.6 Operating water
- Quality requirements See ‘‘2.21 Quality of
operating water” on page
62
- Density 1000 kg/m³
- Temperature Max. 80 °C
- Discharge liquid flow 16,5 ± 3,3 litres/minute
- Make up liquid flow 5,5 ± 1,1 litres/minute
45
2.16 Connection list, standard 2 Technical Reference

462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to drain
liquids by gravity
 838)
(305 Flushing the cyclone)
converter
- Time period for acceleration 180 seconds
- Maximum amperage 1,4 x rated amperage
- Allowed frequency variation in “running” mode ±1%
- Recommended braking method DC brake
740 Speed sensor for bowl spindle See ‘‘2.20 Interface
- Type Inductive proximity switch
- Supply voltage, nominal 8 V DC
- Current consumption; 
- with sensor activated (near metal) 1 mA
- with sensor not activated (far from metal) 3 mA
- Pulses per revolution 2
752 Unbalance sensor, vibration (position sensor for See ‘‘2.20 Interface
bearing housing) description” on page 53
- Type Inductive analogue sensor
- Supply voltage 15-30 V DC
- Operation range (mild steel) 2-5 mm
- Output voltage within sensing range 1-9 V DC
- Load resistance, RL 470 Ohm
46
2 Technical Reference 2.17 Connection list
2.17 Connection list


Density See “Technical data” on
page 19
Flow Max. 8 m³/h
Temperature -5 °C – +100 °C
Pressure See “Performance data for
in- and outlet device” on
page 24
Counter pressure See “Performance data for
page 24
Discharge volume See “Technical data” on
page 19
Discharge frequency Max 60 discharge/h
attached device (i.e.
Normally used only in the discharge
sequence and/or for cleaning
Pressure 100-600 kPa
Pressure (recommended) 300 kPa
Flow (momentary at rec. Pressure) 55 litres/h
47
2.17 Connection list 2 Technical Reference

375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See “Operating water
Quality requirements See “Quality of operating
water” on page 62 ”
Density 1000 kg/m³
Temperature Max. 80 °C
Discharge liquid flow: 16,5 + 3,3 litres/minute

Make-up liquid flow: 5,5 + 1,1 litres/minute
405 Inlet for cooling of frame parts
Flowrate set value 6 l/min
Pressure, control value Max. 50 kPa (0,5 bar)
406 Outlet for cooling of frame parts Free outlet to drain
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to
drain liquids by gravity.
 838)
converter
Time period for acceleration 180 seconds
Maximum amperage 1,4 * rated amperage
Allowed frequency variation in ± 1%
“running” mode
Recommended braking method DC brake
740 Speed sensor for bowl speed See “Interface description”
on page 53
Inductive proximity switch
Supply voltage, nominal 8V
With sensor activated (near metal) 1 mA
With sensor not activated 3 mA
(far from metal)
Pulses per revolution 2
752 Unbalance sensor, vibration See “Interface description”
on page 53
Position sensor for bearing housing
Type Inductive analogue sensor
Supply voltage 15 – 30 V DC
Operation range (mild steel) 2 – 5 mm
Output voltage within sensing range 1 – 9 V DC
Load resistance, RL 470 
48
2 Technical Reference 2.18 Connection list, with flushing
2.18 Connection list, 

with flushing

Density See “Technical data” on
page 19
Flow Max. 8 m³/h
Temperature -5 °C – +100 °C
Pressure See “Performance data for
page 24
Counter pressure See “Performance data for
page 24
Discharge volume See “Technical data” on
page 19
Discharge frequency Max 60 discharge/h
attached device (i.e.
303 Flushing under the bowl
49
2.18 Connection list, with flushing 2 Technical Reference

375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid See “Operating water
Quality requirements See “Quality of operating
water” on page 62 ”
Density 1000 kg/m³
Temperature Max. 80 °C
Discharge liquid flow: 16,5 + 3,3 litres/minute

Make-up liquid flow: 5,5 + 1,1 litres/minute
401 Inlet for cooling, general See “Interface description”
on page 53
Pressure Min. 200 kPa
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to
drain liquids by gravity.
 838)
converter
Time period for acceleration 180 seconds
Maximum amperage 1,4 * rated amperage
Allowed frequency variation in ± 1%
“running” mode
Recommended braking method DC brake
740 Speed sensor for bowl speed See “Interface description”
on page 53
Inductive proximity switch
Supply voltage, nominal 8V
With sensor activated (near metal) 1 mA
With sensor not activated 3 mA
(far from metal)
Pulses per revolution 2
752 Unbalance sensor, vibration See “Interface description”
on page 53
Position sensor for bearing housing
Type Inductive analogue sensor
Supply voltage 15 – 30 V DC
Operation range (mild steel) 2 – 5 mm
Output voltage within sensing range 1 – 9 V DC
Load resistance, RL 470 
50
2 Technical Reference 2.19 Foundation drawing
2.19 Foundation drawing

G0948611
51
2.19 Foundation drawing 2 Technical Reference
A. Min. lifting capacity when doing Recommended free floor space for unloading
service: 1000 kg when doing service
B. Max. height of largest component
incl. lifting tool. Min. access area for overhead hoist
C. Centre of lifting device (no fixed piping within this area)
D. Structural concrete
E. Adesive anchor cartridge, e.g. Hilti Centre of gravity (complete machine)
HEA 12x110
F. Screw M12, property class 8.8
G. Steel Vertical forces not exceeding 14 kN/foot.
Total vertical instantaneous foundation forces
(sum of all feet) ±14 kN. (Static forces are
excluded.)
Horizontal forces not exceeding 14 kN/foot.

Total horizontal instantaneous foundation
forces (sum of all feet) ±14 kN. (Static forces
are excluded.)
52
2 Technical Reference 2.20 Interface description
2.20 Interface description

Alfa Laval ref. 568063 rev. 3
2.20.1 Scope
This document gives information, requirements and recommendations
about operational procedures and signal processing for safe and
reliable operation of the separator. It is intended to be used for
designing auxiliary equipment and control system for the separator.
2.20.2 References
This Interface Description is one complementary document to the
separator. Other such documents that contain necessary information
and are referred to here are:
 Interconnection Diagram
 Connection List
 Technical Data
 Operating water interface
Standards referred to are:
 EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment,
functional aspects - Principles of design
 EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of unexpected start-up
2.20.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following definitions apply:
 Synchronous speed: The speed the machine will attain when it
is driven by a three-phase squirrel-cage induction motor and there
is no slip in the motor and the drive system.
 Full speed: The synchronous speed minus normal slip.
53
2.20 Interface description 2 Technical Reference
2.20.4 Goal
Information and instructions given in this document aim at preventing
situations such as the following:
Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing system
accumulation in the bowl. which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who accidentally
touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Control and supervision can be more or less comprehensive

depending on the type of used control equipment. When a simple
control unit is used it would be impossible or too expensive to include
many of the functions specified here while these functions could be
included at nearly no extra cost when a more advanced control unit is
used. For this reasons functions that are indispensable or needed for
safety reasons to protect the machine and/or personnel are denoted
with shall while other functions are denoted with should.
2.20.5 Description of separator modes

For control purposes the operation of the separator should be divided
into different modes.
The normally used modes are described below but other modes might
exist.
It is assumed that:
 The separator is correctly assembled.
 All connections are made according to Connection List,
Interconnection Diagram and Interface Description.
 The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the separator is unready for
operation.
54
STAND STILL means:

 The power to the separator motor is off.
 The bowl is not rotating.
STARTING means:
 The power to the separator motor is on.
 The bowl is rotating and accelerating.
RUNNING means:
 The power to the separator motor is on.
 The bowl is rotating at full speed.
 RUNNING is a collective denomination for a number of sub
modes which e.g. can be:
 STAND BY: Separator is in a waiting mode and not producing.
 PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with product and producing.
 CLEANING: Separator is fed with cleaning liquids with the
intention to clean the separator.
STOPPING means:
 The power to the separator motor is either off or used for braking.
 The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
 STOPPING is a collective denomination for a number of sub
modes which e.g. can be:
 NORMAL STOP: A manually or automatically initiated stop.
 SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated stop at to high
vibrations.
 EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated stop at emergency
situations. This stop will be in effect until it is manually reset.
55
2.20.6 Handling of connection interfaces

Electrical connections
701 Separator motor

The separator is equipped with a 3-phase standard motor. The motor
is fed from a frequency converter.
The frequency converter shall have an over speed alarm function that
initiates a NORMAL STOP of the separator if the bowl speed exceeds
“Maximum allowed speed”. It is recommended that the NORMAL
STOP should be performed with the brake applied.
The frequency converter should be equipped in such a way that the
motor could be used for braking by using a DC brake. The braking
current should be adjusted not to exceed the rated current of the
motor.
The frequency converter shall have a system that initiates a NORMAL
STOP of the separator if the frequency goes above the values given in
the Connection list. It is recommended that the NORMAL STOP
should be performed with the brake applied.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit designed according to EN
418 and a power isolation device according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the separator that shall be used
for first start after assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of running hours.
There should be a current transformer to give an analogue signal to
the control unit about the motor current.
56
740 Speed sensor

The separator is equipped with a proximity sensor mounted at the
lower end of the bowl spindle. The spindle is equipped with 2 grooves
giving 2 pulses per revolution.
The sensor is of inductive type according to the DIN 19234 (NAMUR)
standard. When supplied with a rated voltage it gives a current signal
with a size depending of the position of the sensor head is near the
shaft (metal) surface or above the grove (non-metal).
When the sensor is connected to certified switching devices, it may be
used for Ex-applications.
Processing in STARTING:
An alarm shall be given and a NORMAL STOP initiated if a minimum
speed of 1300 r/min has not been reached within 30 seconds. It is
recommended that the NORMAL STOP should be performed with the
brake applied.
Processing in RUNNING:
Normal operation conditions are considered to have been achieved 5
minutes after a start has been initiated. (The 1-minute waiting time is
for the operating water system to obtain stable conditions.)
During normal operation the speed is allowed to vary within the speed
limits specified below:
 When the “Maximum allowed speed” is exceeded an alarm shall
be given initiating a NORMAL STOP. It is recommended that the
NORMAL STOP should be performed with the brake applied.
 When the speed falls below 7540 r/min for a longer period than 1
minute a low speed alarm signal shall be given.
57
752 Position transducer for bearing holder.

For indication of any abnormal unbalance in order to perform
appropriate countermeasures, the separator has been equipped with
a sensor monitoring the radial position of the upper bearing holder.
The analogue inductive sensor gives a current output corresponding
to the distance between the upper bearing holder and the sensor.
In the junction box there is a resistor connected across the current
output that gives a voltage signal to the control system.
The output voltage is direct proportional to the radial position of the
spindle. In normal conditions, i.e. the spindle in centre position, the
output voltage should be 5 volt corresponding to a distance of 3,5 mm.
 When the unbalance signal amplitude (peak to peak) exceeds a
value of 1volt corresponding an unbalance (peak to peak) of 0,3
mm, a warning alarm should be given and the machine should be
stopped manually in order to investigate the reason for the
unbalance.
 When the unbalance signal amplitude (peak to peak) exceeds a
value of 2 volt, corresponding to an unbalance amplitude (peak to
peak) of 0,6 mm, the following actions must be taken:
 Immediate safety stop of the machine including alarm for extreme
unbalance
 Blocking of the discharge system (discharge must not be
performed).
 Keeping the bowl filled.
 When the output signal level exceeds 10 volt a sensor failure
alarm should be given.
58
Fluid connections
Complementary information is given in the document Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:
 Shall be closed.
 Should be closed. Bowl will be open and empty or closed and
filled depending on if start is done from STAND STILL or
STOPPING.
 Could be closed or open.
 Shall be open at discharges.
Processing in CLEANING:
 A sequence of cleaning liquids should be fed to the separator. The
flow rate should be as high as possible and preferably not less
than the production flow rate.
Processing in NORMAL STOP or EMERGENCY STOP:
 Could be closed or open but the bowl should be filled unless the
stop is initiated in STARTING.
Processing in SAFETY STOP:
 Could be closed or open but the bowl shall be filled unless the
stop is initiated in STARTING.
 STARTING.
220 and 222 Outlets

 Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:
 Shall be open.
59

 Could be used at any time but is normally used only in connection
with discharges and in many cases only at discharges in
CLEANING.
 When flushing is used it should not be on continuously but in short
pulses.
 When flushing is used at discharges, a normal procedure is to
make a short flush (e.g. 3 seconds) before the discharge to wet
the surface. Then wait until the discharged material has left the
separator (e.g. 20 seconds) and then make a new flush (e.g. 10
seconds).
 Flushing can be done with water or CIP-liquids.
 Flushing should not be used.
303* Flushing under the bowl

 Could be used at any time but is normally used only in connection
with discharges and in many cases only at discharges in
CLEANING.
 When flushing is used it should not be on continuously but in short
pulses.
 When flushing is used at discharges, a normal procedure is to
make a short flush (e.g. 3 seconds) before the discharge to wet
the surface. Then wait until the discharged material has left the
separator (e.g. 20 seconds) and then make a new flush 
(e.g. 10 seconds).
 Flushing can be done with water or CIP-liquids.
 Flushing should not be used.
* Connection only included when machine top part with axial herm.
seal and flushing is used.
60
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

See ‘‘Operating water interface” on page 26
401** Inlet for cooling

 Shall be closed.
 Shall be open.
 Shall be open in STAND BY mode and should be closed in
PRODUCTION and CLEANING mode.
Processing in STOPPING:
 Shall be open.
** Connection not included in the standard variant.

405*** Inlet for cooling of frame parts
Should be on in all modes except STAND STILL
*** Connection only included in the variant with cooled sludge
channel.
61
2.21 Quality of operating water 2 Technical Reference
2.21 Quality of operating

water
Operating water is used in the separator for several different functions: e.g. to operate the
discharge mechanism, to lubricate and cool mechanical seals.
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion, corrosion and/or operating
problem in the separator and must therefore be treated to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance

1.1 Turbidity free water, solids content <0,001% by volume. Deposits must not be allowed to
form in certain areas in the separator
1.2 Max. particle size 50 m
2. Total hardness less than 180 mg CaCO3 per litre, which corresponds to 10°dH or 12.5°E
Hard water may with time form deposits in the operating mechanism. The precipitation
rate is accelerated with increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe the harder the water is.
3. Chloride content max 100 ppm NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l)

Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the separator surface in contact with the
operating water, including the spindle. Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by
increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/l is not recommended.
4. pH>6
Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the risk for corrosion; this is accelerated by
increased temperature and high chloride ion content.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences
arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.
62
2 Technical Reference 2.22 Electric motor
2.22 Electric motor

E
A
G0692841
C
A. Shaft dimension. C. Drain holes with closable plastic plugs D. 4 holes, Ø19 mm.
B. Knockout openings for according to variant code 066 (IP 55 E. Casted lifting lugs
cable glands on both with open plugs). For vertical mounting on both sides.
sides. IM 3011, the upper plug must be closed
completely.
Manufacturer: ABB motors Type of mounting Degree of

(IEC 34-7) protection
Manufacturers drawing: Cat. BU/Aluminum
(IEC 34-5)
GB 12-2004
Standards: IEC 34-series, 72-1,  
85 IM 3011 IP 55
Size: IEC 160 M

Type: M3AA 160 MA
Weight in cast iron: 73 kg
Poles: 2
Insulation class: F
Method of cooling: IC 411 (IEC 34-6)
Bearings: D-end 6309-2Z/C3
N-end 6209-2Z/C3
Specification: Totally enclosed three-phase standard motor for frequency converter drive 3)
Lubrication: The motor is equipped with permanently lubricated bearings
Vibration level: Balanced with half key, quality grade A according to ICE 34-14 (max. 2,8 mm/s
RMS).
63
2.22 Electric motor 2 Technical Reference
1. 1St/l = starting current / rated current at direct

on line starting.
2. Thermistors tripping temperature according
to variant code 436.
3. Noise level: Mean sound pressure level of 69
dB(A) at 50 Hz and 73 dB(A) at 60 Hz.
Tolerance +3 dB(A) max.
NOTE
For complete information about motor
variants, please contact your Alfa Laval
representative.
64
2 Technical Reference 2.23 Guidelines for frequency converter drives
2.23 Guidelines for

frequency converter
drives
These guidelines are mainly written for the centrifuge and it's corresponding
interface. Some basic requirements are presented for example for control
systems, the electric motor and electrical installation.
FREQUENCY CONVERTER.
For dimensioning and programming of a frequency converter see ‘‘2.24
Dimensioning of a frequency converter’’:
When choosing the rated power for the converter, regard must be paid to the
motor current peaks, which occur during the automatic discharges of centrifuge.
When dimensioning an electrical brake it is essential to be aware of the current of
the motor. The current should not exceed the nominal current for the motor.
The start of the centrifuge shall be carried out using a suitably adjusted
acceleration ramp. The acceleration period is to be chosen with regard to the
moment of inertia of the rotor, and the rated torque of the motor.
The limit of current during start should be below 140 % the rated current for the
motor. The main reasons are heat in the motor and the stress on the
transmission.
If there are adjustable parameters, which set the level for over speed, it is
required, that a password and/or a hardware lock protect the parameter
adjustment function. In order to avoid unintentional altering of the parameter
settings, two separate operations must be performed before parameter
adjustment is enabled. Examples of interlocks are password, hardwiring with
jumpers and disconnecting of control panel.
When the frequency converter will be installed in the process area, the code of
protection of the enclosure shall be at least IP54. When installed in a special
room, an electrical operation area, the enclosure can be of IP20.
The frequency converter is to be set for one direction of rotation only and the
motor connected for correct direction of rotation with the use of this setting. The
direction is to be found on the machine plate.
The possibility of changing the direction of rotation of the motor through
adjustment of the converter should be prevented. It is required that password and/
or a hardware lock protect the parameter adjustment function. In order to avoid
unintentional altering of direction, two separate operations must be performed
before adjustment is enabled. Examples of interlocks are password, hardwiring
with jumpers, disconnecting of the control panel.
65
2.23 Guidelines for frequency converter drives 2 Technical Reference
The frequency converter shall be able to function in such a way that it can 'catch'
a rotating load - 'flying start'. If, for example, the centrifuge has stopped because
of a power supply failure to the factory, and the operator restarts the centrifuge
before it has reached stand still, then the converter must have the capability to
synchronise to the present rotor speed and start from there. The acceleration
should be in accordance with the pre-set acceleration ramp.
It is recommended to choose a frequency converter with the possibility to monitor
the chosen maximum output frequency. If the frequency exceeds the maximum
allowable frequency, and then the converter should stop the centrifuge.
CENTRIFUGE.
The rotor must not exceed 'Maximum allowed speed'. Too high rotor speed or
frequency shall stop the centrifuge with automatically initiated stop. The stop shall
be in effect until it is manually reset.
Maximum allowed speed and if applicable the minimum allowed speed for the
rotor could be found in Technical Data for the centrifuge.
To reduce the hazard for overspeed there shall be two systems for supervision of
the rotor speed, which are independent from each other.
One system can for example, be the supervision system in the VFD and the other
should be the speed supervision of the rotor. When the speed monitoring system
is used as a part of an over speed protection system, it shall be designed in
accordance with EN ISO 13849-1, with continuous checking of the function.
CONTROL SYSTEMS
The control system of the centrifuge should be connected to the frequency
converter so that start and stop of the centrifuge can be initiated from the control
panel. Furthermore, the control system should monitor the rotor speed via a
speed sensor mounted in the centrifuge. The control system should stop the
centrifuge if the speed exceeds or falls below the allowed speed limits, which are
stated in the documentation for the corresponding centrifuge.
The emergency stop should break the power supply to the frequency converter.
The restart should not be possible during safety stop or emergency stop.
The starting sequence for the centrifuge should be interrupted if the speed
supervision system or the frequency supervision system is not in operation.
66
2 Technical Reference 2.23 Guidelines for frequency converter drives
THE ELECTRIC MOTOR

The nominal frequency for the motor has to preferably be chosen as close as
possible to the chosen frequency for the centrifuge. Deviation of more than -20%
is not recommended, as the available motor torque is decreased when operating
below or above the nominal frequency. A closer description is found in ‘‘2.24
Dimensioning of a frequency converter’’.
The motor winding is available with standard or reinforced insulation
strengthening system, which can be combined with du/dt filter and/or insulated
bearings depending on the motor size/type and voltage.
Closer description and choosing criteria can be found in motor and/or frequency
converter documentation.
If a standard motor is used, then it is recommended that the motor is equipped
with thermistors in the stator windings. The tripping temperature for the
thermistors should be the maximum allowable operating temperature for the
corresponding insulation class. CT motors used by Alfa Laval are already
provided with thermistors in the stator windings - these should therefore be
connected to the motor's monitoring equipment when frequency converter drive is
used.
The motor cable should be shielded so that approved suppression of
electromagnetic radiation can be obtained - as required by the EMC directive or
corresponding regulations. The shielding shall be connected to both motor and
frequency converter with special cable glands.
Special countermeasures have to be taken regarding cabling and grounding/
earthing due to the occurrence of bearing currents in the motor. See the motor
manufactures recommendation and installation requirements.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The installation of the frequency converter shall be in accordance with EC-
regulations e.g. EMC Directive. Instructions shall always be supplied together with
a frequency converter.
In order to suppress the emitted electromagnetic radiation a correct cabling
system shall be used. It consists of symmetric shortest possible power cable
equipped with concentric protective copper shield round the phase leads or with
concentric Cu/Al-shield round the three symmetrical conductors for protective
grounding and the phase leads. The correct supplying cable shall be connected
with 360 degrees termination of cable shield at both the motor terminal box end
and converter end with shortest possible earth lead to the earthing bolts (PE-
terminal) in both ends. Thus unsymmetrical cables can be used up to 10 mm 2
cable size and up to 30 kW motor power, shielded cable is always recommended.
To reduce circuit-bound electrical disturbances to the power supply, the converter
shall be supplied with a power supply filter, an RFI-filter.
67
2.23 Guidelines for frequency converter drives 2 Technical Reference
Attention shall be paid to the motor cable's length, so that tripping-out of the
converter because of excessive currents, as well as impaired properties of power
supply filter can be avoided. In doubtful cases, the converter's manufacturer
should be consulted regarding maximum allowable cable length.
The signal outputs and the control connections of the converter shall conform to
the requirements for immunity to electromagnetic disturbances as stated in the
EMC directive or corresponding regulations.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.

IT IS OF OUTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT THE CENTRIFUGE IS SO DESIGNED
AND SAFEGUARDED THAT THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPEED FOR THE
ROTOR NEVER WILL BE EXCEEDED. OVER SPEED CAN RESULT IN
EJECTION OF PARTS. SAFETY-RELATED PARTS SHOULD BE DESIGNED
WITH REFERENCE TO EN ISO 13849-1.
68
2 Technical Reference 2.24 Dimensioning of a frequency converter
2.24 Dimensioning of a
frequency converter
2.24.1 Dimensioning and

programming of a frequency
converter
Basic requirements for a frequency converter:

 Select correct frequency converter for mains supply voltage and
frequency.
 Select the frequency converter power according to the initial conditions
and the specified motor. Check that the converter's rated output current is
similar or higher than the motors nominal rated current.
 The frequency converter's capability to produce the maximum required
current and power (typically during discharge sequences) has to be
checked, use values given for "heavy duty" use in manufacturer's
catalogue
 When controlled braking is required, select the frequency converter with
braking functionality, as described in ‘‘2.24.5 Braking methods” on page
74
 Only frequency converter fulfilling requirements in IEC 61508 part
1"Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems ", EN 60204-1 "Safety of machinery - Electrical
equipment of machines" and EN 61800-3 "EMC Directive" shall be
chosen.
For safety precautions of a variable frequency drive see ‘‘2.23 Guidelines for
frequency converter drives” on page 65
2.24.2 Selecting the motor with correct voltage and

frequency for a variable frequency drive
If the motor with correct voltage and frequency is not already selected or there are
several motor alternatives to choose between, the following control calculations
for the continuous loadability of the motor should be made, otherwise continue to
‘‘2.24.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter for an actual application” on page
72".
69
2.24 Dimensioning of a frequency converter 2 Technical Reference
Controlling the loadability of the motor at actual frequency drive

Example:
Power consumption at maximum capacity, found in Technical Data = 35 kW.
There are 2 motors available in centrifuge specification, 37 kW / 400 V / 50 Hz
and 42 kW / 400 V / 60 Hz, both fulfilling the above power requirement, control
calculation for motor torque has to be made.
The motor with nominal frequency as close as possible to the actual drive
frequency should preferably be chosen.
Set frequency according to Technical Data = 70 Hz, gives motor relative speed =
70 Hz / 50 Hz = 1,4 for 50 Hz's motor and 70 Hz / 60 Hz ~ 1,2 for 60 Hz's motor.
When validating these relative speeds 1,4 and 1,2 in motor loadability curve (see
‘‘ Loadability curve for an electric motor in a frequency converter drive” on page
71), it can be seen that 60 Hz's motor is better alternative with higher T / Tn factor,
giving ~ 83 % of Tn with 70 Hz set frequency.
Motor with 42 kW / 400 V / 60 Hz is therefore selected.

The motor torque can be calculated from speed and mechanical (output) power:
T=P/
T = torque (Nm)
P = power (W)
 = motor speed (rad/s)
The motor speed is put in the formula in rpm´s instead of rad/s:
= n x (2 x  / 60)
n = actual motor speed (rpm) = relative speed factor x nominal speed
T = P /  = P x 60 / n x 2 x 
Continuously needed motor torque at maximum capacity = 35000 x 60 / 1,2 x
1780 x 2 x  = 156 Nm
During discharges needed motor torque = 70000*) x 60 / 1,2 x 1780 x 2 x  = 313
Nm
70
*) If values for maximum current or power during discharges are not known,
multiply value for power consumption at maximum capacity by factor 2 
estimated power consumption during discharges = 35 kW x 2 = 70 kW = 70000 W
Controlling continuous available motor torque at 70 Hz = (42000 x 60 / 1780 x 2 x
) x 83 % = 188 Nm
Controlling maximum available motor torque at 70 Hz = 188 x 2,5**) = 470 Nm
**) 2,5 is a factor for the relationship between maximum and nominal motor
torque, Tmax/Tn, as found in motor catalogue.
Both values are higher than in centrifuge operation needed torque values.
The motor is correct for the application.
Loadability curve for an electric motor in a

frequency converter drive
T / Tn 120%
110%
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0
A
G0962371
A. Relative speed
T/Tn = Available/nominal motor torque.

Relative speed = Actual drive frequency/motor
nominal frequency
71
2.24.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter for an actual

application
Frequency converter shall be dimensioned regarding to maximum needed power
and current, overload capacity,
which usually occurs during discharge sequences for a centrifuge
The relation between the nominal and the actual motor current in field weakening
range (above the motors nominal frequency / speed) can approximately be
calculated by:
m (P load / P n) x n

I m = actual motor current (A)
P load = actual needed power by driven machine during discharges (W) *)
P n = motor's nominal power (W)
I n = motor's nominal current (A)
*) If values for maximum current or power are not known, multiply value for power
consumption at maximum capacity by factor 2  estimated power
consumption during discharges = 35 kW x 2 = 70 kW = 70000 W
Maximum needed output current (actual motor current during discharges) from
the frequency converter
(70000/ 42000) x 78 = 130 A
The frequency converter with capability for this current shall be chosen.
This current is called for maximum monitored output current, short-term overload
current or peak current, and it is usually limited to 150 % of nominal output
current.
This current is usually limited for a short time only periodically (ex. 1 minute every
5 minutes or 2 seconds every 15 seconds), which should be taking in
consideration when deciding discharge intervals and speed regaining time after
discharge.
Speed regaining time can also be prolonged by converter's maximum output
power, normally limited to 150 % of converter's nominal output power.
Control the frequency converter's nominal output current, it should be similar or
higher than the motors nominal current, in this case, at least 78 A.
72
Values to be used when selecting the converter:

Nominal output current 78 A
Overload current (short time) 130 A
These values, when looking into manufacturer's catalogues, should give a
converter for heavy-duty use of 45 kW.
2.24.4 Programming the frequency converter

Since parameter setup and programming interface are different from
manufacturer to another, detailed instructions cannot be given here, only the most
important programmable parameters for starting-up and running the centrifuge
will be explained!
See frequency converter instruction for use for detailed information!
 Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate, including nominal power,
voltage, current, speed, frequency and eventually power factor (cosinus
).
 Optionally and if available, select motor identification run for fine
adjustment of the motor data, choose between standard/extended or
reduced. NOTE! During standard/extended identification run the motor
will rotate and has to be off-loaded from the centrifuge!
 If available, select the torque control mode (variable or pump/fan
characteristics) for controlling of the motor.
 Check and, if necessary, change the direction of rotation of the motor
 Set the minimum motor speed or frequency, should be 0 rpm or 0 Hz
respectively
 Set the actual motor speed or set frequency, values given in Technical
Data
It is of utmost importance that this setting has to be checked. a faulty frequency
setting can lead to overspeeding, which might cause hazards.
 Set the start time, value given in ‘‘2.2 Technical data” on page 19 or
73
2.24.5 Braking methods
Motor flux braking:

NOTE! Not to be used in explosive atmospheres!
Flux braking is a method based on motor losses. When braking in the drive
system is needed, the motor flux and thus also the magnetizing current
component used in the motor are increased. The control of flux can be easily
achieved through the direct torque control principle (DTC). With DTC the inverter
is directly controlled to achieve the desired torque and flux for the motor. During
flux braking the motor is under DTC control which guarantees that braking can be
made according to the specified speed ramp.
The flux braking method based on DTC enables the motor to shift quickly from
braking to motoring power when requested.
In flux braking the increased current means increased losses inside the motor.
The braking power is therefore also increased although the braking power
delivered to the frequency converter is not increased. The increased current
generates increased losses in motor resistances. Typically, in low power motors
(below 5 kW) the resistance value of the motor is relatively large in respect to the
nominal current of the motor. The higher the power or the voltage of the motor, the
less the resistance value of the motor in respect to motor current. In other words,
flux braking is most effective in a low power motor.
A
Rated motor power 120
1 2,2 kW 1 B
80
2 16 kW
40
3 37 kW 2
4 3 f (Hz)
0 5
4 75 kW 5 10 20 30 40 50
120
5 250 kW
1 C
80
2
40 3
4
f (Hz)
G0962381
5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
Percentage of motor braking torque of rated torque as
a function of output frequency.
A. Braking torque (%)

B. No flux braking
C. Flux braking
74
The main benefits of flux braking are:

 No extra components are needed and no extra cost, using DTC control
method.
 The motor is controlled during braking.
The main drawbacks of flux braking are:
 Increased thermal stress on the motor if braking is repeated over short
periods.
 Braking power is limited by the motor characteristics e.g. resistance value.
 Flux braking is useful mainly in low power motors.
2.24.6 Brake chopper and braking resistor

The braking chopper is an electrical switch that connects the DC bus voltage to a
resistor, where the braking energy is converted to heat. During deceleration, the
motor changes to generator operation and supplies energy back through the
inverter. As brake energy cannot be fed back to the supply via the normal diode
bridge, the brake chopper will turn on at a certain level and feed energy out via the
brake resistor. Here, the energy is converted to heat and wasted, unless a
separate heat recovery system is installed; additional ventilation for the room may
be required.
The main benefits of the braking chopper and resistor are:

 Simple electrical construction and well-known technology.
 Low fundamental investment for chopper and resistor.
 The chopper works even if AC supply is lost.
The main drawbacks of the braking chopper and resistor are:
 The braking energy is wasted if the heated air cannot be utilized.
 The braking chopper and resistors require additional space.
 May require extra investments in the cooling and heat recovery system.
 Braking choppers are typically dimensioned for a certain cycle, e.g. 100 %
power 1/10 minutes, longer braking times. require more accurate
dimensioning of the braking chopper.
75
2.24.7 DC braking
NOTE! Not to be used in explosive atmospheres!
DC braking can be performed with or without a frequency converter. With a
frequency converter, a stop command makes the frequency converter switch to
supplying the motor with direct current, developing a braking torque. Same effect
can also be achieved using the DC brake unit, for dimensioning of the unit see
‘‘2.25 Calculation of DC-brake unit” on page 77
The main drawbacks of the DC injection braking are:
 The motor flux control is lost during braking, e.g. no control of adjusted
braking time.
 Heat losses in the motor.
2.24.8 Regenerative drive - IGBT solution braking:

The IGBT based regeneration is based on the same principles as power
transmission within a power network. It has a low amount of supply current
harmonics in both, motoring and regeneration, as well as high dynamics during
fast power flow changes on the load side. It also offers the possibility to boost the
DC voltage higher than the respective incoming AC supply. This can be used to
compensate for a weak network or increase the motor's maximum torque capacity
in the field weakening area.
The main benefits of the IGTB solution braking are:
 Stable torque even if net voltage is unstable.
 Nominal torque available even in the field weakening area.
 Fast and smooth operation in motoring-regenerating-motoring transition.
The main drawbacks of the IGTB solution drive are:
 Higher investment cost, up to 2 times of a standard frequency converter cost.
 The braking capability is not available during power supply failure.
76
2 Technical Reference 2.25 Calculation of DC-brake unit
2.25 Calculation of DC-

brake unit
The nominal brake current (DC-current) of the brake unit shall be the same
as the rated motor current. Rated motor current is taken from the motor
drawing or the motor name plate. The DC-brake voltage, USD, is then
calculated according to the formula:
USD= IDC x 2 x Rf x 1,22 (V) where
IDC = DC-current (A) (= rated motor current)
Rf = phase resistance of the motor winding, (), see ‘‘Electric motor”
on page 63
1,22 = factor for hot motor winding (75 °C)
2 = two phase windings connected in series.
The nominal RMS-value, UAC, of the DC-brake transformer secondary
voltage is then calculated by means of the formula:
UAC= (USD + 2) x 1,17 (V) where 1,17=factor for transforming DC-voltage
into AC-voltage and for a compensation of 5% voltage drop in the
transformer winding.
The formula takes into consideration that the voltage drop is 2V in the diode
rectifier bridge.
The DC-brake transformer is equipped with different secondary voltage
tappings, making it possible to adjust the braking current, IDC.
At least following secondary tappings are needed:
 one tapping for calculated nominal UAC,
 one tapping with a step of 0,90 times calculated UAC, and
 two tappings with steps of 1,10 and 1,20 times calculated UAC
respectively.
Needed transformer power, PTR, is then calculated by means of following
formula:
PTR= UAC x IDC x 0,9 (VA) where 0,9=factor for transforming IDC into AC-
current and taking into consideration that the duty type is intermittent.
A suitable diode rectifier bridge is chosen according to following rules:
Maximum peak reverse voltage of the diodes at least 5 times maximum UAC
with respect to voltage transients and maximum RMS forward current 1,5
times IDC.
77
2.26 Interconnection diagram 2 Technical Reference
2.26 Interconnection
diagram
G0790921
A = Optional equipment
Junction box
9
740 Speed sensor (bowl speed)
752 Unbalance sensor
Wire colour codes

BK = Black
BN = Brown
BU = Blue
SHI. = Shield
78
2 Technical Reference 2.26 Interconnection diagram
79
2.27 Unbalance sensor kit (optional) 2 Technical Reference
2.27 Unbalance sensor kit

(optional)
2 1
G0156441
3
1. Unbalance sensor
2. O-ring
3. Lead-through bushing
80
2 Technical Reference 2.27 Unbalance sensor kit (optional)
B
A
G0156451
A. Item (A).
B. Note: 1) Item (A) to be cut at site before
mounting.
C. Separator frame.
Note: 2) Item (A) to be installed into cable gland

before final installation onto the separator.
81
2.27 Unbalance sensor kit (optional) 2 Technical Reference
2.27.1 Unbalance sensor

G01564C1
B C D
A. -L ±0,5 checking dimension

B. Refers to 547865-80 L = 41,5
C. Refers to 547865-81 L = 41,5
D. Refers to 547865-82 L = 42
See Service & Maintenance Manual for

"Unbalance Sensor and junction box".
82
2 Technical Reference 2.28 Speed sensor kit
2.28 Speed sensor kit

Alfa Laval ref. 553663, rev.0
G01564A1
1. Speed transmitter.
2. Countersunk cap screw.
See Service & Maintenance Manual for "Speed
Sensor and junction box".
83
2.28 Speed sensor kit 2 Technical Reference
B
A
G0156471
A. Item (A).
B. Note: 1) Item (A) to be cut at site before
mounting.
C. Separator frame.
D. Junction box.
Note: 2) Item (A) to be installed into cable gland

before final installation onto the separator.
Sensor and junction box".
84
2.28.1 Speed transmitter, complete

1
3 4
G01564D1
1. Holder
2. Inductive sensor
3. Cable clamp
4. Screw

Sensor" for fitting.
85
2.28.2 Inductive sensor

G1034711
A. Cable
L= 10 m (552042-01)
L= 2 m (552042-02)
B. V1 connector/M12 (552042-03)
86
2.28.3 Inductive analogue sensor

B
A
M18x1
C
4 D
60 E
F
H G
30
+ (UB ) (Brown)
28 J (Black)
J RL
26 0V (Blue)
24
22
20 L N
18 1200
16
14 1000
12
10
8
500 P
6
4
2
I M G06361I1
2 4 6 8 15 20 25 30
K
O
Output signal as a function of distance for a mild steel object. Example:

Example resistance RL copper gives 20 mA at
In order to keep the power dissipation down in the sensor, the 0.4 x 5 = 2 mm distance.
external load should be chosen according to diagram.
A. Marking: IA 5 - 18GM 13 F. Copper area: 0,5 mm 2 L. RL (ohm)

B. SW 24 G. Symbol M. UB (V)
C. Cable length: 2 m H. Output current I (mA) N. Non-usable or 00
D. Cable diameter: 6 m I. Speed distance (mm) O. Non-advisable operation or 00
E. Colour: gray K. Operating range P. Ideal area (-10°C to +70°C)
87
Electrical data:
Supply voltage UB: 15 - 30 VDC
Current consumption output current within: 38 mA
operating rand: 0 - 20 mA
Load resistance, RL: 0 - 500 ohm (See figure!)
Protection class (DIN 40 050) IP 67
Polarity reversal protection between + and -
Short circuit proof to ground
Mechanical data:
Material:
 Housing brass, nickel plated
 Sensing face PBTP (polybutyleneterephthalate)
 Cable PVC
Sensing range (mild steel object) 2 - 5 mm

Zero tolerance ± 2%
Linearity ± 3%
Operating temperature -10 °C to +70 °C
Temperature drift coefficient 1% / °C
Cut-off frequency (3dB) approx. 190 Hz
Permissible shock and vibration b 30 g,T 11ms
stresses (IEC 68-2-6 and IEC 68-2-27) f 55 Hz, a 1mm
Correction factors for reference Sensing range

output sensing distance: [mm]
 Mild steel (St 37) 1.00 2-5
 Stainless steel (DIN 1.4301) 0.75 1.5 - 3.75
 Brass (DIN 17660) 0.50 1-2.5
 Aluminium (VSM 10905) 0.40 0.8 - 2
 Copper (DIN 1787) 0.40 0.8-2
88
2 Technical Reference 2.29 Lifting instructions
2.29 Lifting instructions
2.29.1 Separator
Before lifting the separator, remove the following

parts in the stated order below.
1. In- and outlet device.
2. Frame hood.
3. Bowl.
Attach three endless slings or cables to the lifting
eye bolts (the bolts must be tightened with
spanner) and then to the hook of the hoist or
crane.
S0078111
Length of each sling must be min. 2 metres in

circumference (A = min 1 metre, see the
illustration).
NOTE
Machine weight without frame hood and bowl
is approx. 530 kg.
Do not lift the separator unless the frame hood

and bowl have been removed.
WARNING
Crush hazards
G0141581
Use only the three special lifting eye bolts

for lifting the machine. Lift the separator with the frame hood and bowl
removed. Use three adjustable slings or cables.
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury to persons and
A = Min. 1 metre
damage to equipment.
89
2.29 Lifting instructions 2 Technical Reference
2.29.2 Bowl
This instruction describes how to lift a complete
bowl, which normally is done only during a
transport of the separator.
When lifting the bowl, use the special lifting tool
fastened on the bowl hood.
A
NOTE
Check that the lock ring is properly tightened.
The height of the lock ring above the bowl
G0544691
body must not exceed 18 mm, see
illustration.
The lock ring must be properly tightened when lifting
Weight to lift is approx. 150 kg. the bowl
The above described lifting procedure of the A = maximum 18 mm

bowl should be used only for a complete
bowl not fitted in the separator frame.
When lifting the bowl out of the separator
frame, the cap nut fixing the bowl to the bowl
spindle must first be removed. For correct
dismantling procedure, see chapter
Dismantling/Assembly in the Service &
Maintenance Manual.
2.29.3 Other parts

The frame hood and the heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the hoist
exactly above the bowl centre. Us endless lifting
straps and a lifting hook with safety catch.
Special tools from the tool kit must be used for
dismantling and assembly. The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue and are
shown as illustrations together with the
dismantling/assembly instructions.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight
specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
90
2 Technical Reference 2.30 Storage and installation
2.30 Storage and

installation
2.30.1 Storage and transport of

goods
Storage upon arrival

Specification
Upon arrival to the store, check all components
and keep them:
1. Well stored and protected from mechanical
damage.
2. Dry an protected from rain and humidity
3. Organized in the store in such a way that the
goods will be easily accessible when
installation is about to take place.
Storage at standstill
If the separator is not used for one week or
longer:
1. Lift out the bowl.
2. Keep the separator and bowl well stored and
protected from mechanical damage and theft.
3. Keep the separator and bowl dry an protected
from rain and humidity
4. Perform a Major Service.
5. Change the oil before starting.
6. Release the belt tension.
91
2.30 Storage and installation 2 Technical Reference
A separator can be delivered with different types

of protection:
 Fixed on a pallet.
The separator must be stored in a storage
room and protected as per paragraphs 1 and
2 above.
S0020121
 In a wooden box which is not water tight.
The separator must be stored as per
paragraph 2 above.
S0020221
 In a special water-resistant box for outdoor
storage.
The separator and its parts have been treated
with an anti-corrosion agent. Once the box
has been opened, store as per paragraph 2
above.
The packaging for outdoor storage is only to
special order.
S0020321
92
Transport
Specification
 During transport of the separator, the frame
hood and bowl must always be removed
from the machine.
 When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See chapter ‘‘Lifting
instructions” on page 89.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
 During erection, all inlets and outlets to

separators and accessories must be covered
to be protected from dirt and dust.
2.30.2 Planning and installation
Introduction
The space required for one or more separators
can be calculated by consulting the dimension
drawing in this chapter and instructions for
ancillary equipment, electrical and electronic
equipment and cables. G0020611
93
Important measurements
Important measurements are the minimum lifting
height for lifting tackle, shortest distance between
driving motor and wall, free passage for
dismantling and assembly, maintenance and
operation.
Plan your installation with sufficient room for the
controls and operation so that instruments are
easily visible. Valves and controls must be within
convenient reach. Pay attention to space
requirements for maintenance work, work
benches, dismantled machine parts or for a
service trolley.
Space for separator

The separator shall be placed in such a way that
suitable space for maintenance and repair is
G0629321
obtained.
Specification
 See the dimensioned drawing in chapter
‘‘2.22 Electric motor” on page 63 for the
service space required with the separator
installed.
Recommendation
 The spanner for the large lock ring should
have sufficient space to make a complete turn
without touching any of the ancillary
equipment surrounding the separator.
Lifting height for transport of bowl

Specification
 A minimum height is required to lift the bowl,
bowl parts and the bowl spindle, see the
dimensioned drawing in chapter ‘‘2.22
Electric motor” on page 63.
Recommendation
 When two or more separators are installed,
the lifting height may have to be increased to
enable parts from one separator to be lifted
and moved over an adjoining assembled
separator.
94
Space for oil changing

Specification
The oil filling device must not be blocked by floor
plate arrangement, etc.
Recommendation
 It should be possible to place a portable
collecting tray under the oil filling device for
changing oil.
G0155511
95
2.30.3 Foundations
NOTE
When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See the separate instruction
in chapter ‘‘Lifting instructions” on page 89.
Specification
 The separator should be installed at floor
level, see the dimensioned drawing on ‘‘2.7
Basic size drawing, standard” on page 27 or
‘‘2.8 Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal”
on page 29.
 The separator must be installed on a strong
and rigid foundation to reduce the influence of
vibrations from adjacent machinery.
 Fit the separator frame on the foundation as
follows:
 Check that the bolts do not press against
the edges of the holes, otherwise the
elasticity of the mounting of the separator
frame will be impeded.
 Fit height adjusting washers required.
 Check that the separator frame is
horizontal and that all feet rest on the
foundation.
 Tighten the screws.
96
Reader’s Comment Form
Dear reader,
It is our ambition to produce as useful and instructive manuals as possible. Should you have any
comments (positive or negative) regarding this manual, please note them down and send them to
us. You can do this by copying this page and sending it by fax, or you could mail it, or hand it over
to your local Alfa Laval representative.
Alfa Laval Tumba AB, Separator Manuals, dept. PPDM, SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden. 
Fax: +46 8 530 310 40.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Product: VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS Book No.: 598886-02 Rev. 3
Date:
Yes No
Is it easy to find what you are looking for by using the table of contents? ❒ ❒
Are the chapter and section headings clear and adequate? ❒ ❒
Is the information presented in the correct order for your purposes? ❒ ❒
Does the information in the manual cover your needs? ❒ ❒
Is it easy to understand the instructions in the manual? ❒ ❒
Is the terminology sufficiently explained? ❒ ❒
Are the illustrations easy to understand? ❒ ❒
Your comments:












97
98
Order Form
If you wish to order extra copies of this manual, please copy this page and give it to your local
Alfa Laval representative, who will advise you of current prices.
Your local Alfa Laval representative will also be able to help you with information regarding any
other manuals.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Quantity: Date:
Comments:




















99
100
INDEX
A Frequency converter 65
Allowed speed 19 I
Application 17
In- and outlet device, performance data 24
B Interconnection diagram 78
Interface description 53
Basic size drawing
Axial hermetic seal 29, 31, 35, 37 L
Standard 27
Bowl sealing diagrams 21 Lifting instructions 89
Lubricating oil volume 19
C
M
Connection list
Axial hermetic seal 43 Maintenance, general information
Standard 45 Lifting instructions 89
Connections Motor
Dimensions 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42 Data 19, 63
Drawing 63
D Frequency converter drive 65
Power consumption 19
Drawings
Basic size drawing, axial herm. seal, cyclone 35 N
Basic size drawing, axial hermetic seal 29
Basic size drawing, separator 31 Noise 19
Basic size drawing, separator, cyclone 37
Basic size drawing, standard 27 O
Basic size drawing, standard, cyclone 31
Electric motor 63 Operating water
Foundation drawing 51 Interface 26
Interconnection diagram 78 Quality requirements 62
Lifting instructions 89 Operational limits 17
E P
Electric motor. See Motor Performance data for in- and outlet device 24
Planning and installation 93
F Power consumption 19, 26
Foundation R
Drawing 51
Installation 96 Revolution
Frame feet Number of revolutions 19
Installation 96
Tightening torque 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 41
101
S
Safety Instructions 9
Starting time 19
Stopping time 19
Storage and installation 91
T
Technical data 19
Tightening torques
Frame feet 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 41
V
Vibration level 19
W
Warning signs 14
Weight of motor 19
Weights 19
102
7. Operating & Maintenance manuals
7.1. Operator manual - 140006 - R08

7.2. Operator’s manual - 598887-02 - R0
7.3. Service & Maintenance manual - 598889-02 - R01

Clara 80 & Clara 80S, HF Cooled
version
High-performance clarification system
for wine, coffee, tea, fruit juice and other beverages.
Operator manual
Doc No: 140006

Rev: 08
Rev date: 23 June 2015
Revd. by: INPAGPT
Checked by: INPAGATA
Approved by: INPAKHN
Valid for software: Clara 80 V 1.08
Published by: Alfa Laval Support Services Pvt Ltd

Engineering & Supply
© Copyright Alfa Laval Support Services India

Contents
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 SCOPE OF THIS BOOK ............................................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 SAFETY INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................................... 7
2 THE CONTROL EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................ 9
2.1 THE CONTROL/STARTER UNIT ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.1 The operator panel...................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Settings menus........................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 The frequency converter for the separator motor ..................................................................................... 14
2.2 THE FLOW METER OPERATOR PANEL ................................................................................................................... 15
3 ALARM MANAGEMENT................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 ALARM ACTIVATION DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................................... 17
4 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 19
4.1 SUBSEQUENCES ................................................................................................................................................... 22
5 OPERATING ROUTINE ..................................................................................................................................... 24
5.1 POWER ON/STAND STILL ............................................................................................................................. 25
5.2 START ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.3 STAND BY ........................................................................................................................................................ 26
5.4 PRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 26
5.5 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................................................... 27
5.6 NORMAL STOP ................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.7 EMERGENCY STOP......................................................................................................................................... 28
6 APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................................................ 29
A: LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 29
B: FLOW CHART AND CONNECTION LIST ................................................................................................. 30
C: DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS & INSTRUMENT COMPONENTS ......................................................... 31
D: PARAMETER TABLE .................................................................................................................................... 32
E: ACTIVATION DIAGRAM.............................................................................................................................. 34
F: FLOW METER PARAMETER SETTINGS ................................................................................................. 35
G: VFD PARAMETER SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................... 36
H: MODBUS TCP ADDRESSES FOR REMOTE CONTROL ......................................................................... 38
I: PASSWORDS.................................................................................................................................................... 42
Operator Manual Clara 80, 140006, page 2

1 Introduction
Important! Read the “Safety Information” before

you put the
separation module into service!
Important! All aqueous liquids must be drained off

carefully from all parts of the system if there is risk
for freezing!
1.1 Scope of this book

These Installation and Operating Instructions are designed as a key to the
separation module Clara 80.
Here you will find:
a description of the entire system including flow chart,
operator communication and alarm handling
operating routine which is organized according to the
system’s different operating conditions and can be used as
running instruction directly at the machine
parameter tables and other comprehensive system
information
general aspects on safety, transport and installation
The Operating Instructions should enable you to run the system safely and
efficiently, and help you to manage faults.
The Operation Instructions cover three slightly different separator types,
which are clarifiers with belt drive and timer controlled discharge:
Clara 80 with product outlet paring disk.
Clara 80S with hermetic seal above the product outlet paring disk.
Clara 80S CIP with hermetic seal above the product outlet paring disk.
If not especially mentioned in the instructions, the operation of the two
machine types is identical.
For general information about the separator, please consult the Instruction
book for the machine.
Note: We assume that you ask your Alfa Laval representative to install and
start-up the separation system, if you are in any way uncertain how to do
that. The Alfa Laval service engineer will also provide training of your
personnel concerning operation and regular maintenance.

This system is designed for the duty specified by the ‘Instruction Book’
of the corresponding separator.
This system must NOT be used for any other duty!
This system must NOT be used in potentially explosive atmospheres!
1.2 Safety information
In addition to the safety instructions stated in the ‘Instruction Book’ of the

corresponding separator, the following safety instructions apply:
• Ensure power is off before installation, inspection, assembling and

disassembling.
• Follow local regulations for electrical installation and grounding.
• All electrical installation work must be done by authorized personnel.
• Never work on electrical equipment with the main power supply on.
• Connect modules and units to earth in accordance with local
regulations and if suitable.
• For inspection and maintenance of the separator or any other

component: strictly follow the corresponding technical
documentation.
• Ensure all lines (product, air, and water) are de-pressurized and
emptied before installation, inspection, assembling and
disassembling.
• Never work on mechanical equipment such as valves or pumps with

the electric power or instrument air supply on.
• If the local safety regulations prescribe that the installation has to be

inspected and approved by responsible authorities before the
separation system is put into service, consult with such authorities
before installing the equipment and have the projected installation
approved by them.
• Parts of the equipment coming in contact with hot process liquid can
cause grave burns if touched. Be careful when working near pipes,
valves and the separator.

• For lifting and installation of the system, follow the instructions in this
manual (appendix A).
• For lifting and installation of the separator, please see the instructions
in the documentation of the corresponding separator.
• When installing, assembling, disassembling and inspecting the

machine, following protection must be worn: safety shoes, safety
glasses, safety hand gloves.
• When operating the machine, following protection must be worn:
safety shoes, safety glasses, ear protection.
• Liquids or vapors may emerge from ventilation outlets of the

separation system. Install the outlets in such a way that personnel or
environment could not be harmed. Make sure that the outlets are not
blocked and that the condensate can drain away.
• Sharp edges can cause cuts.
• If the separator begins to vibrate excessively during operation, stop

it immediately by pushing the emergency stop button. Evacuate the
room. The separator should be stopped with flow through the
process lines. This to ensure better balance of the bowl in case of
uneven solids built-up. Valve V340-1 should be opened, but only if
this can be done in a quick and safe way.
The separator may be hazardous when passing its critical speeds

during the run-down.
After a safety stop the cause of the fault must be identified. If all
parts have been checked and the cause remains unclear, contact
Alfa Laval for advice.
• Do not discharge an excessive vibrating separator. Out-of-balance

vibration can become worse if only part of the sediment is
discharged. Proceed as described above.
• NEVER operate a separator unless it is properly mounted•
• NEVER neglect an alarm. Find out what caused the alarm and
remedy it before the alarm is reset.

• Before introducing the process liquid, check that the discharge
interval time is set at a suitable rate and the discharge volume, if
adjustable, is set at a suitable size.
• Operating time between discharges has a maximum limit

determined by the compacting of the solids and a minimum limit for
mechanical reasons or motor overload.
• ALWAYS stop the separator with the bowl full of liquid.
• NEVER feed any liquid to a stationary bowl.

1.3 System description
The flow chart (see appendix B) shows the separation system which is
designed for clarification of beverages.
The system consists of the following main parts:
Separator The separator is a high speed separator with a solids discharge mechanism,
discharging a part of the bowl content at certain intervals from the periphery
of the bowl through the solids outlet.
The separator has a feed inlet and a clarified liquid outlet.
The separator has an inlet for discharge and bowl closing (operating) water
and an inlet for flushing/sealing water. There is also an outlet to drain.
The separator is equipped with speed sensor and vibration sensor (option).
Process and service The process liquid components are used for flow control through the
liquid components separator. There is a process liquid inlet (201) with an automatic feed valve
and an optional feed pump.
There is also an outlet for the clarified liquid (220). The product flow rate is
supervised.
The service liquid components supply water for operating, sealing/cooling

(80S-machine) and flushing (80-machine) of the separator.
PS 300-3, Pressure switch is in operating line to make sure the required
pressure for discharge.
The solids coming from the solids outlet of the separator can be handled by
a solids pump, which is available as an option.
Electric system The electric system consists of the control/starter unit with frequency
converter for the separator motor.
The EPC 60 control unit controls and supervises the complete system and
gives alarms and actions if anything goes wrong.
The supervision includes the following:

• Separator motor and VFD
• Vibration level (option)
• Product flow
• Water pump
• Feed and solids pumps (option)
• Separator bowl speed
• Discharge performance
The operator communicates with the separation system through

pushbuttons, messages and indicators on the control equipment. The control
program has been divided into different well defined operation modes (e.g.
STAND BY, PRODUCTION or CLEANING).

See chapter for a description of
2 control system and operator interface
3 alarm handling
4 operating conditions
5 operating routine
See also appendix C for a description of process and instrument components

in the flow chart.

2 The control equipment
In the following sections the operator interface and the control and
supervision functions of the system are described.
2.1 The control/starter unit

The control/starter cabinet contains the PLC, relays, circuit breakers,
contactors for pumps and separator motor, and the VFD.
The control panel contains the main switch, an emergency stop button and
the EPC 60 operator panel.
2.1.1 The operator panel
The EPC 60 operator panel is shown in the following figure:
The operator panel consists of:

• Alfanumeric display and numeric keyboard with
<enter> button
• four special keys <arrow up> , <arrow down> ,
<escape> and <information>

• Ten information Led’s and seven function buttons
upper row from left: Start, separator motor running indication,
Standby indication, Production/Standby toggle, Cleaning/Standby
toggle
lower row from left: Stop, Stand still indication, Alarm, Sludge pump,
Discharge
Scroll between three different pages using the <escape> key:
Main page The main page, together with the function buttons and LED indicators, is
used for process control. This page is automatically reached after power on.
Scroll between operation info and process values using the arrow keys. See
chapter 4. And 5. For detailed information about display and use of function
buttons for different operation modes.
Settings page Nine different menus are available. Scroll with the arrow keys, and enter the
selected menu, which is flashing, with the <enter> key of the numeric
keyboard.
See section 2.1.2. For a detailed description of the settings menus.
Alarm page This page contains information about any active alarms in the system. The
list of active alarms can be scrolled using the arrow keys. See chapter 3. For
detailed information about alarm handling and the supervised functions in
the system.
Note: The alarm history is found. “in menu 5 alarm history

2.1.2 Settings menus
Nine different menus are available on the settings page:

1 Parameters
5 Time settings
5 Operation info
5 I/O test
5 Alarm History
6 Discharge History
7 System info
8 IP Settings
9 Password/Login
Select using the arrow keys, and enter using the <enter> key.
Parameters On entering 1 Parameters, a list of available parameters (depends on

password level) is displayed.
One parameter/row: P### Description
See also the parameter table with all parameters and their protection levels
in appendix D. Password handling see below in this section.
Use the arrow keys to select a parameter. Or type the parameter number on
the numeric keyboard and press <enter>.
Press the <info> key to see a more detailed description for the selected
parameter, if available. After 4 seconds you will return automatically to
previous page or exit the information page by pressing the <info> key
again.
Press <enter> to view/adjust the settings of the selected parameter.
If the parameter has a numerical value:

P### ##### [unit]
Max: ###
Min: ###
New: ### [unit]
”New” is flashing; type the new value and press <enter>.
If the parameter has different alternatives:

P### <current alt.>
New <first alt.> flashing

Setting <second alt.>
Select with the arrow keys and press <enter> .
Press <escape> to return to the main menu. Changed value become
active after pressing <escape>.
Time settings On entering 2 Time settings, the following menu appears:

____ SET _ TIME ____
Year: #### Hour: ##
Month: ## Min: ##
Day: #
Adjust the value where the cursor > is located.

Press <enter> to acknowledge and step to the next input field.
Exit using the <escape> key.
Operation info 5 Operation info consists of two parts:

1 Timers, counters
5 Reset op info
Select and enter 1 to inspect e.g. the accumulated number of discharges and
separator running time, the actual and maximum CPU temperature, or the
number of hours which the CPU has been above 65 °C.
Select and enter 2 to reset these timers and counters. This is only possible on
password level 2.
Select “Yes” with the arrow keys and press <enter> .
I/O test Via this menu, the status of all outputs and inputs in the system can be
inspected at any time.
The outputs can be activated for testing purposes in STAND STILL only,
and only on protection level 2.
Step through the list with available outputs and inputs using the arrow keys.
Toggle digital outputs 0/1 with the <enter> key. If there is a feedback
(input) signal available, e.g. for the pumps, it will be displayed together with
the output.
The output to the separator motor (running signal) is activated only as long
as the <enter> key is pressed. This function can be used to test the
rotation direction of the motor.
The outputs remain in the position as set during the output test, as long as
the I/O test menu is active. When the menu is left using the <escape>
key, the system will enter the STOP mode and all outputs are reset to follow
the program. STAND STILL is reached when
0 rpm has been detected for 30 seconds.
Alarm History On entering 5 Alarm History a ring buffer containing the last 50 alarms
with date and times are displayed.
Step through the list using the arrow keys.
Additional information is available pressing the <info> key for the
selected alarm.

Discharge History On entering 6 Disch History a ring buffer containing the last 20 discharges
with date and time are displayed.
Step through the list using the arrow keys.
x/y Disch-History
<time/date> z
<Reason for discharge>
x = discharge number (1: latest)

y = number of discharges
z = status: OK, Rep. (repeated and OK), Fail (repeated P224 times and still
failed)
Reason for discharge: e.g. CIP Manual or Prod Timer
System info On entering 7 System info the following information is displayed:
___ SYSTEM INFO ___

Clara 80
Program: 9699 6308 00
Version: ###
Exit using the <escape> key.
IP Settings This menu is needed if the PLC is installed in a network and consists of
three parts:
1 Current settings
5 Change IP address
5 Change subnet mask
The default settings are:
IP: 192.168.0.1
Mask: 255.255.0.0
Node: 1
Password/Login On entering 9 Password/Login the following menu is displayed:
__ Password handling __
1 Login
5 Logout
On delivery, user password and service password are set, please refer to
appendix I. The user password corresponds to protection level 1, and the
service password corresponds to protection level 2. Protection level 0 means
that no password is required.
Access to resp. protection level is given when the operator enters the right
password using procedure 1 Login. The password is then valid for 20
minutes, or until procedure 2 Logout is used.

2.1.3 The frequency converter for the separator motor
The frequency converter for the separator motor is located in the

control/starter unit. All parameters are at delivery pre-adjusted for the system
and should not be altered.
A parameter table with adjustments made for this application is found in
appendix G.
The separate operator panel on the VFD will display actual process values
like frequency, motor current etc.
For detailed information, please refer to the user manual for the equipment.

2.2 The flow meter operator panel
Flow meter FIT201-4 in the product outlet has its own operator panel.
For complete details please refer to the instruction manual for the equipment.
A parameter table with adjustments made for this application is found in
appendix F.
3 Alarm management
Certain functions of the separator and its ancillary equipment are supervised
by the control system. If one of the system components does not function as
assigned an alarm is given and in some cases some action is taken.
New alarm You are alerted to the alarm by the flashing Alarm LED on the operator
panel and an optical or acoustical signal (if connected, normally supplied by
the customer). The reason for the alarm is indicated on the Alarm page.
Press the Alarm button to access the page.
Reset of new alarm This will also reset the new alarm. The Alarm LED is still flashing.
The Alarm page displays the number of active alarms in the system, the
alarm code, a description of the selected alarm and its status.
More information may be available using the <info> key.
Step through the list of active alarms using the arrow keys.
Acknowledge To acknowledge the alarm press the Alarm button again.

the alarm The Alarm LED is steadily lit when all alarms have been acknowledged.
Now the operator is responsible for taking remedial measures against the
fault(s).
If the fault persists when the alarm has been acknowledged, the symbol “A”
will be displayed behind the alarm code.
In this case search for the reason of the alarm and eliminate the fault. The
message disappears automatically when the fault has been corrected.
If the fault has disappeared, the symbol “R” will be displayed behind the
alarm code. The message disappears automatically when you acknowledge
the alarm.
The Alarm LED will go out when there is no active alarm in the system.
The Alarm page can also be reached pressing the <escape> key.
The Alarm History is accessed via the Settings page, see section 2.1.2.

Start blocking If a start blocking is active at start attempt, the corresponding alarm showing
the reason will be given. Reset new alarm and acknowledge the alarm.
Remove the start blocking and then return to STAND STILL by pressing
the Stop button.
How to read the The control program for the system handles several operation modes where
alarm action control and supervision functions are well defined (see chapter 4.). Section
diagram 3.1., “Alarm action diagram”, lists all supervised functions in the system
and gives an explanation of the different alarm codes used. Furthermore, for
each supervised function the appropriate alarm action in each operation
mode is shown. A blank field means no supervision in this mode, “Alarm”
means just alarm and no automatic action, the name of a mode like “Stop”
or “STB” means the system will issue an alarm and change automatically to
that mode, e.g. STOP or STAND BY.

3.1 Alarm activation diagram
Alarm Description Stand Start Standby Produc- Clean. Stop Safety E-Stop Comments
code Still tion stop
A01 VFD fault Alarm Stop Stop Stop Stop Alarm Alarm Alarm Start blocking. Alarm delayed 5s.
VFD reset at alarm reset: 1 pulse with 1s duration.
A02 Overfrequency VFD Alarm Stop Stop Stop Stop Alarm Alarm Alarm Start blocking. Alarm delayed 2s.
A10 Speed system fault Alarm * Stop Stop Stop Stop Alarm * Alarm * Alarm * No pulse during 10 s. If STOP with this fault, stop-timer P200 keeps the
system in STOP as long as timer runs (timer stop). * Signal out of
range. This alarm is also given if the bowl speed decreases more than
1000 rpm during 5s (supervision interval) under deceleration.
A11 Slow start acceleration Stop 100 rpm has to be reached within time in P201.
A12 Start time too long Stop Full speed (P203) has to be reached within time in P204.
A13 Low speed Alarm STB STB Bowl speed < P206 for time in P207. Blocked during discharge.
A14 High speed Alarm Stop Stop Stop Stop Alarm Alarm Alarm Start blocking. Limit in P202. Alarm delayed 10s.
A20 Vibration system fault (if P111 = yes) Alarm Alarm* Alarm* Alarm* Alarm* Alarm Alarm Alarm Start blocking. Alarm delayed 3s. Signal out of range (4-20 mA).
* This alarm is also given if the vibration signal does not change with
at least 0.01 mm for more than 60s within signal range.
A21 Vibration prewarning (if P111 = yes) Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Start blocking. Alarm delayed 3s. Alarm limit in P227. Supervision
blocked during discharge and below speed setpoint P226.
A22 Vibration shutdown (if P111 = yes) Alarm Sstop Sstop Sstop Sstop Sstop Alarm Alarm Start blocking. No restart. Alarm delayed 3s. Alarm limit in P228.
Supervision blocked during discharge and below speed setpoint P226.
A30 Solids pump fault (if P113 = yes) Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm delayed 5s.
A31 Water pump fault Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm delayed 5s.
A32 Feed pump fault (if P114 = yes) Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm delayed 5s.
A40 Current sensor fault Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm delayed 10s. Signal out of range (4-20 mA).
A41 Unsatisfactory discharge STB STB Number (P224) of automatic discharges before alarm. Alarm limit in
P222. Display number of repeat discharges in alarm history.
A42 High motor current STB STB Alarm limit in P223. One discharge before alarm. Delay 3s.
A43 High discharge frequency STB Average interval of last 5 discharges is < time in P225 (alarm limit).
A60 Flow sensor fault (FIT201-4) Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm delayed 3s. Signal out of range (4-20 mA). This alarm is also
given if the flow signal does not decrease with 5% of P216 at
changeover from Prod/Clean to Standby.
A61 Low flowrate (FIT201-4) STB STB No action if “override” ON. Alarm delayed by P219. Alarm limit in
P218.
A62 Flow alarm override on Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Selected with P121. Reminder only.

Alarm Description Stand Start Standby Produc- Clean. Stop Safety E-Stop Comments
code Still tion stop
A64 High flowrate Alarm Alarm No action if “override” ON. Alarm delayed by P219. Alarm limit in
P217.
A70 Long time in STANDBY Alarm Alarm delayed by P220.
A71 Too long time in STANDBY Stop Alarm and action delayed by P221.
A72 Timer stop Alarm Alarm * Alarm If STOP with this fault, stop-timer P200 keeps the system in STOP
mode as long as timer runs. No restart. * Feed valve open and feed
pump running until P200 has elapsed.
A73 Emergency stop activated Alarm Estop Estop Estop Estop Estop Alarm Alarm Start blocking. No restart. Alarm delayed 2s.
A74 External Prod. Trip to Standby STB External signal via digital input. Alarm delayed 2s.
A75 Power failure Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Black-out has occurred during operation.
A76 CPU temp too high Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Reminder only. CPU temperature > 85°C.
A100 I/O module hardware fault Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
A101 PS 370_3 PS300-3 – Pressure fault Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Low operating water pressure

4 Description of operating conditions
Note: References underlined in the text refer to detailed descriptions found
in section 4.1.
The following main operation modes are defined:
EMERGENCY from all modes via

STAND STILL STOP pushbutton
from all modes at

START SAFETY STOP vibration shutdown
STAND BY STOP Power

on
PRODUCTION CLEANING
Production Cleaning
Discharge sequence Discharge sequence
operation sub-modes
operator selected transition

automatic transition

Power On/Stand At power on the separation system enters the STOP mode.
Still The system passes on to STAND STILL when 0 rpm has been detected for
30s. The VFD is reset: 1 pulse with 1s duration.
In STAND STILL all equipment is deactivated, but it is possible to run the

solids pump manually, when installed. The pump will be running for the
time set in P157 and then stop automatically.
If STAND STILL is reached after STOP coming from PRODUCTION or

CLEANING, the solids pump, when installed, is running for 20s.
During STAND STILL certain system functions are supervised (refer to

chapter 3, Alarm management).
From STAND STILL it is possible to start the system.

START is only possible if no start blocking is active (refer to chapter 3,
Alarm management).
Start START can be selected from STAND STILL or STOP if no alarms or start
blockings are active. STARTING is indicated and the separator motor and
the water pump begin to run. Sealing water is supplied if
P110 = yes.
If the speed does not reach 100 rpm within the time set in P201, the system
goes to STOP and alarm A11 is given.
If the speed does not reach speed setpoint P203 within the time in P204,
alarm A12 is given and the system goes to STOP.
When full speed (P203) has been reached, a start discharge is initiated after a
delay (P205). Then the system changes automatically to STANDBY.
It is possible to interrupt the start sequence by selecting STOP.
Stand by In STAND BY mode the separator is running at full speed. Flushing and
discharge water valves are closed. Nothing is fed to the separator.
The time for the system to be in STAND BY is limited by P220. Prewarning

alarm A70 is given. After the time in P221 alarm A71 is given and the
system enters the STOP mode automatically.
In STAND BY mode it is possible to initiate a discharge sequence manually.

For supply of make-up water and sealing water while separator running, see
appendix E, Activation diagram.
It is possible to select PRODUCTION, CLEANING or STOP from

STANDBY.

Production PRODUCTION means that the separator is running at full speed and is fed
with product from the process inlet line. The feed pump is running, the feed
valve is open. The clarified product leaves the separator through the
product outlet. The discharge interval (P150) is counted down.
The discharge sequence can be initiated automatically (interval timer /

Turbidity Triggering), manually or via a digital input.
PRODUCTION is terminated by selecting STANDBY. The transition to

STANDBY can include a number of discharges, select with P158. All
discharge settings and counters are reset.
Alarm A71, low flow rate is given after the time in P219 when flow is
below P218. The system enters the STANDBY mode automatically
Cleaning CLEANING means that the separator is running at full speed and is fed
with cleaning liquid from the process inlet line. The feed pump is running,
the feed valve is open. The cleaning liquid leaves the separator through the
product outlet. The discharge interval (P151) is counted down.
The discharge sequence can be initiated automatically (interval timer) or

manually.
CLEANING is terminated by selecting STANDBY. All discharge settings

and counters are reset.
Alarm A71, low flow rate is given after the time in P219 when flow is
below P218. The system enters the STANDBY mode automatically
Stop STOP means that the separator motor is deactivated. Nothing is fed to the
separator. The bowl speed is decreasing. Flushing and discharge water
valves are closed. Sealing water is supplied if
P110 = yes.
In STOP it is possible to re-start the separator as long as no unacknow-
ledged alarm or start blocking is active. The system it will end up in
STAND STILL when 0 rpm has been detected for 30 seconds.
In case of speed system failure (A10) the system is kept in STOP mode as
long as P200 is running in order to ensure that the bowl has come to stand
still before STAND STILL is indicated. Alarm A72 “Timer stop” is given.
Safety In case of vibration shutdown (A22, if P111 = yes) the system goes to
Stop SAFETY STOP.
The feed valve is open and the feed pump is running until the bowl speed
has reached 300 rpm. All other equipment is controlled as in normal STOP
mode. Restart is not possible.
After completed Safety-stop-sequence the system will end up in

STAND STILL.
Emergency Stop When you press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the control panel the
system goes to EMERGENCY STOP mode. Separator and pump
contactors are deactivated. The feed valve is closed. Restart is not
possible.
After completed Emergency-stop-sequence the system will end up in
STAND STILL.
For default values and detailed descriptions of the above mentioned

parameters and timers, please refer to
Appendix D, “Parameter table” and Appendix E, “Activation
diagram”.
Supervised system functions and alarm activations are described in
chapter 3.
4.1 Subsequences
Discharge sequence The discharge sequence can be initiated by:

• discharge interval time in Production (P150) or Cleaning (P151) expired
• pushbutton (manually) in Standby (enabled with P123), Production and
Cleaning
• external control equipment (option), via digital input in Production
(discharge delayed by P209)
• Turbidity triggering logic (P10)
off if selected (P152),

not in Standby
Start discharge The start discharge sequence is initiated at the end of the start phase when
speed set point P203 has been reached and P205 has elapsed.
SV372 is activated for the time in P229, and SV376 for the time in P230.
Repeat as many times as set in P231.
The solids pump runs all the time. The sequence is not activated at restart.

Discharge initiation The turbidity monitor QT220-6 in the product outlet is a concentration
via turbidity measuring system utilizing the principle of light absorption in liquids that
measurement contain dissolved or suspended solids. The equipment can be used for
discharge initiation in PRODUCTION mode.
Function enabled only if P115 = 1, selected along with P10.
After a discharge, the evaluation of turbidity signal Q starts after timer P13,
the recovery time, has elapsed. When the turbidity of the product increases
because of the solids accumulation in the bowl periphery, a discharge is
initiated when the turbidity has been above Qref for the duration of P12.
At the moment the recovery time P13 has elapsed, the value of Q is
evaluated: the recovery turbidity Qrec. If Qrec is not lower than Qref as
calculated before the last discharge, the last discharge was most likely
unsatisfactory: same alarm conditions/actions/repeat-discharges as for A41.
Remember the first discharge is given after timer P150. At the first
discharge, timer P13 starts running the first time. The 2nd, 3rd, …
discharges will be triggered by timer P150 or by the turbidity signal,
depending on which one is the first. Timer P150 acts as a backup to the
turbidity triggering system. The turbidity algorithm must start after every
discharge, whatever the triggering source was (timer P150 or the turbidity
algorithm).
Depending on the way Qref is calculated, there is a distinction between an

‘absolute’ and a ‘relative’ method.
ABSOLUTE (P10 = 1)
Qref = P11 x measurement range of the turbidity signal
Unit P11: %
Range P11: 0 – 1000 in steps of 1, max value in this mode is 100.
Measurement range turbidity signal: 0 – 100 units (4 – 20 mA), fixed.
Example: If P11 is 40 %, a discharge will be triggered if the turbidity

has been above 40 units for more than P12 seconds.
RELATIVE (P10 = 2)
Qref = P11 x Qmin

Unit P11: %
Range P11: 0 – 1000 in steps of 1, min value in this mode is 100.
Qmin: lowest recorded turbidity, used to calculate Qref for the next
discharge
After P13 is elapsed, the turbidity signal is constantly evaluated. The
lowest value encounterd value is constantly kept in memory. This value is
Qmin.
Example: After a discharge, the registered (min) turbidity is 20 units. The
user had set P11 at 160%. A discharge will be triggered if the turbidity has
been above 32 units for more than P12 seconds.

5 Operating routine
Contents
5.1. POWER ON/STAND STILL
5.2. START
5.3. STAND BY
5.4. PRODUCTION
5.5. CLEANING
5.6. NORMAL STOP
5.7. EMERGENCY STOP

5.1 POWER ON/STAND STILL
Before you turn on the power: Make sure that the

separator is assembled completely (please consult the
Instruction book for the machine). Make sure that all
electrical and liquid connections are made correctly and
that all couplings are tightened.
Before POWER ON:
The wheels are only intended for positioning and moving the system over short
distances. When the system is not being moved, it must stand on its 4 supports.
These must be adjusted in such a way that the frame is positioned horizontal
and that all wheels are elevated between 5 and 30 mm above the floor.
• Open the mains for service water. Check that the manual brake on the
separator is released.
POWER ON
• Set the main switch on the control panel ON.
If alarm A75 is given, just reset and acknowledge the alarm by pressing the
Alarm button twice. It is likely that the system has been switched OFF in
another condition than STAND STILL. STOP is indicated. Wait until
STANDSTILL displayed (you may also start the system from STOP mode).
5.2 START
• Press the Start button on the operator panel.
The display indicates STARTING and the green Start LED is flashing. The
separator motor begins to run and the bowl speed increases.
The system automatically enters the STAND BY mode when the

start-sequence is completed. At the end of the start period a number of start
discharges are performed.

5.3 STAND BY
In STAND BY mode the separator is running at full speed.
The yellow Standby LED is on.
In STAND BY you can select PRODUCTION or CLEANING by pressing

appropriate function button.
You may also change to STOP by pressing the Stop button.
In STAND BY mode you may run a discharge cycle manually (if enabled)
by pressing the Discharge button.
Note: Make sure that the manual regulating valve V220-5 for the back
pressure in the product outlet line is fully open.
5.4 PRODUCTION
• Press the Production button. The green Production LED is lit.

This button is a toggle button. Press once for production, when in production
mode press again to leave production.
PRODUCTION means that the separator is running at full speed and is fed
with product from the process line. The feed pump is running, the feed valve
is open. The clarified product leaves the separator through the product
outlet.
• Adjust the back pressure in the product outlet line with the manual
regulating valve. Avoid too high back pressure!
During PRODUCTION the solids discharge sequence is automatically

initiated each time when the preset discharge interval has elapsed.
Discharge is triggered via turbidity if the turbidity transmitter is installed &
parameters are appropriately selected.
You may also run a discharge cycle manually by pressing the Discharge
button.
You may also trigger a discharge cycle by using the appropriate digital input.
Check electrical drawings in order to use.
• Leave the PRODUCTION mode by pressing the Production button

once again. The system returns to STAND BY mode where the
Standby LED is lit.

In case of excessive vibrations:
• Press the emergency stop button on the starting panel.

• Leave the area around the machine.
Do not discharge.
At SAFETY STOP the separator should be stopped with flow through the
process lines. This to ensure better balance of the bowl in case of uneven
solids built-up.
5.5 CLEANING
Press the CIP button.
The green CIP LED is lit.
This button is a toggle button. Press once for CIP, when in production mode
press again to leave CIP.
CLEANING means that the separator is running at full speed and is fed with
cleaning agent from the process line. The feed pump is running, the feed
valve is open. The cleaning liquid leaves the separator through the product
outlet.
• Release the back pressure in the product outlet line with the manual
regulating valve.
During CLEANING the solids discharge sequence is automatically initiated

each time when the preset discharge interval has elapsed.
You may also run a discharge cycle manually by pressing the Discharge
button.
You may also trigger a discharge cycle by using the appropriate digital input.
Check electrical drawings in order to use.
• Leave the CLEANING mode by pressing the CIP button once again.
The system returns to STAND BY mode where the Standby LED is
lit.

5.6 NORMAL STOP
From STAND BY or START:
• Press the Stop button.
STOP means that the separator motor is off and nothing is fed to the
separator. The supervision functions are still activated. The bowl speed is
decreasing.
In STOP mode you may re-start the system by pressing the Start button, if no
start blocking is active.
If you do not re-start the system, it will end up in STAND STILL when the
stop-sequence is completed.
5.7 EMERGENCY STOP

• Press the emergency stop pushbutton on the control panel.
• If possible from safety point of view: Apply the manual brake on the
separator.
The separator motor and all other equipment is turned off.
• Wait, until the separator has stopped and danger no longer occurs.
• Reset the emergency stop pushbutton by turning it.
It is not possible to re-start the system before STAND STILL mode has been
reached.

6 Appendix
Appendix A: Lifting instructions
• Always check with an Alfa Laval representative that the installation is
properly planned. Things that should be considered are, e. g.: A clear
area around the equipment is required for servicing.
• The system must be lifted using a forklift with sufficient load capacity.
Weight of the system is about 1200 kg. The forks must have a length
of at least 1000 mm. When lifting the system, the forks must be placed
as far as possible at the bottom of the frame (see illustration below).
The forks must be inserted completely and cover the whole width of the
frame (see illustration below). The system must not be lifted in any
other way. The operator of the forklift must be trained and certified.
• The wheels are only intended for positioning and moving the system
over short distances. When the system is not being moved, it must
stand on its 4 supports. These must be adjusted in such a way that the
frame is positioned horizontal and that all wheels are elevated between
5 and 30 mm above the floor.
The forks must

cover the whole
width of the frame.

Appendix B: Flow chart and Connection list
Flowchart CD01140 Please see Technical Binder
Connection List Please see Technical Binder

Appendix C: Description of process & instrument
components
The enclosed flow chart contains valves and instruments of several different types.
The table below gives some comments about their main functions.
Equipment Comments
no.
V201-2 Manual sampling valve.
V220-4
V201-5 Manual diaphragm valve
V201-3 Motor valve for feed supply.
FIT201-4 Indicating flow meter.
FG220-1 Sight glass.
PI220-2 Pressure indicator.
V220-5 Manual regulating valve for product backpressure.

F300-2 Strainer.
V300-1 Manual shut-off valve for water supply to the feed line.
SV302-1 Solenoid valve for flushing water (34G-machine) or sealing water (34GS-machine),
deactivated = closed.
SV372-1 Solenoid valve for discharge initiation. Deactivated = closed.

SV376-1 Solenoid valve for bowl closing water. Deactivated = closed.
FC302-2 Constant flow valve.
FC372-2
FC376-2
P201-1 Feed pump (option).
P222-1 Solids pump (option).
YT 752 Vibration transmitter (option).
ST 740 Speed transmitter.
PS 300-3 Pressure Switch
QT220-6 Turbidity Transmitter ( option)
V300-4 Butterfly valve with handle and mounting bracket for proximity switch
V405-1 Ball valve ( Applicable only for HF cooled vesion )
PRV405-2 Pressure Regulating valve ( Applicable only for HF cooled vesion )
PI405-3 Pressure Indicator ( Applicable only for HF cooled vesion )

Appendix D: Parameter table
You will find instructions for parameter handling in section 2.1.2.
Para- Prot. Denomination Default Unit Min. Max.

meter Level value value value
P10 1 Discharge triggering condition Timer 0 2
0 = Ti (timer only)
1 = Ti + ABS (timer + turbidity ABSOLUTE)
2 = Ti + REL (timer + turbidity RELATIVE)
P11 1 Turbidity triggering setpoint 150 % 0 1000
P12 1 Discharge trig delay 5 s 0 60
P13 1 Delay new reference 10 s 0 60
P100 0 Display language (English, Italiano, Español, English
E^^HNIKA, Português, Francais, Deutsch)
P101 2 Reset parameters to default values 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 0 1
P110 1 Hermetic yes/no no

P111 1 Vibration sensor installed yes/no no
P113 1 Solids pump installed yes/no no
P114 1 Feed pump installed yes/no no
P115 1 CIP Flush installed yes/no no
P120 1 Remote control disabled
enabled/disabled
P121 1 Flow alarm override on on/off off
P123 1 Allow discharge (manual) in STANDBY yes/no yes
P150 1 Discharge Interval Time Production 15 min 1 60

P151 1 Discharge Interval Time Cleaning 120 sec 1 60
P152 1 Feed during discharge on/off on
P153 1 Flush time before discharge Production/ Standby 5 s 0 60
(SV302-1), only if P110 = no
P154 1 Flush time before discharge Cleaning 5 s 0 60
(SV302-1), only if P110 = no
P155 1 Flush time after discharge Production/ Standby (SV302- 5 s 0 60
1), only if P110 = no
P156 1 Flush time after discharge Cleaning 5 s 0 60
(SV302-1), only if P110 = no
P157 1 Run time solids pump P222 when manually started 10 s 0 60
P158 1 Transition Discharge when going from Production to 1 0 2
Standby.( Stopped by operator)
P200 2 Stop time if speed system fault 30 min 30 60
P201 2 Max. start time to reach 100 rpm 30 s 0 300
P202 2 Max bowl speed 8400 rpm 0 8400
P203 2 Limit for full speed (% of P202) 98.5 % 0 100
P204 2 Max. start time to reach full speed 12 min 0 20
P205 2 Delay start discharge after P203 % of full speed reached 10 s 0 60
P206 2 Low speed limit (% of P202) 95 % 0 100
P207 2 Low speed alarm delay 45 s 0 120
P208 2 Motor current range 38.4 A 0 100
P209 2 Delay on acceptance of external demand for a discharge, 0.2 s 0.0 10.0
disabled if 0.0
Para- Prot. Denomination Default Unit Min. Max.
meter Level value value value
P210 2 Open/Closing time V201-3 15 s 0 60
P211 2 Speed Recovery time after Discharge 30 s 0 60
P212 2 Discharge valve open time SV372 4 s 0.0 5.0
P213 2 Bowl closing time SV376 2 s 0.0 10.0
P214 2 Make up water interval time SV376 15 min 0 60
P215 2 Make up water valve open time SV376 2 s 0 10
P216 2 Measuring range FIT201-4 10.0 m3/h 0.0 10.0
P217 2 Max for FIT (in % of P216) 97 % 0 100
P218 2 Low limit flowrate in Production/Cleaning (in % of 10 % 0 100
P216)
P219 2 Delay Flow Alarm 20 s 0 120
P220 2 Alarm delay long time in standby 50 min 0 120
P221 2 Alarm delay too long time in standby 60 min 0 120
P222 2 Min motor current increase at discharge 3.0 A 0.0 10.0
P223 2 Max current between discharges 25 A 0 50
P224 2 Number of discharges at unsatisfactory discharge 1 0 5
P225 2 Alarm limit high discharge frequency 70 s 0 120
P226 2 Speed setpoint vibration supervision in start/stop 3000 rpm 0 8400
P227 2 Alarm limit vibration prewarning 0.30 mm 0.00 3.00
P228 2 Alarm limit vibration shutdown 0.60 mm 0.00 3.00
P229 2 Discharge valve open time start discharge 1.0 s 0.0 5.0
P230 2 Bowl closing time start discharge 5.0 s 0.0 10.0
P231 2 Number of start discharges 1 1 4
P240* 2 Sensor check: Speed decrease test limit during discharge 100 rpm 0 900
P241* 2 Sensor check: Vibration change test limit during 0.01 mm 0 1.00
discharge
P242* 2 Sensor check: Flow change test limit relative during 0.01 m³ 0 1.00
Prod/CIP
P257 2 PS 300-3- ? (Pressure swttich installed ) yes
P258 2 P300-2 – ? (Water pump installed ) No
P259 2 PS 300-3 alarm 3 S 0 10
P260 2 FIT 201-4 Pulse value 0.01 m3 0 2
P267* 2 Solid pump off interval 0 Min 0 120
P268* 2 Solid Pump on 0 S 0 60
P269 2 Start delay solids pump during discharge 10 S 0 60
* P240 till P242 & P 267, P 268 can be disabled by setting value to 0.

Appendix E: Activation diagram
You will find a verbal explanation of this diagram in chapter 4. "Description of operating
conditions".
Operation mode Sep. Feed Feed pump Solids pump Discharge Bowl closing Sealing/flush
Motor valve P201-1 P222-1 valve water valve water valve
start/ V201-3 (option, (option, SV372-1 SV376-1 SV302-1 e)
stop P114=yes) P113=yes) c)
STAND STILL closed i)
START • closed h) h) h) f)
STANDBY • closed ♦ ♦ ♦ d) f) g)
PRODUCTION • open a) • b) ♦ ♦ ♦ d) f) g)
CLEANING • open a) • b) ♦ ♦ ♦ d) f) g)
STOP l) closed f)
SAFETY STOP l) open k) • k) f)
E-STOP closed
Operation mode Rel. outp. Rel. outp. Rel. outp. Rel. outp. Rel. outp. Rel. outp.
“stand still” “startingl” “standby” “production” “cleaning” “stopping”
STAND STILL •
START •
STANDBY •
PRODUCTION •
CLEANING •
STOP •
SAFETY STOP •
E-STOP •
• Equipment activated.
♦ Equipment activated during discharge.
a) Valve open or closed during discharge depending on value in P152.
b) Pump activated or deactivated during discharge depending on value in P152.
c) Pump can be started manually via pushbutton on the operator panel. Runtime in P157.
d) Valve alternately closed during P214 and open during P215, if not in discharge sequence.
e) Sealing water valve if hermetic machine (P110 = yes),
flush water valve if non-hermetic machine (P110 = no).
f) If hermetic machine (P110 = yes), valve open if flow on FIT201-4 outside range
(<P218, >P217).
g) If non-hermetic machine (P110 = no), valve activated during discharge.
h) Equipment activated at start discharge.
i) Pump running for 20 s if STAND STILL is reached from STOP after any wet full speed mode
(PRODUCTION or CLEANING).
k) Close valve and stop feed pump at 300 rpm.
l) Brake function activated.

Appendix F: Flow meter parameter settings
The following parameters have been adjusted prior to start-up of the separation system. All other
parameters have default values, please refer to the flow meter manual.
Parameter Adjusted value
Language English
Unit Flow m3/H
Total m3
Format xxx.xx
Current 4 00,00
20 8
3
Pulse value 0.0100m /p
Instl.dir.sensor Normal (forward)
Totalizer 1 - Totalizer volume flow
unit totalizer m3
totalizer mode Forward

Appendix G: VFD parameter settings
The following parameters have been adjusted prior to start-up of the separation system. All other
parameters have default values; please refer to the frequency converter manual. xxx
All parameters are at delivery pre-adjusted for the system and should not be
altered.
Drive Series: FC-302

Drive Type: 11.00KW 380V-500V
Option A: No option
Option B: No option
Option C0: No option
Option C1: No option
Parameters
ID Name Value
2 Motor speed unit Hz
419 Max Output Frequen 61.0 Hz
190 Motor Thermal Prot Thermistor trip
193 Thermistor source Analog input 53
24 Display Line 3 Lar Torque [Nm]
40 [Hand on] Key on L Disabled
41 [Off] Key on LCP Disabled
42 [Auto on] Key on L Disabled
43 [Reset] Key on LCP Disabled
123 Motor Frequency 60 Hz
124 Motor Current 19.60 A
125 Motor Nominal Speed 3530
139 Motor Poles 2
150 Motor Magnetisatio 60 %
151 Min Speed Normal M 18 RPM
152 Min Speed Normal M 0.3 Hz
153 Model Shift Freque 7.2 Hz
160 Low Speed Load Com 60 %
162 Slip Compensation 0%
166 Min. Current at Lo 75 %
173 Flying Start Enabled always
181 Min Speed for Func 0 RPM
190 Motor Thermal Protection 2
193 Thermistor source 1
201 DC Brake Current 80 %
202 DC Braking Time 60.0 s

203 DC Brake Cut In Sp 240 RPM
204 DC Brake Cut In Sp 4.0 Hz
210 Brake Function AC Brake
215 Brake Check OFF
216 AC brake Max. Curr 80 %
217 Over-voltage Contr Enabled
222 Activate Brake Spe 24.0 Hz
300 Reference Range Min - Max
302 Minimum Reference 60.000
303 Maximum Reference 60.000
315 Reference Resource No function
319 Jog Speed RPM 300 RPM
341 Ramp 1 Ramp up Tim 350.00 s
342 Ramp 1 Ramp Down T 1200 s
414 Motor Speed High L 60.0 Hz
417 Torque limit gener 3
510 Terminal 18 Digita Coast inverse
511 Terminal 19 Digita Reset
512 Terminal 27 Digita Start
513 Terminal 29 Digita No operation
650 Terminal 42 Output Motor current
1410 Mains Failure Kinetic back-up
156.1 U/f Characteristic 60.0 Hz
540.0 Function Relay VLT running
540.1 Function Relay Above speed, high

Appendix H: Modbus TCP addresses for remote control
Caution: Via the communication interface it is possible to monitor the

separation process from a remote location. It is possible to send and receive
commands and values to the system. Therefore design the communication link
in such a way that unpredictable system functions which could impair safety
are not possible.
Do not alter data/values of other addresses than those mentioned below, this could
result in unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel.
The Default settings are:

IP:192.168.0.1
Mask: 255.255.0.0
Unit Number:0
The remote connection is enabled/disabled from the EPC60 via Parameter P120 and then the info-button and arrow
up/down. All buttons on the EPC 60 are frozen while this remote connection is active. Currently only one slave is
allowed per EPC60. All values can be read even If the remote connection is not active, but no commands can be carried
out.
For safety reasons is remote starting not possible after power up. The operator is obligated
to check the machine and start from the control panel. After first start up, remote control is
fully enabled.
The coils are read/write variables, which means commands for the EPC60. The commands are recognized only after
remote connection is enabled - discrete input 10001.
Exceptions are coils8,9,10,11,12,14,15,16 and 17which always can be accessed.
( we need to be able to read parameter / alarm info even if not in remote )
Note: These "LOAD" Coils need to be sent prior to each read of the data.
( Data are only loaded once when flag been detected, so to update information send Load coil again)
Note: The message length is limited to 60 words.
Address Name Description

1 Input.Command.Start Same as Panel
2 Input.Command.Stop Same as Panel
3 Input.Command.Production Same as Panel
4 Input.Command.CIP Same as Panel
5 Input.Command.Discharge Same as Panel
6 Input.Command.StartSolidspump Same as Panel
7 Input.Command.AckAlarm Same as Panel
8 Input.Parameters.LoadValue Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with current parameter values
9 Input.Parameters.LoadMin Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with minimum parameter values
10 Input.Parameters.LoadMax Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with maximum parameter values
11 Input.Parameters.LoadDefault Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with default parameter values
12 Input.Parameters.LoadUnit Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with unit types of the parameters
13 Input.Parameters.LoadDecimals Load input registers 30100 - 30300 with number of parameter
decimals
14 Input.Parameters.SetValue Set Parameter Value 40002 of parameter number 40001 (holding
registers)
15 Input.Alarms.LoadStatus Load discrete inputs 10100 - 10249 with current alarm status
16 Input.Alarms.LoadAck Load discrete inputs 10100 - 10249 with current alarm acknowledge
status
17 Input.Alarms.LoadActivation Load discrete inputs 10100 - 10249 with current alarm activation
status

Discrete Inputs (10001 - 19999)
Discrete Inputs are read only bit values. These contain machine and
I/O- as well as alarm status..

10001 Output.RemoteEnabled Remote Connection Enabled. EPC60 react on Coil
Commands
10002 Output.Status.Standstill
10003 Output.Status.Starting
10004 Output.Status.Stopping
10005 Output.Status.EStop
10006 Output.Status.Saftystop
10007 Output.Status.TimerStop
10008 Output.Status.Standby
10009 Output.Status.Transtion ( Start Production )
10010 Output.Status.Production
10011 Output.Status.CIP
10012 Output.Status.Discharge
10013 Output.Status.SolidsPumpRunning
10014 Output.Status.ActiveAlarm
10015 Output.Status.NewAlarm
10016 Output.Status.Waiting for start Prod ( Start Production pressed during a Standby Discharge)
10017 Output.Status.Waiting for start CIP ( Start CIP pressed during a Standby Discharge)
10018 Output.Status.Waiting for start Standby ( Stop Production/CIP pressed during a Discharge)
10019 Output.Status.Waiting for Stop ( Stop pressed during a Standby Discharge)
10020
10024
10025 Output.ActValues.Input.FeedPump
10026 Output.ActValues.Input.SolidsPump
10027 Output.ActValues.Input.Waterpump Clara80
Output.ActValues.Input.A3_3 Clara20,200
10028 Output.ActValues.Input.A3_4
10029 Output.ActValues.Input.DriveNoAlarm
10030 Output.ActValues.Input.OverSpeedAlarm
10031 Output.ActValues.Input.Estop
10032 Output.ActValues.Input.SafetyStop Not used
10033 Output.ActValues.Input.CoverInterlock Clara 20, 200
Output.ActValues.Input.A11_2 Clara 80
10034 Output.ActValues.Input.ExtTriggDischarge
10035 Output.ActValues.Input.ExtAlarm
10036 Output.ActValues.Input. A10_5 Clara 20, 80
Output.ActValues.Input.Levelswitch Clara 200
10037 Output.ActValues. Input.A10_6
10038 Output.ActValues.Input.LevelSwitch Clara 20
10039
10042 Output.ActValues.Output.InletVale
10043 Output.ActValues.Output.DisplacementWater Clara 20
Output.ActValues.Output.A4_2 Clara 80 Spare
Output.ActValues.Output.Discharge OWN Clara200
10044 Output.ActValues.Output.FeedPump
10045 Output.ActValues.Output.SolidsPump
Output.ActValues.Output.Waterpump Clara80
10046 Output.ActValues.Output.A5_3 Clara20, 200
10047 Output.ActValues.Output.A5_4
10048 Output.ActValues.Output.M701_0 (Run Motor)
10049 Output.ActValues.Output.M701_1 (VFD Reset)
Output.ActValues.Output.FlushSealingWater Clara 20, 80
10050 Output.ActValues.Output.Sealingwater Clara 200
Output.ActValues.Output.ClosingWater Clara 20, 80
10051 Output.ActValues.Output.Operatingwater Clara 200
Output.ActValues.Output.DischargeWater Clara 20, 80
10052 Output.ActValues.Output.Flushing Clara 200
10053 Output.ActValues.Output.AlarmOutput
10097 Status alarm loaded Coil 15

10098 Ack alarm loaded Coil 16
10099 Activation alarm loaded Coil 17
10100 Output.Alarm[0] Status, Ack or Activation of A0. Loaded with coil 15-17
… …
Status, Ack or Activation of A149. Loaded with coil 15-
10249 Output AIarm[149] 17
Input registers(30001-39999)
Input registers are read only integer variables. These contain
actual sensor values as well as parameters.
30001 Output.Response Response value from Coil commands 1-16.
0: Ok,
1: call again,
2: Command Not allowed
<0: error
30002 Output.Mode Operating mode
30003 Output.Version Software version
30004 Clara type 20,80 or 200
30005 ParameterChgNb Last changed parameter
30006 ParameterChgVal Value for last changed parameter
30007 Output.Runtime.Hours
30008 Output.Runtime.Minutes
30009 Output.Runtime.Seconds
30010 Output.ActValues.Q1
30011 Output.ActValues.Value.Current
30012 Output.ActValues.Turbidity Clara 200
30013 Output.ActValues.Opwater Press. Clara 200
30014 Output.ActValues.TT1 Not used
30015 Output.ActValues.Value.TT2 Not used
30016 Output.ActValues.Value.SS
30017 Output.ActValues.Value.VibrAmpl Clara 80 or Clara 200
30018 Output.ActValues.Value.VibrDist Clara 80
30019 Output.ActValues.CurrFBSpeed Clara 200
30020 Output.ActValues.IPConvOWM Clara 200
30030 Limits.HighSpeed
30031 Limits.FullSpeed
30032 Limits.LowSpeed
30033 Limits.HighFlow
30034 Limits.LowFlow
30035 Limits.FlowChange
30036 Limits.VibrPrew Clara 200
30037 Limits.VibrShutd Clara 200
30038 Limits.TurbiditySetp Clara 200
30039 Limits.TurbidityRef Clara 200
30040 SensorFault.Speed
30041 SensorFault.vibration
30042 SensorFault.flow
30043 SensorFault.current
30044 SensorFault.Turbidity Clara 200
30045 SensorFault.OPWaterPress Clara 200
30046 Reserved
30047 Reserved
30048 Reserved
30049 Reserved
30099 Parameter Load type 1= Actual value ( Coil 9), 2 = Coil10 ……

Default, Min/Max Current value.. of P0. Loaded with coil 7 -
30100 Output.Parameter[0] 12.
… … (ex: 30101 = parameter 1 , 30211 = Parameter 111 )
Default, Min/Max Current value.. of P299. Loaded with coil 7
30399 Output.Parameter[299] - 12.
Holding Registers (40001-49999)

Holding registers are read/write. For now its only parameter value
and number. These variables are reset if the remote connection is
deactivated - discrete input 10001.

40001 Input.Parameters.Number Pararameter number which should be set with coil 13
40002 Input.Parameters.Value Value of the parameter which should be set with coil 13
40009 Reserved AlfaLaval Debug variable

Appendix I: Passwords
User password
The password needed for access to protection level 1 is 0592.
Service password
The password needed for access to protection level 2 is 2760.
Remove this page and store it in a safe place if you do not want unauthorized persons to change the
settings.

Operator’s Manual
Product No. 881222-01-04/2

Book No. 598887-02 Rev. 2
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB October 2015

Original instructions
Contents

1.4 Remote start 14
2 Separator Basics 15
2.1 Basic principles of separation 15

2.1.1 Separation by gravity 15
2.1.2 Centrifugal separation 15
2.1.3 Separating temperatures 16
2.2 Design and function 17
2.2.1 Application 17
2.2.2 Overview 17
2.2.3 Mechanical power transmission 18
2.2.4 Sensors and indicators 19
2.2.5 Cyclone (if applicable) 19
2.2.6 Process main parts 21
2.2.7 Separating function 25
2.2.8 Sediment discharge cycle 26
2.2.9 Flushing 28
2.3 Factors influencing the separation result 29
2.3.1 Viscosity and density 29
2.3.2 Size and shape of particles 29
2.3.3 Properties of the sediment 29
2.3.4 Sediment content 29
2.3.5 Sediment discharge 30
2.3.6 Disc stack 30
2.3.7 Throughput 30
2.3.8 Back pressure regulation 31
2.3.9 Sediment discharge frequency 31
3
2.4 Sediment discharge interval 32
2.5 Machine plates and safety labels 34
2.6 Definitions 36
3 Operating Instructions 37
3.1 Operating routine 37

3.1.1 Ready for start 37
3.1.2 Start 39
3.1.3 Running 40
3.1.4 Normal stop 42
3.1.5 Emergency stop 43
4 Trouble-tracing 45
4.1 Mechanical functions 45

4.1.1 Separator vibrates 45
4.1.2 Smell 46
4.1.3 Noise 46
4.1.4 Speed too low 46
4.1.5 Speed too high 46
4.1.6 Starting power too high 47
4.1.7 Starting power too low 47
4.1.8 Starting time too long 47
4.1.9 Retardation time too long 47
4.2 Separating functions 48
4.2.1 Liquid flows through the bowl casing
drain and/or sediment outlet 48
4.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally during
operation 49
4.2.3 Bowl fails to open for sediment
discharge 49
4.2.4 Unsatisfactory sediment discharge 50
4.2.5 Unsatisfactory separation result 50
4

serious accidents.

tools.
5
6

• Kinetic energy is high
• Great forces are generated
G0010421
• Stopping time is long

fatigue.
apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose
• Strictly follow the instructions for
• Ensure that personnel are competent and
S0151211
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

11
• When power cables are connected,

unscrew.
S01512F1
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop
S01512N1
• Use the separator only for the purpose 3
kPa m /h
and parameter range specified by 3
kg/m o
C
Alfa Laval.
r/min
Hz
S01512P1
• Check that the gear/pulley ratio is correct
50Hz
60Hz
serious break down.
S01512L1
• If the separator is run by a variable
allowed maximum. This is to avoid
serious break down caused by too high
speed.
• Welding or heating of parts that rotate
S0151241
• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. φ-mark on lock A
ring must not pass opposite φ-mark by
more than specified distance.
S01512G1
(MA
X2
5)
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosive.
S01512H1
12
Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come

starting any dismantling work.
S01512O1
If there is no braking function the run
down time can exceed two hours.
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

S0151261
dismantling work.

Electrical hazard
• Follow local regulations for electrical

• To avoid accidental start, switch off and
S0151271
dismantling work.
13
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
S01512M1
S01512Y1
Noise hazards
• Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0151291
Burn hazards
• Lubrication oil, machine parts and

S01512A1
14
• When using chemical cleaning agents,

S01512D1
protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges, especially on bowl discs,

S01512B1
Flying objects
• Risk for accidental release of snap rings

S01512C1
Health hazard
• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

S01512V1
15

DANGER
Type of hazard

WARNING
Type of hazard

CAUTION
Type of hazard

NOTE
in property damage.
16
Unpacking
Maintenance
regulations.
site.
regulations.
17
2.3 Requirements of
personnel
maintenance staff.
• Skilled person: A person with technical
create.
• Instructed person: A person adequately
can create.
2.4 Remote start

position, from where it can neither be seen nor
heard, the power isolation device shall be
equipped with an interlocking device. This is to
prevent a remote start command which could
result in some liquid being fed to the separator
when it is shut down for service.
apart or has been standing still for a long time
shall always be locally manually supervised.
18
2 Separator Basics
2.1 Basic principles of

separation
The purpose of separation can be:
• to free a liquid of solid particles,
• to separate two mutually insoluble liquids with
different densities while removing any solids
presents at the same time,
• to separate and concentrate solid particles
G0010711
from a liquid.
Sedimentation by gravity
2.1.1 Separation by gravity
A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid mixture
sink to the bottom under the influence of gravity.
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be
achieved in a settling tank having inlet and outlet
arranged according to the illustration.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle
G0736021
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Sedimentation in a settling tank, with the outlet

making it possible to separate the liquid from the
sediment
2.1.2 Centrifugal separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity is
replaced by centrifugal force, which can be
thousands of times greater.
Separation and sedimentation is continuous and
happens very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds what takes many hours
in a tank under influence of gravity.
G0736011
The centrifugal solution
15
2.1 Basic principles of separation 2 Separator Basics
2.1.3 Separating temperatures

For some types of process liquids (e.g. mineral
oils) a high separating temperature will normally
increase the separation capacity. The
temperature influences oil viscosity and density
and should be kept constant throughout the
separation.
Viscosity
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can
be reduced by heating.
G0011011
High viscosity (with low temperature)
G0011111
Low viscosity (with high temperature)

Density difference (specific gravity ratio)
The greater the density difference between the
two liquids, the easier the separation. The density
difference can be increased by heating.
G0011211
High density (with low temperature)

G0011311
Low density (with high temperature)
16
2 Separator Basics 2.2 Design and function
2.2 Design and function
2.2.1 Application
VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS is a sediment-
discharging high-speed centrifugal separator for
wine with controlled partial sediment discharge. It
is of clarification design, i.e. it separates the liquid
phase from the sediment.
WARNING
Never use the separator for separating other
G1036011
liquids or liquids with other characteristics
than originally specified. If your requirements
change, always consult Alfa Laval represent-
ative before any changes are made.
2.2.2 Overview
The separator comprises a processing part and a
driving part. It is driven by an electric motor (4).
Mechanically, the separator machine frame is
composed of a bottom part, a top part and a
frame hood. The motor is flanged to the frame as
shown in the illustration. The frame feet (5) are
vibration damping.
The bottom part of the separator contains a flat
belt transmission (7), a rigid coupling (6) and a G0625041
vertical spindle (3).

The bottom part also contains an oil bath for 201. Process liquid inlet
lubrication of spindle bearings and a brake. 220. Cleaned liquid outlet
222. Sediment discharge outlet
The frame top part and the frame hood contain
375. Bowl operating water inlet
the processing parts of the separator, the inlet, 462. Drain of frame top part
outlets and piping (1).
1. Inlet and outlet device
The liquid is cleaned in the separator bowl (2).
2. Bowl
This is fitted on the upper part of the vertical
3. Vertical driving device with bowl spindle
spindle and rotates at high speed in the space 4. Electric motor
formed by the frame top part and frame hood. The 5. Frame feet
bowl also contains the discharge mechanism 6. Rigid coupling
which empties the sediment from the bowl. 7. Flat belt transmission
8. Speed sensor
9. Unbalance sensor
17
2.2 Design and function 2 Separator Basics
An unbalance sensor (9) and a speed sensor (8)

monitor the separator operation.
The main inlets and outlets are shown with
connection numbers in the illustration. These
numbers correspond with the numbers used in
chapters Connection list and Basic size drawing
in Installation Manual.
2.2.3 Mechanical power

transmission
The main parts of the power transmission
between motor and bowl are shown in the
illustration.
The frequency controlled motor connected to the
rigid coupling (4) ensures a gentle start and
acceleration and at the same time prevents
overloading.
The flat belt transmission has a ratio which
increases the bowl speed several times compared
with the motor speed.
To reduce bearing wear and the transmission of
bowl vibrations to the frame and foundation, the
top bearing of the bowl spindle is mounted in a
G0624911
spring damped bearing seat (2).
The bearings on the spindle are lubricated by the
oil splash produced by an oil pump. 1. Bowl spindle
2. Top bearing and bearing seat
3. Bottom bearing
4. Rigid coupling
5. Flat belt
Brake
The separator is equipped with a brake to be
used when stopping the separator. The use of the
brake reduces the retardation time of the bowl
and critical speeds will therefore be quickly
passed. A
The brake lining acts on the outside of the rigid
coupling.
G0625211
B
A = Brake applied
B = Brake released
18
2.2.4 Sensors and indicators
Unbalance sensor (1)

For indication of any abnormal unbalance the
separator can be equipped with a sensor
monitoring the radial position of the bowl spindle.
Speed sensor (2)

An optional speed sensor indicates the speed of
the separator. The correct speed is needed to
achieve the best separating results and for
reasons of safety. The number of revolutions for
correct speed is shown in chapter Technical data
in the Installation Manual. Refer to name plate for
speed particulars.
Sight glass (3)
G0625151
The sight glass shows the oil level in the oil sump.
1. Unbalance sensor
2. Speed sensor
3. Sight glass
2.2.5 Cyclone (if applicable)
When accumulated sediment in the bowl is
discharged, it leaves the bowl at high speed. To
prevent reaction forces on the separator this
speed must be reduced before the sediment
leaves the separator. This is done in the outlet
cyclone where the sediment will rotate while its
speed is gradually reduced by the wall friction
until its speed is low enough to be discharged by
gravity by outlet 222.
When the sediment is suddenly discharged into
the cyclone there will be a positive gas pressure
shock in the cyclone and a corresponding
negative pressure shock in bowl enclosure
because a certain volume of material is suddenly
moved from one region to another.
After the discharge the pressure will be equalized
by back flow of gas from the cyclone to the bowl
enclosure. This back flow will contain some
sediment that might cause build up of sediment
deposits on the surface in the bowl cover.
A part of the pressure shock will also go out by
the connection 222 into the external sediment
19
receiving system where it can damage the system

or spread aerosols to the surroundings. The
cyclone is equipped with one open connection
(543) at the top. This connection is used for
ventilation of the cyclone.
20
2.2.6 Process main parts
G0625321
Separator bowl, feed and discharge assembly, control paring disc and liquid flow.
Non-rotating parts are indicated by black shade.
201. Process liquid inlet 7. Inlet pipe 18. Nozzle *

220. Cleaned liquid outlet 8. Bowl hood 19. Opening chamber
302. Axial seal water inlet (if axial 9. Top disc 20. Drain channels
hermetic seal (1) is fitted 10. Large lock ring 21. Drain valve *
375. Operating water inlet * 11. Bowl disc stack 22. Closing chamber
1. Axial hermetic seal (option) 12. Sediment space 23. Operating slide *
2. Paring chamber cover 13. Bowl hood seal ring * 24. Distributing ring *
3. Paring disc 14. Sediment port * 25. Operating water ring
4. Paring chamber 15. Bowl body 26. Nozzle *
5. Small lock ring 16. Sliding bowl bottom * 27. Nozzle *
6. Distributor 17. Closing water space
* Parts effecting a sediment discharge
21
Inlet and outlet device

The inlet and outlet device consists of the
following parts:
• The inlet (201). This comprises the pipe bend
and the long inlet pipe (7) which extends into
the middle of the bowl.
• The outlet (220). This comprises the outlet
housing, the paring chamber (4) and the
paring disc (3).
The paring disc serves as a stationary discharge
pump. The paring disc dips radial into the rotating
liquid which then is pared out.
To prevent aeration of the separated liquid it is
important that the paring disc is covered to a
certain extent, which is regulated by the back
pressure of the liquid outlet.
The inlet and outlet device is held together by the
inlet pipe threading and a nut forming a complete
G0631011
unit.
The outlet housing is fastened to the separator Paring disc pump
frame hood. Height adjusting rings determine the
height position of the paring disc in the paring
chamber.
Separator bowl and sediment discharge

mechanism
The separator bowl with its sediment discharge
mechanism is built-up as follows:
The bowl body (15) and bowl hood (8) are held
together by the large lock ring (10). Inside the
bowl are the distributor (6) and the disc stack
(11). The disc stack is kept compressed by the
bowl hood. The sliding bowl bottom (16) forms an
internal separate bottom in the bowl.
The bowl top is covered by the paring chamber
cover (2). The space inside this cover is the
paring chamber (4) with the paring disc (3) which
pumps the separated liquid out of the bowl.
The sediment space (12) is the space between
the sliding bowl bottom, the bowl hood and the
disc stack in the bowl periphery. It is kept closed
by the sliding bowl bottom (16) which seals
against a seal ring (13) in the bowl hood.
22
At intervals decided by the operator, the sliding

bowl bottom drops to empty the bowl of sediment.
The sediment discharge mechanism, which
controls the sliding bowl bottom, comprises an
operating slide (23) and an operating water
device. Passive parts are: nozzles (18, 26, 27)
and valves (21). The operating water device on
the underside of the bowl supplies operating
water (375) to the discharge mechanism via the
operating water ring (25).
23
Hermetic design
To make the connection of the inlet and outlet
device in top of the bowl airtight (hermetic), it is
equipped with an axial seal of mechanical type.
G0786431
1. Non-rotating sealing device 2. Rotating wear device
(to be handled as one unit) 2A. Wear ring
302. Axial seal water inlet
To lubricate the axial seal sufficiently during the

starting and stopping periods, water must be
supplied through connection 302/(401).
24
2.2.7 Separating function
G0628121
201. Process liquid inlet 3. Paring disc 9. Top disc

220. Cleaned liquid outlet 4. Paring chamber
302. Water inlet 11. Bowl disc stack
375. Operating water inlet 6. Distributor 12. Sediment space
7. Inlet pipe
8. Bowl hood 14. Sediment port
25
Normal operation
Unseparated liquid is fed into the bowl through
the inlet pipe (7) and is pumped via the distributor
(6) towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the liquid reaches slots of the distributor, it
will rise through the channels formed by the disc
stack (11) where it is evenly distributed.
The liquid is continuously cleaned as it travels
towards the centre of the bowl. When the cleaned
liquid leaves the disc stack it rises upwards and
enters the paring chamber (4). From the latter it is
pumped by the paring disc (3) and leaves the
bowl through outlet (220). Sediment and solid
particles are forced towards the periphery of the
bowl and collected in the sediment space (12).
2.2.8 Sediment discharge cycle

The separator discharges a fixed volume of
sediment and water. The discharge volume is
approximately 70% of the sediment space
volume.
Operating water
Operating water (closing and opening water) to
the sliding bowl bottom is supplied through a
distributing cover under the bowl, for closing and
opening functions.
Closing water is supplied during the starting
sequence, during the sediment discharge
sequence and, at intervals (2 seconds every 15
minutes) during the separation sequence. During
the separation sequence the supply of closing
water is to replace possible leakage and is
termed make-up water.
Opening water is supplied simultaneously with the
closing water through the same operating water
inlet (375)
26
Closed bowl (normal operation)

Between discharges the sediment ports (14) are
covered by the sliding bowl bottom (16). The
sliding bowl bottom is normally pressed upwards
against a seal ring (13) by the hydraulic force of
the operating water in the closing water space
(17). This force is greater than the force of the
process liquid above the sliding bowl bottom.
Bowl opens for discharge

When the time for the sediment discharge interval
has elapsed, opening water is fed for about 0,5
seconds overflowing the operating water ring
(25).
The operating water enters the space above the
operating slide (23), which moves downwards.
The drain channels (20) open and the closing
G0628321
water drains out. This allows the force on the
underside of the sliding bowl bottom (16) to
become lower than the force on the upper side. Sediment discharge
The sliding bowl bottom moves downwards and
sediment and water are discharged through ports 201. Oil inlet
(14). 220. Clean oil outlet
302. Water inlet
In the meantime operating water ring (25) and the 375. Operating water inlet
space above the operating slide (23) is
continuously drained through the respective 13. Bowl hood seal ring
nozzles. 14. Sediment port
16. Sliding bowl bottom
17. Closing water space
Bowl closes after discharge 20. Drain channels
21. Drain valve
When opening water supply stops and the 23. Operating slide
opening water above the operating slide (23) has 25. Operating water ring
been drained, the closing water pushes the
operating slide upwards and closes the drain
valves (21).
The closing water which is supplied during the
entire discharge cycle (about 5 seconds), now fills
the space below the sliding bowl bottom (16) and
pushes it back in closed position.
Bowl closing water is supplied during the
sediment discharge sequence and at intervals
during the separation sequence to replace
evaporated water.
27
2.2.9 Flushing
To avoid sediment deposits inside the bowl
401
enclosure and sediment outlet, the separator is
(or can be) equipped with several flushing 30
2
possibilities. One spray nozzle is placed at the top
of the separator (connection 302) to give a spray
that hits the outside of the bowl. By the bowl
rotation the liquid is thrown to the inside of the
frame hood which then will be cleaned.
303
Another flushing inlet (connection 303) is placed
under the bowl for flushing under the bowl.
How to use the flushing possibilities depends on
G1047471
the process and the properties of the product. In
many cases no flushing at all is needed. In other
cases it is only done at CIP (cleaning in place)
and in some cases both at production and CIP. 302 Flushing above the bowl
303 Flushing under the bowl
Normally flushing is done in connection with 401 Inlet for cooling
discharges. A typical sequence is that a few
seconds flush is given to wet the surfaces just
before the discharge. When the main part of the
discharged sediment has drained from the
cyclone a new flush is done to remove the final
part of the sediment. Possibly another flush can
be done after a new draining period. If the
separator is supervised by a control system which
controls the flushing the timers ought to be
adjustable so the flushing can be adapted to suit
the actual requirements.
When making a flush it could be possible to feed
flushing liquid to all flushing connections at the
same time. To minimize the flushing liquid
consumption and dilution of the discharged
sediment it is however of advantage if the
different flushing points could be controlled
individually.
28
2 Separator Basics 2.3 Factors influencing the separation result
2.3 Factors influencing

the separation result
2.3.1 Viscosity and density

See ‘‘2.1.3 Separating temperatures” on page 16.
2.3.2 Size and shape of particles

The round and smooth sediment particle (A) is x
more easily separated out than the irregular one
A
(B).
Rough treatment, for instance in pumps, may B
cause a splitting of the particles resulting in
slower separation. Larger particles (1) are more
easily separated out than smaller ones (2) even if
they have the same density.
2.3.3 Properties of the sediment y
G0613321
Some types of sediment can through adhesion 2 1
form deposits in the bowl, thereby reducing the 1. Large particle
separating efficiency. In such cases the cleaning 2. Small particle
procedure after separation must be adjusted. A. Smooth particle
B. Irregular particle
x. Throughput
y. Particle size
2.3.4 Sediment content
An increased quantity of sediment in a process
liquid will influence the separating result through
the optimum transporting capacity of the disc set.
An increased sediment content can be
compensated by reducing the throughput in order
to restore the optimum separating efficiency.
29
2.3 Factors influencing the separation result 2 Separator Basics
2.3.5 Sediment discharge

With a high content of solids in the process liquid
discharges are required at shorter intervals. An
overfilled sediment space impairs the quality of
the separated liquid. However, keep the discharge
within the min. and max. time stated in chapter
Technical data in the Installation Manual. How to
calculate the discharge interval is described in
‘‘2.4 Sediment discharge interval” on page 32.
If ejecting the sediment unnecessary often, the
separating result will be impaired because of a
more disturbed liquid flow through the bowl and
the sediment will be too fluid (higher content of
process liquid).
G0677711
Never overfill the sediment space
2.3.6 Disc stack
A neglected disc stack – containing deformed
discs or discs coated with deposits – will impair
the separating result.
2.3.7 Throughput
The throughput depends on the separating ability
and the sediment space volume of the bowl
relative to the concentration, particle size, density
and viscosity of the process liquid.
The throughput also depends of the back
pressure in the outlet for separated liquid, see
2.3.8.
G0677511
The sediment space in separator bowl
30
2 Separator Basics 2.3 Factors influencing the separation result
2.3.8 Back pressure regulation

The correct back pressure is dependent on the
throughput of the process liquid. See chapter
Connection list in the Installation Manual for
required back pressure compared with the
throughput.
For best result keep the back pressure as high as
G0677631
possible without leakage from the distributor
occurs.
It is important to set correct back pressure
Be careful not to select too high back pressure,
otherwise there will be a risk of leakage from the
distributor (unseparated process liquid) into the
paring chamber (separated liquid) or from the
paring chamber into the frame hood.
Too low back pressure is, however, unfavourable
too if you want to prevent air from intermingling
with the treated liquid (via the paring chamber).
2.3.9 Sediment discharge

frequency
If ejecting the sediment unnecessary often the
separating result will be impaired because of a
more disturbed liquid flow through the bowl and a
too fluid sediment (higher content of process
liquid).
31
2.4 Sediment discharge interval 2 Separator Basics
2.4 Sediment discharge

interval
The separator is a controlled partial-discharge
type separator which discharges a fixed volume of
sediment. The discharge volume is approximately
70% of the volume outside the disc stack.
The appropriate time to be chosen between
sediment discharges depends on local conditions
because many factors influence accumulation
and hardening of sediment between discharges.
However, keep the discharge interval within the
min. and max. time stated in chapter
Technical data in the Installation Manual.
Long intervals between sediment discharges can
accumulate and compact the sediment. The
sediment may then break-up unevenly on
discharge and cause the bowl to become
unbalanced. If such unbalance is too large, there
is risk of serious separator damage and injury to
personnel.
WARNING
Ensure that correct discharge intervals and

cleaning procedures are used.
Unbalance due to improper washing out of
solids may lead to contact between rotating
and non-rotating parts.
32
2 Separator Basics 2.4 Sediment discharge interval
If the solids content of the process liquid

expressed in per cent by volume of wet sediment
is known or can be established (for instance in a
test-tube centrifuge), the formula below can serve
as a guidance for the selection of sediment
ejection intervals.
t = Theoretic maximum time in minutes

between two ejections.
p = Percent by volume of wet sediment in the
process liquid.
G0697911
Q = Throughput in litres/hour.
1. Total sediment space volume
V = The sediment volume (in litres or dm3)
V. Allowed sediment volume
which may be allowed to accumulate in
the bowl without impairing the
separating result or without packing too
firmly. As a rule, “V” should be maximum
three quarters of the sediment space
volume, calculated from the outer edge of
the top disc.
The sediment space volume for this
separator, which approximately is the same
as nominal discharge volume, can be found
in the chapter Technical data in the
Installation Manual.
33
2.5 Machine plates and safety labels 2 Separator Basics
2.5 Machine plates and

safety labels
G0627761
1. Machine plate
Separator type
Serial No. / Year
Product No.
Machine top part
S0061411
Bowl
Machine bottom part
Designation
Max. speed (bowl)
Direction of rotation (bowl)
Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
34
2 Separator Basics 2.5 Machine plates and safety labels
3. Safety label
Text on label:
Warning
S00690N1
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation and
maintenance. Consider inspection intervals.
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl
filled with liquid during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work is
started.
4. Name plate.
S0063211
6. Power supply frequency.
S0063111
7. Lifting instruction.
A. Space for additional label as specified in the order.

S0069111
B. Space for label indicating representative.
35
2.6 Definitions 2 Separator Basics
2.6 Definitions
Back pressure Pressure in the separator outlet.

Clarification Liquid/solids separation with the intention of separating particles, normally solids,
from a liquid having a lower density than the particles.
Counter pressure See Back pressure.
Density Mass per volume unit. Expressed in kg/m3 at specified temperature, normally at
15 °C.
Intermediate Service Overhaul of separator bowl and inlet/outlet. Renewal of seals in bowl and gaskets
(IS) in inlet/outlet device.
Major Service (MS) Overhaul of the complete separator, including bottom part (and activities included
in an Intermediate Service). Renewal of seals and bearings in bottom part.
Sediment (sludge) Solids separated from a liquid.
Sludge discharge Ejection of sludge from the separator bowl.
Throughput The feed of process liquid to the separator per time unit. Expressed in m3/h or
litre/h.
Viscosity Fluid resistance against movement. Normally expressed in centistoke
(cSt = mm 2/s), at specified temperature.
36
3 Operating Instructions
3.1 Operating routine

These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to follow before and during the start,
running and stopping sequences of the separator.
If there is a System Manual, always follow the
operating instructions of the System Manual. If
there is no System Manual the instructions below
are to be followed.
3.1.1 Ready for start

To achieve the best separation results the bowl
should be in a clean condition.
1. Check that the bolts of the frame hood are
fully tightened.
2. Check that all inlet and outlet connections
have been correctly made and properly
tightened.
S0009821
3. Check that the oil level is in the middle of the
sight glass. Fill if necessary.
See chapters Oil change procedure and
Recommended lubricating oils in the Service MIN
& Maintenance Manual.
G0470121
37
3.1 Operating routine 3 Operating Instructions
4. Make sure that the brake is released

(position B).
G0625211
5. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl. B
The direction of rotation can be checked by
comparing the direction of motor fan and the
arrow (⇐) on the machine plate.
The motor fan, which has the same direction
of rotation as the bowl, shall rotate clockwise
seen from above.
WARNING
When power cables have been connected,

always check direction of rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew.
38
3 Operating Instructions 3.1 Operating routine
3.1.2 Start
1. If the separator is equipped with an axial
hermetic seal in the in and outlet device, open
the sealing liquid supply (401) before starting
the separator.
NOTE
To reduce the friction between sealing
element and wear ring in the mechanical
seal, these must always be in contact with
liquid when the bowl spindle rotates.
2. Start the separator.

3. Check the separator for vibration. Some
vibration can occur for short periods during
the starting cycle, when the separator passes
through its critical speeds. This is normal and
passes over without danger. Try to learn the
vibration characteristics of the critical speed
pattern.
S0055611
WARNING
When excessive vibration occurs, keep

liquid feed on and stop separator.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and rectified before the separator is
restarted. Excessive vibration may be due to
incorrect assembly or insufficient cleaning of
the bowl.
4. Check that the time to reach full speed may

not exceed the limit given in chapter
5. When running normally, open the closing
water valve (connection 375) for
approximately 5 seconds to close the bowl.
39
3.1.3 Running
1. Make sure that the outlet for the separated
liquid (220) is fully open.
2. When the process liquid conditions are
correct, open the process liquid feed (201)
and adjust to a suitable throughput. This must
not exceed the flow permissible and must be
suited to the separability of the process liquid,
see chapters Technical data and Connection
list in the Installation Manual for correct
values.
hermetic seal in the in and outlet device,
close the sealing liquid supply (401) during
the period process liquid is fed through the
inlet (201).
4. Discharge by opening the valve for opening
water (connection 375) until a discharge is
heard. For maximum and minimum time for
discharge intervals, see chapter
WARNING
Ensure that correct discharge intervals and

cleaning procedures are used.
Unbalance due to improper washing out of
solids may lead to contact between rotating
and non-rotating parts.
40
5. Daily condition checks

The following steps should be carried out
daily:
a. Check all pipe and hose connections for
leakage.
S0009821
Check for leakages (not admitted)
b. Check that flows and pressures are

sufficient for following connections:
- Process liquid inlet (201)
- Process liquid outlet (220)
- Discharge and make-up liquid (375).
NOTE
Correct flows, pressures etc. for the
connections mentioned can be found in
chapter Connection list in the Installation
Manual.
c. Check the separator for noise and

vibration.
WARNING
S0055611
When excessive vibration occurs, keep bowl Check for vibration

filled and stop separator.
and rectified before the separator is
restarted.
41
3.1.4 Normal stop

hermetic seal in the in and outlet device, open
the sealing liquid supply (401) before
stopping the feed of process liquid through
inlet (201).
NOTE
To reduce the friction between sealing
element and wear ring in the mechanical
seal, these must always be in contact with
liquid when the bowl spindle rotates.
2. Carry out a sediment discharge before

stopping the separator. Otherwise the bowl
must be cleaned manually before the next
start up.
The volume of the discharged sediment must
be compensated for by additional feed.
3. After discharge, turn off the feed and stop the
separator with the bowl filled with liquid.
4. Apply the brake (position A).
A
G0625221
42
3.1.5 Emergency stop
1. If the separator begins to vibrate excessively

during operation, stop it immediately by
pushing the emergency stop. The separator
motor is switched off.
Keep the oil feed on during the run-down to
minimize the excessive vibration.
S0009911
2. Evacuate the room. The separator may be
hazardous when passing its critical speeds
during the run-down. Push the emergency stop if excessive vibration
WARNING
Do not discharge a vibrating separator.

Out-of-balance vibration can become worse
if only part of the sediment is discharged.
CAUTION
After an emergency stop the cause of the

fault must be identified.
If all parts have been checked and the cause
remains unclear, contact Alfa Laval for
advice.
43
44
4 Trouble-tracing
4.1 Mechanical functions
4.1.1 Separator vibrates
NOTE
Some vibration is normal during the starting and stopping sequences when the separator passes
through its critical speed.
WARNING
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and corrected before the separator is restarted.
Excessive vibration may be due to incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the bowl.
Cause Corrective actions
Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the
- poor cleaning assembly and cleaning.
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other
separators.
Uneven sediment deposits in the sediment Dismantle and clean the separator bowl.
space.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and if necessary
adjust the height.
Bowl spindle bent (max 0,04 mm). Renew the bowl spindle.
Bearing(s) is damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.
Spindle top bearing spring broken. Renew all springs.
45
4.1 Mechanical functions 4 Trouble-tracing
4.1.2 Smell
Brake is applied. Release the brake.
Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
4.1.3 Noise
Too high or too low back pressure in outlet. Adjust.
Oil level in gear housing is too low. Check oil level and add oil if necessary.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop the separator, measure and adjust the
height.
Incorrect play between brake friction elements Adjust the play.

and belt pulley.
Flat belt is slipping. Tighten the flat belt.
4.1.4 Speed too low

Bowl is not closed or leaking. Dismantle the bowl and check.
Motor failure. Repair the motor.
Bearing(s) damaged. Renew all bearings.
Flat belt is slipping. Tighten the flat belt.
Faulty frequency converter drive. Stop and repair.
4.1.5 Speed too high

46
4 Trouble-tracing 4.1 Mechanical functions
4.1.6 Starting power too high
Liquid flows through the bowl. Stop the flow.
Motor not applicable for actual voltage / Check the rating plate on motor / change
frequency. motor.
Wrong direction of rotation. Change electrical phase connections to the

motor.
4.1.7 Starting power too low
Flat belt slipping. Tighten the flat belt.
4.1.8 Starting time too long
Liquid flows through the bowl. Stop the flow.
Height position of paring disc is incorrect. Stop, check and adjust the height.
Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.
4.1.9 Retardation time too long
Brake friction element is worn or oily. Renew or clean brake friction brake elements.
47
4.2 Separating functions 4 Trouble-tracing
4.2 Separating functions
4.2.1 Liquid flows through the

bowl casing drain and/or
sediment outlet
Sediment discharge or water draining in None (normal).

progress.
Strainer in operating water line is clogged or Clean the strainer and check water flows:
water pressure is too low. Displacement/conditioning water 1,3 l/min.
Opening water 16 l/min.
Closing water 8 l/min.
Channels in operating device are clogged. Clean the operating device.
O-ring at the flow control disc defective. Renew the O-ring.
Paring chamber defective. Renew the paring chamber.
Seal ring in the bowl hood defective. Renew the seal ring.
Sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom Smoothen sealing edge of the sliding bowl
defective. bottom or renew it.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all valve plugs.
Bowl speed too low. See section ‘‘4.1.4 Speed too low” on page 46.
48
4 Trouble-tracing 4.2 Separating functions
4.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating water supply is Clean the strainer.

clogged.
No water in the operating water system. Check the operating water system and make
sure the valve(s) are open.
Hoses between the supply valves and Correct.

separator are incorrectly fitted.
Nozzles in bowl body clogged. Clean the nozzles.
Square-sectioned ring in sliding bowl bottom is Renew the square-sectioned ring.

defective.
Valve plugs are defective. Renew all plugs.
Supply valve for opening water is leaking. Rectify the leak.
4.2.3 Bowl fails to open for

sediment discharge
Strainer in the operating water supply is Clean the strainer.

clogged.
Water flow too low. Check the opening water flow; 16 l/min.
Hoses between the supply valves and Correct.

separator are incorrectly fitted.
Nozzles in bowl body clogged. Clean the nozzles.
Seal ring in the operating slide is defective. Renew the seal ring.
49
4.2 Separating functions 4 Trouble-tracing
4.2.4 Unsatisfactory sediment

discharge
Valve plugs in the operating slide too high. Renew with correct valve plugs.
Sediment deposits in the operating system. Check and clean the operating system.
Too long discharge interval. Reduce the time between sediment

discharges.
4.2.5 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Incorrect separation temperature. Adjust.
Throughput too high. Adjust.
Disc stack is clogged. Clean disc stack.
Sediment space in bowl is filled. Clean and reduce the time between sediment
discharges.
Bowl speed too low. Examine the motor and power transmission
including the gear ratio.
Bowl rotates i wrong direction. Check the electrical connections to the motor.
50
Service & Maintenance Manual
Product No. 881222-01-04/1

Book No. 598889-02 Rev. 1
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB November 2011

2
Contents

1.4 Remote start 16
2 Service Instructions 17
2.1 Periodic maintenance 17

2.1.2 Maintenance intervals 17
2.1.3 Maintenance procedure 19
2.1.4 Service kits 19
2.2 Maintenance Logs 20
2.2.1 Daily checks 20
2.2.2 Oil change 20
2.2.3 IS - Intermediate Service 21
2.2.4 MS - Major Service 22
2.3 Cleaning 24
2.3.1 External cleaning 24
2.3.2 Cleaning agents 25
2.3.3 Cleaning of bowl discs 26
2.4 When changing oil 27
2.4.1 Oil change procedure 27
2.5 Lubricants 29
2.5.1 Lubrication chart 29
2.5.2 Recommended lubricating oils 30
2.5.3 Recommended oil brands (04) 31
2.5.4 Recommended Oil Brands (08) 34
2.5.5 Recommended lubricants 36
2.6 Vibration 40
2.6.1 Vibration analysis 40
3
2.7 Common maintenance directions 41
2.7.1 Ball and roller bearings 41
2.7.2 Before shutdowns 44
3 Dismantling/Assembly 45
3.1 Introduction 45
3.1.1 General directions 45
3.1.2 References to check-points 46
3.1.3 Tools 46
3.1.4 Tightening of screws 47
3.2 Intermediate Service (IS), dismantling 48
3.2.1 Inlet/outlet, frame hood and bowl 48
3.3 Intermediate Service (IS), check points 59
3.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring 59
3.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave 60
3.3.3 Corrosion 61
3.3.4 Cracks 63
3.3.5 Erosion 64
3.3.6 Guide surfaces 66
3.3.7 Lock ring; wear and damage 69
3.3.8 Nozzles in bowl body and operating water
ring 71
3.3.9 Inlet pipe 71
3.3.10 Operating mechanism 72
3.3.11 Operating slide 73
3.3.12 Sliding bowl bottom 73
3.3.13 Unbalance sensor 74
3.4 Intermediate Service (IS), assembly 75
3.4.2 Bowl, frame hood and inlet / outlet 75
3.5 Major Service (MS), dismantling 89
3.5.2 Cyclone (if applicable) ; sealing ring 89
3.5.3 Vertical driving device 90
3.6 Major Service (MS), check points 97
4
3.6.1 Brake 97
3.6.2 Buffer, buffer springs and bearing seat 100
3.6.3 Guide surfaces 101
3.6.4 Lock ring; priming 102
3.6.5 Speed sensor 104
3.7 Major Service (MS), assembly 105
3.7.2 Vertical driving device 106
3.8 Flat belt 113
3.8.1 Belt replacement 113
3.8.2 Tightening of flat belt 116
3.9 Belt pulley 119
3.9.1 Dismantling 119
3.9.2 Assembly 122
3.10 Oil filling device 125
3.10.1 Exploded views 125
3.10.2 Dismantling 126
3.10.3 Assembly 126
3.11 Frame feet 127
3.12 Speed sensor and junction box 128
3.12.1 Exploded view 128
3.12.2 Mounting 129
3.13 Unbalance sensor and junction box 133
3.13.1 Mounting 133
Index 141
5
6

serious accidents.

tools.
7
8

 Kinetic energy is high
 Great forces are generated
G0010421
 Stopping time is long

fatigue.
apply:
 Strictly follow the instructions for
 Ensure that personnel are competent and
S0151211
 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

9
 When power cables are connected,

unscrew.
S01512F1
 If excessive vibration occurs, stop
S01512N1
Alfa Laval.

S01512P1
 Check that the gear/pulley ratio is correct
serious break down.
S01512L1
 If the separator is run by a variable
allowed maximum, to avoid serious
break down by too high speed.
 Welding or heating of parts that rotate
S0151241
 Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. -mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite -mark by
more than specified distance.
S01512G1
 Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosive.
S01512H1
10
Entrapment hazards
 Make sure that rotating parts have come 

starting any dismantling work.
S01512O1


 

dismantling work.
S0151261

Electrical hazard
 Follow local regulations for electrical

S0151271
dismantling work.
11
Crush hazards
 Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.


S01512M1


S01512Y1
Noise hazards
 Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0151291
Burn hazards
 Lubrication oil, machine parts and

S01512A1
12
 When using chemical cleaning agents,

S01512D1
protection etc.
 Use of lubricants in various situations.
Cut hazards
 Sharp edges, especially on bowl discs,

S01512B1
Flying objects
 Risk for accidental release of snap rings

S01512C1
Health hazard
 Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

S01512V1
13

DANGER
Type of hazard

WARNING
Type of hazard

CAUTION
Type of hazard

NOTE
in property damage.
14
Unpacking
Maintenance
regulations.
site.
regulations.
15
1.3 Requirements of
personnel
maintenance staff.
 Skilled person: A person with technical
create.
 Instructed person: A person adequately
can create.
1.4 Remote start

position where the separator cannot be seen or
heard the power isolation device shall be
equipped with an interlock device to prevent that a
remote start command could result in liquid being
fed to the separator when it is shut down for
service.
apart or been standing still for a long time shall
always be manually supervised locally.
16
2 Service Instructions
2.1 Periodic maintenance
2.1.1 Introduction
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces the
risk of unexpected stoppages and breakdowns.
Follow the maintenance logs on the following
pages in order to facilitate periodic maintenance.
WARNING
Separator parts that are either worn beyond

their safe limits or incorrectly assembled may
cause severe damage or fatal injury.
2.1.2 Maintenance intervals

The following directions for periodic maintenance
give a brief description of which parts to be
cleaned, checked and renewed at different
maintenance intervals.
The maintenance logs for each maintenance
interval later in this chapter give detailed enume-
ration of the check points that must be done.
Daily checks consist of minor check points to
carry out for detecting abnormal operating
conditions.
Oil change
The oil change interval is every 1500 hours or at
least once every year if the total number of
operating hours is less than 1500 hours.
When using a group D oil, time of operation
between oil changes can be extended from the
normal 1500 hours to 2000 hours.
17
2.1 Periodic maintenance 2 Service Instructions
Intermediate Service (IS)

Intermediate Service consists of an overhaul of
the separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
device every 3 months or 2000 operating hours.
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed.
Major Service (MS)

Major Service consists of an overhaul of the
complete separator and includes an Intermediate
Service every 12 months or 8000 operating
hours. Seals and bearings in the bottom part are
renewed.
3S - 3-year Service
3-year Service consists of:
- renewing of frame feet (the feet get harder
with increased use and age).
- renewing of bottom bearing holder.
Periodic maintenance schedule

Oil change
Intermediate Service = IS
Major Service = MS
3-year Service = 3S
3S
MS MS MS
IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
Installation 1st year 2nd year 3rd year
18
2 Service Instructions 2.1 Periodic maintenance
2.1.3 Maintenance procedure

At each Intermediate and Major Service, take a
copy of the service Log and use it for notations
during the service.
An Intermediate and Major Service should be
carried out in the following manner:
1. Dismantle the parts as mentioned in the
service log and described in chapter ‘‘3
Dismantling/Assembly” on page 45.
2. Place the separator parts on clean, soft
surfaces such as pallets.
3. Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
parts according to the service log.
4. Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as described
in chapter ‘‘3 Dismantling/Assembly” on page
45. The assembly instructions have
references to check points which should be
carried out during the assembly.
2.1.4 Service kits

Special service kits are available for Intermediate
Service (IS) and Major Service (MS). For other
services the spare parts have to be ordered
separately.
Note that the parts for IS are not included in the
S0021031
MS kit.
The contents of the service kits are described in Kits are available for Intermediate Service and
the Spare Parts Catalogue. Major Service
Parts for 3S are not included in any service kit
and therefore has to be ordered separately.
For hermetic designed separators, the seal (not
included in any service kit) shall be renewed only
when it has been damaged. It is recommended
that always keep one complete seal in stock.
NOTE
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty will become invalid.
Alfa Laval takes no responsibility for the safe
operation of the equipment if non-genuine
spare parts are used.
19
2.2 Maintenance Logs 2 Service Instructions
2.2 Maintenance Logs
2.2.1 Daily checks

The necessary daily checks to be carried out for a
safe operation are enumerated in chapter
Running in the Operator´s Manual.
2.2.2 Oil change

The oil change should be carried out every 15001)
hours of operation.
Main component and activity Part Page Notes
Vertical driving device

Renew Oil in oil sump2) 27
When the separator is running for short periods,

the lubricating oil must be changed every 12
months even if the total number of operating
hours is less than 1500 hours (2000 h).
1) When using a group D oil, time of operation

between oil changes can be extended from the
normal 1500 hours to 2000 hours.
2) See chapter Lubricants in the Service &
Maintenance Manual for further information.
20
2 Service Instructions 2.2 Maintenance Logs
2.2.3 IS - Intermediate Service

Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No: 881222-01-04
Date: Signature:

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect Threads of inlet pipe 71
Connecting housing —
Separator bowl
Clean and check Small lock ring —
 Paring chamber —
 Paring chamber cover —
 Bowl hood 59
 Top disc —
 Bowl discs 26
 Distributor —
 Sliding bowl bottom 66, 72, 73
 Operating water ring 71
 Operating slide  66, 72, 73
 Bowl body 66, 71, 72
 Large lock ring 69
 Distributing ring 66, 72
 Valve plug 72, 73
Paring disc —
Check Corrosion 61
Cracks 63
Erosion 64
Guide surfaces 66
Disc stack pressure 83
Check Bowl spindle cone —
Oil filling device
Clean and check Oil filling device 27
Electrical motor
Lubrication (if nipples are fitted) See sign on motor —
Signs and labels on separator
Check attachment and legibility Safety label —
Monitoring equipment
Function check Unbalance sensor 74
Note!Renew all parts included in the Intermediate

Service kit (IS).
21
2.2 Maintenance Logs 2 Service Instructions
2.2.4 MS - Major Service
Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: VNPX 507SGD-31GC/GCS Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No: 881222-01-04
Date: Signature:

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect Threads of inlet pipe 71
Connecting housing —
Separator bowl
Clean and check Small lock ring —
 Paring chamber —
 Paring chamber cover —
 Bowl hood 59
 Top disc —
 Bowl discs 26
 Distributor —
 Sliding bowl bottom 66, 72, 73, 101
 Operating water ring 71
 Operating slide  66, 72, 73, 101
 Bowl body 66, 71, 72, 101
 Large lock ring 69, 102
 Distributing ring 66, 72, 101
 Valve plug 72, 73
Paring disc —
Check Corrosion 61
Cracks 63
Erosion 64
Guide surfaces 66, 101
Disc stack pressure 83
Height position of outlet paring 
disc 86
Clean and check Bowl spindle —
 Buffer, buffer springs and 
bearing seat 100
Check Radial wobble of bowl spindle 109
Flat belt
Renew Flat belt 113
22
2 Service Instructions 2.2 Maintenance Logs

Oil filling device
Clean and check Oil filling device 27
Clean Oil sump 27
Brake
Check Arm and springs 97
Signs and labels on separator
Check attachment and legibility Safety label —
Monitoring equipment
Check Speed sensor 104
Function check Unbalance sensor 74
Note!Renew all parts included in the Intermediate

Service kit (IS) and Major Service kit (MS).
23
2.3 Cleaning 2 Service Instructions
2.3 Cleaning
2.3.1 External cleaning

The external cleaning of the frame and motor
should be restricted to brushing, sponging or
wiping while the motor is running or is still hot.
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream. Totally enclosed motors can be damaged
by direct hosing to the same extent as open
motors and even more than those, because:
 Many operators believe that these motors are
sealed, and normally they are not.
 A water jet played on these motors will
produce an internal vacuum, which will suck
the water between the metal-to-metal contact
surfaces into the windings, and this water
cannot escape.
G0613511
 Water directed on a hot motor may cause
condensation resulting in short-circuiting and
internal corrosion. Use a sponge or cloth and brush when cleaning
Be careful even when the motor is equipped with

a protecting hood. Never play a water jet on the
ventilation grill of the hood.
G0613611
Never wash down a separator with a direct water

stream. Never play a water jet on the motor.
24
2 Service Instructions 2.3 Cleaning
2.3.2 Cleaning agents

When using chemical cleaning agents, make sure
you follow the general rules and suppliers’
recommendations regarding ventilation,
protection of personnel, etc.
For separator bowl, inlet and outlet

A chemical cleaning agent must dissolve the
deposits quickly without attacking the material of
the separator parts.
CAUTION
Skin irritation hazard
Read the instructions on the label of the

plastic container before using the cleaning
liquid.
Always wear safety goggles, gloves and
protective clothing as the liquid is alkaline
and dangerous to skin and eyes.
For operating mechanism

Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime
deposits. The acid should be heated to 80°C.
For parts of the driving devices

Use white spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene or
diesel oil.
Oiling (protect surfaces against corrosion)

Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against
corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are not
assembled after cleaning must be wiped and
coated with a thin layer of clean oil and protected
from dust and dirt.
25
2.3 Cleaning 2 Service Instructions
2.3.3 Cleaning of bowl discs
Bowl discs
Handle the bowl discs carefully so as to avoid
damage to the surfaces during cleaning.
NOTE
Mechanical cleaning is likely to scratch the
disc surfaces causing deposits to form
quicker and adhere more firmly.
A gentle chemical cleaning is therefore
preferable to mechanical cleaning.
1. Remove the bowl discs from the distributor

and lay them down, one by one, in the
cleaning agent.
G0065831
2. Let the discs remain in the cleaning agent
until the deposits have been dissolved. This Put the discs one by one into the cleaning agent
will normally take between two and four
hours.
3. Finally clean the discs with a SOFT brush.
G0065841
Clean the discs with a soft brush
26
2 Service Instructions 2.4 When changing oil
2.4 When changing oil
2.4.1 Oil change procedure

The separator should be level and at standstill
when oil is filled or the oil level is checked. At
standstill the oil level is lower than in operation.
The MIN-line refers to the oil level at standstill.
NOTE
Before adding or renewing lubricating oil in
the worm gear housing, the information
concerning different oil groups, handling of
oils, oil change intervals etc. given in chapter
Lubricants in the Service & Maintenance
Manual.
1. Put a vessel under the oil filling device.
G0155521
2. Pull out (A) the oil filling device and turn it half
a turn (B).
CAUTION
Burn hazards
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces

G0068911
can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
27
2.4 When changing oil 2 Service Instructions
3. Collect the oil.
NOTE
When changing from one oil group to
another, the oil sump and the spindle parts
must first be thoroughly cleaned.
G0155511
4. Turn (A) the oil filling device back to the
position (B).
G0069121
5. Fill the oil sump with new oil. The oil level
should be exactly in the middle of the sight
glass.
Oil volume: approx. 2 litres.
6. Push in the oil filling device.
G0475421
Oil volume 2 litres
28
2 Service Instructions 2.5 Lubricants
2.5 Lubricants
2.5.1 Lubrication chart

Alfa Laval ref. 553216-01 rev. 8
Lubricating points Type of lubricant Interval

The oil bath. See "Lubricating oils". Oil Change:
Bowl spindle bearings are Volume: see Technical data in 1. Continuous operation:
lubricated by oil splash from the Installation manual. 2000h
the oil bath.
2. Seasonal operation:
Before every operating
period
3. Short period's operation:
12 months even if total
number of operating hours
is less than stated above.
Bowl spindle taper Lubricating oil, only a few At assembly.
drops for rust protection.
Bowl: Pastes as specified in At assembly.
Sliding contact surfaces, "Lubricants".
thread of lock nut and cap nut.
Rubber seal rings Grease as specified in At assembly.
"Lubricants".
Friction coupling ball The bearings are packed with -
bearings grease and sealed and need
Not valid for rigid coupling no extra lubrication
Electric motor Follow manufacturer's Follow manufacturer's
instructions instructions.
Threads Lubricating oil, if not otherwise At assembly.
stated.
NOTE
The Lubrication chart can be complemented with more detailed charts, showing the lubricating
points in detail and what type of lubricants to use.
Instructions related to a specific design of the machine refer to general assembly drawings.
If not otherwise specified, follow the supplier's instructions about applying, handling and storing
of lubricants.
CAUTION
Check the oil level before start.

Top up when necessary.
Oil volume = see “Technical Data”.
29
2.5 Lubricants 2 Service Instructions
2.5.2 Recommended lubricating

oils
Alfa Laval ref. 553219-09, rev. 1
Type of frame: D /D and P /P with motor

< 7,5 kW.
Two different groups of lubricating oils are
approved. They are designated as Alfa Laval
lubricating oil groups A and D. The numerical
value after the letter states the viscosity grade.
The corresponding commercial oil brands

according to document 553218-04 and 553218-
08.
Ambient Alfa Laval lubricating Time in operation

temperature °C oil group Oil change interval
Between +5 and +45 A/150 1500 h
Between +2 and +65 D/220 2000 h
Note:
 When the separator is running for short
periods, lubricating oil must be changed
every 12 months even if the total number of
operating hours is less than stated in the
recommendations above.
 Check and prelubricate spindle bearings on
separators which have been out of service for
6 months or longer.
 In seasonal operation: change oil before
every operating period.
30
2.5.3 Recommended oil brands

(04)
Alfa Laval ref. 553218-04, rev. 6
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil category

(ISO-L-) HM 150
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 150.
The oil shall follow the requirements in one of the
standards below.
Standard Designation
ISO 11158, (ISO 6743/4) ISO-L-HM or HV 150
ISO 12925-1, (ISO 6743/6) ISO-L-CKC or CKE 150
DIN 51524 part 2 or 3 (German standard) DIN 51524 - HLP or HVLP 150
DIN 51517 part 3 DIN 51517 - CLP 150
The following is a list of recommended oil brands.

Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country. Other oil brands may be used
as long as they have equivalently quality as the
brands recommended. For use of other brands
please contact the oil company for there advises
of correct choice of oil.
Brands with Alfa Laval article number are
approved and recommended for use.
31
Alfa Laval lubrication oil group A
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 150

Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI >95
Manufacturer Designation
Alfa Laval 546098-81 4 litres

546098-83 1 litre
BP Bartran 150
Bartran HV 150
Energol SHF-HV 150
Castrol Alpha ZN 150

Hyspin AWH(-M) 150
Hyspin AWS 150
Chevron Meropa 150

Rando HD 150
Paper Machine oil XL 150
ExxonMobil Mobil DTE PM 150

Mobil DTE 10 excel 150
Mobil Vacuoline 528 (ISO VG 150)
Nuto H 150
Mobilgear 600 XP 150
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Haydn 150
Shell Morlina 150

Morlina S2 B 150
Statoil LubeWay XA 150
Total Azolla ZS 150

Lubmarine Visga 150
32
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil category HM

150 for hygienic applications.
Conform to U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) requirements of lubricants with incidental
food contact, Title CFR 21 178.3570, 178.3620
and/or those generally regarded as safe (US 21
CFR 182).
Lubrication oils for food and hygienic applications
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 150

Viscosity index (ISO 2909) VI >95
Bel-Ray Bel-Ray No-Tox Gear Oil 85

Bel-Ray No-Tox Anti-Wear 40
ExxonMobil Mobil DTE FM 150 (Mineral/PAO)
Fiske Brothers Lubriplate FMO-AW 900
Total (Keystone) Nevastane EP 150
The hygienic oil on the list is in the online “NSF

White BookTM Listing” at the time of the
revision of this document. For more information
about the NSF registration and up to date
H1 registration, see www.nsf.org (http://
www.nsf.org/business/nonfood_compounds/)
33
2.5.4 Recommended Oil Brands

(08)
Alfa Laval ref. 553218-08 rev. 6
Synthetic lubricating oil, category PAO (ISO-L-

) CKE 220
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 220.
The following are lists of recommended oil
brands. Trade names and designations might vary
from country to country, contact your local oil
supplier for more information.
Brands with Alfa Laval article number are
approved and recommended for use.
Alfa Laval lubrication oil group D
Alfa Laval 542690-80 20 litres

542690-81 4 litres
BP Enersyn HTX 220

Enersyn EP-XF 220
Castrol Alphasyn EP 220

Alphasyn HG 220
Optigear Synthetic A 220
Chevron (Texaco/Caltex) Pinnacle EP 220

Tegra Synthetic Gear Lubricant 220
Pinnacle Marine Gear 220
ExxonMobil Mobil SHC 630
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Schumann 220
Shell Shell Morlina S4 B 220

Omala RL 220
Statoil Mereta 220
Total Carter SH 220

Elf Epona SA 220
34
The lists of recommended oil brands are not

complete. Other oil brands may be used as long
as they have equivalently quality as the brands
recommended. The oil must have the same
viscosity class and ought to follow the ISO
standard 12925-1, category ISO-L-CKC, CKD,
CKE or CKT (ISO 6743-6) or DIN 51517, part 3
CLP, but shall have a synthetic base oil of
polyalphaolefin type (PAO) instead of mineral
base oil. The oil must be endorsed for worm gear
with brass worm wheel. The use of other
lubricants than recommended is done on the
exclusive responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Synthetic lubricating oil, category PAO (ISO-L-

) CKE 220 for 
hygienic applications
Conform to U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) requirements of lubricants with 
incidental food contact, Title CRF 21 178.3570,
178.3620 and/or those generally regarded 
as safe (US 21 CRF 182).
Lubrication oils for food and hygienic applications
Shell Cassida fluid GL 220

The hygienic oil on the list is in the online “NSF
White BookTM Listing” at the time of the
revision of this document. For more information
about the NSF registration and up to date
H1 registration, see www.nsf.org (http://
www.nsf.org/business/nonfood_compounds/)
35
2.5.5 Recommended lubricants

Alfa Laval ref. 553217-01, rev. 11
NOTE
The data in the below tables is based on supplier information in regards to
lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from country to country. Please
contact your local supplier for more information.
Brands with Alfa Laval article number are approved and recommended for
use.
Pastes:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Dow Corning Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02 (1000 g)
Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-03 (100 g)
Molykote G-rapid plus (Paste) 537086-04 (50 g)
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 705
Gleitmo 805K
Klüber Wolfracoat C (Paste)
Rocol Dry Moly Paste

MT-LM
Bonded coatings:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Dow Corning Molykote D321R (Spray) 535586-01 (375 g)
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or spray)
36
Pastes for hygienic applications (NSF

registered H1 is preferred):
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment Alfa Laval No
Dow Corning Molykote P1900 NSF Registered H1

(7 Jan 2004)
Molykote TP 42
Molykote D
Bremer & Leguil, Geralyn F.L.A. NSF Registered H1

Fuchs Lubritech (2 April 2003)
German § 5 Absatz
1 LMBG approved
Geralyn 2 NSF Registered H1 561764-01 (50g)

(3 Sep 2004)
Gleitmo 805 DVGW (KTW)

approval for drinking
water (TZW
prüfzeugnis)
Gleitmo 1809 554336-01
Klüber Klüberpaste UH1 NSF Registered H1

96-402 (25 Feb 2004)
Klüberpaste UH1 NSF Registered H1

84-201 (26 Aug 2005)
Klüberpaste 46 MR White; contains no

401 lead, cadmium,
nickel, sulphur nor
halogens.
Rocol Foodlube Multi NSF Registered H1

Paste (13 Apr 2001)
37
Silicone grease for rubber rings:
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment Alfa Laval No.
Dow Corning (Molykote) 111 Conform to the FDA 539474-02 (100

(Compound) regulations (21 CFR g)
178.3570) for occasional
food contact. Certified: 539474-03 (25 g)
National Water Council UK
and WRC, UK. Certified:
food industry as per
Chemical Testing
Laboratory Dr. Böhm,
Munich.
Molykote G-5032 NSF Registered H1 (June 569415-01 (50 g)

3 2005)
Bremer & Chemplex 750 DVGW approved

Leguil, according to the German
Fuchs KTW-recommendations
Lubritech for drinking water.
Geralyn SG MD 2 NSF Registered H1 (30

March 2007)
Klüber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German

Environmental Agency on
hygiene requirements for
tap water. Certified by
DVGW-KTW, WRC,
AS4020, ACS.
Paraliq GTE 703 NSF Registered H1 (25

Feb 2004)
Complies with LMBG and
the European standard EN
1672, part 2.
Bel-Ray No-Tox Silicone NSF Registered H1 (19

Valve Seal June 2002)
MMCC ALCO 220 NSF Registered H1 (25

March 2002)
Rocol Foodlube Hi- NSF Registered H1 (18

Temp April 2001)
38
Greases for ball and roller bearings:
NOTE
Always follow the specific recommendation for lubrication as
advised by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
Castrol APS 2 Spheerol EPL 2
Chevron Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2

Texaco Multifak AFB 2
Dow Corning Molykote G-0101 Molykote Multilub
ExxonMobil Beacon EP2
Unirex N2
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2
Fuchs Lubritech Lagermeister EP2
Q8/Kuwait Rembrandt EP2

Petroleum
Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2
SKF LGEP 2
LGMT 2
LGFB 2 NSF Registered H1

(14 Sept 2005)
Total Multis EP2
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
39
2.6 Vibration 2 Service Instructions
2.6 Vibration
2.6.1 Vibration analysis

Excessive vibration or noise indicates that some-
thing is incorrect. Stop the separator and identify
the cause.
Use vibration analysis instrument to periodically
check and record the level of vibration. See the
illustration where to take measurements. The
level of vibration should not exceed 7,1 mm/s.
WARNING
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator
G0617041
and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
and corrected before the separator is Measuring points for vibration analysis
restarted. Excessive vibration can be due to
incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the
bowl.
40
2 Service Instructions 2.7 Common maintenance directions
2.7 Common
maintenance
directions
2.7.1 Ball and roller bearings

Special-design bearings for the bowl spindle
The bearings used for the bowl spindle are
special to withstand the speed, vibration,
temperature and load characteristics of high-
speed separators.
G0587311
Only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts should be
used.
A. Outer race
A bearing that in appearance looks equivalent to B. Ball/roller
the correct may be considerably different in C. Inner race
various respects: inside clearances, design and D. Cage
tolerances of the cage and races as well as
material and heat treatment.
NOTE
Using an incorrect bearing can cause a
serious breakdown with injury to personnel
and damage to equipment as a result.
Do not re-fit a used bearing. Always replace
it with a new one.
Dismantling
Remove the bearing from its seat by using a
puller. If possible, let the puller engage the inner
ring, then remove the bearing with a steady force
until the bearing bore completely clears the entire
length of the cylindrical seat.
The puller should be accurately centered during
dismantling; otherwise, it is easy to damage the
seating.
G0587411
NOTE
Do not hit with a hammer directly on the
bearing.
41
2.7 Common maintenance directions 2 Service Instructions
Cleaning and inspection

Check shaft (spindle) end and/or bearing seat in
the housing for damage indicating that the
bearing has rotated on the shaft (spindle) and/or
in the housing respectively. Replace the damaged
part, if the faults cannot be remedied by polishing
or in some other way.
Assembly
 Leave new bearings in original wrapping until
ready to fit. The anti-rust agent protecting a
new bearing should not be removed before
use.
 Use the greatest cleanliness when handling
the bearings.
 To facilitate assembly and also reduce the
risk of damage, first clean and then lightly
smear the bearing seating on shaft (spindle)
or alternatively in housing, with a thin oil.
G0587511
 When assembling ball bearings, the bearings
must be heated in clean oil or an inductive-
heater to max 125 °C.
NOTE
Heat the bearing in a clean container with a
cover.
G0587611
Use only clean oil with a kindling temperature

above 250 °C. Clean oil
The bearing must be well covered by the oil
and not be in direct contact with the sides or
the bottom of the container. Place the
bearing on some kind of support or
suspended in the oil bath.
G0963311
Inductive-heater
42
2 Service Instructions 2.7 Common maintenance directions
 There are several basic rules for assembling

cylindrical bore bearings:
- Never directly strike a bearing’s rings, cage
or rolling elements while assembling. A ring
may crack or metal fragments break off.
- Never apply pressure to one ring in order to
assemble the other.
- Use an ordinary hammer. Hammers with
soft metal heads are unsuitable as
fragments of the metal may break off and
enter the bearing.
- Make sure the bearing is assembled at a
right angle to the shaft (spindle).
 If necessary use a driving-on sleeve that
abuts the ring which is to be assembled with
an interference fit, otherwise there is a risk
that the rolling elements and raceways may
be damaged and premature failure may
follow.
G0587711
Angular contact ball bearings
Always fit single-row angular contact ball bearings
with the wide shoulder of the inner race facing the
axial load (upwards on a bowl spindle). G0587211
 Bearings fitted with two seals (1) are filled

with grease at delivery.
NOTE
These bearings should not be heated
G0873211
before fitting.
If heated, the grease in the bearings will
be dissolved and the lifespan of the Bearing with two seals (1)
bearings will be considerably reduced.
43
2.7 Common maintenance directions 2 Service Instructions
2.7.2 Before shutdowns

Before the separator is shut-down for a period of
time, the following must be carried out:
 Remove the bowl, according to instructions in
chapter 6.
NOTE
The bowl must not be left on the spindle
during standstill for more than one week.
Vibration in foundations can be transmitted to
the bowl and produce one-sided loading of
the bearings. The resultant indentations in
the ball bearing races can cause premature
bearing failure.
 Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against

corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are
not assembled after cleaning must be wiped
and protected against dust and dirt.
 If the separator has been shut-down for more
than 3 months but less than 12 months, an
Intermediate Service (IS) has to be made. If
the shut-down period has been longer than
12 months, a Major Service (MS) should be
carried out.
 Release the belt tension.
44
3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 General directions

The separator must be dismantled regularly for
cleaning and inspection.
The recommended intervals are stated in chapter
‘‘2.1.2 Maintenance intervals” on page 17.
WARNING
Entrapment hazard
1. Make sure that rotating parts have come

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
The motor fan indicates if separator is
rotating or not. Also check the speed
sensor.
S0051011
If the control system indicates that the
speed sensor is not operating and if the
motor fan is not rotating, first check that Lock power supply before starting dismantling
the belt is in place by looking behind the
cover in the frame bottom part before
starting dismantling the separator.
2. To avoid accidental start, switch off and
dismantling work.
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must be

lifted by hoist. Position the hoist directly above the
bowl centre. Use an endless sling and a lifting
hook with catch.
These parts must be handled carefully.
Do not place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
45
3.1 Introduction 3 Dismantling/Assembly
NOTE
Never interchange bowl parts
To prevent mixing of parts, e.g. an installation
comprising several machines of the same
type, the major bowl parts carry the machine
manufacturing number or its last three digits.
3.1.2 References to check-points

In the beginning of each sub-chapter describing
the assembly you will find references to the check
point instructions included in separate chapters
located after the dismantling chapters. The
references appear in the text as in the following
example:
✔ Check point
‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces” on page 66.
It is assumed that these check points are done
before starting the assembly.
3.1.3 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used for
dismantling and assembly. The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue and are
shown as illustrations together with the
dismantling/assembly instructions.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight
specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
46
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.1 Introduction
3.1.4 Tightening of screws

When tightening screws, use the torques stated in
the table below unless otherwise stated. The
figures apply to oiled, stainless screws tightened
with a torque wrench.
METRIC THREAD
Torque in Nm
Stainless Carbon
steel steel
Thread
M6 7 8
M8 17 20
M10 33 39
M12 57 68
M16 140 155
M20 275 325
M24 470 570
47
3.2 Intermediate Service (IS), dismantling 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.2 Intermediate Service

(IS), dismantling
3.2.1 Inlet/outlet, frame hood and

bowl
1. Inlet bend
2. O-ring
3. Snap ring
4. Nut
5. Screw
6. Washer
7. Outlet housing for axial seal
8. O-ring
9. Sealing, static part
10. O-ring
11. Ring
12. Height adjusting ring(s)
13. Frame hood
14. Outlet housing, standard
G0145661
Note that the outlet housing is fitted with or without a

hermetic axial seal
48
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.2 Intermediate Service (IS), dismantling
15. Small lock ring

16. Screw and washer
17. Flange
18. O-ring
19. Sealing, rotary part
20. O-ring
21. Paring chamber cover for axial seal
22. Large lock ring
23. O-ring
24. Bowl hood
25. Seal ring
26. O-ring
27. Paring chamber cover, standard
28. Inlet pipe, complete
A. O-ring
B. Paring disc
22
C. O-ring
D. Inlet pipe
G0146141
Note that the paring chamber is fitted with or without a

hermetic axial seal
49
G0146631
The separator is delivered with one of two different versions of disc stack
29. O-ring 35. Bowl discs (Ø190), min. 142 pcs 41. Distributing ring
30. Top disc 36. Erosion liner 42. O-ring
31. Bowl discs (Ø190), min. 8 pcs 37. O-ring 43. Rectangular ring
32. Bowl discs (Ø220), 89 pcs 38. Sliding bowl bottom 44. Valve plug
33. Bowl discs (Ø190), 45 pcs 39. Rectangular ring 45. Operating slide
34. Distributor 40. Screw 46. Rectangular ring
50
47. Cap nut

48. O-ring
49. Rectangular ring
50. O-ring
51. O-ring
52. O-ring
53. Bowl body
54. Nozzle
55. O-ring
56. Operating water ring
57. Nozzle
58. O-ring
G0147121
51
1. Loosen and remove the hoses (pipes)

connected to the in and outlet housing.
2. Unscrew the nut.
Left-hand thread!
S0065911
G0145831
S0113411
In the case of complete dismantling, remove

the snap ring that secures the inlet bend and
lift out the bend.
If frame hood is fitted with flexible hose,
disconnect the flexible hose from the frame hood
by loosen nut (35).
G0145671
Flexible hose connection
3. Lift off the frame hood. If removing two

screws fixing the outlet housing to the frame
hood, the two lifting eye bolts (M10, included
in the Tool kit) can be screwed into the holes
in the hood thus making it possible to lift the
hood by means of a hoist.
G0153051
52
4. Unscrew the small lock ring using the

spanner for lock ring. Remove the paring
chamber.
Left-hand thread!
S0112611
S0113411
G0145951
5. Carefully prise loose the paring chamber
cover by means of a screw driver. Remove
the cover. Lift out the inlet pipe with paring
disc.
G0146241
6. The paring chamber cover for hermetic
design (A) is fitted with a wear ring, a part of
the axial seal. This seal shall only be
dismantled if the seal has to be renewed.
NOTE
 Always observe the greatest cleanliness
G07105K1
when handling the axial seal.

 Avoid any damage to the sealing A. Paring chamber cover with hermetic axial seal
surfaces. B. Paring chamber cover, standard
53
7. Apply the brake. Unscrew the large lock ring

as described below.
NOTE
 Use of substitute tools can damage the
equipment.
 Use only the compression tool as
instructed.
a. Fit the spanner to the large lock ring and

secure it with the bolt (a).
G0146341
S0112711
b. Fit the compression tool and screw the

central screw (b) down into the distributor
until it stops.
S0112811
c. Compress the disc stack by tightening the

nut (c) very firmly.
8. Unscrew the large lock ring by striking the
spanner with a tin hammer.
Left-hand thread!
S0113411
CAUTION
G0146441
Cut hazards
Sharp edges on the large lock ring may

cause cuts.
9. Unscrew the nut of the compression tool

sufficiently to decompress the disc stack.
54
10. Lift out the bowl hood by using the lifting tool
for the small lock ring.
S0113311
If the bowl hood sticks in the bowl body,
remove the compression tool and fit the nut
(a), screw (b) and the lifting tool. Together
with an adjustable wrench the bowl hood can
now be forced out.
G0374541
S0113211
CAUTION
Crush hazard
If the top disc is stuck into the bowl hood,

remove it now before it accidentally falls out.
11. Lift out the distributor with bowl discs and the
top disc. Use the compression tool.
a. After removal, loosen the nut of the
compression tool and turn the unit, with
the tool still attached, upside down and
strike the central screw of the tool against
a firm base. This will facilitate loosening
of the top disc.
b. Remove the tool.
CAUTION
Cut hazards
G0146731
Sharp edges on the bowl discs may cause

cuts.
55
12. Remove deposits and clean all parts

thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. See
chapter ‘‘2.3 Cleaning” on page 24“.
13. Fit the lifting tool onto the sliding bowl bottom
and lift it out.
S0112911
Ease off the sliding bowl bottom by using the

central screw of the tool.
G0146841
14. Unscrew the three screws in the bottom of the
bowl body.
G0146941
15. Fit the dismantling tool on bowl body. Fasten

the screws of the tool in distributing ring.
S0112511
G0147041
Loosen the distributing ring by tightening the

nuts one turn at a time.
Lift out the distributing ring.
56
16. Remove the operating slide in the same way

as the distributing ring.
17. Unscrew the cap nut.
Left-hand thread!
S0113511
S0113411
G0147241
18. Remove the bowl body as follows:
a. Unscrew the central screw of the lifting
tool as far as possible.
b. Screw the tool onto the bowl body nave.
S0113011
c. Ease off the bowl body by screwing down

the central screw.
G0147341
d. Lift off the bowl body using hoist.
19. Lift out the operating water ring, which may
have fallen down on the distributing cover in
the frame. If not, the ring may still be in its
place on the underside of the bowl body.
G0147461
57
20. Remove the seal rings from sliding bowl

bottom, distributing ring, operating slide and
bowl body using compressed air.
Note! Only one of the six radial holes in the
distributing ring connects to a hole that
admits compressed air.
21. Remove any thick deposits in the frame top
part and clean all other parts thoroughly in a
suitable cleaning agent. See chapter ‘‘2.3
Cleaning” on page 24.
After dismantled all parts for Intermediate

Service, remove any thick deposits in the frame
top part and clean all other parts thoroughly in a
suitable cleaning agent. See ‘‘2.3 Cleaning” on
page 24.
If carry out a Major Service, proceed the

dismantling of the separator. The dismantling
instructions continue in ‘‘3.5 Major Service (MS),
dismantling” on page 89.
G0147541
58
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.3 Intermediate Service (IS), check points

(IS), check points
3.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage of process liquid from the bowl.
Renew the bowl hood seal ring at each
Intermediate Service (IS) or if the ring is damaged
or indented more than 1 mm.
Replacing the seal ring:
1. Knock out the old ring by means of a pin
inserted in the holes intended for this
purpose.
2. Press the ring into the groove with a straight
wooden board placed across the ring.
NOTE
If the new ring is too narrow, place it in hot
water (70-80 °C) for about 5 minutes.
G0152021
If it is too wide, it will shrink after drying in 
80-90 °C for about 24 hours.
A = maximum 1,0 mm
59
3.3 Intermediate Service (IS), check points 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl

body nave
Impact marks on the spindle cone or in the bowl
body nave may cause poor fit and out-of-balance
vibrations.
The bowl spindle and the nave should also be
checked if the bowl spindle has been dismantled
or if the bowl runs roughly.
Corrosion may cause the bowl to stick firmly to
the spindle cone and cause difficulties during the
next dismantling.
 Remove any impact marks with a scraper
and/or whetstone.
Rust can be removed by using a fine-grain emery
cloth (e.g. No 320). Finish with polishing paper
(e.g. No 600).
NOTE
G0156731
Always use a scraper with great care. The
conical form must not be marred.
Check for impact marks and corrosion
60
3.3.3 Corrosion
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled. Main bowl parts such as the bowl
body, bowl hood and lock ring must be inspected
with particular care for corrosion damage.
WARNING
Disintegration hazard
G0206151
Inspect regularly for corrosion damage.
Inspect frequently if the process liquid is
corrosive.
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if

you suspect that the largest depth of the
corrosion damage exceeds 1,0 mm or if cracks
have been found. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and given
clearance for operation by Alfa Laval.
Cracks or damage forming a line should be
considered as being particularly hazardous.
Non-stainless steel and cast iron parts

Corrosion (rusting) can occur on unprotected
surfaces of non-stainless steel and cast iron.
Frame parts can corrode when exposed to an
aggressive environment.
61
Stainless steel
Stainless steel parts corrode when in contact with
either chlorides or acidic solutions. Acidic
solutions causes a general corrosion. The
chloride corrosion is characterised by local
damage such as pitting, grooves or cracks. The
S0020611
risk of chloride corrosion is higher if the surface is:
 Exposed to a stationary solution.
 In a crevice.
 Covered by deposits.
 Exposed to a solution that has a low pH
value.
A corrosion damage caused by chlorides on
stainless steel begins as small dark spots that
can be difficult to detect.
1. Inspect closely for all types of damage by
corrosion and record these observations
carefully.
2. Polish dark-coloured spots and other
corrosion marks with a fine grain emery cloth.
S0020511
This may prevent further damage.
WARNING
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate

cracks beneath the surface. All forms of
cracks are a potential danger and are totally
unacceptable.
Replace the part if corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or
function.
62
Other metal parts

Separator parts made of materials other than
steel, such as brass or other copper alloys, can
also be damaged by corrosion when exposed to
an aggressive environment. Possible corrosion
damage can be in the form of pits and/or cracks.
3.3.4 Cracks
Cracks can initiate on the machine after a period
of operation and propagate with time.
 Cracks often initiate in an area exposed to
high cyclic material stresses. These are
called fatigue cracks.
 Cracks can also initiate due to corrosion in an
aggressive environment.
 Although very unlikely, cracks may also occur
due to the low temperature embrittlement of
certain materials.
The combination of an aggressive environment
and cyclic stresses will speed-up the formation of
cracks. Keeping the machine and its parts clean
and free from deposits will help to prevent
corrosion attacks.
WARNING
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous

as they reduce the strength and functional
ability of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
It is particularly important to inspect for cracks in

rotating parts and especially the pillars between
the sediment ports in the bowl wall.
you suspect that the largest depth of the damage
exceeds 1,0 mm. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and cleared
for operation by Alfa Laval.
63
3.3.5 Erosion
Erosion can occur when particles suspended in
the process liquid slide along or strike against a
surface. Erosion can become intensified locally by
flows of higher velocity.
G0205221
WARNING
Inspect regularly for erosion damage. Inspect

frequently if the process liquid is erosive.

the largest depth of any erosion damage exceeds
1,0 mm. Valuable information as to the nature of
the damage can be recorded using photographs,
plaster impressions or hammered-in lead.
Erosion is characterised by:
 Burnished traces in the material.
 Dents and pits having a granular and shiny
surface.
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:

1. The paring disc.
2. The pillars between the sediment ports in the
bowl wall.
3. The sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom.
4. The underside of the distributor in the vicinity
of the distribution holes and wings.
5. The surface of the sliding bowl bottom that
faces the conical part of the distributor.
6. The sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom
for the seal ring in the bowl hood.
G0628521
64
Look carefully for any signs of erosion damage.

Erosion damage can deepen rapidly and
consequently weaken parts by reducing the
thickness of the metal.
WARNING
Erosion damage can weaken parts by

reducing the thickness of the metal.
Pay special attention to the pillars between
the sediment ports in the bowl wall.
Replace the part if erosion can be suspected
of affecting its strength or function.
Wear and erosion liners in the bowl

The wear liners protect both the wall pillars in the
bowl body and the sliding bowl bottom. They must
be replaced before the liner has been perforated
by erosion.
65
3.3.6 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1) for burrs or galling.
Rectify when necessary.
G0156841
Repair of galling on guide surfaces; see following
pages. Before fitting the sliding bowl bottom,
clean (do not degrease) the contact surfaces (1). Sliding bowl bottom
Apply Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote
1000 Paste with a well-cleaned brush on surfaces
(1).
G01568A1
NOTE
To avoid the risk of galling, the contact Distributing ring
surfaces (1) should be primed with a slide
lacquer at every Major Service as described
in chapter ‘‘3.6.3 Guide surfaces” on page
101.
The slide-lacquered surfaces will be
destroyed if the surfaces are degreased.
Lubricate the O-ring and the seal ring with
G01568B1
silicone grease making sure they are not
damaged and lie properly in their grooves.
Operating slide
G01568C1
Bowl body
1= Alfa Laval lubricating paste or

Molykote 1000 Paste
66
Repair of galling on guide surfaces

Galling (friction marks) may appear on guide
surfaces in the operating system, the bowl body
and the sliding bowl bottom.
The example below describes the repair of the
lower guide surface of the bowl body nave.
Recommended tools for correction of galling:
1. Emery cloth, 240 grade. 
2. Hand drilling machine.
3. Degreasing agent.
4. Fibre brush, 25mm and 50 mm.
5. Brush wax (600 grade)
6. Very fine single-cut file.
G0157311
1. Clean the surface thoroughly with a
degreasing agent, i.e. white spirit. This is
important.
G0150111
Degreasing
2. If the galling is excessive, first use the fine

single-cut file. The file should be used with
caution so that the damage is not made
worse.
Remove the high spots on the surface. Do not
use rotating files or similar. Remove the high
spots only - not the undamaged material.
G0205721
Removing of high spots
67
3. An emery cloth of 240 grade should be used

to smooth the edges and to remove any
burnt-in foreign matter.
G0205821
Smoothing of edges
4. Finish off by polishing the damaged spot with

the fibre brushes and brush wax. It is
recommended that the whole area where
galling may occur is polished. Polishing will
help smoothing the whole of the damaged
area, even in the deepest parts.
5. Prime the repaired area with lubricating spray

Molykote 321 R. Read the correct procedure
in chapter ‘‘3.6.3 Guide surfaces” on page
101.
G0205921
Polishing
68
3.3.7 Lock ring; wear and damage

Excessive wear or impact marks on threads,
guide and contact surfaces of the lock ring, bowl
hood and bowl body may cause hazardous
galling.
1
Check the thread condition by tightening the lock
ring (1) after removing the disc stack and bowl
hood O-ring (2) from the bowl.
WARNING
G0151831
1. Lock ring
2. O-ring
Wear on large lock ring thread must not
exceed safety limit. The -mark on lock ring
must not pass opposite -mark by more than
25° (A = 77 mm).
In a new bowl the alignment marks on the lock

ring and the bowl body are exactly opposite each
D
other.
If thread wear is observed, mark the bowl body at
the new position of the alignment mark on the
lock ring by punching in a new alignment mark. A
If the original mark on the lock ring passes the
mark on the bowl body by more than 25°, (A in
the illustration) an Alfa Laval representative must
be contacted immediately.
The measure A in millimetres (mm) is obtained by
calculating bowl outside diameter D times 0,2,
which for this separator corresponds to 77 mm. G0578111
(MAX 25 )
If the marks become illegible, an Alfa Laval
representative should be contacted immediately
to inspect thread wear and for determining the
position of new alignment marks.
69
Damage
The position of the threads, contact and guide
surfaces are indicated by arrows in the illustration.
Clean the threads, contact and guide surfaces
with a suitable degreasing agent.
Check for burrs and protrusions caused by
impact.
CAUTION
Cut hazards
Sharp edges on the threads may cause cuts.
If damage is established, rectify using a

whetstone or fine emery cloth (recommended
G0157031
grain size 240).
If the damage is considerable, use a fine single-
cut file, followed by a whetstone.
70
3.3.8 Nozzles in bowl body and

operating water ring
Clean nozzles (1) using soft iron wire or similar.
Note that lime deposits can be dissolved in a 10%
acetic acid solution heated to 80 °C.
Use Loctite 243 on the threads if the nozzles have
been removed or replaced.
G0156881
A = 1,5 mm
3.3.9 Inlet pipe
Check the threads on the inlet pipe and rectify if
necessary.
71
3.3.10 Operating mechanism

Dirt and lime deposits in the operating
mechanism may cause poor discharge function or
no function at all.
Clean and polish surfaces with steel wool if
necessary.
Reasons for dirt or deposits:

 Hard or unclean operating water. Change
water supply or install a water softener or a
fine filter.
 sediment has been sucked down into bowl
casing and into the operating system. Check
the installation and the venting system of both
the sediment tank and bowl casing drain.
G0156891
1. Sliding bowl bottom
2. Distributing ring
3. Valve plug
4. Operating slide
5. Bowl body
6. Nozzles
72
3.3.11 Operating slide

Poor sealing between the valve plugs on the
operating slide and distributing ring may prevent
complete closing of the bowl.
Examine the sealing surfaces (1) of the
distributing ring in contact with the valve plugs.
Remove any marks and lime deposits with a very
fine grain emery cloth.
G0147531
Check the guiding surface (2) in contact with the
bowl body. Remove any marks with a whetstone Checking of sealing and guide surfaces
(grain size 240).
Remove all the valve plugs and tap in new ones.

Correct height of valve plugs is 10 mm.
G0151431
Fitting of new valve plugs
3.3.12 Sliding bowl bottom

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage of process liquid from the bowl.
Check the sealing edge of the sliding bowl
bottom. Maximum permissible reduction of the
original profile height (2,0 mm) is 0,5 mm. If
G0379951
damaged either through corrosion or erosion or

other means, contact an Alfa Laval
representative. A = minimum 1,5 mm
If the seal ring for the sliding bowl bottom is to be

replaced, turn the sliding bowl bottom upside
down and inject compressed air through the hole
on the underside. This will press the ring
outwards far enough to be gripped easily.
G0147521
Removing of O-ring
73
3.3.13 Unbalance sensor

Shake the separator from side to side to ensure
that the unbalance alarm function is active.
Make sure that the separator control unit is on.
G03370A1
74
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.4 Intermediate Service (IS), assembly

(IS), assembly
3.4.1 Introduction
Before starting the assembly first carry out the
Intermediate Service check points starting on
page 59.
NOTE
Renew all parts included in the IS-kit. The
O-rings and other sealing rings should be
lubricated with grease of silicone type, see
‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants” on page
36.
3.4.2 Bowl, frame hood and inlet /

outlet
✔ Check points
‘‘3.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring” on page 59,
‘‘3.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body
nave” on page 60,
‘‘3.3.3 Corrosion” on page 61,
‘‘3.3.4 Cracks” on page 63,
‘‘3.3.5 Erosion” on page 64,
‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces” on page 66,
‘‘3.6.3 Guide surfaces” on page 101, (only
when MS-service),
‘‘3.3.7 Lock ring; wear and damage” on page
69,
‘‘3.6.4 Lock ring; priming” on page 102 (only
when MS-service),
‘‘3.3.8 Nozzles in bowl body and operating
water ring” on page 71,
‘‘3.3.9 Inlet pipe” on page 71,
‘‘3.3.10 Operating mechanism” on page 72,
‘‘3.3.11 Operating slide” on page 73,
‘‘3.3.12 Sliding bowl bottom” on page 73.
75
3.4 Intermediate Service (IS), assembly 3 Dismantling/Assembly
An exploded view of appropriate part of the bowl

can be found on pages 48-51.
1. Wipe off the spindle top and nave bore in the

bowl body. For rust protection, lubricate the
tapered end of the spindle with a few drops of
oil (no other lubricant shall be used). Spread
it over the surface carefully. Wipe off surplus
oil with a clean cloth.
NOTE
G0151251
Too much oil on the surface between the
spindle and bowl body, or if other lubricant is
used, will reduce the friction between the two
parts. This may result in a relative rotation
between the parts, which can lead to seizure,
scoring and possible welding.
2. Fit operating water ring on the distributing

cover in the frame.
G0147461
76
3. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the bowl body,

see chapter ‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces” on page
66.
4. Fit the bowl body onto the spindle as follows:
a. Screw down the central screw as far as
possible.
b. Screw the tool onto the bowl body nave.
S0113011
c. Lower the bowl body until the screw rests
G0151341
on the spindle top. Use a hoist.
d. Unscrew the central screw so that the
bowl body sinks down on the spindle.
5. Screw the cap nut counter-clockwise onto the

spindle. Tighten firmly.
Left-hand thread!
S0113511
S0113411
77
6. Fit the operating slide into the bowl body by

using two of the dismantling tool screws.
S0112511
- The drill mark (arrow) on the operating
slide must be in line with the assembly
mark of the bowl body.
- Check that the seal ring lies concentric in
its groove.
G0151451
- When replacing the valve plugs, use a
rubber mallet.
7. Lubricate the guide surface of the distributing
ring, see chapter ‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces” on
page 66.
8. Fit the distributing ring by using two of the
dismantling tool screws.
S0112511
- Check that the seal rings lie

concentrically in their grooves.
- Rotate the distributing ring so that its drill
mark (arrow) is in line with the assembly
G0150431
mark on the bowl body. When lowering
the ring, its guide pin will then enter the
hole in the operating slide.
78
9. Rotate the bowl body slowly to align the three

screw holes in its bottom exactly above the
holes in the operating water ring (only one
position is possible). Tighten the screws.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm ± 5Nm.
10. Lubricate the guide surface of the sliding bowl
bottom, see chapter ‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces”
on page 66.
G0151631
11. Fit the sliding bowl bottom. Check that its seal
ring lies concentrically in its groove.
S0112911
G0151731
12. Assemble the discs one by one on the
distributor.
CAUTION
Cut hazards
Sharp edges on the bowl discs may cause

cuts.
G06031F1
79
13. The separator is delivered with one of two

different versions of disc stack, see the
illustration.
The number of discs (pos. 2A & 3) could be
higher depending of made adjustments of the
disc stack pressure.
G0146641
14. Fit the compression tool and lower the unit
into the bowl body.
a. Make sure that the drill mark (arrow) of
the top disc is in line with the drill mark on
the distributor.
b. When lowering the unit, make sure that
the drill marks are in line with the
assembly mark on the bowl bottom. The
G0151941
two drill marks and the assembly mark

must be properly aligned to enable the
wings in the underside of the distributor to
enter recesses (a) of the bowl body nave.
c. Make sure that the pins in the distributor
fit properly into the holes of the top disc.
d. Remove the compression tool.
S0112811
80
15. Lubricate the large lock ring threads, contact

and guiding surfaces (see arrows in lower
illustration). See also chapter ‘‘2.5 Lubricants”
on page 29.
- Note that no O-ring should be present in
grove (c).
- Make sure that the surfaces of the
dovetail slot (d) are undamaged and
thoroughly cleaned. These surfaces
must not be lubricated.
16. Fit the lifting tool to the bowl hood and lift it
using a hoist.
G0152131
S0113311
Be careful not to scratch the bowl hood seal

ring when lowering the bowl hood onto the
bowl body.
- The guide lug (a) on the bowl body must
enter the recess (b) in the bowl hood.
- Remove the lifting tool.
17. Fit the large lock ring and tighten it by hand
as far as possible.
CAUTION
Cut hazards
Sharp edges on the large lock ring may

cause cuts.
81
18. Fit the spanner and secure it with the bolt (a).
S0112711
G0152271
NOTE
To facilitate tightening of the lock ring, reduce
shocks to bearings and keep the thread wear
to a minimum, the disc stack should be
compressed using the compression tool.
19. Compress the disc stack as follows:

a. Fit the compression tool and screw the
central screw down into the distributor
until it stops.
S0112811
b. Compress the disc stack by tightening the

nut of the compression tool very firmly. G0152331
82
Check of disc stack pressure

 If the disc stack pressure is correct it should
be possible to tighten the lock ring so far by
hand that the -mark on the lock ring is
positioned abt 5 mm before the mark on the
bowl hood when using the compressing tool.
To achieve this an appropriate number of
discs in the disc stack beneath the top disc
must be fitted. Add or remove discs if
necessary.
NOTE
G0152341
When checking the disc stack pressure in
this way, the threads of the lock ring and the
bowl body must be well cleaned.
If the -marks do not reach each other after

giving the spanner handle some blows, the
reason could be an incorrectly assembled
bowl or too many discs in the disc stack.
Reassemble and check.
NOTE
Ensure that the disc stack pressure is
sufficient to maintain bowl balance.
Insufficient pressure in the disc stack can
cause vibration and reduce lifetime of ball
bearings.
20. Tighten the large lock ring until the assembly

marks are in line.
S0113411
NOTE
The assembly marks must never pass each
other more than 25°.
G0164531
See chapter ‘‘3.3.7 Lock ring; wear and

damage” on page 69 for more information.
83
21. Remove the compression tool and spanner.

22. Place inlet pipe with paring disc in the bowl.
G0152431
23. Fit the paring chamber cover.
The paring chamber cover for hermetic
design (A) is fitted with a wear ring, a part of
the axial seal. This seal shall only be
dismantled if the seal has to be renewed.
NOTE
G07105K1
 Always observe the greatest cleanliness
when handling and fitting the axial seal.
A. Paring chamber cover with hermetic axial seal
 Avoid any damage to the sealing
B. Paring chamber cover, standard
surfaces.
 If any score marks or grooves are visible
on any of the sealing surfaces, then fit a
new axial seal.
4 5
3 6
2 7
1
G0948531
Paring chamber cover with hermetic axial seal

1. Paring chamber lower
2. O-ring
3. Flange
4. O-ring
5. Sealing, rotary part
6. Screw
7. Washer
84
24. Lubricate the threads and the guiding

surfaces on the small lock ring. See chapter
‘‘2.5 Lubricants” on page 29.
25. Fit and tighten the lock ring using the spanner
for lock ring.
Left-hand thread!
S0112611
G0152941
S0113411
26. Fit the frame hood. Two lifting eye bolts (M10,
included in the Tool kit) can be screwed into
the holes in the hood thus making it possible
to lift the hood by means of a hoist.
Secure the screw threads with Loctite 243
and tighten with 45 ±5 Nm.
G0153061
27. For separators equiped with hermetic axial
seal. 
Make sure sealing static part is correct
mounted on outlet device with O-ring placed
in its groove.
2
G0948541
3
Outlet device with hermetic axial seal
1. Outlet housing
2. Sealing, static part
3. O-ring
85
Control of height position

The height position (A) should

normally not be checked at
Intermediate Service but when 3
the bowl spindle has been
removed (each Major Service)
or when the bowl has been
replaced.
4
The height position of the outlet
paring disc (5) is decided by the
thickness of the height 1
adjusting rings (1). Each ring
has a thickness of 1 mm.
The tolerances are narrow and A B
therefore it is of great 5
2
importance that the parts are 6
well cleaned and free from
burrs.
 Press down the top of the
inlet pipe (3) to be sure that
the paring disc (5) rests on
the flanges of the top disc
(6).
 Measure the distance (A)
G0948521
and (B) according to the
illustration. The distance
should must be: Measurement of distance A and B
A = 28,8±0,5mm and
1. Height adjusting ring(s)
B = 26,8±0,5mm.
2. Frame hood
 Adjust the distance by 3. Top of inlet pipe
adding or removing height 4. Outlet device
5. Outlet paring disc
adjusting rings (1).
6. Flange on top disc
28. Assemble outlet device on top of frame hood

and fit washers and screws.
86
29. Lubricate the threads and guiding surfaces of

the nut and outlet housing. See chapter ‘‘2.5
Lubricants” on page 29.
30. Fit and tighten the nut.
Left-hand thread!
S00659
G0145841
S0113411
31. Remove the two covers on the frame bottom

part.
32. Rotate the bowl by means of the flat belt or
the belt pulley. If the bowl does not rotate
freely or if a scraping noise is heard, incorrect
bowl assembly or incorrect height adjustment
of the paring disc may be the cause.
CAUTION
G0151021
Crush hazards
Rotating the bowl by pulling the flat belt by

hand may cause injuries to fingers.
33. Fit the two covers on the frame bottom part.

34. Connect the in and outlet hoses (pipes)
connected to the in and outlet housing.
87
After the assembly is complete, check the

direction of rotation of the bowl.
The direction of rotation can be checked by
comparing the direction of motor fan and the
arrow () on the machine plate.
The motor fan, which has the same direction of
rotation as the bowl, shall rotate clockwise seen
from above.
WARNING
When power cables have been connected,

always check direction of rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew.
88
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.5 Major Service (MS), dismantling
3.5 Major Service (MS),

dismantling
3.5.1 Introduction
When carry out a Major Service an Intermediate
Service is always included. For that reason it is
assumed that the dismantling for Intermediate
Service starting on page 48 is already done.
3.5.2 Cyclone (if applicable) ;

sealing ring
Dismantle and clean the cyclone and the
adjoining pipes.
When assembly, renew the sealing ring between
separator top part and cyclone.
The new sealing ring are included in the Major
Service (MS) kit.
G0336741
89
3.5 Major Service (MS), dismantling 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.5.3 Vertical driving device

1. Injection cover
2. O-ring
3. Nipple
4. O-ring
5. Distributing cover
6. O-ring
7. O-ring
8. Deflector ring
9. Top bearing cover
10. O-ring
11. Fan
12. Snap ring
13. Ball bearing
14. Bearing seat
15. Buffer
16. Spring
17. Screw plug
18. O-ring
19. Spindle
20. Lock ring
21. Ball bearing

G0148621
22. Oil pump
23. Bottom bearing holder
90
1. Empty the oil sump. See chapter ‘‘2.4.1 Oil

change procedure” on page 27.
G0155511
2. Remove the belt as follows:
a. Remove the two covers from the frame
bottom part.
b. If not done screw back the belt tightener
as far as possible from the frame.
c. Loosen the motor adapter screws, but do
not remove them.
d. Remove the belt.
G0154521
3. Unscrew and remove the nipple.

G0148031
91
4. Remove the screws from the distributing

cover.
G0148181
5. Place the ring of the dismantling tool on the
flat surface of the frame top part. Fasten the
screws of the tool in the distributing cover.
S0112511
Loosen the cover by tightening the nuts one

turn at a time.
G0148271
6. Wipe clean the cylindrical part of the bowl
spindle.
G0148361
92
7. Place the ring of the dismantling tool on the

flat surface of the frame top part. Fasten the
screws of the tool in the top bearing cover.
S0112511
Loosen the cover by tightening the nuts one
G0148461
turn at a time. Lift off the cover together with
the deflector ring.
8. Unscrew and remove the screw plugs (3),
springs (2) and buffers (1).
NOTE
The unbalance sensor (4) (if any) must not
be removed.
G0148721
9. Fit the lifting eye onto the spindle and lift out
using the hoist. Clamp the spindle in a vice
(use the flat surface on the spindle).
S0111811
10. Fit the pin spanner and unscrew and remove

the fan.
Left-hand thread!
S0112011
G0148831
S0113411
93
11. Remove the snap ring and lower bearing

seat. If necessary, tap carefully on the
bearing seat with a soft hammer.
WARNING
Crush hazards
If the plier top is worn out the snap ring may

rip off and parts may fall down.
12. Pull off and discard the ball bearing.
G0148921
13. Clamp the bottom bearing holder in the vice
and unscrew the lock ring.
Left-hand thread!
S0112011
Remove the bottom bearing holder by hand.

Be very careful not to damage its race
surfaces, unless the bottom bearing holder is
to be replaced.
G0149031
94
14. Turn the bowl spindle upside down and

unscrew and remove the oil pump using the
hook spanner.
S0112111
15. Pull off and discard the ball bearing.
If the belt pulley (fitted on the motor) has to be

removed from the spindle (normally not done),
see chapter ‘‘3.9 Belt pulley” on page 119.
G0149121
95
16. Clean all dismantled parts thoroughly in a

degreasing agent. Pay special attention to the
buffer seats (a), space (b) and surfaces (c, d)
in the frame. See chapter ‘‘2.3 Cleaning” on
page 24.
17. Clean the injection holes in the injection
cover. Limestone deposits can be dissolved in
a 10% acetic acid solution heated to 80 °C
18. Check for damage and/or corrosion on the
spindle top. Remove any lime deposits on the
spindle top with a very fine-grain emery cloth.
NOTE
For more information, see ‘‘3.3.2 Bowl
spindle cone and bowl body nave” on page
60.
NOTE
Presence of black deposits on the spindle
G0149241
parts can indicate that another lubricating oil
should be used, see chapter‘‘2.5.1
Lubrication chart” on page 29.
96
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.6 Major Service (MS), check points

check points
3.6.1 Brake
Exploded view
3.5
G0155031
1. Cylindrical pin 6. Set screw

2. Split pin 7. Compression spring Oil
3. Cylindrical pin with hole 8. Shaft

3.5. Plain washer 9. Arm, complete, with friction element Alfa Laval
4. Handle 10. Tension spring lubricating paste
or Molykote 1000
5. Cover Paste
97
3.6 Major Service (MS), check points 3 Dismantling/Assembly
Checking of friction element

A worn or oily friction element will lengthen the
stopping time. Remove the cover together with
the brake. Inspect the friction element.
 If the friction element is worn: Replace the
complete arm together with friction element.
 If the friction element is oily: Clean the
element and its surfaces in contact with the
belt pulley with a suitable degreasing agent.
G0155111
Checking of cover, shaft and springs and
Rust can form on the brake parts and cause the
brake to jam.
1. Remove any rust from the shaft and the
corresponding guide surface on the cover.
2. Rub the surface of the shaft with lubricating
paste along the area shown in the illustration.
3. Renew the springs if they have become weak.
Oil the springs when assembling.
G0155221
Alfa Laval lubricating paste or
Molykote 1000 Paste
CAUTION
Inhalation hazard
When handling friction blocks/pads use a dust

mask to make sure not to inhale any dust.
Do not use compressed air for removal of
any dust. Remove dust by vacuum or wet
cloth.
See Safety instructions for enviromental issues
regarding correct disposal of used friction
blocks/pads.
98
Checking of cover fitting

Incorrect position of the cover may cause a
scraping noise.
1. Fit the cover.
2. Release the brake and rotate the bowl by
hand by pulling the flat belt.
CAUTION
Crush hazards
G0155321
hand may cause fingers to crush.
If a scraping noise is heard, the friction

element is probably touching the motor belt
pulley. The surface (a) on the handle is not in
flush with surface (b) on the cover.
3. Loosen the cover and fit correctly.
NOTE
Not following the instructions in chapter ‘‘3.8
Flat belt’’ may cause bad function of the flat
belt transmission.
99
3.6.2 Buffer, buffer springs and

bearing seat
Weakened or broken buffer springs or defective
contact surfaces for the buffers on the bearing
seat may give rise to separator vibration (rough
bowl run).
G0622311
Upper bearing housing
Buffer
Inspect the buffers. If any one is worn down to a
total length of 29,5 mm or less, or if more than
half of a buffer surface (a) that is in contact with
bearing seat is covered with small cavities
(pittings), renew the complete set of buffers.
G0149931
A = minimum 29,5 mm (new = 30 mm)
Top bearing springs

In case of spring fracture, the complete set of
springs should be replaced, even if only one
spring is broken.
G0616811
1. Screw plug
2. O-ring
3. Spring
4. Buffer
5. Frame bottom part
6. Bearing seat
Bearing seat
Examine the contact surface for the buffers on the
bearing seat. In case of defects (indentations
deeper than 0,5 mm), renew the bearing seat as
well as buffers and springs.
G0283631
A = maximum 0,5 mm
100
3.6.3 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1) for burrs or galling.
Rectify when necessary.
G0156841
Repair of galling on guiding surfaces, see chapter
‘‘3.3.6 Guide surfaces” on page 66.
1. Mask the nave hole of the bowl body. Slide Sliding bowl bottom
lacquer must not enter this hole.
2. Carefully degrease the contact surfaces (1)
between the parts illustrated. Dry the
G01568A1
surfaces well.
3. Apply slide lacquer Molykote D321R with a Distributing ring
well cleaned brush. Protect the surfaces
which should not be treated.
4. Air-cure the treated surfaces for 15 minutes.
G01568B1
5. Use a smooth fibre brush to polish to an even,
homogeneous contact film. Operating slide
6. Apply slide lacquer a second time.

7. Air-cure the lacquer for a further 15 minutes.
8. Polish the film to a shiny surface. The film
should look like well-polished leather when
properly done.
9. Finish the treatment by lubricating the contact
surfaces (1) with Alfa Laval lubricating paste
or Molykote 1000 Paste. Use a well-cleaned
G01568C1
brush. Rub it into the surface, do not leave
any excessive paste.
Bowl body
10. Lubricate the O-ring and the seal ring with
silicone grease and check that they lie
properly in their grooves.
101
3.6.4 Lock ring; priming

The arrows indicate positions of threads, guide
and contact surfaces to be primed.
Recommended agents for priming procedure:
 Degreasing agent
G0157041
 Lubricating spray Molykote 321 R
Priming positions
 Hand drilling machine
 2 fibre brushes
1. Clean the lock ring thoroughly with a

degreasing agent and wipe it off.
G0206921
2. Spray the threads, guide and contact
surfaces with slide lacquer Molykote 321 R.
Let the lacquer air-cure for about 15 minutes. G0207021
102
3. Use a fibre brush to polish the slide lacquer

into the surface. The black spray will look like
well-polished leather when properly done.
G0207321
4. Spray the lock ring a second time and let it
dry for about 15 minutes.
G0207021
5. Polish the slide lacquer to a black shiny
surface which can now last about a year.
Proceed in the same way with the threads of
the bowl body and with the guide surfaces of
bowl body - bowl hood and bowl hood - lock
ring.
G0207321
103
3.6.5 Speed sensor

The speed sensor is delivered as a complete unit.
If the sensor has been damaged or if the current
is outside the specified limits replace the
complete speed sensor. The speed sensor should
not be adjusted.
Correct positioning
Incorrect fitting of the speed sensor can cause
faulty speed monitoring.
Fitting must be checked whenever the speed
sensor has been removed or renewed.
G0157621
1. Check that the speed sensor head is directly
in line with the centre line of the bowl spindle.
Maximum deviation ±3 mm. Use a mirror
when checking.
G0157711
2. Check that the height is correct.
The sensor head must be positioned within
the area (a) of the bowl spindle.
G0157811
3. Check that the distance between the speed

sensor head and the bowl spindle is
2 ±0,5 mm.
G0157911
NOTE
If the distance between the speed sensor All dimensions in mm
head and the bowl spindle deviates from the
above measurements, replace the speed
sensor or contact an Alfa Laval
representative.
104
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.7 Major Service (MS), assembly

assembly
3.7.1 Introduction
Before starting the assembly first carry out the
Intermediate Service check points starting on
page 59 and Major Service check points starting
on page 97.
NOTE
Renew all parts included in the IS- and MS-
kits. If carrying out a 3-years service, also
renew the parts included in the 3-years
service kit.
The O-rings and other sealing rings should
be lubricated with grease of silicone type,
see ‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants” on
page 36.
When mounting some of the ball bearings and

bearing housings on the bowl spindle and worm
wheel shaft as described in this chapter, these
must be heated in oil to max. 125 °C.
WARNING
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling the

heated bearings.
NOTE
If any doubt how to mount roller bearings in a
correct way, see the detailed description in
‘‘2.7.1 Ball and roller bearings” on page 41.
105
3.7 Major Service (MS), assembly 3 Dismantling/Assembly
NOTE
Since roller bearings are normally treated
only with rust protection oil from the factory,
an initial lubrication of new bearings must
always be performed whenever bearings are
replaced. This is, however, not valid for
bearings with seals because they are already
filled with grease at delivery.
The initial lubrication implies adding a few
drops of lube oil to the bearings. Use the
same oil type as in the separator oil sump.
3.7.2 Vertical driving device

✔ Check point
‘‘3.3.3 Corrosion” on page 61,
‘‘3.3.4 Cracks” on page 63,
‘‘3.3.5 Erosion” on page 64,
‘‘3.6.2 Buffer, buffer springs and bearing seat”
on page 100.
1. Clamp the spindle in the vice upside down.
2. Heat a new ball bearing in clean oil to max.
125 °C. Fit the bearing.
G0149321
 Bearings fitted with two seals (1) are filled

with grease at delivery.
NOTE
These bearings should not be heated
G0873211
before fitting.
If heated, the grease in the bearings will
Bearing with two seals (1)
be dissolved and the lifespan of the
bearings will be considerably reduced.
106
3. When the bearing has cooled down, tighten

the oil pump with the hook spanner.
S0112111
G0149421
4. Lightly clamp the bottom bearing holder in the
vice and lower the spindle.
NOTE
Clamping too tightly can deform the holder
preventing the ball bearing from entering it.
G0149521
5. Fit and tighten the lock ring with the pin
spanner.
Left-hand thread!
S0112011
S0113411
G0149621
107
6. Fit the upper ball bearing as follows:

a. Examine the contact surfaces for the
buffers on the bearing seat. If they are
damaged, carefully remove any high
spots on the surface using a fine single-
cut file.
b. Heat the bearing seat in clean oil to max.
125 °C.
c. Fit a new ball bearing in the bearing seat
and lock it with snap ring. Heat the
assembled unit in clean oil to max.
125 °C.
WARNING
Crush hazards
If the plier top is worn out the snap ring may

rip off and parts may fall down.
d Clamp the vice over the upper parts of
G0149721
the flats on the bowl spindle.
e Lower the heated unit until the ball
bearing rests on the shoulder of the bowl
spindle.
7. When the heated unit has cooled down,

screw on and tighten the fan with the pin
spanner.
Left-hand thread!
S0112011
S0113411
G0149821
108
8. Fit the lifting eye onto the spindle.
S0111811
9. Lower the bowl spindle carefully into the
separator frame. Make sure that the bearing
seat flats are in front of the buffer holes.
Tap the spindle top carefully with a tin
hammer to ensure that the spindle reaches its
correct bottom position. Rotate the spindle by
hand and check that it rotates freely.
10. Fit the buffers, springs and screw plugs.
a. Apply oil to the buffers by placing them in
an oil bath.
b. Lubricate the O-rings and screw plugs.
c. Fit the buffers and springs. Fit the O-rings
and tighten the screw plugs crosswise a
few turns at a time. Finally tighten firmly
all around.
G0149971
11. Check the radial wobble of the spindle as
described below:
NOTE
Spindle wobble will cause rough bowl run.
This leads to vibration and reduces lifetime of
ball bearings.
G0150551
 Fit a dial indicator in a support and fasten it to

the frame.
 Rotate the spindle by hand.
 Measure the wobble at the top of the tapered
end of the spindle. Permissible radial wobble
is max. 0,04 mm.
109
12. Fit the top bearing cover.

a. Lubricate the guide surface of the bearing
cover, see chapter ‘‘2.5 Lubricants” on
page 29.
b. Place the top bearing cover with its
O-ring in position by using two of the
S0112511
c. When in position, tap around the cover
G0150661
with a tin hammer to ensure a proper fit.
d. Rotate the spindle by hand and check
that it rotates freely.
13. Fit the deflector ring with O-ring.

a. Wipe clean the cylindrical part of the bowl
spindle.
b. Lubricate the O-ring.
c. Rotate the spindle by hand and check
that it rotates freely.
G0150751
110
14. Fit the distributing cover.

a. When carrying out a Major Service (MS),
renew all the O-rings in the distributing
cover. For access to two of these O-rings,
remove the screws of the injection cover.
b. Refit the injection cover after renewing
the O-rings.
c. Place the distributing cover with its
O-rings in position by using two of the
G0150871
15. Tighten the screws of the distributing cover
lightly crosswise. Finally tighten firmly all
around.
Rotate the spindle by hand and check that it
rotates freely.
G0148181
16. Fit and tighten the nipple with the O-ring.
G0148031
111
17. Fit and tighten the flat belt.
NOTE
It is important to follow the flat belt tightening
procedure described in chapter ‘‘3.8 Flat belt”
on page 113.
G0154521
18. Fill the oil sump with oil. See chapter ‘‘2.4.1
Oil change procedure” on page 27.
G0475421
For assembly of the upper parts of the separator,

see ‘‘3.4 Intermediate Service (IS), assembly” on
page 75.
112
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.8 Flat belt
3.8 Flat belt

The flat belt must be removed for dismantling of
the bowl spindle and the belt pulley, or for
replacement with a new belt.
A new belt must be retightened twice:
G0154621
- after 30 minutes. The separator must not
be started until the re tightening has been
made.
- after approximately 24 hours of
operation.
NOTE
The separator must not be started until the re
tightening after 30 minutes has been made. If
starting, the belt may slip and be damaged.
3.8.1 Belt replacement
WARNING
Entrapment hazard

sensor.
S0051011

dismantling work. Lock power supply before starting dismantling
113
3.8 Flat belt 3 Dismantling/Assembly
1. Remove the two covers from the frame

bottom part.
G0151021
2. Check that the belt tightener is in backward
position.
NOTE
Pay attention to the air gap “A” between the
cup springs and the threaded sleeve. The
distance “A” must not exceed 0,5 mm.
G0473911
Otherwise a correct belt tightening will be
impossible.
3. Loosen and remove the motor adapter

screws.
G0158821
114
4. Remove the existing belt and clean the

raceways of the bowl spindle and the belt
pulley by using a degreasing agents, see
chapter ‘‘2.3 Cleaning” on page 24. Wipe the
raceways with a clean rag after cleaning.
- Exercise the greatest possible
cleanliness. There must be no dirt, oil or
grease on the raceways.
G0154721
5. Lift the motor together with adapter and belt
pulley and check that there is a sufficient film
of lubricating paste, between the adapter and
the frame surface, see chapter ‘‘2.5.5
Recommended lubricants” on page 36. Lower
the motor after checking.
Weight of motor including adapter and belt
pulley: approximately 90 kg.
6. Disconnect the motor cables. Note the
positions of cables in the terminal box to re-
connect correctly (for correct direction of
rotation).
7. Remove the electric motor using a hoist.
G0153511
8. Fit a new belt. Start on motor side.
The arrow on the belt showing the direction of
rotation shall correspond with arrow () on
the machine plate.
9. Tighten the belt by moving the motor
backwards by hand. Pull the belt around a
few turns by hand.
CAUTION
G0151021
Crush hazards

hand may cause injuries to fingers.
10. Tighten the belt (see following text).
115
3.8.2 Tightening of flat belt

1. Loosen but do not remove the motor adapter
screws (if not already done).

Make sure that there is a sufficient film of
lubricating paste between the motor adapter
and the frame surface, see chapter ‘‘2.5.5
Recommended lubricants” on page 36.
G0158821
2. Rotate the belt tightener by rotating the
threaded sleeve (1) until it makes contact with
the frame pad.
The threads should be lubricated, see
chapter‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants” on
page 36.
G0355221
3. Tighten the shaft (1) further until the threaded
sleeve (2) and dog (3) are disengaged.
“Shake” the motor by hand several times
during this operation in order to overcome the
friction between the motor adapter and the
frame.
G0477111
116
4. Tighten the motor adapter screws.
G0158821
5. Fit the two covers on the frame bottom part.
G0151021
6. Loosen the belt tightener by rotating the
threaded sleeve (2) backwards.
G0477211
117
7. Rotate the shaft (1) relative to the threaded

sleeve (2) until the threaded sleeve (2) and
dog (3) are engaged again with a clicking
sound.
.
NOTE
If the springs (4) are not decompressed they
G0477311
will loose their tension and correct tightening
of belt will be impossible.
8. Let the belt stay in this position for at last 30 0

0,5
minutes without starting the separator. Then
repeat steps 1-4 and 6-7 above.
A
HOUR
NOTE
G0355731
The separator must not be started until the re
tightening after 30 minutes has been made. If
starting, the belt may slip and be damaged. A
slipping belt can also damage the water tank.
9. The separator may now be started.
NOTE
The belt must be re tightened when the
separator has been in operation
approximately 24 hours after the belt change.
Repeat steps 1 to 7.
G0355611
118
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.9 Belt pulley
3.9 Belt pulley
3.9.1 Dismantling
WARNING
Entrapment hazard

sensor.
S0051011
1. Remove the motor adapter screws.

bottom part. Remove the belt.
G0153421
119
3.9 Belt pulley 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3. Use a sling to remove the motor together with

its adapter and the belt pulley.
Weight of motor including adapter and belt
pulley: approx. 90 kg.
4. Disconnect the motor cables. Note the
positions of cables in the terminal box to re-
connect correctly (for correct direction of
rotation).
5. Remove the electric motor using a hoist.
WARNING
G0153512
Crush hazards
Place the motor on a suitable pallet on the

floor when doing maintenance work.
If the separator frame is used as a work
bench the motor may slip of the frame and
cause serious accident.
6. Remove the screw, spring washer and

washer from the end of the motor shaft.
G0153721
120
7. Lubricate the tool for belt pulley, see chapter

‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants” on page 36.
a. Fit (a) the tool onto the belt pulley.
S0111911
b. Ease off the belt pulley (b). Use an
adjustable wrench on the belt pulley hub
to prevent rotation during dismantling.
G0153821
WARNING
Crush hazards
Pay attention to the belt pulley.

When it come loose from the motor shaft it
may fall down and injure due to heavy
weight.
121
3.9.2 Assembly
✔ Check points
‘‘3.3.3 Corrosion” on page 61.
1. Use the tool for belt pulley when pressing the

belt pulley on to the motor shaft.
S0111911
a. Clean the motor shaft and apply a thin oil

film on it.
b. Apply lubricating paste to the surface of
the tool nut that slides on the belt pulley
hub when pressing. See chapter ‘‘2.5.5
Recommended lubricants” on page 36.
c. Fasten the sleeve of the tool to the motor
shaft by means of the screw that attaches
the belt pulley to the motor. Press the belt
pulley on to the shaft.
G0154231
122
2. Fit the screw with washer and spring washer

to secure the belt pulley.
G0153721
3. Fit the motor.
a. Degrease and clean the contact surfaces
of the separator frame and motor
adapter.
b. Lubricate the motor adapter and lower
the motor with adapter and belt pulley
onto position (approx. weight 90 kg). See
chapter ‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants”
on page 36.
G0154411
123
4. Fit and tighten the flat belt.
NOTE
on page 113.
G0154521
124
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.10 Oil filling device
3.10 Oil filling device
3.10.1 Exploded views
G0155921
1. Round safety wire 5. O-ring
2. Sealing ring 6. Sleeve for oil filling
3. Nipple 7. Oil glass
4. O-ring 8. Plate
125
3.10 Oil filling device 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.10.2 Dismantling
1. Drain off the oil, see ‘‘2.4.1 Oil change
procedure” on page 27.
2. Unscrew nipple and pull off the oil filling
device. Then unbend the round safety wire
and pull off the nipple.
G0155511
3.10.3 Assembly
1. If plate is to be replaced, wipe the sightglass
with a degreasing agent and fit the new plate
(self-adhesive) on the outside of the
sightglass. Mark its position relative to the
recess in sleeve.
2. Lubricate the O-rings with silicone grease.
3. Assemble the device and fit it in the frame.
Note that the mark on sleeve must be
positioned opposite the mark on the frame.
4. Fill the sump with new oil, ‘‘2.4.1 Oil change
procedure” on page 27.
G0155811
126
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.11 Frame feet
3.11 Frame feet
Frame feet, renewal

When replacing the frame feet, the separator
must be lifted. Follow the information in chapter
Lifting instruction in the Installation Manual.
1. Remove the bowl from the separator.
2. Loosen the foundation bolts and lift the
separator.
3. Remove the existing frame feet.
4. Mount the new feet.
5. Place the separator in its original position and
fasten the foundation bolts.
6. Assemble the separator bowl, see ‘‘3.4.2
Bowl, frame hood and inlet / outlet” on page
75.
127
3.12 Speed sensor and junction box 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3.12 Speed sensor and

junction box
3.12.1 Exploded view
G0156021
1. Countersunk cap head screw

2. Speed sensor holder
3. Cross-headed screws
4. Cable holder
128
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.12 Speed sensor and junction box
3.12.2 Mounting
WARNING
Entrapment hazard

sensor.
S0051011

bottom part.
2. Screw back the belt tightener as far as
possible from the frame and then remove the
motor adapter screws.
Remove the flat belt.
G0336011
129
3. Only first time installation: Turn and pull back

the electric motor in order to uncover two
countersunk cap head screws.
Remove the two screws with nuts. Discard
the nuts.
4. Only first time installation: Remove the plate
covering the cable holes, cut and fit the
bending protections as in the illustration.
Mount the junction box.
NOTE
G0336111
One of the bending protections is for the
optional unbalance sensor.
5. Replacement of existing sensor: Push the

motor together with its adapter backwards to
uncover the two screws holding the complete
speed sensor.
6. Replacement of existing sensor: Disconnect
the cables in the junction box.
7. Replacement of existing sensor: Loosen the
two screws holding cable holder a maximum
of two turns to facilitate removal and fitting of
the cable.
8. Replacement of existing sensor: Remove the
two screws holding the complete speed
sensor.
G0156121
Push the motor backwards
130
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.12 Speed sensor and junction box
9. Fit the speed sensor on the inside of the

frame bottom part. Secure it with the two
countersunk cap head screws (1).
10. Put the cable onto the cable holder (2), then
through the web and in to the junction box
through the inner cable bush.
11. Make sure that the speed sensor is correctly
positioned.
✔ Check point
‘‘3.6.5 Speed sensor” on page 104.
G0336231
12. Thread the cable gland onto the cable and
secure the gland using a socket wrench.
13. Cut the cables about 110 mm from the cable
gland and fit cable clips. Mark and connect
the cables:
- Blue cable marked 1 to terminal 1.
- Brown cable marked 2 to terminal 2.
14. If new installation, connect the cable
terminals to the corresponding terminals in
the separator control unit. See the System
Manual.
G0336311
15. With the separator control unit turned on:
a. Measure the voltage across terminals 
1 (-) and 2 (+) in the junction box. There
should be a voltage of about 8 V DC.
b. Disconnect the cable to the control
equipment at terminal 2. Connect a mA-
meter in series, i.e. (-) to terminal 2 and
(+) to the cable end and measure the
current.
- With the sensor in position “Far” the
current should be above 3 mA
(typically 4 - 6 mA).
G0336411
- With the sensor in position “Near” the

current should be less than 1 mA
(typically 0,8 mA).
131
16. Fit the cover on the junction box.

17. Fit and tighten the flat belt, see chapter ‘‘3.8
Flat belt” on page 113.
NOTE
on page 113.
G0336511
132
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.13 Unbalance sensor and junction box
3.13 Unbalance sensor

and junction box
3.13.1 Mounting
WARNING
Entrapment hazard

sensor.
S0051011
1. Only first time installation: Remove the two

covers from the frame lower part.
2. Only first time installation: Screw back the
belt tightener as far as possible from the
frame and then the motor adapter screws.
Remove the flat belt.
G0336021
133
3.13 Unbalance sensor and junction box 3 Dismantling/Assembly
3. Only first time installation: Remove the plate

covering the cable holes, cut and fit the
bending protections as in the illustration.
Mount the junction box.
NOTE
One of the rubber bushings is for the optional
speed sensor.
G0336611
4. Lubricate the threads of the sensor. See
chapter ‘‘2.5.5 Recommended lubricants” on
page 36. Make sure to fit the O-ring (1).
Fit and tighten the unbalance sensor.
5. Slip the upper lead-through bushing (2) onto
the cable and pull the cable through the
protecting tube in the frame. Fit the lower
lead-through bushing (3) and pull the cable
through the web and into the junction box
outer bush.
Put the lead-through bushings in place.
G0156341
6. Thread the cable gland onto the cable and

secure the gland using a socket wrench.
7. Cut the cables about 110 mm from the cable
gland and fit cable clips. Mark and connect
the cables:
- Blue cable marked 5 to terminal 5
- Black cable marked 6 to terminal 6
- Brown cable marked 7 to terminal 7
G0336831
134
3 Dismantling/Assembly 3.13 Unbalance sensor and junction box
8. Connect a 470 Ohm (1/4 W) resistor (A)

between terminals 5 and 6.
9. Only first time installation: Connect the
terminals to corresponding terminals in the
separator control unit.
10. With the separator control unit turned on, first
measure the supply voltage. There should be
24V DC across the terminals 5 (-) and 7 (+).
11. Measure the output voltage with the volt
meter connected to terminal 5 (-) and to
terminal 6 (+) in the junction box. The voltage
should normally be 5 ± 0,2 V corresponding
to a distance of 3,5 mm between the bowl
spindle assembly and the sensor.
G0336931
12. Shake the separator from side to side to
ensure that the unbalance alarm function is
active.
NOTE
If the output voltage deviates from the above
values owing to an incorrect distance
between the bowl spindle assembly and the
sensor, renew the unbalance sensor or
contact an Alfa Laval representative.
G03370A1
135
3.13 Unbalance sensor and junction box 3 Dismantling/Assembly
13. Fit the cover onto the junction box.

14. Only first time installation: Fit and tighten the
flat belt, see chapter ‘‘3.8 Flat belt” on page
113.
NOTE
on page 113.
G0336511
136
Reader’s Comment Form
Dear reader,
It is our ambition to produce as useful and instructive manuals as possible. Should you have any
comments (positive or negative) regarding this manual, please note them down and send them to
us. You can do this by copying this page and sending it by fax, or you could mail it, or hand it over
to your local Alfa Laval representative.
Alfa Laval Tumba AB, Separator Manuals, dept. PPDM, SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden. 
Fax: +46 8 530 310 40.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Date:
Yes No
Is it easy to find what you are looking for by using the table of contents? ❒ ❒
Are the chapter and section headings clear and adequate? ❒ ❒
Is the information presented in the correct order for your purposes? ❒ ❒
Does the information in the manual cover your needs? ❒ ❒
Is it easy to understand the instructions in the manual? ❒ ❒
Is the terminology sufficiently explained? ❒ ❒
Are the illustrations easy to understand? ❒ ❒
Your comments:












137
138
Order Form
If you wish to order extra copies of this manual, please copy this page and give it to your local
Alfa Laval representative, who will advise you of current prices.
Your local Alfa Laval representative will also be able to help you with information regarding any
other manuals.
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
Quantity: Date:
Comments:




















139
140
Index
A Operating slide 73
Sliding bowl bottom 73
Adjustments Speed sensor 104
Belt tension 117 Unbalance sensor 74
Assembly Cleaning
Belt pulley 122 Bowl discs 26
Bowl 75 Cleaning agents 25
General directions 75, 105 External cleaning 24
Inlet/outlet 75 Corrosion 61
Oil filling device 126 Cracks 63
Tools (special) 46
Vertical driving device 106 D
B Daily checks 20
Dismantling
Bearings Belt pulley 119
Maintenance directions 41 Bowl 48
Replacement on bowl spindle 108 General directions 89
Belt Inlet/outlet 48
Replacement 113 Oil filling device 126
Tightening 116 Tools 46
Belt pulley Vertical driving device 90
Assembly 122
Dismantling 119 E
Bowl
Assembly 75 Erosion 64
Check points 59 Exploded views
Dismantling 48 Brake 97
Bowl discs Inlet/outlet, frame hood and bowl 48
Cleaning 26 Junction box (option) 128
Disc stack pressure 83 Oil filling device 125
Bowl spindle Speed sensor (option) 128
Assembly 106 Speed sensor and junction box 128
Check points 100 Vertical driving device 90
Dismantling 90
F
C
Frame feet
Check points Replacement 127
Bowl hood seal ring 59
Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave 60 G
Brake 97
Buffer, buffer springs and bearing seat 100 Guide surfaces
Corrosion 61 At Intermediate Service 66
Cracks 63 At Major Service 101
Erosion 64
Guide surfaces 66, 101 I
Inlet pipe 71
Nozzles in bowl body and operating water ring 71 Inlet/outlet and frame hood
Operating mechanism 72 Assembly 75
Check points 86
141
Dismantling 48 Safety Instructions 9
Intermediate Service Service instructions. See Check points
Assembly 75 Service kits 19
Dismantling 48 Shutdown 44
Maintenance log 21 Speed sensor and junction box
Check point 104
L Exploded view 128
Mounting 129
Lock ring
Priming 102 T
Wear and damage 69
Lubricants Tightening of flat belt 116
Oil change interval 20 Tightening torques
Oil change procedure 27 Large lock ring 82
Recommended lubricants 36 Screws for operating water ring 79
Recommended lubricating oils 30 Screws, common 47
Recommended oil brands 31 Tightening of flat belt 116
Recommended pastes and bonded coatings 40
U
M
Unbalance sensor and junction box
Maintenance intervals 18 Mounting 133
Maintenance logs
Daily checks 20 V
Intermediate Service 21
Major Service 22 Vertical driving device
Oil change 20 Assembly 106
Maintenance, general information Check point 100
Ball and roller bearings 41 Dismantling 90
Before shutdowns 44 Vibration analysis 40
Cleaning 24 Vibration sensor 44
Maintenance intervals 17
Maintenance procedure 19 W
Service kits 19
Tightening torques. See Tightening torques Warning signs 14
Vibration analysis 40
Major Service 18, 22, 89
Metal surfaces
Cleaning and cleaning agents 25
Corrosion 61
Cracks 63
Erosion 64
O
Oil change procedure 27
Oil filling device
Assembly 126
Dismantling 126
Exploded view 125
Oil. See Lubricants
S
Safety directions
Before dismantling 45
142
8. Item list / Component list
8.1. Component list - 9660002537 - R07

Component List
Title: Date: Project no: Document no: Rev:
CLARA 80 Std/S 09-08-2016 --- 9660006066 00
Created by: Checked by: Approved by: Customer: Sheet:
INPAGATA INPAKHN SETUKHN --- 1/3
Tag no. Qty. Part no. Denomination Description Manufacturer/ Supplier Certificate Comment
Y-Type Strainer, Fig16, Austenitic Stainless Steel, Reinforced Spirax Sarco / Spirax
F300-2 1 PCS Fig16 1’’ Y-Type Strainer ---
Exfoliated Graphite, Ins. Thr., 1’’, BSP, Sarco
FC302-2 1 PCS REG-1201 Flow Restrictor Flow Restrictor, REG-12, Stainless Steel, , Ins. Thr., 1/2’’, BSP, Kobold / --- ---
FG220-1 1 PCS 7005 032 000 041 Sight Glass Sight Glass,7005, EN 1.4404 (AISI 316L),NBR,Welded,DN32,DIN Kieselmann / Kieselmann
V2524CBA520E0C H250 Variable area flow meter , 1” 150lb ASME B16.5 Flange
FIT201-4 1 PCS Flow meter Krohne ---
00100000000003 connection, ESK 4, 4-20 mA Hart Stainless steel
Type: Butterfly Valve LKB-2, End Connection: DN32 DIN 11850
V201-3 1 PCS 9613419011 Butterfly Valve Alfa Laval / Alfa Laval
Welded, Body Material: EN 1.4404 (AISI 316L), Seat Material: HNBR
9428- Motorized Quarter Type: Motorized Quarter Turn Actuator 9428, Cable Entry: , Power
1 PCS Gemu / ---
000ZG05YS08C4A01006 Turn Actuator Supply: 24V AC 50/60 Hz
Impeller Pump Reform B AISI 304
with frequency transformer, 2.2KW, 500-10000 i/h,
impeller neoprene, incl. 10m cable firmly attached, + plu
Reform B FU
P201-1 1 PCS Feed Pump functions: on/off, forward/reverse, high/low speed, incl. 2 Schneider / --- ---
500-10000 l/h
mtr. contr. cable, mains voltage 3 x 400V, 50 Hz,
incl. stainless steel chassis and bypass connection,
DIN 11851 DN25, Inlet : Male, Outlet : Liner + Nut
Material of Pump body: Stainless steel (AISI 316) & hygienic version
Size: DN25 union
P222-1 1 PCS FIP25SH-SMS 92 M01 F80 Solids Pump Johnson / --- ---
Impeller: NBR
Motor size: IEC 80
Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge,Model 233.50,AISI 316L,Stainless
Bourdon Tube
PI220-2 1 PCS 233.50 Steel,,Outs. Thr.,1/4’’,BSP,,Range: 0/10 bar, Nominal size: 100mm, Wika / --- ---
Pressure Gauge
Bottom connection,
Diaphragm Seal Connection, Type: Model 990.52 End Connection:
Diaphragm Seal
1 PCS 990.52 Clamp DN32, Connection Standard: DIN, Diaphragm seal wetted Wika / ---
Connection
part – SS 316L
Component List
CLARA 80 Std/S 09-08-2016 --- 9660006066 00
Pressure Switch, Type: PN500X, Product Contact Material: Stainless

Steel (303S22), Other Material: Stainless Steel (304S15), End
PS300-3 1 PCS PN5004 Pressure Switch IFM / ---
Connection: Ins. Thr. 1/4’’, Connection Standard: BSP, Pressure
rating: -1 to 10 bar,
Type: Phase Guard T, Power supply: 9-30 VDC, Signal: 4 – 20 mA
Path-length: 10 mm, Electrical connection: M16 x 1.5,
Product wetted materials: St. 1.4404, EPDM,
QT220-6 1 PCS --- Turbidity Transmitter Parts: Sigrist / --- Optional
1 x in-line housing VARIVENT DN40
1 x blanking plate uncoated with O-ring
2 x VARIVENT-adapters
Included in
ST740 1 PCS --- Speed Transmitter --- / ---
separator
Type: VX21, Connection: 1/4’’ Ins. Thr., Safetyposition: NC, Material:
SV302-1 1 PCS VX212MZ2A Solenoid valve SS304, Gasket material: NBR, Voltage: 24V DC, Electrical SMC / SMC ---
connection: DIN Connector with LED, Flow rate: 600 LPM
Type: Sampling Device PEC 15, End Connection: Welded NW15,
V201-2 1 PCS PEC-15L Sampling Device Parth / ---
Body Material: AISI 316L, Seat Material: EDPM
673 32 D 0 34 5E 0 3TS Type: Diaphragm Valve 673, 2/2 Way Body, End Connection: DIN
V201-5 1 PCS Diaphragm Valve Gemü / Gemü
1502 welded DN32, Body Material: AISI-316L, Seat Material: PTFE,
Type: Sampling Device PEC 15, End Connection: Welded NW15,
V220-4 1 PCS PEC-15L Sampling Device Parth / ---
Body Material: AISI 316L, Seat Material: EDPM
Type:- 2371, End connection: DIN 11850 SERIES 2, welded, DN32,
V220-5 1 PCS 2371-01 Backpressure valve Samson / --- ---
Body material: AISI 316L, Set point: 4 to 6 bar, Kv 4.0,
Component List
CLARA 80 Std/S 09-08-2016 --- 9660006066 00
Type: three piece, full bore, 2 way, End connection: 1” BSP, Ins Thr,
V300-1 1 PCS Ball Valve UNISON / UNISON
Body material: AISI 304, Gasket: PTFE
Butterfly valve LKB-2 EN 1.4307 (AISI 304L) HNBR Welded DN25
DIN PN10
Butterfly valve with
9613419001+ 9612047501 handle and mounting
V300-4 1 PCS Mounting bracket with handle 1.1 for indication unit Alfa Laval / Alfa Laval
+ 9612510613 bracket for proximity
switch
Type: Hall proximity switch, PNP (grey) 20-30 VDC, Max. load: 15
mA
Included in
YT752 1 PCS --- Vibration Transmitter --- / ---
separator
Revision text:
Rev :00 By: INPAGATA

Comments:
9. Mechanical drawings & Documents
9.1. Layout drawing - 9660003213 - R06

10. Electrical, Automation & Documentation
10.1. Electrical drawing - 9699630000 - R16

10.2. VFD - FC302 - Danfoss
- Programming guide
- Operating instructions
10.3. Safety relay - 2963802 - Phoenix

10.4. Power supply – 2866750 - Phoenix
10.5. PLC - X20 - B&R (only in softcopy)
- Components datasheets
10.6. Emergency stop - XB4BS8442 - Schneider

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise),
A
or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval. Nor may it be used in any other way or for any other purpose than expressly permitted by Alfa Laval.
Alfa Laval Support Services Pvt. Ltd.,

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval AB (publ.) or its affiliates and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights.
The Fifth Avenue, D1-D2, 3rd Floor,

Dhole Patil Road - 411 001 Pune - India
Alfa Laval will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.
Customer : Simmons Grain
C
Project Description : Clara/Brew80
Subject : Electrical Wiring Diagram for Clara/Brew 80 PLC Cum MCC Panel
Project No.: : E864
Norm / Standards : IEC / EN Type Of Enclosure : Oneness : OC-CLSS-6012.305

D
Compliance : CE Fabrication Year : -
Rated Voltage / Frequency : 3 x 400-460V AC , 50/60Hz Degree Of Protection : IP54
Rated Current : 34A EMC - Environment : -
Protection Device : Circuit Breaker Max. Ambient Temperature : 40 ˚C

E
Earth System : TNS Panel Dimension H x W x D : 1200+100 mm x 600 mm x 305 mm
Rated Control Voltage : 24V AC / 24V DC Incoming Cables : Bottom
Rated Short-Circuit Max. : 10 KA Outgoing Cables : Bottom
F Rated Short-Circuit Min. : - Other Comments : -
Drawing Revision Issue :- R00
2
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Title page/Cover Sheet =
Alfa Laval Support Services Pvt. Ltd., Drawing No.:
Made by INPODKE 09-08-2016 +
9699630000 Page 1
Revision No. Made by Modification Date Checked by/Date Approved by/Date Project Name Date Pages of 36
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents Column X: An automatically generated page was edited

A
Page Page Description Date Edited By X
&GR/1 Title page/Cover Sheet 09-08-2016 INPODKE

&GR/2 Table Of Contents 10-08-2016 INPODKE
&GR/2.a Table Of Contents 10-08-2016 INPODKE

&GR/12 Structure identifier overview 09-08-2016 INPODKE

B
=A1+CP&SCH/1 Wire Colour / Wire Code 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/6 Component Marking & Abbreviations 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/7 Enclosure Layout 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/8 Internal Layout 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/9 Nameplates 09-08-2016 INPODKE

C
=A1+CP&SCH/20 Incoming Supply 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/21 Transformer Circuit 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/22 Power Supply 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/23 Emergency Stop Circuit 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/24 Cooling Control Panel 09-08-2016 INPODKE

D
=A1+CP&SCH/25 Motor feed pump 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/26 Separator M701 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/27 PLC Overview 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/28 Control Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/29 Power Supply Module 09-08-2016 INPODKE

E
=A1+CP&SCH/30 Digital Input Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/31 Digital Output Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/32 Digital Output circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/33 Digital Output circuit 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/34 Analog Input circuit 10-08-2016 INPODKE

F
=A1+CP&SCH/35 Analog Input circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/36 Namur Input circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/37 Analog Input Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/38 Digital Input circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&SCH/39 Digital Output Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE

G
1 2.a
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Table Of Contents =
9699630000 Page 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents Column X: An automatically generated page was edited

A
Page Page Description Date Edited By X
=A1+CP&SCH/40 Analog Output Circuit 09-08-2016 INPODKE

=A1+CP&PR/100 Parts list 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&PR/100.a Parts list 10-08-2016 INPODKE

=A1+CP&PR/100.b Parts list 10-08-2016 INPODKE

B
=A1+CP&PR/200 Cable Connection Diagram 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&PR/200.a Cable Connection Diagram 10-08-2016 INPODKE
=A1+CP&PR/200.b Cable Connection Diagram 10-08-2016 INPODKE
2 12
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Table Of Contents =
9699630000 Page 2.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Structure identifier overview ALC_F24_001_R01

A
Labeling Full designation Structure description Full designation Labeling Structure description
Higher-level function =A1

Mounting location +CP Control Panel
Mounting location +Field
Mounting location +EXT

B
Mounting location +FIELD
Document type &SCH Schematic Diagram
Document type &GR General Reports or Common Documents
Document type &PR Project Reports
Document type &OPT Optional Reports
2.a =A1+CP&SCH/1
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Structure identifier overview =
9699630000 Page 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
Wire Colour: EN 60204-1:2006 / IEC 60204-1:2005 Wire Code: IEC 60757
Wire Colour Wire Code Application mm² Marking Comments

With VFD Always

Black BK AC and DC Power Circuits
B
Use Cable With Screen
Blue BU DC Control Circuits
Brown BN Phase ( 230 VAC )
Green GN
C
Green / Yellow GNYE Earth ( PE )
Grey ( slate ) GY 0 VDC
Light Blue BU N ( 230 VAC )

D Remember:
Orange OG Foreign Voltage
Permanent Warning Label(s)
Pink PK Analogue Input
Red RD AC Control Circuits
E Silver SR
Turquoise TQ Potential Free
Violet ( purple ) VT Digital Input
White WH + 24 VDC
F
Yellow YE
* Colour identification using combination of those colours listed above may be used *
* For safety reasons, the colour Green or the colour Yellow may not be used except in the bicolour combination Green and Yellow *
G
* In General The Number Of Terminal Connection Is Used For Marking *
=+&GR/12 6
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Wire Colour / Wire Code = A1
Made by INPODKE 09-08-2016 + CP
9699630000 Page 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Component Labelling Component Type

A
A1 13 11
-19K4
Example: -19K4 -19K4
12
A2 14
Contactor -19K4
Component Type Description
Page 19 A EQUIPMENT GROUP : AMPLIFIER,PLC,...

B
C CONDENSATOR
Component type E LIGHTING EQUIPMENT,HEATING EQUIPMENT
F
PROTECTION : CIRCUIT BREAKER,FUSE
Column no. 4
,THERM. OVERLOAD RELAY,..
11 12 /6.4
G GENERATOR,POWER SUPPLY'S,...
13 14 /6.3
C H SIGNALLING DEVICE
Engraved Sticker : K CONTACTOR
RLY RELAY
THE ENGRAVED PLATES ARE FIXED WITH DOUBLE SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE M M MOTORS
Q Q POWER SWITCH GEAR :
D
CLARA/BREW 80 LOAD SWITCH BREAKER
MANUFACTURER’S NAME - ONENESS CONTROL PANELS PVT. LTD. ,MOTOR CIRCUIT BREAKER,...
VOLTAGE - 400-460V AC
PANEL IDENTIFICATION: PHASE & FREQUENCY - THREE PHASE, 50/60 Hz
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING - 10KA R R RESISTANCE,RHEOSTAT,...
DRAWING NUMBER & REVISION - 9699630000 R16
Dim: 120x55mm
S S ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR CONTROL CIRCUITS :
Character height: 8mm SWITCH,PUSH BUTTON,LIMIT SWITCH, .....
Color: white, characters: blue
T T TRANSFORMER,....
E
U U TRANSDUCER : ELECTRICAL / ELECTRICAL QUANTITY
FREQUENCY CONTROLLER,SOFTSTARTER,TRANSDUCER,..
CODES FOR INTERNAL WIRING FOR COMPONENTS (DEVICE FERRULING) X X TERMINAL BLOCKS,CONNECTORS,SOCKET,...
Y Y ELECTRICAL CONTROLLED MECHANICAL DEVICE :
VALVE,BRAKE,...
Example:
F
Source Devide Side Ferrul -22T1:L+
Target Device Side Ferrul -22F2:1

G
1 7
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Component Marking & Abbreviations = A1
9699630000 Page 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
150 280 125 96 275 450 305

115 141
22
21
2
125
150
150
-27G4
250
B
-23S4 -20S0
80
-24G2
120 105
1200
1300
1050
885
D
65
E
100
100
564 235
600 275 600 275
FRONT VIEW LEFT VIEW REAR VIEW RIGHT VIEW

95
80 40 40 40 76 125 100 600
F
PUMPS SEPARATOR 50 500 50
MOTOR POWER CABLE MOTOR POWER CABLE GLAND DETAILS.
80
85
6
M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M25 ∅25

∅1
∅2
40
0
55
M25 - 2NOS
75 40 40 40
M20 M20 M20 M20 M16 M16 M16

CONTROL
M20 - 16NOS+3SPARE.
CABLES
275
125
M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M16 -24G2 M16 - 5NOS.

41
10 10
165
195
275
M25 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M16 PG7 - 1NO.
PG7
56
3
MAINS ∅1 EARTH
50
CONTROL CABLES
SUPPLY CABLE CABLE
55
40
80 40 50
G
CROSS SECTION A-A
MOUNTING DETAILS NOTE : All Dimensions are in mm.

6 8
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Enclosure Layout = A1
9699630000 Page 7
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
7
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
INPAGAT
Modification Date Checked by/Date

INPAVME
1
Approved by/Date
Project
Made by
Name
INPODKE
1010
2
146 100 365 230
Date
09-08-2016
CABLE TRAY 40X80
PE
X0
-20X5
-21F3
-22F2
-22F1
-21Q1
-34F2
-23U2
X2
N
Clara & Brew 80

3
K1
L3
K2
P&F
L2
-27A1
L1
-27A2
-27A3
CABLE TRAY 40X80

-21K3 -21K4 -21K5
-25Q0 -25Q2 -25Q4
-27A4
X4
-27A5
-27A6
-27A7
CABLE TRAY 40X80 -27A8
-27A9
-27A10
560
-27A11
-27A12
-27A13
-20F0
4
CABLE TRAY 40X80
Internal Layout
410
-26U0
165
11KW
FC302 VFD
-22T1
CABLE TRAY 40X80

TF
-21T1
CABLE TRAY 40X80

5
400 200 200

1160


6
Internal Layout
7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
8
9
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
8
INPODKE
Made by
3:
2:
1:
0
10-08-2016
INPAGAT

-27G4
MAIN SWITCH
INPAVME
EMERGENCY STOP
1
Approved by/Date
Project
Made by
Name
INPODKE
2
Dim: 75mm x 20mm

Dim: 75mm x 20mm
Dim: 75mm x 20mm
Character height: 4.5mm

Date
09-08-2016
SS nameplate, characters black
Clara & Brew 80

3
ENGRAVED PLATES FOR CONTROL PANEL :

4
5


6
Nameplates
7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
9
20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-20X5
A
-20X5:1L1 / 21.0
-20X5:1L2 / 21.0
-20X5:2L1 / 25.1
-20X5:2L2 / 25.1
-20X5:2L3 / 25.1
-20X5:3L1 / 25.3
B 2 4 6 -20X5:3L2 / 25.3
-20F0 -20X5:3L3 / 25.3
NG125N 1 3 5
C40A -20X5:4L1 / 25.4
-20X5:4L2 / 25.5
-20X5:4L3 / 25.5
-20X5:5L1 / 26.0
-20X5:5L2 / 26.0
2 4 6 CAUTION -20X5:5L3 / 26.0
C -20S0 ISOLATE POWER
40A 1 3 5 SUPPLY ELSEWHERE
BEFORE OPENING
L1 L2 L3
-X0 PE
ST-6
PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
POWER SUPPLY PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PE7 PE8 PE9 PE10 PE11 PE12 PE13 PE14 PE15 PE16 PE17 PE18 PE19 PE20 PE21 PE22
3 PHASE SUPPLY
400-460V AC, 50/60 Hz
G
(CUSTOMER SCOPE)
9 21
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Incoming Supply = A1
9699630000 Page 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
20.9 / -20X5:1L1
20.9 / -20X5:1L2
A
1 3 5
-21Q1
1-1.6A
I> I> I>
2 4 6
-21T1
208-600VAC/ A B
500VA
SEC 1 - 24VAC ,SEC 2 - 230VAC
PE2
0 VAC24 VAC 0 VAC230 VAC

PRI. I PRI. 31 32 33 34
C
208 V 1.45 A 1 - 10
230 V 1.31 A 1-9 230 VAC / 22.0
380 V 0.79 A 2-10 0VAC 1 / 22.0
400 V 0.75 A 2-9
1
415 V 0.73 A 4-10
440 V 0.68 A 4-9 -21F3
460 V 0.65 A 5-9 T60N 2
480 V 0.63 A 6-9 PE3 C6A
500 V 0.60 A 6-8
525 V 0.57 A 3-7 24VAC / 23.1
D 550 V 0.55 A 4-7
575 V 0.52 A 5-7
600 V 0.50 A 6-7 13
-23U2
/23.2 14
SEC
24V AC 31-32
DO1.2COM
DO1.0COM DO1.1COM 32.4
230V AC 33-34 32.1 32.3
E
32.4
32.0 32.2
DO1.2NO
DO1.0NO DO1.1NO
13
13 13
-25Q4
-25Q0 -25Q2 /25.4 14
/25.1 14 /25.3 14
F A1
A1 A1
-21K5
-21K3 -21K4
24V A2
24V A2 24V A2
0VAC / 23.1
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

MOTOR P201 MOTOR P222 MOTOR P300
G
1/L1 2/T1 /25.4
1/L1 2/T1 /25.1 1/L1 2/T1 /25.3 3/L2 4/T2 /25.5
3/L2 4/T2 /25.1 3/L2 4/T2 /25.3 5/L3 6/T3 /25.5
5/L3 6/T3 /25.1 5/L3 6/T3 /25.3 13 14 /30.4
20 13 14 /30.1 13 14 /30.2 22
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Transformer Circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 21
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
21
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
21.8 / 0VAC1
21.8 / 230 VAC
INPAGAT

C6A
T60N
-22F1
PE4
5A
230VAC/24VDC
-22T1
AC
24.0 / 0VDC
L
2
1
L-
INPAVME
1
AC
PE
N
Approved by/Date
L+
Project
Made by
PE5
24.0 / 24VDC+
2
1
C6A
T60N
-22F2
Name
INPODKE
2
Date
09-08-2016
Clara & Brew 80
3
4
5


6
Power Supply
7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
22
23
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
22
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
21.8 / 0VAC
21.8 / 24VAC
INPAGAT

INPAVME
1
Approved by/Date
Project
Made by
Name
INPODKE
2
-23U2
Date
A1
09-08-2016
A2
S33
S11
Clara & Brew 80

3
+Field-23S4.1
S34
13
14
/21.3
14
13
2x1
Olflex 110
-23W3
/26.5
2
1
24
23
/38.0
34
33
4
-23S4
-X4 2
-X4 1
44
43
S12
52
51
12
11
Em STOP
when used)
(Remove links
Field Provision
5


6
Emergency Stop Circuit

7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
0VAC / 31.1
24VAC / 31.1
36
23
24
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
23
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
22.1 / 0VDC
22.2 / 24VDC+
INPAGAT

INPAVME
1
Approved by/Date
Project
Made by
Name
-24G2
INPODKE
2
2
1
PANEL
Date
COOLING
CONTROL
09-08-2016
Clara & Brew 80
3
4
5


6
Cooling Control Panel

7
0VDC / 29.0
24VDC+ / 29.0
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
24
25
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-20X5:2L1
-20X5:2L2
-20X5:2L3
-20X5:3L1
-20X5:3L2
-20X5:3L3
-20X5:4L1
-20X5:4L2
-20X5:4L3
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
20.9
A
1 3 5 13 21 1 3 5 13 21 1 3 5 13 21
-25Q0 -25Q2 -25Q4
2,5-4A 14 22 1-1,6A 14 22 2,5-4A 14 22
/21.3
/21.5
/21.6
I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I>
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
NOTE : Standard schneider link to be used between MPCB and contactor.

Ferruls are not valid.
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

-21K3 -21K4 -21K5
D /21.3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 /21.5 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 /21.6 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X2 -X2 -X2
-25W0 -25W2 -25W4

OLFLEX110 1 2 3 PE OLFLEX110 OLFLEX110
F
4G1.5 4G1.5 1 2 3 PE 4G1.5 1 2 3 PE
PE6 PE7 PE8

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M M M
+Field-P201-1 +Field-P222-1 +Field-P300-2
1.5/1.8kW 3~ 0.55/0.63kW 3~ 1.1kW 3~
PE PE PE
G
MOTOR P201 MOTOR P222 MOTOR P300
FEED PUMP SOLIDS PUMP WATER PUMP
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)
24 26
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Motor feed pump = A1
9699630000 Page 25
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
25
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
20.9 / -20X5:5L3
20.9 / -20X5:5L2
20.9 / -20X5:5L1
-26U0
4G4
OLFLEX CLASSIC 110CY
-26W0
INPAGAT
11kW
+Field-M701

U
IN
L1
(96)
(91)
U1
3
V
IN
L2
M
(97)
(92)
M701
V1
11KW
INPAVME
1
SEPERATOR
W
IN
L3
(98)
(93)
Approved by/Date
W1
PE
PE.
(99)
PE
PE
PE10
Project
Made by
SH
PE9
(-)
88
Name
INPODKE
89
(+)
2
2x1
OLFLEX 110
-26W3
Date
FC302P11KT
Thermistor
+Field-M701R3
(+24V)
12
09-08-2016
(+10V)
50
x2
x1
S201 (+24V)
13
31U2:COM / 32.7
1
ON
(A IN) (D IN)
53
18
2
S202
1
ON
(D IN)
19
DO1.6COM / 32.8
Clara & Brew 80

3
(COM D IN)
20
(A IN)
54
(COM A IN)
55
(D IN/OUT)
27
DO1.5NO / 32.7
(D IN/OUT)
29
4
81
(R-)
(D IN)
32
82
(R+)
(D IN)
33
/23.2
-23U2
(D IN)
37
24
23
(COM A OUT)
39
34.4 / 26U0:39
5
(A OUT)
42
34.3 / 26U0:42
SETTINGS TO DO ON VFD:
S201 IS TO SET OFF (0-10V FOR THERMISTOR)

(COM RS485)
61

(P RS485)
68
6
(N RS485)
69
S801
1
ON
Separator M701
S202 IS TO SET ON (0-20mA FOR SPEED INPUT SIGNAL)0-10V FOR THERMISTOR)
2
03
/30.7
01
02
7
06
/30.8
04
62
05
63
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
26
27
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
-27A1 -27A2 -27A3 -27A4 -27A5 -27A6 -27A7 -27A8 -27A9 -27A10 -27A11 -27A12 -27A13
/28.1 /29.1 /30.0 /31.1 /32.0 /33.0 /34.0 /35.0 /36.0 /37.0 /38.0 /39.0 /40.0
X20CP0292
CPU
X20PS9500 X20DI6371 X20DO2649 X20DO6529 X20DO4529 X20AI4622 X20AT2222 X20DI4760 X20AI2632 X20DI6371 X20DO6529 X20AO2622
PS 6DI 2DO 6DO 4DO 4AI 2AT 4DI 2AI 6DI 6DO 2AO
-27G4
/29.1
NOTE :- FOR BREW PV201-5 (-27A13) IS OPTIONAL.

G
FOR CLARA FLOW REGULATING VALVE PV201-5 IS NOT AVAILABLE
26 28
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 PLC Overview = A1
9699630000 Page 27
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
27
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
INPAGAT

/27.1
-27A1
INPAVME
1
Approved by/Date
B&R
RXD
Project
Made by
RXD/
Name
INPODKE
2
TXD
X20CP0292
Date
09-08-2016
4
TERM.
5
TERM.
Clara & Brew 80

3
TXD/
6
7
TERM.
4
8
TERM.
5


6
Control Circuit
7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
28
29
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
28
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
24.7 / 0VDC
24.7 / 24VDC+
INPAGAT

/27.3
-27G4
/27.2
-27A2
3G0.75
LIYY-JZ
-29W1
INPAVME
1
+
B&R
RXD
11
WH
Approved by/Date
-
Project
Made by
3
PE
TXD
BN
21
PE11
Name
INPODKE
2
Date
GN
22
09-08-2016
RS232 GND
X20PS9500
12
CAN GND
Clara & Brew 80

3
13
CAN HIGH
4
23
CAN LOW
14
5
15
+24VDC CPU/BUS +24VDC CPU/BUS


GND
16
6
24
+24VDC I/O
Power Supply Module

7
25
+24VDC I/O
GND
26
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
0VDC / 31.1
24VDC+ / 31.1
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
29
30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-27A3 B&R X20DI6371

/27.2
DI0.1 +24VDC DI0.2 +24VDC DI0.3 +24VDC DI0.4 +24VDC DI0.5 +24VDC DI0.6 +24VDC
11 14 21 24 12 15 22 25 13 16 23 26
13 13 13 02 03 05 06
-21K3 -21K4 -21K5 -26U0 -26U0
/21.3 14 /21.5 14 /21.6 14 /26.0 01 /26.0 04
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK FEEDBACK FLOW TOTALIZATION/PULSE INPUT FEEDBACK DRIVE OVERSPEED

FEED PUMP SOLID PUMP WATER PUMP -FIT201-4 NO ALARM ALARM FROM DRIVE
P201-1 P222-1 P300-2
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)
29 31
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Input Circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-27A4 B&R X20DO2649

/27.2
DO0.1NC DO0.1COM DO0.1NO DO0.2NC DO0.2COM DO0.2NO
11 12 13 14 15 16
29.8 / 24VDC+ 24VDC+ / 33.0
29.8 / 0VDC 0VDC / 33.0
23.9 / 24VAC 24VAC / 32.0
23.9 / 0VAC 0VAC / 32.0
3 4 5 6 7
-X4 -X4
-31W1 -31W4
ÖLFLEX 110 OLFLEX110
4G0.75 3 2 1 PE 3G0.75 1 2
PE12
E
x1
+Field-SV300-1
+Field-V201-3 x2
1 4 2 3 PE
CLOSE
OPEN
COM
OPEN / CLOSE SV300-1

INLET VALVE
NOTE :- SV300-1 IS NOT AVAILABLE IN CLARA.
FOR BREW IT COMES IN STD DELIVERY.
G
30 32
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Output Circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 31
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-27A5 B&R X20DO6529

/27.3
DO1.0NO DO1.0COM DO1.1NO DO1.1COM DO1.2NO DO1.2COM DO1.4NO DO1.4COM DO1.5NO DO1.5COM DO1.6NO DO1.6COM
11 12 21 22 13 14 23 24 15 16 25 26
DO1.0NO DO1.0COM DO1.1NO DO1.1COM DO1.2NO DO1.2COM DO1.5NO 31U2:COM DO1.6COM

C 21.3 21.3 21.5 21.5 21.6 21.6 26.4 26.3 26.3
31.8 / 24VAC
31.8 / 0VAC
D
8 9 10
-X4
-32W5
ÖLFLEX 110
4G0.75 3 2 1 PE
PE13
E
+Field-V320_1
1 4 2 3 PE
FEED PUMP P201-1 SOLIDS PUMP P222-1 WATER PUMP P300-2 V320_1 Bit 0 F-Drive Bit 1 F-Drive
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL) Run Reset Drive
G NOTE :- V320_1 IS NOT AVAILABLE IN CLARA.

FOR BREW IT COMES IN STD DELIVERY.
31 33
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Output circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 32
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-27A6 B&R X20DO4529

/27.3
DO0.1NC DO0.1COM DO0.1NO DO0.2NC DO0.2COM DO0.2NO DO0.3NC DO0.3COM DO0.3NO DO0.4NC DO0.4COM DO0.4NO
11 12 13 21 22 23 14 15 16 24 25 26
31.8 / 24VDC+ 24VDC+ / 34.0
31.8 / 0VDC 0VDC / 34.0
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D -X4 -X4 -X4 -X4
-33W1 -33W4 -33W6

OLFLEX110 OLFLEX110 OLFLEX110
3G0.75 1 2 3G0.75 1 2 3G0.75 1 2
x1 x1 x1
+Field-SV302-1 +Field-SV376-1 +Field-SV372-1
x2 x2 x2
FLUSHING/SEALING CLOSING DISCHARGE ALARM OUTPUT

WATER WATER WATER NO CONTACT
-SV302-1 -SV376-1 -SV372-1 MAX. 115V 0.5A-NO
32 34
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Output circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 33
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-27A7 B&R
X20AI4622
/27.3
AI0.1I AI0.1U AI0.1U/I AI0.2I AI0.2U AI0.2U/I AI0.3I AI0.3U AI0.3U/I AI0.4I AI0.4U AI0.4U/I
11 12 13 21 22 23 14 15 16 24 25 26
26.5 26.5
26U0:42 26U0:39
33.9 / 24VDC+ 24VDC+ / 37.0
33.9 / 0VDC 0VDC / 37.0
1 3
-34F2
2P,4A 2 4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
D -X4
-34W5 -34W7
EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE
-34W1 PE14 8x0.5 WH-GR WH-BR GR BR SH 8x0.5 WH-GR WH-BR GR BR SH
E
ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110 CY PE18
3G1 PE17
1 2 PE SH
PE15
+Field-FIT201-4 +Field-QT220-6 +Field-QT201-6
- I + I- - I + I-
12- 11+ e
NOTE :- INLET & OUTLET TURBIDITY TRANSMITTER

ARE FOR BREW.WHILE FOR CLARA ONLY
OUTLET TURBIDITY TRANSMITTER IS PRESENT
FLOW
TRANSMITTER CURRENT TURBIDITY TURBIDITY
G
-FIT201-4 FEEDBACK TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
FROM DRIVE (OUTLET) (INLET)
QT220-6 -QT201-6
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)
33 35
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Analog Input circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 34
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
34
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
/27.4
-27A8
INPAGAT
B&R

INPAVME
1
Approved by/Date
AT0.1+
Project
Made by
X20AT2222
AT0.1
SPARE
Name
INPODKE
2
Date
09-08-2016
AT0.1-
Clara & Brew 80

3
4
5


AT0.2+
6
AT0.2
SPARE
Analog Input circuit

7
AT0.2-
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
35
36
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
35
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
/27.4
-27A9
INPAGAT
B&R

+Field-JB1
7x0.75
UNITRONIC LiYCY
/37.1
-36W1
EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE

-36W1.1
INPAVME
1
+Field-ST740
-X4
-
1
Approved by/Date
BU
BN
33
DI1.K1+
11
ST740
Project
Made by
SPEED SENSOR
X20DI4760
+
2
BU
BN
DI1.K1-
34
13
Name
INPODKE
2
Date
09-08-2016
Clara & Brew 80
3
DI1.K2+
21
SPARE
DI1.K2-
23
4
DI1.K3+
14
5
SPARE
DI1.K3-
16


6
DI1.K4+
24
Namur Input circuit

SPARE
7
DI1.K4-
26
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
36
37
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
36
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
34.9 / 0VDC
34.9 / 24VDC+
/27.4
-27A10
+Field-JB1
INPAGAT
B&R

-37W1.1
7x0.75
UNITRONIC LiYCY
/36.1
-36W1
-X4
+
7
GY
BN
35
INPAVME
1
J
6
Approved by/Date
AI1.1I
YE
YT752
BK
36
11
+Field-YT752
-
VIBRATION SENSOR
5
Project
Made by
BU
37
WH
X20AI2632
AI1.1U
12
Name
INPODKE
2
Date
09-08-2016
AI1.1U/I
13
Clara & Brew 80

3
AI1.2I
21
SPARE
4
AI1.2U
22
AI1.2U/I
23
5


6
Analog Input Circuit

7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
0VDC / 38.1
36
37
38
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
-27A11 B&R X20DI6371
/27.5
DI0.1 +24VDC DI0.2 +24VDC DI0.3 +24VDC DI0.4 +24VDC DI0.5 +24VDC DI0.6 +24VDC
11 14 21 24 12 15 22 25 13 16 23 26
37.9 / 0VDC
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
C -X4
-38W2 -38W7
EVT004 EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE
4x0.34 BK BN BU 4x 0.34 mm² BK BN BU
D
33
-23U2
/23.2 34
+Field-V300-4 +Field-PS300-3
3 4 4 1
+
+
E
2 1 3
- -
FEEDBACK MANUAL VALVE CLOSE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL INLET PRESSURE SWITCH SPARE
EMERGENCY STOP V300-4 TRIGGER DISCHARGE PRODUCTION TRIP -PS300-3
TO STANDBY
37 39
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Input circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 38
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A
-27A12 B&R X20DO6529
/27.5
DO1.0NO DO1.0COM DO1.1NO DO1.1COM DO1.2NO DO1.2COM DO1.4NO DO1.4COM DO1.5NO DO1.5COM DO1.6NO DO1.6COM
11 12 21 22 13 14 23 24 15 16 25 26
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
C -X4
STANDSTILL STARTING STANDBY PRODUCTION CLEANING STOPPING

NO CONTACT NO CONTACT NO CONTACT NO CONTACT NO CONTACT NO CONTACT
MAX. 115V 0.5A- MAX. 115V 0.5A- MAX. 115V 0.5A- MAX. 115V 0.5A- MAX. 115V 0.5A- MAX. 115V 0.5A-
NO NO NO NO NO NO
38 40
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Digital Output Circuit = A1
9699630000 Page 39
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
39
INPODKE
Made by
0
10-08-2016
/27.6
-27A13
INPAGAT
OPTIONAL
B&R

+Field-PV201-5
3G1
ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110 CY
-40W1
INPAVME
1
-X4
+
1
Approved by/Date
AO+1I
63
11
Project
Made by
X20AO2622
VALVE
AO+1U
12
PV201-5
Name
(OPTIONAL)
INPODKE
2
FLOW REGULATING
Date
-
09-08-2016
2
64
AO-1U/I
13
PE
PE
PE21
SH
PE20
Clara & Brew 80

3
AO+2I
21
4
AO+2I
SPARE
22
AO-2U/I
23
5


6
Analog Output Circuit

7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
FOR CLARA IT IS NOT AVAILABLE.
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
NOTE :- FLOW REGULATING VALVE PV201-5 IS OPTIONAL FOR BREW.
36
40
&PR/100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A Parts list
POS. NO. DENOMINATION QUANTITY PART NO. MAKE PAGE REF. Tag
-27A1 X20 CPU, Compact CPU μP 25, 750 KB SRAM, 3 MB Flash 1 X20CP0292 B&R &SCH/27.1
-27A1 X20 Compact CPU Base, RS232 1 X20BB22 B&R &SCH/27.1 Modul
-27A2 X20 CPU Power Feed, 24V, Bus Supply 1 X20PS9500 B&R &SCH/27.2 Modul
B
-27A2 X20 Terminal Block 12 pin, 24v coded 1 X20TB12 B&R &SCH/27.2 Modul
-27A3 X20 Digital 6xI, 24V, Sink, 2 Wire 1 X20DI6371 B&R &SCH/27.2 Modul
-27A3 X20 Supply Bus Module 1 X20BM11 B&R &SCH/27.2 Modul
-27A4 X20 digital output module,2 relays,change-over contacts, 230 VAC/5 A,30VDC/5 A 1 X20DO2649 B&R &SCH/27.2 Modul
C
-27A5 X20 Digital Output module, 6relays,N.O.contacts, 115 VAC/0.5 A, 30VDC/1A 1 X20DO6529 B&R &SCH/27.3 Modul
-27A6 X20 Digital 4xO, Relay CO 115VAC 0.5A 1 X20DO4529 B&R &SCH/27.3 Modul
D -27A7 X20 Analog 4xI, +/-10V/0..20 mA, 12 Bit 1 X20AI4622 B&R &SCH/27.3 Modul
-27A8 X20 Analog 2xI, RTD, 3 Wire 1 X20AT2222 B&R &SCH/27.4 Modul
-27A9 X20 digital input module, 4 Namur inputs, 8.05 VDC 1 X20DI4760 B&R &SCH/27.4 Modul
E
-27A10 X20 Analog Input Module, 2 inputs, ±10 V / 0 to 20 mA,16 bit 1 X20AI2632 B&R &SCH/27.4
-27A11 X20 Digital 6xI, 24V, Sink, 2 Wire 1 X20DI6371 B&R &SCH/27.5 Modul
F
-27A12 X20 Digital Output module, 6relays,N.O.contacts, 115 VAC/0.5 A, 30VDC/1A 1 X20DO6529 B&R &SCH/27.5 Modul
-27A13 X20 Analog 2xO, +/-10V/0..20 mA, 12 Bit 1 X20AO2622 B&R &SCH/27.6 Modul
G -27A13 X20 Terminal Block 12 pin, 24v coded 1 X20TB12 B&R &SCH/27.6 Modul
&SCH/40 100.a
R00 INPODKE 10-08-2016 INPAGAT INPAVME Clara & Brew 80 Parts list = A1
9699630000 Page 100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A Parts list
-20F0 CIRCUIT BREAKER NG125N 3P/40A CURVE C 1 MG.18637 Schneider &SCH/20.0

-21F3 Circuit breaker 1P/6A CURVE C 1 A9N1P06C Schneider &SCH/21.3

B
-24G2 Panel Fan 24Vdc,4.8W - 105 CFM 1 REC-12038 A24 Rexnord &SCH/24.2
-24G2 Exhaust filter 125x125mm IP54 2 ELD.EFA200R5 Eldon &SCH/24.2
-24G2 Grill Kit for 4" Fan 1 -- Local &SCH/24.2
-27G4 Operator Panel 1 4B1260.00-K07 B&R &SCH/27.3 Modul
-27G4 Housing for 9P SUB D 1 TRI.BEH. VOOR 9P SUB D PVC TRI &SCH/27.3
C
-27G4 Connector SUB D 9P Female 1 TRI.SUB D 9P VROUWELIJK TRI &SCH/27.3
-21K3 Contactor TeSys LC1-D - 3P - AC-3 440V 9 A 1 LC1D093B7 Schneider &SCH/21.3
-21K3 Base plate 1 GV2AF01 Schneider &SCH/21.3
-21K4 Base plate 1 GV2AF01 Schneider &SCH/21.5
D -21K5 Base plate 1 GV2AF01 Schneider &SCH/21.6

-M16 Cable Gland M16x1.5 5 BMEM-01 Connectwell &SCH/7.0
-M16 Locknut for Cable Gland _M16 5 BMBL-02 Connectwell &SCH/7.0
-M20 Cable Gland M20x1.5 EMC 19 BMEM-E2 Connectwell &SCH/7.0
-M25 Cable Gland M25x1.5 2 BMEM-E3 Connectwell &SCH/7.0
E
-PG7 Cable Gland PG7 1 BSEM-01 Connectwell &SCH/7.1
-PG7 Locknut for Cable Gland _PG7 1 BSL-01 Connectwell &SCH/7.1
-21Q1 Thermal Magnetic Switch 1-1.6A 1 GV2RT06 Schneider &SCH/21.2
-25Q0 Motor circuit breaker 2.5-4A 1 GV2ME08 Schneider &SCH/25.1
-25Q0 Auxiliary contact 1NO + 1NC 1 GVAE11 Schneider &SCH/25.1
-25Q2 Motor Circuit breaker 1-1.6A 1 GV2ME06 Schneider &SCH/25.3
F
-25Q4 Motor circuit breaker 2.5-4A 1 GV2ME08 Schneider &SCH/25.4
-20S0 Load switch 3P/40A Black Lockable 1 TEL.VBF2 Schneider &SCH/20.0
-23S4 Emergency Stop Switch Turn to Release 1 XB4BS8442 Schneider &SCH/23.4
-23S4 Protective Cover Yellow 1 ZB4BZ1905 Schneider &SCH/23.4
-21T1 TRANSFORMER 1PH 208-600V/SEC 1 - 230VAC , SEC 2 -24VAC 500VA 1 YMT500/24V-230VAC Yasho &SCH/21.1
G -22T1 Power Supply Unit I/P -230VAC,O/P- 24VDC,5A 1 2866750 Phoenix &SCH/22.1
100 100.b
9699630000 Page 100.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A Parts list
-23U2 Safety Relay 1Ch ,24VAC/DC 4NO/1NC 1 2963802 Phoenix &SCH/23.2

-26U0 Frequency Converter 11KW 1 FC302 P11KT Danfoss &SCH/26.0
-X0 Spring-cage feed-through terminal block ST 6 3 3031487 Phoenix &SCH/20.7

B
-X2 Multi-level terminal block ST 2,5 -3L GRAY 3 3036042 Phoenix &SCH/20.7
-X4 Double-level spring-cage terminal block STTB 2,5 35 3031270 Phoenix &SCH/20.7
-20X5 Terminal Block 1 ERI.563820 Erico &SCH/20.5
100.a 200
9699630000 Page 100.b
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
INPODKE
Made by
External targets Internal targets
100.b
0
+Field +CP
10-08-2016
1 1
14
-23W3 &SCH/20.7
X4
2 Olflex 110 2x1 2
13
-23S4.1
INPAGAT

+Field +CP
1 1
1
INPAVME
1
&SCH/20.7
U1
2 2
2
Approved by/Date
X2
3 -25W0 3
3
V1 W1
OLFLEX110 4G1.5
-P201-1
Project
Made by
+CP
PE PE
PE
&SCH/25.1
PE6
Name
INPODKE
2
+Field +CP
1 1
Date
4
&SCH/20.7
U1
09-08-2016
2 2
5
X2
3 -25W2 3
6
V1 W1
OLFLEX110 4G1.5
-P222-1
+CP
PE PE
PE
&SCH/25.3
Clara & Brew 80

3
PE7
+Field +CP
1 1
7
&SCH/20.7
U1
2 2
8
X2
3 -25W4 3
9
V1 W1
OLFLEX110 4G1.5
-P300-2
4
+CP
PE PE
PE
&SCH/25.5
PE8
+Field +CP
1 1
U
&SCH/26.0
U1
2 2
V
5
3 3
26U0
-M701
W
-26W0
PE OLFLEX CLASSIC 110CY 4G4 PE
V1 W1 PE
PE.

SH SH

PE9
6
+Field +CP
1 1
x1
50
-26W3 &SCH/26.0
2 2
26U0
OLFLEX 110 2x1

x2
53
-M701R3
+Field +CP
Cable Connection Diagram
1 1
7
3
5
&SCH/20.7
2 2
4
4
X4
3 -31W1 3
1
3
ÖLFLEX 110 4G0.75

-V201-3
PE PE
PE
&SCH/31.3
PE12
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
+Field +CP
1 -31W4 1
6
x1
X4
&SCH/20.7
OLFLEX110 3G0.75
-SV300-1
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
200
200.a
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
200
INPODKE
Made by
0
+Field +CP
10-08-2016
2 -31W4 2
x2
X4
&SCH/20.7
OLFLEX110 3G0.75
-SV300-1
INPAGAT

+Field +CP
1 1
3
10
&SCH/20.7
2 2
4
9
INPAVME
1
X4
3 -32W5 3
1
8
Approved by/Date
ÖLFLEX 110 4G0.75
-V320_1
Project
PE PE
Made by
PE
&SCH/32.6
PE13
Name
INPODKE
+Field +CP
2
1 1
x1
11
-33W1 &SCH/20.7
X4
2 OLFLEX110 3G0.75 2
Date
x2
12
-SV302-1
09-08-2016
+Field +CP
1 1
x1
13
-33W4 &SCH/20.7
X4
2 OLFLEX110 3G0.75 2
Clara & Brew 80

3
x2
14
-SV376-1
+Field +CP
1 1
x1
15
-33W6 &SCH/20.7
X4
2 OLFLEX110 3G0.75 2
x2
16
-SV372-1
4
+Field +CP
1 1
19
&SCH/20.7
X4
2 2
23
12- 11+
-34W1
-FIT201-4
PE ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110CY 3G1 PE

e
&SCH/34.1
PE14
5
SH SH
PE15

+Field +CP

BR BR
I-
28
&SCH/20.7
GR GR
+
27
6
-QT220-6
SH -34W5 SH
X4
PE17
EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE 8 x 0.5

+Field
WH-BR WH-BR
I
26
WH-GR WH-GR
-
25
-QT220-6

7
+Field +CP
BR BR
I-
32
&SCH/20.7
GR GR
+
31
-QT201-6
-34W7
9699630000
X4
Drawing No.:
SH EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE 8 x 0.5 SH

PE18
8
+Field
WH-BR WH-BR
I
30
-QT201-6
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
200.a
200.b
R00
Revision No.
F
E
B
C
A
G
D
INPODKE
Made by
200.a
0
+Field +CP
10-08-2016
WH-GR -34W7 WH-GR
-
29
X4
&SCH/20.7
EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE 8 x 0.5
-QT201-6
INPAGAT

+Field +CP
BN BN
1
33
&SCH/20.7
BU BU
INPAVME
1
34
GY -36W1 GY
Approved by/Date
35
X4
UNITRONIC LiYCY 7x0.75
-JB1-X
WH WH
5
37
Project
YE YE
Made by
6
36
Name
INPODKE
+Field +Field
2
BN BN
2
+
-36W1.1 &SCH/36.1
BU EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE BU
Date
JB1-X
-
1
-ST740
09-08-2016
+Field +Field
BK BK
J
6
&SCH/37.1
BN -37W1.1 BN
Clara & Brew 80

3
+
JB1-X
-YT752
BU BU
-
5
+Field +CP
BK BK
3
38
&SCH/20.7
BN -38W2 BN
4
39
X4
4
EVT004- 4 x 0.34
1 BU BU
40
-V300-4
2
+Field +CP
BK BK
4
45
&SCH/20.7
-38W7
5
BN BN
1
46
X4
EQUIPMENT WITH CABLE - 4 x

-PS300-3
BU 0.34 mm² BU
3
47

+Field +CP

1 1
+
63
&SCH/20.7
X4
2 2
-
64
6
-40W1
-PV201-5
PE ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110CY 3G1 PE

PE
&SCH/40.3
PE21
SH SH
PE20

7
9699630000
Drawing No.:
8
Page
= A1
+ CP
9
Pages of
36
200.b
MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
Programming Guide
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
www.danfoss.com/drives
Contents Programming Guide
Contents
1 Introduction 3
1.1 Software Version 3
1.2 Approvals 3
1.3 Definitions 3
1.3.1 Frequency Converter 3
1.3.2 Input 3
1.3.3 Motor 3
1.3.4 References 4
1.3.5 Miscellaneous 4
1.4 Safety 6
1.5 Electrical Wiring 8
2 How to Program 11
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels 11
2.1.1 The LCD Display 12
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters 13
2.1.3 Display Mode 14
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs 14
2.1.5 Parameter Set-up 15
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions 15
2.1.7 Initial Commissioning 17
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 18
2.1.9 Parameter Selection 18
2.1.10 Changing Data 19
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value 19
2.1.12 Changing a Data Value 19
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value 19
2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step 20
2.1.15 Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters 20
2.1.16 LCP Keys 21
2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings 21
3 Parameter Descriptions 23
3.1 Parameter Selection 23
3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 24
3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 35
3.3.1 1-0* General Settings 35
3.3.2 1-1* Special Settings 37
3.3.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up 37
3.3.4 PM Motor Set-up 38
MG33MJ02 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 10/2014 All rights reserved. 1

Contents VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
3.3.5 SynRM Motor Set-up with VVC+ 39

3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 59
3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 66
3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 76
3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out 82
3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 102
3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 111
3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options 117
3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus 125
3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNET CAN Fieldbus 125
3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet 125
3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control 126
3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions 144
3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 154
3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs 159
3.18 Parameters: 17-** Feedback 165
3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 168
3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 169
3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 172
3.22 Parameters: 42-** Safety Functions 174
4 Parameter Lists 175

4.1 Parameter Lists and Options 175
4.1.2 Conversion 176
4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes 176
5 Troubleshooting 212
5.1 Status Messages 212
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages 212
6 Appendix 224
6.1 Symbols, Abbreviations and Conventions 224
Index 225
2 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 10/2014 All rights reserved. MG33MJ02

Introduction Programming Guide
1 Introduction 1 1
1.1 Software Version fJOG

Programming Guide Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
Software version: 7.XX digital terminals).
fM
This Programming Guide can be used for all FC 300 frequency Motor frequency.
converters with software version 7.XX. fMAX
The software version number can be read from Maximum motor frequency.
parameter 15-43 Software Version.
fMIN
Table 1.1 Software Version Minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
1.2 Approvals Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
Motor current (actual).
IM,N
Rated motor current (nameplate data).
nM,N
Rated motor speed (nameplate data).
ns
Synchronous motor speed
1.3 Definitions
2 × par . 1 − 23 × 60 s
ns =
par . 1 − 39
1.3.1 Frequency Converter nslip
Motor slip.
IVLT,MAX
Maximum output current. PM,N
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).
IVLT,N
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter. TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
UVLT,MAX
Maximum output voltage. UM
Instantaneous motor voltage.
1.3.2 Input UM,N

Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Control command Torque
175ZA078.10
Start and stop the connected motor by means of LCP and

Pull-out
digital inputs.
Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.
Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,
Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF] key.
Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog
and Freeze output.
Table 1.2 Function Groups
1.3.3 Motor rpm
Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque

Motor Running
Torque generated on output shaft and speed from zero
RPM to max. speed on motor.

Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
1 1 Break-away torque Brake resistor

ηVLT The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
ratio between the power output and the power input. regenerative braking power increases the intermediate
circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
Start-disable command
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
- see Table 1.2. CT characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
Stop command
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and cranes.
A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
- see Table 1.2. Digital inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
1.3.4 References functions of the frequency converter.
Digital outputs
Analog reference The frequency converter features 2 Solid State outputs that
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54(voltage can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
or current).
DSP
Binary reference Digital signal processor.
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
ETR
Preset reference Electronic thermal relay is a thermal load calculation based
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate the
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via motor temperature.
the digital terminals.
Hiperface®
Pulse reference Hiperface® is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
Initialising
(terminal 29 or 33).
If initialising is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation
RefMAX Mode), the frequency converter returns to the default
Determines the relationship between the reference input setting.
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
Intermittent duty cycle
resulting reference. The maximum reference value is set in
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
RefMIN period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-
Determines the relationship between the reference input periodic duty.
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
LCP
reference. The minimum reference value is set in
The Local Control Panel makes up a complete interface for
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference.
control and programming of the frequency converter. The
control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m
1.3.5 Miscellaneous from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel with the
installation kit option.
Analog inputs
NLCP
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
Numerical Local Control Pandel interface for control and
functions of the frequency converter.
programming of the frequency converter. The display is
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
numerical and the panel is used to display process values.
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
The NLCP has no storage and copy functions.
Voltage input, -10 to +10 V DC.
lsb
Analog outputs
Least significant bit.
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA. msb
Most significant bit.
Automatic motor adaptation, AMA
AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for MCM
the connected motor at standstill. Short for mille circular mil, an American measuring unit for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067 mm2.

Online/Offline Parameters Trip 1 1

Changes to online parameters are activated immediately A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate converter is subject to an overtemperature or when the
changes to off-line parameters. frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or
mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause of the
Process PID
The PID control maintains the desired speed, pressure, fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by
temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
match the varying load. to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal
safety.
PCD
Process control data Trip locked
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
Power cycle converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
Switch off the mains until display (LCP) is dark – then turn intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a
power on again. short circuit on the output. A locked trip can only be
Pulse input/incremental encoder cancelled by disconnecting mains, removing the cause of
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back the fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter.
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by
applications where great accuracy in speed control is activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
required. to reset automatically. The trip locked state must not be
used for personal safety.
RCD
Residual current device. VT characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 Set-ups. Change between the VVC+
4 parameter Set-ups and edit one Set-up, while another If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
Set-up is active. voltage vector control (VVC+) improves the dynamics and
the stability, both when the speed reference is changed
SFAVM
and in relation to the load torque.
Switching pattern called stator flux oriented asynchronous
vector modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern). 60° AVM
Slip compensation Switching pattern called 60° Asynchronous vector
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the Power factor
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
constant. 3 x U x I 1 cos ϕ
Power factor =
3 x U x IRMS
SLC
The SLC (Smart Logic Control) is a sequence of user- The power factor for 3-phase control:
defined actions executed when the associated user-defined I1 x cosϕ1 I1
= = since cosϕ1 = 1
IRMS IRMS
events are evaluated as true by the SLC. (Parameter group
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency
13-** Smart Logic Control (SLC).
converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
STW The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
Status word. same kW performance.
FC standard bus IRMS = I2 2 2 2
1 + I 5 + I 7 + .. + I n
Includes RS-485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different
8-30 Protocol.
harmonic currents are low.
THD The frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high
Total harmonic distortion states the total contribution of power factor, which minimises the imposed load on the
harmonic. mains supply.
Thermistor
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter or
motor).

1 1 1.4 Safety 3. A motor that has been stopped with the mains
supply connected, may start if faults occur in the
WARNING electronics of the frequency converter, through
temporary overload, or if a fault in the power
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous
supply grid or motor connection is remedied. If
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of
unintended start must be prevented for personal
the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause
safety reasons (e.g. risk of injury caused by
death, serious personal injury or damage to the
contact with moving machine parts), the normal
equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this
stop functions of the frequency converter are not
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
sufficient. In such cases, disconnect mains supply
regulations, must be complied with.
or activate Safe Torque Off.
Safety Regulations NOTICE

1. Disconnect mains supply to the frequency When using the Safe Torque Off, always follow the
converter whenever repair work is to be carried instructions in Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions for
out. Check that the mains supply has been Danfoss VLT® Frequency Converters.
disconnected and that the necessary time has
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply 4. Control signals from, or internally within, the
plugs. frequency converter may in rare cases be
2. [Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and activated in error, be delayed or fail to occur
consequently, it must not be used as a safety entirely. When used in situations where safety is
switch. critical, e.g. when controlling the electromagnetic
brake function of a hoist application, these
3. Ground the equipment properly, protect the user
control signals must not be relied on exclusively.
against supply voltage and protect the motor
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations.
WARNING
High Voltage
4. The earth leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Ensure
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after
the correct grounding of the equipment by a
the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
certified electrical installer.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
5. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
mains supply while the frequency converter is (linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply connection for kinetic back-up.
has been disconnected and that the necessary Systems where frequency converters are installed must,
time has elapsed before removing motor and if necessary, be equipped with additional monitoring
mains plugs. and protective devices according to the valid safety
6. The frequency converter has more voltage regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing the prevention of accidents etc. Modifications on the
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24 frequency converters by means of the operating
V DC is installed. Check that all voltage sources software are allowed.
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before commencing repair work. NOTICE
Warning against unintended start Hazardous situations must be identified by the machine
1. The motor can be stopped with digital builder/integrator who is responsible for taking
commands, bus commands, references or a local necessary preventive means into consideration.
stop, while the frequency converter is connected Additional monitoring and protective devices may be
to mains. These stop functions are not sufficient included, always according to valid national safety
to prevent unintended motor start and thus regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
prevent personal injury caused by, e.g., contact the prevention of accidents.
with moving parts. To consider personal safety,
disconnect the mains supply or activate the Safe
Torque Off function.
2. The motor may start while setting the
parameters. Prevent the motor from starting, for
instance, by use of the Safe Torque Off function
or secure disconnection of the motor connection.

Crane, lifts and hoists 1 1

The controlling of external brakes must always have a
redundant system. The frequency converter can in no
circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with
relevant standards, e.g.
Hoists and cranes: IEC 60204-32
Lifts: EN 81
Protection mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC link voltage
is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
minimise losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
motor.
In hoist applications, protection mode is not usable
because the frequency converter is usually unable to leave
this mode again and therefore it extends the time before
activating the brake, which is not recommended.
Protection mode can be disabled by setting
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault to zero, which
means that the frequency converter trips immediately if
one of the hardware limits is exceeded.
NOTICE
Disabling Protection mode in hoisting applications
(parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault=0) is
recommended.

1 1 1.5 Electrical Wiring
130BC931.10
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch Mode

DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
10Vdc 24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 130/200mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + -
+10Vdc (R-) 81
S201
0/-10Vdc -
1 2
53 (A IN)
ON
+10Vdc relay1
ON=0/4-20mA
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0/-10Vdc -
1 2
0/-10Vdc - +10Vdc
ON
54 (A IN) 240Vac, 2A
+10Vdc 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
* relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
* 24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP)
24V
S801 0V
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) **
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM RS-485) 61
: Chassis
* : Earth
37 (D IN)
Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing
A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in FC 301.
** Do not connect cable screen.

Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare See section Grounding of Screened Control Cables in the 1 1
cases, and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz Design Guide for the correct termination of control cables.
earth loops due to noise from mains supply cables.
130BA681.10
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or
insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be

connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20,
55, 39) of the frequency converter to avoid ground
currents from both groups to affect other groups. For
example, switching on the digital input may disturb the
analog input signal.
Input polarity of control terminals

PNP (Source)
130BT106.10
+24 VDC
Digital input wiring

0 VDC
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Illustration 1.5 Grounding of Screened/Armoured Control

Cables
1.5.1 Start/Stop
Terminal 18=5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)
Terminal 27=5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No operation
(Default coast inverse)
Terminal 37=Safe Torque Off (where available)
+24 VDC
130BT107.11
0 VDC
NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
130BA155.12
P 5-10 [8]
P 5-12 [0]
+24V
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Start/Stop Safe Stop
Speed
Start/Stop
[18]
Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)
Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop
NOTICE
Control cables must be screened/armoured.

1 1 1.5.2 Pulse Start/Stop
130BA021.12
12 +24V
Terminal 18=5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, [9] Latched start.
Terminal 27=5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, [6] Stop inverse. 18 Par. 5-10
Terminal 37=Safe Torque Off (where available).
27 Par. 5-12
130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
P 5 - 10[9]
+24V
29 Par. 5-13
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
32 Par. 5-14
37
Start Stop inverse Safe Stop Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down
Speed 1.5.4 Potentiometer Reference
Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Start (18) Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Start (27)
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop
+10V/30mA
1.5.3 Speed Up/Down 130BA154.11

Speed RPM
P 6-15 39 42 50 53 54 55
Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down

Terminal 18=5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Start (default)
Terminal 27=5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [19] Ref. voltage
P 6-11 10V
Freeze reference
Speed up 1 kΩ

Speed down Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
NOTICE
Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x=series type).

How to Program Programming Guide
2 How to Program
2 2
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local
130BA018.13
Control Panels
Easy programming of the frequency converter is performed
by the graphical LCP (LCP 102). Consult the frequency Status 1(0) a
converter Design Guide, when using the Numeric Local 1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz
Control Panel (LCP 101).
The LCP is divided into 4 functional groups: 1 b
1. Graphical display with status lines. 43,5Hz
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display c
Run OK
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Quick Main Alarm
2 Status
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). Menu Menu Log
The LCP display can show up to 5 items of operating data

while displaying Status.
Ca
ck
n
Ba
ce
l
Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and
graphics.
Info
On OK
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data 3
defined or selected by the user. By pressing

Warn.
[Status], up to 1 extra line can be added.
c. Status line: Status messages displaying text. Alarm
NOTICE
Hand Auto
If start-up is delayed, the LCP displays the INITIALISING 4 Off Reset
on on
message until it is ready. Adding or removing options
may delay the start-up.
Illustration 2.1 LCP

How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
2.1.1 The LCD Display
130BP044.10
2 2
The LCD display has backlight and a total of 6 alpha-
numeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the selected set-up as well as the
On
programming set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.
Top section
Warn.
The top section shows up to 2 measurements in normal
operating status.
Middle section
Alarm
Illustration 2.3 Indicator Lights (LEDs)
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).
LCP keys
Bottom section The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
The bottom section always shows the state of the below the display and indicator lamps are used for
frequency converter in Status mode. parameter set-up, including choice of display indication
during normal operation.
130BP074.10
Status ! 1(1)
Top section
130BP045.10
43 RPM 5.44 A 25.3kW Status
Quick Main Alarm
Menu Menu Log
1.4 Hz
Middle section Illustration 2.4 LCP Keys
2.9%
! Pwr.card temp (W29)

Bottom section
Auto Remote Running [Status]
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
Illustration 2.2 LCD Display
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic
Control.
The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in Press [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming changing back to Display mode from either the Quick
another set-up than the active set-up, the number of the Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also
programmed set-up appears to the right. use [Status] to toggle single or double readout mode.
[Quick Menu]
Display contrast adjustment
allows quick access to different Quick Menus such as:
Press [Status] and [▲] for darker display
Press [Status] and [▼] for brighter display • My Personal Menu
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via • Quick Set-up

the LCP, unless a password has been created via • Changes Made
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password. • Loggings
Press [Quick Menu] to program the parameters belonging
Indicator lights (LEDs)
to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch directly
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
the LCP. [Main Menu]
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter is used for programming all parameters.
receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal or 24 V It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
external supply. At the same time, the back light is on. and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down
• Green LED/On: Control section is working.
[Main Menu] for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
• Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning. direct access to any parameter.
• Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. [Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1-
A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the
navigation keys to manoeuvre to the alarm number and

press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of External stop signals activated with control signals or a
the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode. serial bus override a start command via the LCP.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
[Back]
returns to the previous step or layer in the navigation
On] is activated. 2 2
structure. • [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto On]
[Cancel] • Reset
Last change or command is cancelled as long as the
display has not been changed.
• Coasting stop inverse
[Info]
• Reversing
supplies information about a command, parameter, or • Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed • Stop command from serial communication
information whenever help is needed.
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel]. • Quick stop
• DC brake
Back [Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Illustration 2.5 Back Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive, the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
Cancel [Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
Illustration 2.6 Cancel control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Info parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
Illustration 2.7 Info

NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] –
[Auto On].
Navigation keys
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu] [Reset]
and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor. is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
[OK] parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
is used for selecting a parameter marked by the cursor and
for enabling the change of a parameter. The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding
down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
Local control keys shortcut provides direct access to any parameter.
for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP.
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings

130BP046.10
between Multiple Frequency

Hand Auto
on
Off
on
Reset Converters
Illustration 2.8 Local Control Keys Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software Tool.
[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand
on] Key on LCP

2.1.3 Display Mode
130BA027.10
2 2
Quick Main Alarm In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables
Status Menu Menu Log
can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-
Ca
ck
nc
Outs
Ba
el It is possible to toggle between 3 status read-out screens

Info
by pressing [Status].
On OK
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen further in this section.
Warn.
Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to

Alarm
each of the operating variables. When options are
mounted, additional measurements are available. Define
Hand Auto the links via parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
Off Reset
on on 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large, and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
Illustration 2.9 LCP

Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale
and digits after a possible decimal point. The larger the
Data storage in LCP numeric value of a parameter is, the fewer digits are
NOTICE displayed after the decimal point.
Stop the motor before performing this operation. Ex.: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
To store the data in the LCP:
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy . Operating variable Unit
2. Press the [OK] key. Parameter 16-00 Control Word hex
Parameter 16-01 Reference [Unit] [unit]
3. Select [1] All to LCP.
Parameter 16-02 Reference [%] %
4. Press the [OK] key. Parameter 16-03 Status Word hex
All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated Parameter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%] %
by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. Parameter 16-10 Power [kW] [kW]
Parameter 16-11 Power [hp] [hp]
Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy Parameter 16-12 Motor Voltage [V]
the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well. Parameter 16-13 Frequency [Hz]
Parameter 16-14 Motor current [A]
Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm] Nm
NOTICE Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM] [RPM]
Parameter 16-18 Motor Thermal %
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
Parameter 16-20 Motor Angle
To store the data in the LCP:
Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage V
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy.
Parameter 16-32 Brake Energy /s kW
2. Press the [OK] key. Parameter 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min kW
3. Select [2] All from LCP. Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp. C
4. Press the [OK] key. Parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal %
Parameter 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current A
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now
Parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current A
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
Parameter 16-38 SL Controller State
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
parameter 16-39 Control Card Temp. C
Parameter 16-40 Logging Buffer Full
Parameter 16-50 External Reference

Operating variable Unit
130BP062.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-51 Pulse Reference 207RPM 5.25A 24.4 kW
2 2
Parameter 16-52 Feedback[Unit] [Unit] 1.1
Parameter 16-53 Digi Pot Reference 6.9 Hz

1.3
Parameter 16-60 Digital Input bin
Parameter 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting V 1.2
Auto Remote Running
Parameter 16-62 Analog Input 53
Parameter 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting V 2
Parameter 16-64 Analog Input 54
parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] [mA] Illustration 2.11 Status Screen II
Parameter 16-66 Digital Output [bin] [bin]
Parameter 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] [Hz]
Parameter 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] [Hz] Status screen III
Parameter 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] [Hz] This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic
Parameter 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] [Hz] Control. For further information, see
Parameter 16-71 Relay Output [bin] chapter 3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control.
Parameter 16-72 Counter A
130BP063.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-73 Counter B 778 RPM 0.86 A 4.0 kW
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 hex
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 hex State: 0 off 0 (off )
When: -
16-84 Comm. Option STW hex Do: -
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 hex
Auto Remote Running
16-86 FC Port REF 1 hex
16-90 Alarm Word Illustration 2.12 Status Screen III
16-92 Warning Word
Parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word
2.1.5 Parameter Set-up
Table 2.1 Measurements
The frequency converter can be used for practically all
Status screen I assignments. The frequency converter offers a choice
This readout state is standard after start-up or initialisation. between 2 programming modes - a Main Menu and a
Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement Quick Menu mode.
links to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2 The former provides access to all parameters. The latter
and 3). takes the user through a few parameters, making it
See the operating variables shown in Illustration 2.10. possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Change a parameter in either Main Menu mode or Quick
130BP041.10
Status 1 (1)
799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kw Menu mode.
1.1
0.000 2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
1.2
53.2 % Press [Quick Menus] to enter a list of different areas
Auto Remote Ramping
2 contained in the Quick menu.
Select My Personal Menu to display the selected personal
3 1.3 parameters. These parameters are selected in
parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
Illustration 2.10 Status Screen I
parameters can be added in this menu.
Status screen II
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2) shown in
Illustration 2.11.
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power, and
frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
lines.

130BC916.10
0RPM 0.00A 1(1)
Quick Menus
2 2 Q1 My Personal Menu
Q2 Quick Setup
Q4 Smart Setup
Q5 Changes Made
Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus
Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a selection of

parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
default setting for the other parameters considers the
desired control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).
The parameter selection is effected with the navigation

keys. The parameters in Table 2.2 are accessible.
Parameter Setting
Parameter 0-01 Language
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage [V]
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current [A]
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No function*
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor [1] Enable complete
Adaptation (AMA) AMA
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time [s]
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time [s]
3-13 Reference Site
Table 2.2 Selection of Parameter

* If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
terminal 27 is necessary.
Select Changes made to get information about:
• the last 10 changes. Use the [▲] [▼] navigation

keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
parameters.
• the changes made since default setting.

Select Loggings to get information about the display line
readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed.
It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for
later reference.

2.1.7 Initial Commissioning
2 2
The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by pressing [Quick Menu] and following the quick set-up
procedure using LCP 102 (read Table 2.3 from left to right). The example applies to open loop applications.
Press
Quick
Menu Q2 Quick Menu OK
Parameter 0-01 Language OK Set language
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] OK Set motor nameplate power
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage OK Set nameplate voltage
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency OK Set nameplate frequency
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current OK Set nameplate current
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed OK Set nameplate speed in RPM
If terminal default is Coast

inverse, it is possible to change
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input OK this setting to No function. No
connection to terminal 27 is
then needed for running AMA.
Set desired AMA function.
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
OK Enable complete AMA is
Adaptation (AMA)
recommended.
Set the minimum speed of the

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference OK
motor shaft.
Set the maximum speed of the

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference OK
motor shaft.
Set the ramping up time with

Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up
OK reference to synchronous
Time
motor speed, ns.
Set the ramping down time
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
OK with reference to synchronous
Time
motor speed, ns.
Set the site from where the

3-13 Reference Site OK
reference must work.
Table 2.3 Quick Set-up Procedure

Another easy way of commissioning the frequency Each parameter has a name and number which remain the
converter is by using the Smart Application Setup (SAS), same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main
which can also be found by pressing [Quick Menu]. Follow Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The
2 2 the instructions on the successive screens to set up the first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates
applications listed. the parameter group number.
The [Info] key can be used throughout the SAS to see help All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.
information for various selections, settings and messages. However, depending on the choice of configuration
The following 3 applications are included: (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can
be "missing". For example, open loop hides all the PID
• Mechanical Brake parameters, and other enabled options make more
parameter groups visible.
• Conveyor
• Pump/Fan 2.1.9 Parameter Selection

The following 4 field-busses can be selected:
• Profibus In the Main Menu mode, the parameters are divided into
groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
• Profinet The following parameter groups are accessible:
• DeviceNet
• EthernetIP Group Parameter group
NOTICE number
0-** Operation/Display
The frequency converter ignores the start conditions 1-** Load/Motor
when SAS is active.
2-** Brakes
3-** References/Ramps
NOTICE 4-** Limits/Warnings
The Smart Set-up runs automatically on the first power- 5-** Digital In/Out
up of the frequency converter or after a reset to factory 6-** Analog In/Out
settings. If no action is taken, the SAS screen automat- 7-** Controls
ically disappears after 10 minutes. 8-** Comm. and Options
9-** Profibus
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 10-** CAN Fieldbus
11-** Reserved Com. 1
Press [Main Menu] to enter the Main Menu mode. The 12-** Ethernet
readout shown below appears on the display. 13-** Smart Logic
The middle and bottom sections in the display show a list 14-** Special Functions
of parameter groups, which can be selected by toggling 15-** Drive Information
the [▲] and [▼] keys. 16-** Data Readouts
17-** Motor Feedb. Option
18-** Data Readouts 2
130BP066.10
1107 RPM 3.84 A 1 (1) 20-** FC Closed Loop

Main menu 21-** Extended Closed Loop
22-** Application Functions
0 - ** Operation/Display 23-** Time-based Functions
24-** Application Functions 2
1 - ** Load/Motor
25-** Cascade Controller
2 - ** Brakes 26-** Analog I/O Option MCB 109
3 - ** Reference / Ramps 29-** Water Application Functions

30-** Special Features
32-** MCO Basic Settings
Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode 33-** MCO Adv. Settings
34-** MCO Data Readouts
35-** Sensor Input Option
Table 2.4 Accessible Parameter Goups

After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with
130BP069.10
113 RPM 1.78 A 1(1)
the navigation keys. Load depen. setting 1- 6*
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
number and name as well as the selected parameter value.
1 - 60 Low speed load
compensation
2 2
100%
130BP067.10
740RPM 10.64A 1 [1]
Basic Settings 0-0*
0 -01 Language Illustration 2.17 Changing a Data Value
[0] English
Press [▲] [▼] keys to change the data value. [▲] increases
Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection the data value, and [▼] decreases the data value. Place the
cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
2.1.10 Changing Data
130BP070.10
729RPM 6.21A 1(1)
Load depen. setting 1- 6*
The procedure for changing data is the same in the Quick 1 - 60 Low speed load
compensation
Menu and the Main Menu mode. Press [OK] to change the
selected parameter. 16 0%
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numeric data value or a
Illustration 2.18 Saving a Data Value
text value.
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value 2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of

Numeric Data Value
If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
value with the [▲] [▼] keys. If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,
Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK]. select a digit with [◀] [▶].
130BP068.10
740RPM 10.64 A 1 [1]
130BP073.10
635 RPM 0.44 A 1 (1)
Basic Settings 0-0* Start Adjustments 1- 7*
0 -01 Language
1 - 71 Start Delay
00.0s
[0] English
Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit
2.1.12 Changing a Data Value Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [▲] [▼].
The selected digit is indicated by the cursor. Place the
If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value, cursor on the digit to save and press [OK].
change the selected data value by means of the [◀] [▶]
navigation keys as well as the [▲] [▼] navigation keys. Press
130BP072.10
957RPM 11.58A 1 (1)

[◀] [▶] keys to move the cursor horizontally. Start Adjustments 1-7*
1-71 High starting torque time
0. 4s
Illustration 2.20 Saving

2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step
130BA191.10
2 2
Certain parameters can be changed step by step. This
applies to 1-20 Motor Power [kW], 1-22 Motor Voltage and
1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
data values and as numeric data values that are infinitely
varying. 1 Setup
2.1.15 Readout and Programming of

Indexed Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.

Status Quick Main
Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to Setup Menu
2 Menu
parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log, which
can be read out. Select a parameter, press [OK], and press
the keys [▲] [▼] to scroll through the value log.
ck
Ba
For example, this is how parameter 3-10 Preset Reference is
changed:
Select the parameter, press [OK], and press [▲] [▼] to scroll
through the indexed values. To change the parameter 3 On OK
value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the
value by pressing [▲] [▼]. Press [OK] to accept the new Warn.
setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the

Alarm
parameter.
The following instructions are valid for the Numerical LCP
Hand Auto
(LCP 101). 4 Off Reset
on on
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
Illustration 2.21 LCP Keys

1. Numerical display.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display Status mode
functions. Status mode displays the status of the frequency converter
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). or the motor.
If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Status mode.
Display line: Status messages displaying icons and A number of alarms can be displayed.
numeric value
Indicator lights (LEDs) NOTICE
Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 numerical
• Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.
local control panel.
• Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning.
22.8
• Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
130BP077.10
LCP keys
[Menu] rpm
Setup 1
Select one of the following modes:
• Status Illustration 2.22 Status Mode
• Quick Set-up
• Main Menu

A 17
[Hand On]
130BP078.10
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
Setup 1 enter the motor speed data with the navigation keys. The 2 2
key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Illustration 2.23 Alarm 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus overrides a start command via the LCP.
Main Menu/Quick Set-up The following control signals are still active when [Hand
is used for programming all parameters or only the On] is activated:
parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 in chapter 2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local
• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]
Control Panels). • Reset

When the value flashes, press [▲] or [▼] to change • Coasting stop inverse
parameter values.
Press [Menu] to select Main Menu.
• Reversing
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press [OK]. • Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]. • Stop command from serial communication
If the parameter is an array parameter, select the array
number and press [OK]. • Quick stop
Select the wanted data value and press [OK]. • DC brake

Parameters with functional options display values such as
[1], [2], etc. For a description of the different options, see [Off]
the individual description of the parameters in stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
chapter 3 Parameter Descriptions. Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
[Back] If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
for stepping backwards. inactive, the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
[▲] [▼] are used for manoeuvring between commands and
within parameters. [Auto On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the control
130BP079.10
terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal

is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the
frequency converter starts. The key can be selected as [1]
P 2-03
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on
LCP.
Setup 1
NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
Status Quick Main
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
Menu Setup Menu [Auto On].
Illustration 2.24 Main Menu/Quick Setup

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
2.1.16 LCP Keys parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP. 2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings
130BP046.10
Initialise the frequency converter to default settings in 2

ways.
Hand Auto
Off Reset
on on
Recommended initialisation (via Parameter
Illustration 2.25 LCP Keys parameter 14-22 Operation Mode)
1. Select 14-22 Operation Mode.
2. Press [OK].

3. Select [2] Initialisation.

4. Press [OK].
2 2 5. Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the

display turns off.
6. Reconnect the mains supply. The frequency
converter is now reset.
14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except:
• Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter
• 8-30 Protocol
• Parameter 8-31 Address
• Parameter 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
• Parameter 8-35 Minimum Response Delay
• Parameter 8-36 Max Response Delay
• Parameter 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
• Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to Parameter

parameter 15-05 Over Volt's
• Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to

parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time
• Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to

parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
Manual initialisation
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display

turns off.
2. 2a Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at
the same time while power-up for LCP
102, Graphical Display.
2b Press [Menu] - [OK] while power-up for
LCP 101, Numerical Display.
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
This procedure initialises all except:
• Parameter 15-00 Operating hours
• Parameter 15-03 Power Up's
• Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's
• Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's
NOTICE
A manual initialisation also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (parameter 14-50 RFI Filter), and fault
log settings.

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide
3 Parameter Descriptions
3.1 Parameter Selection 16-** Readout parameters.
Parameters are organised in various parameter groups for

easy selection of correct parameters, for optimised
17-** Encoder Option parameters. 3 3
operation of the frequency converter.
18-** Readout 2 parameters.
0-** Operation and Display parameters include:

30-** Special Features.
• Basic Settings, set-up handling

32-** MCO Basic Settings parameters.
• Display and Local Control Panel parameters for
selecting readouts, setting up selections and 33-** MCO Adv. Settings parameters.
copying functions
1-** Load and Motor parameters include all load and 34-** MCO Data Readouts.
motor related parameters.
35-** Sensor Input Option parameters.
2-** Brake parameters.
NOTICE
• DC brake
To see if a parameter can be used in a specific control
• Dynamic brake (Resistor brake) mode, use Table 4.3.
• Mechanical brake
• Overvoltage Control
3-** References and ramping parameters include DigiPot
function.
4-** Limits Warnings; setting of limits and warning

parameters.
5-** Digital inputs and outputs include relay controls.
6-** Analog inputs and outputs.
7-** Controls; setting parameters for speed and process

controls.
8-** Communication and option parameters for setting of

RS-485 and USB port parameters.
9-** Profibus parameters.
10-** DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus parameters.
12-** Ethernet parameters.
13-** Smart Logic Control parameters.
14-** Special function parameters.
15-** Drive information parameters.

Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 0-01 Language

Option: Function:
Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the
[51] Bahasa Part of language package 2
frequency converter, function of the LCP keys and configu-
Indonesia
ration of the LCP display.
[52] Hrvatski Part of language package 3
3 3 3.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings 0-02 Motor Speed Unit

Option: Function:
0-01 Language
Option: Function:
NOTICE
Defines display language. The frequency This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
converter is delivered with 4 different motor is running.
language packages. English and German
are included in all packages. English The information shown in the display depends on
cannot be erased or manipulated. settings in parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
0-03 Regional Settings. The default setting of
[0] * English Part of language packages 1–4
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional
[1] Deutsch Part of language packages 1–4 Settings depends on to which region of the world the
frequency converter is supplied. It can be re-
[2] Francais Part of language package 1
programmed as required.
[3] Dansk Part of language package 1
NOTICE
[4] Spanish Part of language package 1
Changing the motor speed unit resets certain
[5] Italiano Part of language package 1
parameters to their initial value. It is
recommended to select the motor speed unit
[6] Svenska Part of language package 1 first, before modifying other parameters.
[7] Nederlands Part of language package 1

[0] RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and
[10] Chinese Part of language package 2 parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of motor speed (RPM).
[20] Suomi Part of language package 1
[1] Hz Selects display of motor speed variables and
[22] English US Part of language package 4 * parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).
[27] Greek Part of language package 4
0-03 Regional Settings
[28] Bras.port Part of language package 4
Option: Function:
[36] Slovenian Part of language package 3
NOTICE
[39] Korean Part of language package 2 This parameter cannot be adjusted while
[40] Japanese Part of language package 2 the motor is running.
[41] Turkish Part of language package 4

[0] * Interna- Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
[42] Trad.Chinese Part of language package 2 tional setting the motor power in kW and sets the
[43] Bulgarian Part of language package 3 default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
to 50 Hz.
[44] Srpski Part of language package 3
[1] US Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
[45] Romanian Part of language package 3
setting the motor power in hp and sets the
[46] Magyar Part of language package 3 default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
to 60 Hz.
[47] Czech Part of language package 3
[48] Polski Part of language package 4
[49] Russian Part of language package 3
[50] Thai Part of language package 2

0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) 0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Selects the operating mode upon Select the set-up to control the frequency
reconnection of the frequency converter to converter functions.
mains voltage after power down in Hand
[0] Factory Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss
[0] Resume
(local) operation mode.
Restarts the frequency converter, maintaining

setup data set and can be used as a data source
when returning the other set-ups to a known
3 3
the same start/stop settings (applied by state.
[Hand On/Off]) as those selected before the
[1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 separate
power down of the frequency converter.
parameter set-ups within which all parameters
[1] * Forced stop, Restarts the frequency converter with a saved can be programmed.
ref=old local reference, after mains voltage reappears
[2] Set-up 2
and after pressing [Hand On].
[3] Set-up 3
[2] Forced stop, Resets the local reference to 0 upon [4] Set-up 4
ref=0 restarting the frequency converter. [9] Multi Set- Remote selection of set-ups using digital
up inputs and the serial communication port. This
set-up uses the settings from
3.2.2 0-1* Set-up Operations
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop the
frequency converter before making changes to
Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.
open- and closed loop functions
The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can
be programmed independently of each other. This makes Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to 1 or all
the frequency converter very flexible and able to solve other set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before
advanced control functionality problems, often saving the switching between set-ups where parameters marked not
cost of external control equipment. Parameter set-ups changeable during operation have different values. To avoid
these can be used to program the frequency converter to conflicting settings of the same parameter within 2
operate according to one control scheme in 1 set-up (e.g. different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
motor 1 for horizontal movement) and another control parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are
scheme in another set-up (e.g. motor 2 for vertical not changeable during operation are marked FALSE in the
movement). Alternatively parameter set-ups can be used parameter lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists.
by an OEM machine builder to identically program all their
factory-fitted frequency converters for different machine 0-11 Edit Set-up
types within a range to have the same parameters. During Option: Function:
production/commissioning, simply select a specific set-up Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.
depending on which machine the frequency converter is programmed) during operation; either the
installed on. active set-up or 1 of the inactive set-ups.
The active set-up (i.e. the set-up in which the frequency
[0] Factory Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data
converter is currently operating) can be selected in
setup source to return the other set-ups to a known
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the LCP.
state.
using Multi set-up it is possible to switch between set-ups
with the frequency converter running or stopped, via [1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited
digital input or serial communication commands. If it is freely during operation, independently of the
necessary to change set-ups while running, ensure active set-up.
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is programmed as [2] Set-up 2
required. By using parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up, it is possible
[3] Set-up 3
to edit parameters within any of the set-ups while
[4] Set-up 4
continuing the frequency converter operation in its active
[9] Active Set- Can also be edited during operation. Edit the
set-up, which can be a different set-up to the one being
up selected set-up from a range of sources: LCP,
edited. By using parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy, it is possible
FC RS-485, FC USB or up to 5 fieldbus sites.
to copy parameter settings between the set-ups to enable
quicker commissioning if similar parameter settings are
required in different set-ups.

Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
130BA199.10
1
Option: Function:
2
Set-up 2 are synchronised (or ‘linked’). Synchro-
P 0-11 nisation can be performed in 2 ways:
3 1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in
3 3 4
parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up and set
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to [1] Set-up
Set-up 1. This starts the linking (synchronising) process.
1
130BP075.10
0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
2 Set-up Handling 0-1*
P 0-11
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
3
[1] Setup 1
4
Set-up
Illustration 3.2 Set-up 1
2 OR
P 0-11
3 2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-
up 2. Then set parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked
4 to to [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking process.
130BP076.10
PLC Fieldbus 0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
Set-up Handling 0-1*
Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
1
[2] Setup 2
2
P 0-11
Illustration 3.3 Set-up 2
3
4
Illustration 3.1 Edit Set-up When completed, parameter 0-13 Readout:
Linked Set-ups reads {1,2} to indicate that all
‘not changeable during operation’ parameters
are now the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
there are changes to a ‘not changeable during
Option: Function: operation’ parameter, e.g. parameter 1-30 Stator
To enable conflict-free changes from 1 set-up Resistance (Rs), in Set-up 2, they are also
to another during operation, link set-ups changed automatically in Set-up 1. A switch
containing parameters which are not between Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 during
changeable during operation. The link ensures operation is now possible.
synchronising of the not changeable during
[0] * Not linked
operation-parameter values when moving from
[1] Set-up 1
1 set-up to another during operation. Not
[2] Set-up 2
changeable during operation-parameters can be
identified by the label FALSE in the parameter [3] Set-up 3
lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists. [4] Set-up 4
Parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by

[9] Multi set-up in parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.
Multi set-up is used to move from 1 set-up to
another during operation (i.e. while the motor
is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-
up 2 while the motor is running. Program in
Set-up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 3.2.3 0-2* LCP Display

Range: Function:
0* [0 - View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of
Define the variables displayed in the LCP.
255 ] 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter has one
index for each parameter set-up. The parameter NOTICE
value displayed for each index represents which
set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up.
Refer to 0-37 Display Text 1, 0-38 Display Text 2 and
0-39 Display Text 3 for information on how to write
3 3
Index LCP value
display texts.
0 {0}
1 {1,2} 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
2 {1,2} Option: Function:
3 {3} Select a variable for display in line
4 {4} 1, left position.
Table 3.2 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are [0] None No display value selected.
linked [9] Performance
Monitor
[15] Readout: actual
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
setup
Range: Function: [37] Display Text 1
0* [-2147483648 - View the setting of parameter 0-11 Edit Set- [38] Display Text 2
2147483647] up for each of the 4 different [39] Display Text 3
communication channels. When the
[748] PCD Feed Forward
number is displayed as a hex number, as it
[953] Profibus Warning
is in the LCP, each number represents 1
Word
channel.
[1005] Readout Transmit
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; F
Error Counter
means factory setting; and A means active
[1006] Readout Receive
set-up. The channels are, from right to left:
Error Counter
LCP, FC bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
[1007] Readout Bus Off
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means
Counter
the following:
[1013] Warning Parameter
• The frequency converter selected
[1230] Warning Parameter
Set-up 2 via a fieldbus channel.
[1472] Legacy Alarm Word
This selection is reflected in
[1473] Legacy Warning
parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up.
Word
• A user selected Set-up 1 via the [1474] Leg. Ext. Status
LCP. Word
• All other channels are using the [1501] Running Hours
active set-up. [1502] kWh Counter
[1580] Fan Running Hours
0-15 Readout: actual setup [1600] Control Word Present control word
Range: Function: [1601] Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/
0* [0 - 255] Makes it possible to read out the active set-up, analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
also when multi set-up is selected in up and slow-down) in selected
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up. unit.
[1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up and slow-down) in percent.
[1603] Status Word Present status word.
[1605] Main Actual Value Actual value as a percentage.

[%]
[1606] Absolute Position

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
[1609] Custom Readout [1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the frequency
[1610] Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the converter.
motor in kW. [1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the frequency
3 3 [1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the converter.
motor in hp.
[1638] SL Controller State State of the event executed by the
[1612] Motor Voltage Voltage supplied to the motor. control.
[1613] Frequency Motor frequency, i.e. the output [1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.
frequency from the frequency
[1645] Motor Phase U
converter in Hz.
Current
[1614] Motor current Phase current of the motor [1646] Motor Phase V
measured as effective value. Current
[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e. the output [1647] Motor Phase W
frequency from the frequency Current
converter in percent. [1648] Speed Ref. After
Ramp [RPM]
[1616] Torque [Nm] Actual motor torque in Nm
[1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a
[1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/
* minute), i.e. the motor shaft speed pulse/bus.
in closed loop.
[1651] Pulse Reference Frequency in Hz connected to the
[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33).
calculated by the ETR function.
[1652] Feedback[Unit] Reference value from programmed
[1619] KTY sensor digital input(s).
temperature
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
[1620] Motor Angle
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
[1621] Torque [%] High
[1660] Digital Input Signal states from the 6 digital
Res.
terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and
[1622] Torque [%] Present motor load as a 33). There are 16 bits in total, but
percentage of the rated motor only 6 of them are used. Input 18
torque. corresponds to the far left of the
[1623] Motor Shaft Power used bits. Signal low = 0; Signal
[kW] high = 1.
[1624] Calibrated Stator [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
Resistance Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[1625] Torque [Nm] High
[1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a
[1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the
reference or protection value.
frequency converter.
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
[1632] Brake Energy /s Present brake power transferred to
Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
an external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value. [1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as
reference or protection value.
[1633] Brake Energy Brake power transferred to an
Average external brake resistor. The mean [1665] Analog Output 42 Actual value at output 42 in mA.
power is calculated continuously [mA] Use parameter 6-50 Terminal 42
for the most recent 120 s. Output to select the value to be
shown.
[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heat sink temperature of
the frequency converter. The cut- [1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.
out limit is 95 ±5 °C; cutting back [1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency
in occurs at 70 ±5 °C. applied at terminal 29 as an
[1635] Inverter Thermal Percentage load of the inverters. impulse input.

[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency [1836] Analog Input X48/2
applied at terminal 33 as an [mA]
impulse input. [1837] Temp. Input X48/4
[1669] Pulse Output #27

[Hz]
Actual value of impulses applied to
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
[1838]
[1839]
Temp. Input X48/7
Temp. Input X48/10
3 3
[1860] Digital Input 2
[1670] Pulse Output #29 Actual value of impulses applied to
[1890] Process PID Error
[Hz] terminal 29 in digital output mode.
[1891] Process PID Output
[1671] Relay Output [bin] [1892] Process PID
[1672] Counter A Application dependent (e.g. SLC Clamped Output
Control). [1893] Process PID Gain
[1673] Counter B Application dependent (e.g. SLC Scaled Output
Control). [3019] Wobble Delta Freq.
Scaled
[1674] Prec. Stop Counter Displays the actual counter value.
[3110] Bypass Status Word
[1675] Analog In X30/11 Actual value at input X30/11 either [3111] Bypass Running
as reference or protection value. Hours
[1676] Analog In X30/12 Actual value at input X30/12 either [3401] PCD 1 Write to
as reference or protection value. MCO
[3402] PCD 2 Write to
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 Actual value at output X30/8 in
MCO
[mA] mA. Use parameter 6-60 Terminal
X30/8 Output to select the value to
MCO
be shown.
[1678] Analog Out X45/1 MCO
[mA]
[1679] Analog Out X45/3 MCO
[mA]
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from MCO
the Bus Master.
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with MCO
control word from the Bus Master. [3408] PCD 8 Write to
MCO
[1684] Comm. Option STW Extended fieldbus communication
option status word. [3409] PCD 9 Write to
MCO
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from
the Bus Master.
MCO
[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the Bus [3421] PCD 1 Read from
Master. MCO
[1687] Bus Readout Alarm/ [3422] PCD 2 Read from

Warning MCO
[1689] Configurable [3423] PCD 3 Read from

Alarm/Warning MCO
Word [3424] PCD 4 Read from
[1690] Alarm Word 1 or more alarms in a hex code. MCO
[3425] PCD 5 Read from
[1691] Alarm Word 2 1 or more alarms in a hex code.
MCO
[1692] Warning Word 1 or more warnings in a hex code. [3426] PCD 6 Read from
MCO
[1693] Warning Word 2 1 or more warnings in a hex code.
[1694] Ext. Status Word 1 or more status conditions in a MCO
hex code.
MCO

[3429] PCD 9 Read from [9956] Fan 1 Feedback
MCO [9957] Fan 2 Feedback
[3430] PCD 10 Read from [9958] PC Auxiliary Temp
3 3 [3440]
MCO
Digital Inputs
[9959] Power Card Temp.
[3441] Digital Outputs

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
[3450] Actual Position Option: Function:
[3451] Commanded [0] * None Select a variable for display in line 1, middle
Position position. The options are the same as those listed for
[3452] Actual Master parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
Position
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
[3453] Slave Index
Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. The options
Position
are the same as those listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1
[3454] Master Index
Small.
Position
[3455] Curve Position 0-23 Display Line 2 Large
[3456] Track Error
Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are the same
[3457] Synchronizing Error
as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. The options are
[3458] Actual Velocity the same as those listed in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
[3459] Actual Master
Velocity 0-24 Display Line 3 Large
[3460] Synchronizing Select a variable for display in line 3.
Status
[3461] Axis Status 0-25 My Personal Menu
[3462] Program Status Range: Function:
[3464] MCO 302 Status Size [0 - Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the
[3465] MCO 302 Control related* 9999] Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 Menu] key on the LCP. The parameters are
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 displayed in the Q1 Personal Menu in the
[4282] Safe Control Word order they are programmed into this array
[4283] Safe Status Word parameter. Delete parameters by setting the
[4285] Active Safe Func. value to ‘0000’.
[4286] Safe Option Info For example, this can be used to provide
[9913] Idle time quick, simple access to just 1 or up to 50
[9914] Paramdb requests parameters which require changing on a
in queue regular basis (e.g. for plant maintenance
[9917] tCon1 time reasons) or by an OEM to enable simple
[9918] tCon2 time commissioning of their equipment.
[9919] Time Optimize

Measure 3.2.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout
[9920] HS Temp. (PC1)
[9921] HS Temp. (PC2) It is possible to customise the display elements for various
[9922] HS Temp. (PC3) purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to speed
[9923] HS Temp. (PC4) (linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in
[9924] HS Temp. (PC5) 0-30 Custom Readout Unit) *Display Text. Text string stored
[9925] HS Temp. (PC6) in a parameter.
[9926] HS Temp. (PC7)
[9927] HS Temp. (PC8) Custom readout
[9951] PC Debug 0 The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings
[9952] PC Debug 1 in
[9953] PC Debug 2
[9954] PC Debug 3
[9955] PC Debug 4

• 0-30 Custom Readout Unit 0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout

• 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value (linear only) Option: Function:
• Parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value [10] 1/min

[11] rpm
• 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
[12] Pulse/s
• Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] [20] l/s
3 3
• and actual speed [21] l/min
[22] l/h
Custom Readout (Value) [23] m³/s
130BT105.12
P 16-09
Custom Readout [24] m³/min
Unit P 0-30
[25] m³/h
Max value
P 0-32 [30] kg/s
) [31] kg/min
fl ow
nd [32] kg/h
da
ee )
. sp su
re [33] t/min
it (e.g es
n Pr [34] t/h
ea
rU it ( er
)
Li n Un ow
tic t(
P [40] m/s
Min value d ra ni
a
Linear Qu icU [41] m/min
b
units only Cu Motor Speed [45] m
P 0-31
0 Motor Speed [60] °C
High limit
P 4-13 (RPM) [70] mbar
P 4-14 (Hz)
[71] bar
Illustration 3.4 Custom Readout
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
The relation depends on the type of unit selected in
[80] kW
0-30 Custom Readout Unit:
[120] GPM
[121] gal/s
Unit type Speed relation
[122] gal/min
Dimensionless
[123] gal/h
Speed
[124] CFM
Flow, volume
[125] ft³/s
Flow, mass Linear
[126] ft³/min
Velocity
[127] ft³/h
Length
[130] lb/s
Temperature
[131] lb/min
Pressure Quadratic
[132] lb/h
Power Cubic
[140] ft/s
Table 3.3 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types [141] ft/min
[145] ft
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [160] °F
Option: Function: [170] psi

[171] lb/in²
It is possible to program a value to be shown in
the display of the LCP. The value has a linear, [172] in WG
squared or cubed relation to speed. This relation [173] ft WG
depends on the unit selected (see Table 3.3). The [180] HP
actual calculated value can be read in
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout
parameter 16-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in
the display by selecting [16-09] Custom Readout in Range: Function:
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to 0 CustomRea- [ -999999.99 - This parameter sets the min.
0-24 Display Line 3 Large. doutUnit* par. 0-32 value of the custom-defined
CustomRea- readout (occurs at zero speed).
[0] * None
doutUnit] only possible to set different
[1] %
from 0 when selecting a linear
[5] PPM

0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
Range: Function: Option: Function:
unit in parameter 0-30 Unit for [0] Disabled No effect when [Hand On] is pressed. Select
User-defined Readout. For [0] Disabled to avoid accidental start of the
quadratic and cubic units the frequency converter in Hand on mode.
3 3 minimum value is 0.
[1] Enabled The LCP switches to Hand on mode directly
when [Hand on] is pressed.
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value
[2] Password After pressing [Hand on] a password is
Range: Function:
required. If parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on
100 Custom- [ par. 0-31 - This parameter sets the max.
LCP is included in My Personal Menu, define
ReadoutUnit* 999999.99 value to be shown when the
the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
CustomRea- speed of the motor has reached
Password. Otherwise define the password in
doutUnit] the set value for 4-13 Motor
0-60 Main Menu Password.
Speed High Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High [3] Hand Off/On When [Hand On] is pressed once, the LCP
Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in switches to Off mode. When pressed again,
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed the LCP switches to Hand on mode.
Unit). [4] Hand Off/On Same as [3] but a password is required (see
w. Passw. option [2] Password).
0-37 Display Text 1
[9] Enabled, ref
Range: Function: =0
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
25] display by selecting [37] Display Text 1 in 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display Option: Function:
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, [0] Disabled Avoids accidental stop of the frequency converter.
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3
Large. [1] Enabled
[2] Password Avoids unauthorised stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]
0-38 Display Text 2 Key on LCP is included in the Quick Menu, then
define the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
Range: Function:
Password.
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
25] display by selecting [38] Display Text 2 in
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display
Option: Function:
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3 [0] Disabled Avoids accidental start of the frequency converter
Large. in Auto mode.
[1] Enabled
0-39 Display Text 3 [2] Password Avoids unauthorised start in Auto mode. If
Range: Function: parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included in
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical the Quick Menu, then define the password in
25] display by selecting [39] Display Text 3 in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3 Option: Function:
Large. [0] Disabled No effect when [Reset] is pressed. Avoids
accidental alarm reset.
3.2.5 0-4* LCP Keypad [1] Enabled

[2] Password Avoids unauthorised resetting. If
Enable, disable and password protect individual keys on parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included
the LCP. in the Quick Menu, then define the password
in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
[7] Enabled Resets the frequency converter without setting

without OFF it in Off mode.

0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP 0-51 Set-up Copy

[8] Password Resets the frequency converter without setting [2] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present
without OFF it in Off mode. A password is required when up 2 programming set-up (defined in
pressing [Reset] (see option [2] Password). 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 2.
[3] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present 3 3

3.2.6 0-5* Copy/Save up 3 programming set-up (defined in
0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 3.
Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these [4] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present
parameters for saving and copying set-ups from 1 up 4 programming set-up (defined in
frequency converter to another. 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 4.
0-50 LCP Copy [9] Copy to all Copies the parameters in the present set-up
Option: Function: to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be 3.2.7 0-6* Password
adjusted while the motor is
running. 0-60 Main Menu Password
Range: Function:
[0] * No copy 100* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Main
[1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups 9999 ] Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If
from the frequency converter memory 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is
to the LCP memory. set to [0] Full access, this parameter is
ignored.
[2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups
from the LCP memory to the frequency
converter memory.
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
Option: Function:
[3] Size indep. from Copy only the parameters that are
[0] * Full access Disables password defined in
LCP independent of the motor size. The
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
latter selection can be used to
programme several frequency [1] LCP: Read Prevent unauthorised editing of Main Menu
converters with the same function only parameters.
without disturbing motor data.
[2] LCP: No Prevent unauthorised viewing and editing of
[4] File from MCO to access Main Menu parameters.
LCP
[3] Bus: Read Read-only functions for parameters on
[5] File from LCP to
only Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
MCO
[6] Data from DYN to [4] Bus: No No access to parameters is allowed via
LCP access Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
[7] Data from LCP to [5] All: Read only Read-only function for parameters on LCP,
DYN Fieldbus or FC standard bus.
[9] Safety Par. from
[6] All: No access No access from LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard
LCP
bus is allowed.
[10] Delete LCP copy Use to delete the copy after the
data transfer is complete. If [0] Full access is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu
Password, 0-65 Personal Menu Password and 0-66 Access to
0-51 Set-up Copy Personal Menu w/o Password are ignored.
Option: Function:
NOTICE
[0] * No copy No function
A more complex password protection is available for
[1] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present OEMs upon request.
up 1 programming set-up (defined in
0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 1.

0-65 Quick Menu Password

Range: Function:
200* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Quick
9999] Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
parameter 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o
3 3 Password is set to [0] Full access, this

parameter is ignored.
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password

If 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full access
then this parameter is ignored.
Option: Function:
[0] * Full access Disables the password defined in
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
[1] LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorised editing of Quick

Menu parameters.
[3] Bus: Read only Read only functions for Quick Menu
parameters on Fieldbus and/or FC standard
bus.
[5] All: Read only Read only function for Quick Menu
parameters on LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard
bus.
0-67 Bus Password Access

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999] Writing to this parameter enables users to unlock
the frequency converter from bus/MCT 10 Set-up
Software.

3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 1-01 Motor Control Principle
Option: Function:
3.3.1 1-0* General Settings
NOTICE
Define whether the frequency converter operates in speed This parameter cannot be adjusted while
mode or torque mode, and whether the internal PID the motor is running.
control should be active or not. 3 3
Select which motor control principle to
1-00 Configuration Mode
employ.
Option: Function:
[0] U/f Special motor mode, for parallel connected
Select the application control principle to be
motors in special motor applications. When U/f
used when a remote reference (i.e. via analog
is selected the characteristic of the control
input or fieldbus) is active. A remote reference
principle can be edited in parameter 1-55 U/f
can only be active when 3-13 Reference Site is
Characteristic - U and parameter 1-56 U/f
set to [0] Linked to Hand/Auto or [1] Remote.
Characteristic - F.
[0] Speed Enables speed control (without feedback signal
[1] VVC+ Voltage Vector Control principle suitable for
open loop from motor) with automatic slip compensation
most applications. The main benefit of VVC+
for almost constant speed at varying loads.
operation is that it uses a robust motor model.
Compensations are active, but can be disabled
in parameter group 1-0* Load/Motor. The speed [2] Flux Flux Vector control without encoder feedback,
control parameters are set in parameter group sensorless for simple installation and robustness against
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. sudden load changes. FC 302 only.
[1] Speed Enables speed closed loop control with feed- [3] Flux w/ Very high accuracy speed and torque control,
closed back. Obtain full holding torque at 0 RPM. motor feedb suitable for the most demanding applications.
loop For increased speed accuracy, provide a FC 302 only.
feedback signal and set the speed PID control.
The speed control parameters are set in The best shaft performance is normally achieved using
parameter group 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. either of the 2 Flux Vector control modes [2] Flux sensorless
and [3] Flux with encoder feedback.
[2] Torque Enables torque closed loop control with feed-
back. Only possible with Flux with motor NOTICE
feedback option, parameter 1-01 Motor Control
An overview of possible combinations of the settings in
Principle. FC 302 only.
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and
[3] Process Enables the use of process control in the parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle can be found in
frequency converter. The process control chapter 4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive
parameters are set in parameter groups 7-2* Control Modes.
Process Ctrl. Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
[4] Torque Enables the use of torque open loop in VVC+ 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source
open loop mode (parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle). Option: Function:
The torque PID parameters are set in parameter
NOTICE
group 7-1* Torque PI Control.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
[5] Wobble Enables the wobble functionality in while the motor is running.
parameter 30-00 Wobble Mode to
parameter 30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled.
Select the interface for which to receive
[6] Surface Enables the surface winder control specific feedback from the motor.
Winder parameters in parameter group 7-2* Process Ctrl.
[1] * 24V encoder A and B channel encoder, which can be
Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
connected to the digital input terminals
[7] Extended Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2* 32/33 only. Terminals 32/33 must be
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl. programmed to No operation.
OL
[2] MCB 102 Encoder module option, which can be
[8] Extended Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2*
configured in parameter group 17-1* Inc. Enc.
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
Interface, FC 302 only.
CL

1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source 1-04 Overload Mode

[3] MCB 103 Optional resolver interface module, which NOTICE
can be configured in parameter group 17-5*
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Resolver Interface.
the motor is running.
3 3 [4] MCO
Encoder 1
Encoder interface 1 of the optional
programmable motion controller MCO 305. Use this parameter to configure the frequency
X56 converter for either High or Normal overload.
[5] MCO Encoder interface 2 of the optional When selecting the frequency converter size,
Encoder 2 programmable motion controller MCO 305. always review the technical data in the
X55 Operating Instructions or the Design Guide to
know the available output current.
1-03 Torque Characteristics
Option: Function: [0] * High Allows up to 160% over torque.
torque
NOTICE [1] Normal For oversized motor - allows up to 110% over
This parameter cannot be adjusted while torque torque.
1-05 Local Mode Configuration
Select the torque characteristic required. Option: Function:
VT and AEO are both energy-saving operations. Select which application configuration mode
[0] Constant Motor shaft output provides constant torque (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), i.e.
* torque under variable speed control. application control principle, to use when a
Local (LCP) Reference is active. A Local
[1] Variable Motor shaft output provides variable torque
Reference can be active only when
torque under variable speed control. Set the variable
3-13 Reference Site is set to [0] Linked to Hand/
torque level in parameter 14-40 VT Level.
Auto or [2] Local. By default the Local
[2] Auto Automatically optimises energy consumption by Reference is active in Hand Mode only.
Energy minimising magnetisation and frequency via
[0] Speed
Optim. parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation and
open loop
parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency.
[1] Speed
[5] Constant The function provides a constant power in the Closed
Power fieldweakening area. Loop
The torque shape of motor mode is used as a [2] * As mode
limit in the generator mode. This is done to limit par 1-00
the power in generator mode that otherwise
becomes considerably larger than in motor 1-06 Clockwise Direction
mode, due to the high DC link voltage available Option: Function:
in generator mode.
NOTICE
Pshaft W = ωmech rad / s × T Nm
This relationship with the constant power is
illustrated in Illustration 3.5:
T[Nm] P[W]
130BB655.10
This parameter defines the term “Clockwise”

Tnom corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
Pnom P easy change of direction of shaft rotation without
swapping motor wires.
T
[0] * Normal Motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when the
ωnom 2ωnom ω [rad/S]
frequency converter is connected U⇒U; V⇒V, and
Illustration 3.5 Constant Power W⇒W to motor.
[1] Inverse Motor shaft turns in counterclockwise direction

when the frequency converter is connected U⇒U;
V⇒V, and W⇒W to motor.

1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust 1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
This parameter is only valid for FC 302 and only in combination 2. Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
with a PM motor with feedback.
3. Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
Range: Function:
4. Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
0* [Manual] The functionality of this option depends on
the type of the feedback device. This option
sets the frequency converter to use the motor
5.
6.
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
3 3
angle offset entered in parameter 1-41 Motor
Angle Offset, if an absolute feedback device is
Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
used.
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
If an incremental feedback device is selected
it provides optimum performance without further
the frequency converter automatically adjusts
adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
the motor angle offset on the first start after
power-up, or when the motor data is changed. Application-specific adjustment when running Flux
Flux mode is the preferred control mode for optimum
[1] Auto The frequency converter adjusts the motor
shaft performance in dynamic applications. Perform an
angle offset automatically on the first start
AMA since this control mode requires precise motor data.
after power-up, or when the motor data is
Depending on the application, further adjustments may be
changed no matter what feedback device is
required.
selected. This means that options [0] and [1]
are identical for the incremental encoder. See Table 3.4 for application-related recommendations.
[2] Auto Every The frequency converter adjusts the motor Application Settings
Start angle offset automatically on every start, or Low-inertia applications Keep calculated values.
when the motor data is changed. High-inertia applications Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
[3] Off Selecting this option turns the automatic offset Speed.
adjustment off. Increase current to a value between
default and maximum depending on
the application.
3.3.2 1-1* Special Settings Set ramp times matching the
application. Too fast ramp up causes
NOTICE an overcurrent or overtorque. Too
fast ramp down causes an
The parameters within this parameter group cannot be
overvoltage trip.
adjusted while the motor is running.
High load at low speed Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed.
3.3.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up Increase current to a value between
Enter the following motor data. The information can be the application.
found on the motor nameplate. No-load application Adjust parameter 1-18 Min. Current at
No Load to achieve smoother motor
1. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or 1-21 Motor Power [HP] operation by reducing torque ripple
2. 1-22 Motor Voltage and vibration.
3. 1-23 Motor Frequency

4. 1-24 Motor Current
5. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
When running in Flux mode, or for optimum performance
in VVC+ mode, extra motor data is required to set up the
following parameters. The data can be found in the motor
data sheet (this data is typically not available on the motor
name plate). Run a complete AMA using
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1]
Enable Complete AMA or enter the parameters manually.
Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) is always entered
manually.

Application Settings • 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

Flux sensorless only Adjust parameter 1-53 Model Shift Enter the line-to-line back EMF of the PM Motor
Frequency. at 1000
Example 1: If the motor oscillates at
5 Hz and dynamics performance is rpm mechanical speed (RMS value). Back EMF is
required at 15 Hz, set the voltage generated by a PM motor when no
3 3 parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency frequency converter is connected and the shaft is
to 10 Hz. turned externally. It is normally specified for
Example 2: If the application nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM measured
involves dynamic load changes at between 2 lines. If the value is not available for a
low speed, reduce motor speed of 1000 RPM, calculate the correct
parameter 1-53 Model Shift value as follows:
Frequency. Observe the motor If back EMF is, for example, 320 V at 1800 RPM, it
behaviour to make sure that the can be calculated at 1000 RPM as follows:
model shift frequency is not reduced Back EMF = (Voltage/RPM)*1000 =
too much. Symptoms of inappro- (320/1800)*1000 = 178.
priate model shift frequency are
Test motor operation
motor oscillations or frequency
converter tripping. 1. Start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If
the motor does not turn, check the installation,
Table 3.4 Recommendations for Flux Applications general programming, and motor data.
2. Check if the start function in parameter 1-70 PM
3.3.4 PM Motor Set-up Start Mode fits the application requirements.
Rotor detection
This section describes how to set up a PM motor. This function is the recommended selection for
applications where the motor starts from standstill, for
Initial programming steps example pumps or conveyors. On some motors, an
To activate PM motor operation, select [1] PM, non salient acoustic sound is heard when the frequency converter
SPM in 1-10 Motor Construction. Valid for FC 302 only. performs the rotor detection. This does not harm the
Programming motor data motor.
After selecting a PM motor, the PM motor-related Parking
parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor Data, 1-3* Adv. This function is the recommended selection for
Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are active. applications where the motor is rotating at slow speed, for
The necessary data can be found on the motor nameplate example windmilling in fan applications.
and on the motor data sheet. Parameter 2-06 Parking Current and parameter 2-07 Parking
Program the following parameters in the order listed: Time can be adjusted. Increase the factory setting of these
parameters for applications with high inertia.
• 1-24 Motor Current
• 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+

VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
• 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
• 1-39 Motor Poles adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA. If a not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. Recommen-
complete AMA is not performed, the following parameters dations for various applications can be seen in Table 3.5.
must be configured manually:
• 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Enter the line to common stator winding
resistance (Rs). If only line-line data is available,
divide the line-line value by 2 to achieve the line
to common value.
• 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Enter the line to common direct axis inductance
of the PM motor.
If only line-line data is available, divide the line-
line value by 2 to achieve the line-common value.

Application Settings Programming motor data

Low inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter After performing the initial programming steps, the SynRM
ILoad/IMotor <5 time const. by factor 5 to 10. motor-related parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping Data, 1-3* Adv. Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are
Gain. active. Use the motor nameplate data and the motor data
Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current sheet to program the following parameters in the order
at Low Speed (<100%). listed: 3 3
Low inertia applications Keep the default values.
• Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
50>ILoad/IMotor >5
High inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping • Parameter 1-24 Motor Current
ILoad/IMotor > 50 Gain, parameter parameter 1-15 Low • Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
Speed Filter Time Const., and
parameter parameter 1-16 High
• Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
Speed Filter Time Const. Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic
High load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter
<30% (rated speed) time const.
the following parameters manually:
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current • Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
at Low Speed to adjust the starting
torque. 100% current provides
• Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
nominal torque as starting torque. • Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)
This parameter is independent of • Parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)
parameter parameter 30-20 High
Starting Torque Time [s] and
• Parameter 1-48 Inductance Sat. Point
parameter parameter 30-21 High Application-specific adjustments
Starting Torque Current [%]). Working Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
at a current level higher than 100% not run well, check the VVC+ SynRM settings. Table 3.6
for a prolonged time can cause the provides application-specific recommendations:
motor to overheat.
Table 3.5 Recommendations for Various Applications
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase

1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
Depending on the motor, this parameter can be set to
between 10% and 100% higher than the default value.
Application-specific adjustment when running Flux

shaft performance in dynamic applications. Perform an
AMA because this control mode requires precise motor
data. Depending on the application, further adjustments
may be required.
See chapter 3.3.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up for application-
specific recommendations.
3.3.5 SynRM Motor Set-up with VVC+
This section describes how to set up a SynRM motor with

VVC+.
Initial programming steps

To activate SynRM motor operation, select [5] Sync.
Reluctance in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction (FC-302
only).

Application Settings 1-10 Motor Construction

Low-inertia applications Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time const. Option: Function:
ILoad/IMotor <5 by factor 5 to 10.
magnets or interior mounted (IPM) / salient
Reduce 1-14 Damping Gain.
magnets. This option is valid for FC 302 only.
Reduce 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed (<100%). [5] Sync. Use for synchronous reluctance motors. This
3 3 Low-inertia applications Keep the default values. Reluctance option is valid for FC 302 only.
50>ILoad/IMotor >5
High-inertia applications Increase 1-14 Damping Gain,
CAUTION
ILoad/IMotor > 50 parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time This option has the following firmware
Const., and parameter 1-16 High version limitations:
Speed Filter Time Const. • Version 7.26 and earlier - do
High-load at low speed Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time const. not use this option. There is a
<30% (rated speed) Increase 1-66 Min. Current at Low risk of damage to the frequency
Speed to adjust the starting torque. converter.
100% current provides nominal
torque as starting torque. This
• Version 7.27 - use this option
only when flying start is
parameter is independent of
enabled in
parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque
parameter 1-73 Flying Start.
Time [s] and parameter 30-21 High
Starting Torque Current [%]). Working
at a current level higher than 100%
for a prolonged time can cause the 1-11 Motor Model
motor to overheat. Option: Function:
Dynamic applications Increase 14-41 AEO Minimum NOTICE

Magnetisation for highly dynamic This parameter is valid for FC 302 and
applications. Adjusting 14-41 AEO FCD 302 only.
Minimum Magnetisation ensures a
good balance between energy Automatically sets the manufacturer’s values
efficiency and dynamics. Adjust for the selected motor. If the default value
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency to [1] is used, settings must be determined
specify the minimum frequency at manually, according to the
which the frequency converter selectionparameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
should use minimum magnetisation.
[1] Std. Default motor model when [0]* Asynchron. is
Table 3.6 Recommendations for Various Applications Asynchron selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction.
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase [2] Std. PM, non Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the damping gain salient selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
value in small steps. Depending on the motor, this Construction.
parameter can be set to between 10% and 100% higher
than the default value. [3] Std. PM Selectable when [2] PM, salient IPM is
salient selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
1-10 Motor Construction Construction.
Option: Function: [10] Danfoss OGD Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
Select the motor design type. LA10 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
[0] Asynchron Use for asynchronous motors. Construction. Only available for T4, T5 in 1.5-3
* kW. Settings are loaded automatically for this
[1] PM, non Use for salient or non-salient PM motors. specific motor.
salient SPM PM motors are divided into 2 groups, with [11] Danfoss OGD Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
either surface-mounted (SPM) / non-salient V206 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor
magnets or interior mounted (IPM) / salient Construction. Only available for T4, T5 in
magnets. This option is valid for FC 302 only. 0.75-3 kW. Settings are loaded automatically
[2] PM, salient Use for salient or non-salient PM motors. for this specific motor.
IPM PM motors are divided into 2 groups, with
OGD Auto-Detection and Model Change Function
either surface-mounted (SPM) / non-salient

The function is activated when one of the following 1-18 Min. Current at No Load
options is selected: either [10] Danfoss OGD LA10 or [11] Range: Function:
Danfoss OGD V206 in parameter 1-11 Motor Model.
0 %* [0 - 50 %] Adjust this parameter to achieve a smoother
The frequency converter checks if the correct OGD model
motor operation.
is selected. If a wrong OGD model is selected, the
frequency converter performs the following actions:
• Trips 3.3.6 1-2* Motor Data 3 3

• Issues an alarm
This parameter group contains input data from the
• Sets the parameters defined for the correct model nameplate on the connected motor.
type
• Waits for the Reset signal from the operator NOTICE

The model check takes place every time the frequency Changing the value of these parameters affects the
converter gets a start signal from the LCP, a digital input setting of other parameters.
or a fieldbus.
1-14 Damping Gain NOTICE

Range: Function: 1-20 Motor Power [kW], 1-21 Motor Power [HP], 1-22 Motor
140 [0 - The damping gain stabilises the PM machine to Voltage, and 1-23 Motor Frequency have no effect when
%* 250 %] run smoothly and with stability. The value of 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM,
damping gain controls the dynamic performance [2] PM, salient IPM, [5] Sync. Reluctance.
of the PM machine. High damping gain gives
high dynamic performance and low damping 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
gain gives low dynamic performance. The
Range: Function:
dynamic performance is related to the machine
data and load type. If the damping gain is too
Size [ 0.09 - NOTICE
related* 3000.00
high or low, the control becomes unstable. This parameter cannot be adjusted
kW]
while the motor is running.
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
Range: Function: Enter the nominal motor power in kW
Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used below 10% according to the motor nameplate data.
s] rated speed. Obtain quick control The default value corresponds to the
through a short damping time nominal rated output of the frequency
constant. However, if this value is too converter.
short, the control becomes unstable. This parameter is visible in the LCP if
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is set to
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. [0] International.
Range: Function: NOTICE

Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used above 10% 4 sizes down, 1 size up from
s] rated speed. Obtain quick control nominal unit rating.
through a short damping time
constant. However, if this value is too
short, the control becomes unstable. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Range: Function:
1-17 Voltage filter time const.
Size [ 0.09 - Enter the nominal motor power in hp
Range: Function: related* 3000.00 according to the motor nameplate data.
Size [0.001 - 1 Reduces the influence of high hp] The default value corresponds to the
related* s] frequency ripple and system nominal rated output of the unit. This
resonance in the calculation of supply parameter is visible in LCP if
voltage. Without this filter, the ripples parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [1] US.
in the currents can distort the
calculated voltage and affect the 1-22 Motor Voltage
stability of the system. Range: Function:
Size [ 10 - Enter the nominal motor voltage
related* 1000 V] according to the motor nameplate

1-22 Motor Voltage 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

data. The default value corresponds to The AMA function optimises dynamic motor
the nominal rated output of the unit. performance by automatically optimising the
advanced motor parameters
3 3 1-23 Motor Frequency

Range: Function:
(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) at motor
standstill.
Size [20 - Minimum to maximum motor frequency:
related* 1000 20-1000 Hz. Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand
Hz] Select the motor frequency value from the on] after selecting [1] or [2] Enable Reduced
motor nameplate data. If a value other than AMA. See also the section Automatic Motor
50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, adapt the load- Adaptation in the Design Guide. After a normal
independent settings in parameter 1-50 Motor sequence, the display reads: "Press [OK] to
Magnetisation at Zero Speed to finish AMA". After pressing [OK], the frequency
parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency. For 87 converter is ready for operation.
Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set the
[0] Off
nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. To run at 87
*
Hz, adapt parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
[1] Enable Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the
Limit [RPM] and parameter 3-03 Maximum
Complete rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance
Reference.
AMA X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2, and the
main reactance Xh. Do not select this option if
1-24 Motor Current
an LC filter is used between the frequency
Range: Function: converter and the motor.
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the nominal motor current FC 301: The Complete AMA does not include Xh
related* 10000.00 A] value from the motor nameplate measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value
data. The data are used for is determined from the motor database. RS is
calculating torque, motor the best adjustment method (see 1-3* Adv.
protection etc. Motor Data).
It is recommended to obtain the Advanced
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Motor Data from the motor manufacturer to
Range: Function: enter into parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Size [10 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed through parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
related* RPM] value from the motor nameplate for best performance.
data. The data are used for Complete AMA cannot be performed on
calculating motor compensations. permanent magnet motors.
nm,n = ns - nslip. [2] Enable Performs a reduced AMA of the stator
Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. This option is
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque AMA available for standard asynchronous motors and
Range: Function: non-salient PM motors.
Size [0.1 - Enter the value from the motor nameplate
related* 10000 data. The default value corresponds to the NOTICE
Nm] nominal rated output. This parameter is
available when parameter 1-10 Motor
• For the best adaptation of the frequency
converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient
SPM, i.e. the parameter is valid for PM and • AMA cannot be performed while the motor is
non-salient SPM motors only. running.
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

NOTICE
Option: Function:
It is important to set motor parameter group 1-2* Motor
NOTICE Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA
This parameter cannot be adjusted while algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve
the motor is running. optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to
10 min, depending on the power rating of the motor.

NOTICE 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Avoid generating external torque during AMA. Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0140 - Set the line to common stator resistance
NOTICE related* 140.0000 value. Enter the value from a motor
Ohm] datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold
If one of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor
Data is changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
motor.
3 3
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles, the advanced motor NOTICE
parameters, return to default setting. For salient PM motors:
AMA is not available.
NOTICE If only line-line data are available,
divide the line-line value by 2 to
AMA works problem-free on 1 motor size down, typically
achieve the line to common
works on 2 motor sizes down, rarely works on 3 sizes
(starpoint) value. Alternatively,
down and never work on 4 sizes down. Keep in mind
measure the value with an
that the accuracy of the measured motor data is poorer
ohmmeter. This also takes the
when operating on motors smaller than nominal
resistance of the cable into account.
frequency converter size.
Divide the measured value by 2 and
enter the result.
3.3.7 1-3* Adv. Motor Data
Parameters for advanced motor data. Ensure that the

NOTICE
motor data in parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to The parameter value is updated
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles match the motor. The default after each torque calibration if
settings are based on standard motor values. If the motor option [3] 1st start with store or
parameters are not set correctly, a malfunction of the option [4] Every start with store is
frequency converter system may occur. If the motor data selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
are unknown, running an AMA (Automatic Motor Calibration.
Adaptation) is recommended. See
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
Parameter groups 1-3* Adv. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Data II cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0100 - Set the rotor resistance value Rr to
NOTICE related* 100.0000 improve shaft performance.
Ohm]
A simple check of the X1 + Xh sum value is to divide the 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor.
line to line motor voltage by the sqrt(3) and divide this The frequency converter
value by the motor no load current. [VL-L/sqrt(3)]/INL = measures the value from the
X1 + Xh, see Illustration 3.6. These values are important motor. All compensations are
to magnetise the motor properly. For high-pole motors it reset to 100%.
is highly recommended to perform this check. 2. Enter the Rr value manually.
Obtain the value from the
P 1-34 motor supplier.
130BA065.12
P 1-30 P 1-33
I1 Rs X1δ X'2δ
3. Use the Rr default setting. The
frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
U1 nameplate data.
P 1-36 P 1-35 P 1-31
RFe Xh R'r
NOTICE
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) does not have effect
when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient
Illustration 3.6 Motor Equivalent Diagram of an Asynchronous SPM, [5] Sync. Reluctance.
Motor

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0400 - Set the stator leakage reactance of the NOTICE
related* 400.0000 motor using one of these methods:
The parameter value is updated
Ohm]
• Run an AMA on a cold motor. after each torque calibration if
3 3 The frequency converter
measures the value from the
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
motor. selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
• Enter the X1 value manually. Calibration.
motor supplier. NOTICE
• Use the X1 default setting. The This parameter is only relevant for
frequency converter establishes ASM.
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
See Illustration 3.6.
Range: Function:
NOTICE Size [ 1.0000 - Set the main reactance of the motor
The parameter value is updated related* 10000.0000 using one of these methods:
after each torque calibration if Ohm] 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor.
The frequency converter
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
motor.
Calibration.
2. Enter the Xh value manually.
NOTICE motor supplier.
This parameter is only relevant for
3. Use the Xh default setting.
ASM.
establishes the setting based
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) on the motor nameplate data.
Range: Function:
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
Size [ 0.0400 - Set the rotor leakage reactance of the
Range: Function:
related* 400.0000 motor using one of these methods:
Ohm] Size [0 - Enter the equivalent iron loss
• Run an AMA on a cold motor.
related* 10000.000 resistance (RFe) value to compensate
Ohm] for iron loss in the motor.
The RFe value cannot be found by
motor.
performing an AMA.
• Enter the X2 value manually. The RFe value is especially important in
Obtain the value from the torque control applications. If RFe is
motor supplier. unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron
Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.
• Use the X2 default setting. The
frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
nameplate data. Range: Function:
See Illustration 3.6. Size [0.0 - Enter line to common direct axis
related* 1000.0 inductance of the PM motor. Obtain the
mH] value from the permanent magnet motor
data sheet.
If only line-line data are available, divide
the line-line value by 2 to achieve the
line-common (starpoint) value. Alterna-
tively, measure the value with an
inductancemeter. This also takes the

1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

inductance of the cable into account. connected and the shaft is turned
Divide the measured value by 2 and enter externally. Back EMF is normally specified
the result. for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM
This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
measured between 2 lines. If the value is
not available for a motor speed of 1000
3 3
[1] PM, non-salient SPM (Permanent RPM, calculate the correct value as follows.
Magnet Motor) or [5] Sync. Reluctance. If back EMF is e.g. 320 V at 1800 RPM, it
For a selection with 1 decimal, use this can be calculated at 1000 RPM:
parameter. For a selection with 3 Example
decimals, use parameter 30-80 d-axis Back EMF 320 V at 1800 RPM. Back EMF =
Inductance (Ld). (Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 =
FC 302 only. 178.
NOTICE This parameter is only active when

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
The parameter value is updated
[1] PM motor (Permanent Magnet Motor).
after each torque calibration if
FC 302 only.
option [4] Every start with store is NOTICE
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque When using PM motors, it is
Calibration. recommended to use brake resistors.
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 1-41 Motor Angle Offset

Size related* [0.000 - 1000 Set the value of the q-axis 0* [-32768 Enter the correct offset angle between the PM
mH] inductance. See the motor data - 32767] motor and the index position (single-turn) of the
sheet. attached encoder or resolver. The value range of
0 - 32768 corresponds to 0 - 2 * pi (radians). To
1-39 Motor Poles obtain the offset angle value: After frequency
Range: Function: converter start-up apply DC-hold and enter the
Size related* [2 - 128] Enter the number of motor poles. value of parameter 16-20 Motor Angle into this
parameter.
Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@ 60 Hz This parameter is only active when
2 2700-2880 3250-3460 parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,
4 1350-1450 1625-1730 non-salient SPM (Permanent Magnet Motor).
6 700-960 840-1153 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)

Range: Function:
Table 3.7 Number of Poles for Normal Speed Ranges
Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Ld. Ideally, this
Table 3.7 shows the number of poles for normal speed
parameter has the same value as
ranges of various motor types. Define motors designed for
parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). If
other frequencies separately. The motor pole value is
the motor supplier provides an induction
always an even number, because it refers to the total
curve, enter the induction value at 200%
number of poles, not pairs of poles. The frequency
of the nominal value.
converter creates the initial setting of parameter 1-39 Motor
Poles based on parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
Range: Function:
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
Range: Function: related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally, this
Size [0 - Set the nominal back EMF for the motor parameter has the same value as
related* 9000 V] when running at 1000 RPM. parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq). If
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM the motor supplier provides an induction
motor when no frequency converter is

1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) 1-47 Torque Calibration

Range: Function: Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full
curve, enter the induction value at 200% speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power,
of the nominal value. Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the
correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the
3 3 1-46 Position Detection Gain

Range: Function:
power loss in both the motor, the cable, and the frequency
converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter
100 %* [20 - 200 Adjusts the amplitude of the test pulse
to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses,
%] during position detection at start. Adjust
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this
this parameter to improve the position
function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it
measurement.
starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal
performance.
1-47 Torque Calibration
Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full
Option: Function:
speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power, • parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance
Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the (Rs)
correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the • parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage
power loss in both the motor, the cable, and the frequency Reactance (X1)
converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust
• parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter
Reactance (X2)
to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses,
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this • parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance
function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it (Ld)
starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal

performance.
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
Size related* [1 - 500 %] Inductance Saturation Point.
[0] Off
[1] 1st start Calibrates at the first start-up after power-
after pwr- up and keeps this value until reset by a 3.3.8 1-5* Load Indep. Setting
up power cycle.
[2] Every start Calibrates at every start-up, compensating 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
for a possible change in motor This parameter is not visible on the LCP.
temperature since last start-up. The value is
Range: Function:
reset after a power cycle.
100 [0 - Use this parameter along with
[3] 1st start The frequency converter calibrates the %* 300 %] parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising
with store torque at the first start-up after power-up. [RPM] to obtain a different thermal load on the
This option is used to update motor motor when running at low speed.
parameters: Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated
• parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance magnetising current. If the setting is too low,
(Rs) the torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.
• parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Magn. current

130BA045.11
Reactance (X1)
100%
• parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Par.1-50
Reactance (X2)
Par.1-51 Hz
• parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance Par.1-52 RPM
(Ld) Illustration 3.7 Motor Magnetisation
[4] Every start The frequency converter calibrates the

with store torque at every start-up, compensating for
a possible change in motor temperature
since last start-up. This option is used to
NOTICE
update motor parameters: Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed has no
effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
SPM.

1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] 1-53 Model Shift Frequency
This parameter is not visible on the LCP. Range: Function:
Range: Function: Speed closed loop [1] or Torque [2], and
Size [10 - NOTICE parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to
Flux w/motor feedback [3]. With this parameter
related* 300 RPM]
3 3
Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal it is possible to make an adjustment of the
Magnetising [RPM] has no effect shifting point where FC 302 changes between
when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] Flux model 1 and Flux model 2, which is
PM, non-salient SPM. useful in some sensitive speed and torque
control applications.
NOTICE fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125
130BA146.11
This parameter is not visible on the
LCP. Flux model 1 Flux model 2
Set the required speed for normal P 1-53 fout
magnetising current. If the speed is set Illustration 3.8 Parameter 1-00 Configu-
lower than the motor slip speed, ration Mode = [1] Speed closed loop or [2]
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Torque and parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Zero Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed Principle = [3] Flux w/motor feedback
Normal Magnetising [RPM] are of no
significance.
Use this parameter along with Variable Current - Flux model - Sensorless
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at This model is used when
Zero Speed. See Table 3.7. parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
[0] Speed open loop and parameter 1-01 Motor
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] Control Principle is set to [2] Flux sensorless.
Range: Function: In speed open loop in Flux mode, the speed
Size [0 - Set the required frequency for normal is determined from the current measurement.
related* 250.0 Hz] magnetising current. If the frequency is Below fnorm x 0.1, the frequency converter
set lower than the motor slip frequency, runs on a variable current model. Above fnorm
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at x 0.125 the frequency converter runs on a
Zero Speed is inactive. Flux model.
Use this parameter along with fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at 130BA147.10
Zero Speed. See Illustration 3.7. Variable
current Flux model 2
model
1-53 Model Shift Frequency
P 1-53 fout
Range: Function:
Illustration 3.9 Parameter 1-00 Configu-
Size [4 - NOTICE ration Mode = [0] Speed open loop,
related* 18.0
This parameter cannot be adjusted parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle =
Hz]
while the motor is running. [2] Flux sensorless
Flux Model shift

Enter the frequency value for shift between 2
1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening
models for determining motor speed. Select
the value based on settings in Range: Function:
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and 0 V* [0 - 100 The value of this parameter reduces the
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle. There V] maximal voltage available for the Flux of the
are 2 options: shift between Flux model 1 and motor in fieldweakning, giving more voltage
Flux model 2; or shift between Variable available for torque. Be aware that an excessive
Current mode and Flux model 2. FC 302 only. value may cause stall problems at high speed.
Flux model 1 – Flux model 2

This model is used when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to

1-55 U/f Characteristic - U 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current

Size [0 - Enter the voltage at each frequency point PM motors, the value tunes for back EMF
related* 1000 V] to manually form a U/f characteristic and d-axis inductance of the motor.
matching the motor. This parameter is only available in VVC+.
3 3 The frequency points are defined in

parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F. 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5] Range: Function:
and is only accessible when
Size [0 - Sets the frequency of the flystart test
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set
related* 500 %] pulses that are used to detect the motor
to [0] U/f.
direction. 100% means means 2 x fslip.
Increase this value to reduce the generated
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F
torque. For PM motors, this value is the
Range: Function: percentage nm,n of the free-running PM
Size [0 - Enter the frequency points to manually motor. Above this value, flystart is always
related* 1000.0 form a U/f-characteristic matching the performed. Below this value, the start
Hz] motor. mode is selected in parameter 1-70 PM
The voltage at each point is defined in Start Mode
parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U. This parameter is only available in VVC+.
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
and is only accessible when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is 3.3.9 1-6* Load Depend. Setting
set to [0] U/f.
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation
Motor Voltage
130BA166.10
Range: Function:
Par 1-55 [x]
100 %* [0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
%] relation to load when the motor is running
1-55[5]
at low speed and obtain the optimum U/f
1-55[4]
characteristic. The motor size determines the
1-55[3]
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.
1-55[2]
1-55[1]
Motor size Changeover
1-55[0] 0.25 kW-7.5 kW <10 Hz
1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56
[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Um 130BA046.11
Output Frequency Par.1-60 Par.1-61
Par 1-56 [x] 100%
Illustration 3.10 U/f Characteristic
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current 60%
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Sets the current level for the flystart test
related* 200 %] pulses that are used to detect the motor
direction. 100% means Im,n. Adjust the
value to be big enough to avoid noise
influence, but low enough to avoid 0% fout
affecting the accuracy (current must be Changeover
able to drop to zero before the next Illustration 3.11 Changeover

pulse). Reduce the value to reduce the
generated torque.
Default is 30% for asynchronous motors,
but may vary for PM motors. For adjusting

1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant
100 %* [0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in 5 ms* [5 - 50 Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
%] relation to load when the motor is running ms] parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
resonance problems. Enter the time constant
that provides the best dampening.
3 3
is active.
NOTICE
Motor size Changeover
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant has
0.25 kW - 7.5 kW > 10 Hz
no effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-
Table 3.8 Changeover Frequency salient SPM.
1-62 Slip Compensation 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed

Range: Function: This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
Size [-500 Enter the % value for slip compensation, to Range: Function:
related* - 500 compensate for tolerances in the value of Size [1 - Enter the minimum motor current at low
%] nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automat- related* 200 %] speed, see parameter 1-53 Model Shift
ically, i.e. on the basis of the rated motor Frequency. Increasing this current improves
speed nM,N. motor torque at low speed.
This function is not active when Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to enabled when parameter 1-00 Configu-
[1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque Torque ration Mode [0] Speed open loop only. The
control with speed feedback or when frequency converter runs with constant
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to current through motor for speeds below
[0] U/f special motor mode. 10 Hz.
For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor Flux
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant model in the frequency converter controls
Range: Function: the motor. Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Size [0.05 - 5 Enter the slip compensation reaction Motor Mode and/or parameter 4-17 Torque
related* s] speed. A high value results in slow Limit Generator Mode automatically adjust
reaction, and a low value results in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
quick reaction. If low-frequency The parameter with the highest value
resonance problems arise, use a longer adjusts parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
time setting. Speed. The current setting in
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
NOTICE composed of the torque generating
current and the magnetising current.
Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant has no
Example: Set parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient
Motor Mode to 100% and set
SPM.
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode to 60%. Parameter 1-66 Min. Current
1-64 Resonance Dampening at Low Speed automatically adjusts to
Range: Function: about 127%, depending on the motor size.
100 [0 - Enter the resonance dampening value. Set FC 302 only.
%* 500 %] parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time 1-67 Load Type
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
resonance problems. To reduce resonance Option: Function:
oscillation, increase the value of
[0] * Passive load For conveyors, fan and pump applications.
parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening.
[1] Active load For hoisting applications, used in slip
NOTICE compensation at low speed. When [1] Active
Load is selected, set parameter 1-66 Min.
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening has no effect when
1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

1-67 Load Type 1-72 Start Function

This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. Option: Function:
Option: Function: Select the start function during start delay.
Current at Low Speed to a level which This parameter is linked to parameter 1-71 Start
corresponds to maximum torque. Delay.
3 3 1-68 Motor Inertia

[0] DC Hold/
delay time
Energises motor with a DC holding current
(parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current) during the
Range: Function: start delay time.
0 kgm�* [0.0000 - 10000.0000 kgm�] [1] DC Brake/ Energises motor with a DC braking current
delay time (parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current) during the
1-69 System Inertia
start delay time.
Range: Function:
[2] Coast/delay Motor coasted during the start delay time
Size [0000 - NOTICE * time (inverter off).
related* 10000.0000
This parameter cannot be
kgm�] [3] Start speed Only possible with VVC+.
adjusted while motor is
cw Connect the function described in
running.
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and
parameter 1-76 Start Current in the start delay
Active in Flux Open Loop only.
time.
Used to compute the acceleration
Regardless of the value applied by the
torque at low speed. Used in the
reference signal, the output speed applies the
torque limit controller.
setting of the start speed in
FC 302 only.
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] or
parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz], and the output
3.3.10 1-7* Start Adjustments current corresponds to the setting of the start
current in parameter 1-76 Start Current. This
function is typically used in hoisting
1-70 PM Start Mode
applications without counterweight and
Select the PM motor start-up mode. This is done to initialise the especially in applications with a Cone-motor,
VVC+ control core for previously free-running PM motor. Both where the start is clockwise, followed by
selections estimate the speed and angle. Active for PM motors in rotation in the reference direction.
VVC+ only.
[4] Horizontal Only possible with VVC+.
Option: Function: operation For obtaining the function described in
[0] * Rotor Detection Estimates the electrical angle parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and
of the rotor and uses this as a parameter 1-76 Start Current during the start
starting point. Standard delay time. The motor rotates in the reference
selection for AutomationDrive direction. If the reference signal equals zero
applications. (0), parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] is ignored
[1] Parking The Parking function applies and the output speed equals zero (0). The
DC current across the stator output current corresponds to the setting of
winding and rotates the rotor the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
to electrical zero position Current.
(typically selected for HVAC [5] VVC+/Flux For the function described in
applications). clockwise parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] only. The
start current is calculated automatically. This
1-71 Start Delay function uses the start speed in the start delay
Range: Function: time only. Regardless of the value set by the
0 s* [0 - 25.5 s] This parameter refers to the start function reference signal, the output speed equals the
selected in parameter 1-72 Start Function. setting of the start speed in
Enter the time delay required before parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. [3] Start
commencing acceleration. speed/current clockwise and [5] VVCplus/Flux
clockwise are typically used in hoisting
applications. [4] Start speed/current in reference
direction is particularly used in applications

1-72 Start Function 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]

Option: Function: Range: Function:
with counterweight and horizontal movement. speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or [5]
VVCplus/Flux clockwise, and set a start delay
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
[6] Hoist Mech. For utilising mechanical brake control
Brake Rel functions (parameter 2-24 Stop Delay to
parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor). This
1-75 Start Speed [Hz]
3 3
parameter is only active when Range: Function:
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to Size [0 - This parameter can be used for hoist
[3] Flux w/ motor feedback (FC 302 only). related* 500.0 applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start
Hz] speed. After the start signal, the output
[7] VVC+/Flux
speed leaps to set value. Set the start
counter-cw
function in parameter 1-72 Start Function to
1-73 Flying Start [3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or
Option: Function: [5] VVCplus/Flux clockwise, and set a start
delay time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted 1-76 Start Current
Range: Function:
0 [0 - Some motors, e.g. cone rotor motors, need extra
This function makes it possible to catch a
A* par. current/starting speed to disengage the rotor. To
motor which is spinning freely due to a mains
1-24 A] obtain this boost, set the required current in
drop-out.
parameter 1-76 Start Current. Set
[0] Disabled No function parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. Set
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw
[1] Enabled Enables the frequency converter to catch and
or [4] Horizontal operation, and set a start delay
control a spinning motor.
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
parameter 1-71 Start Delay and This parameter can be used for hoist applications
parameter 1-72 Start Function have no (cone rotor).
function.
[2] Enabled 3.3.11 1-8* Stop Adjustments

Always
[3] Enabled Ref.
1-80 Function at Stop
Dir.
Option: Function:
[4] Enab. Always
Ref. Dir. Select the frequency converter function
after a stop command or after the speed is
NOTICE ramped down to the settings in
This function is not recommended for hoisting parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at
applications. Stop [RPM].
For power levels above 55 kW, Flux mode must be used [0] Coast Leaves motor in free mode. The motor is
to achieve the best performance. * disconnected from the frequency converter.
[1] DC hold Energises motor with a DC holding current

NOTICE (see parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current).
To obtain the best flying start performance the advanced [2] Motor check Checks if a motor has been connected.
motor data, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
[3] Pre- Builds up a magnetic field while the motor
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh), must be correct.
magnetizing is stopped. This allows the motor to
produce torque quickly at subsequent start
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] commands (asynchronous motors only). This
Range: Function: pre-magnetising function does not help the
Size [0 - Set a motor start speed. After the start very first start command. 2 different
related* 600 signal, the output speed leaps to set value. solutions are available to pre-magnetise the
RPM] Set the start function in machine for the first start command:
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start

1-80 Function at Stop 1-83 Precise Stop Function

1. Start the frequency converter [0] Precise Only optimal when the operational speed, for
with a 0 RPM reference and wait 2 * ramp example the operational speed of a conveyor belt
to 4 rotor time constants before stop is constant. This is an open loop control. Achieves
3 3 increasing the speed reference.
1a. Set parameter 1-71 Start Delay [1] Cnt stop

high repetitive precision at the stopping point.
Counts the number of pulses, typically from an

to the desired pre-mag. time (2 to with encoder, and generates a stop signal after a pre-
4 rotor time constants. See the reset programmed number of pulses, defined in
time constants description further parameter parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter
in this section). Value,has been received at terminal 29 or terminal
1b. Set parameter 1-72 Start 33.
Function to either [0] DC hold or This is a direct feedback with one-way closed loop
[1] DC Brake. control.
The counter function is activated (starts timing) at
Set the DC hold or DC brake
the edge of the start signal (when it changes
current magnitude
from stop to start). After each precise stop, the
(parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current or
number of pulses counted during ramp down to
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current)
0 RPM is reset.
to be equal to I_pre-mag = Unom/
(1.73 x Xh) [2] Cnt stop Same as [1] but the number of pulses counted
w/o during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the
Sample rotor time constants =
reset counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise
(Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr)
Stop Counter Value.
1 kW = 0.2 s
This reset function can be used to compensate for
10 kW = 0.5 s
the extra distance done during ramping down
100 kW = 1.7 s
and to reduce the impacts of gradual wear of
1000 kW = 2.5 s
mechanical parts.
[4] DC Voltage When the motor is stopped, the
[3] Speed Stops at precisely the same point, regardless of
U0 parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U [0]
comp the present speed. The stop signal is delayed
defines the voltage at 0 Hz.
stop internally when the present speed is lower than
[5] Coast at low When the reference is below 1-81 Min Speed the maximum speed (set in parameter 4-19 Max
reference for Function at Stop [RPM], the motor is Output Frequency).
disconnected from the frequency converter. The delay is calculated on the basis of the
[6] Motor check, reference speed of the frequency converter and
alarm not on the basis of the actual speed. Make sure
that the frequency converter has ramped up
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] before activating the speed compensated stop.
Range: Function: [4] Com cnt Same as [3] but after each precise stop, the
Size related* [0 - 600 RPM] Set the speed at which to activate stop number of pulses counted during ramp down to
1-80 Function at Stop. w/rst 0 RPM is reset.
[5] Comp Same as [3] but the number of pulses counted

1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
cnt stop during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the
Range: Function: w/o r counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise
Size related* [ 0 - 20.0 Hz] Set the output frequency at which Stop Counter Value.
to activate 1-80 Function at Stop. This reset function can be used to compensate for
the extra distance done during ramping down
1-83 Precise Stop Function and to reduce the impacts of gradual wear of
Option: Function: mechanical parts.
NOTICE The precise stop functions are advantageous in

This parameter cannot be adjusted while applications where high precision is required.
the motor is running. If using a standard stop command, the accuracy is
determined by the internal task time. That is not the case
FC 302 only. when using the precise stop function; it eliminates the task
time dependence and increases the accuracy substantially.

The frequency converter tolerance is normally given by its 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
task time. However, by using its special precise stop Option: Function:
function, the tolerance is independent of the task time
analog or digital inputs
because the stop signal immediately interrupts the
(parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source).
execution of the frequency converter program. The precise
See chapter 3.3.13.1 PTC Thermistor
stop function gives a highly reproducible delay from the
stop signal is given until the ramping down starts. A test
Connection.
3 3
must be done to find this delay as it is a sum of sensor, • Via a KTY sensor in the motor
PLC, frequency converter, and mechanical parts. winding connected to an analog
To ensure optimum accuracy there should be at least 10 input (parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor
cycles during ramping down, see parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Resource). See chapter 3.3.13.2 KTY
Ramp Down Time, parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time, Sensor Connection.
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time, and • Via calculation (ETR = Electronic
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
The precise stop function is set up here and enabled from based on the actual load and time.
DI at terminal 29 or terminal 33. The calculated thermal load is
compared with the rated motor
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value
current IM,N and the rated motor
Range: Function:
frequency fM,N. See
100000* [0 - Enter the counter value to be used in chapter 3.3.13.3 ETR and
999999999] the integrated precise stop function, chapter 3.3.13.4 ATEX ETR.
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
The maximum permissible frequency at • Via a mechanical thermal switch
(Klixon type). See
terminal 29 or 33 is 110 kHz.
chapter 3.3.13.5 Klixon.
NOTICE For the North American market: The ETR
Not used for selections [0] Precise functions provide class 20 motor overload
ramp stop and [3] Speed comp stop protection in accordance with NEC.
in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
[0] No Continuously overloaded motor, when no
Function.
protection warning or trip of the frequency converter is
required.
1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay [1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected
Range: Function: warning thermistor or KTY sensor in the motor reacts
10 ms* [0 - Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, etc. for in the event of motor overtemperature.
100 ms] use in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. In [2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when
speed compensated stop mode, the delay time trip connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
at different frequencies has a major influence motor reacts in the event of motor over-
on the stop function. temperature.
NOTICE The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3 kΩ.
Not used for selections [0] Precise ramp Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the
stop, [1] Cnt stop with reset, and [2] Cnt motor for winding protection.
stop w/o reset in parameter 1-83 Precise [3] ETR Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
Stop Function. warning 1 and activates a warning on the display when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
signal via one of the digital outputs.
3.3.12 1-9* Motor Temperature [4] ETR trip 1 Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
and stops (trips) the frequency converter when
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
Option: Function: signal via one of the digital outputs. The
Thermal motor protection can be signal appears in the event of a warning and if
implemented using a range of techniques: the frequency converter trips (thermal
warning).
• Via a PTC sensor in the motor
windings connected to one of the [5] ETR
warning 2
[6] ETR trip 2

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Option: Function: Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input
[7] ETR
+10V
warning 3
130BA152.10
[8] ETR trip 3 39 42 50 53 54 55
3 3 [9] ETR
warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4 OFF
[20] ATEX ETR Activates the thermal monitoring function for 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables

parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed
reduction, parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
ON
points freq. and parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR R
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.7 kΩ
interpol points current.
Illustration 3.13 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input
[21] Advanced
ETR
NOTICE Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, follow the instructions in the
temperature is too high.
dedicated chapter of the VLT® AutomationDrive Design Parameter set-up:
Guide and the instructions provided by the motor Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
manufacturer. Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 54
NOTICE
+10V
130BA153.11
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, parameter 4-18 Current Limit
39 42 50 53 54 55
must be set to 150%. OFF
3.3.13.1 PTC Thermistor Connection

175HA183.10
R ON
(Ω) <3.0 k Ω
PTC / Thermistor R
>3.0 k Ω
Illustration 3.14 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input
4000
Input Supply voltage Threshold
3000
digital/analog cut-out values
1330 Digital 10 V < 800 Ω - > 2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 V < 3.0 kΩ - > 3.0 kΩ
550
NOTICE
250 Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
specification of the used thermistor element.
 [°C] 3.3.13.2 KTY Sensor Connection

-20°C  nominel -5°C  nominel +5°C
 nominel (FC 302 only)
Illustration 3.12 PTC Profile KTY sensors are used especially in permanent magnet
servo motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
parameters as stator resistance (parameter 1-30 Stator
Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply: Resistance (Rs)) for PM motors and also rotor resistance
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor (parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous
temperature is too high. motors, depending on winding temperature. The
Parameter set-up: calculation is:

Rs = Rs20° C x 1 + αcu x ΔT Ω where αcu = 0.00393
175ZA052.12
t [s]
KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting
2000
(parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold level).
1000
FC 302 can handle 3 types of KTY sensors, defined in 600
parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor Type. The actual sensor 500
400
temperature can be read out from parameter 16-19 KTY
sensor temperature.
300
200
3 3
fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)
4500
100
130BB917.10
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
60
4000
50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
40
3500
30
20 IM
3000 10
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN(par. 1-24)
Resistance [Ohm]
2500
Illustration 3.16 ETR Profile
2000
1500
3.3.13.4 ATEX ETR
1000
The B option MCB 112 PTC Thermistor option offers ATEX

500
approved monitoring of motor temperature. Alternatively,
an external ATEX approved PTC protection device can be
0
-25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 used.
Temperature [°C]
KTY type 1 KTY type 2 KTY type 3 NOTICE

Only ATEX Ex-e approved motors may be used for this
Illustration 3.15 KTY Type Selection
function. See motor nameplate, approval certificate, data
sheet or contact motor supplier.
KTY Sensor 1: 1 kΩ at 100 °C (e.g. Philips KTY 84-1)

When controlling an Ex-e motor with “Increased Safety”, it
KTY Sensor 2: 1 kΩ at 25 °C (e.g. Philips KTY 83-1)
is important to ensure certain limitations. The parameters
KTY Sensor 3: 2 kΩ at 25 °C (e.g. Infineon KTY-10
that must be programmed are presented in the following
NOTICE application example.
If the temperature of the motor is utilised through a
thermistor or KTY sensor, the PELV is not complied with
in case of short circuits between motor windings and
sensor. To comply with PELV the sensor must be extra
isolated.
3.3.13.3 ETR
The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at

lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated
in the motor.

Function Setting
130BA151.11
+24V
GND
OFF
B
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [20] ATEX ETR
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Protection
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. 20%
speed reduction
3 3
Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR
ON
interpol. points freq. PTC / Thermistor
Motor name plate. <6.6 k Ω >10.8 k Ω R
Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
Illustration 3.17 Thermistor Connection
interpol points current
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency Enter the same value as for
parameter 4-19 Max Output
Frequency. 1-91 Motor External Fan
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Motor name plate, possibly Option: Function:
Frequency reduced for long motor [0] * No No external fan is required, i.e. the motor is derated at
cables, sinus filter or reduced low speed.
supply voltage.
[1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so
parameter 4-18 Current Limit Forced to 150% by 1-90 [20]
no derating of the motor is required at low speed.
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [80] PTC Card 1 The upper curve in Illustration 3.16 (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe [4] PTC 1 Alarm followed if the motor current is lower than nominal
Stop motor current (see 1-24 Motor Current). If the motor
Parameter 14-01 Switching Check that the default value current exceeds nominal current, the operation time
Frequency fulfils the requirement from still decreases as if no fan were installed.
motor name plate. If not, use
sine-wave filter. 1-93 Thermistor Source
Parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at 0
Option: Function:
Inverter Fault
NOTICE
Table 3.9 Parameters This parameter cannot be adjusted
CAUTION
Compare the minimum switching frequency requirement NOTICE
stated by the motor manufacturer to the minimum Set digital input to [0] PNP - Active at
switching frequency of the frequency converter, the 24 V in 5-00 Digital I/O Mode.
default value in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency. If
the frequency converter does not meet this requirement,
Select the input to which the thermistor
use a sine-wave filter.
(PTC sensor) should be connected. An
analog input option [1] Analog Input 53 or
More information about ATEX ETR Thermal Monitoring can [2] Analog Input 54 cannot be selected if
be found in the Application Note MN33G. the analog input is already in use as a
reference source (selected in 3-15 Reference
3.3.13.5 Klixon 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source or
3-17 Reference 3 Source).
The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON® When using VLT® PTC thermistor card MCB
metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused 112, [0] None must always be selected.
by the current through the disc causes a trip. [0] * None
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply: [1] Analog Input
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor 53
temperature is too high. [2] Analog Input
Parameter set-up: 54
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] [3] Digital input
Thermistor Trip. 18
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input. [4] Digital input
19
[5] Digital input
32

1-93 Thermistor Source 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.

Option: Function: FC 302 only.
[6] Digital input Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
33 [20].
Range: Function:
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction
FC 302 only.
Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 Hz]
3 3
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to Enter the 4 frequency points [Hz] from the motor name
[20]. plate into this array. Together with parameter 1-99 ATEX
Range: Function: ETR interpol points current, these can be presented in
Table 3.10.
0 %* [0 - 100 %]
The reaction for operating in Ex-e current limit must be NOTICE

configured.
All frequency/current limit points from the motor name
0%: The frequency converter does not change anything
plate or motor data sheet must be programmed.
besides issuing warning 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning.
>0%: The frequency converter issues warning 163 and
reduces motor speed following ramp 2 (parameter group
130BB909.10
3-5* Ramp 2). 100%
80 %
Example:
Actual reference = 50 RPM
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction = 20% 40 %
Resulting reference = 40 RPM
1-95 KTY Sensor Type

Option: Function:
Select the used type of KTY sensor. FC 302
5 Hz 15 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz
only.
Illustration 3.18 Example of ATEX ETR Thermal Limitation
[0] * KTY Sensor 1 1 kΩ at 100 °C Curve.
[1] KTY Sensor 2 1 kΩ at 25 °C x-axis: fm [Hz]
y-axis: Im/Im,n x 100 [%]
[2] KTY Sensor 3 2 kΩ at 25 °C
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource

Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
Option: Function: interpol. points freq. interpol points current
Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used [0]=5 Hz [0]=40%
as KTY sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be [1]=15 Hz [1]=80%
selected as KTY source if otherwise used as
[2]=25 Hz [2]=100%
reference (see parameter 3-15 Reference Resource
[3]=50 Hz [3]=100%
1 to parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3).
FC 302 only. All operating points underneath the curve are allowed
NOTICE continuously. Above the line, however, these are only
allowed for a limited time calculated as a function of the
Connection of KTY sensor between term.
overload. In the event of a machine current greater than
54 and 55 (GND). See Illustration 3.15.
1.5 times the rated current, shut-down is immediate.
[0] * None 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current

[2] Analog FC 302 only.
Input 54 Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
[20] or [21].
1-97 KTY Threshold level
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 100 %] Definition of thermal limitation curve.
80 �C* [-40 - 140 �C] Select the KTY sensor threshold level For example, see parameter 1-98 ATEX
for motor thermal protection. ETR interpol. points freq.
FC 302 only.

Use the 4 current points [A] from the motor name plate. Application Settings
Calculate the values as percentage of nominal motor Low inertia applications 1-17 Voltage filter time const. to be
current, Im/Im,n x 100 [%], and enter into this array. ILoad/IMotor <5 increased by factor 5 to 10.
1-14 Damping Gain should be
Together with parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq., reduced.
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
3 3
these constitute a table (f [Hz],I [%]).
should be reduced (<100%).
NOTICE Low inertia applications

50>ILoad/IMotor >5
Keep calculated values.
All frequency/current limit points from the motor name High inertia applications 1-14 Damping Gain,
plate or motor data sheet must be programmed. ILoad/IMotor > 50 parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time
Const. and parameter 1-16 High
3.3.14 PM Settings Speed Filter Time Const. should be
increased.
If [2] Std. PM, non-salient is selected in High load at low speed 1-17 Voltage filter time const. should
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor <30% (rated speed) be increased.
parameters manually, in the following order: 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
should be increased (>100% for
1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current. longer time can overheat the
motor).
2. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
3. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Table 3.10 Recommendations for VVC+ Applications
4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles.

5. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs). 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
6. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter
can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.
7. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM.
The following parameters have been added for PM motors. Adjust starting torque in 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.
1. Parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset.
2. Parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust. Application Settings
Low inertia applications Keep calculated values.
3. Parameter 1-14 Damping Gain.
High inertia applications Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
4. Parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration. Speed
5. Parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current. Increase speed to a value between
6. Parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency.
application.
7. Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode. Set ramp times matching the
8. Parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s].
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast
9. Parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current ramp down causes an overvoltage
[%]. trip.
NOTICE High load at low speed Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed
Standard parameters still need configuration (e.g.
Increase speed to a value between
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency etc.).
application.
Table 3.11 Recommendations for Flux Applications
Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting
torque.

3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
3.4.1 2-0* DC-Brakes
Size related* [ 0 - 60000 Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
RPM] activation of the DC braking current
Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC
set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake
hold functions.
2-00 DC Hold Current

Current, upon a stop command.
3 3
Range: Function: 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
50 [0 - Enter a value for holding current as a percentage Range: Function:
%* 160 %] of the rated motor current IM,N set in Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding Hz] activation of the DC braking current
current corresponds to IM,N. set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake
This parameter holds the motor function (holding Current, upon a stop command.
torque) or pre-heats the motor.
This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in NOTICE
parameter 1-72 Start Function [0] or Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] has no effect
parameter 1-80 Function at Stop [1]. when 1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
NOTICE 2-05 Maximum Reference

The maximum value depends on the rated motor
Range: Function:
current.
Size [ par. 3-02 - This is an access parameter to
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the
related* 999999.999 parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
motor.
ReferenceFeed- for legacy products. The maximum
Low values of DC hold produces larger than expected
backUnit] reference is the highest value
currents with larger motor power sizes. This error
obtainable by summing all
increases as the motor power increases.
references. The maximum reference
unit matches the choice of configu-
2-01 DC Brake Current ration in
Range: Function: parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
50 [0 - Enter a value for current as a percentage of the and the unit in
%* 1000 rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor parameter 3-01 Reference/Feedback
%] Current. 100% DC braking current corresponds to Unit.
IM,N.
DC brake current is applied on a stop command, 2-06 Parking Current
when the speed is lower than the limit set in Range: Function:
parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]; when 50 %* [ 0 - 1000 Set current as percentage of rated motor
the DC Brake Inverse function is active, or via the %] current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Is
serial communication port. The braking current is used when enabled in parameter 1-70 PM
active during the time period set in Start Mode.
parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.
2-07 Parking Time
NOTICE Range: Function:
The maximum value depends on the rated motor 3 s* [0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the parking current set in
current. parameter 2-06 Parking Current, once activated.
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
3.4.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-02 DC Braking Time
Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters.
Range: Function:
Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper.
10 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set
in 2-01 DC Brake Current, once activated. 2-10 Brake Function
Option: Function:
[0] Off No brake resistor is installed.

2-10 Brake Function 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

[1] Resistor A brake resistor is incorporated in the system, for Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake
brake dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat. resistor is active. This depends on the unit
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC as follows:
3 3 link voltage during braking (generating operation).

The resistor brake function is only active in
T2 units: 390 V
T4 units: 778 V
frequency converters with an integral dynamic T5 units: 810 V
brake. T6 units: 943 V/1099 V for D – F frames
T7 units: 1099 V
[2] AC brake Is selected to improve braking without using a
brake resistor. This parameter controls an NOTICE
overmagnetisation of the motor when running
If Rbr is not known, or if Tbr is
with a generatoric load. This function can improve
different from 120 s, the practical
the OVC-function. Increasing the electrical losses
approach is to run the brake
in the motor allows the OVC function to increase
application, read out 16-33 Brake
the braking torque without exceeding the
Energy Average and then enter this
overvoltage limit.
+ 20% in 2-12 Brake Power Limit
NOTICE (kW).
The AC brake is not as efficient as dynamic
braking with resistor.
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring
AC brake is for VVC+ mode in both open
Option: Function:
and closed loop.
This parameter is only active in frequency
converters with a brake.
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) This parameter enables monitoring of the
Range: Function: power to the brake resistor. The power is
Size [ 5.00 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This calculated on the basis of the resistance
related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power (parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)), the
Ohm] to the brake resistor in 2-13 Brake Power DC link voltage, and the resistor duty time.
Monitoring. This parameter is only active [0] * Off No brake power monitoring required.
in frequency converters with an integral
[1] Warning 120s Activates a warning on the display when
dynamic brake.
the power transmitted during the duty
Use this parameter for values without
time exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit
decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals,
(parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW).
use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm).
The warning disappears when the
transmitted power falls below 80% of the
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)
monitoring limit.
Range: Function:
[2] Trip 120s Trips frequency converter and displays an
Size [ 0.001 - Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is
alarm when the calculated power exceeds
related* 2000.000 the expected average power dissipated in
100% of the monitoring limit.
kW] the brake resistor over a period of 120 s.
It is used as the monitoring limit for [3] Warning & trip Activates both of the above, including
16-33 Brake Energy Average and thereby 120s warning, trip and alarm.
specifies when a warning/alarm is to be
[4] Warning 30s
given.
[5] Trip 30s
To calculate parameter 2-12 Brake Power
[6] Warning & trip
Limit (kW), the following formula can be
30s
used.
[7] Warning 60s
U2
br V × t br s
Pbr,avg W =
R br Ω × T br s
[8] Trip 60s
Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in [9] Warning & trip
the brake resistor, Rbr is the resistance of 60s
the brake resistor. tbr is the active [10] Warning 300s
breaking time within the 120 s period, Tbr. [11] Trip 300s

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 2-15 Brake Check

[12] Warning & trip [1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a
300s short circuit and runs a test for brake resistor
[13] Warning 600s disconnection during power-up.
[14] Trip 600s
[15] Warning & trip
[2] Trip Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
3 3
600s IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).
brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit [3] Stop and Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the trip the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
relay/digital outputs. The measuring accuracy of the power ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of alarm is displayed (e.g. warning 25, 27 or 28).
the resistor (better than ±20%).
[4] AC brake Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
2-15 Brake Check the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
Option: Function: IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
performs a controlled ramp-down. This option is
Parameter 2-15 Brake Check is only active in
available for FC 302 only.
frequency converters with an integral dynamic
brake. [5] Trip Lock
Select type of test and monitoring function to NOTICE

check the connection to the brake resistor, or
Remove a warning arising in connection with [0] Off or
whether a brake resistor is present, and then
[1] Warning by cycling the mains supply. The fault must
display a warning or an alarm in the event of a
be corrected first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the
fault.
frequency converter keeps running even if a fault is
NOTICE located.
The brake resistor disconnection function
is tested during power-up. However, the 2-16 AC brake Max. Current
brake IGBT test is performed when there is Range: Function:
no braking. A warning or trip disconnects
100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] Enter the maximum permissible current
the brake function.
when using AC brake to avoid
overheating of motor windings.
The testing sequence is as follows:
1. The DC link ripple amplitude is NOTICE

measured for 300 ms without braking. Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current has no effect when
2. The DC link ripple amplitude is 1-10 Motor Construction [1] PM, non salient SPM.
measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on. 2-17 Over-voltage Control
3. If the DC link ripple amplitude while Option: Function:
braking is lower than the DC link ripple
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake
of the frequency converter tripping due to
check has failed by returning a warning
an overvoltage on the DC-link caused by
or alarm.
generative power from the load.
4. If the DC link ripple amplitude while
[0] * Disabled No OVC required.
braking is higher than the DC link ripple
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake [1] Enabled (not Activates OVC except when using a stop
check is OK. at stop) signal to stop the frequency converter.
[0] Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a [2] Enabled Activates OVC.
* short circuit during operation. If a short circuit
occurs, warning 25 appears. NOTICE
Do not enable OVC in hoisting applications.

2-18 Brake Check Condition Mechanical Brake Control for applications with an electro-
Range: Function: magnetic brake in parameter 5-40 Function Relay,
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital
[0] * At Power Up Brake check is performed at power-
Output. When selecting [32] Mechanical brake control, the
up.
mechanical brake is closed from start-up until the output
[1] After Coast Situations Brake check is performed after coast current is above the level selected in
3 3 situations. parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current. During stop, the
mechanical brake activates when the speed falls below the
2-19 Over-voltage Gain level specified in parameter 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM].
Range: Function: If the frequency converter enters an alarm condition or an
100 %* [0 - 200 %] Select overvoltage gain. overcurrent or overvoltage situation, the mechanical brake
immediately cuts in. This is also the case during Safe
Torque Off.
3.4.3 2-2* Mechanical Brake
NOTICE
Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-
Protection mode and trip delay features
magnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting
(parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and
applications.
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault) may delay
To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (relay 01 or
the activation of the mechanical brake in an alarm
relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or
condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting
29) is required. Normally, this output must be closed
applications.
during periods when the frequency converter is unable to
‘hold’ the motor, e.g. due to an excessive load. Select [32]
130BA074.12
Start 1=on
term.18 0=off
Par 1-71
Start delay time
Par 2-21
Activate brake
Shaft speed speed
Par 1-74
Start speed
Output current
Pre-magnetizing
current or
DC hold current Par 2-20
Par 1-76 Start current/
Release brake current
Par 2-23 Par 2-00 DC hold current
Brake delay time
Reaction time EMK brake

on
Relay 01
off
Mechanical brake
locked
Mechanical brake
free
Time
Illustration 3.19 Mechanical Brake

2-20 Release Brake Current 2-23 Activate Brake Delay

Size [0 - Set the motor current for release of the sudden torque change leads to movement and
related* par. mechanical brake when a start condition is noise.
16-37 A] present. The default value is the maximum
current the inverter can provide for the
particular power size. The upper limit is
2-24 Stop Delay
Range: Function:
3 3
specified in parameter 16-37 Inv. Max.
0 s* [0 - 5 Set the time interval from the moment when the
Current.
s] motor is stopped until the brake closes.
NOTICE To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical
brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and
When mechanical brake control
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
output is selected, but no mechanical
brake is connected, the function does This parameter is a part of the stopping function.
not work by default setting due to
too low motor current. 2-25 Brake Release Time
Range: Function:
0.20 s* [0 - 5 s] This value defines the time it takes for the
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]
mechanical brake to open. This parameter
Range: Function: must act as a time out when brake feedback is
Size [0 - Set the motor speed for activation of activated.
related* 30000 the mechanical brake, when a stop
RPM] condition is present. The upper speed
limit is specified in 3.4.4 Hoist Mechanical Brake
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
The hoist mechanical break control supports the following
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] functions:
Range: Function: • 2 channels for mechanical brake feedback to offer
Size related* [ 0 - 5000.0 Set the motor frequency for further protection against unintended behaviour
Hz] activation of the mechanical resulting from broken cable.
brake when a stop condition is • Monitoring of mechanical brake feedback
present. throughout the complete cycle. This helps protect
the mechanical brake, especially if more
2-23 Activate Brake Delay frequency converters are connected to the same
Range: Function: shaft.
0 s* [0 - Enter the brake delay time of the coast after ramp- • No ramp-up until feedback confirms mechanical
5 s] down time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full brake is open.
holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake
has locked the load before the motor enters coast • Improved load control at stop. If the value of
parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay is too small,
mode. See Mechanical Brake Control section in the
W22 is activated and the torque is not allowed to
Design Guide.
ramp down.
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical
brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and • The transition when motor takes over the load
from the brake can be configured. 2-28 Gain
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
Boost Factor can be increased to minimise the
Setting of brake delay parameters does not impact movement. To achieve smooth transition, change
the torque. The frequency converter does not the setting from the speed control to the position
register that mechanical brake is holding the load. control during the change-over.
After setting parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay,
• Set 2-28 Gain Boost Factor to 0 to enable
the torque drops to zero after a few minutes. The Position Control during 2-02 DC Braking
Time. This enables parameters 2-30 to
2-33, which are PID parameters for the
Position Control.

130BA642.12
Motor
Speed Torque Ramp Brake Release Ramp 1 Up Ramp 1 Down Stop Delay Activate Brake Torque Ramp
Up Time Time P. 3-41 P. 3-42 P. 2-24 Delay Down Time
p. 2-27 p. 2-25 P. 2-23 p. 2-29
3 3 Torque Ref. p. 2-26
W22 A22 A22

Active Active Active W22
Torque
Active
Ref.
Brake
Relay
High Contact no.1
E.g. DI32 [70] Mech. Brake Feedback
Mech Brake Low
Feedback
High
Contact no.2
Low OPTIONAL
E.g. DI33 [71] Mech. Brake Feedback
Open
Mech Brake
Position
Closed
Gain Boost. p. 2-28

Gain Boost or
Postion Control
Illustration 3.20 Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake control. This brake control is available in Flux with motor
feedback only, available for asynchronous and non-salient PM motors.
Parameters 2-26 to 2-33 are only available for the hoist 2-28 Gain Boost Factor
mechanical brake control (FLUX with motor feedback). Range: Function:
1* [0 - Only active in Flux closed loop. The function ensures
2-26 Torque Ref 4] a smooth transition from torque control mode to
Range: Function: speed control mode when the motor takes over the
0 [ -300 - The value defines the torque applied against the load from the brake.
%* 300 %] closed mechanical brake, before release. Increase to minimise the movement. Activate the
The torque/load on a crane is positive and Advanced Mechanical Brake (parameter group 2-3*
between 10% and 160%. To obtain the best Adv. Mech Brake) by setting parameter 2-28 Gain
starting point, set parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to Boost Factor to 0.
approximately 70%.
The torque/load on a lift can be both positive 2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time
and negative and between -160% and 160% To Range: Function:
obtain the best starting point, set 0 s* [0 - 5 s] Torque Ramp Down Time.
parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to 0%.
The higher the torque error is Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 can be set up for very smooth
(parameter 2-26 Torque Ref vs. actual torque), the transition change from speed control to position control
more movement during load takeover. during 2-25 Brake Release Time - the time when the load is
transferred from the mechanical brake to the frequency
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time converter. Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 are activated when 2-28
Range: Function: Gain Boost Factor is set to 0. See Illustration 3.20 for more
0.2 s* [0 - 5 s] The value defines the duration of the torque information.
ramp in clockwise direction.
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain
Range: Function:
0.0000* [0.0000 - 1.0000]

2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.0150* [0.0000 - 1.0000]
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time

Range:
200.0 ms* [1.0 - 20000.0 ms]
Function:
3 3
2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time
Range: Function:
10.0 ms* [0.1 - 100.0 ms]

3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
Parameters for reference handling, definition of limitations,
[60] °C
and configuration of the reaction of the frequency
[70] mbar
converter to changes.
[71] bar
3 3 3.5.1 3-0* Reference Limits [72]

[73]
Pa
kPa
[74] m WG
3-00 Reference Range
[80] kW
Option: Function: [120] GPM
Select the range of the reference signal and the [121] gal/s
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [122] gal/min
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [123] gal/h
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[124] CFM
control or [3] Process is selected in
[125] ft³/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[126] ft³/min
[0] Min - Select the range of the reference signal and the [127] ft³/h
Max feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [130] lb/s
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [131] lb/min
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[132] lb/h
control or [3] Process is selected in
[140] ft/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[141] ft/min
[1] -Max - For both positive and negative values (both [145] ft
+Max directions, relative to parameter 4-10 Motor Speed [150] lb ft
Direction). [160] °F
[170] psi
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit [171] lb/in²
Option: Function: [172] in WG
Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control [173] ft WG
references and feedbacks. Parameter 1-00 Configu- [180] HP
ration Mode must be either [3] Process or [8]
Extended PID Control. 3-02 Minimum Reference
[0] None Range: Function:

[1] % Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum reference. The
[2] RPM related* par. 3-03 minimum reference is the lowest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all
[3] Hz
backUnit] references.
[4] Nm
Minimum reference is active only
[5] PPM
when parameter 3-00 Reference Range
[10] 1/min
is set to [0] Min.- Max.
[12] Pulse/s
The minimum reference unit matches:
[20] l/s
[21] l/min • The configuration of
parameter 1-00 Configuration
[22] l/h
Mode: for [1] Speed closed
[23] m³/s
loop, RPM; for [2] Torque,
[24] m³/min
Nm.
[25] m³/h
[30] kg/s • The unit selected in
parameter 3-01 Reference/
[31] kg/min
Feedback Unit.
[32] kg/h
[33] t/min
[34] t/h
[40] m/s
[41] m/min
[45] m

3-03 Maximum Reference
130BA149.10
12 (+24V)
Range: Function:
Preset 76543210
Size [ par. 3-02 - Enter the maximum reference. The
10101010 29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]
related* 999999.999 maximum reference is the highest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all 11001100 32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]
backUnit] references.
The maximum reference unit 11110000 33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]
3 3
matches:
• The choice of configuration

in parameter 1-00 Configu-
Illustration 3.21 Preset Reference
ration Mode: for [1] Speed
closed loop, RPM; for [2]
Torque, Nm.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0
• The unit selected in
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
parameter 3-00 Reference
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Range.
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
3-04 Reference Function
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Option: Function:
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
[0] Sum Sums both external and preset reference
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
sources.
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external reference
Preset source. Table 3.12 Preset Ref. Bit
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input. 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - par. The jog speed is a fixed output speed
3.5.2 3-1* References
related* 4-14 Hz] at which the frequency converter is
running, when the jog function is
Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2
activated.
[16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
3-10 Preset Reference 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value

Array [8] Range: Function:
Range: 0-7 0 %* [0 - Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
Range: Function: 100 %] added to or deducted from the actual reference
0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in for Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch
100 %] this parameter, using array programming. The up is selected via one of the digital inputs
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
Reference). If a RefMIN different from 0 added to the total reference. If Slow down is
(parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference) is selected via one of the digital inputs
programmed, the preset reference is calculated (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
as a percentage of the full reference range, i.e. Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
on the basis of the difference between RefMAX deducted from the total reference. Obtain
and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to extended functionality with the DigiPot function.
See parameter group 3-9* Digital Potentiometer.
RefMIN. When using preset references, select
Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.

3-13 Reference Site
130BA278.10
Z
Option: Function: 100
*Y/
Select which reference site to activate. X+X
[0] Linked to Use local reference when in Hand mode, or X

* Hand / remote reference when in Auto mode.
3 3 Auto
[1] Remote Use remote reference in both Hand mode and
Y
Auto mode.
-100 0 100 %
[2] Local Use local reference in both Hand mode and P 3-14
Auto mode.
Illustration 3.23 Actual Reference
NOTICE
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
converter starts with this setting again 3-15 Reference Resource 1
following a 'powerdown'. Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used
[3] Linked to Select this option to enable the FFACC factor in for the first reference signal.
H/A MCO parameter 32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward. Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
Enabling FFACC reduces jitter and makes the parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2, and
transmission from the motion controller to the parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3
control card of the frequency converter faster. define up to 3 different reference
This leads to faster response times for dynamic signals. The sum of these reference
applications and position control. For more signals defines the actual reference.
information about FFACC, see Programmable
[0] No function
Motion Controller MCO 305 Operating
[1] Analog Input 53
Instructions.
[2] Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input
3-14 Preset Relative Reference
29
Range: Function:
[8] Frequency input
0 %* [-100 - The actual reference, X, is increased or 33
100 %] decreased with the percentage Y, set in
[11] Local bus
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference. This
reference
results in the actual reference Z. Actual
[20] Digital pot.meter
reference (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in
[21] Analog input (General Purpose I/O Option Module)
3-15 Reference 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source,
X30/11
3-17 Reference 3 Source, and 8-02 Control Source.
[22] Analog input (General Purpose I/O Option Module)
X30/12
130BA059.12
Y
Relative Z Resulting [29] Analog Input
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference X48/2
Illustration 3.22 Preset Relative Reference 3-16 Reference Resource 2

Option: Function:
for the second reference signal.
Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2,
and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource
3 define up to 3 different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
[1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input 29

3-16 Reference Resource 2 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

130BA059.12
Y
Relative Z Resulting
[11] Local bus reference actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30/11
Illustration 3.24 Resulting Actual 3 3
Reference
[22] Analog input
X30/12
[29] Analog Input X48/2
[0] * No function
3-17 Reference Resource 3 [1] Analog Input 53
Option: Function: [2] Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input
29
for the third reference signal.
Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1, [8] Frequency input
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2, 33
and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource [11] Local bus
3 define up to 3 different reference reference
signals. The sum of these reference [20] Digital pot.meter
signals defines the actual reference. [21] Analog input
X30/11
[0] No function
[22] Analog input
[1] Analog Input 53
X30/12
[2] Analog Input 54
[29] Analog Input
X48/2
[11] Local bus reference 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
[20] Digital pot.meter Range: Function:
[21] Analog input Size [0 - Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which
X30/11 related* par. 4-13 is a fixed output speed. The frequency
[22] Analog input RPM] converter runs at this speed when the jog
X30/12 function is activated. The maximum limit is
[29] Analog Input X48/2 defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM].
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
Option: Function:
NOTICE 3.5.3 Ramps
This parameter cannot be 3-4* Ramp 1
adjusted while the motor is
running. For each of 4 ramps (parameter groups 3-4* Ramp 1, 3-5*
Ramp 2, 3-6* Ramp 3 and 3-7* Ramp 4) configure the ramp
Select a variable value to be added to parameters: ramp type, ramping times (duration of
the fixed value (defined in acceleration and deceleration) and level of jerk compen-
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference). sation for S-ramps.
The sum of the fixed and variable
values (labelled Y in Illustration 3.24) is
Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to
multiplied with the actual reference
Illustration 3.25 and Illustration 3.26.
(labelled X in Illustration 3.24). This
product is then added to the actual
reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the
resulting actual reference.

NOTICE
130BA872.10
RPM
P 4-13
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
High-limit during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
Reference prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
ns
P 4-11 result in a longer start or stop time.
3 3
Low limit
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
P 3-*1 P 3-*2 Time
Ramp (X)Up Ramp (X) Down
Time (Acc) Time (Dec)
tacc tdec
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
Illustration 3.25 Linear Ramping Times Range: Function:

Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the synchronous motor
If S-ramps are selected, then set the level of non-linear jerk s] speed nS. Select a ramp-up time which
compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining prevents the output current from exceeding
the proportion of ramp-up and ramp-down times where the current limit in parameter 4-18 Current
acceleration and deceleration are variable (i.e. increasing or Limit during ramping. The value 0.00
decreasing). The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
settings are defined as a percentage of the actual ramp ramp-down time in parameter 3-42 Ramp 1
time. Ramp Down Time.
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 41 =
ref RPM
130BA168.10
Speed
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
Range: Function:
Ramp (X) S-Ramp
Ramp (X) S-Ramp
Ratio at Dec.End Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the
Ratio at Accel.End
Ramp (X) related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the synchronous
Ramp (X) Linear S-Ramp motor speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-
S-Ramp Ratio at
Jerk compensated down time such that no overvoltage arises
Ratio at Dec.End
Accel.End in the inverter due to regenerative
operation of the motor, and such that the
Ramp (X) Ramp (X)
Up Time Down Time
generated current does not exceed the
Illustration 3.26 Linear Ramping Times current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s
in speed mode. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time.
3-40 Ramp 1 Type
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 42 =
Option: Function: ref RPM
Select the ramp type, depending on

3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
requirements for acceleration/deceleration.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration Range: Function:
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the %] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
application. which the acceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
[0] * Linear
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
lower the torque jerks occurring in the
Const Jerk
application.
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
Const parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Time parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
Range: Function:
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
%] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in
%] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
where the deceleration torque increases. The tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 51 =
ref RPM
3 3
Range: Function:
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor
Range: Function:
s] speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down time
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
such that no overvoltage arises in the
%] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
frequency converter due to regenerative
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
operation of the motor, and such that the
generated current does not exceed the
current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s
in speed mode. See ramp-up time in
3.5.4 3-5* Ramp 2 parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 52 =
ref RPM
To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*
Ramp 1. 3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
3-50 Ramp 2 Type Range: Function:
Option: Function: 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Select the ramp type, depending on %] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A which the acceleration torque increases. The
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during larger the percentage value, the greater the
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the lower the torque jerks in the application.
application.
[0] * Linear
Range: Function:
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
Const Jerk 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
%] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
Const parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
Time parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
NOTICE lower the torque jerks in the application.
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference 3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
Range: Function:
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time. 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching %] time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
initiators may be necessary. where the deceleration torque increases The
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration 3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed Range: Function:
s] ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the
output current does not exceed the current
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01

3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the mode. See ramp-up time in
lower the torque jerks in the application. parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 62 =
3 3 3.5.5 3-6* Ramp 3

ref RPM

Configure ramp parameters, see 3-4* Ramp 1. Range: Function:
3-60 Ramp 3 Type
%] (parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
Option: Function:
which the acceleration torque increases. The
Select the ramp type, depending on larger the percentage value, the greater the
requirements for acceleration and deceleration. jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration lower the torque jerks in the application.
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the 3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
application.
Range: Function:
[0] * Linear 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk. %] (parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
Const Jerk which the acceleration torque decreases. The
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in larger the percentage value, the greater the
Const parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time and jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Time parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time. lower the torque jerks in the application.
NOTICE 3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference Range: Function:
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may %] time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time)
result in a longer start or stop time. where the deceleration torque increases. The
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching larger the percentage value, the greater the
initiators may be necessary. jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
Range: Function: 3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration Range: Function:
related* 3600 s] time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the %] decel time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down
output current does not exceed the current Time) where the deceleration torque decreases.
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during The larger the percentage value, the greater
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down time lower the torque jerks in the application.
in parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time

3.5.6 3-7* Ramp 4
Range: Function: Configure ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the Ramp 1.
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down 3-70 Ramp 4 Type
time such that no overvoltage arises in the Option: Function:
inverter due to regenerative operation of Select the ramp type, depending on
the motor, and such that the generated requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
current does not exceed the current limit A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed

3-70 Ramp 4 Type 3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

acceleration, compensating for jerk in the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
application. lower the torque jerks in the application.
[0] * Linear
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
Range: Function:
3 3
Const Jerk
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Const parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time and %] (parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
Time parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. which the acceleration torque decreases. The
NOTICE jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time. Range: Function:
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
initiators may be necessary. %] time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time
Range: Function: lower the torque jerks in the application.
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed 3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
s] ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the
Range: Function:
output current does not exceed the current
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01
s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 71 = lower the torque jerks in the application.
ref RPM

3.5.7 3-8* Other Ramps
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the
3-80 Jog Ramp Time
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down Range: Function:
time such that no overvoltage arises in the Size [0.01 Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/
inverter due to regenerative operation of related* - 3600 deceleration time between 0 RPM and the
the motor, and such that the generated s] rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that the
current does not exceed the current limit resultant output current required for the
set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The given jog ramp time does not exceed the
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
mode. See ramp-up time in The jog ramp time starts upon activation of a
parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time. jog signal via the LCP, a selected digital input,
tdec s x ns RPM or the serial communication port. When jog
Par . 3 − 72 =
ref RPM state is disabled then the normal ramping
times are valid.
Range: Function:
%] (parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The

3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type
130BA070.10
RPM
Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
P 4-13 RPM
high limit requirements for acceleration and
P 1-25 deceleration. A linear ramp gives constant
3 3 Motor speed
P 3-19
acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp
gives non-linear acceleration, compen-
Jog speed
sating for jerk in the application.
P 4-11 RPM
low limit [0] * Linear
t jog t jog Time
[1] S-ramp Const
P 3-80 P 3-80
Ramp up Ramp down Jerk
(acc) (dec) [2] S-ramp Const
Time
Illustration 3.27 Jog Ramp Time
3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Range: Function:
tjog s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 80 =
Δ jog speed par . 3 − 19 RPM 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time %] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the quick–stop ramp-down time, i.e.
related* 3600 s] the deceleration time from the
synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure
that no resultant over-voltage arises in the
3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
inverter due to regenerative operation of
the motor required to achieve the given Range: Function:
ramp-down time. Ensure also that the 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
generated current required to achieve the %] time (3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) where
given ramp-down time does not exceed the deceleration torque decreases. The larger
the current limit (set in the percentage value, the greater the jerk
parameter 4-18 Current Limit). Quick stop is compensation achieved, and thus the lower
activated by means of a signal on a the torque jerks in the application.
selected digital input, or via the serial
communication port.
3.5.8 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
130BA069.10
RPM
The digital potentiometer enables increase or decrease of
the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of the digital
P 4-13 RPM
inputs using the functions Increase, Decrease or Clear. To
high limit activate the function, at least one digital input must be set
Reference up to Increase or Decrease.
P 1-25
Motor speed
Speed
130BA158.11
P 4-11 RPM
low limit
Time P 3-95
P 3-81
Qramp Time (s)
Inc
Qstop
Illustration 3.29 Increase Actual Reference
Illustration 3.28 Quick Stop Ramp Time

Speed 3-95 Ramp Delay
130BA159.11
Range: Function:
P 3-95 Size [ 0 - Enter the delay required from activation of the
related* 0] digital potentiometer function until the
frequency converter starts to ramp the
3 3
Time (s)
reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
Dec
starts to ramp as soon as Increase/Decrease is
Inc activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp Time.
Illustration 3.30 Increase/Decrease Actual Reference
3-90 Step Size

Range: Function:
0.10 [0.01 - Enter the increment size required for
%* 200 %] Increase/Decrease, as a percentage of the
synchronous motor speed, ns. If Increase/
Decrease is activated, the resulting reference
is increased/decreased by the amount set in
this parameter.
3-91 Ramp Time

Range: Function:
1 [0 - Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment of
s* 3600 s] the reference from 0% to 100% of the specified
digital potentiometer function (Increase, Decrease
or Clear).
If Increase/Decrease is activated for longer than the
ramp delay period specified in
parameter 3-95 Ramp Delay, the actual reference is
ramped up/down according to this ramp time. The
ramp time is defined as the time used to adjust the
reference by the step size specified in
parameter 3-90 Step Size.
3-92 Power Restore

Option: Function:
[0] * Off Resets the digital potentiometer reference to 0% after
power-up.
[1] On Restores the most recent digital potentiometer

reference at power-up.
3-93 Maximum Limit

Range: Function:
100 %* [-200 - 200 Set the maximum permissible value for
%] the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the digital potentiometer is used for fine-
tuning of the resulting reference.
3-94 Minimum Limit

Range: Function:
-100 %* [-200 - 200 Set the minimum permissible value for
%] the resulting reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine-
tuning of the resulting reference.

3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Range: Function:
3.6.1 4-1* Motor Limits setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz].
Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
3 3 exceeded.
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:
A limit may generate a message in the display. A warning
always generates a message in the display or on the Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a related* 4-11 - speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
trip, upon which the frequency converter stops and 60000 be set to correspond to the
generates an alarm message. RPM] manufacturer’s maximum rated motor
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit must
4-10 Motor Speed Direction exceed the setting in
Option: Function: parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
NOTICE [RPM].

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Range: Function:
Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor speed
Select the motor speed direction(s) required. Use
related* 4-12 - in Hz. Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.
par. 4-19 Limit [Hz] can match the manufacturer's
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set
Hz] recommended maximum motor speed.
to [3] Process, parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
The motor speed high limit must exceed
Direction is set to [0] Clockwise as default. The
the value in 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction
[Hz]. The output frequency must not
does not limit options for setting
exceed 10% of the switching frequency
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
(14-01 Switching Frequency).
[0] Clockwise The reference is set to CW rotation. Reversing
input (default term 19) must be open. 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
[1] Counter The reference is set to CCW rotation. Reversing Range: Function:
clockwise input (default term 19) must be closed. If Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the
reversing is required with ‘Reverse’ input open, Application [Application torque on the shaft to
the motor direction can be changed by dependent* dependent] protect the mechanical
parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction installation.
[2] Both Allows the motor to rotate in both directions.
directions NOTICE
Changing parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode when
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Speed
Range: Function: open loop, parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. automatically readjusted.
related* 4-13 The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
RPM] correspond to the manufacturer’s
recommended minimum motor speed.
NOTICE
The Motor Speed Low Limit must not The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated
exceed the setting in torque, including torque spikes. This is not the torque
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit that is seen from the LCP or the Fieldbus as that is
[RPM]. filtered.
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode
Size [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. 100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the torque on the
related* par. 4-14 The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to shaft to protect the mechanical instal-
Hz] correspond to the minimum output lation.
frequency of the motor shaft. The Motor
Speed Low Limit must not exceed the

4-18 Current Limit 4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption

Size [ 1.0 - This is a true current limit function that Select an analog input for scaling the
related* 1000.0 %] continues in the oversynchronous range. settings in parameter 4-19 Max Output
However, due to field weakening the Frequency from 0% to 100% (or vice
motor torque at current limit will drop
accordingly when the voltage increase
versa). The signal levels corresponding
to 0% and 100% are defined in the
3 3
stops above the synchronised speed of analog input scaling, e.g. parameter
the motor. group 6-1* Analog Input 1. This
parameter is only active when
4-19 Max Output Frequency parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in
Range: Function: Torque Mode.
[0] * No function
Size [1 - NOTICE [2] Analog input 53
related* 590
This parameter cannot be adjusted [4] Analog input 53
Hz]
while the motor is running. inv
[6] Analog input 54
NOTICE [8] Analog input 54
Max. output frequency cannot exceed inv
10% of the inverter switching frequency [10] Analog input
(parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency). X30-11
[12] Analog input
Provides a final limit on the output frequency X30-11 inv
for improved safety in applications where [14] Analog input
accidental overspeeding is to be avoided. This X30-12
limit is final in all configurations (independent [16] Analog input
of the setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration X30-12 inv
Mode).
4-23 Brake Check Limit Factor Source
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source Select the input source for the function in parameter 2-15 Brake
Check. If several frequency converters are carrying out a brake
Option: Function:
check simultaneously, the resistance in the grid leads to a
Select an analog input for scaling the voltage drop on the mains or DC-link and a false brake check
settings in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit can occur. Use an external current sensor on every brake resistor.
Motor Mode and parameter 4-17 Torque If an application requires a 100% valid brake check, connect the
Limit Generator Mode from 0% to 100% sensor to an analog input.
(or inverse). The signal levels
Option: Function:
corresponding to 0% and 100% are
defined in the analog input scaling, e.g. [0] * DC-link voltage The frequency converter
parameter group 6-1* Analog Input 1. performs the brake check by
This parameter is only active when monitoring the DC-link
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in voltage. The frequency
Speed Open Loop or Speed Closed Loop. converter injects current in
the brake resistor which
[0] * No function
lowers the DC-link voltage.
[2] Analog in 53
[1] Analog Input 53 Select to use an external
[4] Analog in 53 inv
current sensor for brake
[6] Analog in 54
monitoring.
[8] Analog in 54 inv
[10] Analog in [2] Analog Input 54 Select to use an external
X30-11 current sensor for brake
[12] Analog in monitoring.
X30-11 inv
[14] Analog in
X30-12
[16] Analog in
X30-12 inv

4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor Loss Timeout. Warning/Alarm 61 Feedback Error is related
Enter the limit factor that parameter 2-15 Brake Check uses when
to the Motor Feedback Loss Function.
performing the brake check. The frequency converter uses the 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
limit factor depending on the selection in parameter 4-23 Brake
Range: Function:
Check Limit Factor Source:
300 RPM* [1 - 600 RPM] Select the max. allowed error in
3 3 [0] DC-link voltage - the frequency converter applies the factor to
the EEPROM data in the DC-link.
speed (output speed vs. feedback).
[1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog Input 54 - the brake check fails if
Speed
130BA221.10
the input current on the analog input is lower than the [rpm]
maximum input current multiplied by the limit factor. For
example, in the following configuration the brake check fails if
the input current is lower than 16 mA:
• A current transducer with a range of 4-20 mA is

connected to analogue input 53. ncalc
• parameter 4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor is set to 80%. nactual
Range: Function:
98 %* [0 - 100 %] P 4-31
3.6.2 4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring
The parameter group includes monitoring and handling of

P 4-32 Time
motor feedback devices, such as encoders, resolvers etc. [sec]
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function Illustration 3.31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
Option: Function:
This function is used to monitor
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
consistency in feedback signal, i.e. if the
feedback signal is available. Range: Function:
Select which reaction the frequency 0.05 s* [0 - 60 Set the timeout value allowing the speed
converter should take if a feedback fault s] error set in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback
is detected. The selected action is to take Speed Error to be exceeded before enabling
place when the feedback signal differs the function selected in parameter 4-30 Motor
from the output speed by the value set Feedback Loss Function.
in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed
Error for longer than the value set in 4-34 Tracking Error Function
parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Option: Function:
Timeout.
This function is used to monitor that the
[0] Disabled application follows the expected speed profile.
[1] Warning In closed loop the speed reference to the PID is
[2] * Trip compared to the encoder feedback (filtered). In
[3] Jog open loop the speed reference to the PID is
[4] Freeze Output compensated for slip and compared to the
frequency that is sent to the motor
[5] Max Speed
(16-13 Frequency).
[6] Switch to Open
The reaction is activated if the measured
Loop
difference is more than the value specified in
[7] Select Setup 1
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error for the time
[8] Select Setup 2
specified in parameter 4-36 Tracking Error
[9] Select Setup 3
Timeout.
[10] Select Setup 4
A tracking error in closed loop does not imply
[11] Stop & Trip that there is a problem with the feedback signal.
Warning 90 is active as soon as the value in A tracking error can be the result of torque limit
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error is exceeded, at too heavy loads.
regardless of the setting of parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback [0] Disable
[1] Warning

4-34 Tracking Error Function
130BA064.10
Imotor
Option: Function:
[2] Trip ILIM ON REF
(P 4-18)
[3] Trip after
stop IHIGH
Warning/Alarm 78 Tracking Error is related to the Tracking

(P 4-51)
3 3
Error Function. IN RANGE
4-35 Tracking Error

ILOW
Range: Function: (P 4-50)
10 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed error
nmotor [RPM]
RPM* RPM] between the motor speed and the output
nMIN nLOW REF nHIGH nMAX
of the ramp when not ramping. In open
(P 4-11) (P 4-52) (P 4-53) (P 4-13)
loop the motor speed is estimated and in
Illustration 3.32 Adjustable Warnings
closed loop it is the feedback from
encoder/resolver.
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout 4-50 Warning Current Low

1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period during which an error 0 A* [ 0 - par. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current
greater than the value set in 4-51 A] falls below this limit, the display reads Current
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is permissible. Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to
produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping 302 only) and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.
Range: Function:
100 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed
4-51 Warning Current High
RPM* RPM] error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when ramping. In Range: Function:
open loop the motor speed is estimated Size [ par. Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
and in closed loop the encoder measures related* 4-50 - par. current exceeds this limit, the display
the speed. 16-37 A] reads Current High. The signal outputs
can be programmed to produce a status
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
Range: Function: and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.
1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period during which an error
greater than the value set in
4-52 Warning Speed Low
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping while
ramping is permissible. Range: Function:
0 RPM* [ 0 - par. Enter the nLOW value. When the motor
4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout 4-53 RPM] speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
Range: Function: Speed Low. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status signal on
5 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period after ramping where
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only) and on relay
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping and
output 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
parameter 4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
are still active.
4-53 Warning Speed High
Range: Function:
3.6.3 4-5* Adjustable Warnings Size [ par. 4-52 Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
related* - 60000 speed exceeds this value, the display
Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current, RPM] reads SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs
speed, reference and feedback. can be programmed to produce a
Warnings are shown on the LCP and can be programmed status signal on terminals 27 or 29 and
to be outputs or to be read out via serial bus in the on relay outputs 01 or 02.
Extended Status Word.

4-54 Warning Reference Low 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

-999999.999* [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower reference limit. Displays alarm 30, 31 or 32 in the event of a
par. 4-55] When the actual reference falls missing motor phase. It is strongly
below this limit, the display recommended to enable this function to avoid
3 3 indicates RefLOW. The signal

outputs can be programmed to
[0] Disabled
motor damage.
The frequency converter does not issue a

produce a status signal on
missing motor phase alarm. Not recommended
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
due to risk of motor damage.
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC
302 only). [1] Trip 100 For a quick detection time and alarm in the
ms event of a missing motor phase.
4-55 Warning Reference High [2] Trip 1000
Range: Function: ms
999999.999* [ par. 4-54 - Enter the upper reference limit. [3] Trip 100ms Special option relevant for crane applications
999999.999] When the actual reference exceeds 3ph detec. when lowering a small load that lets the
this limit, the display reads Ref frequency converter avoid false detections of
High. The signal outputs can be missing motor phase.
programmed to produce a status This option is a reduced version of option [1]
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC Trip 100 ms.
302 only) and on relay output 01 1-phase missing is handled as in option [1] Trip
or 02 (FC 302 only). 100 ms. 3-phase detection is reduced compared
to option [1] Trip 100 ms.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low The 3-phase detection is only working at start-
up and in the low speed range where a
Range: Function:
significant current is running, avoiding false trips
-999999.999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower feedback
during small motor current.
ReferenceFeed- par. 4-57 limit. When the feedback
Only available for FC 302 Flux closed loop.
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- falls below this limit, the
backUnit] display reads FeedbLow. [5] Motor The frequency converter detects automatically
The signal outputs can be Check when the motor is disconnected and resumes
programmed to produce operation once the motor is connected again.
a status signal on Valid for FC 302 only.
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302
only) and on relay output
3.6.4 4-6* Speed Bypass
01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies

4-57 Warning Feedback High
or speeds, due to resonance problems in the system. A
Range: Function: maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can be avoided.
999999.999 [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper feedback
ReferenceFeed- 999999.999 limit. When the feedback 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- exceeds this limit, the Array [4]
backUnit] display reads Feedb High. Range: Function:
The signal outputs can be Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
programmed to produce 4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to
a status signal on resonance problems in the system.
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 Enter the lower limits of the speeds
only) and on relay output to be avoided.
01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

Option: Function:
NOTICE

4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
3 3
to be avoided.
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the
speeds to be avoided.
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out Digital input function Select Terminal
No operation [0] All *term 32, 33
3.7.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] All *term 27
Parameters for configuring the input and output using Coast and reset inverse [3] All
NPN and PNP.
3 3 5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Quick stop inverse
DC brake inverse
[4]
[5]
All
All
Stop inverse [6] All
Option: Function:
Start [8] All *term 18
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
Latched start [9] All
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN
Reversing [10] All *term 19
systems.
Start reversing [11] All
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (↕). PNP systems Enable start forward [12] All
are pulled down to GND.
Enable start reverse [13] All
[1] NPN Action on negative directional pulses (↕). NPN Jog [14] All *term 29
systems are pulled up to +24 V, internally in the Preset reference on [15] All
frequency converter. Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
NOTICE Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
Once this parameter has been changed, it must be Freeze reference [19] All
activated by performing a power cycle. Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Option: Function:
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
NOTICE Precise stop inverse [26] 18, 19
This parameter cannot be adjusted while Precises start, stop [27] 18, 19
the unit is running. Catch up [28] All
Slow down [29] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. Counter input [30] 29, 33
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. Pulse input edge trigged [31] 29, 33
Pulse input time based [32] 29, 33
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Option: Function: Ramp bit 1 [35] All
Latched precise start [40] 18, 19
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
Latched precise stop [41] 18, 19
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output. inverse
External interlock [51]
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
DigiPot increase [55] All
DigiPot decrease [56] All
3.7.2 5-1* Digital Inputs DigiPot clear [57] All
Digipot hoist [58] All
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
the following functions:
Reset Counter A [62] All
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
group 2. Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset counter B [65] All
Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,
Quick stop, DC braking, Stop and the [Off] key. Mech. brake feedb. [70] All
Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog Mech. brake feedb. inv. [71] All
and Freeze output. PID error inv. [72] All
PID reset I-part [73] All
Table 3.13 Function Groups PID enable [74] All
MCO specific [75]

Digital input function Select Terminal NOTICE

PTC card 1 [80] All
When the frequency converter is at the
Profidrive OFF2 [91]
torque limit and has received a stop
Profidrive OFF3 [92] command, it may not stop by itself. To
Start edge triggered [98] ensure that the frequency converter
Safe option reset [100] Resets the safety
option. Available only
stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Torque limit and stop and connect this
3 3
when the safety option digital output to a digital input that is
is mounted. configured as coast.
Table 3.14 Digital Input Function [8] Start (Default Digital input 18): Select start for a
start/stop command. Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’
FC 300 standard terminals are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33. = stop.
MCB 101 terminals are X30/2, X30/3 and X30/4. [9] Latched The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min.
Terminal 29 functions as an output only in FC 302. start 2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is
activated or a reset command (via DI) is given.
Functions dedicated to only 1 digital input are stated in
[10] Reversing (Default Digital input 19). Change the direction
the associated parameter.
of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic ‘1’ to
reverse. The reversing signal only changes the
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: direction of rotation. It does not activate the
start function. Select both directions in
[0] No No reaction to signals transmitted to the parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The
operation terminal. function is not active in process closed loop.
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ALARM. [11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
Not all alarms can be reset. reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
[2] Coast (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, the same time.
inverse inverted input (NC). The frequency converter [12] Enable Disengages the counterclockwise movement
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic ‘0’ ⇒ start and allows for the clockwise direction.
coasting stop. forward
[3] Coast and Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). [13] Enable Disengages the clockwise movement and
reset Leaves motor in free mode and resets start allows for the counterclockwise direction.
inverse frequency converter. Logic ‘0’ ⇒ coasting stop reverse
and reset. [14] Jog (Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog
[4] Quick stop Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in speed. See parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
inverse accordance with quick stop ramp time set in [15] Preset Shifts between external reference and preset
parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When reference reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset
motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic ‘0’ on has been selected in parameter 3-04 Reference
⇒ Quick-stop. Function. Logic '0' = external reference active;
[5] DC brake Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops logic '1' = one of the 8 preset references is
inverse motor by energising it with a DC current for a active.
certain time period. See parameter 2-01 DC [16] Preset ref Preset ref. bit 0, 1, and 2 enables a choice
Brake Current to parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In bit 0 between 1 of the 8 preset references according
Speed [RPM]. The function is only active when to Table 3.15.
the value in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is [17] Preset ref Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
different from 0. Logic ’0’ ⇒ DC braking. bit 1
[6] Stop Stop inverted function. Generates a stop [18] Preset ref Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
inverse function when the selected terminal goes from bit 2
logical level ‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is performed
according to the selected ramp time
(parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time,
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time,
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time).

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 [24] Set-up (Default Digital input 32): Same as [23] Set-up
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 select bit select bit 0.
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0 [26] Precise Sends an inverted stop signal when the precise
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 stop inv. stop function is activated in
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
3 3 Preset ref. 4
Preset ref. 5
1
1
0
0
0
1 Precise stop inverse function is available for
terminals 18 or 19.
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
[27] Precise Use when [0] Precise ramp stop is selected in
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
start, stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
Table 3.15 Preset Ref. Bit Precise start, stop is available for terminals 18
and 19.
[19] Freeze Freezes the actual reference, which is now the Precise start makes sure that the angle that the
ref point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed rotor turns from standing still to reference is the
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the same for each start (for same ramp time, same
speed change always follows ramp 2 set-point). This is the equivalent to the precise
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and stop where the angle that the rotor turns from
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the reference to standing still is the same for each
range 0 - parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. stop.
[20] Freeze Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is When using parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function
output now the point of enable/condition for Speed up option [1] or [2]:
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is The frequency converter needs a Precise stop
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 signal before the value of parameter 1-84 Precise
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and Stop Counter Value is reached. If this is not
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the supplied, the frequency converter does not stop
range 0 - parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency. when the value in parameter 1-84 Precise Stop
NOTICE Counter Value is reached.
Precise start, stop must be triggered by a Digital
When Freeze output is active, the frequency
input and is available for terminals 18 and 19.
converter cannot be stopped via a low [8]
[28] Catch up Increases reference value by percentage
Start signal. Stop the frequency converter
(relative) set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow
via a terminal programmed for [2] Coasting
Down Value.
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inverse.
[29] Slow Reduces reference value by percentage (relative)
[21] Speed Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control down set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
up of the up/down speed is desired (motor potenti- [30] Counter Precise stop function in parameter 1-83 Precise
ometer). Activate this function by selecting either input Stop Function acts as counter stop or speed
[19] Freeze ref or [20] Freeze output. When Speed compensated counter stop with or without
up/down is activated for less than 400 ms, the reset. The counter value must be set in
resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
If Speed up/down is activated for more than 400
[31] Pulse Counts the number of pulse flanks per sample
ms, the resulting reference follows the setting in
edge time. This gives a higher resolution at high
ramping up/down parameter 3-x1/3-x2.
triggered frequencies, but is not as precise at lower
frequencies. Use this pulse principle for
Shut down Catch up
encoders with very low resolution (e.g. 30 ppr).
Unchanged speed 0 0
130BB463.10
Pulse
Reduced by %-value 1 0
Sample time
Increased by %-value 0 1
Reduced by %-value 1 1
Illustration 3.33 Pulse Flanks per Sample
Table 3.16 Shut Down/Catch Up Time
[22] Speed Same as [21] Speed up.

down
[32] Pulse Measures the duration between pulse flanks.
[23] Set-up Select Set-up select bit 0 or select Set-up select
time- This gives a higher resolution at lower
select bit bit 1 to select 1 of the 4 set-ups. Set
based frequencies, but is not as precise at higher
0 parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
frequencies. This principle has a cut-off
frequency, which makes it unsuited for encoders

with very low resolutions (e.g. 30 ppr) at low [57] DigiPot Clears the Digital Potentiometer reference
speeds. Clear described in parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.
Meter.
Speed [rpm] Speed [rpm]
130BB462.10
[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment
counting in the SLC counter.
a Time[sec] b Time[sec]
3 3
[61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement
a: Very low encoder b: Standard encoder counting in the SLC counter.
resolution resolution [62] Reset Input for reset of counter A.
Counter A
Pulse
[63] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment
130BB464.10
Timer
Sample time
Time counter
Time Start Read Timer: Read Timer:
20 timer tides 20 timer tides [64] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement
Illustration 3.34 Duration Between Pulse [65] Reset Input for reset of counter B.
Flanks Counter B
[70] Mech. Brake feedback for hoisting applications: Set
Brake parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle to [3]
[34] Ramp bit Enables a choice between 1 of the 4 ramps Feedback Flux w/ motor feedback; set
0 available, according to Table 3.17. parameter 1-72 Start Function to [6] Hoist
[35] Ramp bit Same as Ramp bit 0. mech brake Ref.
1 [71] Mech. Inverted brake feedback for hoisting
Brake applications.
Preset ramp bit 1 0 Feedback
Ramp 1 0 0 inv.
Ramp 2 0 1 [72] PID error When enabled, it inverts the resulting error
Ramp 3 1 0 inverse from the process PID controller. Available
Ramp 4 1 1 only if "Configuration Mode" is set to "Surface
Winder", "Extended PID Speed OL" or
Table 3.17 Preset Ramp Bit "Extended PID Speed CL".
[73] PID reset I- When enabled, resets the I-part of the
[40] Latched A Latched Precise Start only requires a pulse
part Process PID controller. Equivalent to
Precise of 3 ms on Terminals 18 or 19.
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset.
Start When using for 1-83 Precise Stop Function [1]
Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
Cnt stop with reset or [2] Cnt stop w/o reset:
to "Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed
When the reference is reached, the frequency
OL" or "Extended PID Speed CL".
converter internally enables the Precise Stop
[74] PID enable When enabled, enables the extended process
signal. This means that the frequency
PID controller. Equivalent to
converter does the Precise Stop when the
parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.
counter value of parameter 1-84 Precise Stop
Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
Counter Value is reached.
"Extended PID Speed OL" or "Extended PID
[41] Latched Sends a latched stop signal when the Precise
Speed CL".
Precise Stop function is activated in
[80] PTC Card 1 All Digital inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card
Stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. The
1. However, only one Digital input must be
inverse Latched Precise Stop inverse function is
set to this choice.
available for terminals 18 or 19.
[91] Profidrive The functionality is the same as the
[51] External This function makes it possible to give an
OFF2 corresponding control word bit of the
interlock external fault to the frequency converter. This
Profibus/Profinet option.
fault is treated in the same way as an
[92] Profidrive The functionality is the same as the
internally generated alarm.
OFF3 corresponding control word bit of the
[55] DigiPot Increase signal to the Digital Potentiometer
Profibus/Profinet option.
Increase function described in parameter group 3-9*
[98] Start edge Edge triggered start command. Keeps the
Digital Pot. Meter.
triggered start command alive. It can be used for a
[56] DigiPot Decrease signal to the Digital Potentiometer
start push button.
Decrease function described in parameter group 3-9*
[100] Safe Option Resets the safety option. Available only when
Digital Pot. Meter.
Reset the safety option is mounted.

5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

[8] * Start Functions are described under parameter group 5-1* [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
Digital Inputs. MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
3 3 Option: Function:
[10] * Reversing Functions are described under parameter group

5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
5-1* Digital Inputs. Use this parameter to configure the safe stop functionality. A
warning message makes the frequency converter coast the motor
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message makes the
Option: Function: frequency converter coast the motor and requires a manual
[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described under parameter restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing RESET on the
group 5-1* Digital Inputs. LCP). When the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card is mounted, the
PTC options should be configured to get the full benefit from
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input the alarm handling.
Select the function from the available digital input [1] Safe Stop Alarm Coasts frequency converter when
range and the additional options [60], [61], [63] and safe stop is activated. Manual reset
[64]. Counters are used in Smart Logic Control from LCP, digital input or fieldbus.
functions. This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
[3] Safe Stop Coasts frequency converter when
[14] * Jog Functions are described under parameter group 5-1*
Warning safe stop is activated (T-37 off).
Digital Inputs.
When safe stop circuit is reestab-
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input lished, the frequency converter will
continue without manual reset.
Option: Function:
Select the function from the available digital [4] PTC 1 Alarm Coasts frequency converter when
input range. Safe Torque Off is activated. Manual
No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital Inputs. reset from LCP, digital input or
fieldbus.
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input
[5] PTC 1 Warning Coasts frequency converter when
Option: Function: Safe Torque Off is activated (T-37
Select the function from the available digital off). When Safe Torque Off circuit is
input range and the additional options [60], reestablished, the frequency
[61], [63] and [64]. Counters are used in converter continues without manual
Smart Logic Control functions. reset, unless a Digital input set to
[0] * No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital [80] PTC Card 1 is still enabled.
Inputs.
[6] PTC 1 & Relay A This choice is used when the PTC
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input option is gated together with a
stop button through a Safety relay
Option: Function:
to T-37. Coasts frequency converter
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
when safe stop is activated. Manual
MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
reset from LCP, digital input or
fieldbus.
[7] PTC 1 & Relay W This option is used when the PTC
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input option is gated together with a
Option: Function: stop button through a Safety relay
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module to T-37. Coasts frequency converter
MCB 101 is installed in the frequency when Safe Torque Off is activated
converter. Functions are described under (T-37 off). When safe stop circuit is
5-1* Digital Inputs. reestablished, the frequency
converter continues without manual
reset, unless a Digital input set to
[80] PTC Card 1 is (still) enabled.

5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop 5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input

Use this parameter to configure the safe stop functionality. A Option: Function:
warning message makes the frequency converter coast the motor [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message makes the MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
frequency converter coast the motor and requires a manual converter. Functions are described under
restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing RESET on the
LCP). When the MCB 112 PTC Thermistor Card is mounted, the
3 3
PTC options should be configured to get the full benefit from 5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input
the alarm handling. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[8] PTC 1 & Relay This option makes it possible to use MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
A/W a combination of Alarm and converter. Functions are described under
Warning. parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[9] PTC 1 & Relay This option makes it possible to use 5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input
W/A a combination of Alarm and Option: Function:
Warning.
NOTICE converter. Functions are described under
Options [4]-[9] are only available when the MCB 112 PTC parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Thermistor Card is connected.
5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input
NOTICE Option: Function:

When Auto Reset/Warning is selected, the frequency
converter opens up for automatic restart.
Function Num PTC Relay 5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input

ber
Option: Function:
No Function [0] - -
Safe Stop Alarm [1]* - Safe Stop [A68]
Safe Stop Warning [3] - Safe Stop [W68]
PTC 1 Alarm [4] PTC 1 Safe Stop -
[A71] 5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input
PTC 1 Warning [5] PTC 1 Safe Stop - Option: Function:
[W71]
PTC 1 & Relay A [6] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [A68] MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
[A71] converter. Functions are described under
PTC 1 & Relay W [7] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [W68] parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[W71]
PTC 1 & Relay A/W [8] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [W68] 5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input
[A71] Option: Function:
PTC 1 & Relay W/A [9] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [A68] [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[W71] MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
Table 3.18 Overview of Functions, Alarms and Warnings
W means warning and A means alarm. For further information, see
Alarms and Warnings in the Troubleshooting section in the Design
Guide or the Operating Instructions.
A dangerous failure related to Safe Torque Off issues

Alarm: Dangerous Failure [A72].
Refer to Table 5.1.

3.7.3 5-3* Digital Outputs parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals [16] Below speed, Output speed is lower than the setting in
27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in low parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function [17] Above speed, Output speed is higher than the setting
for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. high in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
3 3 [18] Out of Feedback is outside the range set in
NOTICE feedback range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low

and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is High.
running. [19] Below feedback Feedback is below the limit set in
low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay [20] Above Feedback is above the limit set in
outputs. feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[1] Control ready The control card is ready, for example: [21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
Feedback from a frequency converter warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
where the control is supplied by an motor, the frequency converter, the brake
external 24 V (MCB 107) and the main resistor, or the thermistor.
power to the unit is not detected. [22] Ready, no Frequency converter is ready for
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for thermal operation and there is no overtem-
operation and applies a supply signal on warning perature warning.
the control board. [23] Remote, ready, Frequency converter is ready for
[3] Drive ready/ The frequency converter is ready for no thermal operation and is in [Auto On] mode.
remote control operation and is in [Auto On] mode. warning There is no overtemperature warning.
[4] Enable/no Ready for operation. No start or stop [24] Ready, no over/ Frequency converter is ready for
warning command has been given (start/disable). undervoltage operation and the mains voltage is within
No warnings are active. the specified voltage range (see General
[5] VLT running Motor is running and shaft torque is Specifications section in the Design Guide).
present. [25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
[6] Running/no Output speed is higher than the speed clockwise when logic=0 and counter-
warning set in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for clockwise when logic=1. The output
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is changes as soon as the reversing signal is
running and there are no warnings. applied.
[7] Run in Motor is running within the programmed [26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) via
range/no current and speed ranges set in the serial communication port.
warning parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to [27] Torque limit Use in performing a coasting stop and in
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. There and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency
are no warnings. converter has received a stop signal and
[8] Run on Motor runs at reference speed. No is at the torque limit, the signal is Logic
reference/no warnings. ‘0’.
warning [28] Brake, no brake Brake is active and there are no warnings.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are warning
no warnings. [29] Brake ready, no Brake is ready for operation and there are
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the fault no faults.
warning output. [30] Brake fault Output is Logic ‘1’ when the brake IGBT
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in (IGBT) is short-circuited. Use this function to
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode protect the frequency converter if there is
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator a fault on the brake modules. Use the
Mode has been exceeded. output/relay to cut out the main voltage
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range from the frequency converter.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [31] Relay 123 Relay is activated when Control Word [0]
[13] Below current, Motor current is lower than set in is selected in parameter group 8-**
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. Communications and Options.
[14] Above current, Motor current is higher than set in [32] Mechanical Enables control of an external mechanical
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. brake control brake, see description in the section
[15] Out of range Output frequency is outside the Control of Mechanical Brake, and
frequency range set in parameter group 2-2* Mechanical Brake

[33] Safe stop Indicates that the Safe Torque Off on [73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
activated (FC terminal 37 has been activated. Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
302 only) output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[40] Out of ref Active when the actual speed is outside [74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
range settings in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Low to parameter 4-55 Warning Reference output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
High. [75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If 3 3
[41] Below Active when actual speed is below speed Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
reference low reference setting. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[42] Above Active when actual speed is above speed [80] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
reference high reference setting. Output A The output goes high whenever the
[43] Extended PID Smart Logic Action [38] Set dig. out. A
Limit high is executed. The output goes low
[45] Bus Ctrl Controls output via bus. The state of the whenever the Smart Logic Action [32] Set
output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital & dig. out. A low is executed.
Relay Bus Control. The output state is [81] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
retained in the event of bus time-out. Output B The input goes high whenever the Smart
[46] Bus Ctrl On at Controls output via bus. The state of the Logic Action [39] Set dig. out. B high is
timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital & executed. The input goes low whenever
Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus the Smart Logic Action [33] Set dig. out. B
timeout, the output state is set high (On). low is executed.
[47] Bus Ctrl Off at Controls output via bus. The state of the [82] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital & Output C The input goes high whenever the Smart
Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus Logic Action [40] Set dig. out. C high is
timeout, the output state is set low (Off). executed. The input goes low whenever
[51] MCO-controlled Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305 is the Smart Logic Action [34] Set dig. out. C
connected. The output is controlled from low is executed.
option. [83] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[55] Pulse output Output D The input goes high whenever the Smart
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. Logic Action [41] Set dig. out. D high is
If Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the executed. The input goes low whenever
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the Smart Logic Action [35] Set dig. out. D
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. low is executed.
If Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the [84] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. Output E The input goes high whenever the Smart
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. Logic Action [42] Set dig. out. E high is
If Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the executed. The input goes low whenever
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the Smart Logic Action [36] Set dig. out. E
low is executed.
[63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators.
If Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the [85] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. Output F The input goes high whenever the Smart
Logic Action [43] Set dig. out. F high is
executed. The input goes low whenever
If Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
the Smart Logic Action [37] Set dig. out. F
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
low is executed.
[90] kWh counter Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse width) to
If Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
pulse output terminal whenever kWh counter
changes (15-02 kWh Counter).
[70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
[120] Local referen-ce Output is high when 3-13 Reference Site =
Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
active [2] Local or when 3-13 Reference Site = [0]
Linked to hand auto at the same time as
the LCP is in Hand On mode.

Reference site set Local Remote ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the
in 3-13 Reference referenc reference output is 1.
Site e active [154] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
active [121] warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[120] or [21] Advanced ETR. If the warning 165
Reference site: 1 0 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active, the
3 3 Local output is 1.
3-13 Reference Site [188] AHF Capacitor The capacitors are turned on at 20%
[2] Connect (hysteresis of 50% gives an interval of
Reference site: 0 1 10% - 30%). The capacitors are discon-
Remote nected below 10%. The off delay is 10 s
3-13 Reference Site and restarts if the nominal power goes
[1] above 10% during the delay.
Reference site: Parameter 5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay
Linked to Hand/ is used to guarantee a minimum off-time
Auto for the capacitors.
Hand 1 0 [189] External fan The internal logics for the internal fan
Hand ⇒ off 1 0 control control is transferred to this output to
Auto ⇒ off 0 0 make it possible to control an external
Auto 0 1 fan (relevant for HP duct cooling).
[190] Safe Function
Table 3.19 Local Reference Active active
[191] Safe Opt. Reset
[121] Remote Output is high when 3-13 Reference Site = req.
reference active [1] Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto [192] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
while the LCP is in Auto on mode. See [193] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
above. [194] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
[122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is present. [195] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
[123] Start command Output is high when there is an active [196] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
active start command (i.e. via digital input bus [197] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
connection or Hand on or Auto on), and [198] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
no stop or start command is active.
[199] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
[124] Running Output is high when the frequency
reverse converter is running counterclockwise 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output
(the logical product of the status bits Option: Function:
‘running’ AND ‘reverse’).
[0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter
[125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency group 5-3* Digital Outputs.
mode converter is in Hand On mode (as
indicated by the LED light above [Hand 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output
on]). Option: Function:
[126] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency [0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter
mode converter is in Hand On mode (as group 5-3* Digital Outputs.
indicated by the LED light above Auto This parameter is applicable for FC 302 only.
On).
[151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR Option: Function:
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm 164 [0] No operation This parameter is active when
ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the option module MCB 101 is
output is 1. mounted in the frequency
[152] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor converter. Functions are described
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR under parameter group 5-3*
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm 166 Digital Outputs.
ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the
[1] Control Ready
output is 1.
[2] Drive ready
[153] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm 163 [4] Enable / no warning

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[5] Running [80] SL digital output A
[6] Running / no warning [81] SL digital output B
[7] Run in range/no warn [82] SL digital output C
[8]
[9]
Run on ref/no warn
Alarm
[83]
[84]
SL digital output D
SL digital output E
3 3
[10] Alarm or warning [85] SL digital output F
[11] At torque limit [90] kWh counter pulse Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse
[12] Out of current range width) to output terminal
[13] Below current, low whenever kWh counter changes
[14] Above current, high (15-02 kWh Counter).
[15] Out of speed range [120] Local ref active
[16] Below speed, low [121] Remote ref active
[17] Above speed, high [122] No alarm
[18] Out of feedb. range [123] Start command activ
[19] Below feedback, low [124] Running reverse
[20] Above feedback, high [125] Drive in hand mode
[21] Thermal warning [126] Drive in auto mode
[22] Ready,no thermal W [151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[23] Remote,ready,no TW [152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[24] Ready, Voltage OK [153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[25] Reverse [154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[26] Bus OK [188] AHF Capacitor Connect
[27] Torque limit & stop [189] External Fan Control
[28] Brake, no brake war [190] Safe Function active
[29] Brake ready, no fault [191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) [192] RS Flipflop 0
[31] Relay 123 [193] RS Flipflop 1
[32] Mech brake ctrl [194] RS Flipflop 2
[33] Safe stop active [195] RS Flipflop 3
[38] Motor feedback error [196] RS Flipflop 4
[39] Tracking error [197] RS Flipflop 5
[40] Out of ref range [198] RS Flipflop 6
[41] Below reference, low [199] RS Flipflop 7
[42] Above ref, high
[43] Extended PID Limit 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[45] Bus ctrl. Option: Function:
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout [0] No operation This parameter is active when
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout option module option module
[51] MCO controlled MCB 101 is mounted in the
[55] Pulse output frequency converter. Functions are
[60] Comparator 0 described under parameter group
[61] Comparator 1 5-3* Digital Outputs.
[62] Comparator 2 [1] Control Ready

[63] Comparator 3 [2] Drive ready
[64] Comparator 4 [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[65] Comparator 5 [4] Enable / no warning
[70] Logic rule 0 [5] Running
[71] Logic rule 1 [6] Running / no warning
[72] Logic rule 2 [7] Run in range/no warn
[73] Logic rule 3 [8] Run on ref/no warn
[74] Logic rule 4 [9] Alarm
[75] Logic rule 5 [10] Alarm or warning

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[11] At torque limit [122] No alarm
[12] Out of current range [123] Start command activ
[13] Below current, low [124] Running reverse
3 3 [14]
[15]
Above current, high
Out of speed range
[125] Drive in hand mode
[126] Drive in auto mode
[16] Below speed, low [151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[17] Above speed, high [152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[18] Out of feedb. range [153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[19] Below feedback, low [154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[20] Above feedback, high [189] External Fan Control
[21] Thermal warning [190] Safe Function active
[22] Ready,no thermal W [191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[23] Remote,ready,no TW [192] RS Flipflop 0
[24] Ready, Voltage OK [193] RS Flipflop 1
[25] Reverse [194] RS Flipflop 2
[26] Bus OK [195] RS Flipflop 3
[27] Torque limit & stop [196] RS Flipflop 4
[28] Brake, no brake war [197] RS Flipflop 5
[29] Brake ready, no fault [198] RS Flipflop 6
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) [199] RS Flipflop 7
[31] Relay 123
[32] Mech brake ctrl 3.7.4 5-4* Relays
[33] Safe stop active
[39] Tracking error Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
[40] Out of ref range functions for the relays.
[41] Below reference, low
5-40 Function Relay
[42] Above ref, high
Array [9]
[43] Extended PID Limit
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
[45] Bus ctrl.
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[51] MCO controlled Option: Function:
[60] Comparator 0 [0] No operation All digital and relay outputs are by
[61] Comparator 1 default set to “No Operation”.
[62] Comparator 2 [1] Control Ready The control card is ready, for example:
[63] Comparator 3 Feedback from a frequency converter
[64] Comparator 4 where the control is supplied by an
[65] Comparator 5 external 24 V (MCB 107) and the main
[70] Logic rule 0 power to frequency converter is not
[71] Logic rule 1 detected.
[72] Logic rule 2 [2] Drive ready Frequency converter is ready to
[73] Logic rule 3 operate. Mains and control supplies
[74] Logic rule 4 are OK.
[75] Logic rule 5 [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl The frequency converter is ready for
[80] SL digital output A operation and is in Auto On mode
[81] SL digital output B
[4] Enable / no Ready for operation. No start or stop
[82] SL digital output C
warning commands have been applied (start/
[83] SL digital output D
disable). No warnings are active.
[84] SL digital output E
[85] SL digital output F [5] Running Motor is running, and shaft torque is
[120] Local ref active present.
[121] Remote ref active

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Array [9] Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6] 113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105)) (MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
Option:
[6] Running / no
Function:
Output speed is higher than the
Option:
[20] Above feedback,
Function:
Feedback is above the limit set in
3 3
warning speed set in 1-81 Min Speed for high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is
[21] Thermal warning Thermal warning turns on when the
running and no warnings.
temperature exceeds the limit either
[7] Run in range/no Motor is running within the in motor, frequency converter, brake
warn programmed current and speed resistor, or connected thermistor.
ranges set in parameter 4-50 Warning
[22] Ready,no thermal Frequency converter is ready for
Current Low and
W operation and there is no overtem-
perature warning.
No warnings.
[23] Remote,ready,no Frequency converter is ready for
[8] Run on ref/no Motor runs at reference speed. No
TW operation and is in Auto On mode.
warn warnings.
There is no overtemperature warning.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. No
[24] Ready, Voltage OK Frequency converter is ready for
warnings.
operation and the mains voltage is
[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or a warning activates the within the specified voltage range (see
output. General Specifications section in Design
Guide).
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor [25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
Mode or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit clockwise when logic=0 and counter-
Generator Mode has been exceeded. clockwise when logic=1. The output
changes as soon as the reversing
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the
signal is applied.
range range set in parameter 4-18 Current
Limit. [26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out)
via the serial communication port.
[13] Below current, low Motor current is lower than set in
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. [27] Torque limit & Use in performing a coasted stop and
stop frequency converter in torque limit
[14] Above current, Motor current is higher than set in
condition. If the frequency converter
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
has received a stop signal and is in
[15] Out of speed Output speed/frequency is outside the torque limit, the signal is Logic ‘0’.
range frequency range set in
[28] Brake, no brake Brake is active and there are no
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low
war warnings.
and parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
High. [29] Brake ready, no Brake is ready for operation and there
fault are no faults.
[16] Below speed, low Output speed is lower than the
setting in parameter 4-52 Warning [30] Brake fault (IGBT) Output is Logic ‘1’ when the brake
Speed Low. IGBT is short-circuited. Use this
function to protect the frequency
[17] Above speed, high Output speed is higher than the
converter, if there is a fault on the
setting in parameter 4-53 Warning
brake module. Use the digital output/
Speed High.
relay to cut out the main voltage from
[18] Out of feedb. Feedback is outside the range set in the frequency converter.
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
[31] Relay 123 Digital output/relay is activated when
[0] Control Word is selected in
High.
parameter group 8-** Comm. and
[19] Below feedback, Feedback is below the limit set in Options.
[32] Mech brake ctrl Selection of mechanical brake control.
When selected parameters in


Array [9] Array [9]
parameter group 2-2* Mechanical
Option:
[45] Bus ctrl.
Function:
Controls digital output/relay via bus.
Brake are active. The output must be The state of the output is set in
reinforced to carry the current for the parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
coil in the brake. Usually, solved by Control. The output state is retained in
connecting an external relay to the the event of bus timeout.
selected digital output.
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if Controls output via bus. The state of
[33] Safe stop active (FC 302 only) Indicates that the Safe timeout the output is set in
Torque Off on terminal 37 has been parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
activated. Control. In the event of bus timeout,
the output state is set high (On).
[36] Control word bit Activate relay 1 by control word from
11 fieldbus. No other functional impact in [47] Bus ctrl, 0 if Controls output via bus. The state of
the frequency converter. Typical timeout the output is set in
application: controlling auxiliary device parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
from fieldbus. The function is valid Control. In the event of bus timeout,
when [0] FC profile in the output state is set low (Off).
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is
[51] MCO controlled Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305
selected.
is connected. The output is controlled
[37] Control word bit Activate relay 2 (FC 302 only) by from option.
12 control word from fieldbus. No other
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1*
functional impact in the frequency
Comparators. If Comparator 0 in SLC is
converter. Typical application:
TRUE, the output goes high.
controlling auxiliary device from
Otherwise, it is low.
fieldbus. The function is valid when [0]
FC profile in parameter 8-10 Control [61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1*
Word Profile is selected. Comparators. If Comparator 1 in SLC is
[38] Motor feedback Failure in the speed feedback loop
error from motor running in closed loop.
The output can eventually be used to [62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1*
prepare switching the frequency Comparators. If Comparator 2 in SLC is
converter in open loop in emergency TRUE, the output goes high.
case. Otherwise, it is low.
[39] Tracking error When the difference between [63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1*
calculated speed and actual speed in Comparators. If Comparator 3 in SLC is
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is larger TRUE, the output goes high.
than selected, the digital output/relay Otherwise, it is low.
is active. [64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1*
[40] Out of ref range Active when the actual speed is Comparators. If Comparator 4 in SLC is
outside settings in TRUE, the output goes high.
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low to Otherwise, it is low.
parameter 4-55 Warning Reference [65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Smart
High. Logic Control. If Comparator 5 in SLC is
[41] Below reference, Active when actual speed is below TRUE, the output goes high.
low speed reference setting. Otherwise, it is low.
[42] Above ref, high Active when actual speed is above [70] Logic rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Smart
speed reference setting. Logic Control. If Logic Rule 0 in SLC is
[43] Extended PID
Limit


Array [9] Array [9]
Option:
[71] Logic rule 1
Function:
See parameter group 13-4* Smart
Option: Function:
Local or when
3 3
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 1 in SLC is parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [0]
TRUE, the output goes high. Linked to hand auto at the same time
Otherwise, it is low. as the LCP is in Hand On mode.
[72] Logic rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Reference site Local Remote
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 2 in SLC is set in referen reference
TRUE, the output goes high. parameter 3-13 ce active
Otherwise, it is low. Reference Site active [121]
[73] Logic rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Smart [120]
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 3 in SLC is Reference site: 1 0
TRUE, the output goes high. Local
Otherwise, it is low. parameter 3-13
Reference Site
[74] Logic rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Smart
[2]
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 4 in SLC is
Reference site: 0 1
Remote
parameter 3-13
[75] Logic rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Reference Site
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 5 in SLC is [1]
TRUE, the output goes high. Reference site:
Otherwise, it is low. Linked to Hand/
[80] SL digital output A See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Auto
Action. Output A is low on Smart Hand 1 0
Logic Action [32]. Output A is high on Hand ⇒ off 1 0
Smart Logic Action [38]. Auto ⇒ off 0 0
[81] SL digital output B See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Auto 0 1
Action. Output B is low on Smart Logic
Table 3.20 Local Reference Active
Action [33]. Output B is high on Smart
Logic Action [39].
[121] Remote ref active Output is high when
[82] SL digital output C See parameter 13-52 SL Controller parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [1]
Action. Output C is low on Smart Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto
Logic Action [34]. Output C is high on while the LCP is in Auto On mode.
Smart Logic Action [40]. See above.
[83] SL digital output D See parameter 13-52 SL Controller [122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is
Action. Output D is low on Smart present.
Logic Action [35]. Output D is high on
[123] Start command Output is high when the start
Smart Logic Action [41].
activ command is high (i.e. via digital input,
[84] SL digital output E See parameter 13-52 SL Controller bus connection or [Hand On] or [Auto
Action. Output E is low on Smart Logic On]), and a stop has been last
Action [36]. Output E is high on Smart command.
Logic Action [42].
[124] Running reverse Output is high when the frequency
[85] SL digital output F See parameter 13-52 SL Controller converter is running counter clockwise
Action. Output F is low on Smart Logic (the logical product of the status bits
Action [37]. Output F is high on Smart ‘running’ AND ‘reverse’).
Logic Action [43].
[125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency
[120] Local ref active Output is high when mode converter is in [Hand on] mode (as
parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2]

5-40 Function Relay 5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9] Array [2], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1])
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB Range: Function:
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
0.01 s* [0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
Select one of 2 internal mechanical relays
indicated by the LED light above
in an array function. See 5-40 Function
Relay for details.
[Hand on]).
130BA171.10
[126] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency Selected
mode converter is in ‘Auto’ mode (as Event
indicated by LED on above [Auto on]).

Relay
[151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor output
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
On Delay Off Delay
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm P 5-41 P 5-42
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active,
the output is 1. Selected
Event
[152] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
Relay
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm output
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active,
the output is 1. On Delay
P 5-41
[153] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Illustration 3.35 On Delay, Relay
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active,
5-42 Off Delay, Relay
the output is 1.
Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
Range: Function:
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the 0.01 s* [0.01 - Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time.
warning 165 ATEX ETR 600 s] Select one of 2 internal mechanical relays in
freq.lim.warning is active, the output an array function. See 5-40 Function Relay
is 1. for details. If the selected event condition
changes before a delay timer expires, the
[188] AHF Capacitor
relay output is unaffected.
Connect
[189] External Fan The internal logics for the internal fan
130BA172.10
Control control is transferred to this output to

make it possible to control an external Selected
fan (relevant for HP duct cooling). Event
[190] Safe Function

active Relay
output
[191] Safe Opt. Reset
req.
On Delay Off Delay
[192] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators. P 5-41 P 5-42
[193] RS Flipflop 1 See 13-1* Comparators. Illustration 3.36 Off Delay, Relay
[194] RS Flipflop 2 See 13-1* Comparators.

If the selected event condition changes before the on
[196] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators. delay or off delay timer expires, the relay output is
unaffected.

3.7.5 5-5* Pulse Input 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
The pulse input parameters are used to define an (parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by Mode = [0] input (default)
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse and 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
inputs. Set terminal 29 (5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input) or
Input = applicable value).
This parameter is available
3 3
terminal 33 (5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) to [32] Pulse for FC 302 only.
input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, set
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode to [0] Input. 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
130BA076.10
Ref.
(RPM) Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value
High related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft speed
ref.
value ReferenceFeed- and the high feedback value, see
P 5-53/
p 5-58 backUnit] also parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High
Ref./Feedb. Value. Select terminal
29 as a digital input
(parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
= [0] input (default) and
Low
ref. 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input =
value
P 5-52/ applicable value).
p 5-57 Low freq. High freq. Input
P 5-50/ P 5-51/ (Hz) This parameter is available for FC
P 5-55 P 5-56
302 only.
Illustration 3.37 Pulse Input
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range: Function:
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency
100 [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
Range: Function: ms* ms] pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
100 [0 - Enter the low frequency limit feedback signal, which is an advantage, if
Hz* 110000 Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft there is a lot of noise in the system. A high
speed (i.e. low reference value) in time constant value results in better
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. dampening but also increases the time
Value. Refer to Illustration 3.37. delay through the filter.
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency corresponding
100 [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit Hz] to the low motor shaft speed (i.e. low
Hz* Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft reference value) in parameter 5-57 Term.
speed (i.e. high reference value) in 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value. 5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency
This parameter is available for FC 302
Range: Function:
only.
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency
Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
Range: Function: 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
0 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 value limit for the motor 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
ReferenceFeed- shaft speed [RPM]. This is
Range: Function:
backUnit] also the lowest feedback
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference value [RPM]
value, see also
999999.999 ] for the motor shaft speed. This is also
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low
the low feedback value, see also
Ref./Feedb. Value. Set
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
terminal 29 to digital input

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value [45] Bus control
Range: Function: [48] Bus control

timeout
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value
[51] MCO-controlled
related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft
[100] Output frequency
ReferenceFeed- speed. See also
3 3 backUnit] parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High [101] Reference

Ref./Feedb. Value. [102] Feedback
[103] Motor current
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 [104] Torque relative to
limit
Range: Function:
[105] Torque relative to
100 ms* [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
rated
ms] low-pass filter reduces the influence, and
[106] Power
dampens oscillations, on the feedback
signal from the control. [107] Speed
This is an advantage if there is a great [108] Torque
amount of noise in the system. [109] Max. out freq
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable

3.7.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs Option: Function:
[0] No operation Select the desired display output for
NOTICE terminal 27.
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is [45] Bus ctrl.
running. [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[51] MCO controlled
These parameters configure pulse outputs with their [100] Output frequency
functions and scaling. Terminals 27 and 29 are allocated to [101] Reference
pulse output via parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and [102] Feedback
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode, respectively. [103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit
Output value
130BA089.11
[105] Torq relate to rated

[106] Power
[107] Speed
High output
value [108] Torque
P 5-60(term27) [109] Max Out Freq
P 5-63(term29)
[119] Torque % lim
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27

Range: Function:
Size [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for
related* Hz] terminal 27, corresponding to the
High freq. Output
output variable selected in
P 5-62(term27) (Hz)
P 5-65(term29) parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse
Illustration 3.38 Configuration of Pulse Outputs Output Variable.
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

Options for readout output variables: Option: Function:
[0] No operation Select the desired display output for
Parameters for configuring the scaling terminal 29. This parameter is
and output functions of pulse outputs. available for FC 302 only.
The pulse outputs are designated to [45] Bus ctrl.
terminals 27 or 29. Select terminal 27 [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
output in parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 [51] MCO controlled
Mode and terminal 29 output in
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
[101] Reference
[0] No operation
[102] Feedback

5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable 3.7.7 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input

Option: Function:
[103] Motor Current
Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC supply),
terminal 32 (Channel A), terminal 33 (Channel B), and
terminal 20 (GND). The digital inputs 32/33 are active for
encoder inputs when [1] 24 V encoder is selected in
[106] Power
[107] Speed
parameter 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source and 3 3
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. The encoder
[108] Torque
used is a dual-channel (A and B) 24 V type. Max input
[109] Max Out Freq frequency: 110 kHz.
[119] Torque % lim
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 Encoder connection to the frequency converter
24 V incremental encoder. Max. cable length 5 m.
Range: Function:
+24V DC
130BA090.11
5000 Hz* [0 - 32000 Hz] Set the maximum frequency for
GND
terminal 29 corresponding to the
B
A
output variable set in 5-63 Terminal 29
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Pulse Output Variable.
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable

Select the variable for readout on terminal X30/6.
This parameter is active when option module MCB 101 is
installed in the frequency converter.
Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse
Outputs.
Option: Function:
[0] No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[51] MCO controlled
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq 24V or 10-30V encoder
[119] Torque % lim Illustration 3.39 Encoder Connection
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

Range: Function:
Size [0 - 32000 Select the maximum frequency on
related* Hz] terminal X30/6 referring to the output
variable in 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse
Output Variable.
This parameter is active when option
module MCB 101 is mounted in the

3.7.9 5-9* Bus-Controlled
130BA646.10
CW
A
This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via
B a fieldbus setting.
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

3 3 Range: Function:
0* [0 - 2147483647] This parameter holds the state of the
digital outputs and relays that is
controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is
CCW
A high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is
low or inactive.
B
Bit 0 Digital output terminal 27
Illustration 3.40 Encoder Rotation Direction
Bit 1 Digital output terminal 29
Bit 2 Digital output terminal X 30/6
Bit 3 Digital output terminal X 30/7
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal
Range: Function: Bit 5 Relay 2 output terminal
1024* [1 - 4096] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the Bit 6 Option B Relay 1 output terminal
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the Bit 7 Option B Relay 2 output terminal
encoder.
Bit 8 Option B Relay 3 output terminal
Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction
Bit 16 Option C Relay 1 output terminal
Option: Function: Bit 17 Option C Relay 2 output terminal
NOTICE Bit 18 Option C Relay 3 output terminal
This parameter cannot be adjusted Bit 19 Option C Relay 4 output terminal
while the motor is running. Bit 20 Option C Relay 5 output terminal
Bit 21 Option C Relay 6 output terminal
Change the detected encoder rotation Bit 22 Option C Relay 7 output terminal
direction without changing the wiring to the Bit 23 Option C Relay 8 output terminal
encoder. Bit 24-31 Reserved for future terminals
[0] * Clockwise Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees) Table 3.21 Bus-controlled Digital Outputs and Relays
behind channel B upon clockwise rotation of
the encoder shaft.
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[1] Counter Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees) ahead Range: Function:
clockwise of channel B upon clockwise rotation of the
0 %* [0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to
encoder shaft.
%] output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
3.7.8 5-8* I/O Options parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
25 s* [1 - 120 Guarantees a minimum off-time for the
0 %* [0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to output
s] capacitors. The timer starts once the AHF
%] terminal 27 when the terminal is configured as
capacitor disconnects and needs to expire
[48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in parameter 5-60 Terminal
before the output is allowed to be on again. It
27 Pulse Output Variable and a timeout is
will only turn on again if the drive power is
detected.
between 20% and 30%.

5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
[45] Bus Controlled in parameter 5-63 Terminal
29 Pulse Output Variable.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
3 3
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
Range: Function:
[48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in parameter 5-63 Terminal
29 Pulse Output Variable and a timeout is
detected.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to
%] output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus ctrl. in
parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Variable.
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
%] terminal X30/6 when the terminal is configured
as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Variable and a timeout is detected.

3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
3.8.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
[21] Coast and
trip
The analog inputs can freely be allocated to be either
voltage (FC 301: 0..10 V, FC 302: 0..± 10 V) or current (FC
3 3 301/FC 302: 0/4..20 mA) input. 3.8.2 6-1* Analog Input 1
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

NOTICE analog input 1 (terminal 53).
Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a
digital input. Ref./Feedback
130BT103.10
[RPM]
Par 6-xx
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 'High Ref./ 1500
Feedb. Value'
Range: Function: 1200
10 s* [1 - Enter the live zero timeout time period. Live zero
900
99 s] timeout time is active for analog inputs, that is,
terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or 600
feedback sources. If the reference signal value Par 6-xx 300

associated with the selected current input drops 'Low Ref./ 150
Feedb. Value'
below 50% of the value set in 6-10 Terminal 53 Ex. 1V 5V 10 V
Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, Par 6-xx Par 6-xx Analog input
'Low Voltage'or 'High Voltage'or
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or 6-22 Terminal 54 'Low Current' 'High Current'
Low Current for a time period longer than the
Illustration 3.41 Analog Input 1
time set in parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time,
the function selected in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function is activated.
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0.07 V* [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This analog
par. 6-11 V] input scaling value should correspond to
Select the timeout function. The function set
the minimum reference value, set in
in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is
parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
activated, if the input signal on terminal 53 or
Value. See also the section Reference
54 is below 50% of the value in
Handling.
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,
parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a Range: Function:
time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero 10 V* [ par. 6-10 - Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to
simultaneously, the frequency converter the high reference/feedback value set in
prioritises the timeout functions as follows: 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
1. Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function. 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Range: Function:
2. Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
Function. 0.14 [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference
mA* par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the minimum
[0] * Off
mA] reference value, set in
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value. parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value
output must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
[2] Stop Overruled to stop. Live Zero Timeout Function in
[3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed. parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
[4] Max. speed Overruled to max. speed.
[5] Stop and Overruled to stop with subsequent trip.

trip
[20] Coast

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

20 mA* [ par. 6-12 - Enter the high current value 10 V* [ par. 6-20 - Enter the high-voltage value. This analog
20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/ 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to
feedback set in 6-15 Terminal 53 High the high reference/feedback value set in
Ref./Feedb. Value. 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
3 3
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value 0.14 [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference
999999.999 ] that corresponds to the low mA* par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the minimum
voltage/low current set in mA] reference value, set in
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current. must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
Live Zero Timeout Function in
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
Range: Function:
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the Range: Function:
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback 20 mA* [ par. 6-22 - Enter the high current value
backUnit] value set in 20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/
parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High feedback value set in 6-25 Terminal 54
Voltage and High Ref./Feedb. Value.
parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High
Current. 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
Range: Function: backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the
s] backUnit] minimum reference
feedback value set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference.
Enter the filter time constant. This
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
filter time for suppressing electrical noise
Range: Function:
in terminal 53. A high value improves
dampening, but also increases the delay Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
through the filter. related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback
backUnit] value set in
3.8.3 6-2* Analog Input 2 parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference.
analog input 2 (terminal 54).
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This analog
par. 6-21 V] input scaling value should correspond to
the minimum reference value, set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. See
also chapter 3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/
Ramps.

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s* [0.001 - NOTICE Enter the filter time constant. This
10 s] constant is a first-order digital low-pass
3 3 in terminal X30/11. A high value improves
dampening, but also increases the delay
Enter the filter time constant. This is a through the filter.
first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in
terminal 54. A high time constant value 3.8.5 6-4* Analog Input 4 MCB 101
improves dampening but also increases
the time delay through the filter. Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option module MCB
101.
3.8.4 6-3* Analog Input 3 MCB 101
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for Range: Function:
analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option module MCB 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to
101. 6-41 V] correspond to the low reference/feedback
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Range: Function:
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to 6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
6-31 V] correspond to the low reference/feedback
Range: Function:
value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11
Low Ref./Feedb. Value). 10 V* [ par. 6-40 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
10 V] correspond to the high reference/feedback
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
Range: Function:
10 V* [ par. 6-30 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
10 V] correspond to the high reference/feedback
Range: Function:
value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11
High Ref./Feedb. Value). 0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog output scaling value to
999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value set
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value in parameter 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low
Voltage.
Range: Function:
0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value (set
Range: Function:
in parameter 6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low
Voltage). 100* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
999999.999 ] correspond to the high voltage value
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value set in parameter 6-41 Terminal X30/12
High Voltage.
Range: Function:
100* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
999999.999 ] correspond to the high voltage value
(set in parameter 6-31 Terminal X30/11
High Voltage).
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE
s]

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 6-50 Terminal 42 Output

0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
s] is:
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
while the motor is running. = = 175%
[104] Torque rel

IMotor Norm 22
The torque setting is related to setting in

3 3
Enter the filter time constant. This to limit parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
[105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque
to rated setting.
in terminal X30/12. A high value improves
dampening, but also increases the delay [106] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
through the filter.
[107] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference. 20mA = value in
3.8.6 6-5* Analog Output 1 parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
[108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.

[109] Max Out 0Hz = 0mA,parameter 4-19 Max Output
analog output 1, i.e. terminal 42. Analog outputs are
Freq Frequency = 20mA.
current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Common terminal (terminal
39) is the same terminal and has the same electrical [113] PID
potential for analog common and digital common Clamped
connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit. Output
[119] Torque %
6-50 Terminal 42 Output
lim
Option: Function: [130] Output 0Hz = 4mA, 100Hz = 20mA
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an freq.
analog current output. Depending on the 4-20mA
selection the output is either a 0-20mA or [131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max] 0%
4-20mA output. The current value can be 4-20mA = 4mA; 100% = 20mA
read out in in parameter 16-65 Analog Output Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]
42 [mA]. -100% = 4mA; 0% = 12mA; +100% = 20mA
[0] No When no signal on the analog output. [132] Feedback
operation 4-20mA
[52] MCO [133] Motor cur. Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv. Max.
0-20mA 4-20mA Current. Inverter max. current (160% current)
[53] MCO is equal to 20mA.
4-20mA
Example: Inverter norm current (11kW) =
[100] Output 0Hz = 0mA; 100Hz = 20mA.
24A. 160% = 38.4A. Motor norm current =
frequency
22A Read-out 11.46mA.
[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max]
16 mA x 22 A
0% = 0mA; 100% = 20mA + 4 mA = 13.17 mA
38.4 A
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max] In case the norm motor current is equal to
-100% = 0mA; 0% = 10mA; +100% = 20mA 20mA, the output setting of
[102] Feedback parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
[103] Motor Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22
Current Current. Inverter max. current (160% current)
[134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to setting in
is equal to 20mA.
4-20 mA parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
Example: Inverter norm current (11kW) =
24A. 160% = 38.4A. Motor norm current = [135] Torq.% The torque setting is related to the motor
22A Read-out 11.46mA. nom torque setting.
4-20mA
20 mA x 22 A
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A [136] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
In case the norm motor current is equal to 4-20mA
20mA, the output setting of

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

[137] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum 100 [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
4-20mA Reference. 20mA = Value in %* 200 %] analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to the
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. maximum value of the current signal output.
3 3 [138] Torque
4-20mA
Torque reference related to 160% torque.
Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below
100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
[139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
the desired output current at a value between 0
0-20 mA data. The output will work independently of
- 100% of the full-scale output, program the
internal functions in the .
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20
[140] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired
4-20 mA data. The output will work independently of at maximum output (100%), calculate the
internal functions in the . percentage value as follows:
[141] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%
0-20mA t.o. the behaviour of the analog output in case
20
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 200%
of bus time-out. 10
[142] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines Current
130BA075.12
(mA)
4-20mA t.o. the behaviour of the analog output in case
20
of bus time-out.
[147] Main act

val 0-20mA 0/4
[148] Main act 0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable
val 4-20mA output Output for
Min Scale Max Scale output
[149] Torque % Analog output at zero torque = 12mA. par. 6-93 par. 6-94 example:
Speed
lim 4-20mA Motoric torque will increase the output (RPM)
current to max torque limit 20mA (set in
Illustration 3.43 Output Max. Scale
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode).
Generative torque will decrease the output to
torque limit Generator Mode (set in
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode) 6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
Ex: parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode: Range: Function:
200% and parameter 4-17 Torque Limit 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of output 42 if controlled by
Generator Mode: 200%. 20mA = 200% Motoric bus.
and 4mA = 200% Generatoric.
0mA 4mA 12 mA 20 mA 6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
130BB372.10
Par 4-17
(200%)
0% Torque Par 4-16
(200%)
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of output 42.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
Illustration 3.42
function is selected in 6-50 Terminal 42
Output, the output is preset to this level.
[150] Max Out Fr 0hz = 0mA,parameter 4-19 Max Output 6-55 Analog Output Filter
4-20mA Frequency = 20mA.
Option: Function:
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale The following readout analog parameters from
selection in parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a
Range: Function:
filter selected when parameter 6-55 Analog Output
0 %* [0 - 200 Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 Filter is on:
%] mA) of the analog signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in 6-50 Terminal
42 Output.

6-55 Analog Output Filter 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

Selection 0-20 mA 4-20 mA [104] Torque rel The torque setting is related to setting in
Motor current (0 - Imax) [103] [133] to limit parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
Torque limit (0 - Tlim) [104] [134] [105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque
Rated torque (0 - Tnom)
Power (0 - Pnom)
[105]
[106]
[135]
[136]
to rated setting. 3 3
[106] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power
Speed (0 - Speedmax) [107] [137]
[kW].
Table 3.22 Readout Analog Parameters [107] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference. 20 mA = value in
[0] * Off Filter off parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
[1] On Filter on [108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
[109] Max Out In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output

3.8.7 6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101 Freq Frequency.
[113] PID
Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4 - 20 mA. Common Clamped
terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and Output
electrical potential for analog common connection. [119] Torque %
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit. lim
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output [130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA

4-20mA
Option: Function:
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min.-Max.]
Select the function of terminal X30/8 as an
4-20mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
analog current output. Depending on the
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max.]
selection, the output is either a 0-20 mA or
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
4-20 mA output. The current value can be
mA
read out in LCP in parameter 16-65 Analog
Output 42 [mA]. [132] Feedback
4-20mA
[0] No When no signal on the analog output is
[133] Motor cur. Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
operation present.
4-20mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
[52] MCO current) is equal to 20 mA.
0-20mA
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA. A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22
frequency A Readout 11.46 mA.
[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min. - Max.]
16 mA x 22 A
= 9.17 mA
0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA 38.4 A
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. - In case the norm motor current is equal to
Max.] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA, the output setting of
20 mA parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
[102] Feedback IVLT Max. x 100 38.4 x 100

= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22
[103] Motor Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
[134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to setting in
Current Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
current) is equal to 20 mA.
[135] Torq.% nom The torque setting is related to the motor
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
4-20mA torque setting.
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22
A Readout 11.46 mA. [136] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power
20 mA x 22 A 4-20mA [kW].
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A
[137] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
In case the norm motor current is equal to
4-20mA Reference. 20 mA = Value in
20 mA, the output setting of
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
IVLT Max. x 100 38.4 x 100 [138] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22 4-20mA

6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output 6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control

[139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of output X30/8 if controlled
0-20 mA data. The output works independently of by bus.
internal functions in the frequency
3 3 [140] Bus ctrl.

converter.
An output value set from fieldbus process

6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset
Range: Function:
4-20 mA data. The output works independently of 0 %* [0 - 100 Holds the preset level of output X30/8.
internal functions in the frequency %] In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
converter. function is selected in parameter 6-60 Terminal
X30/8 Output, the output is preset to this level.
[141] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
0-20mA t.o. defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus timeout. 3.8.8 6-7* Analog Output 3 MCB 113
[142] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
4-20mA t.o. defines the behaviour of the analog output Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for
in case of bus timeout. analog output 3, terminals X45/1 and X45/2. Analog
outputs are current outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Resolution on
[149] Torque % Torque %Lim 4-20 mA: Torque reference.
analog output is 11 bit.
lim 4-20mA parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min.-Max.]
0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. - Option: Function:
Max.] -100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% =
20 mA
analog current output.
[150] Max Out Fr In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output [0] No operation When no signal on the analog output is
4-20mA Frequency. present.
[52] MCO 305 0-20
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale mA
Range: Function: [53] MCO 305 4-20
0 %* [0 - Scales the minimum output of the selected mA
200 %] analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the [100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
minimum value as a percentage of the maximum frequency
signal value, i.e. 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% 0-20 mA
of the maximum output value and 25% is [101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min. -
programmed. The value can never be higher than 0-20 mA Max.] 0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA
the corresponding setting in 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. -
Max. Scale if value is below 100%. Max.] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100%
This parameter is active when option module = 20 mA
MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency converter. [102] Feedback
[103] Motor current Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 0-20 mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
Range: Function: current) is equal to 20 mA.
100 [0 - Scales the maximum output of the selected Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) =
%* 200 analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value 24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current
%] to the desired maximum value of the current = 22 A Readout 11.46 mA.
20 mA x 22 A
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower = 11.46 mA
38.4 A
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an In case the norm motor current is equal to
output below 100% of the maximum signal value. 20 mA, the output setting of
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
between 0 - 100% of the full-scale output, Scale is:
program the percentage value in the parameter, IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22
i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20
mA is desired at maximum output (100%), [104] Torque rel to The torque setting is related to setting in
calculate the percentage value as follows: lim 0-20 mA parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
[105] Torque rel to The torque is related to the motor torque
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%
rated motor setting.
20 − 4
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 160%
10

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

torque 0-20 [141] Bus ctrl. 0-20 Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
mA mA, timeout defines the behaviour of the analog
[106] Power 0-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power output in case of bus timeout.
mA
[107] Speed 0-20
[kW].
Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
[142] Bus ctrl. 4-20
mA, timeout
Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
defines the behaviour of the analog
3 3
mA Reference. 20 mA = value in output in case of bus timeout.
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. [150] Max. out freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
[108] Torque ref. Torque reference related to 160% torque. 4-20 mA Frequency.
0-20 mA
6-71 Terminal X45/1 Output Min. Scale
[109] Max. out freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
0-20 mA Frequency. Range: Function:
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA 0.00%* [0.00 - Scale the minimum output of the selected
4-20 mA 200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1, as a
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min.-Max.] percentage of the maximum signal value.
4-20 mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA For example, if 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max.] at 25% of the maximum output value,
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 then program 25%. Scaling values up to
mA 100% can never be higher than the
[132] Feedback 4-20 corresponding setting in 6-72 Terminal
mA X45/1 Max. Scale.
[133] Motor cur. Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Output Max. Scale
4-20 mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
Range: Function:
current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 100%* [0.00 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current 200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1. Set the value
= 22 A Readout 11.46 mA. to the maximum value of the current signal
16 mA x 22 A output. Scale the output to give a current
= 9.17 mA
38.4 A
lower than 20 mA at full scale, or 20 mA at
In case the norm motor current is equal to an output below 100% of the maximum
20 mA, the output setting of signal value. If 20 mA is the desired output
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max current at a value between 0 - 100% of the
Scale is: full-scale output, program the percentage
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175% value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a
IMotor Norm 22
current between 4 and 20 mA is desired at
[134] Torque % lim. The torque setting is related to setting in
maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows (example where
[135] Torque % The torque setting is related to the motor
desired max. output is 10 mA):
nom 4-20 mA torque setting.
IRANGE mA
[136] Power 4-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power x 100%
IDESIRED MAX mA
mA [kW]. 20 − 4 mA
= x 100% = 160%
10 mA
[137] Speed 4-20 Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
mA Reference. 20 mA = Value in
[138] Torque 4-20 Torque reference related to 160% torque.
mA
[139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 An output value set from fieldbus process
mA data. The output works independently of
converter.
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 An output value set from fieldbus process
mA data. The output works independently of
converter.

Current 6-81 Terminal X45/3 Output Min. Scale
130BA877.10
[mA]
Option: Function:
20 This parameter is active when option
module MCB 113 is mounted in the
3 3 6-82 Terminal X45/3 Output Max. Scale

Option: Function:
0/4 [0.00%] 0.00 - Scales the maximum output of the selected
0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable for * 200.00% analog signal on terminal X45/3. Scale the
output Min Output Max output
Scale Scale example:Speed
value to the desired maximum value of the
par. 6-71 par. 6-72 [RPM] current signal output. Scale the output to
Illustration 3.44 Output Max. Scale give a lower current than 20 mA at full scale
or 20 mA at an output below 100% of the
maximum signal value. If 20 mA is the
desired output current at a value between 0
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Output Bus Control
- 100% of the full-scale output, program the
Range: Function:
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50%
0.00%* [0.00 - 100.00%] Holds the level of Analog Output 3 = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA
(terminal X45/1) if controlled by bus. is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows
(example where desired max. output is 10
Range: Function:
mA):
0.00%* [0.00 - Holds the preset level of Analog Output IRANGE mA
x 100%
100.00%] 3 (terminal X45/1). IDESIRED MAX mA
20 − 4 mA
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout = x 100% = 160%
10 mA
function is selected in 6-70 Terminal
X45/1 Output, the output is preset to 6-83 Terminal X45/3 Output Bus Control
this level. Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - 100.00% Holds the level of output 4 (X45/3) if
3.8.9 6-8* Analog Output 4 MCB 113 controlled by bus.

analog output 4, terminals X45/3 and X45/4. Analog Option: Function:
outputs are current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Resolution on [0.00%] * 0.00 - Holds the present level of output 4
analog output is 11 bit. 100.00% (X45/3). In case of a bus timeout and a
timeout function is selected in
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output, the output
Option: Function: is preset to this level.
analog current output.
[0] * No operation Same selections available as for 6-70 Terminal
X45/1 Output.
6-81 Terminal X45/3 Output Min. Scale

Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - Scales the minimum output of the
200.00% selected analog signal on terminal X45/3.
Scale the minimum value as a percentage
of the maximum signal value, i.e. 0 mA
(or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of the
maximum output value and 25% is
programmed. The value can never be
higher than the corresponding setting in
6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale if value is
below 100%.

3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
3.9.1 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. the set-point). This parameter is used with
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Speed
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source open loop and [1] Speed closed loop control.
Option: Function:
NOTICE
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
However, if the amplification is too great, the
3 3
process may become unstable.
This parameter cannot be Use this parameter for values with 3 decimals.
adjusted while the motor is For a selection with 4 decimals, use
running. parameter 3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
Start.
Select the encoder for closed loop
feedback. 7-03 Speed PID Integral Time
The feedback may come from a
Range: Function:
different encoder (typically mounted
Size [1.0 - Enter the speed controller integral time,
on the application itself) than the
related* 20000 which determines the time the internal PID
motor-mounted encoder feedback
ms] control takes to correct errors. The greater
selected in parameter 1-02 Flux Motor
the error, the more quickly the gain
Feedback Source.
increases. The integral time causes a delay
[0] Motor feedb. P1-02 of the signal and therefore a dampening
[1] 24V encoder effect and can be used to eliminate steady-
[2] MCB 102 state speed error. Obtain quick control
[3] MCB 103 through a short integral time, though if the
[4] MCO Encoder 1 X56 integral time is too short, the process
[5] MCO Encoder 2 X55 becomes unstable. An excessively long
[6] Analog Input 53 integral time disables the integral action,
[7] Analog Input 54 leading to major deviations from the
[8] Frequency input 29 required reference, since the process
[9] Frequency input 33 regulator takes too long to regulate errors.
This parameter is used with [0] Speed open
[11] MCB 15X
loop and [1] Speed closed loop control, set in
NOTICE parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
If separate encoders are used (FC 302 only), the ramp

7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
settings parameters in parameter groups 3-4*, 3-5*, 3-6*,
3-7* and 3-8* must be adjusted according to the gear Range: Function:
ratio between the 2 encoders. Size [0 - Enter the speed controller differentiation
related* 200 time. The differentiator does not react to
7-01 Speed PID Droop ms] constant error. It provides gain proportional
to the rate of change of the speed
The droop function allows the frequency converter to decrease
feedback. The quicker the error changes,
the motor speed by the droop value. The droop value is directly
the stronger the gain from the differen-
proportional to the load value. This parameter defines the droop
tiator. The gain is proportional with the
value at 100% load. Use the droop function when several motors
speed at which errors change. Setting this
are mechanically connected and the load on motors can differ.
parameter to zero disables the differen-
To use this parameter, set parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation to
tiator. This parameter is used with
[0], otherwise parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop is ignored.
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed
Range: Function: closed loop control.
0 RPM* [0 - 200 RPM] Enter the droop value at
100% load. 7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range: Function:
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain
5* [1 - Set a limit for the gain provided by the differen-
Range: Function: 20] tiator. Since the differential gain increases at higher
Size [0 - Enter the speed controller proportional gain. frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful. For
related* 1] The proportional gain amplifies the error (i.e. example, set up a pure D-link at low frequencies
the deviation between the feedback signal and and a constant D-link at higher frequencies. This

7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit Feedback
175ZA293.11
Range: Function:
parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration Disturbed feedback signal
Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.
3 3 7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time

Range: Function:
Size [0.1 Set a time constant for the speed control low-
related* - 100 pass filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-
ms] state performance and dampens oscillations
on the feedback signal. This is an advantage if
there is a great amount of noise in the system,
see Illustration 3.45. For example, if a time
constant (τ) of 100 ms is programmed, the
cut-off frequency for the low-pass filter is
1/0.1= 10 RAD/s, corresponding to (10/2 x π) =
0.6 t (Sec.)
1.6 Hz. The PID regulator only regulates a
feedback signal that varies by a frequency of
less than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback signal varies
Lowpass filter
by a higher frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID
regulator does not react.
fg = 10 Hz
Practical settings of parameter 7-06 Speed PID
Lowpass Filter Time taken from the number of
pulses per revolutions from encoder: Feedback
Encoder PPR Parameter 7-06 Speed PID

Lowpass Filter Time Filtered feedback signal
512 10 ms
1024 5 ms
2048 2 ms
4096 1 ms
NOTICE
Severe filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode [1] Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
Adjust the filter time in Flux Sensorless to
3-5 ms. 0.6 t (Sec.)
Illustration 3.45 Feedback Signal

7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 3.9.2 7-1* Torque PI Control
Range: Function:
1* [ 0.0001 - 32.0000] The frequency converter multiplies the
Parameters for configuring the torque PI control.
speed feedback by this ratio. 7-10 Torque PI Feedback Source
Select the feedback source for the torque controller.
3 3
130BA871.10
Option: Function:
[0] * Controller Off Select to operate in open loop.
[1] Analog Input 53 Select to use torque feedback from the

n1 n2
analogue input.
[2] Analog Input 54 Select to use torque feedback from the

Motor
analogue input.
[3] Estimed Torque Select to use the torque feedback

Par 7-07=1.00 Par 7-07=n1/n2 estimated by the frequency converter.
Illustration 3.46 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain
Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor torque controller. Selection of a high value
makes the controller react faster. Too high
Range: Function:
a setting leads to controller instability.
0 %* [0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed
controller by the amount specified. This
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop. Range: Function:
0.020 s* [0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque
7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp controller. Selection of a low value makes
the controller react faster. Too low a
Range: Function:
setting leads to controller instability.
300 RPM* [10 - 100000 The speed error between ramp and
RPM] actual speed is held up against the
7-16 Torque PI Lowpass Filter Time
setting in this parameter. If the speed
error exceeds this parameter entry, the Enter the time constant for the torque control lowpass filter.
speed error is corrected via ramping Range: Function:
in a controlled way. 5 ms* [0.1 - 100 ms]
Motor 7-18 Torque PI Feed Forward Factor

130BC026.10
Speed
Enter the torque feed forward factor value. The reference signal
bypasses the torque controller by this value.
7-09
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %]
Torque
Limit
Time 7-19 Current Controller Rise Time
Motor Range: Function:
Speed
Size related* [15 - 100 %] Enter the value for the rise time of
the current controller as a
percentage of the control period.
7-09
Torque
Limit Time
Ramp Motor Speed
Illustration 3.47 Speed Error between Ramp and Actual Speed

3.9.3 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb. 3.9.4 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
Select the feedback sources for the Process PID Control, 7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control
and how this feedback should be handled. Option: Function:
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource Normal and inverse control are implemented by
3 3 Option: Function: introducing a difference between the reference

signal and the feedback signal.
The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to 2 different [0] * Normal Sets process control to increase the output
input signals. frequency.
Select which frequency converter input
[1] Inverse Sets process control to reduce the output
should be treated as the source of the
frequency.
first of these signals. The second input
signal is defined in
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup
parameter 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2
Resource.
Option: Function:
[0] Off Continues regulation of an error even when the
[0] * No function
output frequency cannot be increased or decreased.
[1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54 [1] * On Ceases regulation of an error when the output
frequency can no longer be adjusted.
[3] Frequency input
29
7-32 Process PID Start Speed
[4] Frequency input
33 Range: Function:
[7] Analog Input 0 RPM* [0 - Enter the motor speed to be attained as a
X30/11 6000 start signal for commencement of PID
[8] Analog Input RPM] control. When the power is switched on, the
X30/12 frequency converter commences ramping
[15] Analog Input and then operates under speed open loop
X48/2 control. When the Process PID start speed is
reached, the frequency converter changes to
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource Process PID control.
Option: Function:
The effective feedback signal is made 7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain
up of the sum of up to 2 different Range: Function:
input signals. Select which frequency 0.01* [0 - 10] Enter the PID proportional gain. The proportional
converter input should be treated as gain multiplies the error between the set-point
the source of the second of these and the feedback signal.
signals. The first input signal is defined
in parameter 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 7-34 Process PID Integral Time
Resource. Range: Function:
[0] * No function 10000 s* [0.01 - Enter the PID integral time. The integrator
[1] Analog Input 53 10000 s] provides an increasing gain at a constant
[2] Analog Input 54 error between the set-point and the
[3] Frequency input feedback signal. The integral time is the
29 time needed by the integrator to reach
[4] Frequency input the same gain as the proportional gain.
33
[7] Analog Input 7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time
X30/11 Range: Function:
[8] Analog Input 0 s* [0 - 10 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differen-
X30/12 tiator does not react to a constant error, but
[15] Analog Input provides a gain only when the error changes.
X48/2 The shorter the PID differentiation time, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.

7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
5* [1 - 50] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If 100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
there is no limit, the DG increases when there are 100 %] process PID output when operating at the
fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure differ- minimum reference. The scaling percentage is
entiator gain at slow changes and a constant
differentiator gain where fast changes occur.
adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref.
(parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min.
3 3
Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor (parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max.
Range: Function: Ref.).
0 %* [0 - Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF

7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.
200 %] factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID Range: Function:
control only affects the remaining fraction of the 100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
control signal. Any change to this parameter will 100 %] process PID output when operating at the
thus affect the motor speed. When the FF factor maximum reference. The scaling percentage is
is activated, it provides less overshoot and high adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref.
dynamics when changing the set-point. (parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min.
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.
active when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode (parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max.
is set to [3] Process. Ref.).
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource

5 %* [0 - 200 Enter the On reference bandwidth. When the [0] * No function Select which frequency converter input
%] PID Control Error (the difference between the should be used as the feed forward
reference and the feedback) is less than the factor. The FF factor is added directly to
set value of this parameter, the On reference the output of the PID controller. This
status bit is high, i.e. =1. increases dynamic performance.
[1] Analog Input 53

3.9.5 7-4* Advanced Process PID Ctrl. [2] Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config- 29
uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8] [8] Frequency input
Extended PID Speed OL. 33
[11] Local bus
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset reference
Option: Function: [20] Digital pot.meter
[0] * No [21] Analog input
[1] Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID X30/11
controller. The selection automatically returns to [0] [22] Analog input
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from X30/12
a well-defined point after changing something in the [29] Analog Input
process, e.g. changing a textile roll. X48/2
[32] Bus PCD Selects a bus reference configured by
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp parameter 8-02 Control Word Source.
Range: Function: Change parameter 8-42 PCD Write
-100 %* [ -100 - par. 7-42 %] Enter a negative limit for the Configuration for the bus used to make
process PID controller output. the feed-forward available in
parameter 7-48 PCD Feed Forward. Use
7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp index 1 for feed forward [748] (and
index 2 for reference [1682]).
Range: Function:
100 %* [ par. 7-41 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the [36] MCO
process PID controller output.

7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. 7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed-forward factor to 0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed-forward
treat the FF resource as a positive value. signal when ramping down.
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the feed forward resource
3 3 as a negative value.
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time
Range: Function:
7-48 PCD Feed Forward 0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the reference
Range: Function: s] first-order low-pass filter. The low-pass
filter improves steady-state performance
0* [0 - 65535] Readout parameter where the bus
and dampens oscillations on the
parameter 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
reference/feedback signals. However,
[32]) can be read.
severe filtering can be detrimental to
dynamic performance.
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
Option: Function: 7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
Range: Function:
the process PID controller as is.
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the feedback first-
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
from the process PID controller. This operation is improves steady-state performance and
performed after the feed-forward factor is applied. dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However, severe
filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
3.9.6 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
performance.
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-

uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
Extended PID Speed OL.
7-50 Process PID Extended PID

Option: Function:
[0] Disabled Disables the extended parts of the process PID
controller.
[1] * Enabled Enables the extended parts of the PID controller.
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain

Range: Function:
1* [0 - The feed forward is used to obtain the desired level,
100] based on a well-known signal available. The PID
controller then only takes care of the smaller part of
the control, necessary because of unknown
characters. The standard feed-forward factor in
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
always related to the reference whereas
parameter 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain has more
choices. In winder applications, the feed-forward
factor is typically the line speed of the system.
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up

Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed-forward
signal when ramping up.

3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Options Range: Function:
[1.0 0.1-18000.0 s Enter the maximum time expected to pass
3.10.1 8-0* General Settings s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
8-01 Control Site
Option: Function:
indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in
3 3
The setting in this parameter overrides the parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to Function is then carried out. A valid control
parameter 8-56 Preset Reference Select. word triggers the timeout counter.
20 s* [0.1 - Enter the maximum time expected to pass
[0] Digital and Control by using both digital input and
18000.0 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
ctrl.word control word.
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
[1] Digital only Control by using digital inputs only. indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in
[2] Controlword Control by using control word only.
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
only
Function is then carried out. A valid control
8-02 Control Word Source word triggers the timeout counter.
Option: Function: 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
NOTICE Select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when
This parameter cannot be adjusted the control word fails to be updated within the time period
while the motor is running. specified in 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Option: Function:
Select the source of the control word: 1 of 2 [0] Off Resumes control via serial bus (fieldbus or
serial interfaces or 4 installed options. During standard) using the most recent control
initial power-up, the frequency converter word.
automatically sets this parameter to [3] Option
[1] Freeze output Freezes output frequency until communi-
A, if it detects a valid fieldbus option installed
cation resumes.
in slot A. When the option is removed, the
frequency converter detects a configuration [2] Stop Stops with auto restart when communi-
change, sets parameter 8-02 Control Word cation resumes.
Source back to default setting RS-485, and
[3] Jogging Runs the motor at jog frequency until
trips. If an option is installed after initial
communication resumes.
power-up, the setting of
parameter 8-02 Control Word Source does not [4] Max. speed Runs the motor at maximum frequency until
change, but the frequency converter trips and communication resumes.
displays: Alarm 67 Option Changed. [5] Stop and trip Stops the motor, then resets the frequency
When retrofitting a bus option into a converter to restart: Via the fieldbus, via
frequency converter that did not have a bus [Reset], or via a digital input.
option installed to begin with, take an active
[7] Select setup 1 Changes the set-up upon reestablishment of
decision to move the control to bus-based.
communication following a control word
This is required for safety reasons to avoid an
timeout. If communication resumes after a
accidental change.
timeout, parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout
[0] None Function defines whether to resume the set-
[1] FC RS485 up used before the timeout, or to retain the
[2] FC USB set-up endorsed by the timeout function.
[3] Option A
[8] Select setup 2 See [7] Select set-up 1
[4] Option B
[9] Select setup 3 See [7] Select set-up 1
[5] Option C0
[6] Option C1 [10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select set-up 1
[30] External Can [26] Trip

NOTICE 8-08 Readout Filtering

To change the set-up after a timeout, configure as If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
follows: this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up and power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.
select the relevant link in parameter 0-12 This Set-up Option: Function:
3 3 Linked to. 16-14 Motor current
Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm]
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Option: Function: Parameter 16-22 Torque [%]
Parameter 16-25 Torque [Nm] High
Select the action after receiving a valid control
word following a timeout. This parameter is
active only when 8-04 Control Timeout Function 3.10.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
is set to [7] Set-up 1, [8] Set-up 2, [9] Set-up 3 or
[10] Set-up 4.
8-10 Control Word Profile
[0] Hold set- Retains the set-up selected in 8-04 Control Select the interpretation of the control and status words
up Timeout Function and displays a warning, until corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
8-06 Reset Control Timeout toggles. Then the for the fieldbus installed in slot A are visible in the LCP display.
frequency converter resumes its original set-up. For guidelines in selection of [0] FC profile and [1] PROFIdrive
[1] * Resume Resumes the set-up active before the timeout. profile, refer to the Serial communication via RS-485 Interface
set-up section in the Design Guide.
For additional guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile,
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout refer to the Operating Instructions for the installed fieldbus.
This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been Option: Function:
selected in parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.
[0] * FC profile
Option: Function: [1] PROFIdrive profile
[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in [5] ODVA
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function, [7] CANopen DSP 402
following a control word timeout. [8] MCO
[1] Do reset Returns the frequency converter to the
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
original set-up following a control word
timeout. The frequency converter performs The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are config-
the reset and then immediately reverts to the urable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the
[0] Do not reset setting. following options.
Option: Function:
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] No function The input is always low.
This parameter has no function for DeviceNet. [1] Profile Default Depending on the profile set
Option: Function: in 8-10 Control Profile.
[0] * Disable [2] Alarm 68 Only The input goes high
[1] Trigger on alarms whenever Alarm 68 is active
[2] Trigger alarm/warn. This parameter has no function for and goes low whenever no
DeviceNet. alarm 68 is activated.
[3] Trip excl Alarm 68

8-08 Readout Filtering
[10] T18 DI status
If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
[11] T19 DI status
this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
[12] T27 DI status
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.
[13] T29 DI status
Option: Function:
[14] T32 DI status
[0] Motor Data Select [0] for normal bus readouts. [15] T33 DI status
Std-Filt.
[16] T37 DI status The input goes high
[1] Motor Data Select [1] for filtered bus readouts of whenever terminal 37 has 0
LP-Filter the following parameters: V and goes low whenever
16-10 Power [kW] terminal 37 has 24 V.
16-11 Power [hp]
16-12 Motor Voltage [21] Thermal warning

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are config- Option: Function:
urable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
following options. PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
Option: Function: [6] PID enable When enabled, enables the extended process
[30]
[40]
Brake fault (IGBT)
Out of ref range
PID controller. Equivalent to
parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.
3 3
[41] Load throttle active Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration
[60] Comparator 0 Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
[61] Comparator 1 PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
[64] Comparator 4 The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).
[65] Comparator 5 Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
[70] Logic Rule 0 options.
[71] Logic Rule 1 Option: Function:
[72] Logic Rule 2 [0] * Off
[73] Logic Rule 3 [1] 10 Volts low warning
[74] Logic Rule 4 [2] Live zero warning
[75] Logic Rule 5 [3] No motor warning
[80] SL digital out A [4] Mains phase loss warning
[81] SL digital out B [5] DC link voltage high warning
[82] SL digital out C [6] DC link voltage low warning
[83] SL digital out D [7] DC overvoltage warning
[84] SL digital out E [8] DC undervoltage warning
[85] SL digital out F [9] Inverter overloaded warning
[86] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [10] Motor ETR overtemp warning
[87] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [11] Motor thermistor overtemp warning
[88] ATEX ETR cur. warning [12] Torque limit warning
[89] ATEX ETR freq. warning [13] Over current warning
[90] Safe Function active [14] Earth fault warning
[91] Safe Opt. Reset req. [17] Controlword timeout warning
[19] Discharge temp high warning
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
[22] Hoist mech brake warning
Option: Function: [23] Internal fans warning
Selection of control word bit 10, if it is active [24] External fans warning
low or active high.
[25] Brake resistor short circuit warning
[0] None [26] Brake powerlimit warning
[1] * Profile [27] Brake chopper short circuit warning
default [28] Brake check warning
[2] CTW Valid, [29] Heatsink temperature warning
active low [30] Motor phase U warning
[3] Safe [31] Motor phase V warning
Option [32] Motor phase W warning
Reset [34] Fieldbus communication warning
[4] PID error When enabled, it inverts the resulting error [36] Mains failure warning
inverse from the process PID controller. Available only [40] T27 overload warning
if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
[41] T29 overload warning
[6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL or
[45] Earth fault 2 warning
[8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[47] 24V supply low warning
[5] PID reset I When enabled, resets the I-part of the Process [58] AMA internal fault warning
part PID controller. Equivalent to [59] Current limit warning
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset. [60] External interlock warning
Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration [61] Feedback error warning

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15). The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).
Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options. options.
3 3 [62]
[64]
Frequency max warning
Voltage limit warning
[10069]
[10073]
Powercard temp alarm
Safestop auto restart alarm
[65] Controlboard overtemp warning [10074] PTC thermistor alarm
[66] Heatsink temp low warning [10075] Illegal profile alarm
[68] Safe stop warning [10078] Tracking error alarm
[73] Safe stop autorestart warning [10079] Illegal PS config alarm
[76] Power unit setup warning [10081] CSIV corrupt alarm
[77] Reduced powermode warning [10082] CSIV param error alarm
[78] Tracking error warning [10084] No safety option alarm
[89] Mech brake sliding warning [10090] Feedback monitor alarm
[163] ATEX ETR cur limit warning [10091] AI54 settings alarm
[165] ATEX ETR freq limit warning [10164] ATEX ETR current lim alarm
[10002] Live zero error alarm [10166] ATEX ETR freq limit alarm
[10004] Mains phase loss alarm
8-19 Product Code
[10007] DC overvoltage alarm
[10008] DC undervoltage alarm Range: Function:
[10009] Inverter overload alarm Size [0 - Select [0] to readout the actual
[10010] ETR overtemperature alarm related* 2147483647] fieldbus product code according
[10011] Thermistor overtemp alarm to the mounted fieldbus option.
Select [1] to read out the actual
[10012] Torque limit alarm
Vendor ID.
[10013] Overcurrent alarm
[10014] Earth fault alarm
[10016] Short circuit alarm 3.10.3 8-3* FC Port Settings
[10017] CTW timeout alarm
[10022] Hoist brake alarm 8-30 Protocol
[10026] Brake powerlimit alarm
Option: Function:
[10027] Brakechopper shortcircuit alarm
Select the protocol to be used. Changing
[10028] Brake check alarm
protocol is not effective until after powering
[10029] Heatsink temp alarm
off the frequency converter.
[10030] Phase U missing alarm
[0] * FC
[10031] Phase V missing alarm
[1] FC MC
[10032] Phase W missing alarm
[2] Modbus RTU
[10033] Inrush fault alarm
[10034] Fieldbus com faul alarm 8-31 Address
[10036] Mains failure alarm Range: Function:
[10037] Phase imbalance alarm Size related* [ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the FC (standard)
[10038] Internal fault port.
[10039] Heatsink sensor alarm Valid range: 1-126.
[10045] Earth fault 2 alarm
[10046] Powercard supply alarm 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
[10047] 24V supply low alarm Option: Function:
[10048] 1.8V supply low alarm [0] 2400 Baud Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.
[10049] Speed limit alarm
[1] 4800 Baud
[10060] Ext interlock alarm
[2] 9600 Baud
[10061] Feedback error alarm
[3] 19200 Baud
[10063] Mech brake low alarm
[4] 38400 Baud
[10065] Controlboard overtemp alarm
[5] 57600 Baud
[10067] Option config changed alarm
[6] 76800 Baud
[10068] Safe stop alarm

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate 8-40 Telegram Selection

[7] 115200 Baud [101] PPO 1
[102] PPO 2
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
[103] PPO 3
Option:
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
Function: [104] PPO 4
[105] PPO 5
3 3
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit [106] PPO 6
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit [107] PPO 7
[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits [108] PPO 8
[200] Custom telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable
8-34 Estimated cycle time
telegrams or standard telegrams for
Range: Function: the FC port.
0 ms* [0 - In noisy environments, the interface may
[202] Custom telegram 3
1000000 ms] be blocked due to overload or bad frames.
This parameter specifies the time between 8-41 Parameters for Signals
2 consecutive frames on the network. If the
Option: Function:
interface does not detect valid frames in
[0] * None This parameter
that time, it flushes the receive buffer.
contains a list of
signals available for
8-35 Minimum Response Delay
selection in
Range: Function:
parameter 8-42 PCD
10 ms* [ 1 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time Write Configuration
ms] between receiving a request and and
transmitting a response. This is used for parameter 8-43 PCD
overcoming modem turnaround delays. Read Configuration.
[15] Readout: actual setup

8-36 Max Response Delay
[302] Minimum Reference
Range: Function:
[303] Maximum Reference
Size [ 11 - Specify the maximum permissible
[312] Catch up/slow Down Value
related* 10001 ms] delay time between transmitting a
[341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
request and receiving a response. If a
[342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
response from the frequency converter
[351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
is exceeding the time setting, then it is
discarded. [352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
[380] Jog Ramp Time
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay [381] Quick Stop Ramp Time
[411] Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:
[412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Size [ 0.00 - Specify the maximum permissible time
[413] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
related* 35.00 ms] interval between receipt of 2 bytes.
[414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
This parameter activates timeout if
transmission is interrupted. [416] Torque Limit Motor Mode
This parameter is active only when [417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
8-30 Protocol is set to [1] FC MC [553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
protocol. [558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control
[593] Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
3.10.4 8-4* FC MC Protocol Set [595] Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[597] Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
8-40 Telegram Selection [615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Option: Function: [625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[1] * Standard telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable [653] Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl
telegrams or standard telegrams for [663] Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
the FC port. [673] Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
[100] None [683] Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-41 Parameters for Signals

[748] PCD Feed Forward [1664] Analog Input 54
[890] Bus Jog 1 Speed [1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[891] Bus Jog 2 Speed [1666] Digital Output [bin]
3 3 [1472] Legacy Alarm Word

[1473] Legacy Warning Word
[1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1500] Operating hours [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1501] Running Hours [1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1502] kWh Counter [1672] Counter A
[1600] Control Word [1673] Counter B
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1674] Prec. Stop Counter
[1602] Reference % [1675] Analog In X30/11
[1603] Status Word [1676] Analog In X30/12
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1606] Absolute Position [1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
[1609] Custom Readout [1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
[1610] Power [kW] [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[1611] Power [hp] [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[1612] Motor Voltage [1684] Comm. Option STW
[1613] Frequency [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[1614] Motor current [1686] FC Port REF 1
[1615] Frequency [%] [1687] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1616] Torque [Nm] [1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word
[1617] Speed [RPM] [1690] Alarm Word
[1618] Motor Thermal [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1619] KTY sensor temperature [1692] Warning Word
[1620] Motor Angle [1693] Warning Word 2
[1621] Torque [%] High Res. [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1622] Torque [%] [1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
[1623] Motor Shaft Power [kW] [1837] Temp. Input X48/4
[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance [1838] Temp. Input X48/7
[1625] Torque [Nm] High [1839] Temp. Input X48/10
[1630] DC Link Voltage [1860] Digital Input 2
[1632] Brake Energy /s [3310] Sync Factor Master
[1633] Brake Energy Average [3311] Sync Factor Slave
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3401] PCD 1 Write to MCO
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3402] PCD 2 Write to MCO
[1638] SL Controller State [3403] PCD 3 Write to MCO
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3404] PCD 4 Write to MCO
[1645] Motor Phase U Current [3405] PCD 5 Write to MCO
[1646] Motor Phase V Current [3406] PCD 6 Write to MCO
[1647] Motor Phase W Current [3407] PCD 7 Write to MCO
[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] [3408] PCD 8 Write to MCO
[1650] External Reference [3409] PCD 9 Write to MCO
[1651] Pulse Reference [3410] PCD 10 Write to MCO
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3421] PCD 1 Read from MCO
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3422] PCD 2 Read from MCO
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3423] PCD 3 Read from MCO
[1660] Digital Input [3424] PCD 4 Read from MCO
[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting [3425] PCD 5 Read from MCO
[1662] Analog Input 53 [3426] PCD 6 Read from MCO
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting [3427] PCD 7 Read from MCO

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-45 BTM Transaction Command

[3428] PCD 8 Read from MCO [1] Start Transaction
[3429] PCD 9 Read from MCO [2] Commit transaction
[3430] PCD 10 Read from MCO [3] Clear error
[3440] Digital Inputs
[3441] Digital Outputs
8-46 BTM Transaction Status 3 3
[3450] Actual Position Option: Function:
[3451] Commanded Position [0] * Off
[3452] Actual Master Position [1] Transaction Started
[3453] Slave Index Position [2] Transaction Comitting
[3454] Master Index Position [3] Transaction Timeout
[3455] Curve Position [4] Err. Non-existing Par.
[3456] Track Error [5] Err. Par. Out of Range
[3457] Synchronizing Error [6] Transaction Failed
[3458] Actual Velocity
8-47 BTM Timeout
[3459] Actual Master Velocity
Range: Function:
[3460] Synchronizing Status
60 s* [1 - 360 s] Select the BTM Timeout after a BTM
[3461] Axis Status
transaction has been started.
[3462] Program Status
[3464] MCO 302 Status
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors
[3465] MCO 302 Control
Range: Function:
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 21* [0 - 21] Selects the maximum allowed number of Bulk
Transfer Mode errors before aborting. If it is set to
[4280] Safe Option Status
maximum, there is no abort.
[4282] Safe Control Word
[4283] Safe Status Word
8-49 BTM Error Log
[4285] Active Safe Func.
Range: Function:
8-42 PCD Write Configuration 0.255* [0.000 - List of parameters that failed during
Range: Function: 9999.255] Bulk Transfer Mode. The value after the
Size [0 - Select the parameters to be assigned to decimal break is the error code (255
related* 9999] PCD's telegrams. The number of means no error).
available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. The values in PCDs are
3.10.5 8-5* Digital/Bus
then written to the selected parameters
as data values.
Parameters for configuring the control word digital/bus
merging.
8-43 PCD Read Configuration
Range: Function:
Size [0 - 9999] Select the parameters to be assigned to
NOTICE
related* PCDs of the telegrams. The number of These parameters are active only when
available PCDs depends on the parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual word.
data values of the selected parameters.
8-50 Coasting Select
8-45 BTM Transaction Command
Option: Function:
Option: Function: Select control of the coasting function via the
NOTICE terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
This parameter cannot be [0] Digital Activates start command via a digital input.
adjusted while the motor is input
running. [1] Bus Activates start command via the serial
communication port or fieldbus option.
[0] * Off

8-50 Coasting Select 8-53 Start Select

[2] Logic Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial [3] * Logic OR Activates a start command via the fieldbus/serial
AND communication port, AND additionally via one communication port OR via one of the digital
of the digital inputs. inputs.
3 3 [3] * Logic OR Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
8-54 Reversing Select
inputs. Option: Function:
[0] Digital Select control of the frequency converter
8-51 Quick Stop Select input reverse function via the terminals (digital input)
Select control of the Quick Stop function via the terminals and/or via the fieldbus.
(digital input) and/or via the bus. [1] Bus Activates the reverse command via the serial
Option: Function: communication port or fieldbus option.
[0] Digital input [2] Logic Activates the reverse command via the
[1] Bus AND fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
[2] Logic AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR
[3] * Logic OR Activates the reverse command via the
8-52 DC Brake Select fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
of the digital inputs.
Option: Function:
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals 8-55 Set-up Select
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.
Option: Function:
NOTICE Select control of the frequency converter set-up
Only selection [0] Digital input is available selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] via the fieldbus.
PM non-salient SPM. [0] Digital Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.
input
[0] Digital Activates start command via a digital input. [1] Bus Activates the set-up selection via the serial
input communication port or fieldbus option.
[1] Bus Activates start command via the serial communi-
[2] Logic Activates the set-up selection via the fieldbus/
cation port or fieldbus option.
AND serial communication port, AND additionally via
[2] Logic Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial one of the digital inputs.
AND communication port, AND additionally via one of
[3] * Logic OR Activate the set-up selection via the fieldbus/
the digital inputs.
serial communication port OR via one of the
[3] Logic OR Activates start command via the fieldbus/serial digital inputs.
communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs. 8-56 Preset Reference Select
Option: Function:
8-53 Start Select
Select control of the preset reference selection
Option: Function: via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the
Select control of the frequency converter start fieldbus.
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
[0] Digital Activates preset reference selection via a digital
via the fieldbus.
input input.
[0] Digital Activates a start command via a digital input.
[1] Bus Activates preset reference selection via the
input
serial communication port or fieldbus option.
[1] Bus Activates a start command via the serial
communication port or fieldbus option. [2] Logic Activates preset reference selection via the
AND fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
[2] Logic Activates a start command via the fieldbus/serial
additionally via one of the digital inputs.
AND communication port, AND additionally via one
of the digital inputs. [3] * Logic OR Activates the preset reference selection via the
fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
of the digital inputs.

8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select 3.10.7 8-9* Bus Jog

Select control of the frequency converter OFF2 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital Range: Function:
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
100 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
Profidrive profile.
Option: Function:
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.
3 3
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus 8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
[2] Logic AND Range: Function:
[3] * Logic OR 200 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select
or fieldbus option.
Select control of the frequency converter OFF3 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is 3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1] For Profibus parameter descriptions, see the Profibus
Profidrive profile. Operating Instructions.
Option: Function: 3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNET CAN
[0] Digital input
Fieldbus
[1] Bus
[2] Logic AND For DeviceNET parameter descriptions, see the DeviceNET
[3] * Logic OR Operating Instructions.
3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet

3.10.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
For Ethernet parameter descriptions, see the Ethernet
These parameters are used for monitoring the bus Operating Instructions.
communication via the FC Port.
8-80 Bus Message Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams detected on the bus.
8-81 Bus Error Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams
with faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the bus.
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams addressed to the follower, sent by the
8-83 Slave Error Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error
telegrams, which could not be executed by the

3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control Start
130BA062.14
event P13-01
Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user- State 1

13-51.0
defined actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52.0 State 2
Stop 13-51.1
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined event P13-02 13-52.1
event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is

3 3
Stop
event P13-02
evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. State 4
13-51.3
The condition for an event can be a particular status or 13-52.3
State 3
that the output from a Logic Rule or a Comparator 13-51.2
13-52.2
Operand becomes TRUE. That leads to an associated action
as illustrated:
Stop
event P13-02
Par. 13-51 Par. 13-52 Illustration 3.49 Events and Actions
130BB671.13
SL Controller Event SL Controller Action
Running Coast Starting and stopping the SLC

Warning Start timer
Torque limit Set Do X low
Start and stop the SLC by selecting [1] On or [0] Off in
Digital input X 30/2 Select set-up 2 parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The SLC always starts
... ...
in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]). The SLC starts
Par. 13-43
when the Start Event (defined in parameter 13-01 Start
Logic Rule Operator 2 Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided that [1] On is
selected in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode). The SLC
stops when the stop event (parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is
TRUE. Parameter 13-03 Reset SLC resets all SLC parameters
...
and starts programming from scratch.
...
Par. 13-11
Comparator Operator NOTICE
SLC is only active in Auto mode, not Hand On mode.
=
TRUE longer than..
...
3.14.1 13-0* SLC Settings
...
Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the
smart logic control sequence. The logic functions and
Illustration 3.48 Smart Logic Control (SLC)
comparators are always running in the background, which
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.
Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs 13-00 SL Controller Mode
(states). This means that when event [0] is fulfilled (attains Option: Function:
the value TRUE), action [0] is executed. After this, the [0] Off Disables the Smart Logic Controller.
conditions of event [1] are evaluated and if evaluated
[1] On Enables the Smart Logic Controller.
TRUE, action [1] is executed and so on. Only 1 event is
evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as FALSE,
nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan 13-01 Start Event
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means that Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
when the SLC starts, it evaluates event [0] (and only event Control.
[0]) each scan interval. Only when event [0] is evaluated Option: Function:
TRUE, the SLC executes action [0] and starts evaluating [0] False Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input
event [1]. It is possible to program from 1 to 20 events and to activate Smart Logic Control.
actions. Enters the fixed value - FALSE
When the last event/action has been executed, the
[1] True Enters the fixed value - TRUE.
sequence starts over again from event [0]/action [0].
Illustration 3.49 shows an example with 3 events/actions: [2] Running The motor is running.
[3] In range The motor is running within the

programmed current and speed ranges
set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current

13-01 Start Event 13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
Control. Control.
Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed [21] Alarm (trip lock) A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
High.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0. 3 3
[4] On reference The motor is running on reference.
[23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1.
[5] Torque limit The torque limit, set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator [25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3.
Mode, has been exceeded. [26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0.
[6] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in [27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1.
parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been
[28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2.
exceeded.
[7] Out of current The motor current is outside the range
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [33] Digital input Use the result of digital input 18.
DI18
[8] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in
[34] Digital input Use the result of digital input 19.
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.
DI19
[9] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in [35] Digital input Use the result of digital input 27.
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. DI27
[10] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in [36] Digital input Use the result of digital input 29.
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and DI29
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. [37] Digital input Use the result of digital input 32.
DI32
[11] Below speed The output speed is lower than the
low setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed [38] Digital input Use the result of digital input 33.
Low. DI33
[39] Start command A start command is issued.
[12] Above speed The output speed is higher than the
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed [40] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Quick Stop,
High. Coast) is issued – and not from the SLC
itself.
[13] Out of feedb. The feedback is outside the range set in
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low [41] Reset Trip A reset is issued.
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback [42] Auto-reset Trip An Auto reset is performed.
High.
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
[14] Below feedb. The feedback is below the limit set in graphical LCP.
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on the
[15] Above feedb. The feedback is above the limit set in graphical LCP.
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
[16] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the graphical LCP.
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
motor, the frequency converter, the
graphical LCP.
brake resistor or the thermistor.
[17] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the

[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
range specified voltage range. graphical LCP.
[18] Reversing The output is high when the frequency [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
converter is running counterclockwise graphical LCP.
(the logical product of the status bits
“running” AND “reverse”).
[19] Warning A warning is active.
[20] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active.

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Control. Logic Control.
[76] Digital input Use the value of x30/2 (MCB 101 GPIO). [11] Below speed low
3 3 [77]
x30/2
Digital input Use the value of x30/3 (MCB 101 GPIO).
[12]
[13]
Above speed high
Out of feedb. range
x30/3 [14] Below feedb. low
[78] Digital input Use the value of x30/4 (MCB 101 GPIO). [15] Above feedb. high
x30/4 [16] Thermal warning
[79] Digital input Use the value of x46/1 (MCB 113 Ext. [17] Mains out of range
x46/1 Relay Card). [18] Reversing
[80] Digital input Use the value of x46/3 (MCB 113 Ext. [19] Warning
x46/3 Relay Card). [20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[81] Digital input Use the value of x46/5 (MCB 113 Ext.
x46/5 Relay Card). [22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
x46/7 Relay Card).
[25] Comparator 3
[83] Digital input Use the value of x46/9 (MCB 113 Ext. [26] Logic rule 0
x46/9 Relay Card). [27] Logic rule 1
[84] Digital input Use the value of x46/11 (MCB 113 Ext. [28] Logic rule 2
x46/11 Relay Card). [29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Time-out 0
[31] SL Time-out 1
x46/13 Relay Card).
[32] SL Time-out 2
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators.
[33] Digital input DI18
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. [34] Digital input DI19
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. [39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. [42] Auto-reset Trip
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
13-02 Stop Event the graphical LCP.
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
Logic Control.
on the graphical LCP.
Option: Function:
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on
[0] False For descriptions [0]-[61], see
the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-01 Start Event Start
Event. [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
[1] True
[2] Running [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on
[3] In range the graphical LCP.
[4] On reference [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on
[5] Torque limit the graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit
[50] Comparator 4
[7] Out of current range
[51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low
[60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high
[61] Logic rule 5
[10] Out of speed range

13-02 Stop Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Logic Control. Logic Control.
[70] SL Time-out 3 Smart Logic Controller timer 3 is [95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1*
timed out. Comparators.
3 3
[75] Start command given [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
[76] Digital input x30/2 Comparators
[77] Digital input x30/3 [101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1*
[78] Digital input x30/4 Comparators.
[79] Digital input x46/1
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[83] Digital input x46/9 [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If [109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.
13-03 Reset SLC
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Option: Function:
Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[0] * Do not reset Retains programmed settings in all
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
SLC parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control.
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output [1] Reset SLC Resets all parameters in parameter group
is 1. 13-** Smart Logic Control to default settings.

warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] 3.14.2 13-1* Comparators
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
cur.lim.warning is active, the
(i.e. output frequency, output current, analog input etc.) to
output is 1.
fixed preset values.
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators.

Par. 13-11 13-10 Comparator Operand
130BB672.10
Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10 Array [6]
Comparator Operand
=
Option: Function:
Par. 13-12 TRUE longer than. [15] Analog input [V] Analog input AICCT [17] [°]. AIS24V is
Comparator Value ... AIS24V switch mode power supply: SMPS 24V.
3 3 ...
[17] Analog input [°]. AICCT is control card temperature.
Illustration 3.50 Comparators AICCT
[18] Pulse input Expressed as a percentage.
FI29
There are digital values that are compared to fixed time [19] Pulse input Expressed as a percentage.
values. See explanation in parameter 13-10 Comparator FI33
Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan [20] Alarm number The error number.
interval. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) directly. All [21] Warning
parameters in this parameter group are array parameters number
with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to program comparator 0, [22] Analog input
select index 1 to program comparator 1, and so on. x30 11
13-10 Comparator Operand [23] Analog input
x30 12
Array [6]
[30] Counter A Number of counts.
Option: Function:
[31] Counter B Number of counts.
Options [1] to [31] are variables which
are compared based on their values. [32] Process PID Value of the PID Error
Options [50] to [186] are digital values Error (parameter 18-90 Process PID Error).
(TRUE/FALSE) where the comparison is
[33] Process PID Value of the PID Output
based on the amount of time during
Output (parameter 18-91 Process PID Output).
which they are set to TRUE or FALSE,
respectively. See [50] FALSE Enters the fixed value of false in the
parameter 13-11 Comparator Operator. comparator.
Select the variable to be monitored by [51] TRUE Enters the fixed value of true in the
the comparator. comparator.
[0] DISABLED The comparator is disabled. [52] Control ready The control board receives supply
[1] Reference % The resulting remote reference (not local) voltage.
as a percentage. [53] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
[2] Feedback % [RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter operation and applies a supply signal on
0-02 Motor Speed Unit. the control board.
[3] Motor speed [RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter [54] Running The motor is running.
0-02 Motor Speed Unit. [55] Reversing The output is high when the frequency
[4] Motor Current [A] converter is running counterclockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
[5] Motor torque [Nm]
“running” AND “reverse”).
[6] Motor power [kW] or [hp]
[56] In range The motor is running within the
[7] Motor voltage [V] programmed current and speed ranges
set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current
[8] DC-link voltage [V]
Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
[9] Motor Thermal Expressed as a percentage. High.
[10] Drive thermal Expressed as a percentage. [60] On reference The motor is running on reference.
[11] Heat sink temp. Expressed as a percentage. [61] Below The motor is running below the value
[12] Analog input Expressed as a percentage. reference, low given in parameter 4-54 Warning
AI53 Reference Low.
[13] Analog input Expressed as a percentage. [62] Above ref, high The motor is running above the value
AI54 given in parameter 4-55 Warning
[14] Analog input [V]. AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply. Reference High.
AIFB10

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[65] Torque limit The torque limit, set in [91] Torque limit & If the frequency converter has received a
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode stop stop signal and is at the torque limit, the
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode, has been exceeded.
signal is logic “0”.
3 3
[92] Brake fault The brake IGBT is short-circuited.
[66] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in (IGBT)
parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been [93] Mech. brake The mechanical brake is active.
exceeded. control
[67] Out of current The motor current is outside the range [94] Safe stop active
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [100] Comparator 0 The result of comparator 0.
[68] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in [101] Comparator 1 The result of comparator 1.
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. [102] Comparator 2 The result of comparator 2.
[69] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in [103] Comparator 3 The result of comparator 3.
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[104] Comparator 4 The result of comparator 4.
[70] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in
[105] Comparator 5 The result of comparator 5.
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. [110] Logic rule 0 The result of logic rule 0.
[71] Below speed The output speed is lower than the [111] Logic rule 1 The result of logic rule 1.
low setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed
[112] Logic rule 2 The result of logic rule 2.
Low.
[113] Logic rule 3 The result of logic rule 3.
[72] Above speed The output speed is higher than the
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed [114] Logic rule 4 The result of logic rule 4.
High. [115] Logic rule 5 The result of logic rule 5.
[75] Out of The feedback is outside the range set in [120] SL Time-out 0 The result of SLC timer 0.
feedback range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
[121] SL Time-out 1 The result of SLC timer 1.
High. [122] SL Time-out 2 The result of SLC timer 2.
[76] Below feedback The feedback is below the limit set in [123] SL Time-out 3 The result of SLC timer 3.
low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. [124] SL Time-out 4 The result of SLC timer 4.
[77] Above The feedback is above the limit set in [125] SL Time-out 5 The result of SLC timer 5.
feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[126] SL Time-out 6 The result of SLC timer 6.
[80] Thermal This operand becomes true when the
warning frequency converter detects any thermal [127] SL Time-out 7 The result of SLC timer 7.
warning, for instance, when the [130] Digital input Digital input 18. High = True.
temperature exceeds the limit in the DI18
motor, the frequency converter, the brake [131] Digital input Digital input 19. High = True.
resistor or thermistor. DI19
[82] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the [132] Digital input Digital input 27. High = True.
range specified voltage range. DI27
[133] Digital input Digital input 29. High = True.
[85] Warning If a warning is triggered, this operand
DI29
gets the warning number.
[134] Digital input Digital input 32. High = True.
[86] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active. DI32
[87] Alarm (trip A (Trip lock) alarm is active. [135] Digital input Digital input 33. High = True.
lock) DI33
[90] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via [150] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output A.
the serial communication port. output A
[151] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output B.
output B

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[152] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output C. [197] Digital input
output C x46/9
3 3 [153] SL digital
output D
Use the result of the SLC output D. [198] Digital input
x46/11
[154] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output E. [199] Digital input
output E x46/13
[155] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output F.
13-11 Comparator Operator
output F
[160] Relay 1 Relay 1 is active Array [6]
[161] Relay 2 Relay 2 is active

Option: Function:
Select the operator to be used in the
[162] Relay 3
comparison. This is an array parameter
[163] Relay 4 containing comparator operators 0 to 5.
[164] Relay 5
[0] < The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the
[165] Relay 6
variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
[166] Relay 7
Operand is smaller than the fixed value in
[167] Relay 8
13-12 Comparator Value. The result is FALSE, if
[168] Relay 9
the variable selected in
[180] Local High when parameter 3-13 Reference Site
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater
referecnce = [2] Local or when
than the fixed value in 13-12 Comparator Value.
active parameter 3-13 Reference Site is [0] Linked
to hand Auto, at the same time as the [1] ≈ (equal) The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the
LCP is in Hand On mode. variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
Operand is approximately equal to the fixed
[181] Remote High when parameter 3-13 Reference Site=
value in 13-12 Comparator Value.
reference active [1] Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto,
while the LCP is in Auto On mode. [2] > Inverse logic of option < [0].
[182] Start command High when there is an active start [5] TRUE
command, and no stop command. longer
than..
[183] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
[6] FALSE
Coast) is issued – and not from the SLC
longer
itself.
than..
[185] Drive in hand High when the frequency converter is in [7] TRUE
mode Hand mode. shorter
[186] Drive in auto High when the frequency converter is in than..
mode Auto mode. [8] FALSE
shorter
[187] Start command
than..
given
[190] Digital input 13-12 Comparator Value
x30/2 Array [6]
[191] Digital input
Range: Function:
x30/3
Size [-100000 - Enter the ‘trigger level’ for the
[192] Digital input
related* 100000 ] variable that is monitored by this
x30/4
comparator. This is an array
[193] Digital input
parameter containing comparator
x46/1
values 0 to 5.
[194] Digital input
x46/3
[195] Digital input
x46/5
[196] Digital input
x46/7

3.14.3 13-1* RS Flip Flops Parameter Setting Notes

Output from
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [94] RS
The Reset/Set Flip Flops hold the signal until set/reset. evaluating 13-15
Event [0] Flipflop 0
and 13-16
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
130BB959.10
[22] Run
Action [0]
Par. 13-15
RS-FF Operand S
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [27]
3 3
Par. 13-16
RS-FF Operand R Event [1] Logicrule 1
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
[24] Stop
Illustration 3.51 Reset/Set Flip Flops Action [1]
Table 3.23 Operators
2 parameters are used and the output can be used in the

13-15 RS-FF Operand S
logic rules and as events.
Option: Function:
[0] False
130BB960.10
S [1] True
[2] Running
R
[3] In range
Flip Flop Output [4] On reference
Illustration 3.52 Flip Flop Outputs [5] Torque limit
[6] Current Limit
The 2 operators can be selected from a long list. As a [8] Below I low
special case, the same digital input can be used as both [9] Above I high
Set and Reset, making it possible to use the same digital [10] Out of speed range
input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to [11] Below speed low
set up the same digital input as start/stop (example given [12] Above speed high
with DI32 but is not a requirement). [13] Out of feedb. range
[14] Below feedb. low
Parameter Setting Notes [15] Above feedb. high
Parameter 13-00 SL Controller [16] Thermal warning
On
Mode [17] Mains out of range
Parameter 13-01 Start Event TRUE [18] Reversing
Parameter 13-02 Stop Event FALSE [19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital
Boolean 1 [0] Input DI32 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule [22] Comparator 0

[2] Running [23] Comparator 1
Boolean 2 [0]
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule [3] AND [24] Comparator 2
Operator 1 [0] NOT [25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital [27] Logic rule 1
Boolean 1 [1] Input DI32 [28] Logic rule 2
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule [29] Logic rule 3
[2] Running
Boolean 2 [1]
[30] SL Time-out 0
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule
[1] AND [31] SL Time-out 1
Operator 1 [1]
[32] SL Time-out 2
Parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [26] Output from 13-41 [33] Digital input DI18
S [0] Logicrule 0 [0] [34] Digital input DI19
Parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand [27] Output from 13-41 [35] Digital input DI27
R [0] Logicrule 1 [1] [36] Digital input DI29

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-15 RS-FF Operand S

[39] Start command [104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[40] Drive stopped [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[41] Reset Trip
3 3 [42]
[43]
Auto-reset Trip
Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
[106] Relay 5
[107] Relay 6
X47/MCB 113
X47/MCB 113
the graphical LCP. [108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
the graphical LCP. 13-16 RS-FF Operand R
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on Option: Function:
the graphical LCP. [0] False
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on [1] True
the graphical LCP. [2] Running
[3] In range
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on
[4] On reference
the graphical LCP.
[5] Torque limit
[50] Comparator 4 [6] Current Limit
[51] Comparator 5 [7] Out of current range
[60] Logic rule 4 [8] Below I low
[61] Logic rule 5 [9] Above I high
[70] SL Time-out 3 [10] Out of speed range
[71] SL Time-out 4 [11] Below speed low
[72] SL Time-out 5 [12] Above speed high
[73] SL Time-out 6 [13] Out of feedb. range
[74] SL Time-out 7 [14] Below feedb. low
[75] Start command given [15] Above feedb. high
[76] Digital input x30/2 [16] Thermal warning
[77] Digital input x30/3 [17] Mains out of range
[78] Digital input x30/4 [18] Reversing
[79] Digital input x46/1 [19] Warning
[80] Digital input x46/3 [20] Alarm (trip)
[81] Digital input x46/5 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[82] Digital input x46/7 [22] Comparator 0
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning [26] Logic rule 0
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [27] Logic rule 1
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning [28] Logic rule 2
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [29] Logic rule 3
[94] RS Flipflop 0 [30] SL Time-out 0
[97] RS Flipflop 3 [33] Digital input DI18
[102] Relay 1 [38] Digital input DI33
[103] Relay 2 [39] Start command

13-16 RS-FF Operand R 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

[40] Drive stopped [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[41] Reset Trip [106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[42] Auto-reset Trip
the graphical LCP.
[107] Relay 6
[108] Relay 7
X47/MCB 113
X34/MCB 105
3 3
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available [109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
the graphical LCP.
3.14.4 13-2* Timers
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on define an event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
the graphical LCP. boolean input in a logic rule (see 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean
1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3).
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on A timer is only FALSE when started by an action (i.e. [29]
the graphical LCP. Start timer 1) until the timer value entered in this
[50] Comparator 4 parameter has elapsed. Then it becomes TRUE again.
[51] Comparator 5 All parameters in this parameter group are array
[60] Logic rule 4 parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
timer 0, select index 1 to program timer 1, and so on.
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3 13-20 SL Controller Timer
[71] SL Time-out 4 Range: Function:
[72] SL Time-out 5 Size [0 - Enter the value to define the duration of
[73] SL Time-out 6 related* 0] the FALSE output from the programmed
[74] SL Time-out 7 timer. A timer is only FALSE if it is started
[75] Start command given by an action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1) and until
[76] Digital input x30/2 the given timer value has elapsed.
3.14.5 13-4* Logic Rules
Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from
timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits and events
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
boolean inputs for the calculation in 13-40 Logic Rule
Boolean 1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule
[85] Digital input x46/13 Boolean 3. Define the operators used to logically combine
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning the selected inputs in parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm 1 and parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43
130BB673.10
[94] RS Flipflop 0 Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2

Par. 13-40
[95] RS Flipflop 1 Logic Rule Boolean 1
[96] RS Flipflop 2 Par. 13-42

Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
[97] RS Flipflop 3 ... ...
...
[98] RS Flipflop 4
[99] RS Flipflop 5 Par. 13-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3
[100] RS Flipflop 6
[101] RS Flipflop 7 Illustration 3.53 Logic Rules
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113

Priority of calculation 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

The results of 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, Array [6]
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and 13-42 Logic Rule
Option: Function:
Boolean 2 are calculated first. The outcome (TRUE/FALSE)
of this calculation is combined with the settings of [37] Digital input DI32
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule [38] Digital input DI33
3 3 Boolean 3, yielding the final result (TRUE/FALSE) of the [39] Start command
logic rule. [40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
Array [6]
Option: Function: the graphical LCP.
[0] False Select the first boolean (TRUE or
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule.
See parameter 13-01 Start Event [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on
([0] - [61]) and the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on
[75]) for further description. the graphical LCP.
[1] True [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on
[2] Running the graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit the graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit [50] Comparator 4

[7] Out of current range [51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low [60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high [61] Logic rule 5
[10] Out of speed range [70] SL Time-out 3
[11] Below speed low [71] SL Time-out 4
[12] Above speed high [72] SL Time-out 5
[13] Out of feedb. range [73] SL Time-out 6
[14] Below feedb. low [74] SL Time-out 7
[15] Above feedb. high [75] Start command given
[16] Thermal warning [76] Digital input x30/2
[17] Mains out of range [77] Digital input x30/3
[18] Reversing [78] Digital input x30/4
[19] Warning [79] Digital input x46/1
[20] Alarm (trip) [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [81] Digital input x46/5
[22] Comparator 0 [82] Digital input x46/7
[26] Logic rule 0 [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[27] Logic rule 1 Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[28] Logic rule 2 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[29] Logic rule 3 the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
[30] SL Time-out 0 cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
[31] SL Time-out 1 is 1.
[32] SL Time-out 2 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[33] Digital input DI18 Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[35] Digital input DI27 the alarm 166 ATEX ETR

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6] Array [6]
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output Parameter numbers in square brackets stand
is 1. for the boolean inputs of parameters in group

13-** Smart Logic Control.
3 3
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] [0] DISABLED Ignores 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and
the alarm 163 ATEX ETR 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42].
output is 1.
[2] OR Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [3] AND NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If [13-42].
the warning 165 ATEX ETR [4] OR NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT
freq.lim.warning is active, the [13-42].
output is 1.
[5] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group13-1* [13-42].
Comparators.
[6] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* [13-42].
Comparators.
[7] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* NOT NOT [13-42].
Comparators.
[8] NOT OR NOT Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* [13-42].
Comparators.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
Comparators. Array [6]
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Option: Function:

Comparators. [0] False Select the second boolean (TRUE
or FALSE) input for the selected
logic rule. See
Comparators
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* [61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop
Comparators. Event ([70] - [75]) for further
[102] Relay 1 description.
[103] Relay 2 [1] True
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113 [2] Running
[105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113 [3] In range
[4] On reference
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[5] Torque limit
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113 [6] Current Limit
[108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105 [7] Out of current range
[8] Below I low
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[9] Above I high
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105 [10] Out of speed range
[11] Below speed low
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
[12] Above speed high
Array [6] [13] Out of feedb. range
Option: Function: [14] Below feedb. low
Select the first logical operator to use on the [15] Above feedb. high
boolean inputs from 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean [16] Thermal warning
1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [17] Mains out of range

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Array [6]
[18] Reversing [78] Digital input x30/4
[19] Warning [79] Digital input x46/1
3 3 [20]
[21]
Alarm (trip)
Alarm (trip lock)
[80]
[81]
Digital input x46/3
Digital input x46/5
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[36] Digital input DI29 freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
[37] Digital input DI32 is 1.
[38] Digital input DI33 [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[39] Start command Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[40] Drive stopped ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[41] Reset Trip the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
[42] Auto-reset Trip cur.lim.warning is active, the
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on output is 1.
the graphical LCP. [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available Thermal Protection is set to [20]
on the graphical LCP. ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the graphical LCP.
output is 1.
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on [94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators.
the graphical LCP.
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
the graphical LCP. [98] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators.
[50] Comparator 4 [99] RS Flipflop 5 See 13-1* Comparators.

[51] Comparator 5 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See 13-1* Comparators
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3 [102] Relay 1
[71] SL Time-out 4 [103] Relay 2
[72] SL Time-out 5 [104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[73] SL Time-out 6 [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113

[74] SL Time-out 7
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[75] Start command given
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113


Array [6] Array [6]
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105 [12] Above speed high
[13] Out of feedb. range
3 3
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
[14] Below feedb. low
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 [15] Above feedb. high
[16] Thermal warning
Array [6]
[17] Mains out of range
Option: Function:
[18] Reversing
Select the second logical operator to be used
[19] Warning
on the boolean input calculated in
[20] Alarm (trip)
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
[22] Comparator 0
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the boolean
[23] Comparator 1
input coming from 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean
2. [24] Comparator 2
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of [25] Comparator 3
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [26] Logic rule 0
[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input [27] Logic rule 1
calculated in 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, [28] Logic rule 2
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and [29] Logic rule 3
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 [0] Disabled [30] SL Time-out 0
(factory setting). Select this option to ignore [31] SL Time-out 1
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [32] SL Time-out 2
[0] DISABLED [33] Digital input DI18
[1] AND [34] Digital input DI19
[2] OR [35] Digital input DI27
[3] AND NOT [36] Digital input DI29
[4] OR NOT [37] Digital input DI32
[5] NOT AND [38] Digital input DI33
[6] NOT OR [39] Start command
[7] NOT AND NOT [40] Drive stopped
[8] NOT OR NOT [41] Reset Trip
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
Array [6] the graphical LCP.
Option: Function: [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
[0] False Select the third boolean (TRUE or on the graphical LCP.
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule. See parameter 13-01 Start
the graphical LCP.
Event ([0] - [61]) and
parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on
[75]) for further description. the graphical LCP.
[1] True [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on

[2] Running the graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference
the graphical LCP.
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current Limit [50] Comparator 4
[7] Out of current range [51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low [60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high [61] Logic rule 5
[10] Out of speed range [70] SL Time-out 3
[11] Below speed low [71] SL Time-out 4


Array [6] Array [6]
[72] SL Time-out 5 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
[73] SL Time-out 6 Comparators
3 3 [74]
[75]
SL Time-out 7
Start command given
Comparators.
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
the alarm 164 ATEX ETR 3.14.6 13-5* States
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1. 13-51 SL Controller Event
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Array [20]
Option: Function:
[0] False Select the boolean input (TRUE or
FALSE) to define the Smart Logic
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
Controller event. See
is 1.
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] Event ([70] - [74]) for further
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If description.
[1] True
[2] Running
output is 1.
[3] In range
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If
[6] Current Limit
[8] Below I low
output is 1.
[9] Above I high
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* [10] Out of speed range
Comparators.
[11] Below speed low
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* [12] Above speed high
Comparators. [13] Out of feedb. range
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* [14] Below feedb. low
Comparators. [15] Above feedb. high
[16] Thermal warning
Comparators.
[18] Reversing
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* [19] Warning
Comparators. [20] Alarm (trip)
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* [21] Alarm (trip lock)
Comparators.

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [20] Array [20]
[24]
[25]
Comparator 2
Comparator 3
[84]
[85]
Digital input x46/11
Digital input x46/13
3 3
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If
[36] Digital input DI29 freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
[37] Digital input DI32 is 1.
[38] Digital input DI33 [92] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[39] Start command warning Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[40] Drive stopped ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[41] Reset Trip the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
[42] Auto-reset Trip cur.lim.warning is active, the
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on output is 1.
the graphical LCP. [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available Thermal Protection is set to [20]
on the graphical LCP. ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the graphical LCP.
output is 1.
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on [94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1*
the graphical LCP. Comparators.
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on [95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1*
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on [96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1*
[50] Comparator 4 [97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1*

[51] Comparator 5 Comparators.
[60] Logic rule 4 [98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1*
[61] Logic rule 5 Comparators.
[70] SL Time-out 3
[71] SL Time-out 4
Comparators.
[72] SL Time-out 5
[73] SL Time-out 6 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
[74] SL Time-out 7 Comparators
[75] Start command given [101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1*
[76] Digital input x30/2 Comparators.
[77] Digital input x30/3 [102] Relay 1
[78] Digital input x30/4 [103] Relay 2
[105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20] Array [20]
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113 If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
3 3
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
commands coming from either the digital
[108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105 inputs or via a fieldbus.
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105 [13] Select preset Selects preset reference 3.
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105 ref 3 If the active preset reference is changed, it
13-52 SL Controller Action commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.
Array [20]
Option: Function: [14] Select preset Selects preset reference 4.
ref 4 If the active preset reference is changed, it
[0] DISABLED Select the action corresponding to the SLC
event. Actions are executed when the
corresponding event (defined in
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is
evaluated as true. The following actions are [15] Select preset Selects preset reference 5.
available for selection: ref 5 If the active preset reference is changed, it
[0] *DISABLED
[1] No action inputs or via a fieldbus.
[2] Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up
[16] Select preset Selects preset reference 6.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to ‘1’.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to ‘2’.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to ‘3’.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with [19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to ‘4’. [22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency
If the set-up is changed, it merges with converter.
other set-up commands coming from either [23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus. frequency converter.
[10] Select preset Selects preset reference 0. [24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency
ref 0 If the active preset reference is changed, it converter.
[25] Qstop Issues a quick stop command to the
[26] Dcstop Issues a DC stop command to the
merges with other preset reference [27] Coast The frequency converter coasts
commands coming from either the digital immediately. All stop commands including
inputs or via a fieldbus. the coast command stop the SLC.

ref 2

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]
Option: Function:
[28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the
[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL 3 3

Controller Timer for further description.
[30] Start timer 1 Starts timer 1, see parameter 13-20 SL

[31] Start timer 2 Starts timer 2, see parameter 13-20 SL

[32] Set digital out Any output with SL output A is low.

A low
[33] Set digital out Any output with SL output B is low.
B low
[34] Set digital out Any output with SL output C is low.
C low
[35] Set digital out Any output with SL output D is low.
D low
[36] Set digital out Any output with SL output E is low.
E low
[37] Set digital out Any output with SL output F is low.
F low
[38] Set digital out Any output with SL output A is high.
A high
[39] Set digital out Any output with SL output B is high.
B high
[40] Set digital out Any output with SL output C is high.
C high
[41] Set digital out Any output with SL output D is high.
D high
[42] Set digital out Any output with SL output E is high.
E high
[43] Set digital out Any output with SL output F is high.
F high
[60] Reset Counter Resets Counter A to zero.
A
[61] Reset Counter Resets Counter B to zero.
B
[70] Start timer 3 Start Timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL





3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions NOTICE

The output frequency value of the frequency converter
3.15.1 14-0* Inverter Switching must never exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency.
When the motor is running, adjust the switching
14-00 Switching Pattern frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency to
Select the switching pattern: 60° AVM or SFAVM.
minimise motor noise.
[0] 60 AVM NOTICE

[1] * SFAVM To avoid a trip, the frequency converter is able to adapt
the switching frequency automatically.
NOTICE
The switching pattern may be automatically adapted by
14-03 Overmodulation
the frequency converter in order to avoid a trip. See
Option: Function:
application note on derating for more details.
[0] Off Select [0] Off for no overmodulation of the output
voltage, to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft.
14-01 Switching Frequency
This feature may be useful for applications such as
Select the converter switching frequency. Changing the switching grinding machines.
frequency reduces acoustic noise from the motor. Default values
[1] * On Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function
depend on power size.
for the output voltage. This is the right choice when it
Option: Function: is required that the output voltage is higher than 95%
[0] 1.0 kHz of the input voltage (typically when running over-
[1] 1.5 kHz Default switching frequency for synchronously). The output voltage is increased
355-1200 kW [500-1600 hp], 690 according to the degree of overmodulation.
V.
NOTICE
[2] 2.0 kHz Default switching frequency for
Overmodulation leads to increased torque
250-800 kW [350-1075 hp], 400 V
ripple as harmonics are increased.
and 37-315 kW [50-450 hp], 690
V.
Control in Flux mode provides an output current of up
[3] 2.5 kHz
to 98% of the input current, regardless of
[4] 3.0 kHz Default switching frequency for parameter 14-03 Overmodulation.
18.5-37 kW [25-50 hp], 200 V and
37-200 kW [50-300 hp], 400 V. 14-04 PWM Random
[5] 3.5 kHz Option: Function:
[6] 4.0 kHz Default switching frequency for [0] * Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.
5.5–15 kW [7.5-20 hp], 200 V and
[1] On Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a
11-30 kW [15-40], 400 V.
clear ringing tone to a less noticeable ‘white’ noise.
[7] 5.0 kHz Default switching frequency for This is achieved by slightly and randomly altering the
0.25–3.7 kW [0.34-5 hp], 200 V synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
and 0.37-7.5 kW [0.5-10 hp], 400 phases.
V.
[8] 6.0 kHz 14-06 Dead Time Compensation

[9] 7.0 kHz Option: Function:
[10] 8.0 kHz [0] Off No compensation.
[11] 10.0 kHz
[1] * On Activates dead time compensation.
[12] 12.0kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz
[14] 16.0kHz 3.15.2 14-1* Mains On/Off
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and

handling. If a mains failure appears, the frequency
converter tries to continue in a controlled way until the
power in the DC link has been exhausted.

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is typically used See the introduction text in
where very short mains interruptions (voltage
dips) are present. At 100% load and a short
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure.
3 3
[2] Ctrl. This selection is similar to selection [1] except
voltage interruption, the DC voltage on the main
ramp- that in [2] a reset is necessary for starting up
capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency
down, after power-up.
converters, it only takes a few milliseconds before
trip Limitation:
the DC level drops to about 373 V DC, and the
See the introduction text in
IGBTs cut off and loose the control of the motor.
When mains is restored, and the IGBTs start
again, the output frequency and voltage vector [3] Coasting Centrifuges can run for 1 hour without power
do not correspond to the speed/frequency of the supply. In those situations, it is possible to select
motor, and the result is normally an overvoltage a coast function at mains interruption, together
or overcurrent, mostly resulting in a trip lock. with a flying start, which occurs when the mains
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure can be is restored.
programmed to avoid this situation. [4] Kinetic Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency
Select the function according to which the back-up converter keeps running as long as there is
frequency converter must act when the threshold energy in the system due to the inertia from
in parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault motor and load. This is done by converting the
has been reached. mechanical energy to the DC link and thereby
maintaining control of the frequency converter
NOTICE and motor. This can extend the controlled
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure cannot be operation, depending on the inertia in the
changed while motor is running. system. For fans it is typically several seconds; for
pumps up to 2 seconds; and for compressors
[0] No The frequency converter does not compensate only for a fraction of a second. Many industry
* function for a mains interruption. The voltage on the DC applications can extend controlled operation for
link drops quickly and motor control is lost many seconds, which is often enough time for
within milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the the mains to return.
result.
130BC918.10
A B C DE A
UDC [V]
[1] Ctrl. Control of the motor remains with the frequency UDC
ramp- converter, and the frequency converter performs 14-11*1.35
down a controlled ramp down from n [RPM] t [S]
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault Ref
level. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [0] Off or

t [S]
[2] AC brake, the ramp follows the overvoltage
ramping. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [1] A Normal operation
Resistor Brake, the ramp follows the setting in B Mains failure
parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. This
C Kinetic back-up
selection is particularly useful in pump
D Mains return
applications, where the inertia is low and the
E Normal operation: ramping
friction is high. When mains is restored, the
output frequency ramps the motor up to the
Illustration 3.54 Kinetick Back-up
reference speed (if the mains interruption is
prolonged, the controlled ramp down might
bring the output frequency all the way down to
0 RPM, and when the mains is restored, the The DC level during [4] Kinetic back-up equals to
application is ramped up from 0 RPM to the parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault *
previous reference speed via the normal ramp 1.35.
up). If the energy in the DC link disappears If the mains do not return, UDC is maintained as
before the motor is ramped to zero, the motor is long as possible by ramping the speed down
coasted. towards 0 RPM. Finally, the frequency converter
Limitation: coasts.

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
If the mains return while in kinetic back-up, UDC See the introduction text in
3 3 increases above parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at

Mains Fault*1.35. This is detected in one of the
[6] Alarm
following ways.
[7] Kin. Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the
1. If UDC > parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage back-up, features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
at Mains Fault*1.35*1.05. trip w with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
2. If the speed is above the reference. This recovery between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up with
is relevant if the mains come back at a trip, based on a recovery speed, configurable in
lower level than before, e.g. parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level to
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains enable detection of mains returning. If mains do
Fault*1.35*1.02. This does not fulfil the not return, the frequency converter ramps down
criterion in point 1, and the frequency to 0 RPM and trips. If mains return while in
converter tries to reduce UDC to kinetic back-up at a speed above the value in
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level,
Fault*1.35 by increasing the speed. This normal operation is resumed. This is equal to [4]
will not succeed as the mains cannot be Kinetic Back-up. The DC level during [7] Kinetic
lowered. back-up is parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains
Fault* 1.35.
3. If running mechanically. The same
A B C DA E
130BC922.10
mechanism as in point 2 applies, but UDC[V]
the inertia prevents the speed from
UDC
going above the reference speed. This 14-11*1.35
t [S]
leads to the motor running mechan- n [RPM]
Ref
ically until the speed is above the
14-15
reference speed and the situation in t [S]
point 2 occurs. Instead of waiting for
that criterion, 3 is introduced. A Normal operation
[5] Kinetic The difference between kinetic back-up with and B Mains failure
back-up, without trip is that the latter always ramps down C Kinetic back-up
trip to 0 RPM and trips, regardless of whether mains D Mains return
return or not. E Normal operation: ramping
The function does not detect if mains return. This
is the reason for the relatively high level on the Illustration 3.56 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with
DC link during ramp down. Recovery where mains return above
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery
130BC920.10
A B C D
UDC [V]
790 V Level
UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM] t [S]
If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a
Ref
speed below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level, the frequency converter ramps
0
down to 0 RPM using the ramp and then trips. If
t [S]
the ramp is slower than the system ramping

A Normal operation
down on its own, the ramping is done mechan-
B Mains failure
ically and UDC is at the normal level (UDC, m*1.35).
C Kinetic back-up
A B C D E F
D Trip
130BC923.10
UDC[V]
UDC
Illustration 3.55 Kinetic Back-up Trip 14-11*1.35 t [S]
n [RPM]
Ref
0
t [S]
Limitation:

14-10 Mains Failure 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque Range: Function:
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
Option: Function: should thus be set to 342 V. This results in a
A Normal operation DC detection level of 462 V
B Mains failure
C Kinetic back-up
(parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
* 1.35).
3 3
D Mains return NOTICE
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip
Converting from VLT 5000 to FC 300:
F Trip Even though the setting of the mains
voltage at mains fault is the same for
Illustration 3.57 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with VLT 5000 and FC 300, the detection
Recovery, Trip Slow Ramp where Mains Return level is different. Use the following
below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip formula to obtain the same detection
Recovery Level, in this Illustration a Slow Ramp level as in VLT 5000:
is Used parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at
Mains Fault (VLT 5000 level) = Value
used in VLT 5000 * 1.35/sqrt(2).
If the ramp is quicker than the system’s ramp
down on, the ramping generates current. This
results in a higher UDC which is limited using the 14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance
brake chopper/resistor brake. Operation under severe main imbalance conditions reduces the
A B C D E F lifetime of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the
130BC924.10
UDC [V]
UDC motor is operated continuously near nominal load (e.g. a pump
or fan running near full speed).
UDC
14-11*1.35
t [s] Option: Function:
n [RPM]
Ref
[0] * Trip Trips the frequency
converter.
0
t [s]
[1] Warning Issues a warning.
A Normal operation [2] Disabled No action.

B Mains failure
14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out
C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return Range: Function:
E Kinetic back-up ramping to trip 60 s* [0 - 60 This parameter defines the Kinetic Back-up
F Trip s] Timeout in Flux mode when running on low
voltage grids. If the supply voltage does not
Illustration 3.58 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with increase above the value defined in 14-11 Mains
Recovery where Mains Return below Voltage at Mains Fault +5% within the specified
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery time, the frequency converter will then automat-
Level, in this Illustration a Quick Ramp is Used ically run a controlled ramp-down profile before
stopping.
14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level

Limitation:
See the introduction text in Range: Function:
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure. Size [ 0 - 60000.000 This parameter specifies the
related* ReferenceFeed- Kinetic Back-up Trip Recovery
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault backUnit] Level. The unit is defined in
Range: Function: parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
Unit.
Size [180 - This parameter defines the threshold voltage
related* 600 V] at which the selected function in 14-10 Mains
Failure should be activated. It may be
considered to select 90% of the nominal
mains as the detection level, depending on
the supply quality. For a supply of 380 V,

3.15.3 14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 14-21 Automatic Restart Time

Range: Function:
14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 10 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of
Range: Function: the automatic reset function. This parameter
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the Kinetic Back-up Gain value in is active when 14-20 Reset Mode is set to [1] -
3 3 percent. [13] Automatic reset.
Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip 14-22 Operation Mode
handling and control card self-test or initialisation. Option: Function:
14-20 Reset Mode Use this ameter to specify normal operation; to
perform tests; or to initialise all parameters
Option: Function:
except parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
Select the reset function after
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's and
tripping. Once reset, the frequency
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is
converter can be restarted.
active only when the power is cycled to the
[0] * Manual reset Select [0] Manual reset to perform a frequency converter.
reset via [Reset] or via the digital Select [0] Normal operation for normal
inputs. operation of the frequency converter with the
motor in the selected application.
[1] Automatic reset x 1 Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1…
Select [1] Control card test to test the analog
x20 to perform between 1 and 20
and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V
automatic resets after tripping.
control voltage. The test requires a test
[2] Automatic reset x 2 connector with internal connections. Use the
[3] Automatic reset x 3 following procedure for the control card test:
[4] Automatic reset x 4
1. Select [1] Control card test.
[6] Automatic reset x 6 2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait
for the light in the display to go out.
[8] Automatic reset x 8 3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202
[9] Automatic reset x 9 (A54) = ‘ON’/I.
[10] Automatic reset x 10 4. Insert the test plug (see
[11] Automatic reset x 15 Illustration 3.59).
5. Connect to mains supply.
[13] Infinite auto reset Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for
6. Carry out various tests.
continuous resetting after tripping.
7. The results are displayed on the LCP
[14] Reset at power-up
and the frequency converter moves
NOTICE into an infinite loop.
The motor may start without warning. If the specified 8. Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is
number of automatic resets is reached within 10 automatically set to normal operation.
minutes, the frequency converter enters [0] Manual reset Carry out a power cycle to start up in
mode. After the manual reset is performed, the setting normal operation after a control card
of 14-20 Reset Mode returns to the original selection. If test.
the number of automatic resets are not reached within If the test is OK
10 minutes, or when a manual reset is performed, the LCP readout: Control card OK.
internal automatic reset counter returns to zero. Disconnect the mains supply and remove the
test plug. The green LED on the control card
NOTICE lights up.
Automatic reset is also active for resetting the Safe If the test fails
Torque Off function in firmware version < 4.3x. LCP readout: Control card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or Control
card. The red LED on the control card is turned
on. Test plugs (connect the following terminals
to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 - 33; 42 -
53 - 54

14-22 Operation Mode 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

60 s* [0 - Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When
130BA097.12
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
FC 302 60 s] the output torque reaches the torque limits
(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a
warning is triggered. When the torque limit
3 3
warning has been continuously present for the
12 13 18 19 27 32 33 20
FC 301 period specified in this parameter, the frequency
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal monitoring
of the frequency converter still remains active.
39 42 50 53 54 55
FC 301 & 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
FC 302
Range: Function:
Illustration 3.59 Test Plugs Size [ 0 - 35 When the frequency converter detects
related* s] an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time.
If value = 0, protection mode is disabled.
Select [2] Initialisation to reset all parameter
values to default settings, except for: NOTICE
parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
It is recommended to disable
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's, and
protection mode in hoisting
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency
applications.
converter resets during the next power-up.
Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also returns to
the default setting [0] Normal operation. 14-28 Production Settings
[0] Normal Range: Function:
* operation 0* [No action]
[1] Control Remember to set switches S201 (A53) and S202 1 [Service reset]
card test (A54) as specified in the parameter description [2] Set Production Mode
when performing a control card test.
Otherwise, the test fails. 14-29 Service Code
[2] Initiali- Range: Function:
sation 0* [-2147483647 - 2147483647] For internal service only.
[3] Boot mode
14-23 Typecode Setting 3.15.4 14-3* Current Limit Control

Option: Function:
The frequency converter features an integral Current Limit
[256] Dummy_dd00113806 For use by service technicians only.
Controller, which is activated when the motor current, and
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
Range: Function: parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
60 s* [0 - Enter the current limit trip delay in seconds. When When the current limit is reached during motor operation
60 s] the output current reaches the current limit or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to
(parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as
triggered. When the current limit warning has possible without losing control of the motor.
been continuously present for the period specified While the current control is active, the frequency converter
in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast
run continuously in current limit without tripping, inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signals on terminals
set the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal 18 to 33 are not active until the frequency converter is no
monitoring of the frequency converter still remains longer near the current limit.
active. By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast
and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down
time, since the frequency converter is coasted. If a quick
stop is necessary, use the mechanical brake control

function along with an external electro-mechanical brake 3.15.5 14-4* Energy Optimising
attached to the application.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain Parameters for adjusting the energy optimisation level in
both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic Energy Optimi-
Range: Function:
sation (AEO) mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
3 3 current limit controller. Selection of a high
value makes the controller react faster. Too
14-40 VT Level
Range: Function:
high a setting leads to controller 66 %* [40 - 90 NOTICE
instability. %]
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time while the motor is running.
Range: Function:
Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low
Size related* [0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
speed. Selection of a low value reduces
integration time. Setting it to a
energy loss in the motor, but also reduces
lower value makes it react faster. A
load capability.
setting too low leads to control
instability.
NOTICE
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
Range: Function:
Size [1 - Controls the current limit control low-pass
related* 100 ms] filter. 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation
This makes it possible to react to peak Range: Function:
values or to average values. When Size [40 - 75 Enter the minimum allowable magneti-
selecting average values, it is sometimes related* %] sation for AEO. Selection of a low value
possible to run with higher output current reduces energy loss in the motor, but
and instead trip on the hardware limit for can also reduce resistance to sudden
current. However, the control reacts slower load changes.
as it does not react on immediate values.
NOTICE
14-35 Stall Protection
This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
Option: Function: Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
Parameter 14-35 Stall Protection is active in Flux
mode only.
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency
[0] Disabled Disables stall protection in fieldweakening Flux Range: Function:
mode and might cause the motor to be lost.
10 Hz* [5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the
[1] * Enabled Enables stall protection in fieldweakening Flux Automatic Energy Optimisation (AEO) is to
mode. be active.
14-36 Fieldweakening Function NOTICE

Select the fieldweakening function mode in Flux mode. This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
Range: Function: Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
0* [Auto] In this mode, the frequency converter calculates the
optimal torque output. 14-43 Motor Cosphi
Measured DC link voltage determines the phase-to- Range: Function:
phase motor voltage. Magnetising reference is
Size [0.40 - The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set
based on the actual voltage and utilises the
related* 0.95] for optimum AEO performance. This
information about the model of the motor.
parameter should normally not be altered.
1 [1/x] The frequency converter reduces torque output. However, in some situations it may be
The frequency converter sets the magnetising necessary to enter a new value to fine-
reference inversely proportional to the speed using tune.
a static curve that represents the relationship
between DC link voltage and the speed.

3.15.6 14-5* Environment 14-52 Fan Control

Select minimum speed of the main fan.
These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
Option: Function:
under special environmental conditions.
[0] * Auto Select [0] Auto to run fan only when internal
14-50 RFI Filter temperature in frequency converter is in range
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. It is not relevant to
FC 301 due to different design and shorter motor cables.
35 °C to approx. 55 °C.
Fan runs at low speed below 35 °C, and at full
3 3
Option: Function: speed at approx. 55 °C.
[0] Off Select [0] Off if the frequency converter is fed by an [1] On 50% The fan always runs at 50% speed or above. The
isolated mains source (IT mains). fan runs at 50% speed at 35 °C, and at full
If a filter is used, select [0] Off during charging to speed at approx. 55 °C.
prevent a high leakage current making the RCD
[2] On 75% The fan always runs at 75% speed or above. The
switch.
fan runs at 75% speed at 35 °C, and at full
In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between
speed at approx. 55 °C.
chassis and the mains RFI filter circuit are cut-out to
reduce the ground capacity currents. [3] On 100% The fan runs at 100% speed always.
[1] * On Select [1] On to ensure that the frequency converter [4] Auto This selection is the same as [0] Auto, but with
complies with EMC standards. (Low special considerations around and below 0°C. In
temp selection [0] Auto there is a risk that the fan
env.) starts running around 0 °C as the frequency
130BB908.10
converter detects a sensor fault and thus protect

the frequency converter while reporting warning
66 "Heat sink Temperature Low". Selection [4]
Auto (Low temp env.) can be used in very cold
environments and prevent the negative effects
of this further cooling and avoid warning 66.
14-53 Fan Monitor

Option: Function:
Illustration 3.60 RFI Filter Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in case a fan fault is detected.
[0] Disabled
14-51 DC Link Compensation [1] * Warning
Option: Function: [2] Trip
The rectified AC-DC voltage at the frequency
converter's DC link is associated with voltage ripples.
14-55 Output Filter
These ripples can increase in magnitude with increased Option: Function:
load. These ripples are undesirable because they can NOTICE
generate current and torque ripples. A compensation
method is used to reduce these voltage ripples at DC
motor is running.
link. In general, DC link compensation is recommended
for most applications, but care must be taken when
operating in fieldweakening as it can generate speed Select the type of output filter connected.
oscillations at the motor shaft. In fieldweakening, it is [0] No This is the default setting and should be used with
recommended to turn DC link compensation off. * Filter dU/dt filters or high-frequency common-mode (HF-
[0] Off Disables DC link compensation. CM) filters.
[1] On Enables DC link compensation. [1] Sine- This setting is only for backwards compatibility. It
Wave enables operation with Flux control principle when
Filter parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter are
programmed with the output filter capacitance and
inductance. It DOES NOT limit the range of the
switching frequency.

14-55 Output Filter 14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units

[2] Sine- This parameter sets a minimum allowed limit to the Size related* [ 1 - 1] Set the actual number of power units.
Wave switching frequency and ensures that the filter is
Filter operated within the safe range of switching
3.15.7 14-7* Compatibility
3 3 Fixed frequencies. Operation is possible with all control
principles. For Flux control principle
parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and The parameters in this group are for setting of compati-
parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter have to be bility for VLT 3000, VLT 5000 to FC 300.
programmed (these parameters have no effect in 14-72 VLT Alarm Word
VVCplus and U/f). The modulation pattern is set to
Option: Function:
SFAVM, which gives the lowest acoustic noise in the
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the alarm word corresponding to
filter.
VLT 5000.
NOTICE
14-73 VLT Warning Word
Reset the frequency converter after selecting
[2] Sine-Wave Filter Fixed. Option: Function:
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the warning word corresponding
to VLT 5000.
CAUTION
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word
Always set parameter 14-55 Output Filter to
[2] Sine-wave fixed when using a sine-wave Range: Function:
filter. Failure to do so can result in 0* [0 - 4294967295] Read out the ext. status word
overheating of the frequency converter, corresponding to VLT 5000.
which can result in personal injury and
equipment damage.
3.15.8 14-8* Options
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC

Compensation function of the LC filter requires the per phase Option: Function:
equivalent star-connected capacitance of the filter (3 times the [0] No Select [0] No to use the frequency converter's 24 V DC
capacity between 2 phases when capacitance is ’Delta’ supply.
connection).
[1] * Yes Select [1] Yes if an external 24 V DC supply is used to
Range: Function: power the option. Inputs/outputs are galvanically
Size related* [0.1 - 6500 Set the capacitance of the output isolated from the frequency converter when operated
uF] filter. The value can be found on the from an external supply.
filter label.
NOTICE NOTICE
This is required for correct This parameter is only changing function by performing
compensation in Flux mode a power cycle.
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle). 14-88 Option Data Storage
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] This parameter stores information about options
14-57 Inductance Output Filter
over a power cycle.
Range: Function:
Size [0.001 - Set the inductance of the output filter. 14-89 Option Detection
related* 65 mH] The value can be found on the filter
Selects the behaviour of the frequency converter when a change
label.
in the option configuration is detected.
NOTICE Option: Function:
This is required for correct [0] * Protect Option Freezes the current settings and
compensation in Flux mode Config. prevents unwanted changes when
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control missing or defective options are
Principle). detected.

14-89 Option Detection 14-90 Fault Level

Selects the behaviour of the frequency converter when a change Use this parameter to customise fault levels.
in the option configuration is detected. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [1] Warning
[1] Enable Option Changes frequency converter settings [2] Trip Changing a fault level from default option
Change and is used when modifying the
system configuration. This parameter
[3] Trip Lock to [2] Trip leads to the
automatic reset of the alarm. For alarms
3 3
setting returns to [0] Protect Option involving overcurrent, the frequency
Config. after an option change. converter has a hardware protection that
issues a 3-minute recovery after 2
14-90 Fault Level consecutive overcurrent incidents, this
Use this parameter to customise fault levels. hardware protection cannot be overruled.
Option: Function: [3] Trip Lock

[0] Off Use [0] Off with caution as it ignores all [4] Trip w.
warnings and alarms for the selected source. delayed reset
Failure Alarm Off Warning Trip Trip Lock

10 V low 1 X D
24 V low 47 X D
1.8 V supply low 48 X D
Voltage limit 64 X D
Earth fault during ramping 14 D X
Earth fault 2 during cont. operation 45 D X
Torque limit 12 X D
Over current 13 X D
Short circuit 16 X D
Heatsink temperature 29 X D
Heatsink sensor 39 X D
Control card temperature 65 X D
Power card temperature 69 2) X D
Heat sink temperature1) 244 X D
Heat sink sensor 1) 245 X D
Power card temperature 1) 247
Motor phase missing 30-32 X D
Locked rotor 99 X D
Table 3.24 Selection of Choice of Action when Selected Alarm Appears

D = Default setting.
x = Possible selection.
1) Only high power drives.
2) In small and medium power frequency converters, A69 is only a warning.

3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
Option: Function:
3.16.1 15-0* Operating Data
[1] Reset Select [1] Reset and press [OK] to reset the
counter running hours counter to zero (see
15-00 Operating hours parameter 15-01 Running Hours). This
3 3 Range:
0 h*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency
parameter cannot be selected via the serial
port, RS485.
converter has run. The value is saved Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the
when the frequency converter is running hours counter is desired.
turned off.
15-01 Running Hours

3.16.2 15-1* Data Log Settings
Range: Function:
The data log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the motor has sources (15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
h] run. Reset the counter in 15-07 Reset (parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
Running Hours Counter. The value is (15-12 Trigger Event) and window (15-14 Samples Before
saved when the frequency converter is Trigger) are used to start and stop the logging
turned off. conditionally.
15-02 kWh Counter 15-10 Logging Source

Range: Function: Array [4]
0 kWh* [0 - Registering the power consumption of Option: Function:

2147483647 the motor as a mean value over 1 Select which variables
kWh] hour. Reset the counter in are to be logged.
parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter.
[0] * None
[15] Readout: actual setup
15-03 Power Up's
[1472] Legacy Alarm Word
Range: Function: [1473] Legacy Warning Word
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency [1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word
converter has been powered up.
[1600] Control Word
[1601] Reference [Unit]
15-04 Over Temp's
[1602] Reference %
Range: Function: [1603] Status Word
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1606] Absolute Position
temperature faults, which have occurred. [1610] Power [kW]
[1611] Power [hp]
15-05 Over Volt's [1612] Motor Voltage
Range: Function: [1613] Frequency
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1614] Motor current
overvoltages, which have occurred. [1616] Torque [Nm]
[1617] Speed [RPM]
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [1618] Motor Thermal
Option: Function: [1620] Motor Angle
[0] * Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is desired. [1621] Torque [%] High Res.
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero [1622] Torque [%]
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter). [1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance
[1625] Torque [Nm] High
NOTICE [1630] DC Link Voltage
[1632] Brake Energy /s
The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
[1633] Brake Energy Average
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
[1635] Inverter Thermal
Option: Function: [1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
[0] * Do not [1650] External Reference
reset

15-10 Logging Source 15-12 Trigger Event

Array [4] Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
Option: Function: window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the
[1651] Pulse Reference
trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger).
[1652] Feedback[Unit]
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
[1660] Digital Input
Option:
[18] Reversing
Function:
3 3
[1662] Analog Input 53 [19] Warning
[1664] Analog Input 54 [20] Alarm (trip)
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[1666] Digital Output [bin] [22] Comparator 0
[1675] Analog In X30/11 [23] Comparator 1
[1676] Analog In X30/12 [24] Comparator 2
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] [25] Comparator 3
[1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word [26] Logic rule 0
[1690] Alarm Word [27] Logic rule 1
[1692] Warning Word [28] Logic rule 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word [29] Logic rule 3
[1860] Digital Input 2 [33] Digital input DI18
[3110] Bypass Status Word [34] Digital input DI19
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 [35] Digital input DI27
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 [36] Digital input DI29
15-11 Logging Interval [38] Digital input DI33
Array [4] [50] Comparator 4
Range: Function: [51] Comparator 5
Size related* [ 0.000 - 0.000 ] Enter the interval in ms between [60] Logic rule 4
each sampling of the variables to [61] Logic rule 5
be logged.
15-13 Logging Mode
15-12 Trigger Event Option: Function:
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a [0] * Log always Select [0] Log always for continuous
window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a logging.
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the [1] Log once on Select [1] Log once on trigger to
trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger). trigger conditionally start and stop logging using
Option: Function: 15-12 Trigger Event and 15-14 Samples Before
[0] * False Trigger.
[1] True
15-14 Samples Before Trigger
[2] Running
[3] In range Range: Function:
[4] On reference 50* [0 - 100] Before a trigger event, enter the percentage of
[5] Torque limit all samples which are to be retained in the log.
[6] Current Limit See also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
[7] Out of current range parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.
[8] Below I low

[9] Above I high 3.16.3 15-2* Historic Log
[10] Out of speed range
[11] Below speed low View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters
[12] Above speed high in this parameter group. For all parameters in the group,
[13] Out of feedb. range [0] is the most recent data, and [49] is the oldest data.
[14] Below feedb. low Data is logged every time an event occurs (not to be
[15] Above feedb. high confused with SLC events). Events in this context are
[16] Thermal warning defined as a change in one of the following areas:

1. Digital input 15-21 Historic Log: Value

2. Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW release) Array [50]
3. Warning word Range: Function:

Control word Decimal value. See
4. Alarm word
parameter 16-00 Control
3 3 5.
6.
Status word
Control word Extended
Word for description.
Decimal value. See
status word parameter 16-94 Ext. Status
7. Extended status word
Word for description.
Events are logged with value, and time stamp in ms. The
time interval between 2 events depends on how often
events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data 15-22 Historic Log: Time
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is Array [50]
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This
Range: Function:
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this 0 ms* [0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged
parameter via the serial communication port or via the ms] event occurred. Time is measured in
display. ms since frequency converter start. The
max. value corresponds to approx. 24
15-20 Historic Log: Event days, which means that the count
Array [50] restarts at zero after this time period.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 255 ] View the event type of the logged events. 3.16.4 15-3* Alarm Log
15-21 Historic Log: Value Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to
Array [50] 10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the most recent logged
Range: Function: data, and [9] is the oldest. Error codes, values, and time
0* [0 - View the value of the logged event. stamp can be viewed for all logged data.
2147483647 ] Interpret the event values according to this 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code
table:
Array [10]
Digtal input Decimal value. See Range: Function:
parameter 16-60 Digital 0* [0 - 255] View the fault code and look up its meaning in
Input for description after chapter 5 Troubleshooting.
converting to binary
value. 15-31 Alarm Log: Value
Digital output Decimal value. See Array [10]
(not parameter 16-66 Digital
Range: Function:
monitored in Output [bin] for
this SW description after 0* [-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.
release) converting to binary This parameter is mostly used in
value. combination with alarm 38 internal fault.
Warning word Decimal value. See

16-92 Warning Word for
15-32 Alarm Log: Time
description. Array [10]
Alarm word Decimal value. See Range: Function:
16-90 Alarm Word for 0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event
description. occurred. Time is measured in seconds
Status word Decimal value. See from frequency converter start-up.
parameter 16-03 Status
Word for description after
converting to binary 3.16.5 15-4* Drive Identification
value.
Parameters containing read-only information about the
hardware and software configuration of the frequency
converter.

15-40 FC Type 15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number

0* [0 - 6] View the frequency converter type. The readout is 0* [0 - 10 ] View the frequency converter serial number.
identical to the FC 300 Series power field of the
type code definition, characters 1-6. 15-53 Power Card Serial Number
15-41 Power Section

Range:
0* [0 - 19 ]
Function:
View the power card serial number.
3 3
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20] View the FC type. The readout is identical to the 15-58 Smart Setup Filename
FC 300 Series power field of the type code Range: Function:
definition, characters 7-10.
Size related* [0 - 20] Shows the currently used smart
application set-up filename.
15-42 Voltage
Range: Function: 15-59 CSIV Filename
0* [0 - 20] View the FC type. The readout is identical to the Range: Function:
FC 300 Series power field of the type code
Size related* [0 - 16] Shows the currently used CSIV (Costumer
definition, characters 11-12.
Specific Initial Values) filename.
15-43 Software Version

Range: Function: 3.16.6 15-6* Option Ident.
0* [0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or ‘package
version’) consisting of power SW and control SW. This read-only parameter group contains information about
the hardware and software configuration of the options
15-44 Ordered Typecode String installed in slots A, B, C0 and C1.
Range: Function: 15-60 Option Mounted
0* [0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for re-ordering the Array [8]
frequency converter in its original configuration.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] View the installed option type.
15-45 Actual Typecode String
Range: Function: 15-61 Option SW Version
0* [0 - 40 ] View the actual type code string. Array [8]
Range: Function:
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No
0* [0 - 20 ] View the installed option software version.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for re-
15-62 Option Ordering No
ordering the frequency converter in its original
Array [8]
configuration.
Range: Function:
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0* [0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed
Range: Function: options.
0* [0 - 8 ] View the power card ordering number.

15-63 Option Serial No
15-48 LCP Id No Array [8]

0* [0 - 20 ] View the LCP ID number. 0* [0 - 18 ] View the installed option serial number.
15-49 SW ID Control Card 15-70 Option in Slot A

0* [0 - 20 ] View the control card software version number. 0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed
in slot A, and a translation of the type code string.
15-50 SW ID Power Card for example, for type code string ‘AX’, the
translation is ‘No option’.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the power card software version number.

15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 15-89 Configuration Change Counter

0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed 0* [0 - 65535] NOTICE
in slot A.
3 3 15-72 Option in Slot B
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed
in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
3.16.7 15-9* Parameter Info
For example, for type code string ‘BX’, the
translation is ‘No option’. 15-92 Defined Parameters
Array [1000]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the
0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed frequency converter. The list ends with 0.
in slot B.
15-93 Modified Parameters
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 Array [1000]
0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed 0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been
in slot C, and a translation of the type code string. changed from their default setting. The list ends
For example, for type code string ‘CXXXX’, the with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to
translation is ‘No option’. 30 s after implementation.
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 15-98 Drive Identification

0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed 0* [0 - 40] This parameter contains data that is used by the
in slot C. MCT 10 Set-up Software.
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 15-99 Parameter Metadata

Range: Function: Array [30]
0* [0 - 30] Displays the type code string for the option in slot
Range: Function:
C1 (CXXXX if no option) and the translation i.e.
0* [0 - 9999] This parameter contains data used by the MCT
>No option<.
10 Set-up Software.
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20] Displays the software version for the installed
option in option slot C.
15-80 Fan Running Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the heat sink
h] fan has run (increments for each hour).
The value is saved when the frequency
converter is turned off.
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 99999 Enter value to preset the fan running hours
h] counter, see parameter 15-80 Fan Running
Hours.
This parameter cannot be selected via the
serial port, RS-485.

3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs 16-09 Custom Readout

Range: Function:
defined Readout to
3.17.1 16-0* General Status parameter 0-32 Custom Readout
Max Value
16-00 Control Word
Range: Function:
3 3
3.17.2 16-1* Motor Status
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the Control word sent from the frequency
converter via the serial communication port in
16-10 Power [kW]
hex code.
Range: Function:
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0 kW* [0 - Displays motor power in kW. The value shown
Range: Function: 10000 is calculated based on the actual motor
kW] voltage and motor current. The value is
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999 - 999999 View the present
filtered, and therefore approx. 1.3 s may pass
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- reference value applied
from when an input value changes to when
backUnit] on impulse or analog
the data readout values change. The
basis in the unit
resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
resulting from the
10 W steps.
configuration selected in
1-00 Configuration Mode
16-11 Power [hp]
(Hz, Nm, or RPM).
Range: Function:
16-02 Reference [%] 0 hp* [0 - View the motor power in hp. The value
Range: Function: 10000 hp] shown is calculated based on the actual
motor voltage and motor current. The value
0 %* [-200 - 200 View the total reference. The total reference
is filtered, and therefore approximately 30 ms
%] is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
may pass from when an input value changes
and freeze references, plus catch-up and
to when the data readout values change.
slow-down.
16-12 Motor Voltage

16-03 Status Word
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 V* [0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency
used for controlling the motor.
converter via the serial communication port in
hex code.
16-13 Frequency
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 Hz* [0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
resonance dampening.
0 %* [-100 - 100 %] View the 2-byte word sent with the status
word to the Bus Master reporting the
16-14 Motor current
main actual value.
Range: Function:
16-06 Absolute Position 0 A* [0 - 10000 View the motor current measured as a mean
Range: Function: A] value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus
approximately 1.3 s may pass from when an
0 CustomRea- [-2000000000 - This parameter shows the
input value changes to when the data
doutUnit2* 2000000000 absolute position. For
readout values change.
CustomRea- information about
doutUnit2] configuring the readouts,
16-15 Frequency [%]
see chapter 3.18.5 17-7*
Absolute Position. Range: Function:
0 %* [-100 - View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor
16-09 Custom Readout 100 %] frequency (without resonance dampening) as a
Range: Function: percentage (scale 0000-4000 Hex) of
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set
0 CustomRea- [0 - 0 Custom- View the value of custom
9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send it
doutUnit* ReadoutUnit] readout from
with the status word instead of the MAV.
parameter 0-30 Unit for User-

16-16 Torque [Nm] 16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW]

0 [-3000 View the torque value with sign, applied to the 0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] Readout of the mechanical power
Nm* - 3000 motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between applied to the motor shaft.
Nm] 160% motor current and torque in relation to
3 3 the rated torque. Some motors supply more

than 160% torque. Consequently, the min.
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance
Range: Function:
value and the max. value depend on the max.
0.0000 Ohm* [0.0000 - 100.0000 Displays the Calibrated
motor current as well as the motor used. The
Ohm] Stator Resistance.
value is filtered, and thus approx. 30 ms may
pass from when an input changes value to
16-25 Torque [Nm] High
when the data readout values change.
Range: Function:
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 [-200000000 View the torque value with sign, applied
Nm* - 200000000 to the motor shaft. Some motors supply
Range: Function:
Nm] more than 160% torque. Consequently,
0 RPM* [-30000 - View the actual motor RPM. In open loop
the min. value and the max. value
30000 RPM] or closed loop process control, the
depend on the max. motor current as
motor RPM is estimated. In speed closed
well as the motor used. This specific
loop modes, the motor RPM is measured.
readout has been adapted to be able to
show higher values than the standard
16-18 Motor Thermal
readout in parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 View the calculated thermal load on the
%] motor. The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for
3.17.3 16-3* Drive Status
calculation is the ETR function selected in
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. 16-30 DC Link Voltage
Range: Function:
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
Range: Function: with a 30 ms time constant.
0 �C* [0 - 0 �C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY
sensor built into the motor. 16-32 Brake Energy /s
See parameter group 1-9* Motor Range: Function:
Temperature. 0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
external brake resistor, stated as an
16-20 Motor Angle instantaneous value.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min
relative to the index position. The value range Range: Function:
of 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radian). 0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an
kW] external brake resistor. The mean power is
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. calculated on an average level based on the
Range: Function: selected time period within
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] The value shown is the torque in percent parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
of nominal torque, with sign and 0.1%
resolution, applied to the motor shaft. 16-34 Heatsink Temp.
Range: Function:
16-22 Torque [%] 0 °C* [0 - 255 View the frequency converter heat sink
Range: Function: °C] temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 ±5 °C,
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of and the motor cuts back in at 60 ±5 °C.
nominal torque, with sign, applied to the
motor shaft. 16-35 Inverter Thermal
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 16-47 Motor Phase W Current

Size [0.01 - View the inverter nominal current, 0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase WRMS current.
related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the
data on the connected motor. The motor currents, detection of weak motor
data is used for calculation of torque,
motor protection, etc.
cables or imbalance in motor windings.
3 3
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
16-37 Inv. Max. Current Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 This parameter specifies the
Size [0.01 - View the inverter maximum current, RPM] reference given to the frequency
related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate converter after the speed ramp.
data on the connected motor. The
data is used for calculation of torque, 16-49 Current Fault Source
motor protection, etc. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 8] Value indicates source of current faults including
16-38 SL Controller State
short circuit, overcurrent, and phase imbalance
Range: Function: (from left):
0* [0 - 100] View the state of the event under execution by 1-4 Inverter
the SL controller. 5-8 Rectifier
0 No fault recorded
16-39 Control Card Temp.
Range: Function:
3.17.4 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
0 °C* [0 - 100 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
stated in °C
16-50 External Reference
16-40 Logging Buffer Full Range: Function:

0* [-200 - 200] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
Option: Function:
analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter
catch-up and slow-down.
group 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging buffer is
never full when setting parameter 15-13 Logging Mode
16-51 Pulse Reference
to [0] Log always.
Range: Function:
[0] * No
0* [-200 - 200] View the reference value from programmed
[1] Yes
digital input(s). The readout can also reflect the
16-41 Logging Buffer Full impulses from an incremental encoder.
Range: Function:
16-52 Feedback[Unit]
0* [0 - 50 ]
Range: Function:
16-45 Motor Phase U Current 0 Reference- [-999999.999 - View the feedback unit
Range: Function: FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 resulting from the selection
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase URMS current. ReferenceFeed- of unit and scaling in
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the backUnit] parameter 3-00 Reference
motor currents, detection of weak motor Range,
cables or imbalance in motor windings. parameter 3-01 Reference/
Feedback Unit,
16-46 Motor Phase V Current parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference, and
Range: Function:
parameter 3-03 Maximum
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase VRMS current. Reference.
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the
motor currents, detection of weak motor 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
cables or imbalance in motor windings.
Range: Function:
0* [-200 - 200] View the contribution of the Digital Potenti-
ometer to the actual reference.

16-57 Feedback [RPM] 16-62 Analog Input 53

0 RPM* [-30000 - Readout parameter where the actual motor 0* [-20 - 20] View the actual value at input 53.
30000 RPM] RPM from the feedback source can be read
in both closed loop and open loop. The 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
3 3 feedback source is selected by

parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54.
[0] * Current
3.17.5 16-6* Inputs and Outputs [1] Voltage
16-64 Analog Input 54

16-60 Digital Input
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20] View the actual value at input 54.
0* [0 - View the signal states from the active digital inputs.
1023 ] Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit no. 5, 0=no
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
signal, 1=connected signal. Bit 6 works in the
opposite way, on=0, off=1 (safe stop input). Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
Bit 0 Digital input term. 33 value shown reflects the selection in
Bit 1 Digital input term. 32 parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
Bit 2 Digital input term. 29
Bit 3 Digital input term. 27 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
Bit 4 Digital input term. 19 Range: Function:
0* [0 - 15] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
Bit 8 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3
Range: Function:
Bit 9 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2
0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.
Bit 10-63 Reserved for future terminals
Table 3.25 Active Digital Inputs 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 130000] View the actual value of the frequency applied
at terminal 33 as an impulse input.
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000] View the actual value of pulses applied to
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000] View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29 in
Illustration 3.61 Relay Settings
digital output mode.
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.
[0] * Current
[1] Voltage

16-71 Relay Output [bin] 16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

0* [0 - 511 ] View the settings of all relays. 0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.
16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 30] View the actual value at output X45/1. The value
3 3
shown reflects the selection in 6-70 Terminal X45/1
Output.
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

Range: Function:
Illustration 3.63 Relay Settings 0* [0 - 30] View the actual value at output X45/3. The value
shown reflects the selection in 6-80 Terminal X45/3
Output.
16-72 Counter A
Range: Function:
3.17.6 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of Counter A.
Parameters for reporting the bus references and control
- 2147483647] Counters are useful as comparator operands,
words.
see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
The value can be reset or changed either via 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Range: Function:
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
65535 ] from the bus master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option
16-73 Counter B installed and the control word profile selected
Range: Function: in 8-10 Control Profile.
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of Counter B. For more information, refer to the relevant
- 2147483647] Counters are useful as comparator operands fieldbus manual.
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).
The value can be reset or changed either via 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Range: Function:
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
word from the bus master to set the reference
value.
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter For more information, refer to the relevant
Range: Function: fieldbus manual.
0* [0 - 2147483647] Returns the actual counter value of
precise counter (parameter 1-84 Precise 16-84 Comm. Option STW
Stop Counter Value). Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus comm. option
16-75 Analog In X30/11 status word.
Range: Function: For more information, refer to the relevant
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB fieldbus manual.
101.
16-85 FC Port CTW 1
16-76 Analog In X30/12 Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 65535 ] View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB from the bus master. Interpretation of the
101. control word depends on the fieldbus option
installed and the control word profile selected
in 8-10 Control Profile.

16-86 FC Port REF 1 16-94 Ext. Status Word

0* [-200 - View the 2-byte status word (STW) sent to the 0* [0 - 4294967295] Returns the extended warning word sent
200 ] bus master. Interpretation of the status word via the serial communication port in hex
depends on the fieldbus option installed and code.
3 3 the control word profile selected in

8-10 Control Profile.
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] Alarm and warning numbers in hex as displayed
in the Alarm log. The high byte contains the
alarm, the low byte the warning. The alarm
number is the first one that occurred after the
last reset.
16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] This alarm/warning word is configured in
parameter parameter 8-17 Configurable Alarm
and Warningword to match the actual
requirements.
3.17.7 16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
NOTICE
When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
parameters can only be read online, i.e. as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.
16-90 Alarm Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
16-91 Alarm Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295] View the alarm word sent via the serial
16-92 Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the serial
16-93 Warning Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295] View the warning word sent via the serial

3.18 Parameters: 17-** Feedback 17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)

Range: Function:
Additional parameters to configure the feedback from the
Size [4 - Select the resolution of the absolute
encoder (MCB 102), resolver (MCB 103) or the frequency
related* 131072] encoder, i.e. the number of counts per
converter itself.
revolution.
3.18.1 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface

The value depends on setting in
parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection.
3 3
Parameters in this group configure the incremental 17-24 SSI Data Length
interface of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the
Range: Function:
incremental and absolute interfaces are active at the same
13* [13 - 25] Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram.
time.
Choose 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25
bits for multi-turn encoders.
NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is 17-25 Clock Rate
running. Range: Function:
Size related* [ 100 - 260 Set the SSI clock rate. With long
17-10 Signal Type kHz] encoder cables the clock rate must
Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use. be reduced.
Find the information on the encoder data sheet.
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an absolute encoder 17-26 SSI Data Format
only. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [0] * Gray code
[0] None [1] Binary code Set the data format of the SSI data. Choose
[1] * RS422 (5V TTL) between gray or binary format.
[2] Sinusoidal 1Vpp
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate
17-11 Resolution (PPR) Option: Function:
Range: Function:
NOTICE
1024* [10 - 10000] Enter the resolution of the incremental
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
track, i.e. the number of pulses or periods
motor is running.
per revolution.
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder.

3.18.2 17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface The parameter is only accessible when
parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection is set to [1]
Parameters in this group configure the absolute interface HIPERFACE.
of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the incremental [0] 600
and absolute interfaces are active at the same time.
[1] 1200
17-20 Protocol Selection [2] 2400
Option: Function: [3] 4800
NOTICE [4] * 9600

[5] 19200
This parameter cannot be adjusted while [6] 38400
3.18.3 17-5* Resolver Interface

[0] * None Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an
incremental encoder only.
This parameter group is used for setting parameters for
[1] HIPERFACE Select [1] HIPERFACE if the encoder is absolute the Resolver Option MCB 103.
only. Usually the resolver feedback is used as motor feedback
[2] EnDat from permanent magnet motors with parameter 1-01 Motor
[4] SSI Control Principle set to Flux with motor feedback.
Resolver parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.

17-50 Poles Monitoring and Application parameters cannot be adjusted

Range: Function: while the motor is running.
2* [2 - 8] Set the number of poles on the resolver. 17-60 Feedback Direction

The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers. Option: Function:
NOTICE
3 3 17-51 Input Voltage
Range: Function: This parameter cannot be adjusted
7 V* [2 - 8 V] Set the input voltage to the resolver. The
voltage is stated as RMS value.
Change the detected encoder rotation
The value is stated in the data sheet for
direction without changing the wiring to
resolvers.
the encoder.
17-52 Input Frequency [0] * Clockwise

Range: Function: [1] Counter
10 kHz* [2 - 15 kHz] Set the input frequency to the resolver. clockwise
The value is stated in the data sheet for
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
resolvers.
Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in
case a faulty encoder signal is detected.
17-53 Transformation Ratio
The encoder function in parameter 17-61 Feedback Signal
Range: Function: Monitoring is an electrical check of the hardware circuit in the
0.5* [0.1 - 1.1] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver. encoder system.
The transformation ration is:
Option: Function:
VOut
Tratio = [0] Disabled
VIn
The value is stated in the data sheet for [1] * Warning
resolvers. [2] Trip
[3] Jog
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [4] Freeze Output
Set the resolution and activate the encoder emulation function [5] Max Speed
(generation of encoder signals from the measured position from [6] Switch to Open Loop
a resolver). Needed when necessary to transfer the speed or [7] Select Setup 1
position information from one frequency converter to another. [8] Select Setup 2
To disable the function, select [0] Disabled. [9] Select Setup 3
Option: Function: [10] Select Setup 4
[0] * Disabled [11] Stop & Trip
[1] 512
[2] 1024 3.18.5 17-7* Absolute Position
[3] 2048
[4] 4096 Parameters in this group show the absolute position of the
shaft, which is available directly from the frequency
17-59 Resolver Interface converter.
Activate the MCB 103 resolver option when the resolver
parameters are selected.
17-70 Absolute Position Display Unit
To avoid damage to resolvers parameter 17-50 Poles and Select the readout unit for the absolute position display.
parameter 17-53 Transformation Ratio must be adjusted before Option: Function:
activating this parameter. [0] * None
Option: Function: [1] m
[0] * Disabled [2] mm
[1] Enabled [3] Inc
[4] °
3.18.4 17-6* Monitoring and Application [5] rad
[6] %
This parameter group is for selecting additional functions
when encoder option MCB 102 or resolver option MCB 103
is fitted into option slot B as speed feedback.

17-71 Absolute Position Display Scale

Select the decimal power of the readout scale. The readout scale
is 1:10^(VALUE). For instance, the default value 0 means that the
scale is 1:10^0 = 1:1.
Range: Function:
0* [-7 - 7]
3 3
17-72 Absolute Position Numerator
If there are gears between the motor shaft and the application
shaft, the absolute position of the motor shaft should be
multiplied by a ratio to get the absolute position of the
application shaft. Enter the numerator of the ratio. Scaling ration
equals to (parameter 17-72 Absolute Position Numerator)/
(parameter 17-73 Absolute Position Denominator).
Range: Function:
4096* [-2000000000 -
2000000000]
17-73 Absolute Position Denominator

If there are gears between the motor shaft and the application
shaft, the absolute position of the motor shaft should be
multiplied by a ratio to get the absolute position of the
application shaft. Enter the denominator of the ratio. Scaling
ration equals to (parameter 17-72 Absolute Position Numerator)/
(parameter 17-73 Absolute Position Denominator).
Range: Function:
1* [-2000000000 -
2000000000]
17-74 Absolute Position Offset

Enter the absolute position offset. Use this parameter if manual
adjustment of the absolute position readout is required.
Range: Function:
0* [-2000000000 -
2000000000]

3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 18-91 Process PID Output

Range: Function:
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20] View the actual current measured at input X48/2. 18-92 Process PID Clamped Output
3 3 18-37 Temp. Input X48/4

Range:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
Function:
Range: Function:
18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output
0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
500] X48/4. The temperature unit is based on the
Range: Function:
selection in parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4 0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
Temperature Unit.
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7

Range: Function:
selection in parameter 35-02 Term. X48/7
Temperature Unit.
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10

Range: Function:
selection in parameter 35-04 Term. X48/10
Temperature Unit.
3.19.1 18-5* Active Alarms/Warnings
The parameters in this group show the numbers of

currently active alarms or warnings.
18-55 Active Alarm Numbers

This parameter contains an array of up to 20 alarms that are
currently active. The value 0 means no alarm.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535]
18-56 Active Warning Numbers

This parameter contains an array of up to 20 warnings that are
currently active. The value 0 means no warning.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535]
18-60 Digital Input 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] View the signal states from the active digital
inputs. '0' = no signal, '1' = connected signal.
18-90 Process PID Error

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]

3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 30-00 Wobble Mode

Option: Function:
3.20.1 30-0* Wobble Function
[3] Rel. Freq.,
Up/ Down
The wobble function is primarily used for synthetic yarn
Time
winding applications. The wobble option is installed in the
frequency converter controlling the traverse drive. The yarn
3.20.2 Centre Frequency
3 3
moves back and forth in a diamond pattern across the
surface of the yarn package. To prevent a build-up of yarn
at the same points at the surface, this pattern must be NOTICE
altered. The wobble option can accomplish this by contin- The setting of “Centre Frequency” takes place via the
uously varying the traverse velocity in a programmable normal reference handling parameter group, 3-1*
cycle. The wobble function is created by superimposing a References.
delta frequency around a centre frequency. To compensate
for the inertia in the system, a quick frequency jump can
be included. Especially suitable for elastic yarn applications, 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
the option features a randomised wobble ratio. Range: Function:
5 Hz* [0 - The delta frequency determines the magnitude of
Frequency 25 Hz] the wobble frequency. The delta frequency is
175ZB001.10
Par. 30-07: WOBB TIME

[Hz]
Par. 30-06: JUMP TIME superimposed on the centre frequency.
Par. 30-04 [Hz]: JUMP FREQ
Par. 30-01 [Hz]: DELTA FREQ.
Par. 30-09 [%] : JUMP FREQ Parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
Par. 30-02 [%]: DELTA FREQ.
(Par. 30-03) selected both the positive and negative delta
Par. 30-01 [Hz]
Par. 30-02 [%] frequency. The setting of parameter 30-01 Wobble
(Par. 30-03:)
CENTER FREQ
Par. 30-*1: RAMP UP Par. 30-09: RANDOM FUNC
Par 30-11: RANDOM MAX
Delta Frequency [Hz] must thus not be higher than
Par 30-12: RANDOM MIN
TDOWN TUP the setting of the centre frequency. The initial
Par. 30-10: [RATIO TUP/ TDOWN ]
Par. 30-08: [INDEPENDENT UP and DOWN]
ramp up time from standstill until the wobble
Time [s] sequence is running is determined by parameter
Illustration 3.64 Wobble Function group 3-1* References.
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%]

30-00 Wobble Mode Range: Function:
Option: Function: 25 %* [0 - 100 The delta frequency can also be expressed as
%] percentage of the centre frequency and can
NOTICE thus be maximum 100%. The function is the
This parameter cannot be adjusted while same as for parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta
running. Frequency [Hz].
The standard speed open loop mode in 30-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is extended Option: Function:
with a wobble function. In this parameter, it is Select which frequency converter
possible to select which method to be used for input should be used to scale the
the wobbler. The parameters can be set as delta frequency setting.
absolute values (direct frequencies) or as
[0] * No function
relative values (percentage of other parameter).
The wobble cycle time can be set as an [1] Analog Input 53
absolute value or as independent up and down [2] Analog Input 54
times. When using an absolute cycle time, the [3] Frequency input 29 FC 302 only
up and down times are configured through the [4] Frequency input 33
wobble ratio. [7] Analog Input X30/11
[0] Abs. Freq., [8] Analog Input X30/12
* Abs. Time [15] Analog Input X48/2
[1] Abs. Freq.,
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
Up/ Down
Time Range: Function:
[2] Rel. Freq., 0 Hz* [0 - The jump frequency is used to compensate for
Abs. Time 20.0 the inertia in the traverse system. If a jump in
Hz]

30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz] 30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min.
the output frequency is required at the 0.1* [ 0.1 - par. 30-11] Enter the minimum allowed wobble
boundaries of the wobble sequence, the ratio.
frequency jump is set in this parameter. If the
3 3 traverse system has a very high inertia, a high

jump frequency may create a torque limit
30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
Range: Function:
warning or trip (warning/alarm 12) or an
0 Hz* [0 - 1000 Hz] Readout parameter. View the actual
overvoltage warning or trip (warning/alarm 7).
wobble delta frequency after scaling has
This parameter can only be changed in stop
been applied.
mode.
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 3.20.3 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 The jump frequency can also be expressed as 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
%] percentage of the centre frequency. The Range: Function:
function is the same as for Size related* [0 - 60 s] High starting torque time for PM Motor
parameter 30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]. in Flux mode without feedback. This
parameter is available for FC 302 only.
30-06 Wobble Jump Time
Range: Function: 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
Size related* [ 0.005 - 5.000 s] Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 200.0 %] High starting torque current for PM
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time
Motor in and Flux mode without
Range: Function:
feedback. This parameter is
10 s* [1 - 1000 s] This parameter determines the wobble available for FC 302 only.
sequence period. This parameter can only be
changed in stop mode. 30-22 Locked Rotor Protection
Wobble time = tup + tdown
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM
motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVCplus open loop
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time
mode.
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
5 s* [0.1 - 1000 s] Defines the individual up and down times
[0] Off
for each wobble cycle.
[1] On Protects the motor from the locked rotor condition. The
control algorithm detects a possible locked rotor
30-09 Wobble Random Function
condition in motor and trips the frequency converter to
Option: Function: protect the motor.
[0] * Off
[1] On 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
30-10 Wobble Ratio This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM
motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVCplus open loop
Range: Function:
mode.
1* [0.1 - 10] If the ratio 0.1 is selected: tdown is 10 times
Range: Function:
greater than tup.
If the ratio 10 is selected: tup is 10 times greater Size related* [0.05 - 1 s] Time period for detecting the locked
than tdown. rotor condition. A low parameter
value leads to faster detection.
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max.
30-24 Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error [%]
Range: Function:
10* [ par. 17-53 - 10] Enter the maximum allowed wobble
ratio. Range: Function:
25 %* [0 - 100 %]

3.20.4 30-8* Compatibility
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Range: Function:
Size [0.000 - Enter the value of the d-axis
related* 1000.000 mH] inductance. Obtain the value from
the permanent magnet motor data
3 3
sheet. The d-axis inductance cannot
be found by performing an AMA.
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This
related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power
Ohm] to the brake resistor in
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
This parameter is only active in
frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 1] Enter the speed controller proportional
gain. Quick control is obtained at high
amplification. However, if amplification is
too great, the process may become
unstable.
30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.100* [0 - 10] Enter the process controller proportional gain.
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
However, if amplification is too great, the
process may become unstable.

3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
Select the alarm function:
3.21.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)
Option: Function:
[0] Off
35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit
[2] Stop
3 3 Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings
and readouts:
[5] * Stop and trip
Option: Function:
3.21.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)
[60] * °C
[160] °F
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type Range: Function:
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4: 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
Option: Function: s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
[0] * Not Connected
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
[1] PT100 2-wire
value improves dampening but also
[3] PT1000 2-wire
increases the time delay through the
[5] PT100 3-wire
filter.
[7] PT1000 3-wire
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit 35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling
and readouts: the temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. The temperature
limits can be set in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
Option: Function:
and parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.
[60] * °C
Option: Function:
[160] °F
[0] * Disabled
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [1] Enabled
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7:
35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
[0] * Not Connected
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
[1] PT100 2-wire
35-17] reading that is expected for
[3] PT1000 2-wire
normal operation of the
[5] PT100 3-wire temperature sensor at terminal
[7] PT1000 3-wire X48/4.
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit

35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10
Range: Function:
settings and readouts:
Size related* [ par. 35-16 - Enter the maximum temperature
Option: Function:
204] reading that is expected for
[60] * °C
[160] °F temperature sensor at terminal
X48/4.
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10:
Option: Function: 3.21.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)
[0] * Not Connected
[1] PT100 2-wire 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
[3] PT1000 2-wire Range: Function:
[5] PT100 3-wire 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
[7] PT1000 3-wire s] first-order digital low-pass filter time

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
increases the time delay through the Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
filter. 35-37] reading that is expected for
35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor
This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/10.
3 3
the temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. The temperature
limits can be set in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
and parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit. Range: Function:
Option: Function: Size related* [ par. 35-36 - Enter the maximum temperature
[0] * Disabled 204] reading that is expected for
[1] Enabled normal operation of the
35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit X48/10.
Range: Function:
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
3.21.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)
35-27] reading that is expected for
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
X48/7. Range: Function:
4 mA* [ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to
35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit 35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in
Range: Function: parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. The value must be set at >2 mA to
Size related* [ par. 35-26 - Enter the maximum temperature
activate the Live Zero Timeout Function in
204] reading that is expected for
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
X48/7.
Range: Function:
20 mA* [ par. 35-42 Enter the current (mA) that corresponds
3.21.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114) - 20 mA] to the high reference value (set in
parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant Feedb. Value).
Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time Range: Function:
constant for suppressing electrical noise 0* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value (in
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant 999999.999] RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds to
value improves dampening but also the voltage or current set in
increases the time delay through the parameter 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current.
filter.
35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor Range: Function:
This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling 100* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value
the temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. The temperature 999999.999] (in RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds
limits can be set in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. to the voltage or current set in
Limit/parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit. parameter 35-43 Term. X48/2 High
Option: Function: Current.
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled 35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant
Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time


Range: Function:
increases the time delay through the
3 3 filter.
3.22 Parameters: 42-** Safety Functions

The parameters in group 42 are available when a safety
option is installed in the frequency converter. For
information about the safety related parameters, see the
operating instructions for the safety options:
• Safety Option MCB 150/151 Operating Instructions.
• Safety Option MCB 152 Operating Instructions.

Parameter Lists Programming Guide
4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Lists and Options

4.1.1 Introduction
Frequency converter series

All = valid for FC 301 and FC 302 series
01 = valid for FC 301 only
4 4
02 = valid for FC 302 only
Changes during operation
”TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while
the frequency converter is in operation and “FALSE” means
that the frequency converter must be stopped before a
change can be made.
4 Set-up
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each
of the 4 set-ups, i. e. 1 single parameter can have 4
different data values.
’1 set-up’: data value is the same in all set-ups.
Data Description Type

type
2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible string VisStr
33 Normalised value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD
Table 4.1 Data Type

Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
4.1.2 Conversion Conversion index Conversion factor

100
The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in 75
factory setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole 74
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to 67
transfer decimals. 6 1000000
5 100000
A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the value transferred 4 10000
4 4 is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is therefore read as

10.0.
3
2
1000
100
1 10
Examples: 0 1
0 s⇒conversion index 0 -1 0.1
0.00 s⇒conversion index -2 -2 0.01
0 ms⇒conversion index -3 -3 0.001
0.00 ms⇒conversion index -5 -4 0.0001
-5 0.00001
-6 0.000001
-7 0.0000001
Table 4.2 Conversion Table
4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes
+ = active
- = not active
Parameter 1-10 Motor

AC motor PM non-salient motor
Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
Parameter 1-01 Motor Control U/f Flux
U/f mode VVC+ Flux sensorless motor VVC+ motor
Principle mode sensorless
feedback feedback
0-** Operation and Display (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
[0] Speed open loop + + + -
[1] Speed closed ;oop - + - +
[2] Torque - - - +
[3] Process + + + -
[4] Torque open loop - + - -
[5] Wobble + + + +
[6] Surface winder + + + -
[7] Ext. PID open loop + + + -
[8] Ext. PID closed loop - + - +
Parameter 1-02 Flux Motor

- - - +
Feedback Source
Parameter 1-03 Torque Character- + + +
-
istics see 1, 2, 3) see 1, 3, 4) see 1, 3, 4)
Parameter 1-04 Overload Mode + + + + + + +

Parameter 1-05 Local Mode
+ + + + + + +
Configuration
Parameter 1-06 Clockwise
+ + + + + + +
Direction


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
+ + + +
(Par. 023 = International)
Parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
+ + + +
(Par. 023 = US)
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage + + + + 4 4
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency + + + +
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current + + + +
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal
+ + + +
Speed
Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated
- - - - + + +
Torque
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
+ + + +
Adaptation (AMA)
Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance
+ + + + +
(Rs)
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance +
- + +
(Rr) see 5)
Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage

+ + + + +
Reactance (X1)
Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage +
- + +
Reactance (X2) see 5)
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance

+ + + + +
(Xh)
Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss
- - + + - - -
Resistance (Rfe)
Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance
- - - - + +
(Ld)
Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles + + + +
Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000
- - - - + + +
RPM
Parameter 1-41 Motor Angle
- - - - +
Offset
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
- + - - - - -
Speed
1-51 Min Speed Normal
Magnetising [RPM] (Par. 002 = - + - - - - -
rmp)
Parameter 1-52 Min Speed
Normal Magnetising [Hz] (Par. - + - - - - -
002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-53 Model Shift
- - + + - + +
Frequency
Parameter 1-54 Voltage reduction +
- - + - - -
in fieldweakening see 6)
Parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic

+ - - - + - -
-U
Parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic
+ - - - + - -
-F
Parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test
- + - - - - -
Pulses Current


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test
- + - - - - -
Pulses Frequency
Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load
- + - - - - -
Compensation
4 4 Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load
- + - - - - -
Compensation
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compen- +
- + - - - -
sation see 7)
1-63 Slip Compensation Time + + + +

+ - -
Constant see 8) see 8) see 8) see 8)
1-64 Resonance Damping + + + - + + -

1-65 Resonance Damping Time
+ + + - + + -
Constant
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at
- - + + - + +
Low Speed
Parameter 1-67 Load Type - - + - - - -
Parameter 1-68 Motor Inertia - - + - - - -
Parameter 1-69 System Inertia - - + - - - -
Parameter 1-71 Start Delay + + + + + + +
Parameter 1-72 Start Function + + + + + + +
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start - + + + - - -
Parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]
- + - - - - -
(Par. 002 = rmp)
Parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz]
- + - - - - -
(Par. 002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-76 Start Current - + - - - - -
Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop + + + + + + +
1-81 Min Speed for Function at
Stop [RPM] + + + + + + +
(Par. 002 = rpm)
1-82 Min Speed for Function at
Stop [Hz] + + + + + + +
(Par. 002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
+ + + + + + +
Function
+ + + + + + +
Counter Value
+ + + + + + +
Speed Compensation Delay
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
+ + + +
Protection
1-91 Motor External Fan + + + +
1-93 Thermistor Resource + + + +
Parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor Type + + + +
Parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor
+ + + +
Resource
Parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold
+ + + +
level
Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
+ + + +
points freq.


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol
+ + + +
points current
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current + + + +
4 4
Parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current + + + +
2-02 DC Braking Time + + + +
Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In
+ + + +
Speed [RPM]
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In
+ + + +
Speed [Hz]
Parameter 2-05 Maximum
+ + + +
Reference
Parameter 2-10 Brake Function +
9)
+ + +
see
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) + + + +
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) + + + +
Parameter 2-13 Brake Power
+ + + +
Monitoring
Parameter 2-15 Brake Check +
9)
+ + +
see
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max.
- + + +
Current
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage
+ + + +
Control
Parameter 2-18 Brake Check
+ + + +
Condition
Parameter 2-19 Over-voltage Gain + + + -
Parameter 2-20 Release Brake
+ + + +
Current
Parameter 2-21 Activate Brake
+ + + +
Speed [RPM]
+ + + +
Speed [Hz]
+ + + +
Delay
Parameter 2-24 Stop Delay - - - +
Parameter 2-25 Brake Release
- - - +
Time
Parameter 2-26 Torque Ref - - - + +
Parameter 2-27 Torque Ramp Up
- - - +
Time
Parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor - - - + +
Parameter 2-29 Torque Ramp
+ +
Down Time
Parameter 2-30 Position P Start
+ +
Proportional Gain
Parameter 2-31 Speed PID Start
+ +
Proportional Gain
+ +
Integral Time


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
+ +
Lowpass Filter Time
3-** Reference/ramps (all
+ + + +
parameters)
4 4 Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
+ + + +
Direction
Parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low
+ + + +
Limit [RPM]
Parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low
+ + + +
Limit [Hz]
Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
+ + + +
Limit [RPM]
Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
+ + + +
Limit [Hz]
Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
+ + + +
Motor Mode
+ + + +
Generator Mode
Parameter 4-18 Current Limit + + + +
Parameter 4-19 Max Output
+ + + +
Frequency
+ + + +
Factor Source
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source - + see 10) - + see 11)
Parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback 12) 12)

- + see - + see
Loss Function
- + see - + see
Speed Error
- + see - + see
Loss Timeout
Parameter 4-34 Tracking Error
+ + + +
Function
Parameter 4-35 Tracking Error + + + +
+ + + +
Timeout
+ + + +
Ramping
+ + + +
Ramping Timeout
+ + + +
After Ramping Timeout
Parameter 4-50 Warning Current
+ + + +
Low
Parameter 4-51 Warning Current
+ + + +
High
Parameter 4-52 Warning Speed
+ + + +
Low
Parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
+ + + +
High


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 4-54 Warning
+ + + +
Reference Low
+ + + +
Reference High
+ + + +
4 4
Feedback Low
+ + + +
Feedback High
Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor
+ + + +
Phase Function
Parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed
+ + + +
From [RPM]
Parameter 4-61 Bypass Speed
+ + + +
From [Hz]
Parameter 4-62 Bypass Speed To
+ + + +
[RPM]
Parameter 4-63 Bypass Speed To
+ + + +
[Hz]
5-** Digital in/out (all
+ + + +
parameters except 5-70 and 71)
Parameter 5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses 12)
- + see - +
Per Revolution
Parameter 5-71 Term 32/33 12)
- + see - +
Encoder Direction
6-** Analog in/out (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 7-00 Speed PID 12)
- + see - +
Feedback Source
Parameter 7-02 Speed PID Propor- 12)
- + see + +
tional Gain
Parameter 7-03 Speed PID Integral 12)
- + see + +
Time
Parameter 7-04 Speed PID Differ- 12)
- + see + +
entiation Time
Parameter 7-05 Speed PID Diff. 12)
- + see + +
Gain Limit
- + see + +
Lowpass Filter Time
- + see - +
Feedback Gear Ratio
Parameter 7-08 Speed PID Feed 12)
- + see - -
Forward Factor
Parameter 7-12 Torque PI Propor- 10)
- + see - -
tional Gain
Parameter 7-13 Torque PI 10)
- + see - -
Integration Time
Parameter 7-20 Process CL
+ + + +
Feedback 1 Resource
Parameter 7-22 Process CL
+ + + +
Feedback 2 Resource


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 7-30 Process PID
+ + + +
Normal/ Inverse Control
Parameter 7-31 Process PID Anti
+ + + +
Windup
4 4 Parameter 7-32 Process PID Start
+ + + +
Speed
+ + + +
Proportional Gain
+ + + +
Integral Time
Parameter 7-35 Process PID Differ-
+ + + +
entiation Time
Parameter 7-36 Process PID Diff.
+ + + +
Gain Limit
Parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed
+ + + +
Forward Factor
Parameter 7-39 On Reference
+ + + +
Bandwidth
Parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part
+ + + +
Reset
+ + + +
Output Neg. Clamp
+ + + +
Output Pos. Clamp
Parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain
+ + + +
Scale at Min. Ref.
Parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain
+ + + +
Scale at Max. Ref.
+ + + +
Fwd Resource
+ + + +
Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
Parameter 7-48 PCD Feed
+ + + +
Forward
+ + + +
Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
+ + + +
Extended PID
+ + + +
Fwd Gain
Fwd Ramp up + + + +

+ + + +
Fwd Ramp down
Parameter 7-56 Process PID Ref.
+ + + +
Filter Time
Parameter 7-57 Process PID Fb.
+ + + +
Filter Time


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
8-** Communications and
+ + + +
options (all parameters)
13-** Smart logic control (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 14-00 Switching
+ + + +
4 4
Pattern
Parameter 14-01 Switching
+ + + +
Frequency
Parameter 14-03 Overmodulation + + + +
Parameter 14-04 PWM Random + + + +
Parameter 14-06 Dead Time
+ + + +
Compensation
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
[0] No function + + + +
[1] Ctrl. ramp down - + + +
[2] Ctrl. ramp down, trip - + + +
[3] Coasting + + + +
[4] Kinetic back-up - + + +
[5] Kinetic back-up, trip - + + +
[6] Alarm + + + +
Parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at
+ + + +
Mains Fault
Parameter 14-12 Function at
+ + + +
Mains Imbalance
Parameter 14-14 Kin. Backup Time
- - + +
Out
Parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
+ + + +
Recovery Level
Parameter 14-20 Reset Mode + + + +
Parameter 14-21 Automatic
+ + + +
Restart Time
Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode + + + +
Parameter 14-24 Trip Delay at
+ + + +
Current Limit
+ + + +
Torque Limit
+ + + +
Inverter Fault
Parameter 14-29 Service Code + + + +
Parameter 14-30 Current Lim Ctrl,
+ + + +
Proportional Gain
+ + + +
Integration Time
+ + + +
Filter Time
Parameter 14-35 Stall Protection - - + +
Parameter 14-36 Fieldweakening
+ + + +
Function
Parameter 14-40 VT Level - + + +


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum
- + + +
Magnetisation
Parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO
- + + +
Frequency
4 4 Parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi - + + +
Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter + + + +
Parameter 14-51 DC Link
+ + + +
Compensation
Parameter 14-52 Fan Control + + + +
Parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor + + + +
Parameter 14-55 Output Filter + + + +
Parameter 14-56 Capacitance
- - + +
Output Filter
Parameter 14-57 Inductance
- - + +
Output Filter
Parameter 14-74 Leg. Ext. Status
+ + + +
Word
Parameter 14-80 Option Supplied
+ + + +
by External 24VDC
Parameter 14-89 Option Detection + + + +
Parameter 14-90 Fault Level + + + +
Table 4.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

1) Constant torque
2) Variable torque
3) AEO
4) Constant power
5) Used in flystart
6) Used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics is constant power
7) Not used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics = VT
8) Part of resonance damping
9) Not AC brake
10) Torque open loop
11) Torque
12) Speed closed loop

4.1.4 0-** Operation/Display
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03
0-04
Regional Settings
Operating State at Power-up (Hand)
[0] International
[1] Forced stop, ref=old
2 set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8 4 4
0-09 Performance Monitor 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups/Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-15 Readout: actual setup 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1617 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Min. Value of User-defined Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Max. Value of User-defined Readout 100 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
VisStr[
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 25]
VisStr[
VisStr[
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-68 Safety Parameters Password 300 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-69 Password Protection of Safety Parameters [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

4.1.5 1-** Load/Motor
Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
only during sion index
operation
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4 1-02
1-03
Flux Motor Feedback Source
Torque Characteristics
[1] 24 V encoder
[0] Constant torque
All set-ups
All set-ups
x FALSE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust [0] Manual All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-1* Special Settings
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron. All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-11 Motor Model ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-14 Damping Gain 140% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-18 Min. Current at No Load 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [hp] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
Automatic Motor Adaptation
1-29 (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-41 Motor Angle Offset 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-47 Low Speed Torque Calibration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point 35% All set-ups x TRUE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
Motor Magnetisation at Zero
1-50 Speed 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min. Speed Normal Magnetising
1-51 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

operation
Min. Speed Normal Magnetising
1-52 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
Voltage reduction in
1-54 fieldweakening 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
4 4
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Damping 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Resonance Damping Time
1-65 Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
1-67 Load Type [0] Passive load All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Minimum Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-69 Maximum Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [0] Rotor Detection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min. Speed for Function at Stop
1-81 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min. Speed for Function at Stop
1-82 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-83 Precise Stop Function [0] Precise ramp stop All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 100000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Precise Stop Speed Compensation
1-85 Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [0] No protection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction 0% 2 set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-95 KTY Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 KTY Threshold level 80 °C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16

4.1.6 2-** Brakes
operation
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4 4 2-02
2-03
DC Braking Time
DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
10 s
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
67
Uint16
Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-05 Maximum Reference MaxReference (P303) All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
2-06 Parking Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-18 Brake Check Condition [0] At Power-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-19 Over voltage Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time 0.20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-26 Torque Ref 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-28 Gain Boost Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain 0.0150 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 200.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Speed PID Start Low-pass Filter
2-33 Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16

4.1.7 3-** Reference/Ramps
operation
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-02
3-03
Minimum Reference
Maximum Reference
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-3
-3
Int32
Int32 4 4
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/Slow Down Value 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-13 Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand/Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Relative Scaling Reference
3-18 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-45 Start 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-48 End 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-6* Ramp 3
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

operation
3-7* Ramp 4
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4 4
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

4.1.8 4-** Limits/Warnings
operation
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12
4-13
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
67
Uint16
Uint16 4 4
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max. Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-3* Motor Speed Mon.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [2] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-34 Tracking Error Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-35 Tracking Error 10 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
Tracking Error After Ramping
4-39 Timeout 5s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999.999 Reference-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low FeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.999 Reference-
4-57 Warning Feedback High FeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

4.1.9 5-** Digital In/Out
operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

5-1* Digital Inputs
[0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
Terminal 27 Pulse Output
5-60 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max. Freq #27 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

operation
Terminal 29 Pulse Output
5-63 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
5-66 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4
5-68 Pulse Output Max. Freq #X30/6 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 25 s 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
4.1.10 6-** Analog In/Out
operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-14 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
6-15 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-2* Analog Input 2
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-3* Analog Input 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16

operation
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.
Term. X30/11 Filter Time
6-36 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4 4 6-4* Analog Input 4
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb.
Term. X30/12 Filter Time
6-46 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal 42 Output Timeout
6-54 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-55 Analog Output Filter [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout

4.1.11 7-** Controllers
operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03
7-04
Speed PID Integral Time
Speed PID Differentiation Time
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-4
-4
Uint32
Uint16 4 4
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Low-pass Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Speed PID Error Correction w/
7-09 Ramp 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
Process PID Normal/Inverse
7-30 Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
7-4* Adv. Process PID I
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp -100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Process PID Gain Scale at Min.
7-43 Ref. 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Process PID Gain Scale at Max.
7-44 Ref. 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/
7-46 Inv. Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-48 PCD Feed Forward 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
Process PID Output Normal/Inv.
7-49 Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-5* Adv. Process PID II
7-50 Process PID Extended PID [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp
7-53 down 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

operation
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4.1.12 8-** Comm. and Options
4 4 Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302

only
Change
during
Conver-
sion index
Type
operation
8-0* General Settings
8-01 Control Site [0] Digital and ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-08 Readout Filtering ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-19 Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop
8-33 Parity/Stop bits bit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-34 Estimated cycle time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max. Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max. Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
8-40 Telegram Selection [1] Standard telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-41 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups FALSE - Uint16
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-45 BTM Transaction Command [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-46 BTM Transaction Status [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-47 BTM Timeout 60 s 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors 21 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-49 BTM Error Log 0.255 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

operation
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83
8-9* Bus Jog
Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4 4
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4.1.13 9-** Profibus
No. # only during sion index
operation
9-00 Set-point 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-19 Drive Unit System Number 1034 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
9-28 Process Control [1] Enable cyclic master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-63 Actual Baud Rate [255] No baudrate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-70 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

4.1.14 10-** CAN Fieldbus
operation
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
10-01 Baud Rate Select ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 10-02
10-05
MAC ID
Readout Transmit Error Counter
ExpressionLimit
0 N/A
2 set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint8
Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 DeviceNet Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
4.1.15 12-** Ethernet
operation
12-0* IP Settings
12-00 IP Address Assignment ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-01 IP Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-02 Subnet Mask 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-03 Default Gateway 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-04 DHCP Server 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-05 Lease Expires ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-06 Name Servers 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-07 Domain Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-08 Host Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-09 Physical Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[17]
12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
12-10 Link Status [0] No Link All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-11 Link Duration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD

operation
12-12 Auto Negotiation ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-13 Link Speed ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-14 Link Duplex ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-2* Process Data
12-20 Control Instance ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
12-21
12-22
Process Data Config Write
Process Data Config Read
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint16
Uint16 4 4
12-23 Process Data Config Write Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-24 Process Data Config Read Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-27 Master Address 0 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 OctStr[4]
12-28 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-29 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
12-3* EtherNet/IP
12-30 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-31 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-32 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-33 CIP Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-34 CIP Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-35 EDS Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-38 COS Filter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-4* Modbus TCP
12-40 Status Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-41 Slave Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-42 Slave Exception Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-5* EtherCAT
12-50 Configured Station Alias 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
12-51 Configured Station Address 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-59 EtherCAT Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-6* Ethernet PowerLink
12-60 Node ID 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
12-62 SDO Timeout 30000 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
12-63 Basic Ethernet Timeout 5000.000 ms All set-ups TRUE -6 Uint32
12-66 Threshold 15 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-67 Threshold Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-68 Cumulative Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-69 Ethernet PowerLink Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-8* Other Ethernet Services
12-80 FTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-81 HTTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-82 SMTP Service [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Transparent Socket Channel
12-89 Port ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services
12-90 Cable Diagnostic [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-91 Auto Crossover [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-92 IGMP Snooping [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-93 Cable Error Length 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection -1% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter [0] Broadcast only 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-96 Port Config ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

operation
12-98 Interface Counters 4000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-99 Media Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4.1.16 13-** Smart Logic
4 4 Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302

only
Change
during
Conver-
sion index
Type
operation
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-1* RS Flip Flops
13-15 RS-FF Operand S ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-16 RS-FF Operand R ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.17 14-** Special Functions
operation index
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-06 Dead Time Compensation [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-13 Mains Failure Step Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
14-14 Kin. back-up Timeout 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-15 Kin. back-up Trip Recovery Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
14-16 Kin. back-up Gain 100% All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32

operation index
14-2* Trip Reset
14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
60 s
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint8
Uint8
4 4
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-35 Stall Protection [1] Enabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-36 Fieldweakening Function [0] Auto All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC Link Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Uint16
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x FALSE 0 Uint8
14-7* Compatibility
14-72 Legacy Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-73 Legacy Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-8* Options
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC [1] Yes 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-88 Option Data Storage 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-89 Option Detection [0] Protect Option Config. 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
4.1.18 15-** Drive Information
operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power-up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

operation
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
4 4 15-10
15-11
Logging Source
Logging Interval
0
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-3
Uint16
TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-3* Fault Log
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
Frequency Converter Ordering
15-46 No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
Frequency Converter Serial
15-51 Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-58 Smart Setup Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[16]
15-59 CSIV Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-8* Operating Data II
15-80 Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32

operation
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-89 Configuration Change Counter 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98
15-99
Drive Identification
Parameter Metadata
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
0
0
VisStr[40]
Uint16 4 4
4.1.19 16-** Data Readouts
operation index
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16
16-20 Motor Angle 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 0.0000 Ohm All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
16-25 Torque [Nm] High 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heat sink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[
16-41 LCP Bottom Status line 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 50]
16-45 Motor Phase U Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32

operation index
16-46 Motor Phase V Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-47 Motor Phase W Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
4 4 16-50 External Reference

16-51 Pulse Reference
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
-1
-1
Int16
Int16
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-57 Feedback [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

4.1.20 17-** Motor Feedb.Option
operation
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 4 4
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16
17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [0] Disabled 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.21 18-** Data Readouts 2
operation
18-3* Analog Readouts
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2
18-60 Digital Input 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
18-9* PID Readouts
18-90 Process PID Error 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-91 Process PID Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
Process PID Gain Scaled
18-93 Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16

4.1.22 30-** Special Features
operation
30-0* Wobbler
[0] Abs. Freq., Abs.
30-00 Wobble Mode Time All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4 30-01
30-02
Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
Wobble Delta Frequency [%]
5 Hz
25%
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
0
Uint8
Uint8
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling
30-03 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
30-06 Wobble Jump Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-08 Wobble Up/Down Time 5s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-09 Wobble Random Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-10 Wobble Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max. 10 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min. 0.1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint16
High Starting Torque Current
30-21 [%] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
Locked Rotor Detection Time
30-23 [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint8
30-8* Compatibility (I)
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Process PID Proportional
30-84 Gain 0.100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4.1.23 32-** MCO Basic Settings
operation
32-0* Encoder 2
32-00 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-01 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-02 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-03 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Baudrate
32-04 X55 [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Absolute Encoder Data
32-05 Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Absolute Encoder Clock
32-06 Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-07 Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

operation
Absolute Encoder Cable
32-08 Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-09 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-10 Rotational Direction [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4 4
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-13 Enc.2 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-14 Enc.2 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-15 Enc.2 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-3* Encoder 1
32-30 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-31 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-32 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-33 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Data
32-35 Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-36 Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-37 Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Absolute Encoder Cable
32-38 Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-39 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-40 Encoder Termination [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-43 Enc.1 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-44 Enc.1 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-45 Enc.1 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-5* Feedback Source
32-50 Source Slave [2] Encoder 2 X55 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-51 MCO 302 Last Will [1] Trip 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-52 Source Master [1] Encoder 1 X56 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-6* PID Controller
32-60 Proportional factor 30 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-61 Derivative factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-62 Integral factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-64 PID Bandwidth 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-65 Velocity Feed Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-66 Acceleration Feed Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 20000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-68 Reverse Behaviour for Slave [0] Reversing allowed 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Sampling Time for PID
32-69 Control 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
Scan Time for Profile
32-70 Generator 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
Size of the Control Window
32-71 (Activation) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Size of the Control Window
32-72 (Deactiv.) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-73 Integral limit filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
32-74 Position error filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16

operation
32-8* Velocity & Accel.
32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 1500 RPM 2 set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
32-81 Shortest Ramp 1s 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-82 Ramp Type [0] Linear 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-83 Velocity Resolution 100 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4 4 32-84
32-85
Default Velocity
Default Acceleration
50 N/A
50 N/A
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint32
Uint32
32-86 Acc. up for limited jerk 100 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-87 Acc. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-88 Dec. up for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-89 Dec. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-9* Development
32-90 Debug Source [0] Control card 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.24 33-** MCO Adv. Settings
operation
33-0* Home Motion
33-00 Force HOME [0] Home not forced 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Zero Point Offset from Home
33-01 Pos. 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-02 Ramp for Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Behaviour during Home
33-04 Motion [0] Reverse and index 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-1* Synchronisation
33-10 Sync Factor Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-11 Sync Factor Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Position Offset for Synchroni-
33-12 zation 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Accuracy Window for Position
33-13 Sync. 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 0% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-15 Marker Number for Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-16 Marker Number for Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-17 Master Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-18 Slave Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-19 Master Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-20 Slave Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Master Marker Tolerance
33-21 Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Slave Marker Tolerance
33-22 Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Start Behaviour for Marker
33-23 Sync [0] Leading marker 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
33-24 Marker Number for Fault 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-25 Marker Number for Ready 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-26 Velocity Filter 0 us 2 set-ups TRUE -6 Int32
33-27 Offset Filter Time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32

operation
33-28 Marker Filter Configuration [0] Marker filter 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-31 Synchronisation Type [0] Standard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Feed Forward Velocity
4 4
33-32 Adaptation 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-33 Velocity Filter Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-34 Slave Marker filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-4* Limit Handling
33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch [0] Call error handler 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-41 Negative Software End Limit -500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-42 Positive Software End Limit 500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Negative Software End Limit
33-43 Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Positive Software End Limit
33-44 Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-45 Time in Target Window 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
33-46 Target Window Limit Value 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-47 Size of Target Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-5* I/O Configuration
33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Terminal X59/1 and X59/2
33-60 Mode [1] Output 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-8* Global Parameters
33-80 Activated Program Number -1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
33-81 Power-up State [1] Motor on 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-82 Drive Status Monitoring [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-83 Behaviour after Error [0] Coast 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-84 Behaviour after Esc. [0] Controlled stop 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
MCO Supplied by External 24
33-85 V DC [0] No 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-86 Terminal at alarm [0] Relay 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

operation
33-87 Terminal state at alarm [0] Do nothing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-88 Status word at alarm 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-9* MCO Port Settings
33-90 X62 MCO CAN node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-91 X62 MCO CAN baud rate [20] 125 Kbps 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 33-94
X60 MCO RS 485 serial
termination [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
X60 MCO RS 485 serial baud
33-95 rate [2] 9600 Baud 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.25 34-** MCO Data Readouts
operation
34-0* PCD Write Par.
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-4* Inputs & Outputs
34-40 Digital Inputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-41 Digital Outputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data
34-50 Actual Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-51 Commanded Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-52 Actual Master Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-53 Slave Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-54 Master Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-55 Curve Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-57 Synchronising Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-58 Actual Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-59 Actual Master Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

operation
34-60 Synchronising Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-61 Axis Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-62 Program Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-64 MCO 302 Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-65 MCO 302 Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-7* Diagnosis readouts
34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32 4 4
34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
4.1.26 35-** Sensor Input Option
operation
35-0* Temp. Input Mode
35-00 Term. X48/4 temp. unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-01 Term. X48/4 input type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Temperature sensor alarm
35-06 function [5] Stop and trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
Term. X48/4 filter time
35-14 constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-15 Term. X48/4 temp. monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-16 Term. X48/4 low temp. limit App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-17 Term. X48/4 high temp. limit App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-4* Analog Input X48/2
35-42 Term. X48/2 low current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-43 Term. X48/2 high current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Term. X48/2 low ref./feedb.
35-44 value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X48/2 high ref./feedb.
35-45 value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Status Messages If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its
cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages (see also Table 5.1).
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
code on the display. before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can
5 5 A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be
critical, but are not necessarily so. Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips. automatic wake-up is possible.)
Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has
been rectified. If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 5.1,
this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm,
3 ways to reset: or it is possible to specify whether a warning or an alarm
• Press [Reset]. should be displayed for a given fault.
• Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.

This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor
• Via serial communication/optional fieldbus. Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries
NOTICE on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to
flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
restart the motor.
NOTICE
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and
no stall detection are active when 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
Num Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

ber Reference
1 10 volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) Parameter 6-01 Live Zero
Timeout Function
3 No motor (X) Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop
4 Mains phase Loss (X) (X) (X) Parameter 14-12 Function at
Mains Imbalance
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC overvoltage X X
8 DC undervoltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over current X X X
14 Earth fault X X

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

ber Reference
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) Parameter 8-04 Control Word
Timeout Function
20 Temp. input error X
21 Param error X
22 Hoist mech. brake (X) (X) Parameter group 2-2*
23 Internal fans X
24 External fans X
25
26
Brake resistor short-circuited
Brake resistor power limit
X
(X) (X) Parameter 2-13 Brake Power
5 5
Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) Parameter 2-15 Brake Check
29 Heat sink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor Phase
Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor Phase
Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor Phase
Function
33 Inrush fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Option fault X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase imbalance X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heat sink sensor X X
40 Overload of digital output terminal 27 (X) Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode, parameter 5-01 Terminal
27 Mode
41 Overload of digital output terminal 29 (X) Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode, parameter 5-02 Terminal
29 Mode
42 Ovrld X30/6-7 (X)
43 Ext. supply (option) X
45 Earth fault 2 X X
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External interlock X X


ber Reference
61 Feedback error (X) (X) Parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback
Loss Function
62 Output frequency at maximum limit X
63 Mechanical brake low (X) Parameter 2-20 Release Brake
Current
64 Voltage limit X
65 Control board overtemperature X X X
66 Heat sink temperature low X
67 Option configuration has changed X
5 5 68 Safe stop (X) (X)1) Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop
69 Pwr. card temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X
72 Dangerous failure X
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart (X) (X) Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop
74 PTC Thermistor X
75 Illegal Profile Sel. X
76 Power Unit Set-up X
77 Reduced power mode X Parameter 14-59 Actual Number
of Inverter Units
78 Tracking error (X) (X) Parameter 4-34 Tracking Error
Function
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialised to default value X
81 CSIV corrupt X
82 CSIV parameter error X
83 Illegal option combination X
84 No safety option X
88 Option detection X
89 Mechanical brake sliding X
90 Feedback monitor (X) (X) Parameter 17-61 Feedback
Signal Monitoring
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X S202
99 Locked rotor X X
104 Mixing fans X X
122 Mot. rotat. unexp. X
123 Motor mod. changed X
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning X
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm X
165 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning X
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm X
220 Configuration File Version not supported X
246 Pwr.card supply X
250 New spare part X
251 New type code X X
430 PWM Disabled X
Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode

A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs [1]). The original event that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency converter or
cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs, which could damage the frequency converter or
connected parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset by a power cycling.
Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red
Table 5.2 LED Indication
Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word 2 Warning Word Warning Extended Extended
Alarm Word Extended Status Word

Word 2 Status Word Status Word 2 5 5
0 00000001 1 Brake check Servicetrip, Brake check Start delayed Ramping Off
(A28) read/write (W28)
1 00000002 2 Pwr.card temp Servicetrip, Pwr.card temp Stop delayed AMA running Hand/auto
(A69) (reserved) (A69)
2 00000004 4 Earth fault (A14) Servicetrip, Earth fault (W14) reserved Start CW/CCW Profibus OFF1
typecode/ start_possible is active, active
sparepart when the DI selections
[12] OR [13] are active
and the requested
direction matches the
reference sign
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.card temp Servicetrip, Ctrl.card temp reserved Slow down Profibus OFF2
(A65) (reserved) (W65) slow down command active
active, e.g. via CTW bit
11 or DI
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. word TO Servicetrip, Ctrl. word TO Catch up Profibus OFF3
(A17) (reserved) (W17) catch up command active
active, e.g. via CTW bit
12 or DI
5 00000020 32 Overcurrent reserved Overcurrent reserved Feedback high Relay 123
(A13) (W13) feedback > 4-57 active
6 00000040 64 Torque limit reserved Torque limit reserved Feedback low Start
(A12) (W12) feedback < 4-56 prevented
7 00000080 128 Motor th over reserved Motor th over reserved Output current high Control ready
(A11) (W11) current > 4-51
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR over reserved Motor ETR over reserved Output current low Drive ready
(A10) (W10) current < 4-50
9 00000200 512 Inverter overld. Discharge high Inverter Overld Discharge Output freq high Quick stop
(A9) (W9) high speed > 4-53
10 00000400 1024 DC under volt Start failed DC under volt Multi-motor Output freq low DC brake
(A8) (W8) underload speed < 4-52
11 00000800 2048 DC over volt Speed limit DC over volt Multi-motor Brake check OK Stop
(A7) (W7) overload brake test NOT ok
12 00001000 4096 Short circuit External DC voltage low Compressor Braking max. Stand by
(A16) interlock (W6) interlock BrakePower > Brakepo-
werlimit (2-12)
13 00002000 8192 Inrush fault Illegal option DC voltage high Mechanical Braking Freeze output
(A33) combi. (W5) brake sliding request
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. loss No safety Mains ph. loss Safe option Out of speed range Freeze output
(A4) option (W4) warning
15 00008000 32768 AMA not OK reserved No motor (W3) Auto DC OVC active Jog request
braking

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word 2 Warning Word Warning Extended Extended
Word 2 Status Word Status Word 2
16 00010000 65536 Live zero error reserved Live zero error AC brake Jog
(A2) (W2)
17 00020000 131072 Internal fault KTY error 10V low (W1) KTY warn Password timelock Start request
(A38) number of allowed
password trials
exceeded - timelock
active
18 00040000 262144 Brake overload Fans error Brake overload Fans warn Password protection Start
(A26) (W26) 0-61 = ALL_NO_ACCESS
OR BUS_NO_ACCESS OR
5 5 BUS_READONLY
19 00080000 524288 U phase loss ECB error Brake resistor ECB warn Reference high Start applied
(A30) (W25) reference > 4-55
20 00100000 1048576 V phase loss Hoist Brake IGBT Hoist Reference low Start delay
(A31) mechanical (W27) mechanical reference < 4-54
brake (A22) brake (W22)
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss reserved Speed limit reserved Local reference Sleep
(A32) (W49) reference site = REMOTE
-> auto on pressed &
active
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus fault reserved Fieldbus fault reserved Protection mode notifi- Sleep boost
(A34) (W34) cation
23 00800000 8388608 24 V supply low reserved 24V supply Low reserved Unused Running
(A47) (W47)
24 01000000 16777216 Mains failure reserved Mains failure reserved Unused Drive bypass
(A36) (W36)
25 02000000 33554432 1.8 V supply low Current limit Current limit reserved Unused Fire mode
(A48) (A59) (W59)
26 04000000 67108864 Brake resistor Motor rotating Low temp (W66) reserved Unused External
(A25) unexpectedly interlock
(A122)
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT (A27) reserved Voltage limit reserved Unused Firemode
(W64) limit exceed
28 10000000 268435456 Option change reserved Encoder loss reserved Unused Flying start
(A67) (W90) active
29 20000000 536870912 Drive initialised Encoder loss Output freq. lim. BackEMF too Unused
(A80) (A90) (W62) high
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe stop (A68) PTC thermi-stor Safe stop (W68) PTC thermi- Unused
(A74) stor (W74)
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake low Dangerous Extended status Protection mode
(A63) failure (A72) word
Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnostics. See also parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low Troubleshooting
The control card voltage is <10 V from terminal 50. • Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If
supply is overloaded. Maximum 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. the warning does not clear, replace the control
card.
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or incorrect
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition.

WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage

This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in If the DC link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit,
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one of the the frequency converter checks if a 24 V DC back-up
analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value supply is connected. If no 24 V DC back-up supply is
programmed for that input. Broken wiring or a faulty connected, the frequency converter trips after a fixed time
device sending the signal can cause this condition. delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
• Check the connections on all the analog mains • Check that the supply voltage matches the
terminals. frequency converter voltage.
- Control card terminals 53 and 54 for • Perform an input voltage test.
signals, terminal 55 common.
• Perform a soft charge circuit test.
- MCB 101 terminals 11 and 12 for signals,
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload 5 5
terminal 10 common. The frequency converter has run with more than 100%
- MCB 109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, overload for too long and is about to cut out. The counter
terminals 2, 4, 6 common. for electronic thermal inverter protection issues a warning
at 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The
• Check that the frequency converter programming
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is
and switch settings match the analog signal type.
below 90%.
• Perform an input terminal signal test.
Troubleshooting
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor • Compare the output current shown on the LCP
No motor has been connected to the output of the with the frequency converter rated current.
• Compare the output current shown on the LCP
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss with the measured motor current.
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
• Display the thermal drive load on the LCP and
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears monitor the value. When running above the
for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter. frequency converter continuous current rating,
Options are programmed in 14-12 Function at Mains the counter increases. When running below the
Imbalance. frequency converter continuous current rating,
Troubleshooting the counter decreases.
• Check the supply voltage and supply currents to WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
the frequency converter. According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter
The DC-link voltage (DC) is higher than the high-voltage issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
warning limit. The limit is dependent on the frequency 100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault occurs
converter voltage rating. The unit is still active. when the motor runs with more than 100% overload for
too long.
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The DC-link voltage (DC) is lower than the low-voltage Troubleshooting
warning limit. The limit is dependent on the frequency • Check for motor overheating.
converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
• Check that the motor current set in
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the parameter 1-24 Motor Current is correct.
frequency converter trips after a time.
• Ensure that the motor data in parameters 1–20 to
Troubleshooting 1–25 are set correctly.
• Connect a brake resistor.
• If an external fan is in use, check that it is
• Extend the ramp time. selected in parameter 1-91 Motor External Fan.
• Change the ramp type.
• Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
• Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function. (AMA) tunes the frequency converter to the
motor more accurately and reduces thermal
• Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault.
loading.
• If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
use kinetic back-up (parameter 14-10 Mains
Failure).

WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor overtemp • Check that the motor data is correct in
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select parameters 1–20 to 1–25.
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an
ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
There is current from the output phase to ground, either in
Troubleshooting the cable between the frequency converter and the motor
• Check for motor overheating. or in the motor itself.
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. Troubleshooting
• When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the • Remove power to the frequency converter and
thermistor is connected correctly between either repair the ground fault.
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and • Check for ground faults in the motor by
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
5 5 terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage. cables and the motor with a megohmmeter.
Check that 1-93 Thermistor Source selects terminal
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
53 or 54. A fitted option is not operational with the present control
• When using terminal 18, 19, 31, 32 or 33 (digital board hardware or software.
inputs), check that the thermistor is connected Record the value of the following parameters and contact
correctly between the digital input terminal used Danfoss:
(digital input PNP only) and terminal 50. Select
the terminal to use in parameter 1-93 Thermistor • Parameter 15-40 FC Type
Source. • Parameter 15-41 Power Section
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit

• Parameter 15-42 Voltage
The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit • 15-43 Software Version
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator • 15-45 Actual Typecode String
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this
warning from a warning-only condition to a warning
• 15-49 SW ID Control Card
followed by an alarm. • 15-50 SW ID Power Card
Troubleshooting • 15-60 Option Mounted

• If the motor torque limit is exceeded during • 15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
ALARM 16, Short circuit
• If the generator torque limit is exceeded during There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time.
Troubleshooting
• If torque limit occurs while running, increase the • Remove the power to the frequency converter
torque limit. Make sure that the system can and repair the short circuit.
operate safely at a higher torque.
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
• Check the application for excessive current draw There is no communication to the frequency converter.
on the motor. The warning is only active when parameter 8-04 Control
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current Word Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the If parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5]
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts approxi- Stop and Trip, a warning appears and the frequency
mately 1.5 s, then the frequency converter trips and issues converter ramps down until it stops, and then it displays
an alarm. Shock loading or quick acceleration with high- an alarm.
inertia loads can cause this fault. If the acceleration during Troubleshooting
ramp-up is quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic • Check the connections on the serial communi-
back-up. cation cable.
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, a trip can
be reset externally. • Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Troubleshooting • Check the operation of the communication

equipment.
• Remove the power and check if the motor shaft
can be turned. • Verify a proper installation based on EMC
requirements.
• Check that the motor size matches the frequency
converter. WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error
The temperature sensor is not connected.

WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
reported in the display. a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The
calculation is based on the DC-link voltage and the brake
Troubleshooting
resistor value set in 2-16 AC brake Max. Current. The
• The affected parameter must be set to a valid warning is active when the dissipated braking power is
value.
higher than 90% of the brake resistor power. If option [2]
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake Trip is selected in parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring,
Report value shows what kind it is. the frequency converter trips when the dissipated braking
0 = The torque reference was not reached before timeout power reaches 100%.
(parameter 2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time).
1 = Expected brake feedback not received before timeout WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault
5 5
(parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay, parameter 2-25 Brake The brake transistor is monitored during operation, and if
a short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
Release Time).
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault operational but, since the brake transistor has short-
The fan warning function is an extra protective function circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning resistor, even if it is inactive.
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Troubleshooting
For frequency converters with DC fans, there is a feedback
• Remove power to the frequency converter and
sensor mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run remove the brake resistor.
and there is no feedback from the sensor, this alarm
appears. For frequency converters with AC fans, the WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
voltage to the fan is monitored.
Check parameter 2-15 Brake Check.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 29, Heat Sink temp
• Check for proper fan operation. The maximum temperature of the heat sink has been
• Cycle power to the frequency converter and exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up. temperature drops below a defined heat sink temperature.
• Check the sensors on the heat sink and control The trip and reset points are different based on the
card. frequency converter power size.
WARNING 24, External fan fault Troubleshooting

The fan warning function is an extra protective function Check for the following conditions.
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning • Ambient temperature too high.
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
• Motor cables too long.
• Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the
sensor mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run frequency converter.
appears. For frequency converters with AC fans, the • Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.
voltage to the fan is monitored. • Damaged heat sink fan.
• Dirty heat sink.

Troubleshooting
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
• Check for proper fan operation. Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
• Cycle power to the frequency converter and motor is missing.
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
Troubleshooting
• Check the sensors on the heat sink and control • Remove the power from the frequency converter
card. and check motor phase U.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the motor is missing.
warning appears. The frequency converter is still
Troubleshooting
operational, but without the brake function.
• Remove the power from the frequency converter
Troubleshooting and check motor phase V.
• Remove the power to the frequency converter
and replace the brake resistor (see
parameter 2-15 Brake Check).

ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing Number Text

Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the 1316 The option SW in slot B is not supported (not
motor is missing. allowed).
Troubleshooting 1318 The option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not
• Remove the power from the frequency converter allowed).

and check motor phase W. 1379-2819 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or
Danfoss Service Department.
ALARM 33, Inrush fault
1792 HW reset of DSP.
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
1793 Motor derived parameters not transferred correctly
period.
to DSP.
Troubleshooting 1794 Power data not transferred correctly at power-up
• Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
5 5
to DSP.
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault 1795 The DSP has received too many unknown SPI
The fieldbus on the communication option card is not telegrams.
working. The frequency converter also uses this fault code if
the MCO does not power up correctly, for example
WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault
due to poor EMC protection or improper
An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
grounding.
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
1796 RAM copy error.
fault.
2561 Replace control card.
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure 2820 LCP stack overflow.
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
2821 Serial port overflow.
the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is
2822 USB port overflow.
not set to option [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the
3072-5122 Parameter value is outside its limits.
frequency converter and mains supply to the unit.
5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
ALARM 37, Phase imbalance control board hardware.
There is a current imbalance between the power units. 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
ALARM 38, Internal fault control board hardware.
When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
Table 5.4 is displayed. control board hardware.
5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
Troubleshooting
control board hardware.
• Cycle power. 5376-6231 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or
• Check that the option is properly installed. Danfoss Service Department.
• Check for loose or missing wiring.
Table 5.4 Internal Fault Codes
It may be necessary to contact the Danfoss supplier or
service department. Note the code number for further ALARM 39, Heat sink sensor
troubleshooting directions. No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor.
Number Text The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on
0 Serial port cannot be initialised. Contact the the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department. on the gatedrive card, or the ribbon cable between the
256-258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old. power card and gatedrive card.
Replace power card. WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27
512-519 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove the
Danfoss Service Department. short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
783 Parameter value outside of minimum/maximum 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
limits.
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
1024-1284 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or the
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove the
short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
1299 The option SW in slot A is too old.
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
1300 The option SW in slot B is too old.
1302 The option SW in slot C1 is too old.
1315 The option SW in slot A is not supported (not
allowed).

WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or WARNING 49, Speed limit
overload of digital output on X30/7 When the speed is outside of the specified range in
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed
the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-32 Term High Limit [RPM], the frequency converter shows a warning.
X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101). When the speed is below the specified limit in 1-86 Trip
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or stopping), the
the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-33 Term frequency converter trips.
X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101). ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
Contact the Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service.
ALARM 43, Ext. supply
MCB 113 Ext. Relay Option is mounted without external 24 ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
V DC. Either connect an ext. 24 V DC supply or specify that The settings for motor voltage, motor current, and motor
no external supply is used via parameter 14-80 Option
Supplied by External 24VDC [0] No. A change in
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1–20 to
1–25.
5 5
parameter 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC requires
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
a power cycle.
The motor current is too low. Check the settings in
ALARM 45, Earth fault 2 4-18 Current Limit.
Ground fault.
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
Troubleshooting The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
• Check for proper grounding and loose ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
connections.
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
• Check for proper wire size.
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
• Check the motor cables for short circuits or The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
leakage currents. acceptable range. AMA cannot run.
ALARM 46, Power card supply ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
The supply on the power card is out of range. The user has interrupted AMA.
There are 3 supplies generated by the switch mode supply ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
(SMPS) on the power card: Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can over heat
the motor.
• 24 V,
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
• 5 V,
Contact the Danfoss supplier.
• ±18 V.
WARNING 59, Current limit
When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 option, The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When Ensure that motor data in parameters 1–20 to 1–25 are set
powered with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are correctly. Increase the current limit if necessary. Ensure that
monitored. the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
Troubleshooting WARNING 60, External interlock
• Check for a defective power card. A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external
• Check for a defective control card. to the frequency converter. An external interlock has
commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the
• Check for a defective option card.
external fault condition. To resume normal operation,
• If a 24 V DC supply is used, verify proper supply apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external
power. interlock. Reset the frequency converter.
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. This alarm An error between calculated speed and speed
appears when the detected voltage of terminal 12 is <18 measurement from feedback device. The function Warning/
V. Alarm/Disabling setting is in parameter 4-30 Motor
Troubleshooting Feedback Loss Function. The tolerable error is set in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error. The tolerable
• Check for a defective control card.
feedback loss time is set in parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low Loss Timeout. During a commissioning procedure the
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
function may be effective.
the allowable limits. The supply is measured on the control
card. Check for a defective control card. If an option card is
present, check for overvoltage.

WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
The output frequency has reached the value set in STO has been activated from the VLT® PTC Thermistor
4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application for Card MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal operation can be
possible causes. Possibly increase the output frequency resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V DC to terminal
limit. Be sure that the system can operate safely at a 37 again (when the motor temperature reaches an
higher output frequency. The warning clears when the acceptable level) and when the digital input from the MCB
output drops below the maximum limit. 112 is deactivated. When that happens, send a reset signal
ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low must be sent (via bus or digital I/O, or press [Reset]).
The actual motor current has not exceeded the release ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
brake current within the start delay time window. STO with trip lock. An unexpected combination of STO
WARNING 64, Voltage limit commands has occurred:
5 5 The combination of load and speed demands a motor

voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.
• VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 enables
X44/10, but STO is not enabled.
WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature • MCB 112 is the only device using STO (specified
The cut-out temperature of the control card is 80 °C. through selection [4] PTC 1 Alarm or [5] PTC 1
Troubleshooting Warning in parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop),
STO is activated, and X44/10 is not activated.
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within the limits. WARNING 73, Safe Stop auto restart
Safe Torque Off activated. With automatic restart enabled,
• Check for clogged filters.
the motor can start when the fault is cleared.
• Check the fan operation.
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor
• Check the control card.
Alarm related to the ATEX option. The PTC is not working.
WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low
ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel.
The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
Parameter value must not be written while motor is
warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
running. Stop motor before writing MCO profile to
module.
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile.
Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a
trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency WARNING 76, Power unit setup
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting The required number of power units does not match the
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at detected number of active power units.
Stop. WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed The frequency converter is operating in reduced power
One or more options have either been added or removed mode (less than the allowed number of inverter sections).
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration This warning is generated on power cycle when the
change is intentional and reset the unit. frequency converter is set to run with fewer inverters and
remains on.
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
STO has been activated. To resume normal operation, ALARM 78, Tracking error
apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset signal (via The difference between set-point value and actual value
bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]). has exceeded the value in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error.
Disable the function or select an alarm/warning in
ALARM 69, Power card temperature
parameter 4-34 Tracking Error Function. Investigate the
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
mechanics around the load and motor, check feedback
hot or too cold.
connections from motor encoder to frequency converter.
Troubleshooting Select motor feedback function in parameter 4-30 Motor
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is Feedback Loss Function. Adjust tracking error band in
within limits. parameter 4-35 Tracking Error and parameter 4-37 Tracking
Error Ramping.
• Check for clogged filters.
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
• Check fan operation.
The scaling card has an incorrect part number or is not
• Check the power card. installed. The MK102 connector on the power card could
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration not be installed.
The control card and power card are incompatible. To ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
check compatibility, contact the Danfoss supplier with the Parameter settings are initialised to default settings after a
type code of the unit from the nameplate and the part manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
numbers of the cards.

ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning

CSIV file has syntax errors. The frequency converter is running more than 50 s below
the permitted minimum frequency (parameter 1-98 ATEX
ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
CSIV failed to initialise a parameter. ETR interpol. points freq.).
ALARM 83, Illegal option combination ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
The mounted options are incompatible. The frequency converter has operated more than 60 s (in a
period of 600 s) below the permitted minimum frequency
ALARM 84, No safety option (parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.).
The safety option was removed without applying a general
reset. Reconnect the safety option. WARNING 220, Configuration file version not supported
The frequency converter does not support the current
ALARM 88, Option detection configuration file version. Customisation is aborted.
A change in the option layout was detected.
Parameter 14-89 Option Detection is set to [0] Frozen config- ALARM 246, Power card supply 5 5
uration and the option layout has been changed. This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
It is equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm
• To apply the change, enable option layout log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
changes in parameter 14-89 Option Detection.
1 = inverter module to the far left.
• Alternatively, restore the correct option configu-
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
ration.
converter.
WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
converter.
RPM.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
ALARM 90, Feedback monitor
converter.
Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and
eventually replace the MCB 102 or MCB 103. 5 = rectifier module.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings WARNING 250, New spare part
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input) A component in the frequency converter has been
when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal replaced.
54.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 99, Locked rotor • Reset the frequency converter for normal
Rotor is blocked. operation.
WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault WARNING 251, New typecode
The fan is not operating. The fan monitor checks that the The power card or other components have been replaced
fan is spinning at power-up or whenever the mixing fan is and the type code has been changed.
turned on. The mixing-fan fault can be configured as a
Troubleshooting
warning or an alarm trip in parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor.
• Reset to remove the warning and resume normal
Troubleshooting operation.
• Cycle power to the frequency converter to ALARM 430, PWM Disabled
determine if the warning/alarm returns. The PWM on the power card is disabled.
WARNING/ALARM 122, Mot. rotat. unexp.
The frequency converter performs a function that requires
the motor to be at standstill, e.g. DC hold for PM motors.
WARNING 123, Motor Mod. Changed
The motor selected in parameter 1-11 Motor Model is not
correct and the selection has been corrected.
WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
The frequency converter has run above the characteristic
curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83%
and deactivated at 65% of the permitted thermal overload.
ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm
Operating above the characteristic curve for more than
60 s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm, and the
frequency converter trips.

Appendix VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
6 Appendix
6.1 Symbols, Abbreviations and Conventions

°C Degrees celsius
AC Alternating current
AEO Automatic energy optimization
AWG American wire gauge
AMA Automatic motor adaptation
DC Direct current
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
ETR Electronic thermal relay
fM,N Nominal motor frequency
6 6 FC Frequency converter
IINV Rated inverter output current
ILIM Current limit
IM,N Nominal motor current
IVLT,MAX Maximum output current
IVLT,N Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter
IP Ingress protection
LCP Local control panel
MCT Motion control tool
ns Synchronous motor speed
PM,N Nominal motor power
PELV Protective extra low voltage
PCB Printed circuit board
PM Motor Permanent magnet motor
PWM Pulse width modulated
RPM Revolutions per minute
Regen Regenerative terminals
TLIM Torque limit
UM,N Nominal motor voltage
Table 6.1 Symbols and Abbreviations
Conventions
Numbered lists indicate procedures.
Bullet lists indicate other information.
Italicised text indicates:
• Cross reference
• Link
• Parameter name
All dimensions are in [mm].

Index Programming Guide
Index Control card

Control card..................................................................................... 217
A Control principle................................................................................... 35
Abbreviations...................................................................................... 224 Control word time-out..................................................................... 218
Abs. Enc. Interface, 17-2*................................................................. 165 Conventions......................................................................................... 224
Adjustable warning, 4-5*................................................................... 79 Cooling..................................................................................................... 55
Adv. Motor Data, 1-3*......................................................................... 43 Copy/save, 0-5*..................................................................................... 33
Adv. Start Adjust, 30-2*.................................................................... 170 Current limit control, 14-3*............................................................ 150
Advanced Process PID Ctrl., 7-4*.................................................. 115 Current rating...................................................................................... 217
Alarm log, 15-3*.................................................................................. 156

D
Alarm message.................................................................................... 212
Data Log Settings, 15-1*.................................................................. 154
AMA............................................................................................... 217, 221
Data readout, 16-**........................................................................... 159
Analog I/O Mode, 6-0*..................................................................... 102
Data Readouts 2, 18-**..................................................................... 168
Analog input................................................................................... 4, 217
DC link.................................................................................................... 217
Analog Input 1, 6-1*.......................................................................... 102
DC-Brake.................................................................................................. 59
Analog Input 2, 6-2*.......................................................................... 103
Default settings..................................................................................... 21
Analog Input 3 MCB 101, 6-3*....................................................... 104
Default Settings.................................................................................. 175
Analog Input 4 MCB 101, 6-4*....................................................... 104
DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus, 10-**..................................................... 125
Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114), 35-4*......................................... 173
Diagnosis Read-Outs, 16-9*............................................................ 164
Analog Output 1, 6-5*...................................................................... 105
Digital I/O Mode, 5-0*......................................................................... 82
Analog Output 2 MCB 101, 6-6*................................................... 107
Digital input......................................................................................... 218
Digital Inputs, 5-1*............................................................................... 82
Digital Pot.Meter, 3-9*........................................................................ 74
Analog signal....................................................................................... 217
Display mode......................................................................................... 14
B Drive identification, 15-4*............................................................... 156
Brake Drive status, 16-3*.............................................................................. 160

control............................................................................................... 218
resistor............................................................................................... 217 E
Brake Energy Funct., 2-1*................................................................... 59 Energy optimising, 14-4*................................................................. 150
Brake power.............................................................................................. 4 Ethernet, 12-**.................................................................................... 125
Braking................................................................................................... 219 ETR........................................................................................................... 160
Break-away torque................................................................................. 4 Ext. Process PID Ctrl., 7-5*............................................................... 116
Bus Controlled, 5-9*.......................................................................... 100
Bus Jog, 8-9*........................................................................................ 125 F
FC MC protocol set, 8-4*.................................................................. 121
C FC port diagnostics, 8-8*................................................................. 125
Catch up................................................................................................... 84 FC port setting, 8-3*.......................................................................... 120
Clockwise................................................................................................. 51 Feedback............................................................................................... 220
Coasting....................................................................................... 3, 13, 82 Freeze output.................................................................................... 3, 82
Communication option................................................................... 220 Fuse......................................................................................................... 220
Comparator, 13-1*............................................................................. 129
Compatibility, 14-7*.......................................................................... 152 G
Compatibility, 30-8*.......................................................................... 171 General setting, 8-0*......................................................................... 117
Configuration...................................................................................... 117 General settings.................................................................................... 35
Control cables.......................................................................................... 9 General status, 16-0*......................................................................... 159

Index VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
Graphical display.................................................................................. 11 Motor Data, 1-2*................................................................................... 41

Motor Feedb. Option, 17-**............................................................ 165
H Motor Feedback Monitoring, 4-3*.................................................. 78
Heat sink................................................................................................ 220 Motor limit, 4-1*.................................................................................... 76
Historic Log, 15-2*............................................................................. 155 Motor protection.................................................................................. 53
Motor status, 16-1*............................................................................ 159
I Motor Temperature, 1-9*................................................................... 53
I/O Options, 5-8*................................................................................. 100
Inc. Enc. Interface, 17-1*.................................................................. 165 N
Indexed parameter.............................................................................. 20 Numerical local control panel.......................................................... 20
Indicator lights....................................................................................... 12
Initialisation............................................................................................ 21 O
Input terminal...................................................................................... 217 Operating Data, 15-0*...................................................................... 154
Intermediate circuit........................................................................... 217 Operating mode................................................................................... 25
Inverter switching, 14-0*................................................................. 144 Operation/display, 0-**...................................................................... 24
Option Ident. , 15*6*......................................................................... 157
J Options, 14-8*..................................................................................... 152
Jog................................................................................................................ 3 Other Ramps, 3-8*................................................................................ 73
Output current.................................................................................... 217
L Output speed......................................................................................... 50
Language package............................................................................... 24 Overheating......................................................................................... 218
LCP...................................................................................... 3, 4, 11, 13, 20 Overtemperature............................................................................... 218
LCP Custom Readout, 0-3*................................................................ 30
LCP Display, 0-2*................................................................................... 27 P
LCP key..................................................................................................... 21 Parameter Info, 15-9*........................................................................ 158
LCP keypad, 0-4*................................................................................... 32 Parameter selection............................................................................. 18
LED............................................................................................................. 11 Parameter set-up.................................................................................. 15
Load Depend. Setting, 1-6*............................................................... 48 Password, 0-6*....................................................................................... 33
Local reference...................................................................................... 25 Phase loss.............................................................................................. 217
Logic rule, 13-4*.................................................................................. 135 PM motor................................................................................................. 38
Potentiometer reference................................................................... 10
M Process control feedback, 7-2*...................................................... 114
Main Menu.............................................................................................. 15 Process PID control, 7-3*................................................................. 114
Main menu mode................................................................................. 18 Profibus, 9-**........................................................................................ 125
Main Menu mode................................................................................. 12 Programming...................................................................................... 217
Main reactance...................................................................................... 42 Protection mode..................................................................................... 7
Mains on/off, 14-1*............................................................................ 144 Pulse input, 5-5*.................................................................................... 97
Mains supply............................................................................................. 5 Pulse Outputs, 5-6*.............................................................................. 98
MCB 113......................................................................... 87, 92, 108, 110 Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 10
MCB 114................................................................................................. 172
Mechanical brake................................................................................. 62 Q
Monitoring and Application, 17-6*.............................................. 166 Quick Menu...................................................................................... 12, 15
Motor Quick Menu mode......................................................................... 12, 15
current............................................................................................... 221
data........................................................................................... 217, 221 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Fre-
power................................................................................................. 221 quency Converters...... 13
Motor data.............................................................................................. 37

Index Programming Guide
R T
Ramp 2, 3-5*........................................................................................... 71 Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114), 35-0*........................................... 172
Ramp 3, 3-6*........................................................................................... 72 Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114), 35-3*........................................ 173
Ramp 4, 3-7*........................................................................................... 72 Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114), 35-1*.......................................... 172
Ramps, 3-4* Ramp 1............................................................................ 69 Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114), 35-2*.......................................... 172
Rated motor speed................................................................................. 3 Terminal 54........................................................................................... 223
RCD............................................................................................................... 5 Terminal X45/1 Output Min. Scale............................................... 109
Reference & feedback, 16-5*.......................................................... 161 Terminal X45/3 Output Min. Scale............................................... 110
Reference Limits, 3-0*......................................................................... 66 Thermal load................................................................................. 46, 160
Reference/Reference Limits/Ramps, 3-**.................................... 66 Thermistor.......................................................................................... 5, 53
Relay outputs......................................................................................... 88 Timer, 13-2*.......................................................................................... 135
Relays, 5-4*.............................................................................................. 92 Torque............................................................................................. 42, 218
Reset............................................................................. 13, 217, 218, 222 Torque PI control, 7-1*..................................................................... 113
Resolver Interface, 17-5*.................................................................. 165 Trip Reset, 14-2*.................................................................................. 148
RS Flip Flops, 13-1*............................................................................ 133
V
S Value.......................................................................................................... 20
Safety Precautions.................................................................................. 6 Voltage imbalance............................................................................. 217
Screened/armoured............................................................................... 9 Voltage reference via a potentiometer........................................ 10
Sensor Input Option parameters.................................................. 211 VVC+............................................................................................................ 5
Sensor Input Option, 35-**............................................................. 172
Serial communication........................................................................... 4 W
Set-up operations, 0-1*...................................................................... 25 Warning................................................................................................. 212
Short circuit.......................................................................................... 218 Wobble Function, 30-0*................................................................... 169
Smart application setup (SAS)......................................................... 18
Smart Logic Control, 13-**.............................................................. 126
Special Features, 30-**..................................................................... 169
Special Settings, 1-1*........................................................................... 37
Speed Bypass, 4-6*............................................................................... 80
Speed PID control, 7-0*.................................................................... 111
Speed up/down.................................................................................... 10
Start Adjustments, 1-7*...................................................................... 50
Start delay............................................................................................... 50
Start function......................................................................................... 50
Start/stop................................................................................................... 9
Stator leakage reactance................................................................... 42
Status........................................................................................................ 12
Status message...................................................................................... 11
Step-by-step........................................................................................... 20
Stop Adjustments, 1-8*...................................................................... 51
Supply voltage.................................................................................... 220
Symbols................................................................................................. 224
Synchronous motor speed.................................................................. 3

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
130R0334 MG33MJ02 Rev. 10/2014
*MG33MJ02*
MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
Operating Instructions
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302
0.25-75 kW
Contents Operating Instructions
Contents
1 Introduction 4
1.1 Purpose of the Manual 4
1.2 Additional Resources 4
1.3 Document and Software Version 4
1.4 Product Overview 4
1.5 Approvals and Certifications 7
1.6 Disposal 7
2 Safety 8
2.1 Safety Symbols 8
2.2 Qualified Personnel 8
2.3 Safety Precautions 8
3 Mechanical Installation 10
3.1 Unpacking 10
3.1.1 Items Supplied 10
3.2 Installation Environments 10
3.3 Mounting 10
4 Electrical Installation 12
4.1 Safety Instructions 12
4.2 EMC-compliant Installation 12
4.3 Grounding 12
4.4 Wiring Schematic 13
4.5 Access 15
4.6 Motor Connection 15
4.7 AC Mains Connection 16
4.8 Control Wiring 16
4.8.1 Control Terminal Types 16
4.8.2 Wiring to Control Terminals 18
4.8.3 Enabling Motor Operation (Terminal 27) 18
4.8.4 Voltage/Current Input Selection (Switches) 19
4.8.5 Mechanical Brake Control 19
4.8.6 RS-485 Serial Communication 20
4.9 Installation Check List 21
5 Commissioning 22
5.1 Safety Instructions 22
5.2 Applying Power 22
5.3 Local Control Panel Operation 22
MG33AP02 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 07/2014 All rights reserved. 1

5.3.1 Local Control Panel 22

5.3.2 LCP Layout 23
5.3.3 Parameter Settings 24
5.3.4 Uploading/Downloading Data to/from the LCP 24
5.3.5 Changing Parameter Settings 24
5.3.6 Restoring Default Settings 24
5.4 Basic Programming 25
5.4.1 Commissioning with SmartStart 25
5.4.2 Commissioning via [Main Menu] 25
5.4.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up 26
5.4.4 PM Motor Set-up 26
5.4.5 SynRM Motor Set-up with VVC+ 28
5.4.6 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 28
5.5 Checking Motor Rotation 29
5.6 Checking Encoder Rotation 29
5.7 Local-control Test 29
5.8 System Start-up 30
6 Application Set-up Examples 31
7 Maintenance, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 37

7.1 Maintenance and Service 37
7.2 Status Messages 37
7.3 Warning and Alarm Types 39
7.4 List of Warnings and Alarms 40
7.5 Troubleshooting 47
8 Specifications 50
8.1 Electrical Data 50
8.1.1 Mains Supply 200-240 V 50
8.1.2 Mains Supply 380-500 V 52
8.1.3 Mains Supply 525-600 V (FC 302 only) 55
8.1.4 Mains Supply 525-690 V (FC 302 only) 58
8.2 Mains Supply 60
8.3 Motor Output and Motor Data 60
8.4 Ambient Conditions 61
8.5 Cable Specifications 61
8.6 Control Input/Output and Control Data 61
8.7 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 65
8.8 Connection Tightening Torques 71
8.9 Power Ratings, Weight and Dimensions 72
2 Danfoss A/S © Rev. 07/2014 All rights reserved. MG33AP02

9 Appendix 73
9.1 Symbols, Abbreviations and Conventions 73
9.2 Parameter Menu Structure 73
Index 79

Introduction Operating Instructions
1 1 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the Manual 1.3 Document and Software Version

These operating instructions provide information for safe This manual is regularly reviewed and updated. All
installation and commissioning of the frequency converter. suggestions for improvement are welcome. Table 1.1 shows
the document version and the corresponding software
The operating instructions are intended for use by version.
qualified personnel.
Read and follow the operating instructions to use the Edition Remarks Software version
frequency converter safely and professionally, and pay MG33APxx Replaces MG33AOxx 7.XX
particular attention to the safety instructions and general
warnings. Keep these operating instructions available with Table 1.1 Document and Software Version
the frequency converter at all times.
1.4 Product Overview
VLT® is a registered trademark.
1.4.1 Intended Use
1.2 Additional Resources
The frequency converter is an electronic motor controller
Other resources are available to understand advanced intended for:
frequency converter functions and programming.
• Regulation of motor speed in response to system
feedback or to remote commands from external
• The VLT® AutomationDrive FC 302 Programming
controllers. A power drive system consists of the
Guide provides greater detail on working with
frequency converter, the motor and equipment
parameters and many application examples.
driven by the motor.
• The VLT® AutomationDrive FC 302 Design Guide
• System and motor status surveillance.
provides detailed information about capabilities
and functionality to design motor control The frequency converter can also be used for motor
systems. protection.
• Instructions for operation with optional

Depending on the configuration, the frequency converter
equipment.
can be used in standalone applications or form part of a
Supplementary publications and manuals are available larger appliance or installation.
from Danfoss. See www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSo-
lutions/Documentations/VLT+Technical+Documentation.htm The frequency converter is allowed for use in residential,
for listings. industrial and commercial environments in accordance
with local laws and standards.
NOTICE
In a residential environment, this product can cause
radio interference, in which case supplementary
mitigation measures can be required.
Foreseeable misuse
Do not use the frequency converter in applications which
are non-compliant with specified operating conditions and
environments. Ensure compliance with the conditions
specified in chapter 8 Specifications.

1.4.2 Exploded Views 1 1

13
130BB493.10
12
11
2
10 DC-
DC+
06 05 04
9
03 02 01
8
61 68
39 42 50 53 54
Remove jumper to activate

Safe Stop
Max. 24 Volt !
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20
3
7
4
6
5
FAN MOUNTING
17
QDF-30
19 16
18
14
15
1 Local control panel (LCP) 11 Relay 2 (04, 05, 06)

2 Cover 12 Lifting ring
3 RS-485 serial bus connector 13 Mounting slot
4 Digital I/O and 24 V power supply 14 Grounding clamp (PE)
5 Analog I/O connector 15 Cable screen connector
6 Cable screen connector 16 Brake terminal (-81, +82)
7 USB connector 17 Load sharing terminal (DC bus) (-88, +89)
8 Serial bus terminal switch 18 Motor output terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W)
9 Analog switches (A53), (A54) 19 Mains input terminals 91 (L1), 92 (L2), 93 (L3)
10 Relay 1 (01, 02, 03)
Illustration 1.1 Exploded View Enclosure Types B and C, IP55 and IP66

1 1
130BB492.10
1
2
3
4
18
17
16
15
8 7
14 9
10
11
13 12
1 Local control panel (LCP) 10 Motor output terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W)
2 RS-485 serial bus connector (+68, -69) 11 Relay 2 (01, 02, 03)
3 Analog I/O connector 12 Relay 1 (04, 05, 06)
4 LCP input plug 13 Brake (-81, +82) and load sharing (-88, +89) terminals
5 Analog switches (A53), (A54) 14 Mains input terminals 91 (L1), 92 (L2), 93 (L3)
6 Cable screen connector 15 USB connector
7 Decoupling plate 16 Serial bus terminal switch
8 Grounding clamp (PE) 17 Digital I/O and 24 V power supply
9 Screened cable grounding clamp and strain relief 18 Cover
Illustration 1.2 Exploded View Enclosure Type A, IP20

1.4.3 Block Diagram of the Frequency Area Title Functions 1 1

Converter • Input power, internal
processing, output, and motor
Illustration 1.3 is a block diagram of the frequency current are monitored to
converter's internal components. See Table 1.2 for their provide efficient operation
functions. and control.
8 Control circuitry
• User interface and external
commands are monitored and
performed.
• Status output and control can

be provided.
Table 1.2 Legend to Illustration 1.3
Illustration 1.3 Frequency Converter Block Diagram 1.4.4 Enclosure Types and Power Ratings
For enclosure types and power ratings of the frequency

Area Title Functions converters, refer to chapter 8.9 Power Ratings, Weight and
• 3-phase AC mains power Dimensions.
supply to the frequency
1 Mains input 1.5 Approvals and Certifications
converter.
• The rectifier bridge converts

2 Rectifier the AC input to DC current to
supply inverter power.
• Intermediate DC-bus circuit

3 DC bus handles the DC current.
• Filter the intermediate DC

circuit voltage. More approvals and certifications are available. Contact the
local Danfoss partner. Frequency converters of enclosure
• Prove line transient
protection.
type T7 (525-690 V) are not certified for UL.
The frequency converter complies with UL508C thermal
4 DC reactors • Reduce RMS current.
memory retention requirements. For more information,
• Raise the power factor
refer to the section Motor Thermal Protection in the
reflected back to the line.
product specific design guide.
• Reduce harmonics on the AC
For compliance with the European Agreement concerning
input.
International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland
• Stores the DC power. Waterways (ADN), refer to ADN-compliant Installation in the
product specific design guide.
5 Capacitor bank
• Provides ride-through
protection for short power 1.6 Disposal
losses.
• Converts the DC into a Do not dispose of equipment containing

controlled PWM AC waveform electrical components together with
6 Inverter for a controlled variable domestic waste.
output to the motor. Collect it separately in accordance with
local and currently valid legislation.
• Regulated 3-phase output
7 Output to motor power to the motor.

Safety Operating Instructions
2 Safety
2 2
2.1 Safety Symbols WARNING
The following symbols are used in this document: UNINTENDED START
When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
DC power supply, or load sharing, the motor may start at
WARNING any time. Unintended start during programming, service,
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could or repair work can result in death, serious injury, or
result in death or serious injury. property damage. The motor can start via an external
switch, a serial bus command, an input reference signal
CAUTION from the LCP, or after a cleared fault condition.

To prevent unintended motor start:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
result in minor or moderate injury. It can also be used to • Disconnect the frequency converter from the
mains.
alert against unsafe practices.
• Press [Off/Reset] on the LCP before
NOTICE programming parameters.
Indicates important information, including situations that • The frequency converter, motor, and any driven
can result in damage to equipment or property. equipment must be fully wired and assembled
when the frequency converter is connected to
AC mains, DC power supply, or load sharing.
2.2 Qualified Personnel
Correct and reliable transport, storage, installation,
operation, and maintenance are required for the trouble- WARNING
free and safe operation of the frequency converter. Only DISCHARGE TIME
qualified personnel are allowed to install or operate this The frequency converter contains DC-link capacitors,
equipment. which can remain charged even when the frequency
converter is not powered. Failure to wait the specified
Qualified personnel are defined as trained staff, who are time after power has been removed before performing
authorised to install, commission, and maintain equipment, service or repair work, could result in death or serious
systems, and circuits in accordance with pertinent laws and injury.
regulations. Additionally, the qualified personnel must be 1. Stop the motor.
familiar with the instructions and safety measures
2. Disconnect AC mains, permanent magnet type
described in these operating instructions.
motors, and remote DC-link power supplies,
2.3 Safety Precautions including battery back-ups, UPS, and DC-link
connections to other frequency converters.
WARNING 3. Wait for the capacitors to discharge fully, before
HIGH VOLTAGE performing any service or repair work. The
Frequency converters contain high voltage when duration of waiting time is specified in
connected to AC mains input, DC power supply, or load Table 2.1.
sharing. Failure to perform installation, start-up, and
maintenance by qualified personnel can result in death
Voltage [V] Minimum waiting time (minutes)
or serious injury.
4 7 15
• Installation, start-up, and maintenance must be
200-240 0.25-3.7 kW 5.5-37 kW
performed by qualified personnel only.
380-500 0.25-7.5 kW 11-75 kW
525-600 0.75-7.5 kW 11-75 kW
525-690 1.5-7.5 kW 11-75 kW
High voltage may be present even when the warning LED
indicator lights are off.
Table 2.1 Discharge Time

Safety Operating Instructions
WARNING
LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD
Leakage currents exceed 3.5 mA. Failure to ground the
frequency converter properly can result in death or
2 2
serious injury.
• Ensure the correct grounding of the equipment

by a certified electrical installer.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT HAZARD
Contact with rotating shafts and electrical equipment
can result in death or serious injury.
• Ensure that only trained and qualified

personnel perform installation, start up, and
maintenance.
• Ensure that electrical work conforms to national

and local electrical codes.
• Follow the procedures in these document.
WARNING
UNINTENDED MOTOR ROTATION
WINDMILLING
Unintended rotation of permanent magnet motors can
result in serious injury or equipment damage.
• Ensure that permanent magnet motors are

blocked to prevent unintended rotation.
CAUTION
INTERNAL FAILURE HAZARD
An internal failure in the frequency converter can result
in serious injury, when the frequency converter is not
properly closed.
• Ensure that all safety covers are in place and

securely fastened before applying power.

Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions
3 Mechanical Installation
3.1 Unpacking 3.1.2 Storage
3 3 3.1.1 Items Supplied Ensure that the requirements for storage are fulfilled. Refer
to chapter 8.4 Ambient Conditions for further details.
Items supplied may vary according to product configu-
ration. 3.2 Installation Environments
NOTICE
• Make sure the items supplied and the
In environments with airborne liquids, particles, or
information on the nameplate correspond to the
order confirmation. corrosive gases, ensure that the IP/type rating of the
equipment matches the installation environment. Failure
• Check the packaging and the frequency converter to meet requirements for ambient conditions can reduce
visually for damage caused by inappropriate the lifetime of the frequency converter. Ensure that
handling during shipment. File any claim for requirements for air humidity, temperature, and altitude
damage with the carrier. Retain damaged parts are met.
for clarification.
Vibration and shock
130BD600.10
VLT
R
Automation Drive
www.danfoss.com The frequency converter complies with requirements for
1
2
T/C: FC-302PK37T2E20H1BGXXXXSXXXXA6BKC4XXXD0 units mounted on the walls and floors of production
3
P/N: 131X3537 S/N: 010122G430 premises, as well as in panels bolted to walls or floors.
4
0.37kW/ 0.50HP
5 9 For detailed ambient conditions specifications, refer to
IN: 3x200-240V 50/60Hz 2.2A chapter 8.4 Ambient Conditions.
6
OUT: 3x0-Vin 0-1000Hz 2.4A
7 o
CHASSIS/ IP20 Tamb.50 C/122 F
o
8
3.3 Mounting
*1 3 1 X 3 5 3 7 0 1 0 1 2 2 G 4 3 0 * MADE IN DENMARK
NOTICE
Listed 76X1 E134261 Ind. Contr. Eq. Improper mounting can result in overheating and
CAUTION: reduced performance.
See manual for special condition/mains fuse
10 `
voir manual de conditions speclales/fusibles
WARNING: Cooling
Stored charge, wait 4 min.
` attendez 4 min.
Charge residuelle, • Ensure that top and bottom clearance for air
cooling is provided. See Illustration 3.2 for
clearance requirements.
1 Type code
2 Order number
3 Serial number
4 Power rating
Input voltage, frequency and current (at low/high
5
voltages)
Output voltage, frequency and current (at low/high
6
voltages)
7 Enclosure type and IP rating
8 Maximum ambient temperature
9 Certifications
10 Discharge time (Warning)
Illustration 3.1 Product Nameplate (Example)
NOTICE
Do not remove the nameplate from the frequency
converter (loss of warranty).

Mechanical Installation Operating Instructions
Mounting with back plate and railings
130BD528.10
130BD504.10
a
3 3
Illustration 3.3 Proper Mounting with Back Plate
a
NOTICE
Back plate is required when mounted on railings.
130BA648.12
Illustration 3.2 Top and Bottom Cooling Clearance B
C e
f
Enclosure A1-A5 B1-B4 C1, C3 C2, C4
a
a [mm] 100 200 200 225 c
A
Table 3.1 Minimum Airflow Clearance Requirements
Lifting
d
• To determine a safe lifting method, check the
e
weight of the unit, see chapter 8.9 Power Ratings,
Weight and Dimensions. a
• Ensure that the lifting device is suitable for the

task. b
• If necessary, plan for a hoist, crane, or forklift with Illustration 3.4 Top and Bottom Mounting Holes (See
the appropriate rating to move the unit. chapter 8.9 Power Ratings, Weight and Dimensions)
• For lifting, use hoist rings on the unit, when
provided.
Mounting e
130BA715.12
1. Ensure that the strength of the mounting location

supports the unit weight. The frequency
f
converter allows side-by-side installation.
2. Locate the unit as near to the motor as possible.
Keep the motor cables as short as possible.
3. Mount the unit vertically to a solid flat surface or
to the optional back plate to provide cooling a
airflow.
4. Use the slotted mounting holes on the unit for
wall mounting, when provided.
Illustration 3.5 Top and Bottom Mounting Holes (B4, C3, C4)

Electrical Installation Operating Instructions
4 Electrical Installation
4.1 Safety Instructions 4.2 EMC-compliant Installation

See chapter 2 Safety for general safety instructions. To obtain an EMC-compliant installation, follow the
instructions provided in chapter 4.3 Grounding,
WARNING chapter 4.4 Wiring Schematic, chapter 4.6 Motor Connection,
4 4 INDUCED VOLTAGE
and chapter 4.8 Control Wiring.
Induced voltage from output motor cables that run

4.3 Grounding
together can charge equipment capacitors, even with the
equipment turned off and locked out. Failure to run WARNING
output motor cables separately or use screened cables LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD
could result in death or serious injury. Leakage currents exceed 3.5 mA. Failure to ground the
frequency converter properly could result in death or
• Run output motor cables separately, or
serious injury.
• Use screened cables.
• Ensure the correct grounding of the equipment
by a certified electrical installer.
CAUTION
SHOCK HAZARD For electrical safety
The frequency converter can cause a DC current in the
• Ground the frequency converter in accordance
PE conductor. Failure to follow the recommendation with applicable standards and directives.
below means the RCD may not provide the intended
protection. • Use a dedicated ground wire for input power,
motor power, and control wiring.
• When a residual current-operated protective
device (RCD) is used for protection against • Do not ground one frequency converter to
electrical shock, only an RCD of Type B is another in a daisy chain fashion.
permitted on the supply side. • Keep the ground wire connections as short as
possible.
Overcurrent protection • Follow motor manufacturer wiring requirements.
• Additional protective equipment, such as short- • Minimum cable cross-section: 10 mm2 (or 2 rated
circuit protection or motor thermal protection ground wires terminated separately).
between frequency converter and motor, is For EMC-compliant installation
required for applications with multiple motors.
• Establish electrical contact between the cable
• Input fusing is required to provide short-circuit screen and the frequency converter enclosure by
and overcurrent protection. If not factory- using metal cable glands or by using the clamps
supplied, fuses must be provided by the installer. provided on the equipment (see
See maximum fuse ratings in chapter 8.7 Fuses chapter 4.6 Motor Connection).
and Circuit Breakers.
• Use high-strand wire to reduce electrical
Wire type and ratings interference.
• All wiring must comply with local and national
• Do not use pigtails.
regulations regarding cross-section and ambient
temperature requirements. NOTICE
• Power connection wire recommendation: POTENTIAL EQUALISATION
Minimum 75 °C rated copper wire. Risk of electrical interference, when the ground potential
between the frequency converter and the control system
See chapter 8.1 Electrical Data and chapter 8.5 Cable Specifi-
is different. Install equalising cables between the system
cations for recommended wire sizes and types.
components. Recommended cable cross-section: 16 mm2.

4.4 Wiring Schematic
130BD599.11
91 (L1) (U) 96
3-phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch Mode

DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
+10 V DC
50 (+10 V OUT) +
10 V DC 24 V DC
15 mA 130/200 mA
- + -
(R+) 82
(R-) 81
Brake
resistor 4 4
S201
0/-10 V DC-
53 (A IN)
1 2
ON
+10 V DC relay1
ON=0/4-20 mA
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0/-10 V DC -
1 2
0/-10 V DC - +10 V DC
ON
54 (A IN) 240 V AC, 2 A

+10 V DC 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
* relay2
12 (+24 V OUT) 06
240 V AC, 2 A
13 (+24 V OUT) P 5-00 05
400 V AC, 2 A
24 V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0 V (PNP)
24 V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24 V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP) S801
24 V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
* 24 V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP)
24 V
S801 0V
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(N RS-485) 69
24 V (NPN) Interface : Chassis
32 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
: Ground
24 V (NPN) **
33 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (COM RS-485) 61
: PE
* : Ground 1
37 (D IN)
: Ground 2
Illustration 4.1 Basic Wiring Schematic
A=Analog, D=Digital
*Terminal 37 (optional) is used for Safe Torque Off (STO). For installation instructions, refer to the VLT® Safe Torque Off
Operating Instructions. Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no
function in FC 301.
**Do not connect cable screen.

130BD529.11
2
6
4 4
1
9
10
11
L1
L2
U
L3
V
PE
W
PE
8
7
1 PLC 7 Motor, 3-phase and PE (screened)

2 Frequency converter 8 Mains, 3-phase and reinforced PE (not screened)
3 Output contactor 9 Control wiring (screened)
4 Cable clamp 10 Potential equalisation min. 16 mm2 (0.025 in)
5 Cable insulation (stripped) Clearance between control cable, motor cable and mains cable:
11
6 Cable gland Min. 200 mm
Illustration 4.2 EMC-compliant Electrical Connection
For more information about EMC, see chapter 4.2 EMC-compliant Installation

NOTICE See Table 4.1 before tightening covers.
EMC INTERFERENCE
Enclosure IP55 IP66
Use screened cables for motor and control wiring, and
A4/A5 2 2
separate cables for input power, motor wiring and
B1/B2 2.2 2.2
control wiring. Failure to isolate power, motor and
control cables can result in unintended behaviour or C1/C2 2.2 2.2
reduced performance. Minimum 200 mm (7.9 in) No screws to tighten for A1/A2/A3/B3/B4/C3/C4.
clearance between power, motor and control cables is
Table 4.1 Tightening Torques for Covers [Nm]
required.
4 4
4.6 Motor Connection
4.5 Access
• Remove cover with a screw driver (See WARNING
Illustration 4.3) or by loosening attaching screws INDUCED VOLTAGE
(See Illustration 4.4). Induced voltage from output motor cables that run
together can charge equipment capacitors, even with the
130BT248.10
equipment turned off and locked out. Failure to run

output motor cables separately or use screened cables
• Run output motor cables separately, or
• Use screened cables.
• Comply with local and national electrical codes

for cable sizes. For maximum wire sizes see
chapter 8.1 Electrical Data.
• Follow motor manufacturer wiring requirements.
• Motor wiring knockouts or access panels are

provided at the base of IP21 (NEMA1/12) and
higher units.
Illustration 4.3 Access to Wiring for IP20 and IP21 Enclosures
• Do not wire a starting or pole-changing device
(e.g. Dahlander motor or slip ring induction
motor) between the frequency converter and the
130BT334.10
motor.
Procedure
1. Strip a section of the outer cable insulation.
2. Position the stripped wire under the cable clamp
to establish mechanical fixation and electrical
contact between the cable screen and ground.
3. Connect the ground wire to the nearest
grounding terminal in accordance with the
grounding instructions provided in
chapter 4.3 Grounding, see Illustration 4.5.
4. Connect the 3-phase motor wiring to terminals
96 (U), 97 (V), and 98 (W), see Illustration 4.5.
5. Tighten the terminals in accordance with the
Illustration 4.4 Access to Wiring for IP55 and IP66 Enclosures information provided in chapter 8.8 Connection
Tightening Torques.

4.7 AC Mains Connection
130BD531.10
• Size the wiring based upon the input current of
W the frequency converter. For maximum wire sizes,
V 98
U 97 see chapter 8.1 Electrical Data.
96
• Comply with local and national electrical codes
for cable sizes.
Procedure
4 4 1. Connect the 3-phase AC input power wiring to

terminals L1, L2, and L3 (see Illustration 4.6).
2. Depending on the configuration of the
equipment, connect the input power to the
mains input terminals or the input disconnect.
3. Ground the cable in accordance with the
grounding instructions provided in
chapter 4.3 Grounding.
4. When supplied from an isolated mains source (IT
mains or floating delta) or TT/TN-S mains with a
grounded leg (grounded delta), ensure that
14-50 RFI Filter is set to [0] Off to avoid damage to
the intermediate circuit and to reduce ground
Illustration 4.5 Motor Connection capacity currents in accordance with IEC 61800-3.
4.8 Control Wiring

Illustration 4.6 represents mains input, motor and • Isolate the control wiring from the high power
grounding for basic frequency converters. Actual configu- components in the frequency converter.
rations vary with unit types and optional equipment.
• When the frequency converter is connected to a
thermistor, ensure that the thermistor control
wiring is screened and reinforced/double
130BB920.10
insulated. A 24 V DC supply voltage is

A
L1 I
91 L2 N
S
92 L3 recommended.
93
RELAY 2
95 4.8.1 Control Terminal Types

RELAY 1
Illustration 4.7 and Illustration 4.8 show the removable

+D
C
BR
- B
frequency converter connectors. Terminal functions and
MO default settings are summarised in Table 4.2 and Table 4.3.
99 U TOR V W
130BB921.11
- LC -
99
2
3
4
Illustration 4.6 Example of Motor, Mains and Ground Wiring

1
Illustration 4.7 Control Terminal Locations

1 Terminal description
130BB931.10
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Default
Terminal Parameter setting Description
2 3
Digital inputs/outputs
61 68 69 39 42 50 53 54 55 12, 13 - +24 V DC 24 V DC supply
voltage for digital
inputs and external
transducers. Maximum
Illustration 4.8 Terminal Numbers
4 4
output current 200
mA (130 mA for FC
301) for all 24 V loads.
• Connector 1 provides 4 programmable digital
18 5-10 [8] Start
inputs terminals, 2 additional digital terminals
19 5-11 [10] Reversing
programmable as either input or output, a 24 V
32 5-14 [0] No
DC terminal supply voltage, and a common for Digital inputs.
operation
optional customer supplied 24 V DC voltage. FC
302 and FC 301 (optional in A1 enclosure) also 33 5-15 [0] No
provide a digital input for STO function. operation
27 5-12 [2] Coast For digital input or
• Connector 2 terminals (+)68 and (-)69 for RS-485 inverse output. Default setting
serial communication connection
29 5-13 [14] JOG is input.
• Connector 3 provides 2 analog inputs, 1 analog 20 - Common for digital
output, 10 V DC supply voltage, and commons inputs and 0 V
for the inputs and output potential for 24 V
• Connector 4 is a USB port available for use with supply.

the MCT 10 Set-up Software 37 - STO Safe input.
Analog inputs/outputs
39 - Common for analog
output
42 6-50 [0] No Programmable analog
operation output. 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA at a
maximum of 500 Ω
50 - +10 V DC 10 V DC analog
supply voltage for
potentiometer or
thermistor. 15 mA
maximum
53 6-1* Reference Analog input. For
54 6-2* Feedback voltage or current.
Switches A53 and A54
select mA or V.
55 - Common for analog
input
Table 4.2 Terminal Description Digital Inputs/Outputs,

Analog Inputs/Outputs

Terminal description
130BD546.10
Default
Terminal Parameter setting Description
Serial communication 12 13 1
8 19 2
7 29
32 33
61 - Integrated RC-filter for
cable screen. ONLY for
connecting the screen 1
in the event of EMC
4 4
problems.
mm
2
10
68 (+) 8-3* RS-485 interface. A
69 (-) 8-3* control card switch is
provided for
termination resistance. Illustration 4.9 Connecting Control Wires
Relays
[0] No Form C relay output.
01, 02, 03 5-40 [0] operation For AC or DC voltage 2. Insert the bared control wire into the contact.
04, 05, 06 5-40 [1] [0] No and resistive or 3. Remove the screwdriver to fasten the control wire
operation inductive loads. into the contact.
Table 4.3 Terminal Description Serial Communication 4. Ensure that the contact is firmly established and
not loose. Loose control wiring can be the source
Additional terminal: of equipment faults or less than optimal
operation.
• 2 form C relay outputs. The location of the
outputs depends on the frequency converter See chapter 8.5 Cable Specifications for control terminal
configuration. wiring sizes and chapter 6 Application Set-up Examples for
typical control wiring connections.
• Terminals located on built-in optional equipment.
See the manual provided with the equipment
option.
4.8.3 Enabling Motor Operation (Terminal
27)
4.8.2 Wiring to Control Terminals A jumper wire may be required between terminal 12 (or
13) and terminal 27 for the frequency converter to operate
Control terminal connectors can be unplugged from the when using factory default programming values.
frequency converter for ease of installation, as shown in
Illustration 4.7.
• Digital input terminal 27 is designed to receive 24
V DC external interlock command.
NOTICE
• When no interlock device is used, wire a jumper
Keep control wires as short as possible and separate between control terminal 12 (recommended) or
from high power cables to minimise interference. 13 to terminal 27. This provides an internal 24 V
signal on terminal 27.
1. Open the contact by inserting a small screwdriver
into the slot above the contact and push the
• When the status line at the bottom of the LCP
reads AUTO REMOTE COAST, this indicates that the
screwdriver slightly upwards.
unit is ready to operate but is missing an input
signal on terminal 27.
• When factory installed optional equipment is

wired to terminal 27, do not remove that wiring.
NOTICE
The frequency converter cannot operate without a signal
on terminal 27, unless terminal 27 is re-programmed.

4.8.4 Voltage/Current Input Selection 4.8.5 Mechanical Brake Control

(Switches)
In hoisting/lowering applications, it is necessary to
The analog input terminals 53 and 54 allow setting of control an electro-mechanical brake.
input signal to voltage (0-10 V) or current (0/4-20 mA). • Control the brake using any relay output or
digital output (terminal 27 or 29).
Default parameter setting:
• Terminal 53: Speed reference signal in open loop • Keep the output closed (voltage-free) as long as
(see 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting). the frequency converter is unable to keep the
• Terminal 54: Feedback signal in closed loop (see

16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting).
motor at standstill, for example due to the load
being too heavy.
4 4
• Select [32] Mechanical brake control in parameter
NOTICE group 5-4* Relays for applications with an electro-
mechanical brake.
Disconnect power to the frequency converter before
changing switch positions. • The brake is released when the motor current
exceeds the preset value in 2-20 Release Brake
Current.
1. Remove the LCP (local control panel) (see
Illustration 4.10). • The brake is engaged when the output frequency
is less than the frequency set in 2-21 Activate
2. Remove any optional equipment covering the
Brake Speed [RPM] or 2-22 Activate Brake Speed
switches.
[Hz], and only if the frequency converter carries
3. Set switches A53 and A54 to select the signal out a stop command.
type. U selects voltage, I selects current.
If the frequency converter is in alarm mode or in an over-
voltage situation, the mechanical brake immediately closes.
130BD530.10
The frequency converter is not a safety device. It is the

responsibility of the system designer to integrate safety
devices according to relevant national crane/lift
regulations.
130BA902.10
L1 L2 L3
1
N O
Drive
2
Output
U V W relay
02 01
BUSTER. A53 A54

OFF-ON U- I U- I Command Circuit
220Vac
Mechanical
VLT Brake
Output A1 Frewheeling
Contactor diode
Shaft Input A2
Motor
Illustration 4.10 Location of Terminal 53 and 54 Switches
To run STO, additional wiring for the frequency converter Brake Power Circuit
is required. Refer to VLT® Frequency Converters Safe Torque 380Vac
Off Operating Instructions for further information. Illustration 4.11 Connecting the Mechanical Brake to the
Frequency Converter

4.8.6 RS-485 Serial Communication
Connect RS-485 serial communication wiring to terminals

(+)68 and (-)69.
• Use screened serial communication cable

(recommended).
• See chapter 4.3 Grounding for proper grounding.

4 4
130BB489.10
61
68 +
RS-485
69
Illustration 4.12 Serial Communication Wiring Diagram
For basic serial communication set-up, select the following:
1. Protocol type in 8-30 Protocol.

2. Frequency converter address in 8-31 Address.
3. Baud rate in 8-32 Baud Rate.
• 2 communication protocols are internal to the

Danfoss FC
Modbus RTU
• Functions can be programmed remotely using

the protocol software and RS-485 connection or
in parameter group 8-** Communications and
Options.
• Selecting a specific communication protocol

changes various default parameter settings to
match that protocol’s specifications and makes
additional protocol-specific parameters available.
• Option cards for the frequency converter are

available to provide additional communication
protocols. See the option card documentation for
installation and operation instructions.

4.9 Installation Check List

Before completing installation of the unit, inspect the entire installation as detailed in Table 4.4. Check and mark the items
when completed.
Inspect for Description ☑

Auxiliary equipment • Look for auxiliary equipment, switches, disconnects, or input fuses/circuit breakers, which may reside on
the input power side of the frequency converter or output side to the motor. Ensure that they are ready
for full-speed operation.
• Check the function and installation of any sensors used for feedback to the frequency converter. 4 4
• Remove any power factor correction caps on the motor(s).
• Adjust any power factor correction caps on the mains side and ensure that they are dampened.
Cable routing • Ensure that the motor wiring and control wiring are separated, screened, or in 3 separate metallic
conduits for high-frequency interference isolation.
Control wiring • Check for broken or damaged wires and loose connections.
• Check that the control wiring is isolated from power and motor wiring for noise immunity.
• Check the voltage source of the signals, if necessary.
The use of screened cable or twisted pair is recommended. Ensure that the shield is terminated correctly.
Cooling clearance • Ensure the top and bottom clearance is adequate to ensure proper air flow for cooling, see
chapter 3.3 Mounting.
Ambient conditions • Check that requirements for ambient conditions are met.
Fusing and circuit • Check for proper fusing or circuit breakers.

breakers
• Check that all fuses are inserted firmly and are in operational condition and that all circuit breakers are in
the open position.
Grounding • Check for sufficient ground connections and ensure the those are tight and free of oxidation.
Grounding to conduit, or mounting the back panel to a metal surface, is not a suitable grounding.
Input and output • Check for loose connections.
power wiring
• Check that the motor and mains cables are in separate conduit or separated screened cables.
Panel interior • Inspect that the unit interior is free of dirt, metal chips, moisture, and corrosion.
• Check that the unit is mounted on an unpainted, metal surface.
Switches • Ensure that all switch and disconnect settings are in the proper positions.
Vibration • Check that the unit is mounted solidly, or that shock mounts are used, as necessary.
• Check for an unusual amount of vibration.
Table 4.4 Installation Check List
CAUTION
POTENTIAL HAZARD IN THE EVENT OF INTERNAL FAILURE
Risk of personal injury if the frequency converter is not properly closed.
• Before applying power, ensure all safety covers are in place and securely fastened.

Commissioning Operating Instructions
5 Commissioning
5.1 Safety Instructions 3. Ensure that all operator devices are in the OFF
position. Panel doors must be closed and covers
See chapter 2 Safety for general safety instructions. securely fastened.
4. Apply power to the unit. DO NOT start the
WARNING frequency converter now. For units with a
disconnect switch, turn it to the ON position to
HIGH VOLTAGE
apply power to the frequency converter.
Frequency converters contain high voltage when
5 5 connected to AC mains input power. Failure to perform

installation, start-up, and maintenance by qualified
5.3 Local Control Panel Operation
personnel could result in death or serious injury. 5.3.1 Local Control Panel
• Installation, start-up, and maintenance must be
The local control panel (LCP) is the combined display and
performed by qualified personnel only.
keypad on the front of the unit.
Before applying power: The LCP has several user functions:

1. Close the cover properly.
• Start, stop, and control speed when in local
2. Check that all cable glands are firmly tightened. control.
3. Ensure that input power to the unit is OFF and • Display operational data, status, warnings and
locked out. Do not rely on the frequency cautions.
converter disconnect switches for input power
isolation. • Programme frequency converter functions.
4. Verify that there is no voltage on input terminals • Manually reset the frequency converter after a
fault when auto-reset is inactive.
L1 (91), L2 (92), and L3 (93), phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground. An optional numeric LCP (NLCP) is also available. The NLCP
operates in a manner similar to the LCP. See the product
5. Verify that there is no voltage on output
relevant programming guide for details on use of the NLCP.
terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), and 98 (W), phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground. NOTICE
6. Confirm continuity of the motor by measuring Ω For commissioning via PC, install the MCT 10 Set-up
values on U-V (96-97), V-W (97-98), and W-U Software. The software is available for download (basic
(98-96). version) or for ordering (advanced version, order number
130B1000). For more information and downloads, see
7. Check for proper grounding of the frequency
www.danfoss.com/BusinessAreas/DrivesSolutions/Software
converter as well as the motor.
+MCT10/MCT10+Downloads.htm.
8. Inspect the frequency converter for loose
connections on the terminals.
NOTICE
9. Confirm that the supply voltage matches the
During start-up, the LCP displays the message
voltage of the frequency converter and the
INITIALISING. When this message is no longer displayed,
motor.
then the frequency converter is ready for operation.
5.2 Applying Power Adding or removing options can extend the duration of
start-up.
Apply power to the frequency converter using the
following steps:
1. Confirm that the input voltage is balanced within

3%. If not, correct the input voltage imbalance
before proceeding. Repeat this procedure after
the voltage correction.
2. Ensure that any optional equipment wiring,
matches the installation application.

5.3.2 LCP Layout B. Display menu keys

Menu keys are used for menu access for parameter set-up,
The LCP is divided into 4 functional groups (see toggling through status display modes during normal
Illustration 5.1). operation, and viewing fault log data.
Key Function
A. Display area
6 Status Shows operational information.
B. Display menu keys 7 Quick Menu Allows access to programming parameters
C. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs) for initial set-up instructions and many
detailed application instructions.
D. Operation keys and reset
8 Main Menu Allows access to all programming
parameters.
130BD598.10
1
Status 1(1)
3 9 Alarm Log Displays a list of current warnings, the last
10 alarms, and the maintenance log.
5 5
799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kW
2
A
0.000 Table 5.2 Legend to Illustration 5.1, Display Menu Keys
5
53.2 %
C. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs)
4 Auto Remote Ramping Navigation keys are used for programming functions and
moving the display cursor. The navigation keys also
6 9 provide speed control in local operation. There are also 3
Quick Main Alarm
B Status Menu Menu Log frequency converter status indicator lights in this area.
Key Function
7
8 10 Back Reverts to the previous step or list in the
Ca
ck
menu structure.
nc
Ba
11
el
11 Cancel Cancels the last change or command as long

10 C
as the display mode has not changed.
12
12 Info Press for a definition of the function being
Info
On OK
15 displayed.
Warn.
13
13 Navigation Use the 4 navigation keys to move between
16
Alarm Keys items in the menu.
17 14 OK Use to access parameter groups or to enable
D Hand
Off
Auto Reset a selection.
on on
14
Table 5.3 Legend to Illustration 5.1, Navigation Keys
18 19 20 21
Illustration 5.1 Local Control Panel (LCP) Indicator Light Function

15 On Green The ON light activates when the
frequency converter receives
A. Display area power from the mains voltage, a
The display area is activated when the frequency converter DC bus terminal, or an external 24
receives power from the mains voltage, a DC bus terminal, V supply.
or an external 24 V DC supply. 16 Warn Yellow When warning conditions are met,
The information displayed on the LCP can be customised the yellow WARN light comes on
for user application. Select options in the Quick Menu and text appears in the display
Q3-13 Display Settings. area identifying the problem.
17 Alarm Red A fault condition causes the red
Display Parameter number Default setting alarm light to flash and an alarm
1 0-20 Speed [RPM] text is displayed.
2 0-21 Motor Current
Table 5.4 Legend to Illustration 5.1, Indicator Lights (LEDs)
3 0-22 Power [kW]
4 0-23 Frequency
5 0-24 Reference [%]
Table 5.1 Legend to Illustration 5.1, Display Area

D. Operation keys and reset 5.3.5 Changing Parameter Settings

Operation keys are located at the bottom of the LCP.
Key Function Parameter settings can be accessed and changed from the
18 Hand On Starts the frequency converter in local
Quick Menu or from the Main Menu. The Quick Menu only
control.
gives access to a limited number of parameters.
• An external stop signal by control input 1. Press [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] on the LCP.
or serial communication overrides the
2. Press [▲] [▼] to browse through the parameter
local hand on.
groups, press [OK] to select a parameter group.
19 Off Stops the motor but does not remove
3. Press [▲] [▼] to browse through the parameters,
power to the frequency converter.
press [OK] to select a parameter.
20 Auto On Puts the system in remote operational
5 5 mode. 4. Press [▲] [▼] to change the value of a parameter
• Responds to an external start command setting.
by control terminals or serial communi- 5. Press [◄] [►] to shift digit when a decimal
cation.
parameter is in the editing state.
21 Reset Resets the frequency converter manually
6. Press [OK] to accept the change.
after a fault has been cleared.
7. Press either [Back] twice to enter Status, or press
Table 5.5 Legend to Illustration 5.1, Operation Keys and Reset [Main Menu] once to enter the Main Menu.
NOTICE View changes

The display contrast can be adjusted by pressing [Status] Quick Menu Q5 - Changes Made lists all parameters
changed from default settings.
and the [▲]/[▼] keys.
• The list only shows parameters, which have been
5.3.3 Parameter Settings changed in the current edit set-up.
• Parameters, which have been reset to default

Establishing the correct programming for applications values, are not listed.
often requires setting functions in several related
parameters. Details for parameters are provided in
• The message Empty indicates that no parameters
have been changed.
chapter 9.2 Parameter Menu Structure.
5.3.6 Restoring Default Settings

Programming data is stored internally in the frequency
converter.
NOTICE
• For back-up, upload data into the LCP memory.
Risk of losing programming, motor data, localisation, and
• To download data to another frequency monitoring records by restoration of default settings. To
converter, connect the LCP to that unit and provide a back-up, upload data to the LCP before initiali-
download the stored settings. sation.
• Restoring factory default settings does not
change data stored in the LCP memory. Restoring the default parameter settings is done by initiali-
sation of the frequency converter. Initialisation is carried
5.3.4 Uploading/Downloading Data to/from out through 14-22 Operation Mode (recommended) or
the LCP manually.
1. Press [Off] to stop the motor before uploading or • Initialisation using 14-22 Operation Mode does not
downloading data. reset frequency converter settings, such as
operating hours, serial communication selections,
2. Press [Main Menu] 0-50 LCP Copy and press [OK].
personal menu settings, fault log, alarm log, and
3. Select [1] All to LCP to upload data to the LCP or other monitoring functions.
select [2] All from LCP to download data from the
LCP. • Manual initialisation erases all motor,
programming, localisation, and monitoring data
4. Press [OK]. A progress bar shows the uploading and restores factory default settings.
or downloading progress.
5. Press [Hand On] or [Auto On] to return to normal
operation.

Recommended initialisation procedure, via 5.4.2 Commissioning via [Main Menu]

14-22 Operation Mode
1. Press [Main Menu] twice to access parameters. Recommended parameter settings are intended for start-
up and check-out purposes. Application settings may vary.
2. Scroll to 14-22 Operation Mode and press [OK].
3. Scroll to [2] Initialisation and press [OK]. Enter data with power ON, but before operating the
4. Remove power to the unit and wait for the frequency converter.
display to turn off.
5. Apply power to the unit. 1. Press [Main Menu] on the LCP.
Default parameter settings are restored during start-up. 2. Press the navigation keys to scroll to parameter
This may take slightly longer than normal. group 0-** Operation/Display and press [OK].
5 5
130BP066.10
1107 RPM 3.84 A 1 (1)
6. Alarm 80 is displayed. Main menu
7. Press [Reset] to return to operation mode. 0 - ** Operation/Display

1 - ** Load/Motor
Manual initialisation procedure
2 - ** Brakes
1. Remove power to the unit and wait for the
3 - ** Reference / Ramps
display to turn off.
2. Press and hold [Status], [Main Menu], and [OK] at Illustration 5.2 Main Menu
the same time while applying power to the unit
(approximately 5 s or until audible click and fan
starts). 3. Press the navigation keys to scroll to parameter
Factory default parameter settings are restored during group 0-0* Basic Settings and press [OK].
start-up. This may take slightly longer than normal.
130BP087.10
0.0% 0.00A 1(1)
Manual initialisation does not reset the following frequency Operation / Display 0-**
converter information: 0-0* Basic Settings

0-1* Set-up Operations
• 15-00 Operating hours 0-2* LCP Display
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
• 15-03 Power Up's
• 15-04 Over Temp's
• 15-05 Over Volt's

Illustration 5.3 Operation/Display
5.4 Basic Programming
5.4.1 Commissioning with SmartStart 4. Press the navigation keys to scroll to
0-03 Regional Settings and press [OK].
The SmartStart wizard enables fast configuration of basic
130BP088.10
0.0% 0.00A 1(1)

motor and application parameters.
Basic Settings 0-0*
• SmartStart starts automatically, at first power up 0-03 Regional Settings
or after initialisation of the frequency converter.
• Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the

commissioning of the frequency converter.
Always reactivate SmartStart by selecting Quick [0] International
Menu Q4 - SmartStart.
Illustration 5.4 Basic Settings
• For commissioning without use of the SmartStart
wizard, refer to chapter 5.4.2 Commissioning via
[Main Menu] or the programming guide.
5. Press the navigation keys to select [0] Interna-
NOTICE tional or [1] North America as appropriate and
Motor data is required for the SmartStart set-up. The press [OK]. (This changes the default settings for
required data is normally available on the motor a number of basic parameters).
nameplate. 6. Press [Main Menu] on the LCP.

7. Press the navigation keys to scroll to Depending on the application, further adjustments may be
0-01 Language. required.
8. Select the language and press [OK]. See Table 5.6 for application-related recommendations.
9. If a jumper wire is in place between control
Application Settings
terminals 12 and 27, leave 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital
Low-inertia applications Keep calculated values.
Input at factory default. Otherwise, select No
High-inertia applications 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
Operation in 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input.
Increase current to a value between
10. Make the application specific settings in the default and maximum depending on
following parameters: the application.
10a 3-02 Minimum Reference Set ramp times matching the
5 5 10b 3-03 Maximum Reference
an overcurrent or overtorque. Too
10c 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time fast ramp down causes an
overvoltage trip.
10d 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
High load at low speed 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
10e 3-13 Reference Site. Linked to Hand/Auto Increase current to a value between
Local Remote. default and maximum depending on
the application.
5.4.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up No-load application Adjust 1-18 Min. Current at No Load
to achieve smoother motor
Enter the following motor data. The information can be operation by reducing torque ripple
found on the motor nameplate. and vibration.
Flux sensorless only Adjust 1-53 Model Shift Frequency.
1. 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or 1-21 Motor Power [HP] Example 1: If the motor oscillates at
5 Hz and dynamics performance is
2. 1-22 Motor Voltage
required at 15 Hz, set 1-53 Model
3. 1-23 Motor Frequency Shift Frequency to 10 Hz.
4. 1-24 Motor Current Example 2: If the application
involves dynamic load changes at
5. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
low speed, reduce 1-53 Model Shift
When running in Flux mode, or for optimum performance Frequency. Observe the motor
in VVC+ mode, extra motor data is required to set up the behaviour to make sure that the
following parameters. The data can be found in the motor model shift frequency is not
data sheet (this data is typically not available on the motor reduced too much. Symptoms of
name plate). Run a complete AMA using 1-29 Automatic inappropriate model shift frequency
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter are motor oscillations or frequency
the parameters manually. 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) is converter tripping.
always entered manually.
Table 5.6 Recommendations for Flux Applications
1. 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
2. 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) 5.4.4 PM Motor Set-up
3. 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
This section describes how to set up a PM motor.
4. 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
5. 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
6. 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) To activate PM motor operation, select [1] PM, non salient
SPM in 1-10 Motor Construction. Valid for FC 302 only.
Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+ Programming motor data
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations, After selecting a PM motor, the PM motor-related
it provides optimum performance without further parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor Data, 1-3* Adv.
adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are active.
Application-specific adjustment when running Flux The necessary data can be found on the motor nameplate
Flux mode is the preferred control mode for optimum and in the motor data sheet.
shaft performance in dynamic applications. Perform an Program the following parameters in the listed order:
AMA since this control mode requires precise motor data.

1. 1-24 Motor Current Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+

2. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
3. 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
4. 1-39 Motor Poles Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
Run a complete AMA using 1-29 Automatic Motor not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. Recommen-
Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA. If a complete dations in different applications can be seen in Table 5.7.
AMA is not performed, the following parameters must be
configured manually. Application Settings
1. 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) Low inertia applications Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time
Enter line to common stator winding resistance ILoad/IMotor <5 const. by factor 5 to 10.
(Rs). If only line-line data are available, divide the
line-line value by 2 to achieve the line to
Reduce 1-14 Damping Gain.
5 5
common value. Speed (<100%).
Low inertia applications Keep default values.
2. 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
50>ILoad/IMotor >5
Enter line to common direct axis inductance of
the PM motor. High inertia applications Increase 1-14 Damping Gain,
If only line-line data are available, divide the line- ILoad/IMotor > 50 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. and
line value with 2 to achieve the line-common 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
value. High load at low speed Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time
<30% (rated speed) const.
3. 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM Increase 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Enter line-to-line back EMF of PM Motor at 1000 Speed to adjust starting torque.
rpm mechanical speed (RMS value). Back EMF is 100% current provides nominal
the voltage generated by a PM motor when no torque as starting torque. This
frequency converter is connected and the shaft is parameter is independent from
turned externally. Back EMF is normally specified 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
for nominal motor speed or for 1000 rpm and 30-21 High Starting Torque
measured between 2 lines. If the value is not Current [%]). Working at current level
available for a motor speed of 1000 rpm, higher than 100% for a prolonged
calculate the correct value as follows: If back EMF time can overheat the motor.
is e.g. 320 V at 1800 rpm, it can be calculated at
1000 rpm as follows: Back EMF = (Voltage/ Table 5.7 Recommendations in Different Applications
RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 = 178. This is the
value that must be programmed for 1-40 Back If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase
EMF at 1000 RPM. 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
Test motor operation Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter
can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.
1. Start the motor at low speed (100 to 200 rpm). If
the motor does not turn, check installation,
Application-specific adjustment when running Flux
general programming and motor data.
2. Check if start function in 1-70 PM Start Mode fits shaft performance in dynamic applications. Perform an
the application requirements. AMA since this control mode requires precise motor data.
Rotor detection Depending on the application, further adjustments may be
This function is the recommended selection for required.
applications where the motor starts from standstill, e.g. See chapter 5.4.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up for application-
pumps or conveyors. On some motors, an acoustic sound specific recommendations.
is heard when the frequency converter performs the rotor
detection. This does not harm the motor.
Parking
This function is the recommended selection for
applications where the motor is rotating at slow speed eg.
windmilling in fan applications. 2-06 Parking Current and
2-07 Parking Time can be adjusted. Increase the factory
setting of these parameters for applications with high
inertia.

5.4.5 SynRM Motor Set-up with VVC+ Application Settings

Low-inertia applications Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time
This section describes how to set up SynRM motor with ILoad/IMotor <5 const. by factor 5 to 10.
VVC+. Reduce 1-14 Damping Gain.
Speed (<100%).
Low-inertia applications Keep the default values.
To activate SynRM motor operation, select [5] Sync.
50>ILoad/IMotor >5
Reluctance in 1-10 Motor Construction (FC-302 only).
High-inertia applications Increase 1-14 Damping Gain,
Programming motor data ILoad/IMotor > 50 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. and
After performing the initial programming steps, the SynRM 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
motor-related parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor
5 5
High-load at low speed Increase 1-17 Voltage filter time
Data, 1-3* Adv. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are
<30% (rated speed) const.
active. Use the motor nameplate data and the motor data
Increase 1-66 Min. Current at Low
sheet to program the following parameters in the listed
Speed to adjust starting torque.
order:
100% current provides nominal
1. 1-23 Motor Frequency torque as starting torque. This
parameter is independent from
2. 1-24 Motor Current
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
3. 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed and 30-21 High Starting Torque
4. 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque Current [%]). Working at current level
higher than 100% for a prolonged
Run complete AMA using 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
time can overheat the motor.
(AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter the following
parameters manually: Dynamic applications Increase 14-41 AEO Minimum
Magnetisation for highly dynamic
1. 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
applications. Adjusting 14-41 AEO
2. 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) Minimum Magnetisation ensures a
3. 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) good balance between energy
efficiency and dynamics. Adjust
4. 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency to
5. 1-48 Inductance Sat. Point specify the minimum frequency at
Application-specific adjustments which the frequency converter
Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does should use minimum magnetisation.
not run well, check the VVC+ SynRM settings. Table 5.8
Table 5.8 Recommendations in Different Applications
provides application-specific recommendations:
1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the damping gain value in
small steps. Depending on the motor, an optimum value
for this can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.
5.4.6 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
AMA is a procedure which optimises compatibility

between the frequency converter and the motor.
• The frequency converter builds a mathematical

model of the motor for regulating output motor
current. The procedure also tests the input phase
balance of electrical power. It compares the
motor characteristics with the entered nameplate
data.
• The motor shaft does not turn and no harm is

done to the motor while running the AMA.

• Some motors may be unable to run the complete 1. Verify that the encoder connection is according
version of the test. In that case, select [2] Enable to Illustration 5.5:
reduced AMA.
+24V DC
130BA090.11
GND
• If an output filter is connected to the motor,
B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
select [2] Enable reduced AMA.
• If warnings or alarms occur, see chapter 7.4 List of

Warnings and Alarms.
• Run this procedure on a cold motor for best

results.
To run AMA
1.
2.
Press [Main Menu] to access parameters.
Scroll to parameter group 1-** Load and Motor
5 5
and press [OK].
3. Scroll to parameter group 1-2* Motor Data and
press [OK].
4. Scroll to 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
24V or 10-30V encoder
and press [OK].
Illustration 5.5 Wiring Diagram
5. Select [1] Enable complete AMA and press [OK].
6. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Enter the speed PID feedback source in
7. The test runs automatically and indicates when it
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
is complete.
3. Press [Hand On].
8. The advanced motor data is entered in parameter
group 1-3* Adv. Motor Data. 4. Press [►] for positive speed reference
(1-06 Clockwise Direction at [0] Normal).
5.5 Checking Motor Rotation
5. Check in 16-57 Feedback [RPM] that the feedback
Before running the frequency converter, check the motor is positive.
rotation.
NOTICE
1. Press [Hand On]. If the feedback is negative, the encoder connection is
wrong!
2. Press [►] for positive speed reference.
3. Check that the speed displayed is positive. 5.7 Local-control Test
When 1-06 Clockwise Direction is set to [0] Normal (default
1. Press [Hand On] to provide a local start command
clockwise):
to the frequency converter.
4a. Verify that the motor turns clockwise.
2. Accelerate the frequency converter by pressing
5a. Verify that the LCP direction arrow is
clockwise. [▲] to full speed. Moving the cursor left of the
decimal point provides quicker input changes.
When 1-06 Clockwise Direction is set to [1] Inverse (counter
clockwise): 3. Note any acceleration problems.
4b. Verify that the motor turns counter-clockwise. 4. Press [Off]. Note any deceleration problems.
5b. Verify that the LCP direction arrow is counter In the event of acceleration or deceleration problems, see
clockwise. chapter 7.5 Troubleshooting. See chapter 7.4 List of Warnings
and Alarms for resetting the frequency converter after a
5.6 Checking Encoder Rotation
trip.
NOTICE
When using an encoder option, refer to the option
manual.
Check encoder rotation only if encoder feedback is used.

Check encoder rotation in default open loop control.

5.8 System Start-up

The procedure in this section requires user-wiring and
application programming to be completed. The following
procedure is recommended after application set-up is
completed.
1. Press [Auto On].

2. Apply an external run command.
3. Adjust the speed reference throughout the speed
range.
5 5 4. Remove the external run command.
5. Check the sound and vibration levels of the
motor to ensure that the system is working as
intended.
If warnings or alarms occur, see or chapter 7.4 List of
Warnings and Alarms.

Application Set-up Examples Operating Instructions
6 Application Set-up Examples
The examples in this section are intended as a quick Parameters

reference for common applications. Function Setting
130BB930.10
FC
+24 V 12 1-29 Automatic [1] Enable
• Parameter settings are the regional default values +24 V 13 Motor complete
unless otherwise indicated (selected in parameter D IN 18 Adaptation AMA
0-03 Regional Settings). D IN 19 (AMA)
COM 20 5-12 Terminal 27 [0] No
• Parameters associated with the terminals and
D IN 27 Digital Input operation
their settings are shown next to the drawings. D IN 29
* = Default Value
• Where switch settings for analog terminals A53 or D IN 32
Notes/comments:
A54 are required, these are also shown. D IN 33
Parameter group 1-2* Motor
6 6
D IN 37
NOTICE Data must be set according to
motor
When the optional STO feature is used, a jumper wire +10 V 50
A IN 53 D IN 37 is an option.
may be required between terminal 12 (or 13) and
A IN 54
terminal 37 for the frequency converter to operate when
COM 55
using factory default programming values.
A OUT 42
COM 39
6.1 Application Examples
6.1.1 AMA
Parameters
Table 6.2 AMA without T27 connected
Function Setting
130BB929.10
FC
+24 V 12 1-29 Automatic [1] Enable
+24 V 13 Motor complete 6.1.2 Speed
D IN 18 Adaptation AMA
D IN 19 (AMA) Parameters
COM 20 5-12 Terminal 27 [2]* Coast Function Setting
130BB926.10
FC
D IN 27 Digital Input inverse +24 V 12 6-10 Terminal 53 0.07 V*
D IN 29 Low Voltage
* = Default Value +24 V 13
D IN 32
Notes/comments: D IN 18 6-11 Terminal 53 10 V*
D IN 33
Parameter group 1-2* Motor D IN 19 High Voltage
D IN 37
Data must be set according to COM 20 6-14 Terminal 53 0 Hz
D IN 27 Low Ref./Feedb.
+10 V 50 motor
D IN 29 Value
D IN 32
A IN 54 6-15 Terminal 53 50 Hz
D IN 33
COM 55 High Ref./Feedb.
D IN 37
A OUT 42 Value
COM 39 * = Default Value
+10 V 50
+ Notes/comments:
A IN 53
COM 55
-
A OUT 42
Table 6.1 AMA with T27 connected -10 - +10V
COM 39
U-I
A53
Table 6.3 Analog Speed Reference (Voltage)

Parameters Parameters
Function Setting Function Setting
130BB927.10
130BB804.10
FC FC
+24 V 12 6-12 Terminal 53 4 mA* +24 V 12 5-10 Terminal 18 [8] Start*
+24 V 13 Low Current +24 V 13 Digital Input
D IN 18 6-13 Terminal 53 20 mA* D IN 18 5-12 Terminal 27 [19] Freeze
D IN 19 High Current D IN 19 Digital Input Reference
COM 20 6-14 Terminal 53 0 Hz COM 20 5-13 Terminal 29 [21] Speed
D IN 27 D IN 27
Low Ref./Feedb. Digital Input Up
D IN 29 D IN 29
Value 5-14 Terminal 32 [22] Speed
D IN 32 D IN 32
6-15 Terminal 53 50 Hz Digital Input Down
D IN 33 D IN 33
D IN
High Ref./Feedb. * = Default Value
37 D IN 37
Value Notes/comments:
+10 V 50 * = Default Value +10 V 50 D IN 37 is an option.
+
A IN 53 Notes/comments: A IN 53
6 6
A IN 54 D IN 37 is an option. A IN 54
COM 55 COM 55
-
A OUT 42 A OUT 42
4 - 20mA
COM 39 COM 39
U-I
A53
Table 6.4 Analog Speed Reference (Current)
Parameters
Function Setting
130BB683.10
FC Table 6.6 Speed Up/Down

+24 V 12 6-10 Terminal 53 0.07 V*
+24 V 13 Low Voltage
130BB840.10
D IN 18 6-11 Terminal 53 10 V*
D IN 19 High Voltage
COM 20 6-14 Terminal 53 0 Hz S peed
D IN 27 Low Ref./Feedb. R efe rence
D IN 29 Value
D IN 32
6-15 Terminal 53 1500 Hz
D IN 33
High Ref./Feedb. S tart ( 18 )
D IN 37
Value
Freez e ref ( 27 )
* = Default Value
+10 V 50
S peed up ( 29 )
A IN 53 ≈ 5kΩ Notes/comments:
A IN 54 D IN 37 is an option. S peed down ( 32 )
COM 55 Illustration 6.1 Speed Up/Down

A OUT 42
COM 39
U-I
A53
Table 6.5 Speed Reference (Using a Manual Potentiometer)

6.1.3 Start/Stop Parameters

FC Function Setting
130BB803.10
Parameters +24 V 12 5-10 Terminal 18 [9] Latched
Function Setting +24 V 13 Digital Input Start
130BB802.10
FC
+24 V 12 5-10 Terminal 18 [8] Start* D IN 18 5-12 Terminal 27 [6] Stop
+24 V 13 Digital Input D IN 19 Digital Input Inverse
COM 20 * = Default Value
D IN 18 5-12 Terminal 27 [0] No
D IN 27
D IN 19 Digital Input operation Notes/comments:
D IN 29
COM 20 5-19 Terminal 37 [1] Safe Stop If 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
D IN 27 D IN 32
Safe Stop Alarm is set to [0] No operation, a
D IN 29 D IN 33
* = Default Value jumper wire to terminal 27 is
D IN 37
D IN 32 not needed.
Notes/comments:
D IN 33 D IN 37 is an option.
If 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input +10 V 50
D IN 37
is set to [0] No operation, a A IN 53
+10
A IN
50
53
jumper wire to terminal 27 is
not needed.
A IN
COM
54
55 6 6
A IN 54 D IN 37 is an option. A OUT 42
COM COM 39
55
A OUT 42
COM 39
Table 6.8 Pulse Start/Stop
130BB806.10
Table 6.7 Start/Stop Command with Safe Stop Option Speed
130BB805.11
Speed
Latched Start (18)

Start (18)
Stop Inverse (27)
Illustration 6.2 Start/Stop Command with Safe Stop
Illustration 6.3 Latched Start/Stop Inverse

Parameters 6.1.5 RS-485

Function Setting
130BB934.10
FC
+24 V 12 5-10 Terminal 18 [8] Start Parameters
+24 V 13 Digital Input Function Setting
130BB685.10
FC
D IN 18 5-11 Terminal 19 [10] 8-30 Protocol FC*
+24 V 12
D IN 19 Digital Input Reversing* +24 V 13 8-31 Address 1*
COM 20
D IN 18 8-32 Baud Rate 9600*
D IN 27
D IN 19 * = Default Value
D IN 29 5-12 Terminal 27 [0] No
COM 20
D IN 32 Digital Input operation Notes/comments:
D IN 27
D IN 33 5-14 Terminal 32 [16] Preset Select protocol, address and
D IN 29
D IN 37 Digital Input ref bit 0 baud rate in the above
D IN 32
5-15 Terminal 33 [17] Preset D IN 33 mentioned parameters.
+10 V 50 D IN 37 is an option.
Digital Input ref bit 1 D IN 37
A IN 53
3-10 Preset
6 6
A IN 54
Reference +10 V 50
COM 55
Preset ref. 0 25% A IN 53
A OUT 42
A IN 54
COM 39 Preset ref. 1 50%
COM 55
Preset ref. 2 75%
A OUT 42
Preset ref. 3 100%
COM 39
* = Default Value
Notes/comments: 01
D IN 37 is an option. 02
R1
03
04
05
R2
Table 6.9 Start/Stop with Reversing and 4 Preset Speeds 06 RS-485
61
6.1.4 External Alarm Reset 68
+
69
-
Parameters
Function Setting Table 6.11 RS-485 Network Connection
130BB928.10
FC
+24 V 12 5-11 Terminal 19 [1] Reset
+24 V 13 Digital Input
D IN 18 * = Default Value
D IN 19 Notes/comments:
COM 20 D IN 37 is an option.
D IN 27
D IN 29
D IN 32
D IN 33
D IN 37
+10 V 50
A IN 53
A IN 54
COM 55
A OUT 42
COM 39
Table 6.10 External Alarm Reset

6.1.6 Motor Thermistor 6.1.7 SLC
CAUTION Parameters
Function Setting
130BB839.10
FC
THERMISTOR INSULATION +24 V 12 4-30 Motor [1] Warning
Risk of equipment damage. +24 V 13 Feedback Loss
• Use only thermistors with reinforced or double D IN 18 Function
insulation to meet PELV insulation D IN 19 4-31 Motor 100 RPM
requirements. COM 20 Feedback Speed
D IN 27 Error
D IN 29
4-32 Motor 5s
Parameters D IN 32
Feedback Loss
Function Setting D IN 33
130BB686.12
VLT Timeout
1-90 Motor [2] D IN 37
+24 V 12 7-00 Speed PID [2] MCB 102
+24 V 13 Thermal Thermistor
D IN
D IN
18
19
Protection
1-93 Thermistor
trip
[1] Analog
+10 V
A IN
50
53
Feedback Source
17-11 Resolution 1024* 6 6
A IN 54 (PPR)
COM 20 Source input 53
COM 55 13-00 SL [1] On
D IN 27 * = Default Value A OUT 42 Controller Mode
D IN 29
COM 39
D IN 32 13-01 Start Event [19] Warning
Notes/comments:
D IN 33 13-02 Stop Event [44] Reset
If only a warning is desired, 01
D IN 37 key
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal 02
R1
13-10 Comparator [21] Warning

Protection should be set to [1] 03
+10 V 50 Operand no.
A IN Thermistor warning.
53 13-11 Comparator [1] ≈*
D IN 37 is an option. 04
A IN 54
05 Operator
R2
COM 55
06 13-12 Comparator 90
A OUT 42
COM
Value
39
13-51 SL [22]
Controller Event Comparator
U-I
0
13-52 SL [32] Set
A53
Controller Action digital out A
low
Table 6.12 Motor Thermistor
5-40 Function [80] SL
Relay digital
output A
*=Default Value
Notes/comments:
If the limit in the feedback
monitor is exceeded, Warning
90 is issued. The SLC monitors
Warning 90 and if Warning 90
becomes TRUE, Relay 1 is
triggered.
External equipment may then
indicate that service may be
required. If the feedback error
goes below the limit again
within 5 s, the frequency
converter continues and the
warning disappears. But Relay 1
is still triggered until [Reset] on
the LCP.
Table 6.13 Using SLC to Set a Relay

6.1.8 Mechanical Brake Control
Parameters
Function Setting
130BB841.10
FC
+24 V 12 5-40 Function [32] Mech.
+24 V 13 Relay brake ctrl.
D IN 18 5-10 Terminal 18 [8] Start*
D IN 19 Digital Input
COM 20 5-11 Terminal 19 [11] Start
D IN 27
Digital Input reversing
D IN 29
1-71 Start Delay 0.2
D IN 32
1-72 Start [5] VVC+/
D IN 33
D IN 37
Function FLUX
6 6
Clockwise
+10 V 50 1-76 Start Im,n
A IN 53 Current
A IN 54 2-20 Release App.
COM 55 Brake Current dependent
A OUT 42
2-21 Activate Half of
COM 39
Brake Speed nominal slip
[RPM] of the motor
01
*=Default Value
02
R1
03 Notes/comments:
04
05
R2
06
Table 6.14 Mechanical Brake Control

130BB842.10
1-76
Current
Speed
Time
1-71 2-21 1-71 2-21
Start (18)
Start
reversing (19)
Relay output
Open
Closed
Illustration 6.4 Mechanical Brake Control

Maintenance, Diagnostics an... Operating Instructions
7 Maintenance, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
This chapter includes maintenance and service guidelines,
130BB037.11
Status 1(1)
status messages, warnings and alarms, and basic trouble- 799RPM 7.83A 36.4kW
shooting. 0.000
53.2%
7.1 Maintenance and Service
Under normal operating conditions and load profiles, the
frequency converter is maintenance-free throughout its
Auto Remote Ramping
designed lifetime. To prevent breakdown, danger, and Hand Local Stop
Off Running
damage, examine the frequency converter at regular Jogging
.
intervals depending on the operating conditions. Replace .
.
worn or damaged parts with original spare parts or Stand by
standard parts. For service and support, refer to 1 2 3
www.danfoss.com/contact/sales_and_services/.
WARNING 1 Operation mode (see Table 7.1)

2 Reference site (see Table 7.2) 7 7
UNINTENDED START 3 Operation status (see Table 7.3)
When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
DC power supply, or load sharing, the motor may start at
Illustration 7.1 Status Display
any time. Unintended start during programming, service
or repair work can result in death, serious injury, or
property damage. The motor can start by means of an
external switch, a serial bus command, an input Table 7.1 to Table 7.3 describe the displayed status
reference signal from the LCP or LOP, via remote messages.
operation using MCT 10 software, or after a cleared fault
condition. Off The frequency converter does not react to any
To prevent unintended motor start: control signal until [Auto On] or [Hand On] is
pressed.
• Disconnect the frequency converter from mains.
Auto On The frequency converter is controlled from the
• Press [Off/Reset] on the LCP, before control terminals and/or the serial communi-
programming parameters. cation.
• The frequency converter, motor, and any driven Hand On The frequency converter is controlled by the
equipment must be fully wired and assembled navigation keys on the LCP. Stop commands,
when the frequency converter is connected to reset, reversing, DC brake, and other signals
AC mains, DC power supply, or load sharing. applied to the control terminals override local
control.
7.2 Status Messages Table 7.1 Operation Mode
When the frequency converter is in Status mode, status Remote The speed reference is given from external
messages are generated automatically and appear in the signals, serial communication, or internal
bottom line of the display (see Illustration 7.1). preset references.
Local The frequency converter uses [Hand On]
control or reference values from the LCP.
Table 7.2 Reference Site
AC Brake AC Brake was selected in 2-10 Brake Function.

The AC brake overmagnetises the motor to
achieve a controlled slow-down.
AMA finish OK Automatic motor adaptation (AMA) was
carried out successfully.
AMA ready AMA is ready to start. Press [Hand On] to start.
AMA running AMA process is in progress.

Braking The brake chopper is in operation. Generative Freeze output The remote reference is active, which holds
energy is absorbed by the brake resistor. the present speed.
Braking max. The brake chopper is in operation. The power • Freeze output was selected as a function
limit for the brake resistor defined in for a digital input (parameter group 5-1*
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) has been reached. Digital Inputs). The corresponding terminal
Coast • Coast inverse was selected as a function for is active. Speed control is only possible via
a digital input (parameter group 5-1* the terminal functions Speed Up and Speed
Digital Inputs). The corresponding terminal Down.
is not connected.
• Hold ramp is activated via serial communi-
• Coast activated by serial communication. cation.
Ctrl. ramp-down [1] Control Ramp-down was selected in Freeze output A freeze output command was given, but the
14-10 Mains Failure. request motor remains stopped until a run permissive
• The mains voltage is below the value set signal is received.
in 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault at Freeze ref. Freeze Reference was selected as a function for
mains fault a digital input (parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs). The corresponding terminal is active.
• The frequency converter ramps down the
The frequency converter saves the actual
motor using a controlled ramp down.
7 7 Current High The frequency converter output current is
reference. Changing the reference is now only
possible via terminal functions Speed Up and
above the limit set in 4-51 Warning Current Speed Down.
High. Jog request A jog command was given, but the motor
Current Low The frequency converter output current is remains stopped until a run permissive signal
below the limit set in 4-52 Warning Speed Low. is received via a digital input.
DC Hold [1] DC hold is selected in 1-80 Function at Stop Jogging The motor is running as programmed in
and a stop command is active. The motor is 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM].
held by a DC current set in 2-00 DC Hold/
• Jog was selected as a function for a digital
Preheat Current. input (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs).
DC Stop The motor is held with a DC current (2-01 DC The corresponding terminal (e.g. Terminal
Brake Current) for a specified time (2-02 DC 29) is active.
Braking Time).
• The Jog function is activated via the serial
• The DC Brake cut in speed is reached in
communication.
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] and a
stop command is active. • The Jog function was selected as a
reaction for a monitoring function (e.g. No
• DC Brake (inverse) is selected as a function
signal). The monitoring function is active.
for a digital input (parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs). The corresponding terminal Motor check In 1-80 Function at Stop, [2] Motor Check was
is not active. selected. A stop command is active. To ensure
that a motor is connected to the frequency
• The DC Brake is activated via serial
converter, a permanent test current is applied
communication.
to the motor.
Feedback high The sum of all active feedbacks is above the OVC control Overvoltage control was activated in
feedback limit set in 4-57 Warning Feedback 2-17 Over-voltage Control, [2] Enabled. The
High. connected motor supplies the frequency
Feedback low The sum of all active feedbacks is below the converter with generative energy. The
feedback limit set in 4-56 Warning Feedback overvoltage control adjusts the V/Hz ratio to
Low. run the motor in controlled mode and to
prevent the frequency converter from tripping.
PowerUnit Off (Only frequency converters with an external

24 V power supply installed).
Mains supply to the frequency converter was
removed, and the control card is supplied by
the external 24 V.

Protection md Protection mode is active. The unit has Stop The frequency converter has received a stop
detected a critical status (overcurrent or command from the LCP, digital input, or serial
overvoltage). communication.
• To avoid tripping, switching frequency is Trip An alarm occurred and the motor is stopped.
reduced to 4 kHz. Once the cause of the alarm is cleared, the
frequency converter can be reset manually by
• If possible, protection mode ends after
approximately 10 s. pressing [Reset] or remotely by control
terminals or serial communication.
• Protection mode can be restricted in
Trip lock An alarm occurred and the motor is stopped.
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault.
Once the cause of the alarm is cleared, power
QStop The motor is decelerating using 3-81 Quick must be cycled to the frequency converter.
Stop Ramp Time. The frequency converter can then be reset
• Quick stop inverse was selected as a manually by pressing [Reset], or remotely by
function for a digital input (parameter control terminals or serial communication.
group 5-1* Digital Inputs). The
corresponding terminal is not active. Table 7.3 Operation Status
• The quick stop function was activated via

serial communication.
NOTICE
Ramping The motor is accelerating/decelerating using
In auto/remote mode, the frequency converter requires 7 7
external commands to execute functions.
the active Ramp Up/Down. The reference, a
limit value, or a standstill is not yet reached.
Ref. high The sum of all active references is above the 7.3 Warning and Alarm Types
reference limit set in 4-55 Warning Reference
Warnings
High.
A warning is issued when an alarm condition is impending
Ref. low The sum of all active references is below the
or when an abnormal operating condition is present and
reference limit set in 4-54 Warning Reference
may result in the frequency converter issuing an alarm. A
Low.
warning clears by itself when the abnormal condition
Run on ref. The frequency converter is running in the
ceases.
reference range. The feedback value matches
the setpoint value. Alarms
Run request A start command was given, but the motor Trip
remains stopped until a run permissive signal An alarm is issued when the frequency converter is
is received via digital input. tripped, meaning that the frequency converter suspends
Running The motor is driven by the frequency operation to prevent frequency converter or system
converter. damage. The motor coasts to a stop. The frequency
Sleep Mode The energy-saving function is enabled. The converter logic continues to operate and monitor the
motor has stopped, but restarts automatically frequency converter status. After the fault condition is
when required. remedied, the frequency converter can be reset. It is then
Speed high Motor speed is above the value set in
ready to start operation again.
4-53 Warning Speed High. Resetting the frequency converter after trip/trip lock
Speed low Motor speed is below the value set in A trip can be reset in any of 4 ways:
4-52 Warning Speed Low.
• Press [Reset] on the LCP.
Standby In Auto On mode, the frequency converter
starts the motor with a start signal from a • Digital reset input command.
digital input or serial communication. • Serial communication reset input command.
Start delay In 1-71 Start Delay, a delay starting time was
set. A start command is activated and the
• Auto reset.
motor starts after the start delay time expires. Trip lock
Start fwd/rev Start forward and start reverse were selected as
Input power is cycled. The motor coasts to a stop. The
functions for 2 different digital inputs
frequency converter continues to monitor the frequency
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs). The
converter status. Remove input power to the frequency
motor starts in forward or reverse direction
converter, correct the cause of the fault, and reset the
depending on which corresponding terminal
is activated.

Warning and alarm displays WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error

This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in
• A warning is displayed in the LCP along with the
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one of the
warning number.
analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value
• An alarm flashes along with the alarm number. programmed for that input. Broken wiring or a faulty
device sending the signal can cause this condition.
130BP086.11
Status 1(1)
0.0Hz 0.000kW 0.00A
0.0Hz Troubleshooting
0 • Check the connections on all the analog input
terminals.
- Control card terminals 53 and 54 for
Earth Fault [A14]
signals, terminal 55 common.
Auto Remote Trip
- MCB 101 terminals 11 and 12 for signals,
Illustration 7.2 Alarm Display Example terminal 10 common.
- MCB 109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals,
terminals 2, 4, 6 common.
In addition to the text and alarm code in the LCP, there
are 3 status indicator lights (LEDs). • Check that the frequency converter programming
7 7 and switch settings match the analog signal type.

130BB467.11
• Perform an input terminal signal test.

Ca
ck
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
Ba
ce
l
No motor has been connected to the output of the

On
Info
OK
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
Warn. A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
Alarm
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears
for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Options are programmed in 14-12 Function at Mains
Warning LED Alarm LED Imbalance.
Warning On Off Troubleshooting
Alarm Off On (Flashing) • Check the supply voltage and supply currents to
Trip-Lock On On (Flashing) the frequency converter.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
Illustration 7.3 Status Indicator Lights (LEDs) The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the
high-voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
7.4 List of Warnings and Alarms WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low-
The following warning/alarm information defines each
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
warning/alarm condition, provides the probable cause for
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
the condition, and details a remedy or troubleshooting
procedure. WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low
frequency converter trips after a time.
The control card voltage is <10 V from terminal 50.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V Troubleshooting
supply is overloaded. Maximum 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. • Connect a brake resistor.
A short-circuit in a connected potentiometer or incorrect • Extend the ramp time.
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition. • Change the ramp type.
Troubleshooting • Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function.
• Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the
warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If • Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault.
the warning does not clear, replace the control • If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
card. use kinetic back-up (14-10 Mains Failure).

WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor overtemp

If the DC link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit, Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select
the frequency converter checks if a 24 V DC back-up whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an
supply is connected. If no 24 V DC back-up supply is alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
connected, the frequency converter trips after a fixed time
Troubleshooting
delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
• Check for motor overheating.
Troubleshooting
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
• Check that the supply voltage matches the
frequency converter voltage. • When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
thermistor is connected correctly between either
• Perform an input voltage test.
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and
• Perform a soft charge circuit test. terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
The frequency converter has run with more than 100% Check that 1-93 Thermistor Source selects terminal
overload for too long and is about to cut out. The counter 53 or 54.
for electronic thermal inverter protection issues a warning • When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that
at 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The the thermistor is connected correctly between
7 7
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
below 90%. and terminal 50. Check that 1-93 Thermistor
Source selects terminal 18 or 19.
Troubleshooting
with the frequency converter rated current. WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit
The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
with the measured motor current.
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this
• Display the thermal drive load on the LCP and warning from a warning-only condition to a warning
monitor the value. When running above the followed by an alarm.
frequency converter continuous current rating,
Troubleshooting
the counter increases. When running below the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
• If the motor torque limit is exceeded during
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
the counter decreases.
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
• If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time.
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter • If torque limit occurs while running, increase the
issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches torque limit. Make sure that the system can
100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault occurs operate safely at a higher torque.
when the motor runs with more than 100% overload for • Check the application for excessive current draw
too long. on the motor.
Troubleshooting WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
• Check for motor overheating. The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts approxi-
mately 1.5 s, then the frequency converter trips and issues
• Check that the motor current set in 1-24 Motor
an alarm. Shock loading or quick acceleration with high-
Current is correct.
inertia loads can cause this fault. If the acceleration during
• Ensure that the motor data in parameters 1-20 to ramp-up is quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic
1-25 are set correctly. back-up.
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, a trip can
• If an external fan is in use, check that it is
be reset externally.
selected in 1-91 Motor External Fan.
Troubleshooting
• Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA) tunes the frequency converter to the • Remove the power and check if the motor shaft
motor more accurately and reduces thermal can be turned.
loading. • Check that the motor size matches the frequency
converter.
• Check that the motor data is correct in

parameters 1-20 to 1-25.

ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault Troubleshooting

There is current from the output phases to ground, either • The affected parameter must be set to a valid
in the cable between the frequency converter and the value.
motor or in the motor itself.
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake
Troubleshooting Report value shows what kind it is.
• Remove power to the frequency converter and 0 = The torque reference was not reached before timeout
repair the ground fault. (2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time).
1 = Expected brake feedback not received before timeout
• Check for ground faults in the motor by
(2-23 Activate Brake Delay, 2-25 Brake Release Time).
measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
leads and the motor with a megohmmeter. WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
A fitted option is not operational with the present control that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
board hardware or software. can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Record the value of the following parameters and contact For frequency converters with DC fans, there is a feedback
Danfoss: sensor mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run
• 15-40 FC Type appears. For frequency converters with AC fans, the
7 7 • 15-41 Power Section voltage to the fan is monitored.
• 15-42 Voltage Troubleshooting
• 15-43 Software Version • Check for proper fan operation.

• 15-45 Actual Typecode String • Cycle power to the frequency converter and
• 15-49 SW ID Control Card
• Check the sensors on the heat sink and control
• 15-50 SW ID Power Card card.
• 15-60 Option Mounted WARNING 24, External fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
• 15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
ALARM 16, Short circuit can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
Troubleshooting sensor mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run
• Remove the power to the frequency converter and there is no feedback from the sensor, this alarm
and repair the short-circuit.
appears. For frequency converters with AC fans, the
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout voltage to the fan is monitored.
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning is only active when 8-04 Control Word Timeout Troubleshooting
Function is NOT set to [0] Off. • Check for proper fan operation.
If 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Stop and
Trip, a warning appears and the frequency converter ramps • Cycle power to the frequency converter and
down until it stops, and then it displays an alarm.
Troubleshooting • Check the sensors on the heat sink and control
card.
• Check the connections on the serial communi-
cation cable. WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a
• Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
short-circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
• Check the operation of the communication warning appears. The frequency converter is still
equipment. operational, but without the brake function.
• Verify a proper installation based on EMC Troubleshooting
requirements. • Remove the power to the frequency converter
WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error and replace the brake resistor (see 2-15 Brake
The temperature sensor is not connected. Check).
WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
reported in the display. a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The
calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and

the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC brake Max. ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
power is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If period.
option [2] Trip is selected in 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring,
Troubleshooting
the frequency converter trips when the dissipated braking
power reaches 100%.
• Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
The brake transistor is monitored during operation, and if working.
a short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault
operational but, since the brake transistor has short- An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
resistor, even if it is inactive. fault.
Troubleshooting WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure

This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
• Remove power to the frequency converter and
remove the brake resistor. the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is
not set to option [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
7 7
frequency converter and mains supply to the unit.
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
Check 2-15 Brake Check. ALARM 37, Phase imbalance
There is a current imbalance between the power units.
ALARM 29, Heat Sink temp
The maximum temperature of the heat sink has been ALARM 38, Internal fault
exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in
temperature drops below a defined heat sink temperature. Table 7.4 is displayed.
The trip and reset points are different based on the Troubleshooting
frequency converter power size. • Cycle power.
Troubleshooting • Check that the option is properly installed.
Check for the following conditions.
• Ambient temperature too high. • Check for loose or missing wiring.
It may be necessary to contact the Danfoss supplier or
• Motor cable too long.
service department. Note the code number for further
• Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the troubleshooting directions.
No. Text
• Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.
0 Serial port cannot be initialised. Contact the
• Damaged heat sink fan. Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department.
• Dirty heat sink. 256-258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old.
Replace power card.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
512-519 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
783 Parameter value outside of minimum/maximum
Troubleshooting limits.
• Remove the power from the frequency converter 1024-1284 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or the
and check motor phase U. Danfoss Service Department.
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing 1299 The option SW in slot A is too old.
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the 1300 The option SW in slot B is too old.
motor is missing. 1302 The option SW in slot C1 is too old.
Troubleshooting 1315 The option SW in slot A is not supported (not
• Remove the power from the frequency converter allowed).

and check motor phase V. 1316 The option SW in slot B is not supported (not
allowed).
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
1318 The option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
allowed).
motor is missing.
Troubleshooting Danfoss Service Department.
• Remove the power from the frequency converter 1792 HW reset of DSP.
and check motor phase W.

No. Text ALARM 45, Earth fault 2

1793 Motor derived parameters not transferred correctly Ground fault.
to DSP.
Troubleshooting
1794 Power data not transferred correctly at power-up
• Check for proper grounding and loose
to DSP. connections.
1795 The DSP has received too many unknown SPI
telegrams. • Check for proper wire size.
1796 RAM copy error. • Check the motor cables for short circuits or
2561 Replace control card. leakage currents.
2820 LCP stack overflow. ALARM 46, Power card supply
2821 Serial port overflow. The supply on the power card is out of range.
2822 USB port overflow.
There are 3 power supplies generated by the switch mode
3072-5122 Parameter value is outside its limits.
power supply (SMPS) on the power card:
5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
control board hardware. • 24 V,
5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with • 5 V,
• ±18 V.
7 7 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
control board hardware. When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 option,
5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When
powered with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are
monitored.
Danfoss Service Department. Troubleshooting
• Check for a defective power card.
Table 7.4 Internal Fault Codes
ALARM 39, Heat sink sensor • Check for a defective option card.
No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor.
• If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on supply power.
the power card. The problem could be on the power card, WARNING 47, 24 V supply low
on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. This alarm
power card and gate drive card. appears when the detected voltage of terminal 12 is <18
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27 V.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove the Troubleshooting
short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29 The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove the the allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
short-circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and control card. Check for a defective control card. If an
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. option card is present, check for overvoltage.
WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or WARNING 49, Speed limit
overload of digital output on X30/7 When the speed is outside of the specified range in
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi High Limit [RPM], the frequency converter shows a warning.
Out (MCB 101). When the speed is below the specified limit in 1-86 Trip
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or stopping), the
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi frequency converter trips.
Out (MCB 101). ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
ALARM 43, Ext. supply Contact the Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service.
MCB 113 Ext. Relay Option is mounted without external 24 ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
V DC. Either connect an ext. 24 V DC supply or specify that The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor
no external supply is used via 14-80 Option Supplied by power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to
External 24VDC [0] No. A change in 14-80 Option Supplied 1-25.
by External 24VDC requires a power cycle.

ALARM 52, AMA low Inom Troubleshooting

The motor current is too low. Check the settings in • Check that the ambient operating temperature is
4-18 Current Limit. within the limits.
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big • Check for clogged filters.
The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
• Check the fan operation.
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
• Check the control card.
WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
acceptable range. AMA cannot run. module.
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a
The user has interrupted AMA. trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting
ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at
Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can over heat
Stop.
the motor.
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
Contact the Danfoss supplier.
One or more options have either been added or removed
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
7 7
WARNING 59, Current limit change is intentional and reset the unit.
The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
Ensure that motor data in parameters 1–20 to 1–25 are set
STO has been activated. To resume normal operation,
correctly. Increase the current limit if necessary. Ensure that
apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset signal (via
the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]).
WARNING 60, External interlock
ALARM 69, Power card temperature
A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
to the frequency converter. An external interlock has
hot or too cold.
commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the
external fault condition. To resume normal operation, Troubleshooting
apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external • Check that the ambient operating temperature is
interlock. Reset the frequency converter. within limits.
WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error • Check for clogged filters.
An error between calculated speed and speed
measurement from feedback device. The function Warning/
• Check fan operation.
Alarm/Disabling setting is in 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss • Check the power card.
Function. Accepted error setting in 4-31 Motor Feedback ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration
Speed Error and the allowed time the error occur setting in The control card and power card are incompatible. To
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. During a commissioning check compatibility, contact the Danfoss supplier with the
procedure the function may be effective. type code of the unit from the nameplate and the part
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit numbers of the cards.
The output frequency has reached the value set in ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application to STO has been activated from the VLT PTC Thermistor Card
determine the cause. Possibly increase the output MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal operation can be
frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V DC to terminal
higher output frequency. The warning clears when the 37 again (when the motor temperature reaches an
output drops below the maximum limit. acceptable level) and when the digital input from the MCB
ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low 112 is deactivated. When that happens, send a reset signal
The actual motor current has not exceeded the release must be sent (via bus or digital I/O, or press [Reset]).
brake current within the start delay time window. ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
ALARM 64, Voltage Limit STO with trip lock. An unexpected combination of STO
The load and speed combination demands a motor commands has occurred:
voltage higher than the actual DC-link voltage.
WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
The cut-out temperature of the control card is 80 °C.

• VLT PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 enables ALARM 88, Option detection
X44/10, but STO is not enabled. A change in the option layout was detected. 14-89 Option
Detection is set to [0] Frozen configuration and the option
• MCB 112 is the only device using STO (specified
layout has been changed.
through selection [4] PTC 1 Alarm or [5] PTC 1
Warning in 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop), STO is • To apply the change, enable option layout
activated, and X44/10 is not activated. changes in 14-89 Option Detection.
WARNING 73, Safe Stop auto restart • Alternatively, restore the correct option configu-
Safe stopped. With automatic restart enabled, the motor ration.
can start when the fault is cleared.
WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
Alarm related to the ATEX option. The PTC is not working. RPM.
ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel. ALARM 90, Feedback monitor
Parameter value must not be written while motor is Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and
running. Stop motor before writing MCO profile to eventually replace the MCB 102 or MCB 103.
8-10 Control Word Profile.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
WARNING 76, Power unit setup Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input)
7 7 The required number of power units does not match the

detected number of active power units.
when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal
54.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode ALARM 99, Locked rotor
The frequency converter is operating in reduced power Rotor is blocked.
mode (less than the allowed number of inverter sections).
WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault
This warning is generated on power cycle when the The fan is not operating. The fan monitor checks that the
frequency converter is set to run with fewer inverters and fan is spinning at power-up or whenever the mixing fan is
remains on. turned on. The mixing-fan fault can be configured as a
ALARM 78, Tracking error warning or an alarm trip in 14-53 Fan Monitor.
The difference between set-point value and actual value
Troubleshooting
has exceeded the value in 4-35 Tracking Error. Disable the
function or select an alarm/warning in 4-34 Tracking Error
• Cycle power to the frequency converter to
determine if the warning/alarm returns.
Function. Investigate the mechanics around the load and
motor, check feedback connections from motor encoder to WARNING/ALARM 122, Mot. rotat. unexp.
frequency converter. Select motor feedback function in The frequency converter performs a function that requires
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function. Adjust tracking error the motor to be at standstill, e.g. DC hold for PM motors.
band in 4-35 Tracking Error and 4-37 Tracking Error WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
Ramping. The frequency converter has run above the characteristic
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83%
The scaling card has an incorrect part number or is not and deactivated at 65% of the permitted thermal overload.
installed. The MK102 connector on the power card could ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm
not be installed. Operating above the characteristic curve for more than
ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value 60 s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm, and the
Parameter settings are initialised to default settings after a frequency converter trips.
manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit. WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning
ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt The frequency converter is running more than 50 s below
CSIV file has syntax errors. the permitted minimum frequency (1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
points freq.).
ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
CSIV failed to initialise a parameter. ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
The frequency converter has operated more than 60 s (in a
ALARM 83, Illegal option combination period of 600 s) below the permitted minimum frequency
The mounted options are incompatible. (1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.).
ALARM 84, No safety option
The safety option was removed without applying a general
reset. Reconnect the safety option.

ALARM 246, Power card supply WARNING 250, New spare part
This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters. A component in the frequency converter has been
It is equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm replaced.
log indicates which power module generated the alarm:
Troubleshooting
1 = inverter module to the far left. • Reset the frequency converter for normal
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency operation.
converter. WARNING 251, New typecode
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency The power card or other components have been replaced
converter. and the typecode has been changed.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency Troubleshooting

converter. • Reset to remove the warning and resume normal
operation.
5 = rectifier module.
7.5 Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Test Solution
Missing input power. See Table 4.4. Check the input power source.
Missing or open fuses or circuit See open power fuses and tripped circuit Follow the recommendations provided. 7 7
breaker tripped. breakerin this table for possible causes.
No power to the LCP. Check the LCP cable for proper connection or Replace the faulty LCP or connection
damage. cable.
Shortcut on control voltage Check the 24 V control voltage supply for
(terminal 12 or 50) or at terminal 12/13 to 20-39 or 10 V supply for Wire the terminals properly.
Display control terminals. terminal 50 to 55.
dark/No Incompatible LCP (LCP from Use only LCP 101 (P/N 130B1124) or LCP
function VLT® 2800 or 5000/6000/8000/ 102 (P/N. 130B1107).
FCD or FCM).
Press [Status] + [▲]/[▼] to adjust the
Wrong contrast setting.
contrast.
Replace the faulty LCP or connection
Display (LCP) is defective. Test using a different LCP.
cable.
Internal voltage supply fault or
Contact supplier.
SMPS is defective.
If the display stays lit, the problem is in
Overloaded power supply
To rule out a problem in the control wiring, the control wiring. Check the wiring for
Intermittent (SMPS) due to improper control
disconnect all control wiring by removing the shorts or incorrect connections. If the
display wiring or a fault within the
terminal blocks. display continues to cut out, follow the
procedure for Display dark\No function.


Check if the motor is connected and the
Service switch open or missing Connect the motor and check the service
connection is not interrupted (by a service
motor connection. switch.
switch or other devise).
If the display is functioning, but there is no
No mains power with 24 V DC
output, check that mains power is applied to Apply mains power to run the unit.
option card.
the frequency converter.
Press [Auto On] or [Hand On] (depending
LCP Stop. Check if [Off] has been pressed.
on operation mode) to run the motor.
Check 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input for
Motor not Apply a valid start signal to start the
Missing start signal (Standby). correct setting for terminal 18 (use default
running motor.
setting).
Check 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input for
Motor coast signal active Apply 24 V on terminal 27 or programme
correct setting for terminal 27 (use default
(Coasting). this terminal to No operation.
setting).
Programme correct settings. Check
Check reference signal: Local, remote or bus
3-13 Reference Site. Set preset reference
reference? Preset reference active? Terminal
Wrong reference signal source. active in parameter group 3-1* References.
7 7 connection correct? Scaling of terminals
correct? Reference signal available?
Check for correct wiring. Check scaling of
terminals. Check reference signal.
Check that 4-10 Motor Speed Direction is
Motor rotation limit. Program correct settings.
programmed correctly.
Motor
Check if a reversing command is
running in
Active reversing signal. programmed for the terminal in parameter Deactivate reversing signal.
wrong
group 5-1* Digital inputs.
direction
Wrong motor phase See chapter 5.5 Checking Motor Rotation in
connection. this manual.
Check output limits in 4-13 Motor Speed High
Motor is not Frequency limits set wrong. Limit [RPM], 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], Programme correct limits.
reaching and 4-19 Max Output Frequency
maximum Check reference input signal scaling in
Reference input signal not
speed parameter group 6-0* Analog I/O mode and Programme correct settings.
scaled correctly.
parameter group 3-1* References.
Check settings in parameter group 1-6*
Check the settings of all motor parameters,
Motor speed Possible incorrect parameter Load Depen. Setting. For closed loop
including all motor compensation settings.
unstable settings. operation, check settings in parameter
For closed loop operation, check PID settings.
group 20-0* Feedback.
Check motor settings in parameter
Motor runs Check for incorrect motor settings in all
Possible overmagnetisation. groups 1-2* Motor data 1-3* Adv Motor
rough motor parameters.
Data, and 1-5* Load Indep. Setting.
Possible incorrect settings in Check parameter group 2-0* DC Brake and
Motor does Check brake parameters. Check ramp time
the brake parameters. Possible 3-0* Reference Limits.
not brake settings.
too short ramp down times.
Motor or panel has a short phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-phase short. Eliminate any shorts detected.
Check motor and panel phases for shorts.
Perform start-up test and verify that
Open power motor current is within specifications. If
fuses or motor current is exceeding the nameplate
Motor overload. Motor is overloaded for the application.
circuit full-load current, the motor may run only
breaker trip with reduced load. Review the specifi-
cations for the application.
Loose connections. Perform pre-start-up check for loose Tighten loose connections.
connections.


Problem with mains power (see If imbalanced leg follows the wire, it is a
Rotate input power leads into the 1 position:
Mains current Alarm 4 Mains phase loss power problem. Check the mains power
A to B, B to C, C to A.
imbalance description). supply.
greater than Problem with the frequency Rotate input power leads into the frequency If imbalance leg stays on same input
3% converter. converter 1 position: A to B, B to C, C to A. terminal, it is a problem with the
frequency converter. Contact supplier.
If imbalanced leg follows the wire, the
Problem with motor or motor Rotate output motor leads 1 position: U to V,
Motor current problem is in the motor or motor wiring.
wiring. V to W, W to U.
imbalance Check motor and motor wiring.
greater than If imbalance leg stays on same output
Problem with frequency Rotate output motor leads 1 position: U to V,
3% terminal, it is a problem with the unit.
converter. V to W, W to U.
Contact supplier.
Frequency Increase the ramp-up time in 3-41 Ramp 1
If warnings or alarms occur, see
converter Motor data are entered Ramp Up Time. Increase current limit in
chapter 7.4 List of Warnings and Alarms
acceleration incorrectly. 4-18 Current Limit. Increase torque limit in
Check that motor data are entered correctly.
problems 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
Frequency Increase the ramp-down time in
converter Motor data are entered
If warnings or alarms occur, see
chapter 7.4 List of Warnings and Alarms
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time. Enable 7 7
deceleration incorrectly. overvoltage control in 2-17 Over-voltage
Check that motor data are entered correctly.
problems Control.
Table 7.5 Troubleshooting

Specifications Operating Instructions
8 Specifications
8.1 Electrical Data

8.1.1 Mains Supply 200-240 V
Type designation PK25 PK37 PK55 PK75 P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7
Typical shaft output [kW] 0.25 0.37 0.55 0,75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
Enclosure protection rating IP20 (FC 301 only) A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 - - -
Enclosure protection rating IP20/IP21 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
Enclosure protection rating IP55, IP66 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A5 A5
Output current
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 1.8 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 12.5 16.7
Intermittent (200-240 V) [A] 2.9 3.8 5.6 7.4 10.6 12.0 17.0 20.0 26.7
Continuous kVA (208 V) [kVA] 0.65 0.86 1.26 1.66 2.38 2.70 3.82 4.50 6.00
Maximum input current
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 1.6 2.2 3.2 4.1 5.9 6.8 9.5 11.3 15.0
Intermittent (200-240 V) [A] 2.6 3.5 5.1 6.6 9.4 10.9 15.2 18.1 24.0
8 8
Additional specifications
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains, 4,4,4 (12,12,12)
motor, brake and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG]) (min. 0.2 (24))
Maximum cable cross-section2) for disconnect
6,4,4 (10,12,12)
[mm2] ([AWG])
Estimated power loss at rated maximum load
21 29 42 54 63 82 116 155 185
[W]3)
Efficiency4) 0.94 0.94 0.95 0.95 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Table 8.1 Mains Supply 200-240 V, PK25-P3K7

Type designation P5K5 P7K5 P11K

High/Normal overload1) HO NO HO NO HO NO
Typical shaft output [kW] 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 11 15
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B3 B3 B4
Enclosure protection rating IP21, IP55, IP66 B1 B1 B2
Output current
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 24.2 30.8 30.8 46.2 46.2 59.4
Intermittent (60 s overload) (200-240 V) [A] 38.7 33.9 49.3 50.8 73.9 65.3
Continuous kVA (208 V) [kVA] 8.7 11.1 11.1 16.6 16.6 21.4
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 22.0 28.0 28.0 42.0 42.0 54.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (200-240 V) [A] 35.2 30.8 44.8 46.2 67.2 59.4
IP20 maximum cable cross-section2) for mains, brake, motor and
10,10,- (8,8,-) 10,10,- (8,8,-) 35,-,- (2,-,-)
load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
IP21 maximum cable cross-section2) for mains, brake and load
16,10,16 (6,8,6) 16,10,16 (6,8,6) 35,-,- (2,-,-)
sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
IP21 maximum cable cross-section2) for motor [mm2] ([AWG]) 10,10,- (8,8,-) 10,10,- (8,8,-) 35,25,25 (2,4,4)
Maximum cable cross-section2) for disconnect [mm2] ([AWG]) 16,10,10 (6,8,8)
Estimated power loss at rated maximum load [W]3) 239 310 371 514 463 602
Efficiency4) 0.96 0.96 0.96 8 8
Table 8.2 Mains Supply 200-240 V, P5K5-P11K
Type designation P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K

High/Normal overload1) HO NO HO NO HO NO HO NO HO NO
Typical shaft output [kW] 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30 30 37 37 45
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
Enclosure protection rating IP21, IP55, IP66 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 59.4 74.8 74.8 88.0 88.0 115 115 143 143 170
Intermittent (60 s overload) (200-240 V) [A] 89.1 82.3 112 96.8 132 127 173 157 215 187
Continuous kVA (208 V [kVA] 21.4 26.9 26.9 31.7 31.7 41.4 41.4 51.5 51.5 61.2
Continuous (200-240 V) [A] 54.0 68.0 68.0 80.0 80.0 104 104 130 130 154
Intermittent (60 s overload) (200-240 V) [A] 81.0 74.8 102 88.0 120 114 156 143 195 169
IP20 maximum cable cross-section for mains,
35 (2) 50 (1) 50 (1) 150 (300 MCM) 150 (300 MCM)
brake, motor and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
IP21, IP55, IP66 maximum cable cross-section for
50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1) 150 (300 MCM) 150 (300 MCM)
mains and motor [mm2] ([AWG])
50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1) 95 (3/0) 95 (3/0)
brake and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
185, 150, 120
Maximum cable cross-section2) for disconnect 95, 70, 70
50, 35, 35 (1, 2, 2) (350 MCM, 300
[mm2] ([AWG]) (3/0, 2/0, 2/0)
MCM, 4/0)
624 737 740 845 874 1140 1143 1353 1400 1636
[W]3)
Efficiency4) 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Table 8.3 Mains Supply 200-240 V, P15K-P37K

8.1.2 Mains Supply 380-500 V
Type designation PK37 PK55 PK75 P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5
Typical shaft output [kW] 0.37 0.55 0,75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
Enclosure protection rating IP20 (FC 301 only) A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 - - - - -
Enclosure protection rating IP20/IP21 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
Enclosure protection rating IP55, IP66 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A4/A5 A5 A5
Output current high overload 160% for 1 min
Shaft output [kW] 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0 4.1 5.6 7.2 10 13 16
Intermittent (380-440 V) [A] 2.1 2.9 3.8 4.8 6.6 9.0 11.5 16 20.8 25.6
Continuous (441-500 V) [A] 1.2 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.4 4.8 6.3 8.2 11 14.5
Intermittent (441-500 V) [A] 1.9 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.4 7.7 10.1 13.1 17.6 23.2
Continuous kVA (400 V) [kVA] 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.8 3.9 5.0 6.9 9.0 11
Continuous kVA (460 V) [kVA] 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.8 5.0 6.5 8.8 11.6
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 1.2 1.6 2.2 2.7 3.7 5.0 6.5 9.0 11.7 14.4
Intermittent (380-440 V) [A] 1.9 2.6 3.5 4.3 5.9 8.0 10.4 14.4 18.7 23
Continuous (441-500 V) [A] 1.0 1.4 1.9 2.7 3.1 4.3 5.7 7.4 9.9 13
Intermittent (441-500 V) [A] 1.6 2.2 3.0 4.3 5.0 6.9 9.1 11.8 15.8 20.8
8 8 Additional specifications
IP20, IP21 maximum cable cross-section2) for
4,4,4 (12,12,12)
mains, motor, brake and load sharing [mm2]
(min. 0.2(24))
([AWG])
IP55, IP66 maximum cable cross-section2) for
mains, motor, brake and load sharing [mm2] 4,4,4 (12,12,12)
([AWG])
6,4,4 (10,12,12)
[mm2] ([AWG])
35 42 46 58 62 88 116 124 187 255
[W3)
Efficiency4) 0.93 0.95 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Table 8.4 Mains Supply 380-500 V (FC 302), 380-480 V (FC 301), PK37-P7K5

Type designation P11K P15K P18K P22K

High/Normal overload1) HO NO HO NO HO NO HO NO
Typical shaft output [kW] 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22.0 22.0 30.0
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B3 B3 B4 B4
Enclosure protection rating IP55, IP66 B1 B1 B2 B2
Output current
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 24 32 32 37.5 37.5 44 44 61
Intermittent (60 s overload) (380-440 V) [A] 38.4 35.2 51.2 41.3 60 48.4 70.4 67.1
Continuous (441-500 V) [A] 21 27 27 34 34 40 40 52
Intermittent (60 s overload)
33.6 29.7 43.2 37.4 54.4 44 64 57.2
(441-500 V) [A]
Continuous kVA (400 V) [kVA] 16.6 22.2 22.2 26 26 30.5 30.5 42.3
Continuous kVA (460 V) [kVA] 21.5 27.1 31.9 41.4
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 22 29 29 34 34 40 40 55
35.2 31.9 46.4 37.4 54.4 44 64 60.5
(380-440 V) [A]
Continuous (441-500 V) [A] 19 25 25 31 31 36 36 47
(441-500 V) [A]
30.4 27.5 40 34.1 49.6 39.6 57.6 51.7
8 8
IP21, IP55, IP66 maximum cable cross-section2)
for mains, brake and load sharing [mm2] 16, 10, 16 (6, 8, 6) 16, 10, 16 (6, 8, 6) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
([AWG])
IP21, IP55, IP66 maximum cable cross-section2)
10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4)
for motor [mm2] ([AWG])
IP20 maximum cable cross-section2) for mains,
10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
brake, motor and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
16, 10, 10 (6, 8, 8)
[mm2] ([AWG])
291 392 379 465 444 525 547 739
[W]3)
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 8.5 Mains Supply 380-500 V (FC 302), 380-480 V (FC 301), P11K-P22K


Typical shaft output [kW] 30 37 37 45 45 55 55 75 75 90
Enclosure protection rating IP21 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
Enclosure protection rating IP55,
C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP66
Output current
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 61 73 73 90 90 106 106 147 147 177
91.5 80.3 110 99 135 117 159 162 221 195
(380-440 V) [A]
Continuous (441-500 V) [A] 52 65 65 80 80 105 105 130 130 160
78 71.5 97.5 88 120 116 158 143 195 176
(441-500 V) [A]
Continuous kVA (400 V) [kVA] 42.3 50.6 50.6 62.4 62.4 73.4 73.4 102 102 123
Continuous kVA (460 V) [kVA] 51.8 63.7 83.7 104 128
Continuous (380-440 V) [A] 55 66 66 82 82 96 96 133 133 161
82.5 72.6 99 90.2 123 106 144 146 200 177
(380-440 V) [A]
8 8 Continuous (441-500 V) [A]

47 59 59 73 73 95 95 118 118 145
70.5 64.9 88.5 80.3 110 105 143 130 177 160
(441-500 V) [A]
IP20 maximum cable cross-section
for mains and motor [mm2] 35 (2) 50 (1) 50 (1) 150 (300 MCM) 150 (300 MCM)
([AWG])
IP20 maximum cable cross-section
for brake and load sharing [mm2] 35 (2) 50 (1) 50 (1) 95 (4/0) 95 (4/0)
([AWG])
IP21, IP55, IP66 maximum cable
cross-section for mains and motor 50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1) 150 (300 MCM) 150 (300 MCM)
[mm2] ([AWG])
cross-section for brake and load 50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1) 95 (3/0) 95 (3/0)
Maximum cable cross-section2) for 185, 150, 120
50, 35, 35 95, 70, 70
mains disconnect [mm2] ([AWG]) (350 MCM, 300
(1, 2, 2) (3/0, 2/0, 2/0)
MCM, 4/0)
Estimated power loss
570 698 697 843 891 1083 1022 1384 1232 1474
at rated maximum load [W]3)
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99
Table 8.6 Mains Supply 380-500 V (FC 302), 380-480 V (FC 301), P30K-P75K

8.1.3 Mains Supply 525-600 V (FC 302 only)
Type designation PK75 P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5
Typical shaft output [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Enclosure protection rating IP20, IP21 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Enclosure protection rating IP55 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
Output current
Continuous (525-550 V) [A] 1.8 2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2 6.4 9.5 11.5
Intermittent (525-550 V) [A] 2.9 4.2 4.6 6.6 8.3 10.2 15.2 18.4
Continuous (551-600 V) [A] 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
Intermittent (551-600 V) [A] 2.7 3.8 4.3 6.2 7.8 9.8 14.4 17.6
Continuous kVA (525 V) [kVA] 1.7 2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0 6.1 9.0 11.0
Continuous (525-600 V) [A] 1.7 2.4 2.7 4.1 5.2 5.8 8.6 10.4
Intermittent (525-600 V) [A] 2.7 3.8 4.3 6.6 8.3 9.3 13.8 16.6
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains, motor, 4,4,4 (12,12,12)
brake and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG]) (min. 0.2 (24))
[mm2] ([AWG])
6,4,4 (10,12,12)
8 8
35 50 65 92 122 145 195 261
[W]3)
Efficiency4) 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Table 8.7 Mains Supply 525-600 V (FC 302 only), PK75-P7K5


Typical shaft output [kW] 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30 30 37
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4
Enclosure protection rating IP21,
B1 B1 B2 B2 C1
IP55, IP66
Output current
Continuous (525-550 V) [A] 19 23 23 28 28 36 36 43 43 54
Intermittent (525-550 V) [A] 30 25 37 31 45 40 58 47 65 59
Continuous (551-600 V) [A] 18 22 22 27 27 34 34 41 41 52
Intermittent (551-600 V) [A] 29 24 35 30 43 37 54 45 62 57
Continuous at 550 V [A] 17.2 20.9 20.9 25.4 25.4 32.7 32.7 39 39 49
Intermittent at 550 V [A] 28 23 33 28 41 36 52 43 59 54
Continuous at 575 V [A] 16 20 20 24 24 31 31 37 37 47
Intermittent at 575 V [A] 26 22 32 27 39 34 50 41 56 52
IP20 maximum cable cross-section2)
8 8 for mains, brake, motor and load 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
cross-section2) for mains, brake and 16, 10, 10 (6, 8, 8) 16, 10, 10 (6, 8, 8) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 50,-,- (1,-,-)
load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
cross-section2) for motor [mm2] 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4) 50,-,- (1,-,-)
([AWG])
Maximum cable cross-section2) for 16, 10, 10 50, 35, 35
disconnect [mm2] ([AWG]) (6, 8, 8) (1, 2, 2)
220 300 300 370 370 440 440 600 600 740
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 8.8 Mains Supply 525-600 V (FC 302 only), P11K-P30K


Typical shaft output [kW] 37 45 45 55 55 75 75 90
Enclosure protection rating IP20 C3 C3 C3 C4 C4
Enclosure protection rating IP21, IP55, IP66 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous (525-550 V) [A] 54 65 65 87 87 105 105 137
Intermittent (525-550 V) [A] 81 72 98 96 131 116 158 151
Continuous (551-600 V) [A] 52 62 62 83 83 100 100 131
Intermittent (551-600 V) [A] 78 68 93 91 125 110 150 144
Continuous at 550 V [A] 49 59 59 78.9 78.9 95.3 95.3 124.3
Intermittent at 550 V [A] 74 65 89 87 118 105 143 137
Continuous at 575 V [A] 47 56 56 75 75 91 91 119
Intermittent at 575 V [A] 70 62 85 83 113 100 137 131
IP20 maximum cable cross-section for mains and
50 (1) 150 (300 MCM)
motor [mm2] ([AWG])
IP20 maximum cable cross-section for brake and load
50 (1) 95 (4/0)
8 8
50 (1) 150 (300 MCM)
mains and motor [mm2] ([AWG])
IP21, IP55, IP66 maximum cable cross-section for brake
50 (1) 95 (4/0)
and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains disconnect 185, 150, 120
50, 35, 35 95, 70, 70
[mm2] ([AWG]) (350 MCM, 300
(1, 2, 2) (3/0, 2/0, 2/0)
MCM, 4/0)
Estimated power loss at rated maximum load [W]3) 740 900 900 1100 1100 1500 1500 1800
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 8.9 Mains Supply 525-600 V (FC 302 only), P37K-P75K

8.1.4 Mains Supply 525-690 V (FC 302 only)
Type designation P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5

High/Normal overload1) HO/NO HO/NO HO/NO HO/NO HO/NO HO/NO HO/NO
Typical shaft output (kW) 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
Enclosure protection rating IP20 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Output current
Continuous (525-550V) [A] 2.1 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
Intermittent (525-550V) [A] 3.4 4.3 6.2 7.8 9.8 14.4 17.6
Continuous (551-690V) [A] 1.6 2.2 3.2 4.5 5.5 7.5 10.0
Intermittent (551-690V) [A] 2.6 3.5 5.1 7.2 8.8 12.0 16.0
Continuous KVA 525 V 1.9 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 8.2 10.0
Continuous KVA 690 V 1.9 2.6 3.8 5.4 6.6 9.0 12.0
Continuous (525-550V) [A] 1.9 2.4 3.5 4.4 5.5 8.1 9.9
Intermittent (525-550V) [A] 3.0 3.9 5.6 7.0 8.8 12.9 15.8
Continuous (551-690V) [A] 1.4 2.0 2.9 4.0 4.9 6.7 9.0
Intermittent (551-690V) [A] 2.3 3.2 4.6 6.5 7.9 10.8 14.4
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains, motor, brake
8 8 and load sharing [mm2] ([AWG])
4, 4, 4 (12, 12, 12) (min. 0.2 (24)
Maximum cable cross-section2) for disconnect [mm2]

6, 4, 4 (10, 12, 12)
([AWG])
Estimated power loss at rated maximum load (W)3) 44 60 88 120 160 220 300
Efficiency4) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Table 8.10 A3 Enclosure, Mains Supply 525-690 V IP20/Protected Chassis, P1K1-P7K5

Typical shaft output at 550 V [kW] 7.5 11 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22
Typical shaft output at 690 V [kW] 11 15 15 18.5 18.5 22 22 30
Enclosure protection rating IP21, IP55 B2 B2 B2 B2
Output current
Continuous (525-550V) [A] 14.0 19.0 19.0 23.0 23.0 28.0 28.0 36.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (525-550V) [A] 22.4 20.9 30.4 25.3 36.8 30.8 44.8 39.6
Continuous (551-690V) [A] 13.0 18.0 18.0 22.0 22.0 27.0 27.0 34.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (551-690V) [A] 20.8 19.8 28.8 24.2 35.2 29.7 43.2 37.4
Continuous KVA (at 550 V) [KVA] 13.3 18.1 18.1 21.9 21.9 26.7 26.7 34.3
Continuous KVA (at 690 V) [KVA] 15.5 21.5 21.5 26.3 26.3 32.3 32.3 40.6
Continuous (at 550 V) (A) 15.0 19.5 19.5 24.0 24.0 29.0 29.0 36.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 550 V) (A) 23.2 21.5 31.2 26.4 38.4 31.9 46.4 39.6
Continuous (at 690 V) (A) 14.5 19.5 19.5 24.0 24.0 29.0 29.0 36.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 690 V) (A) 23.2 21.5 31.2 26.4 38.4 31.9 46.4 39.6
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains/motor,
35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4)
load share and brake [mm2] ([AWG])
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains disconnect
16, 10, 10 (6, 8, 8)
[mm2] ([AWG])
Estimated power loss at rated maximum load (W)3) 150 220 220 300 300 370 370 440
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
Table 8.11 B2/B4 Enclosure, Mains Supply 525-690 V IP20/IP21/IP55 - Chassis/NEMA 1/NEMA 12 (FC 302 only), P11K-P22K


Typical shaft output at 550 V (kW) 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55 50 75
Typical shaft output at 690 V [kW] 30 37 37 45 45 55 55 75 75 90
Enclosure protection rating IP20 B4 C3 C3 D3h D3h
Enclosure protection rating IP21, IP55 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous (525-550V) [A] 36.0 43.0 43.0 54.0 54.0 65.0 65.0 87.0 87.0 105
Intermittent (60 s overload) (525-550V) [A] 54.0 47.3 64.5 59.4 81.0 71.5 97.5 95.7 130.5 115.5
Continuous (551-690V) [A] 34.0 41.0 41.0 52.0 52.0 62.0 62.0 83.0 83.0 100
Intermittent (60 s overload) (551-690V) [A] 51.0 45.1 61.5 57.2 78.0 68.2 93.0 91.3 124.5 110
continuous KVA (at 550 V) [KVA] 34.3 41.0 41.0 51.4 51.4 61.9 61.9 82.9 82.9 100
continuous KVA (at 690 V) [KVA] 40.6 49.0 49.0 62.1 62.1 74.1 74.1 99.2 99.2 119.5
Continuous (at 550 V) [A] 36.0 49.0 49.0 59.0 59.0 71.0 71.0 87.0 87.0 99.0
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 550 V) [A] 54.0 53.9 72.0 64.9 87.0 78.1 105.0 95.7 129 108.9
Continuous (at 690 V) [A] 36.0 48.0 48.0 58.0 58.0 70.0 70.0 86.0 - -
Intermittent (60 s overload) (at 690 V) [A] 54.0 52.8 72.0 63.8 87.0 77.0 105 94.6 - -
Maximum cable-cross section for mains
and motor [mm2] ([AWG])
150 (300 MCM)
8 8
Maximum cable cross-section for load
95 (3/0)
share and brake [mm2] ([AWG])
185, 150, 120
95, 70, 70
Maximum cable cross-section2) for mains (350 MCM, 300 -
(3/0, 2/0, 2/0)
disconnect [mm2] ([AWG]) MCM, 4/0)
600 740 740 900 900 1100 1100 1500 1500 1800
0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98

Efficiency4)
Table 8.12 B4, C2, C3 Enclosure, Mains Supply 525-690 V IP20/IP21/IP55 - Chassis/NEMA1/NEMA 12 (FC 302 only), P30K-P75K
For fuse ratings, see chapter 8.7 Fuses and Circuit Breakers.
1) High overload=150% or 160% torque for a duration of 60 s. Normal overload=110% torque for a duration of 60 s.
2) The 3 values for the maximum cable cross-section are for single core, flexible wire and flexible wire with sleeve, respectively.
3) Applies for dimensioning of frequency converter cooling. If the switching frequency is higher than the default setting, the power losses may
increase. LCP and typical control card power consumptions are included. For power loss data according to EN 50598-2, refer to
www.danfoss.com/vltenergyefficiency
4) Efficiency measured at nominal current. For energy efficiency class see chapter 8.4 Ambient Conditions. For part load losses see
www.danfoss.com/vltenergyefficiency.

8.2 Mains Supply

Mains supply
Supply terminals (6-Pulse) L1, L2, L3
Supply terminals (12-Pulse) L1-1, L2-1, L3-1, L1-2, L2-2, L3-2
Supply voltage 200-240 V ±10%
Supply voltage FC 301: 380-480 V/FC 302: 380-500 V ±10%
Supply voltage FC 302: 525-600 V ±10%
Supply voltage FC 302: 525-690 V ±10%
Mains voltage low/mains drop-out:
During low mains voltage or a mains drop-out, the frequency converter continues until the intermediate circuit voltage drops
below the minimum stop level, which corresponds typically to 15% below the frequency converter's lowest rated supply voltage.
Power-up and full torque cannot be expected at mains voltage lower than 10% below the frequency converter's lowest rated
supply voltage.
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±5%
Max. imbalance temporary between mains phases 3.0 % of rated supply voltage
True power factor (λ) ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement power factor (cos ϕ) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≤ 7.5 kW maximum 2 times/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) 11-75 kW maximum 1 time/min.
8 8 Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ 90 kW
Environment according to EN60664-1
maximum 1 time/2 min.
overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240/500/600/690
V maximum.
8.3 Motor Output and Motor Data

Motor output (U, V, W1))
Output voltage 0-100% of supply voltage
Output frequency 0-590 Hz
Output frequency in flux mode 0-300 Hz
Switching on output Unlimited
Ramp times 0.01-3600 s
Torque characteristics
Starting torque (constant torque) maximum 160% for 60 s1) once in 10 min.
Starting/overload torque (variable torque) maximum 110% up to 0.5 s1) once in 10 min.
Torque rise time in flux (for 5 kHz fsw) 1 ms
Torque rise time in VVC+ (independent of fsw) 10 ms
1) Percentage relates to the nominal torque.

8.4 Ambient Conditions

Environment
Enclosure IP20/Chassis, IP21/Type 1, IP55/ Type 12, IP66/ Type 4X
Vibration test 1.0 g
Maximum THVD 10%
Maximum relative humidity 5% - 93% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 60068-2-43) H2S test class Kd
Ambient temperature 1) Max. 50 °C (24-hour average maximum 45 °C)
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 0 °C
Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance - 10 °C
Temperature during storage/transport -25 to +65/70 °C
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating1) 1000 m
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61800-3
Energy efficiency class2) IE2
1) Refer to Special Conditions in the Design Guide, for:
• Derating for high ambient temperature.
• Derating for high altitude.

2) Determined according to EN50598-2 at:
8 8
• Rated load
• 90% rated frequency
• Switching frequency factory setting
• Switching pattern factory setting
8.5 Cable Specifications

Cable lengths and cross-sections for control cables1)
Maximum motor cable length, screened 150 m
Maximum motor cable length, unscreened 300 m
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible/rigid wire without cable end sleeves 1.5 mm2/16 AWG
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible wire with cable end sleeves 1 mm2/18 AWG
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible wire with cable end sleeves with collar 0.5 mm2/20 AWG
Minimum cross-section to control terminals 0.25 mm2/24 AWG
1) For power cables, see electrical tables in chapter 8.1 Electrical Data.
8.6 Control Input/Output and Control Data

Digital inputs
Programmable digital inputs FC 301: 4 (5)1)/FC 302: 4 (6)1)
Terminal number 18, 19, 271), 291), 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0 - 24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP > 10 V DC
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN2) > 19 V DC
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN2) < 14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Pulse frequency range 0-110 kHz
(Duty cycle) Min. pulse width 4.5 ms
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ

STO terminal 373, 4) (Terminal 37 is fixed PNP logic)

Voltage level 0-24 V DC
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP <4 V DC
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP >20 V DC
Typical input current at 24 V 50 mA rms
Typical input current at 20 V 60 mA rms
Input capacitance 400 nF
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
2) Except STO input Terminal 37.
3) See chapter 4.8.5 Safe Torque Off (STO) for further information about terminal 37 and STO.
4) When using a contactor with a DC coil inside in combination with STO, it is important to make a return way for the current
from the coil when turning it off. This can be done by using a freewheel diode (or, alternatively, a 30 or 50 V MOV for quicker
response time) across the coil. Typical contactors can be bought with this diode.
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
8 8 Voltage mode
Voltage level
Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
-10 to +10 V (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 10 kΩ
Maximum voltage ±20 V
Current mode Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Maximum current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs Maximum error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth 100 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
PELV isolation
130BA117.10
+24V
Control Mains
18
High
voltage Motor
37
Functional
isolation
RS485 DC-Bus
Illustration 8.1 PELV Isolation

Pulse/encoder inputs
Programmable pulse/encoder inputs 2/1
Terminal number pulse/encoder 291), 332)/323),
333)
Maximum frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 110 kHz (push-pull driven)
Maximum frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Minimum frequency at terminal 29, 32, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see section on Digital input
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
Pulse input accuracy (0.1-1 kHz) Maximum error: 0.1% of full scale
Encoder input accuracy (1-11 kHz) Maximum error: 0.05% of full scale
The pulse and encoder inputs (terminals 29, 32, 33) are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-
voltage terminals.
1) FC 302 only
2) Pulse inputs are 29 and 33
3) Encoder inputs: 32=A, and 33=B
Digital output
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 291)
8 8
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0-24 V
Maximum output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Maximum load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Maximum capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Maximum error: 0.1% of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Analog output
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4 to 20 mA
Maximum load GND - analog output less than 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Maximum error: 0.5% of full scale
Resolution on analog output 12 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, 24 V DC output
Terminal number 12, 13
Output voltage 24 V +1, -3 V
Maximum load 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
Control card, 10 V DC output

Terminal number ±50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5 V
Maximum load 15 mA
The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Control card, RS-485 serial communication

Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally separated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV).
Control card, USB serial communication
USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
The USB ground connection is not galvanically isolated from protective earth. Use only an isolated laptop as PC connection to
the USB connector on the frequency converter.
Relay outputs
Programmable relay outputs FC 301 all kW: 1/FC 302 all kW: 2
Relay 01 terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
1)
Maximum terminal load (AC-1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 V DC, 1 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
8 8 Relay 02 (FC 302 only) terminal number

1) 2)3)
Maximum terminal load (AC-1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) Overvoltage cat. II
4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
400 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 50 V DC, 2 A
Maximum terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Minimum terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO) 24 V DC 10 mA, 24 V AC 20 mA
Environment according to EN 60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 part 4 and 5
The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 V AC2A
Control card performance
Scan interval 1 ms
Control characteristics
Resolution of output frequency at 0-590 Hz ±0.003 Hz
Repeat accuracy of precise start/stop (terminals 18, 19) ≤±0.1 ms
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) ≤ 2 ms
Speed control range (open loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed control range (closed loop) 1:1000 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open loop) 30-4000 RPM: Error ±8 RPM
Speed accuracy (closed loop), depending on resolution of feedback device 0-6000 RPM: Error ±0.15 RPM
Torque control accuracy (speed feedback) maximum error ±5% of rated torque
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor

8.7 Fuses and Circuit Breakers

Use recommended fuses and/or circuit breakers on the supply side as protection in case of component break-down inside
the frequency converter (first fault).
NOTICE
Use of fuses on the supply side is mandatory for IEC 60364 (CE) and NEC 2009 (UL) compliant installations.
Recommendations:
• gG type fuses.
• Moeller type circuit breakers. For other circuit breaker types, ensure that the energy into the frequency converter is
equal to or lower than the energy provided by Moeller types.
Use of recommended fuses and circuit breakers ensures that possible damage to the frequency converter is limited to
damages inside the unit. For further information, see Application Note Fuses and Circuit Breakers.
The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering 100000 Arms (symmetrical), depending on the
frequency converter voltage rating. With the proper fusing, the frequency converter Short-circuit Current Rating (SCCR) is
100000 Arms.
8.7.1 CE Compliance
8 8
200-240 V
Enclosure Power [kW] Recommended Recommended Recommended circuit Maximum trip level
fuse size maximum fuse breaker [A]
Moeller
A1 0.25-1.5 gG-10 gG-25 PKZM0-16 16
A2 0.25-2.2 gG-10 (0.25-1.5) gG-25 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (2.2)
A3 3.0-3.7 gG-16 (3) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-20 (3.7)
A4 0.25-2.2 gG-10 (0.25-1.5) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (2.2)
A5 0.25-3.7 gG-10 (0.25-1.5) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (2.2-3)
gG-20 (3.7)
B1 5.5-7.5 gG-25 (5.5) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (7.5)
B2 11 gG-50 gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
B3 5.5 gG-25 gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
B4 7.5-15 gG-32 (7.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-50 (11)
gG-63 (15)
C1 15-22 gG-63 (15) gG-160 (15-18.5) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-80 (18.5) aR-160 (22)
gG-100 (22)
C2 30-37 aR-160 (30) aR-200 (30) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (37) aR-250 (37)
C3 18.5-22 gG-80 (18.5) gG-150 (18.5) NZMB2-A200 150
aR-125 (22) aR-160 (22)
C4 30-37 aR-160 (30) aR-200 (30) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (37) aR-250 (37)
Table 8.13 200-240 V, Enclosure Types A, B and C

380-500 V
fuse size maximum fuse breaker Moeller [A]
A1 0.37-1.5 gG-10 gG-25 PKZM0-16 16
A2 0.37-4.0 gG-10 (0.37-3) gG-25 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (4)
A3 5.5-7.5 gG-16 gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
A4 0.37-4 gG-10 (0.37-3) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (4)
A5 0.37-7.5 gG-10 (0.37-3) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (4-7.5)
B1 11-15 gG-40 gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
B2 18.5-22 gG-50 (18.5) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (22)
B3 11-15 gG-40 gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
B4 18.5-30 gG-50 (18.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (22)
gG-80 (30)
C1 30-45 gG-80 (30) gG-160 NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (37)
8 8 gG-160 (45)
C2 55-75 aR-200 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (75)
C3 37-45 gG-100 (37) gG-150 (37) NZMB2-A200 150
gG-160 (45) gG-160 (45)
C4 55-75 aR-200 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (75)

525-600 V
Moeller
A2 0-75-4.0 gG-10 gG-25 PKZM0-25 25
A3 5.5-7.5 gG-10 (5.5) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (7.5)
A5 0.75-7.5 gG-10 (0.75-5.5) gG-32 PKZM0-25 25
gG-16 (7.5)
B1 11-18 gG-25 (11) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (15)
gG-40 (18.5)
B2 22-30 gG-50 (22) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (30)
B3 11-15 gG-25 (11) gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
gG-32 (15)
B4 18.5-30 gG-40 (18.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-50 (22)
gG-63 (30)
C1 37-55 gG-63 (37) gG-160 (37-45) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (45)
aR-160 (55)
aR-250 (55) 8 8
C2 75 aR-200 (75) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
C3 37-45 gG-63 (37) gG-150 NZMB2-A200 150
gG-100 (45)
C4 55-75 aR-160 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (75)
525-690 V
Moeller
A3 1.1 gG-6 gG-25
1.5 gG-6 gG-25
2.2 gG-6 gG-25
3 gG-10 gG-25 PKZM0-16 16
4 gG-10 gG-25
5.5 gG-16 gG-25
7.5 gG-16 gG-25
B2/B4 11 gG-25 (11) gG-63
15 gG-32 (15)
- -
18 gG-32 (18)
22 gG-40 (22)
B4/C2 30 gG-63 (30) gG-80 (30) - -
C2/C3 37 gG-63 (37) gG-100 (37)
- -
45 gG-80 (45) gG-125 (45)
C2 55 gG-100 (55) gG-160 (55-75)
- -
75 gG-125 (75)

8.7.2 UL Compliance
200-240 V
Recommended maximum fuse

Power Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann
[kW] Type RK11) Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
0.25-0.37 KTN-R-05 JKS-05 JJN-05 FNQ-R-5 KTK-R-5 LP-CC-5
0.55-1.1 KTN-R-10 JKS-10 JJN-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10
1.5 KTN-R-15 JKS-15 JJN-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
5.5 KTN-R-50 KS-50 JJN-50 - - -
7.5 KTN-R-60 JKS-60 JJN-60 - - -
11 KTN-R-80 JKS-80 JJN-80 - - -
15-18.5 KTN-R-125 JKS-125 JJN-125 - - -
22 KTN-R-150 JKS-150 JJN-150 - - -
30 KTN-R-200 JKS-200 JJN-200 - - -
37 KTN-R-250 JKS-250 JJN-250 - - -
8 8 Table 8.17 200-240 V, Enclosure Types A, B and C

Power [kW] Ferraz- Ferraz- Ferraz- Ferraz-
SIBA Littel fuse Bussmann Littel fuse
Shawmut Shawmut Shawmut Shawmut
Type RK1 Type RK1 Type JFHR22) JFHR2
Type CC Type RK13) JFHR24) J
0.25-0.37 5017906-005 KLN-R-05 ATM-R-05 A2K-05-R FWX-5 - - HSJ-6
0.55-1.1 5017906-010 KLN-R-10 ATM-R-10 A2K-10-R FWX-10 - - HSJ-10
1.5 5017906-016 KLN-R-15 ATM-R-15 A2K-15-R FWX-15 - - HSJ-15
5.5 5014006-050 KLN-R-50 - A2K-50-R FWX-50 - - HSJ-50
7.5 5014006-063 KLN-R-60 - A2K-60-R FWX-60 - - HSJ-60
11 5014006-080 KLN-R-80 - A2K-80-R FWX-80 - - HSJ-80
15-18.5 2028220-125 KLN-R-125 - A2K-125-R FWX-125 - - HSJ-125
22 2028220-150 KLN-R-150 - A2K-150-R FWX-150 L25S-150 A25X-150 HSJ-150
1) KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V frequency converters.
2) FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V frequency converters.
3) A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V frequency converters.
4) A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V frequency converters.

380-500 V

[kW] Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
0.37-1.1 KTS-R-6 JKS-6 JJS-6 FNQ-R-6 KTK-R-6 LP-CC-6
3 KTS-R-15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
4 KTS-R-20 JKS-20 JJS-20 FNQ-R-20 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20
5.5 KTS-R-25 JKS-25 JJS-25 FNQ-R-25 KTK-R-25 LP-CC-25
11 KTS-R-40 JKS-40 JJS-40 - - -
15 KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
18 KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
22 KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
30 KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
37 KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
45 KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
55 KTS-R-200 JKS-200 JJS-200 - - -
75 KTS-R-250 JKS-250 JJS-250 - - -
Table 8.19 380-500 V, Enclosure Types A, B and C 8 8

Ferraz- Ferraz- Ferraz- Ferraz-
SIBA Littel fuse Bussmann Littel fuse
Power [kW] Shawmut Shawmut Shawmut Shawmut
Type RK1 Type RK1 JFHR2 JFHR2
Type CC Type RK1 J JFHR21)
0.37-1.1 5017906-006 KLS-R-6 ATM-R-6 A6K-6-R FWH-6 HSJ-6 - -
1.5-2.2 5017906-010 KLS-R-10 ATM-R-10 A6K-10-R FWH-10 HSJ-10 - -
3 5017906-016 KLS-R-15 ATM-R-15 A6K-15-R FWH-15 HSJ-15 - -
4 5017906-020 KLS-R-20 ATM-R-20 A6K-20-R FWH-20 HSJ-20 - -
5.5 5017906-025 KLS-R-25 ATM-R-25 A6K-25-R FWH-25 HSJ-25 - -
7.5 5012406-032 KLS-R-30 ATM-R-30 A6K-30-R FWH-30 HSJ-30 - -
11 5014006-040 KLS-R-40 - A6K-40-R FWH-40 HSJ-40 - -
15 5014006-050 KLS-R-50 - A6K-50-R FWH-50 HSJ-50 - -
18 5014006-063 KLS-R-60 - A6K-60-R FWH-60 HSJ-60 - -
22 2028220-100 KLS-R-80 - A6K-80-R FWH-80 HSJ-80 - -
30 2028220-125 KLS-R-100 - A6K-100-R FWH-100 HSJ-100 - -
37 2028220-125 KLS-R-125 - A6K-125-R FWH-125 HSJ-125 - -
45 2028220-160 KLS-R-150 - A6K-150-R FWH-150 HSJ-150 - -
55 2028220-200 KLS-R-200 - A6K-200-R FWH-200 HSJ-200 A50-P-225 L50-S-225
75 2028220-250 KLS-R-250 - A6K-250-R FWH-250 HSJ-250 A50-P-250 L50-S-250

1) Ferraz-Shawmut A50QS fuses may substitute for A50P fuses.

525-600 V

Bussman Bussman Ferraz- Ferraz-
Power Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse
n n Shawmut Shawmut
[kW] Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type RK1 Type RK1
Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1 J
0.75-1.1 KTS-R-5 JKS-5 JJS-6 FNQ-R-5 KTK-R-5 LP-CC-5 5017906-005 KLS-R-005 A6K-5-R HSJ-6
1.5-2.2 KTS-R-10 JKS-10 JJS-10 FNQ-R-10 KTK-R-10 LP-CC-10 5017906-010 KLS-R-010 A6K-10-R HSJ-10
3 KTS-R15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15 5017906-016 KLS-R-015 A6K-15-R HSJ-15
4 KTS-R20 JKS-20 JJS-20 FNQ-R-20 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20 5017906-020 KLS-R-020 A6K-20-R HSJ-20
5.5 KTS-R-25 JKS-25 JJS-25 FNQ-R-25 KTK-R-25 LP-CC-25 5017906-025 KLS-R-025 A6K-25-R HSJ-25
7.5 KTS-R-30 JKS-30 JJS-30 FNQ-R-30 KTK-R-30 LP-CC-30 5017906-030 KLS-R-030 A6K-30-R HSJ-30
11 KTS-R-35 JKS-35 JJS-35 - - - 5014006-040 KLS-R-035 A6K-35-R HSJ-35
8 8 75 KTS-R-175 JKS-175 JJS-175 - - - 2028220-200 KLS-R-175 A6K-175-R HSJ-175
525-690 V

[kW] Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
[kW]
3 KTS-R15 JKS-15 JJS-15 FNQ-R-15 KTK-R-15 LP-CC-15
4 KTS-R20 JKS-20 JJS-20 FNQ-R-20 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20
11 KTS-R-35 JKS-35 JJS-35 - - -
15 KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 - - -
18 KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
22 KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
30 KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
37 KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
45 KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
55 KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
75 KTS-R-175 JKS-175 JJS-175 - - -


Ferraz- Ferraz-
Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann SIBA LittelFuse
Max. Shawmut Shawmut
Power [kW] E52273 E4273 E4273 E180276 E81895
prefuse E163267/E2137 E2137
RK1/JDDZ J/JDDZ T/JDDZ RK1/JDDZ RK1/JDDZ
RK1/JDDZ J/HSJ
11 30 A KTS-R-30 JKS-30 JKJS-30 5017906-030 KLS-R-030 A6K-30-R HST-30
15-18.5 45 A KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 5014006-050 KLS-R-045 A6K-45-R HST-45
22 60 A KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 5014006-063 KLS-R-060 A6K-60-R HST-60
55 125 A KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 2028220-125 KLS-150 A6K-125-R HST-125
75 150 A KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 2028220-150 KLS-175 A6K-150-R HST-150
Table 8.23 525-690 V, Enclosure Types B and C
8.8 Connection Tightening Torques

Torque [Nm]
DC
Enclosure Mains Motor Brake Ground Relay
connection
A2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6 8 8
A3 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
A4 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
A5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
B1 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.5 3 0.6
B2 4.5 4.5 3.7 3.7 3 0.6
B3 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
B4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3 0.6
C1 10 10 10 10 3 0.6
C2 14/241) 14/241) 14 14 3 0.6
C3 10 10 10 10 3 0.6
C4 14/241) 14/241) 14 14 3 0.6
Table 8.24 Tightening Terminals
1) For different cable dimensions x/y, where x ≤ 95 mm2 and y ≥ 95 mm2.

8 8
72
Enclosure Type A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 D3h
Rated 200-240 V 0.25–1.5 0.25-2.2 3-3.7 0.25-2.2 0.25-3.7 5.5-7.5 11 5.5-7.5 11-15 15-22 30-37 18.5-22 30-37 -
Power
Specifications
380-480/500 V 0.37-1.5 0.37-4.0 5.5-7.5 0.37-4 0.37-7.5 11-15 18.5-22 11-15 18.5-30 30-45 55-75 37-45 55-75 -
[kW] 525-600 V - - 0.75-7.5 - 0.75-7.5 11-15 18.5-22 11-15 18.5-30 30-45 55-90 37-45 55-90 -
525-690 V - - 1.1-7.5 - - - 11-22 - 11-30 - 30-75 37-45 37-45 55-75
IP 20 20 21 20 21 55/66 55/66 21/55/66 21/55/66 20 20 21/55/66 21/55/66 20 20 20
NEMA Chassis Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type Type Type Type Chassis Chassis Type Type Chassis Chassis Chassis
12/4X 12/4X 1/12/4X 1/12/4X 1/12/4X 1/12/4X
Height [mm]
Height of back plate A* 200 268 375 268 375 390 420 480 650 399 520 680 770 550 660 909
Height with de-coupling
A 316 374 - 374 - - - - - 420 595 - - 630 800 -
plate for fieldbus cables
Distance between
a 190 257 350 257 350 401 402 454 624 380 495 648 739 521 631 -
mounting holes
Width [mm]
Width of back plate B 75 90 90 130 130 200 242 242 242 165 230 308 370 308 370 250
8.9 Power Ratings, Weight and Dimensions
Width of back plate with 1

B - 130 130 170 170 - 242 242 242 205 230 308 370 308 370 -
C option
Width of back plate with 2
B - 150 150 190 190 - 242 242 242 225 230 308 370 308 370 -
C options
Distance between
b 60 70 70 110 110 171 215 210 210 140 200 272 334 270 330 -
mounting holes
Depth [mm]
Danfoss A/S © Rev. 07/2014 All rights reserved.

Depth without option A/B C 207 205 207 205 207 175 200 260 260 249 242 310 335 333 333 375
With option A/B C 222 220 222 220 222 175 200 260 260 262 242 310 335 333 333 375
Screw holes [mm]
c 6.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.25 8.25 12 12 8 - 12.5 12.5 - - -
d ø8 ø11 ø11 ø11 ø11 ø12 ø12 ø19 ø19 12 - ø19 ø19 - - -
e ø5 ø5.5 ø5.5 ø5.5 ø5.5 ø6.5 ø6.5 ø9 ø9 6.8 8.5 ø9 ø9 8.5 8.5 -
f 5 9 9 6.5 6.5 6 9 9 9 7.9 15 9.8 9.8 17 17
Max weight [kg] 2.7 4.9 5.3 6.6 7.0 9.7 13.5/14.2 23 27 12 23.5 45 65 35 50 62
Front cover tightening torque [Nm]
Plastic cover (low IP) Click Click Click - - Click Click Click Click Click Click 2.0 2.0 -
Metal cover (IP55/66) - - - 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 - - 2.2 2.2 2.0 2.0 -
* See Illustration 3.4 and Illustration 3.5 for top and bottom mounting holes.
Table 8.25 Power Ratings, Weight and Dimensions
MG33AP02
Appendix Operating Instructions
9 Appendix
9.1 Symbols, Abbreviations and Conventions

AC Alternating current
AEO Automatic energy optimization
AWG American wire gauge
AMA Automatic motor adaptation
°C Degrees celsius
DC Direct current
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
ETR Electronic thermal relay
FC Frequency converter
LCP Local control panel
MCT Motion control tool
IP Ingress protection
IM,N Nominal motor current
fM,N Nominal motor frequency
PM,N Nominal motor power
UM,N Nominal motor voltage
PM Motor Permanent magnet motor
PELV
PCB
Protective extra low voltage
Printed circuit board
9 9
PWM Pulse width modulated
ILIM Current limit
IINV Rated inverter output current
RPM Revolutions per minute
Regen Regenerative terminals
ns Synchronous motor speed
TLIM Torque limit
IVLT,MAX Maximum output current
IVLT,N Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter
Table 9.1 Symbols and Abbreviations
Conventions
Numbered lists indicate procedures.
Bullet lists indicate other information and description of illustrations.
Italicised text indicates:
• Cross reference
• Link
• Parameter name
All dimensions are in [mm].
9.2 Parameter Menu Structure

9 9
74
0-** Operation / Display 1-11 Motor Model 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit 3-95 Ramp Delay
0-0* Basic Settings 1-14 Damping Gain 1-76 Start Current 3-02 Minimum Reference 4-** Limits / Warnings
0-01 Language 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. 1-8* Stop Adjustments 3-03 Maximum Reference 4-1* Motor Limits
0-02 Motor Speed Unit 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. 1-80 Function at Stop 3-04 Reference Function 4-10 Motor Speed Direction
Appendix
0-03 Regional Settings 1-17 Voltage filter time const. 1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] 3-1* References 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) 1-18 Min. Current at No Load 1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] 3-10 Preset Reference 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
0-09 Performance Monitor 1-2* Motor Data 1-83 Precise Stop Function 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
0-1* Set-up Operations 1-20 Motor Power [kW] 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
0-10 Active Set-up 1-21 Motor Power [HP] 1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation 3-13 Reference Site 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
0-11 Edit Set-up 1-22 Motor Voltage Delay 3-14 Preset Relative Reference 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode
0-12 This Set-up Linked to 1-23 Motor Frequency 1-9* Motor Temperature 3-15 Reference Resource 1 4-18 Current Limit
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 1-24 Motor Current 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection 3-16 Reference Resource 2 4-19 Max Output Frequency
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed 1-91 Motor External Fan 3-17 Reference Resource 3 4-2* Limit Factors
0-15 Readout: actual setup 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque 1-93 Thermistor Resource 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource 4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source
0-2* LCP Display 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] 4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1-3* Adv. Motor Data 1-95 KTY Sensor Type 3-4* Ramp 1 4-23 Brake Check Limit Factor Source
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) 1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource 3-40 Ramp 1 Type 4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) 1-97 KTY Threshold level 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time 4-3* Motor Speed Mon.
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current 3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
0-25 My Personal Menu 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) 2-** Brakes 3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
0-3* LCP Custom Readout 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) 2-0* DC-Brake 3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 4-34 Tracking Error Function
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 2-00 DC Hold Current 3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 4-35 Tracking Error
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 2-01 DC Brake Current 3-5* Ramp 2 4-36 Tracking Error Timeout
0-32 Max Value of User-defined Readout 1-39 Motor Poles 2-02 DC Braking Time 3-50 Ramp 2 Type 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping
0-37 Display Text 1 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time 4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
0-38 Display Text 2 1-41 Motor Angle Offset 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout
0-39 Display Text 3 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) 2-05 Maximum Reference 3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 4-5* Adj. Warnings
0-4* LCP Keypad 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) 2-06 Parking Current 3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 4-50 Warning Current Low
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP 1-46 Position Detection Gain 2-07 Parking Time 3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 4-51 Warning Current High
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP 1-47 Torque Calibration 2-1* Brake Energy Funct. 3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 4-52 Warning Speed Low
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP 1-48 Inductance Sat. Point 2-10 Brake Function 3-6* Ramp 3 4-53 Warning Speed High
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP 1-5* Load Indep. Setting 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) 3-60 Ramp 3 Type 4-54 Warning Reference Low
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time 4-55 Warning Reference High
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
0-5* Copy/Save 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] 2-15 Brake Check 3-65 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 4-57 Warning Feedback High
0-50 LCP Copy 1-53 Model Shift Frequency 2-16 AC brake Max. Current 3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

0-51 Set-up Copy 1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening 2-17 Over-voltage Control 3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 4-6* Speed Bypass
0-6* Password 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U 2-18 Brake Check Condition 3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
0-60 Main Menu Password 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F 2-19 Over-voltage Gain 3-7* Ramp 4 4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current 2-2* Mechanical Brake 3-70 Ramp 4 Type 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]
0-65 Quick Menu Password 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency 2-20 Release Brake Current 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password 1-6* Load Depen. Setting 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time 5-** Digital In/Out
0-67 Bus Password Access 1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] 3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 5-0* Digital I/O mode
0-68 Safety Parameters Password 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 2-23 Activate Brake Delay 3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 5-00 Digital I/O Mode
0-69 Password Protection of Safety 1-62 Slip Compensation 2-24 Stop Delay 3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Parameters 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant 2-25 Brake Release Time 3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
1-** Load and Motor 1-64 Resonance Damping 2-26 Torque Ref 3-8* Other Ramps 5-1* Digital Inputs
1-0* General Settings 1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant 2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time 3-80 Jog Ramp Time 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input
1-00 Configuration Mode 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 2-28 Gain Boost Factor 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time 5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
1-01 Motor Control Principle 1-67 Load Type 2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time 3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source 1-68 Motor Inertia 2-3* Adv. Mech Brake 3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
1-03 Torque Characteristics 1-69 System Inertia 2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain 3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
1-04 Overload Mode 1-7* Start Adjustments 2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input
1-05 Local Mode Configuration 1-70 PM Start Mode 2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 3-90 Step Size 5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
1-06 Clockwise Direction 1-71 Start Delay 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time 3-91 Ramp Time 5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust 1-72 Start Function 3-** Reference / Ramps 3-92 Power Restore 5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input
1-1* Special Settings 1-73 Flying Start 3-0* Reference Limits 3-93 Maximum Limit 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
1-10 Motor Construction 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] 3-00 Reference Range 3-94 Minimum Limit 5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input
MG33AP02
5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay 9-85 Defined Parameters (6)
5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 7-16 Torque PI Lowpass Filter Time 8-4* FC MC protocol set 9-90 Changed Parameters (1)
5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 7-18 Torque PI Feed Forward Factor 8-40 Telegram Selection 9-91 Changed Parameters (2)
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input 6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 7-19 Current Controller Rise Time 8-41 Parameters for Signals 9-92 Changed Parameters (3)
MG33AP02
Appendix
5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb 8-42 PCD Write Configuration 9-93 Changed Parameters (4)
5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource 8-43 PCD Read Configuration 9-94 Changed Parameters (5)
5-3* Digital Outputs 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource 8-45 BTM Transaction Command 9-99 Profibus Revision Counter
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output 6-3* Analog Input 3 7-3* Process PID Ctrl. 8-46 BTM Transaction Status 10-** CAN Fieldbus
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output 6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control 8-47 BTM Timeout 10-0* Common Settings
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 7-31 Process PID Anti Windup 8-48 BTM Maximum Errors 10-00 CAN Protocol
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) 6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 7-32 Process PID Start Speed 8-49 BTM Error Log 10-01 Baud Rate Select
5-4* Relays 6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 8-5* Digital/Bus 10-02 MAC ID
5-40 Function Relay 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 7-34 Process PID Integral Time 8-50 Coasting Select 10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter
5-41 On Delay, Relay 6-4* Analog Input 4 7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 8-51 Quick Stop Select 10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 8-52 DC Brake Select 10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter
5-5* Pulse Input 6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 8-53 Start Select 10-1* DeviceNet
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 8-54 Reversing Select 10-10 Process Data Type Selection
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value 7-4* Adv. Process PID I 8-55 Set-up Select 10-11 Process Data Config Write
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset 8-56 Preset Reference Select 10-12 Process Data Config Read
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-5* Analog Output 1 7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp 8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select 10-13 Warning Parameter
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 6-50 Terminal 42 Output 7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp 8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select 10-14 Net Reference
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref. 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics 10-15 Net Control
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref. 8-80 Bus Message Count 10-2* COS Filters
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-53 Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource 8-81 Bus Error Count 10-20 COS Filter 1
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. 8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 10-21 COS Filter 2
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 6-55 Analog Output Filter Ctrl. 8-83 Slave Error Count 10-22 COS Filter 3
5-6* Pulse Output 6-6* Analog Output 2 7-48 PCD Feed Forward 8-9* Bus Jog 10-23 COS Filter 4
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output 7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 10-3* Parameter Access
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 7-5* Adv. Process PID II 8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 10-30 Array Index
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 7-50 Process PID Extended PID 9-** PROFIdrive 10-31 Store Data Values
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain 9-00 Setpoint 10-32 Devicenet Revision
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable 6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 9-07 Actual Value 10-33 Store Always
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 6-7* Analog Output 3 7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down 9-15 PCD Write Configuration 10-34 DeviceNet Product Code
5-7* 24V Encoder Input 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output 7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time 9-16 PCD Read Configuration 10-39 Devicenet F Parameters
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale 7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time 9-18 Node Address 10-5* CANopen
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction 6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale 8-** Comm. and Options 9-19 Drive Unit System Number 10-50 Process Data Config Write.
5-8* I/O Options 6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control 8-0* General Settings 9-22 Telegram Selection 10-51 Process Data Config Read.
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset 8-01 Control Site 9-23 Parameters for Signals 12-** Ethernet
5-9* Bus Controlled 6-8* Analog Output 4 8-02 Control Word Source 9-27 Parameter Edit 12-0* IP Settings
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 9-28 Process Control 12-00 IP Address Assignment
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function 9-44 Fault Message Counter 12-01 IP Address

5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function 9-45 Fault Code 12-02 Subnet Mask
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout 9-47 Fault Number 12-03 Default Gateway
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset 8-07 Diagnosis Trigger 9-52 Fault Situation Counter 12-04 DHCP Server
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 7-** Controllers 8-08 Readout Filtering 9-53 Profibus Warning Word 12-05 Lease Expires
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings 9-63 Actual Baud Rate 12-06 Name Servers
6-** Analog In/Out 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source 8-10 Control Word Profile 9-64 Device Identification 12-07 Domain Name
6-0* Analog I/O Mode 7-01 Speed PID Droop 8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 9-65 Profile Number 12-08 Host Name
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW 9-67 Control Word 1 12-09 Physical Address
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function 7-03 Speed PID Integral Time 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword 9-68 Status Word 1 12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
6-1* Analog Input 1 7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time 8-19 Product Code 9-70 Edit Set-up 12-10 Link Status
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 8-3* FC Port Settings 9-71 Profibus Save Data Values 12-11 Link Duration
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 8-30 Protocol 9-72 ProfibusDriveReset 12-12 Auto Negotiation
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 8-31 Address 9-75 DO Identification 12-13 Link Speed
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate 9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 12-14 Link Duplex
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp 8-33 Parity / Stop Bits 9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 12-2* Process Data
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value 7-1* Torque PI Ctrl. 8-34 Estimated cycle time 9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 12-20 Control Instance
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 7-10 Torque PI Feedback Source 8-35 Minimum Response Delay 9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 12-21 Process Data Config Write
6-2* Analog Input 2 7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 8-36 Max Response Delay 9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 12-22 Process Data Config Read
75
9 9
9 9
76
12-23 Process Data Config Write Size 13-20 SL Controller Timer 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC 15-80 Fan Running Hours 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
12-24 Process Data Config Read Size 13-4* Logic Rules 14-88 Option Data Storage 15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 16-62 Analog Input 53
12-27 Master Address 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 14-89 Option Detection 15-89 Configuration Change Counter 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
12-28 Store Data Values 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 14-9* Fault Settings 15-9* Parameter Info 16-64 Analog Input 54
Appendix
12-29 Store Always 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 14-90 Fault Level 15-92 Defined Parameters 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
12-3* EtherNet/IP 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 15-** Drive Information 15-93 Modified Parameters 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
12-30 Warning Parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 15-0* Operating Data 15-98 Drive Identification 16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
12-31 Net Reference 13-5* States 15-00 Operating hours 15-99 Parameter Metadata 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
12-32 Net Control 13-51 SL Controller Event 15-01 Running Hours 16-** Data Readouts 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
12-33 CIP Revision 13-52 SL Controller Action 15-02 kWh Counter 16-0* General Status 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
12-34 CIP Product Code 14-** Special Functions 15-03 Power Up's 16-00 Control Word 16-71 Relay Output [bin]
12-35 EDS Parameter 14-0* Inverter Switching 15-04 Over Temp's 16-01 Reference [Unit] 16-72 Counter A
12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 14-00 Switching Pattern 15-05 Over Volt's 16-02 Reference % 16-73 Counter B
12-38 COS Filter 14-01 Switching Frequency 15-06 Reset kWh Counter 16-03 Status Word 16-74 Prec. Stop Counter
12-4* Modbus TCP 14-03 Overmodulation 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 16-75 Analog In X30/11
12-40 Status Parameter 14-04 PWM Random 15-1* Data Log Settings 16-06 Absolute Position 16-76 Analog In X30/12
12-41 Slave Message Count 14-06 Dead Time Compensation 15-10 Logging Source 16-09 Custom Readout 16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
12-42 Slave Exception Message Count 14-1* Mains On/Off 15-11 Logging Interval 16-1* Motor Status 16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
12-5* EtherCAT 14-10 Mains Failure 15-12 Trigger Event 16-10 Power [kW] 16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
12-50 Configured Station Alias 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault 15-13 Logging Mode 16-11 Power [hp] 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
12-51 Configured Station Address 14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance 15-14 Samples Before Trigger 16-12 Motor Voltage 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
12-59 EtherCAT Status 14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out 15-2* Historic Log 16-13 Frequency 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
12-6* Ethernet PowerLink 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level 15-20 Historic Log: Event 16-14 Motor current 16-84 Comm. Option STW
12-60 Node ID 14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 15-21 Historic Log: Value 16-15 Frequency [%] 16-85 FC Port CTW 1
12-62 SDO Timeout 14-2* Trip Reset 15-22 Historic Log: Time 16-16 Torque [Nm] 16-86 FC Port REF 1
12-63 Basic Ethernet Timeout 14-20 Reset Mode 15-3* Fault Log 16-17 Speed [RPM] 16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
12-66 Threshold 14-21 Automatic Restart Time 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 16-18 Motor Thermal 16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word
12-67 Threshold Counters 14-22 Operation Mode 15-31 Fault Log: Value 16-19 KTY sensor temperature 16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
12-68 Cumulative Counters 14-23 Typecode Setting 15-32 Fault Log: Time 16-20 Motor Angle 16-90 Alarm Word
12-69 Ethernet PowerLink Status 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 15-4* Drive Identification 16-21 Torque [%] High Res. 16-91 Alarm Word 2
12-8* Other Ethernet Services 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 15-40 FC Type 16-22 Torque [%] 16-92 Warning Word
12-80 FTP Server 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault 15-41 Power Section 16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 16-93 Warning Word 2
12-81 HTTP Server 14-28 Production Settings 15-42 Voltage 16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 16-94 Ext. Status Word
12-82 SMTP Service 14-29 Service Code 15-43 Software Version 16-25 Torque [Nm] High 17-** Feedback
12-89 Transparent Socket Channel Port 14-3* Current Limit Ctrl. 15-44 Ordered Typecode String 16-3* Drive Status 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services 14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 15-45 Actual Typecode String 16-30 DC Link Voltage 17-10 Signal Type
12-90 Cable Diagnostic 14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time 15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 16-32 Brake Energy /s 17-11 Resolution (PPR)

12-91 Auto Cross Over 14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 15-47 Power Card Ordering No 16-33 Brake Energy Average 17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
12-92 IGMP Snooping 14-35 Stall Protection 15-48 LCP Id No 16-34 Heatsink Temp. 17-20 Protocol Selection
12-93 Cable Error Length 14-36 Fieldweakening Function 15-49 SW ID Control Card 16-35 Inverter Thermal 17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection 14-4* Energy Optimising 15-50 SW ID Power Card 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 17-24 SSI Data Length
12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter 14-40 VT Level 15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number 16-37 Inv. Max. Current 17-25 Clock Rate
12-96 Port Config 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation 15-53 Power Card Serial Number 16-38 SL Controller State 17-26 SSI Data Format
12-98 Interface Counters 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 15-58 Smart Setup Filename 16-39 Control Card Temp. 17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate
12-99 Media Counters 14-43 Motor Cosphi 15-59 CSIV Filename 16-40 Logging Buffer Full 17-5* Resolver Interface
13-** Smart Logic 14-5* Environment 15-6* Option Ident 16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline 17-50 Poles
13-0* SLC Settings 14-50 RFI Filter 15-60 Option Mounted 16-45 Motor Phase U Current 17-51 Input Voltage
13-00 SL Controller Mode 14-51 DC Link Compensation 15-61 Option SW Version 16-46 Motor Phase V Current 17-52 Input Frequency
13-01 Start Event 14-52 Fan Control 15-62 Option Ordering No 16-47 Motor Phase W Current 17-53 Transformation Ratio
13-02 Stop Event 14-53 Fan Monitor 15-63 Option Serial No 16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] 17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution
13-03 Reset SLC 14-55 Output Filter 15-70 Option in Slot A 16-49 Current Fault Source 17-59 Resolver Interface
13-1* Comparators 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 16-5* Ref. & Feedb. 17-6* Monitoring and App.
13-10 Comparator Operand 14-57 Inductance Output Filter 15-72 Option in Slot B 16-50 External Reference 17-60 Feedback Direction
13-11 Comparator Operator 14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units 15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 16-51 Pulse Reference 17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
13-12 Comparator Value 14-7* Compatibility 15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 16-52 Feedback[Unit] 17-7* Absolute Position
13-1* RS Flip Flops 14-72 Legacy Alarm Word 15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 16-53 Digi Pot Reference 17-70 Absolute Position Display Unit
13-15 RS-FF Operand S 14-73 Legacy Warning Word 15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 16-57 Feedback [RPM] 17-71 Absolute Position Display Scale
13-16 RS-FF Operand R 14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word 15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 16-6* Inputs & Outputs 17-72 Absolute Position Numerator
13-2* Timers 14-8* Options 15-8* Operating Data II 16-60 Digital Input 17-73 Absolute Position Denominator
MG33AP02
17-74 Absolute Position Offset 32-04 Absolute Encoder Baudrate X55 32-90 Debug Source 33-65 Terminal X59/3 Digital Output 34-61 Axis Status
18-** Data Readouts 2 32-05 Absolute Encoder Data Length 33-** MCO Adv. Settings 33-66 Terminal X59/4 Digital Output 34-62 Program Status
18-3* Analog Readouts 32-06 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 33-0* Home Motion 33-67 Terminal X59/5 Digital Output 34-64 MCO 302 Status
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 32-07 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation 33-00 Force HOME 33-68 Terminal X59/6 Digital Output 34-65 MCO 302 Control
MG33AP02
Appendix
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 32-08 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 33-01 Zero Point Offset from Home Pos. 33-69 Terminal X59/7 Digital Output 34-7* Diagnosis readouts
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 32-09 Encoder Monitoring 33-02 Ramp for Home Motion 33-70 Terminal X59/8 Digital Output 34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 32-10 Rotational Direction 33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 33-8* Global Parameters 34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2
18-5* Active Alarms/Warnings 32-11 User Unit Denominator 33-04 Behaviour during HomeMotion 33-80 Activated Program Number 35-** Sensor Input Option
18-55 Active Alarm Numbers 32-12 User Unit Numerator 33-1* Synchronization 33-81 Power-up State 35-0* Temp. Input Mode
18-56 Active Warning Numbers 32-13 Enc.2 Control 33-10 Sync Factor Master 33-82 Drive Status Monitoring 35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2 32-14 Enc.2 node ID 33-11 Sync Factor Slave 33-83 Behaviour afterError 35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type
18-60 Digital Input 2 32-15 Enc.2 CAN guard 33-12 Position Offset for Synchronization 33-84 Behaviour afterEsc. 35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit
18-9* PID Readouts 32-3* Encoder 1 33-13 Accuracy Window for Position Sync. 33-85 MCO Supplied by External 24VDC 35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type
18-90 Process PID Error 32-30 Incremental Signal Type 33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 33-86 Terminal at alarm 35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit
18-91 Process PID Output 32-31 Incremental Resolution 33-15 Marker Number for Master 33-87 Terminal state at alarm 35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output 32-32 Absolute Protocol 33-16 Marker Number for Slave 33-88 Status word at alarm 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output 32-33 Absolute Resolution 33-17 Master Marker Distance 33-9* MCO Port Settings 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
30-** Special Features 32-35 Absolute Encoder Data Length 33-18 Slave Marker Distance 33-90 X62 MCO CAN node ID 35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant
30-0* Wobbler 32-36 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 33-19 Master Marker Type 33-91 X62 MCO CAN baud rate 35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
30-00 Wobble Mode 32-37 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation 33-20 Slave Marker Type 33-94 X60 MCO RS485 serial termination 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] 32-38 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 33-21 Master Marker Tolerance Window 33-95 X60 MCO RS485 serial baud rate 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%] 32-39 Encoder Monitoring 33-22 Slave Marker Tolerance Window 34-** MCO Data Readouts 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7
30-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource 32-40 Encoder Termination 33-23 Start Behaviour for Marker Sync 34-0* PCD Write Par. 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz] 32-43 Enc.1 Control 33-24 Marker Number for Fault 34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 32-44 Enc.1 node ID 33-25 Marker Number for Ready 34-02 PCD 2 Write to MCO 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit
30-06 Wobble Jump Time 32-45 Enc.1 CAN guard 33-26 Velocity Filter 34-03 PCD 3 Write to MCO 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time 32-5* Feedback Source 33-27 Offset Filter Time 34-04 PCD 4 Write to MCO 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time 32-50 Source Slave 33-28 Marker Filter Configuration 34-05 PCD 5 Write to MCO 35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant
30-09 Wobble Random Function 32-51 MCO 302 Last Will 33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 34-06 PCD 6 Write to MCO 35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor
30-10 Wobble Ratio 32-52 Source Master 33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 34-07 PCD 7 Write to MCO 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max. 32-6* PID Controller 33-31 Synchronisation Type 34-08 PCD 8 Write to MCO 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min. 32-60 Proportional factor 33-32 Feed Forward Velocity Adaptation 34-09 PCD 9 Write to MCO 35-4* Analog Input X48/2
30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled 32-61 Derivative factor 33-33 Velocity Filter Window 34-10 PCD 10 Write to MCO 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust 32-62 Integral factor 33-34 Slave Marker filter time 34-2* PCD Read Par. 35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s] 32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 33-4* Limit Handling 34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%] 32-64 PID Bandwidth 33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch 34-22 PCD 2 Read from MCO 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection 32-65 Velocity Feed-Forward 33-41 Negative Software End Limit 34-23 PCD 3 Read from MCO 35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] 32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward 33-42 Positive Software End Limit 34-24 PCD 4 Read from MCO 42-** Safety Functions
30-24 Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error 32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 33-43 Negative Software End Limit Active 34-25 PCD 5 Read from MCO 42-1* Speed Monitoring
[%] 32-68 Reverse Behavior for Slave 33-44 Positive Software End Limit Active 34-26 PCD 6 Read from MCO 42-10 Measured Speed Source
30-8* Compatibility (I) 32-69 Sampling Time for PID Control 33-45 Time in Target Window 34-27 PCD 7 Read from MCO 42-11 Encoder Resolution

30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 32-70 Scan Time for Profile Generator 33-46 Target Window LimitValue 34-28 PCD 8 Read from MCO 42-12 Encoder Direction
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) 32-71 Size of the Control Window 33-47 Size of Target Window 34-29 PCD 9 Read from MCO 42-13 Gear Ratio
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain (Activation) 33-5* I/O Configuration 34-30 PCD 10 Read from MCO 42-14 Feedback Type
30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain 32-72 Size of the Control Window (Deactiv.) 33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input 34-4* Inputs & Outputs 42-15 Feedback Filter
31-** Bypass Option 32-73 Integral limit filter time 33-51 Terminal X57/2 Digital Input 34-40 Digital Inputs 42-17 Tolerance Error
31-00 Bypass Mode 32-74 Position error filter time 33-52 Terminal X57/3 Digital Input 34-41 Digital Outputs 42-18 Zero Speed Timer
31-01 Bypass Start Time Delay 32-8* Velocity & Accel. 33-53 Terminal X57/4 Digital Input 34-5* Process Data 42-19 Zero Speed Limit
31-02 Bypass Trip Time Delay 32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 33-54 Terminal X57/5 Digital Input 34-50 Actual Position 42-2* Safe Input
31-03 Test Mode Activation 32-81 Shortest Ramp 33-55 Terminal X57/6 Digital Input 34-51 Commanded Position 42-20 Safe Function
31-10 Bypass Status Word 32-82 Ramp Type 33-56 Terminal X57/7 Digital Input 34-52 Actual Master Position 42-21 Type
31-11 Bypass Running Hours 32-83 Velocity Resolution 33-57 Terminal X57/8 Digital Input 34-53 Slave Index Position 42-22 Discrepancy Time
31-19 Remote Bypass Activation 32-84 Default Velocity 33-58 Terminal X57/9 Digital Input 34-54 Master Index Position 42-23 Stable Signal Time
32-** MCO Basic Settings 32-85 Default Acceleration 33-59 Terminal X57/10 Digital Input 34-55 Curve Position 42-24 Restart Behaviour
32-0* Encoder 2 32-86 Acc. up for limited jerk 33-60 Terminal X59/1 and X59/2 Mode 34-56 Track Error 42-3* General
32-00 Incremental Signal Type 32-87 Acc. down for limited jerk 33-61 Terminal X59/1 Digital Input 34-57 Synchronizing Error 42-30 External Failure Reaction
32-01 Incremental Resolution 32-88 Dec. up for limited jerk 33-62 Terminal X59/2 Digital Input 34-58 Actual Velocity 42-31 Reset Source
32-02 Absolute Protocol 32-89 Dec. down for limited jerk 33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output 34-59 Actual Master Velocity 42-33 Parameter Set Name
32-03 Absolute Resolution 32-9* Development 33-64 Terminal X59/2 Digital Output 34-60 Synchronizing Status 42-35 S-CRC Value
77
9 9
9 9
78
42-36 Level 1 Password 99-22 HS Temp. (PC3)
42-4* SS1 99-23 HS Temp. (PC4)
42-40 Type 99-24 HS Temp. (PC5)
42-41 Ramp Profile 99-25 HS Temp. (PC6)
Appendix
42-42 Delay Time 99-26 HS Temp. (PC7)

42-43 Delta T 99-27 HS Temp. (PC8)
42-44 Deceleration Rate 99-3* Performance Readouts
42-45 Delta V 99-34 Perf FastThread AOC
42-46 Zero Speed 99-35 Perf SlowThread AOC
42-47 Ramp Time 99-36 Perf IdleThread AOC
42-48 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 99-37 Perf SystemIdleThread AOC
42-49 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 99-38 Perf CPU usage AOC (%)
42-5* SLS 99-39 Performance IntervalCounter
42-50 Cut Off Speed 99-4* Software Control
42-51 Speed Limit 99-40 StartupWizardState
42-52 Fail Safe Reaction 99-41 Performance Measurements
42-53 Start Ramp 99-5* PC Debug
42-54 Ramp Down Time 99-50 PC Debug Selection
42-6* Safe Fieldbus 99-51 PC Debug 0
42-60 Telegram Selection 99-52 PC Debug 1
42-61 Destination Address 99-53 PC Debug 2
42-8* Status 99-54 PC Debug 3
42-80 Safe Option Status 99-55 PC Debug 4
42-81 Safe Option Status 2 99-56 Fan 1 Feedback
42-82 Safe Control Word 99-57 Fan 2 Feedback
42-83 Safe Status Word 99-58 PC Auxiliary Temp
42-85 Active Safe Func. 99-59 Power Card Temp.
42-86 Safe Option Info 99-8* RTDC
42-88 Supported Customization File Version 99-80 tCon1 Selection
42-89 Customization File Version 99-81 tCon2 Selection
42-9* Special 99-82 Trig Compare Selection
42-90 Restart Safe Option 99-83 Trig Compare Operator
99-* Devel support 99-84 Trig Compare Operand

99-0* DSP Debug 99-85 Trig Start
99-00 DAC 1 selection 99-86 Pre-trigger
99-01 DAC 2 selection 99-9* Internal Values
99-02 DAC 3 selection 99-90 Options present

99-03 DAC 4 selection 99-91 Motor Power Internal
99-04 DAC 1 scale 99-92 Motor Voltage Internal
99-05 DAC 2 scale 99-93 Motor Frequency Internal
99-06 DAC 3 scale 600-** PROFIsafe
99-07 DAC 4 scale 600-22 PROFIdrive/safe Tel. Selected
99-08 Test param 1 600-44 Fault Message Counter
99-09 Test param 2 600-47 Fault Number
99-10 DAC Option Slot 600-52 Fault Situation Counter
99-1* Hardware Control 601-** PROFIdrive 2
99-11 RFI 2 601-22 PROFIdrive Safety Channel Tel. No.
99-12 Fan
99-1* Software Readouts
99-13 Idle time
99-14 Paramdb requests in queue
99-15 Secondary Timer at Inverter Fault
99-16 No of Current Sensors
99-17 tCon1 time
99-18 tCon2 time
99-19 Time Optimize Measure
99-2* Heatsink Readouts
99-20 HS Temp. (PC1)
99-21 HS Temp. (PC2)
MG33AP02
Index Operating Instructions
Index Control signal......................................................................................... 37

Control terminal............................................................... 24, 26, 37, 39
A Control wiring................................................................... 12, 15, 18, 21
Abbreviations......................................................................................... 73 Control word timeout......................................................................... 42
AC input............................................................................................... 7, 16 Conventions........................................................................................... 73
AC mains............................................................................................. 7, 16 Cooling..................................................................................................... 10
AC waveform............................................................................................ 7 Cooling clearance................................................................................. 21
Additional resources.............................................................................. 4 Current limit........................................................................................... 49
Alarm log................................................................................................. 23 Current rating........................................................................................ 41
Alarms....................................................................................................... 39
AMA............................................................................................. 37, 41, 44 D
AMA with T27 connected.................................................................. 31 DC current.................................................................................... 7, 12, 38
AMA without T27 connected........................................................... 31 DC link....................................................................................................... 40
Ambient condition............................................................................... 61 Default setting....................................................................................... 24
Analog input................................................................................... 17, 40 Digital input....................................................................... 18, 39, 41, 61
Analog Input.......................................................................................... 62 Digital output......................................................................................... 63
Analog output................................................................................ 17, 63 Dimension............................................................................................... 72
Analog signal......................................................................................... 40 Discharge time......................................................................................... 8
Analog speed reference..................................................................... 31 Disconnect switch................................................................................ 22
Approval..................................................................................................... 7
Auto on....................................................................................... 24, 30, 37
E
Auto On.................................................................................................... 39 Electrical installation........................................................................... 12
Automatic motor adaptation........................................................... 28 Electrical interference......................................................................... 12
Auto-reset............................................................................................... 22 EMC............................................................................................................ 12
Auxiliary equipment............................................................................ 21 EMC interference.................................................................................. 15

EN50598-2............................................................................................... 61
B Encoder rotation................................................................................... 29
Back plate................................................................................................ 11 Energy efficiency.................... 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Brake Energy efficiency class........................................................................ 61
control.................................................................................................. 41 Environment........................................................................................... 61
resistor................................................................................................. 40
Exploded view..................................................................................... 5, 6
Braking.............................................................................................. 38, 43
External alarm reset............................................................................. 34
External command............................................................................... 39
C
External commands............................................................................... 7
Cable length and cross section....................................................... 61
External controller.................................................................................. 4
Cable routing......................................................................................... 21
Cable specification............................................................................... 61
F
Certification............................................................................................... 7
Fault log................................................................................................... 23
Circuit breaker................................................................................ 21, 65
FC................................................................................................................ 20
Clearance requirements..................................................................... 10
Feedback............................................................................ 19, 21, 38, 44
Closed loop............................................................................................. 19
Floating delta......................................................................................... 16
Communication option...................................................................... 43
FLUX.......................................................................................................... 36
Conduct................................................................................................... 21
Front cover tightening torque......................................................... 72
Control card
Control card......................................................................... 40, 63, 64 Fuse...................................................................................... 12, 21, 43, 65
Control card..................................................................................... 63, 64

Control characteristic.......................................................................... 64

MCT 10............................................................................................... 17, 22

G Mechanical brake control........................................................... 19, 36
Ground connection............................................................................. 21 Mechanical installation...................................................................... 10
Ground wire............................................................................................ 12 Menu key................................................................................................. 23
Grounded delta..................................................................................... 16 Menu structure...................................................................................... 23
Grounding.......................................................................... 15, 16, 21, 22 Modbus RTU........................................................................................... 20
Motor
H current.................................................................................................. 44
data................................................................................................ 41, 45
Hand on............................................................................................. 24, 37
power................................................................................................... 44
Harmonics.................................................................................................. 7 thermistor........................................................................................... 35
Heat sink.................................................................................................. 44 Thermistor.......................................................................................... 35
High voltage...................................................................................... 8, 22 Motor cable........................................................................... 12, 15, 0

Motor current............................................................................. 7, 23, 28
I Motor data................................................................................ 26, 29, 49
IEC 61800-3............................................................................................. 16 Motor output......................................................................................... 60
Initialisation............................................................................................ 25 Motor power................................................................................... 12, 23
Input current.......................................................................................... 16 Motor protection..................................................................................... 4
Input disconnect................................................................................... 16 Motor rotation....................................................................................... 29
Input power..................................................... 7, 12, 15, 16, 21, 22, 39 Motor speed........................................................................................... 25
Input power wiring.............................................................................. 21 Motor status.............................................................................................. 4
Input signal............................................................................................. 19 Motor thermal protection................................................................. 35
Input terminal................................................................... 16, 19, 22, 40 Motor wiring.................................................................................... 15, 21
Input voltage.......................................................................................... 22 Mounting.......................................................................................... 11, 21
Installation................................................................................ 18, 20, 21 Multiple frequency converter.......................................................... 12
Installation environment................................................................... 10
Intended use............................................................................................. 4 N
Interference isolation.......................................................................... 21 Nameplate............................................................................................... 10
Intermediate circuit............................................................................. 40 Navigation key......................................................................... 23, 25, 37
Isolated main.......................................................................................... 16
O
J Open loop............................................................................................... 19
Jumper...................................................................................................... 18 Operation key........................................................................................ 23

Optional equipment.............................................................. 16, 18, 22
L Output current............................................................................... 38, 41
Leakage current................................................................................ 9, 12 Output performance (U, V, W)......................................................... 60
Lifting........................................................................................................ 11 Output power wiring.......................................................................... 21
Load sharing............................................................................................. 8 Output terminal.................................................................................... 22
Local control............................................................................. 22, 24, 37 Output, 24 V DC.................................................................................... 63
Local control panel (LCP)................................................................... 22 Overcurrent protection...................................................................... 12
Overheating............................................................................................ 41
M Overtemperature.................................................................................. 41
Main menu.............................................................................................. 23 Overvoltage..................................................................................... 38, 49
Mains supply..................................................................... 55, 56, 57, 60
Mains voltage.................................................................................. 23, 38 P
Maintenance.......................................................................................... 37 Parameter menu structure................................................................ 74
Manual initialisation............................................................................ 25 PELV........................................................................................................... 35

Performance........................................................................................... 64 Start/stop command........................................................................... 33

Phase loss................................................................................................ 40 Start-up.................................................................................................... 25
PM motor................................................................................................. 26 Status display......................................................................................... 37
Potential equalisation......................................................................... 12 Status mode........................................................................................... 37
Power connection................................................................................ 12 STO...................................................................................................... 19, 31
Power factor....................................................................................... 7, 21 Storage..................................................................................................... 10
Power rating........................................................................................... 72 Supply voltage.................................................................. 16, 17, 22, 43
Programming............................................................. 18, 22, 23, 24, 40 Switch....................................................................................................... 19
Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 33 Switching frequency........................................................................... 39
Pulse/encoder input............................................................................ 63 Symbols.................................................................................................... 73
System feedback..................................................................................... 4
Q
Qualified personnel................................................................................ 8 T
Quick menu............................................................................................ 23 Terminal 37............................................................................................. 31
Terminal 53............................................................................................. 19
R Terminal 54...................................................................................... 19, 46
Ramp-down time.................................................................................. 49 Thermal protection................................................................................ 7
Ramp-up time........................................................................................ 49 Thermistor............................................................................................... 16
Reference..................................................................... 23, 31, 37, 38, 39 Thermistor control wiring................................................................. 16
Relay output........................................................................................... 64 Tightening cover.................................................................................. 15
Remote command.................................................................................. 4 Tightening terminal............................................................................. 71
Remote reference................................................................................. 38 Torque...................................................................................................... 41
Reset......................................................... 22, 23, 24, 25, 39, 41, 45, 46 Torque characteristic........................................................................... 60
RFI filter.................................................................................................... 16 Torque limit............................................................................................ 49
RMS current............................................................................................... 7 Transient protection.............................................................................. 7
RS-485....................................................................................................... 34 Trip............................................................................................................. 35
RS-485 serial communication................................................... 20, 64 Trip lock.................................................................................................... 39
Run command....................................................................................... 30 Trips........................................................................................................... 39
Run permissive...................................................................................... 38 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 49
S U
Safe Torque Off...................................................................................... 19 Unintended motor rotation................................................................ 9
Safety........................................................................................................... 9 Unintended start.............................................................................. 8, 37
Screened cable............................................................................... 15, 21 USB serial communication................................................................ 64
Serial communication...................................... 17, 24, 37, 38, 39, 64
Service...................................................................................................... 37 V
Setpoint.................................................................................................... 39 Vibration.................................................................................................. 10
Set-up................................................................................................ 23, 30 Voltage imbalance............................................................................... 40
Shock......................................................................................................... 10 Voltage level........................................................................................... 61
Short circuit............................................................................................ 42
SLC............................................................................................................. 35 W
Sleep mode............................................................................................. 39 Warnings.................................................................................................. 39
SmartStart............................................................................................... 25 Weight...................................................................................................... 72
Specifications......................................................................................... 20 Windmilling............................................................................................... 9
Speed reference............................................................... 19, 30, 31, 37 Wire size............................................................................................ 12, 15
Speed reference, analog.................................................................... 31 Wiring schematic.................................................................................. 13

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
130R0300 MG33AP02 Rev. 07/2014
*MG33AP02*
https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2963802
Safety relays - PSR-SCP- 24UC/ESA2/4X1/1X2/B - 2963802

Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's
documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid
(http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Safety relay for emergency stop and safety door up to SIL 1, SIL CL 1, Cat. 1, PL c, depending on the application
up to SIL 3, SIL CL 3, Cat. 4, PL e, single-channel operation, 4 enabling current paths, nominal input voltage of
24 V AC/DC, plug-in screw terminal blocks
Product Features
Up to Cat. 1/PL c according to ISO 13849-1, SILCL 1 according to IEC 62061, SIL 1 according to IEC 61508
Depending on the application, up to Cat. 4/PL e according to ISO 13849-1, SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061, SIL 3 according to IEC 61508
Basic insulation
Single-channel control

Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 1 pc
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 280.0 g
Custom tariff number 85371099
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
Note
EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download
Utilization restriction
area
Dimensions
Width 22.5 mm
Height 99 mm
Depth 114.5 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -20 °C ... 55 °C
07/21/2015 Page 1 / 7

Technical data
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 70 °C
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) 75 % (on average, 85% infrequently, non-condensing)
Max. permissible humidity (storage/transport) 75 % (on average, 85% infrequently, non-condensing)
Maximum altitude ≤ 2000 m (Above sea level)
Input data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Input voltage range in reference to UN 0.85 ... 1.1
Typical input current at UN 140 mA AC
65 mA DC
Voltage at input/start and feedback circuit approx. 24 V DC
Typical response time 65 ms
Typical release time 45 ms
Recovery time 1s
Status display Green LED
Max. permissible overall conductor resistance approx. 22 Ω (Input and start circuits at UN)
Output data
Contact type 4 enabling current paths
1 signaling current path
Contact material AgSnO2, + 0.2 µm Au
Minimum switching voltage 15 V AC/DC
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Limiting continuous current 6 A (N/O contact)
3 A (N/C contact)
Inrush current, minimum 25 mA
Maximum inrush current 6A
2 2 2 2 2 2
Sq. Total current 72 A (ITH = I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 )
Interrupting rating (ohmic load) max. 144 W (24 V DC, τ = 0 ms, N/C contact 51/52: 72 W)
288 W (48 V DC, τ = 0 ms, N/C contact 51/52: 144 W)
110 W (110 V DC, τ = 0 ms)
88 W (220 V DC, τ = 0 ms)
1500 VA (250 V AC, τ = 0 ms, N/C contact 51/52: 750 VA)
Maximum interrupting rating (inductive load) 42 W (24 V DC, τ = 40 ms)
42 W (48 V DC, τ = 40 ms)
42 W (110 V DC, τ = 40 ms)
42 W (220 V DC, τ = 40 ms)
Switching capacity min. 0.4 W
07/21/2015 Page 2 / 7

Technical data
Output data
Output fuse 6 A fast blow
C6 (24 V AC/DC) automatic device
General
Relay type Electromechanically forcibly guided, dust-proof relay.
Mechanical service life 7
Approx. 10 cycles
Net weight 249.8 g
Mounting type DIN rail mounting
Degree of protection IP54
IP20
Min. degree of protection of inst. location IP54
Mounting position any
Parameters as per EN ISO 13849 1 (up to Cat. 4 depending on the application)
Stop category 0
Parameters for IEC 61508 1
Designation Air clearances and creepage distances between the power circuits
Standards/regulations DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160
4 kV / basic isolation (safe isolation, reinforced insulation and 6 kV
Rated surge voltage/insulation
between input circuit/N/C contacts and enabling current paths).
Rated insulation voltage 250 V
Pollution degree 2
Surge voltage category III
Connection data
Connection method Screw connection
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG min. 24
Conductor cross section AWG max. 12
Stripping length 7 mm
Screw thread M3
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371102
07/21/2015 Page 3 / 7

Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.1 27371102
eCl@ss 5.0 27371901
eCl@ss 5.1 27371901
eCl@ss 6.0 27371819
eCl@ss 7.0 27371819
eCl@ss 8.0 27371819
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC000196

ETIM 3.0 EC001449
ETIM 4.0 EC001449
ETIM 5.0 EC001449
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211901

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121501
UNSPSC 11 39121501
UNSPSC 12.01 39121501
UNSPSC 13.2 39121501
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / Functional Safety / Functional Safety / UL Listed / cUL Listed / EAC / EAC / cULus Listed
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
UL Listed
07/21/2015 Page 4 / 7

Approvals
cUL Listed
Functional Safety
Functional Safety
UL Listed
cUL Listed
EAC
EAC
cULus Listed
Drawings
Circuit diagram
A1 S11 S33 S34 S12 13 23 33 43 51
24VDC
K1
IN 1/2
Logic
K2
Power
24V AC/DC
A2 14 24 34 44 52
07/21/2015 Page 5 / 7

Circuit diagram
L+
(L1)
Safety door
open 21
B1
22
closed
A1 S11 S12 13 23 33 43 51 K3
(+) ( )
PSR-ESA2/4x1/1x2/B
( )
(+)
A2 S33 S34 14 24 34 44 52 K4
K3
M
K3
Reset K4
S2
K4
M
(N)
Single-channel safety door monitoring
07/21/2015 Page 6 / 7

Circuit diagram
L+
(L1)
Emergency
stop
S1
A1 S11 S12 13 23 33 43 51
(+) ( ) K3 K4
PSR-ESA2/4x1/1x2/B
( )
(+)
A2 S33 S34 14 24 34 44 52
M M
K3
K3
Reset K4
S2
K4
M
(N)
Single-channel emergency stop monitoring
Phoenix Contact 2015 © - all rights reserved

http://www.phoenixcontact.com
07/21/2015 Page 7 / 7
Power supply unit - QUINT-PS/ 1AC/24DC/ 5 - 2866750

Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's
documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid
(http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
Primary-switched QUINT POWER power supply for DIN rail mounting with SFB (Selective Fuse Breaking)
Technology, input: 1-phase, output: 24 V DC/5 A
Product Description
QUINT POWER power supplies with maximum functionality
QUINT POWER circuit breakers magnetically and therefore quickly trip at six times the nominal current, for selective and therefore cost-effective system
protection. The high level of system availability is additionally ensured, thanks to preventive function monitoring, as it reports critical operating states
before errors occur.
Reliable starting of heavy loads takes place via the static power reserve POWER BOOST. Thanks to the adjustable voltage, all ranges between 5 V
DC ... 56 V DC are covered.
Product Features
Reliable starting of difficult loads with the static POWER BOOST power reserve with up to 1.5 times the nominal current permanently
Fast tripping of standard circuit breakers with dynamic power reserve SFB (selective fuse breaking) technology with up to 6 times the nominal
current for 12 ms
For superior system availability
Preventive function monitoring

Key Commercial Data
Packing unit 1 pc
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 1011.4 g
Custom tariff number 85044030
Country of origin Thailand
Technical data
Dimensions
Width 40 mm
Height 130 mm
Depth 125 mm
Width with alternative assembly 122 mm
07/21/2015 Page 1 / 10

Technical data
Dimensions
Height with alternative assembly 130 mm
Depth with alternative assembly 43 mm
Ambient conditions
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (> 60 °C Derating: 2,5 %/K)
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C
Max. permissible relative humidity (operation) ≤ 95 % (at 25 °C, non-condensing)
Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2:2005
Maximum altitude 2000 m
Input data
Nominal input voltage range 100 V AC ... 240 V AC
Input voltage range 85 V AC ... 264 V AC
90 V DC ... 350 V DC
Short-term input voltage 300 V AC
AC frequency range 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
Frequency range DC 0 Hz
Discharge current to PE < 3.5 mA
Inrush surge current < 15 A (typical)
Power failure bypass > 55 ms (120 V AC)
> 55 ms (230 V AC)
Input fuse 5 A (slow-blow, internal)
Choice of suitable fuses 6 A ... 16 A (AC: Characteristics B, C, D, K)
Type of protection Transient surge protection
Protective circuit/component Varistor
Output data
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC ±1 %
Setting range of the output voltage 18 V DC ... 29.5 V DC (> 24 V constant capacity)
Nominal output current 5 A (-25°C ... 60°C, UOUT = 24 V DC)
POWER BOOST 7.5 A (-25°C ... 40°C permanent, UOUT = 24 V DC )
SFB technology current reserve 30 A (12 ms)
Derating 60 °C ... 70 °C (2.5%/K)
Connection in parallel Yes, for redundancy and increased capacity
Connection in series Yes
Control deviation < 1 % (change in load, static 10 % ... 90 %)
< 2 % (change in load, dynamic 10 % ... 90 %)
< 0.1 % (change in input voltage ±10 %)
07/21/2015 Page 2 / 10

Technical data
Output data
Residual ripple < 100 mVPP (with nominal values)
Output current 5 A (-25°C ... 60°C, UOUT = 24 V DC)
Output power 120 W
Typical response time < 0.5 s
Maximum power dissipation NO-Load 3W
Power loss nominal load max. 15 W
General
Net weight 0.7 kg
Efficiency > 90 % (for 230 V AC and nominal values)
Insulation voltage input/output 4 kV AC (type test)
2 kV AC (routine test)
Protection class I
> 635000 h (40°C)
Mounting position horizontal DIN rail NS 35, EN 60715
Alignable: 5 mm horizontally, 15 mm next to active components, 50 mm
Assembly instructions
vertically
Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Noise emission EN 55011 (EN 55022)
Low Voltage Directive Conformance with LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard – Electrical equipment of machines EN 60204-1
Standard - Electrical safety IEC 60950-1/VDE 0805 (SELV)
Shipbuilding approval Germanischer Lloyd (EMC 2), ABS, LR, RINA, NK, DNV, BV
Standard – Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
and their assembly into electrical power installations
Standard – Safety extra-low voltage IEC 60950-1 (SELV) and EN 60204-1 (PELV)
Standard - Safe isolation DIN VDE 0100-410
Standard – Protection against shock currents, basic requirements for
EN 50178
protective separation in electrical equipment
Standard – Limitation of mains harmonic currents EN 61000-3-2
Standard - Equipment safety BG (design tested)
Approval - requirement of the semiconductor industry with regard to mains
SEMI F47-0706 Compliance Certificate
voltage dips
Information technology equipment - safety (CB scheme) CB Scheme
Rail applications EN 50121-4
UL approvals UL Listed UL 508
UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60950-1
UL ANSI/ISA-12.12.01 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D (Hazardous
Location)
07/21/2015 Page 3 / 10

Technical data
General
Surge voltage category III
DeviceNet approval DeviceNet™ Power Supply Conformance Tested
Connection data, input

Connection method Pluggable screw connection
Screw thread M3
Connection data, output

Connection method Pluggable screw connection
Screw thread M3
Signaling
Output name DC OK active
Output description UOUT > 0.9 x UN: High signal
Maximum inrush current 20 mA (short-circuit resistant)
Continuous load current ≤ 20 mA
Status display UOUT > 0.9 x UN: "DC OK" LED green
Note on status display UOUT < 0.9 x UN: Flashing "DC OK" LED
IOUT < IN: LED ON
07/21/2015 Page 4 / 10

Technical data
Signaling
Tightening torque, min 0.5 Nm
Tightening torque max 0.6 Nm
Screw thread M3
Output name DC OK floating
Output description Relay contact, UOUT > 0.9 x UN: Contact closed
Maximum switching voltage 30 V AC/DC
24 V DC
Maximum inrush current ≤ 0.5 A
1A
Continuous load current ≤1A
Status display UOUT > 0.9 x UN: "DC OK" LED green
Note on status display UOUT < 0.9 x UN: Flashing "DC OK" LED
Output name POWER BOOST, active
Output description IOUT < IN: High signal
Output voltage + 24 V DC
Maximum inrush current 20 mA (short-circuit resistant)
Continuous load current ≤ 20 mA
Status display IOUT > IN: LED "BOOST" yellow
Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27040702

eCl@ss 4.1 27040702
eCl@ss 5.0 27049002
eCl@ss 5.1 27049002
eCl@ss 6.0 27049002
eCl@ss 7.0 27049002
eCl@ss 8.0 27049002
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001039

ETIM 3.0 EC001039
ETIM 4.0 EC000599
ETIM 5.0 EC002540
07/21/2015 Page 5 / 10

Classifications
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211502

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121004
UNSPSC 11 39121004
UNSPSC 12.01 39121004
UNSPSC 13.2 39121004
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
CSA / UL Recognized / UL Listed / cUL Recognized / LR / GL / BV / DNV / ABS / NK / RINA / IECEE CB Scheme / SEMI F47 / Bauartgeprüft / EAC /
DeviceNet / EAC / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed
Approvals submitted
Approval details
CSA
UL Recognized
UL Listed
cUL Recognized
07/21/2015 Page 6 / 10

Approvals
LR
GL
BV
DNV
ABS
NK
RINA
IECEE CB Scheme
SEMI F47
Bauartgeprüft
EAC
DeviceNet
EAC
cULus Recognized
Accessories
Accessories
Assembly adapter
07/21/2015 Page 7 / 10

Accessories
Assembly adapters - UTA 107/30 - 2320089
Universal DIN rail adapter

Assembly adapters - UWA 182/52 - 2938235
Universal wall adapter

Assembly adapters - QUINT-PS-ADAPTERS7/1 - 2938196
Assembly adapter for QUINT-PS... power supply on S7-300 rail

Fan
Fan - QUINT-PS/FAN/4 - 2320076
The fan for QUINT-PS/1AC and .../3AC can be mounted without the need for tools or other accessories. By using the fan,
optimum cooling is ensured at high ambient temperatures or if the mounting position is rotated.

Redundancy module
Diode - QUINT-DIODE/12-24DC/2X20/1X40 - 2320157
DIN rail diode module 12-24 V DC/2x20 A or 1x40 A. Uniform redundancy up to the consumer.

07/21/2015 Page 8 / 10

Accessories
Redundancy module, with protective coating - QUINT-ORING/24DC/2X10/1X20 - 2320173
Active QUINT redundancy module for DIN rail mounting with ACB technology (Active Current Balancing) and monitoring
functions, input: 24 V DC, output: 24 V DC/2 x 10 A or 1 x 20 A, including mounted universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107/30

Redundancy module - TRIO-DIODE/12-24DC/2X10/1X20 - 2866514
Redundancy module with function monitoring, 12-24 V DC, 2x 10 A, 1x 20 A

Thermomagnetic device circuit breakers
Thermomagnetic device circuit breaker - CB TM1 1A SFB P - 2800836
Thermomagnetic device circuit breaker, 1-pos., tripping characteristic SFB, 1 PDT contact, plug for base element.

Thermomagnetic device circuit breaker - CB TM1 2A SFB P - 2800837
Thermomagnetic device circuit breaker, 1-pos., tripping characteristic SFB, 1 PDT contact, plug for base element.

Drawings
07/21/2015 Page 9 / 10

Block diagram
L (+)
active
N (-) PFC
DC OK
I < IN
13
14
Phoenix Contact 2015 © - all rights reserved

http://www.phoenixcontact.com
07/21/2015 Page 10 / 10
X20 module • Analog input modules • AI2632
20.4 AI2632
20.4.1 General information
The AI2632 module is equipped with two inputs with 16 bit digital converter resolution. Using
different connection terminal points you can select between the current and voltage signal.
The AI2632 is designed for the X20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e. g. for logistical reasons),
the 12-pin terminal block can also be used.
• 2 analog inputs
• Both current and voltage signals are possible
• 16-bit digital converter resolution
• Simultaneous input conversion
• Very fast conversion time
20.4.2 Order data
Model number Short description Figure

Analog input module
X20AI2632 X20 analog input module, 2 inputs, ±10 V / 0 to 20 mA,
16 bit resolution, configurable input filter
Required accessories
X20TB06 X20 terminal block, 6-pin, 24 V coded
X20 module
X20TB12 X20 terminal block, 12-pin, 24 V coded
Chapter 4
X20BM11 X20 bus module, 24 V coded, internal I/O supply is
interconnected
Table 481: AI2632 - Order data
X20 System User's Manual V 2.10 761

20.4.3 Technical data
Product ID AI2632
Short description
I/O module 2 analog inputs, ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA
Analog inputs Voltage Current
Input ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA, using different connection terminal points
Input type Differential input
Digital converter resolution ±15-bit 15-bit
Conversion time 50 µs for all inputs
Output format UINT
Input impedance in signal range 20 M -
Load - <400 
Maximum error at 25°C
Gain 0.08% 1) 0.08% 1)
Offset 0.01% 2) 0.02% 3)
Input protection Protection against wiring with supply voltage
General information
Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status
Diagnostics
Module run/error Yes, with status LED and software status
Inputs Yes, with status LED and software status
Channel type Yes, with software status
Electrical isolation
Channel - Bus Yes
Channel - Channel No
Power consumption
Bus 0.01 W
I/O internal 1.2 W
Certification CE, C-UL-US, GOST-R
Operating conditions
Operating temperature
Horizontal installation 0°C to +55°C
Vertical installation 0°C to +50°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mounting orientation Horizontal or vertical
Installation at altitudes above sea level
0 - 2000 m No derating
>2000 m Reduction of ambient temperature by 0.5°C per 100 m
Protection type IP20
Storage and transport conditions
Temperature -25°C to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Table 482: AI2632 - Technical data
762 X20 System User's Manual V 2.10

Product ID AI2632
Mechanical characteristics
Spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm
Comment Order terminal block 1x X20TB06 or X20TB12 separately
Order bus module 1x X20BM11 separately
Table 482: AI2632 - Technical data (cont.)

1) Based on the current measurement value.
2) Refers to the 20 V measurement range.
3) Refers to the 20 mA measurement range.
20.4.4 Additional technical data
Product ID AI2632
Analog inputs Voltage Current
Permitted input signal Max. ±30 V Max. ±50 mA
Output format INT $8001 - $7FFF / 1 LSB = $0001 = 305.176 µV INT $0000 - $7FFF / 1 LSB = $0001 = 610.352 nA
Output of the digital value during overload
Above upper limit $7FFF $7FFF
Below lower limit $8001 $0000
Conversion method SAR
Input filter Hardware - low pass 3rd order / cut-off frequency 10 kHz
Max gain drift 0.01%/°C 1) 0.01%/°C 1)
Max offset drift 0.001%/°C 2) 0.002%/°C 3)
Common-mode rejection
X20 module
Chapter 4
DC 70 dB
50 Hz 70 dB
Synchronized zone ±12 V
Cross-talk between channels -70 dB
Non-linearity <0.01% 2) <0.015% 3)
Isolation voltage betw. channel and bus 500 Veff
General information
B&R ID code $1BA0
Table 483: AI2632 - Additional technical data

1) Based on the current measurement value.
2) Refers to the 20 V measurement range.
3) Refers to the 20 mA measurement range.

20.4.5 Status LEDs
Figure LED Color Status Description

r Green Off Module supply not connected
Single flash Reset mode
Blinking Preoperational mode
On RUN mode
e Red Off Module supply not connected or everything is OK
On Error or reset state
Double flash System error:
• Violation of the scan time
• Synchronization error
1-2 Green Off Open connection or sensor is disconnected
On The analog/digital converter is running, value is OK
Table 484: AI2632 - Status indicators
20.4.6 Pin assignments
r e
X20 AI 2632
1 2
AI + 1 I AI + 2 I
AI + 1 U AI + 2 U
AI - 1 U/I AI - 2 U/I
Figure 353: AI2632 - Pin assignments

20.4.7 Connection example
To prevent disturbances, the following modules must be separated by at least one module:
• Bus receiver BR9300

• Supply module PS3300/PS3310
• CPUs
Voltage AI Current
measurement measurement
X20 module
Chapter 4
+24 VDC +24 VDC
GND GND
Figure 354: AI2632 - Connection example

20.4.8 Input circuit diagram
Current/Voltage switch
PTC
AI + x I
Shunt
AI + x U Input value
A/D
converter
I/O status
AI - x U/I
LED (green)
Figure 355: AI2632 - Input circuit diagram
20.4.9 Channel type
Each channel is capable of either current or voltage signals.
Differentiation takes place through several connection terminal points and through an integrated
switch in the module. The switch is automatically activated by the module depending on the
specified configuration.
Code Input signal

0 Voltage signal (default)
1 Current signal
20.4.10 Deactivating channels
Channels that are not needed can be disabled.

20.4.11 Sampling time
The sampling time during which all inputs are changed can be specified for the module. The
configurable range lies between 50 µs and 10 ms.
20.4.12 Input filter
The module has an input filter that can be configured separately for each individual channel. Up
to four first order low-passes can be connected in succession. Number and cut-off frequency
can be set:
• Number: 1 to 4 (default: 1)
• Cut-off frequency:
- Configurable in: Hz
- Lower limit value: 1 Hz
- Upper limit value: the upper limit value is defined by the sampling theory.
- Default value: 500 Hz
20.4.13 Scaling
The raw A/D converter data and the filtered A/D converter data are compared. The system
measure and the user measure are grouped internally as a k/d pair to optimize the execution
time. To preserve data integrity, the values are handled internally as 32 bit fix point values in
16.16 format. Gain and offset can be specified:
• Gain: -2147483648 to +2147483647 (default: 65536, means 1.0 1) )
X20 module
Chapter 4
• Offset: -2147483648 to +2147483647 (default: 0)
20.4.14 Limit values
The user can specify an upper and lower limit value.
• Upper limit value: -32768 to +32767 (default: +32767)

• Lower limit value: -32768 to +32767 (default: -32768)
When activated, the input signals are monitored to see if the limit values are exceeded. The
defined limit values are used for this. If the analog value goes beyond the defined range, then it
is limited to the upper or lower limit value.
The result of the signal check is displayed in a corresponding status bit. If necessary, the
counters will be incremented by one if the value falls outside the range.
1) The configured valued is handled internally as a 32 bit fix point value in 16.16 format.

20.4.15 Minimum and maximum input values
The system stores the minimum and maximum values between two trigger events. The function
is started by the corresponding trigger edge. The following edges are evaluated depending on
the configuration:
• Positive edge
• Negative edge
• Positive and negative edge
The trigger counter counts valid trigger events. In case trigger events occur faster than the
sampling cycle, the triggering will become invalid (trigger error counter is incremented).
The following example should clarify how the minimum and maximum input values are recorded:
Input value
Trigger (triggered by user)
Scanning of value
Signal
Max2 Max3
Max1
Min1
Min2
Min3
Triggera Triggerb Triggerc Triggerd t
Trigger Event Description

Triggera The function is started. The system notes the minimum and maximum value of the input signal. The
Min/Max values registered by the status bit must be ignored after the initial start.
Triggerb The minimum value (Min1) and the maximum value (Max1) between Triggera and Triggerb are given
to the register and the new cycle is started.
A status bit informs the user as soon as the values are valid.
Triggerc The minimum value (Min2) and the maximum value (Max2) between Triggerb and Triggerc are given to
the register and the new cycle is started.
Triggerd The minimum value (Min3) and the maximum value (Max3) between Triggerc and Triggerd are given to
the register and the new cycle is started.

20.4.16 Trace with oscilloscope function
The module has a trace function. The trace function can be individually activated for each
channel. It is started by the corresponding trigger edge. The following edges are evaluated
depending on the configuration:
• Positive edge
• Negative edge
• Positive and negative edge
The module has a FIFO buffer for recording analog values. The configurable range lies between
1 and 8192 recordings (default: 1024). The available memory is distributed evenly among the
activated channels. As a result, the actual number of possible recordings per channel depends
on the number of channels activated for trace. The amount of FIFO memory area available can
be called up.
Number of activated channels Recordings per channel

1 8192
2 4096
A relative start or stop position can be defined for the trace recording based on the trigger event.
Two priorities are available for selection:
• Default
• Trace priority higher than X2X Link communication
A separate information and status register is available for checking the trace recording.
X20 module
Chapter 4
20.4.17 B&R ID code
Code for module identification ($1BA0).
20.4.18 Minimum cycle time
The minimum cycle time is the minimum time needed for the bus cycle to be shut down without
a communication error or malfunction occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles reduce
the idle time needed for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
Minimum cycle time

Default priority 200 µs
High priority with trace function 300 µs

20.4.19 Minimum I/O update time
There is no limitation and no dependency on the bus cycle time. The I/O update time is defined
using the "Sampling time" register. The fastest possible sampling time depends on the number
of channels to be converted and the configuration.

X20AI4622
X20AI4622
1 General information
The X20AI4622 module is equipped with four inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is
possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
• 4 analog inputs
• Either current or voltage signal possible
• 13-bit digital converter resolution
2 Order data
Analog input modules
X20AI4622 X20 analog input module, 4 inputs, ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20
mA, 13-bit resolution, configurable input filter
Bus modules
X20BM11 X20 bus module, 24 V keyed, internal I/O supply continuous
Terminal blocks
X20TB12 X20 terminal block, 12-pin, 24 V keyed
Table 1: X20AI4622 - Order data
Data sheet V 3.00 1

X20AI4622
3 Technical data
Product ID X20AI4622
Short description
I/O module 4 analog inputs ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
General information
B&R ID code 0x1BAA
Diagnostics
Module run/error Yes, using status LED and software
Inputs Yes, using status LED and software
Channel type Yes, using software
Power consumption
Bus 0.01 W
Internal I/O 1.1 W 1)
Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- -
tors (resistive) [W]
Channel - Bus Yes
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2 Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GOST-R Yes
Analog inputs
Input ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA, via different connection terminal points
Input type Differential input
Digital converter resolution
Voltage ±12-bit
Current 12-bit
Conversion time 400 µs for all inputs
Output format INT
Output format
Voltage INT 0x8001 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0008 = 2.441 mV
Current INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0008 = 4.883 µA
Input impedance in signal range
Voltage 20 MΩ
Current -
Load
Voltage -
Current <400 Ω
Input protection Protection against wiring with supply voltage
Permitted input signal
Voltage Max. ±30 V
Current Max. ±50 mA
Output of the digital value during overload
Below lower limit
Voltage 0x8001
Current 0x0000
Above upper limit
Voltage 0x7FFF
Current 0x7FFF
Conversion procedure SAR
Input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 kHz
Max. error at 25°C
Voltage
Gain 0.08% 2)
Offset 0.015% 3)
Current
Gain 0 to 20 mA = 0.08% / 4 to 20 mA = 0.1% 2)
Offset 0 to 20 mA = 0.03% / 4 to 20 mA = 0.16% 4)
Max. gain drift
Voltage 0.006 %/°C 2)
Current 0 to 20 mA = 0.009 %/°C
4 to 20 mA = 0.0113 %/°C 2)
Max. offset drift
Voltage 0.002 %/°C 3)
Current 0 to 20 mA = 0.004 %/°C
4 to 20 mA = 0.005 %/°C 4)
DC 70 dB
50 Hz 70 dB
Table 2: X20AI4622 - Technical data
2 Data sheet V 3.00

X20AI4622
Product ID X20AI4622
Common-mode range ±12 V
Crosstalk between channels <-70 dB
Non-linearity
Voltage <0.025% 3)
Current <0.05% 4)
Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 Veff
Mounting orientation
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Installation at altitudes above sea level
0 to 2000 m No limitations
EN 60529 protection IP20
Environmental conditions
Temperature
Operation
Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C
Vertical installation -25 to 50°C
Derating -
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Note Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately
Order 1x X20BM11 bus module separately
Table 2: X20AI4622 - Technical data

1) To reduce power dissipation, B&R recommends bridging unused inputs on the terminals or configuring them as current signals.
2) Based on the current measured value.
3) Based on the 20 V measurement range.
4) Based on the 20 mA measurement range.
4 LED status indicators

r Green Off No power to module
Single flash RESET mode
Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode
On RUN mode
e Red Off No power to module or everything OK
On Error or reset status
e+r Red on / Green single flash Invalid firmware
1-4 Green Off Open line1) or sensor is disconnected
Blinking Input signal overflow or underflow
On Analog/digital converter running, value OK
Table 3: LED status indicators

1) Open line detection only possible when measuring voltage.
Data sheet V 3.00 3

X20AI4622
5 Pinout
r e
X20 AI 4622
1 2
3 4
AI + 1 I AI + 2 I
AI + 1 U AI + 2 U
AI - 1 U/I AI - 2 U/I
AI + 3 I AI + 4 I
AI + 3 U AI + 4 U
AI - 3 U/I AI - 4 U/I
Figure 1: Pinout
6 Connection example
Voltage AI Current
measurement measurement
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Figure 2: Connection example
7 Input circuit diagram

Current/Voltage switching
PTC
AI + x I
Shunt
AI + x U Input value
A/D
converter
I/O status
AI - x U/I
LED (green)
Figure 3: Input circuit diagram
4 Data sheet V 3.00

X20AI4622
8 Register description
8.1 Function model 0 - Standard
Register Name Data type Read Write
Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic
0 AnalogInput01 INT ●
16 ConfigOutput01 USINT ●
20 ConfigOutput03 INT ●
22 ConfigOutput04 INT ●
30 StatusInput01 USINT ●
8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller

Register Offset1) Name Data type Read Write
0 0 AnalogInput01 INT ●
16 - ConfigOutput01 USINT ●
20 - ConfigOutput03 INT ●
22 - ConfigOutput04 INT ●
30 - StatusInput01 USINT ●
1) The offset specifies the position of the register within the CAN object.
8.3 Analog inputs
The input status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle.
8.4 Analog input values
Name:
AnalogInput01 to AnalogInput04
The analog input value are mapped to this register depending on the configured operating mode.
Data type Value Input signal:
INT -32768 to 32767 Voltage signal -10 to 10 VDC
0 to 32767 Current signal 0 to 20 mA
8.5 Input filter
This module is equipped with a configurable input filter. The minimum cycle time must be >500 μs. Filtering is
disabled for shorter cycle times.
If the input filter is active, then the scan rate for the channels is measured in ms. The time offset between the
channels is 200 μs. The conversion takes place asynchronously to the network cycle.
8.5.1 Input ramp limitation
Input ramp limitation can only take place when a filter is used; the input ramp is limited before filtering takes place.
The amount the input value changes is checked to make sure that specified limits are not exceeded. If the values
are exceeded, the adjusted input value is equal to the old value ± the limit value.
Configurable limit values:
Value Limit value
0 The input value is used without limitation.
1 0x3FFF = 16383
2 0x1FFF = 8191
3 0x0FFF = 4095
4 0x07FF = 2047
5 0x03FF = 1023
6 0x01FF = 511
7 0x00FF = 255
Data sheet V 3.00 5

X20AI4622
Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function
of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance.
Example 1
The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000. The diagram shows the adjusted input value with the following settings:
Input ramp limitation = 4 = 0x07FF = 2047
Filter level = 2
Input value
Internally adjusted input value before filtering
17000
8000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t [ms]
Input jump
Figure 4: Adjusted input value for input jump

Example 2
A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the adjusted input value with the following settings:
Input ramp limitation = 4 = 0x07FF = 2047
Filter level = 2
Input value
Internally adjusted input value before filtering
16000
Disturbance (spike)
8000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t [ms]
Figure 5: Adjusted input value for disturbance
8.5.2 Filter level
A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual
analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
Filtering takes place after input ramp limitation.
Formula for calculating the input value:
Value Old Input value
Value New = Value Old - +
Filter level Filter level
6 Data sheet V 3.00

X20AI4622
Adjustable filter levels:

Value Filter level
0 Filter switched off
1 Filter level 2
2 Filter level 4
3 Filter level 8
4 Filter level 16
5 Filter level 32
6 Filter level 64
7 Filter level 128
The following examples show how filtering works in the event of an input jump or disturbance.
Example 1
The input value jumps from 8,000 to 16,000. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings:
Input ramp limitation = 0
Filter level = 2 or 4
Input value
Calculated value: Filter level 2
16000
8000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t [ms]
Input jump
Figure 6: Calculated value during input jump

Example 2
A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings:
Input ramp limitation = 0
Filter level = 2 or 4
Input value
16000
Disturbance (spike)
8000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t [ms]
Figure 7: Calculated value during disturbance
Data sheet V 3.00 7

X20AI4622
8.6 Configuring the input filter
Name:
ConfigOutput01
This register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter.
Data type Value
USINT See bit structure.
Bit structure:
Bit Description Value Information
0-2 Defines the filter level 000 Filter switched off
001 Filter level 2
010 Filter level 4
011 Filter level 8
100 Filter level 16
101 Filter level 32
110 Filter level 64
111 Filter level 128
3 Reserved 0
4-6 Defines the input ramp limitation 000 The input value is used without limitation
001 Limit value = 0x3FFF (16383)
100 Limit value = 0x07FF (2047)
7 Reserved 0
8.7 Channel type
Name:
ConfigOutput02
This register can be used to define the type and range of signal measurement.
Each channel is capable of handling either current or voltage signals. This differentiation is made using multiple
connection terminal points and an integrated switch in the module. The switch is automatically activated by the
module depending on the specified configuration. The following input signals can be set:
• ±10 V voltage signal (default)
• 0 to 20 mA current signal
• 4 to 20 mA current signal
Data type Value
Bit structure:
0 Channel 1 0 Voltage signal
1 Current signal, measurement range corresponding to bit 4
... ...
3 Channel 4 0 Voltage signal
1 Current signal, measurement range corresponding to bit 7
4 Channel 1: Current measurement range 0 0 to 20 mA current signal
1 4 to 20 mA current signal
... ...
7 Channel 4: Current measurement range 0 0 to 20 mA current signal
1 4 to 20 mA current signal
8 Data sheet V 3.00

X20AI4622
8.8 Limit values
The input signal is monitored at the upper and lower limit values. These must be defined according to the operating
mode:
Limit value (default) Voltage signal ±10 V Current signal 0 to 20 mA Current signal 4 to 20 mA
Upper maximum limit value +10 V +32767 (0x7FFF) 20 mA +32767 (0x7FFF) 20 mA +32767 (0x7FFF)
Lower minimum limit value -10 V -32767 (0x8001) 0 mA 01) 4 mA 02)
1) The analog value is limited down to 0.

2) The analog value is limited down to 0 at currents <4 mA. The status bit for the lower limit is set.
Other limit values can be defined if necessary. Limit values are valid for all channels and activated automatically
by writing to the limit value registers. From this point on, the analog values will be monitored and limited according
to the new limits. The results of monitoring are displayed in the status register.
Examples of limit value settings
Application case Limit value settings
Current signal: 4 to 20 mA A negative limit value must be configured in order to measure values <4 mA with a current signal of 4 to
20 mA: 0 mA is equal to a value of -8192 (0xE000).
Mixed voltage and current signal The configured limit values are valid for all channels. Mixed operation (voltage and current signal) there-
fore requires a compromise.
The following configuration has proven effective:
Upper limit = +32767, lower limit = -32767
This makes it possible to also measure negative voltage values. A lower limit value of 0 would limit the
voltage value to 0.
Current signal on all channels All channels are configured for measuring current. The limit value setting in Automation Studio is not
adjusted automatically. That means that +32767 is configured as the upper limit value and -32767 as the
lower limit value. The necessary changes must be made by the user, e.g. lower limit value = 0
8.8.1 Lower limit value
Name:
ConfigOutput03
This register can be used to configure the lower limit for analog values. If the analog value goes below the limit
value, it is frozen at this value and the corresponding error status bit is set.
Data type Value
INT -32768 to 32767
Information:
• The default value of -32768 corresponds to the minimum default value of -10 VDC.
• When configured as 0 to 20 mA, this value should be set to 0.
• When configured as 4 to 20 mA, this value can be set to -8192 (corresponds to 0 mA) in order
to display values <4 mA.
Information:
Keep in mind that this setting applies to all channels!
8.8.2 Upper limit value
Name:
ConfigOutput04
This register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit
value, it is frozen at this value and the corresponding error status bit is set.
Data type Value
INT -32768 to 32767
Information:
The default value of 32767 corresponds to the maximum default value of 20 mA or +10 VDC.
Information:
Keep in mind that this setting applies to all channels!
Data sheet V 3.00 9

X20AI4622
8.9 Input status
Name:
StatusInput01
This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message.
The following states are monitored depending on the settings:
Value Voltage signal ±10 V Current signal 0 to 20 mA Current signal 4 to 20 mA
0 No error No error No error
1 Lower limit value exceeded Default setting Lower limit value exceeded
The input value has a lower limit of 0x0000. Un-
derflow monitoring is therefore not necessary.
After lower limit value change
The input value is limited to the configured val-
ue. The status bit is set when the lower limit val-
ue is passed.
2 Upper limit value exceeded Upper limit value exceeded Upper limit value exceeded
3 Open line - -
Data type Value

Bit structure:
0-1 Channel 1 00 No error
01 Lower limit value exceeded
10 Upper limit value exceeded
11 Open line
... ...
11 Open line
Limiting the analog value

In addition to the status information, the analog value is set to the values listed below by default when an error
occurs. The analog value is limited to the new values if the limit values were changed.
Error status Digital value for error (default values)
Open line +32767 (0x7FFF)
Upper limit value exceeded +32767 (0x7FFF)
Lower limit value exceeded -32767 (0x8001)
Invalid value -32768 (0x8000)
8.10 Minimum cycle time
The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring.
It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and
acyclic commands.
Minimum cycle time
Inputs without filtering 100 µs
Inputs with filtering 500 µs
8.11 Minimum I/O update time
The minimum I/O update time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced while still allowing an I/O update to
take place in each cycle.
Minimum I/O update time
Inputs without filtering 300 µs for all inputs
Inputs with filtering 1 ms
10 Data sheet V 3.00

X20AT2222
X20AT2222
The module is equipped with two inputs for PT100/PT1000 resistance temperature measurement.
This module is designed for X20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.g. for logistical reasons), the 12-pin terminal
block can also be used.
• 2 inputs for resistance temperature measurement
• For PT100 and PT1000
• Configurable sensor type per channel
• Direct resistance measurement
• Configurable 2- or 3- wire connections per module
• Configurable filter time
2 Order data
Temperature measurement
X20AT2222 X20 temperature input module, 2 inputs for resistance measure-
ment, PT100, PT1000, resolution 0.1°C, 3-wire connections
Bus modules
X20BM11 Bus module, 24 VDC keyed, internal I/O supply continuous
Terminal blocks
X20TB06 X20 terminal block, 6-pin, 24 VDC keyed
Table 1: X20AT2222 - Order data
Data sheet V 3.01 1

X20AT2222
3 Technical data
Product ID X20AT2222
Short description
I/O module 2 inputs for PT100 or PT1000 resistance temperature measurement
General information
B&R ID code 0x1BA6
Diagnostics
Inputs Yes, using status LED and software
Power consumption
Bus 0.01 W
Internal I/O 1.1 W
Channel - Bus Yes
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Temperature inputs resistance measurement
Input Resistance measurement with constant current supply for 2- or 3-wire connections
Digital converter resolution 16-bit
Filter time Configurable between 1 ms and 66.7 ms
Conversion time
1 channel 20 ms with 50 Hz filter
2 channels 80 ms with 50 Hz filter
Conversion procedure Sigma Delta
Output format INT or UINT for resistance measurement
Sensor
Sensor type Configurable per channel
PT100 -200 to 850°C
PT1000 -200 to 850°C
Resistance measurement range 0.1 to 4500 Ω / 0.05 to 2250 Ω
Input filter 1st-order low pass / cutoff frequency 500 Hz
Sensor standard IEC/EN 60751
Common-mode range >0.7 V
Linearization method Internal
Measuring current 250 µA ±1.25%
Reference 4530 Ω ±0.1%
Permitted input signal Short-term max. ±30 V
Max. error at 25°C
Gain 0.037% 1)
Offset 0.0015% 2)
Max. gain drift 0.004% per °C 1)
Max. offset drift 0.00015% per °C 2)
Non-linearity <0.0010% 2)
Crosstalk between channels <-93 dB
Temperature sensor resolution
PT100 1 LSB = 0.1°C
PT1000 1 LSB = 0.1°C
Resistance measurement resolution
G=1 0.1 Ω
G=2 0.05 Ω
50 Hz >80 dB
DC >95 dB
Standardized value range for resistance measure-
ment
G=1 0.1 to 4500.0 Ω
G=2 0.05 to 2250.0 Ω
Temperature sensor standardization
PT100 -200 to 850°C
PT1000 -200 to 850°C
Table 2: X20AT2222 - Technical data
2 Data sheet V 3.01

X20AT2222
Product ID X20AT2222
Temperature measurement monitoring
Range exceeded (neg.) 0x8001
Above upper range limit 0x7FFF
Open line 0x7FFF
General error 0x8000
Open inputs 0x7FFF
Resistance measurement monitoring
Above upper range limit 0xFFFF
Open line 0xFFFF
General error 0xFFFF
Open inputs 0xFFFF
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Installation at elevations above sea level
Temperature
Operation
Derating -
Relative humidity
Note Order 1x X20TB06 or X20TB12 terminal block separately
Table 2: X20AT2222 - Technical data

1) Based on the current resistance value.
2) Based on the entire resistance measurement range.
Data sheet V 3.01 3

X20AT2222

For a description of the various operating modes, see the X20 user's manual, chapter 2 "System characteristics",
section "re-LEDs".
On RUN mode
Single flash Warning/Error on an I/O channel. Overflow or underflow of the analog inputs.
1-2 Green Off The input is switched off
Blinking Overflow, underflow or open line
On Analog/digital converter running, value OK
5 Pinout
Channels that are not being used should be disabled.
r e
X20 AT 2222
1 2
Sensor + 1 Sensor + 2
Sense - 1 Sense - 2
Sensor - 1 Sensor - 2
AT
3-wire 2-wire
connection connection
Sensor 2
+ +
Sensor 1
_
_
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
4 Data sheet V 3.01

X20AT2222

2-wire connections
250 µA
Channel 1
Sensor + x
Channel 2
Multiplexer
A/D Input value
converter
I/O status
Channel 1
Sense - x
Channel 2
LED (green)
Switch closed for 2-wire
connections
3-wire connections
250 µA 250 µA
Channel 1
Sensor + x
Channel 2 Multiplexer
A/D Input value

converter
I/O status
Channel 1
Sense - x
Channel 2
PTC
Sensor - x LED (green)
Data sheet V 3.01 5

X20AT2222
8.1 Function model 0 - "3-wire connections"
and function model 1 - "2-wire connections"
For this module, the connection type is selected using function models 0 and 1.
Function model Connection type
0 3-wire connections (standard)
1 2-wire connections
The registers used are identical for both function models:

0 Temperature01 INT ●
Resistor01 UINT
2 Temperature02 INT ●
Resistor02 UINT
28 IOCycleCounter USINT ●
30 StatusInput01 USINT ●
8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller

0 0 Temperature01 INT ●
0 Resistor01 UINT
2 2 Temperature02 INT ●
2 Resistor02 UINT
28 - IOCycleCounter USINT ●
30 - StatusInput01 USINT ●
1) The offset specifies the position of the register within the CAN object.
6 Data sheet V 3.01

X20AT2222
8.3 Analog inputs
This module stores converted analog values in the registers. Different resistance or temperature measurements
will result in different value ranges and data types.
Information:
Operating channels outside the specification can have an effect on neighboring channels.
8.4 Analog input values
Name:
Temperature01 to Temperature02
Resistor01 to Resistor02
The analog input values are mapped to this register depending on the configured operating mode.
Data type Digital value Input signal
INT -2000 to +8500 (for -200.0°C to +850.0°C) Sensor type PT100
-2000 to +8500 (for -200.0°C to +850.0°C) Sensor type PT1000
UINT 1 to 45000 (resolution 0.1 Ω) Resistance measurement 0.1 Ω to 4500 Ω
1 to 45000 (resolution 0.05 Ω) Resistance measurement 0.05 Ω to 2250 Ω
In order for the user to always be supplied with a defined output value, the following must be taken into consid-
eration:
• Up to the first conversion, 0x8000 is output.
• After switching the sensor type, 0x8000 is output until the first conversion.
• If the input is not switched on, 0x8000 is output.
8.5 Timing
The timing for acquiring measurement values is determined by the converter hardware. All switched-on inputs are
converted during each conversion cycle and transferred halfway through the X2X Link cycle.
8.6 Conversion time
The conversion time for the channels depends on their use. For the formulas listed in the table, "n" corresponds
to the number of channels that are switched on.
Channel uses Conversion time
1 channel 1 ⋅ Filter time
n channels with the same sensor type n ⋅ (20 ms + Filter time)
n channels with different sensor types n ⋅ (20 ms + 2 ⋅ Filter time)
8.7 Reduced update time
Any inputs that are not needed can be switched off, which reduces the I/O update time. Inputs can also be only
switched off temporarily.
The time saved is equal to:
Time saved = 2 ⋅ 20 ms + Filter time
The filter time is the conversion time for the remaining channels.
Examples
Inputs are filtered using a 60 Hz filter.
Example 1 Example 2
Switched on inputs 1 1-2
Conversion time 16.7 ms 73.4 ms
Data sheet V 3.01 7

X20AT2222
8.8 Input filter
Name:
ConfigOutput01
This register can be used to configure the filter time for all analog inputs.
Data type Value Filters Filter time
USINT 0 15 Hz 66.7 ms
1 25 Hz 40 ms
2 30 Hz 33.3 ms
3 50 Hz 20 ms
4 60 Hz 16.7 ms
5 100 Hz 10 ms
6 500 Hz 2 ms
7 1000 Hz 1 ms
8.9 Sensor configuration
Name:
ConfigOutput02
This register can be used to configure the sensor type for individual channels.
This module is designed for temperature and resistance measurement. The sensor type must be specified because
of the different calibration values for temperature and resistance.
The default setting for all channels is ON. To save time, individual channels can be switched off (see "Reduced
update time").
Data type Value
Bit structure:
Bit Name Value Information
0-3 Channel 1 0000 - 0001 Reserved
0010 Sensor type PT100
0100 Reserved
0101 Resistance measurement 0.1 Ω to 4500 Ω
1111 Channel disabled
4-7 Channel 2 0000 - 0001 Reserved
0100 Reserved
1111 Channel disabled
8 Data sheet V 3.01

X20AT2222
8.10 Input status
Name:
StatusInput01
This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message.
Data type Value
Bit structure:
11 Open line
11 Open line
4-7 0
Limiting the analog value

In addition to the status information, the analog value is set to the values listed below by default when an error
occurs.
Error status Temperature measurement Resistance measurement
Digital value for error Digital value for error
Open line +32767 (0x7FFF) 65535 (0xFFFF)
Upper limit value exceeded +32767 (0x7FFF) 65535 (0xFFFF)
Lower limit value exceeded -32767 (0x8001) 0 (0x0000)
Invalid value -32768 (0x8000)1) 65535 (0xFFFF)
+32767 (0x7FFF)2)
65535 (0xFFFF)3)
1) Default value or channel was disabled in the I/O configuration.
2) After switching off the channel during operation.
3) Value in function model 254 - Bus controller.
8.11 I/O cycle counter
Name:
IOCycleCounter
The cyclic counter increases after all input data has been updated.
Data type Value Information
USINT 0 to 255 Repeating counter
non-cyclic commands.
Minimum cycle time
100 μs
1 input Equal to the filter time
2 inputs 2 ⋅ 20 ms + filter time
Data sheet V 3.01 9

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
Compact CPUs are ideal for situations where cycle times in the millisecond range are sufficient and a cost-benefit
analysis plays a decisive role. A range of models with CAN and Ethernet can adapt optimally to all demands. The
result: extremely sleek automation solutions.
• Embedded µP 16 / μP 25 with additional I/O processor
• 100/750 kB User SRAM
• 1 MB / 3 MB User FlashPROM
• X20CP0291 and X20CP0292: Onboard Ethernet
• Only 37.5 mm wide
• No battery
Data sheet V 2.21 1

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
2 Order data
CP0201 CP0291, CP0292
Model number Short description

Compact CPUs
X20CP0201 X20 CPU, compact CPU µP 16, 100 kB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, support of RS232 and CAN
according to compact CPU base, order bus base, power supply module and terminal block sep-
arately
according to compact CPU base, 1 Ethernet interface 100 Base-T, order bus base, power supply
module and terminal block separately
according to compact CPU base, 3 Ethernet interface 750 Base-T, order bus base, power supply
module and terminal block separately
System modules for compact CPUs
X20BB22 X20 compact CPU base, for compact CPU and compact CPU supply module, base for integrated
RS232 interface, X20 connection, X20 locking plates X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 (left and right)
included
X20BB27 X20 compact CPU base, for compact CPU and compact CPU supply module, base for integrated
RS232 and CAN interface, X20 connection, X20 locking plates X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 (left
and right) included
X20PS9500 X20 power supply module for compact and fieldbus CPUs and internal I/O supply, X2X Link
supply
X20PS9502 X20 power supply module for compact and fieldbus and internal I/O supply, X2X Link supply,
supply not electrically isolated
Terminal blocks
X20TB12 X20 terminal block, 12-pin, 24 V keyed
Table 1: X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 - Order data

Model number Included in delivery
X20AC0SL1 X20 locking plate, left
X20AC0SR1 X20 locking plate, right
2 Data sheet V 2.21

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
3 Technical data
Product ID X20CP0201 X20CP0291 X20CP0292
Short description
Interfaces - 1x Ethernet onboard 1x onboard Ethernet
System module CPU
General information
B&R ID code 0x22A2 0x22A4 0x22A6
Status indicators CPU function CPU function, Ethernet
Diagnostics
CPU function Yes, using status LED
Ethernet - Yes, using status LED
Overtemperature - Yes, using software
Power consumption 2.2 W 2.7 W 3.0 W
Temperature sensor No Yes
ACOPOS capability Limited (User PROM) Yes
Visual Components support Limited (User PROM) Yes
PLC - IF2 - Yes
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Controller
Real-time clock 1) Yes, resolution 1 s
Processor
Type Embedded µP 16 Embedded µP 25
Integrated I/O processor Processes I/O data points in the background
Backup battery No
Shortest task class cycle time 4 ms 2 ms
Typical instruction cycle time 0.8 µs 0.5 µs
Permanent variables
Buffer duration >10 years
Memory 2.75 kB FRAM 2)
Standard memory
User PROM 1 MB FlashPROM 3 MB FlashPROM
User RAM 100 kB SRAM 3) 750 kB SRAM 3)
Interfaces
IF2 interface
Signal - Ethernet
Design - 1x shielded RJ45 port
Cable length - Max. 100 m between two stations (segment length)
Transfer rate - 100 Mbit/s
Transmission
Physical interfaces - 100 BASE-TX
Half-duplex - Yes
Full-duplex - No
Autonegotiation - No
Auto-MDI / MDIX - Yes
On base module
X20BB22 4) Compact CPU base module with integrated RS232 interface
X20BB27 5) Compact CPU base module with integrated RS232 and CAN interfaces
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Derating -
Table 2: X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 - Technical data
Data sheet V 2.21 3

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
Product ID X20CP0201 X20CP0291 X20CP0292
Relative humidity
Order 1x X20PS9500 or X20PS9502 power supply module separately
Order 1x X20BB22 or X20BB27 compact CPU base separately
Spacing 6) 37.5+0.2 mm
Table 2: X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 - Technical data

1) The real-time clock is buffered for approx. 1000 hours by a gold foil capacitor. The gold foil capacitor is completely charged after 18 continuous hours of
operation.
2) This FRAM stores its contents ferroelectrically. A backup battery is therefore not necessary.
3) Not buffered.
4) For technical data, see the data sheet for the X20PS9500 power supply module.
5) For technical data, see the data sheet for the X20PS9502 power supply module.
6) Spacing is based on the width of the X20BB22 or X20BB27 compact CPU base. An X20PS9500 or X20PS9502 power supply module is also always required
for the CPU.

R/E Green On Application running
Red On SERVICE mode
Off 1)
RDY Yellow On SERVICE mode

Off 1)
Table 3: X20CP0201 - Status LEDs

1) BOOT mode: R/E and RDY LEDs are off and the power supply LED is blinking

R/E Green On Application running
Red On SERVICE mode
Off 1)
RDY Yellow On SERVICE mode

Off 1)
L/A Green On A link to the peer station has been established.

Blinking A link to the peer station has been established. Indicates Ethernet activity is
taking place on the bus.
Table 4: X20CP029x - Status LEDs

1) BOOT mode: R/E and RDY LEDs are off and the power supply LED is blinking
4 Data sheet V 2.21

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
5 Operating and connection elements

X20CP0201
LED status indicators
Node number switch

IF1 - RS232
IF3 - CAN bus (with BB27)
Terminal block for CPU

and I/O supply
RS232 connection
CAN bus connection (with BB27)
Switch for CAN bus terminating

resistor on BB27
Figure 1: X20 compact CPUs - Operating elements for X20CP0201
X20CP0291 and X20CP0292
LED status indicators
Node number switch

IF1 - RS232
IF3 - CAN bus (with BB27)
IF2 - Ethernet
Terminal block for CPU
and I/O supply
RS232 connection
CAN bus connection (with BB27)
Switch for CAN bus terminating

resistor on BB27
Figure 2: X20 compact CPUs - Operating elements for X20CP0291 and X20CP0292
Data sheet V 2.21 5

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
6 Node number switches
Figure 3: Node number switches

The node number is set using the two hex switches. The switch setting can be evaluated by the application program
at any time. The operating system only evaluates the switch position when the device is switched on.
Switch position Operating mode Description
0x00 BOOT In this switch position, the operating system can be installed via the RS232 interface configured
as the online interface. User Flash is deleted only after the update begins.
0x01 - 0xFE RUN RUN mode, the application is running.
0xFF Diagnostics Boots the CPU in Diagnostics mode. Program sections in User RAM and User FlashPROM are
not initialized. Following diagnostics mode, the CPU always boots with a cold restart.
Table 5: X20 CPUs - Operating modes
X20CP0201
When used with the X20BB27 bus module, the X20CP0201 has access to a CAN bus interface. The INA2000
station number for CAN is set using the node number switches.
X20CP0291 and X20CP0292
Both of these CPUs are equipped with an onboard Ethernet interface. When used with the X20BB27 bus module,
they also have access to a CAN bus interface.
The number set using the two hex switches defines the INA2000 station number of both the CAN and the Ethernet
interface.
6 Data sheet V 2.21

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
7 Ethernet interface (IF2)
Figure 4: X20 compact CPUs - Ethernet interface for X20CP0291 and X20CP0292
The X20CP0291 and X20CP0292 are equipped with an Ethernet interface. The connection is made using a 100
BASE-T twisted pair RJ45 socket.
Pinout
Interface Pinout
Pin Ethernet
1 RXD Receive data
2 RXD\ Receive data\
1
3 TXD Transmit data
4 Termination
5 Termination
6 TXD\ Transmit data\
Shielded RJ45 port 7 Termination
8 Termination
Table 6: RJ45 port - Pinout
Information about cabling X20 modules with an Ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section
on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
Information:
The Ethernet interface (IF2) is not suited for POWERLINK.
Starting with operating system version 1.07, CPUs have a default IP address.
IP address: 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Data sheet V 2.21 7

X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292
8 Programming the system flash memory

General information
CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. When delivered, the node number switch is set to switch position 0x00
(bootstrap loader mode).
A suitable switch position must be set (0x01 to 0xFE) in order to boot the PLC in RUN mode. Updating the runtime
system is only possible in RUN mode.
Runtime system update
The runtime system can be updated via the programming environment. When updating the runtime system via an
online connection, the following procedure must be carried out:
1. An online runtime system update is only possible if the processor is in RUN mode. For this to be true, the
node number must be set to a value in the range 0x01 to 0xFE.
2. Switch on the power.
3. The runtime system update is performed via the existing online connection. The online connection can be
established via the onboard serial RS232 interface, for example. If a CPU has an Ethernet interface, then it
too can be used to perform the update.
4. Start B&R Automation Studio.
5. Start the update procedure by selecting Online from the Project menu. Select Transfer Automation Run-
time from the pop-up menu. Now follow the instructions given by B&R Automation Studio.
6. A window opens up for setting the runtime system version. The runtime system version is already pre-selected
by the project settings made by the user. The drop-down menu can be used to select one of the runtime
system versions stored in the project. Clicking on the Browse button allows a runtime system version to be
loaded from the hard drive or CD.
Clicking on Next opens a pop-up window that allows the user to select whether modules with target memory
SYSTEM ROM should be transferred during the subsequent runtime system update. If not, these modules
can also be transferred later during an application download.
Clicking on Next opens a dialog box where the user can set the CAN transfer rate, CAN ID and CAN node
number (the CAN node number set here is only relevant if an interface module does not have a CAN node
number switch). The CAN node number must be between decimal 01 and 99. Assigning a unique node
number is especially important with online communication over a CAN network (INA2000 protocol).
7. The update procedure is started by clicking on Next. Update progress is shown in a message box.
Information:
User flash memory is deleted.
8. When the update procedure is complete, the online connection is reestablished automatically.
9. The PLC is now ready for use.
Updating the runtime system is possible not only via an online connection, but also via a CAN network, serial
network (INA2000 protocol) or Ethernet network, depending on the system configuration.
8 Data sheet V 2.21

X20DI4760
X20DI4760
1 General Information
The module is used to transfer digital signals from NAMUR encoders according to EN 60947-5-6. In addition to
NAMUR encoders, normal switches can also be used.
• 4 digital inputs
• Input module for NAMUR encoders
• Open line and short circuit detection
• Each input can be used as a counter input
2 Order data
Digital input modules
X20DI4760 X20 digital input module, 4 NAMUR inputs, 8.05 V
Bus modules
Terminal blocks
Table 1: X20DI4760 - Order data
3 Technical data
Product ID X20DI4760
Short description
I/O module 4 NAMUR inputs, special function
General information
B&R ID code 0x2105
Status indicators I/O function by channel, open line and short circuit detection by channel, operating status, module status
Diagnostics
Short circuit Yes, using status LED and software
Open line Yes, using status LED and software
Power consumption
Bus 0.01 W
Internal I/O 1.5 W
Channel - Bus Yes
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Event counter
Quantity 4
Signal form Symmetric square wave pulse or corresponding minimum pulse duration 1)
Table 2: X20DI4760 - Technical data

Data sheet V 3.01 1
X20DI4760
Evaluation Every positive edge, cyclic counter
Counter size 8-bit
Input frequency
1 input active Max. 1600 Hz
2 inputs active Max. 1100 Hz
NAMUR inputs
Open line detection <350 µA
Input circuit For NAMUR encoders in accordance with EN 60947-5-6
Short circuit detection >7 mA
No load voltage 8.05 V ±0.33%
Switching amplifier internal resistance 1 kΩ ±1%
Max. short circuit current 8.2 mA
Input delay
1 input active ≤310 µs
2 inputs active ≤450 µs
Switching threshold
Range 1.2 mA to 2.1 mA
Switching hysteresis Typ. 300 µA
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Derating See section "Derating"
Relative humidity

1) Minimum pulse duration: t[s] ≥ 1/(2 x fmax[Hz])
2 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI4760
4 Status LEDs
section "re-LEDs".
Image LED Color Status Description
On RUN mode
e Red Off Module supply not connected or everything OK
Single flash Error on at least one channel
1-4 Green Off Open line or input status log. 0
On Short circuit or input status log. 1
1-4 Red Off The sensor is ready for operation
Blinking 1Hz Open line on corresponding channel
On Short circuit on corresponding channel
5 Pinout
r e
X20 DI 4760
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
K1 + K2 +
K1 - K2 -
K3 + K4 +
K3 - K4 -
DI
NAMUR NAMUR
Sensor Sensor
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Data sheet V 3.01 3

X20DI4760

Signal-
evaluation
PTC
Kx +
I/O status Line state Kx -
LED (green) LED (red)
8 Input filter
An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 10.3.1 "ConfigOutput03" on page
7. Disturbance pulses which are shorter than the input delay are suppressed by the input filter.
Input
signal
Time
Signal after tDelay tDelay tDelay

the filter
Time
tDelay ⇒ Input delay
4 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI4760
9 Examples of possible signal generators

Proximity switch
+ input x
Switch in accordance with EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)

- input x
Mechanical contacts (instead of NAMUR encoders)

+ input x
Without open line detection and without short circuit detection

- input x
+ input x
Without open line detection and with short circuit detection

1 kΩ - input x
+ input x
With open line detection and without short circuit detection 10 kΩ
- input x
+ input x
With open line detection and with short circuit detection 10 kΩ

1 kΩ - input x
Table 3: X20DI4760 - Examples of possible signal generators
Data sheet V 3.01 5

X20DI4760
0 DigitalInput USINT ●
DigitalInput01 Bit 0
... ...
4 Counter01 USINT ●
30 StatusInput USINT ●
ShortCircuit01 Bit 0
... ...
OpenLine01 Bit 4
... ...
OpenLine04 Bit 7
16 OutputConfig01 USINT ●
10.2 Function model 254 - Bus Controller

0 0 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 USINT ●
... ...
4 - Counter01 USINT ●
30 - Status of channels 1 to 4 USINT ●
... ...
OpenLine01 Bit 4
... ...
OpenLine04 Bit 7
1) The offset specifies where the register is within the CAN object.
6 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI4760
10.3 Digital inputs
Unfiltered
The input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle.
Filtered
The filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtering
takes place asynchronously to the network in multiples of 200 µs with a network-related jitter of up to 50 µs.
10.3.1 Digital input filter
Name:
ConfigOutput03
This register can be used to specify the filter value for all digital inputs.
The filter value can be configured in steps of 100 μs. It makes sense to enter values in steps of 2, however, since
the input signals are sampled every 200 μs.
Data type Value Filters
USINT 0 No software filter
2 0.2 ms
... ...
250 25 ms - Higher values are limited to this value
10.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 4
Name:
DigitalInput or
DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput04
PowerSupply
The input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 is mapped in this register.
Function model 0 - Standard only:
The "packed inputs" setting in the AS I/O configuration is used to determine whether all of this register's bits
should be set up individually as data points in the AS I/O mapping ("DigitalInput01" through "DigitalInput02" and
"PowerSupply") or whether this register should be displayed as an individual USINT data point ("DigitalInput").
USINT 0 to 15 Packed inputs = on
See bit structure Packed inputs = off or function model <> 0 - Standard
Bit structure:
0 DigitalInput01 0 or 1 Input status - Digital input 1
... ...
4-6 Reserved 0
7 PowerSupply 0 Supply voltage too low
1 Supply voltage >80 VAC
10.4 Positive edge counter on digital inputs
Name:
Counter01 to Counter04
These registers cyclically count the positive edges on the individual channels.
Data type Value
USINT Positive edge counter on channel, cyclic
Data sheet V 3.01 7

X20DI4760
10.5 Status of channels 1 to 4
Name:
StatusInput01 or
ShortCircuit01 to ShortCircuit04
OpenLine01 to OpenLine04
This register indicates whether an open line or overflow has occurred on the individual channels.
The "packed inputs" setting in the AS I/O configuration is used to determine whether all of this register's bits
should be set up individually as data points in the AS I/O mapping ("ShortCircuit01" through "ShortCircuit02" and
"OpenLine01" through "OpenLine02") or whether this register should be displayed as an individual USINT data
point ("DigitalInput").
Bit structure:
0 ShortCircuit01 0 No error
1 Overload on channel 1
... ...
3 ShortCircuit04 0 No error
1 Overload on channel 4
4 OpenLine01 0 No error
1 Open line on channel 1
... ...
7 OpenLine04 0 No error
1 Open line on channel 4
8 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI4760
10.6 Function expansion
Firmware version 802 is offered for hardware variant 7 or higher of the module. This and subsequent firmware
versions provide the user with new configuration possibilities.
10.6.1 Disabling channels and status messages
Name:
OutputConfig01
This register can be used to (de)activate individual channels or just their status responses.
Data type Value
Bit structure:
0 Channel 1 0 Channel enabled
1 Channel disabled
... ...
3 Channel 4 0 Channel enabled
1 Channel disabled
4 Status message - Channel 1 0 Status message activated
1 Status message deactivated
... ...
7 Status message - Channel 4 0 Status message activated
1 Status message deactivated
10.6.2 Replacement values during overload
Name:
OutputConfig02
This register can be used to specify defined replacement values for the individual channels according to the error
situation.
Data type Value
Bit structure:
0 Overload - Channel 1 0 Replacement value when overload is FALSE
1 Replacement value when overload is TRUE
... ...
3 Overload - Channel 4 0 Replacement value when overload is FALSE
1 Replacement value when overload is TRUE
4 Open line - Channel 1 0 Replacement value when open line is FALSE
1 Replacement value when open line is TRUE
... ...
7 Open line - Channel 4 0 Replacement value when open line is FALSE
1 Replacement value when open line is TRUE
Minimum cycle time
Without filtering 100 μs
With filtering 150 μs
Data sheet V 3.01 9

X20DI6371
X20DI6371
1 General Information
The module is equipped with six inputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The X20 6-pin terminal block can be used
for universal 1-line wiring. Two-line wiring can be implemented using the 12-pin terminal block. The inputs on the
module are designed for sink connections.
• 6 digital inputs
• Sink connection
• 2-wire connections
• 24 VDC for sensor supply
• Software input filter can be configured for entire module
• 1-wire connection type with 6-pin terminal block
2 Order data
Digital input modules
X20DI6371 X20 digital input module, 6 inputs, 24 VDC, sink, configurable
input filter, 2-wire connections
Bus modules
Terminal blocks
Table 1: X20DI6371 - Order data
Data sheet V 3.01 1

X20DI6371
3 Technical data
Short description
I/O module 6 digital inputs 24 VDC for 1- or 2-wire connections
General information
B&R ID code 0x1B93
Diagnostics
Power consumption
Bus 0.15 W
Internal I/O 0.88 W
Channel - Bus Yes
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Digital inputs
Nominal voltage 24 VDC
Input voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20%
Input current at 24 VDC Typ. 3.75 mA
Input filter
Hardware ≤100 μs
Software Default 1 ms, can be configured between 0 and 25 ms in 0.2 ms intervals
Connection type 1- or 2-wire connections
Input circuit Sink
Input resistance Typ. 6.4 kΩ
Switching threshold
Low <5 VDC
High >15 VDC
Sensor supply
Voltage Module supply minus voltage drop for short circuit protection
Voltage drop for short circuit protection at 500 mA Max. 2 VDC
Summation current 0.5 A
Short circuit protection Yes
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Derating -
Relative humidity
Note Order 1x X20TB06 or X20TB12 terminal block separately
2 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI6371
4 Status LEDs
section "re-LEDs".
Image LED Color Status Description
On RUN mode
1-6 Green Input status of the corresponding digital input
5 Pinout
r e
X20 DI 6371
1 2
3 4
5 6
DI 1 DI 2
DI 3 DI 4
DI 5 DI 6
+24 VDC +24 VDC
+24 VDC +24 VDC
+24 VDC +24 VDC
DI
Sensor 1 Sensor 2
Sensor 3 Sensor 4
Sensor 5 Sensor 6
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Data sheet V 3.01 3

X20DI6371
Input x
VDR
GND
I/O status
LED (green)
Input status
24 V
PTC GND
24 V
8 Input filter
An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01". Distur-
bance pulses which are shorter than the input delay are suppressed by the input filter.
Input
signal
Time
Signal after tDelay tDelay tDelay

the filter
Time
tDelay ⇒ Input delay
4 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DI6371
Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write
0 1 DigitalInput USINT ●
... ...
Fixed modules require their data points to be in a specific order in the X2X frame. Cyclic access occurs according
to a predefined offset, not based on the register address.
Acyclic access is continues to be based on the register numbers.

0 0 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 USINT ●
... ...
9.3 Digital inputs
Unfiltered
The input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle.
Filtered
The filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtering
takes place asynchronously to the network in multiples of 200 µs with a network-related jitter of up to 50 µs.
9.3.1 Digital input filter
Name:
ConfigOutput01
This register can be used to specify the filter value for all digital inputs.
The filter value can be configured in steps of 100 μs. It makes sense to enter values in steps of 2, however, since
the input signals are sampled every 200 μs.
Data type Value Filters
USINT 0 No software filter
2 0.2 ms
... ...
250 25 ms - Higher values are limited to this value
Data sheet V 3.01 5

X20DI6371
9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 6
Name:
DigitalInput or
DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput06
The input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 is mapped in this register.
The "packed inputs" setting in the AS I/O configuration is used to determine whether all of this register's bits should
be set up individually as data points in the AS I/O mapping ("DigitalInput01" through "DigitalInput06") or whether
this register should be displayed as an individual USINT data point ("DigitalInput").
Bit structure:
... ...
Minimum cycle time
6 Data sheet V 3.01

X20DO2649
X20DO2649
The module has 2 relay outputs.
• 2 digital outputs
• Relay module for 230 VAC / 30 VDC
• 2 change over contacts
• Single-channel isolated outputs
Danger!
Risk of electric shock!
The terminal block must only be allowed to conduct voltage when it is inserted. It must not under any
circumstances be removed or inserted when voltage is applied or have voltage applied to it when it
is removed.
2 Order data
Digital output modules
X20DO2649 X20 digital output module, 2 relays, changeover contacts, 230
VAC / 5 A, 24 VDC / 5 A
Bus modules
Terminal blocks
Table 1: X20DO2649 - Order data
3 Technical data
Product ID X20DO2649
Brief description
I/O module 2 digital outputs 30 VDC / 230 VAC, outputs are single-channel isolated
General information
B&R ID code 0x20DA
Diagnostics
Outputs Yes, using status LED
Power consumption
Bus 0.45 W
Internal I/O -
Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- +2.5
tors (resistive) [W] 1)
Channel - Bus Yes
Channel - Channel Yes
Table 2: X20DO2649 - Technical data
Data sheet V 3.10 1

X20DO2649
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Digital outputs
Design Relay / Changeover contact
Channels are single-channel isolated
Nominal voltage 30 VDC / 230 VAC
Switching voltage Max. 110 VDC / 250 VAC
Rated frequency DC / 45 to 63 Hz
Nominal output current 5.0 A at 30 VDC / 5.0 A at 230 VAC
Total nominal current 10.0 A at 30 VDC / 10.0 A at 230 VAC
Actuator supply External
Starting current Max. 6 A (per channel)
Contact resistance 50 mΩ
Switching delay
0 -> 1 ≤10 ms
1 -> 0 ≤10 ms
Isolation voltage
Contact - Contact Tested at 1000 VAC
Contact - Coil Tested at 4000 VAC
Service life
Electrical 2) Min. 60 x 10³ ops. (NC) at 6 A
Min. 30 x 30³ ops. (NO) at 6 A
Mechanical Min. 10 x 106 ops.
Switching capacity
Minimum 10 mA / 5 VDC
Maximum 180 W / 1500 VA
Protective circuit
Internal None
External
AC RC combination or VDR
DC Inverse diode, RC combination or VDR
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Relative humidity

1) Number of outputs x Contact resistance x Nominal output current2 (A calculation example can be found on the B&R website in the download area for the
module.)
2) With a resistive load. See also section "Electrical service life"
2 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO2649
4 Status LEDs
On RUN mode
1-2 Orange Output status of the corresponding digital output
Table 3: Status LEDs
5 Pinout
r e
X20 DO 2649
1
2
NC 1 NC 1
COM 1 COM 1
NO 1 NO 1
NC 2 NC 2
COM 2 COM 2
NO 2 NO 2
Figure 1: Pinout
DO
230 VAC
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Data sheet V 3.10 3

X20DO2649
7 Output circuit diagram
NC x
COM x
NO x
Output status
I/O status
LED (orange)
Figure 3: Output circuit diagram
8 Electrical service life

Electrical service life
100
50
250 VAC / 30 VDC resistive (cos ɸ = 1)
Switching operations (x10⁴)
20
250 VAC cos ɸ = 0,7
10
30 VDC τ = 7 ms
250 VAC cos ɸ = 0,4

5
30 VDC τ = 15 ms
1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Switching current [A]
Figure 4: Electrical service life
4 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO2649
2 0 DigitalOutput USINT ●
DigitalOutput01 Bit 0

2 0 Switching state of digital outputs 1 to 2 USINT ●
9.3 Digital outputs
The output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset (<60 µs) in relation to the network cycle
(SyncOut).
9.3.1 Switching state of digital outputs 1 to 2
Name:
DigitalOutput
DigitalOutput01 to DigitalOutput02
This register is used to store the switching state of digital outputs 1 to 2.
The "packed outputs" setting in the AS I/O configuration is used to determine whether all of this registers' bits
should be set up individually as data points in the AS I/O mapping ("DigitalOutput01" through "DigitalOutput0x") or
whether this register should be displayed as an individual USINT data point ("DigitalOutput").
USINT 0 to 3 Packed outputs = on
See bit structure Packed outputs = off or function model <> 0 - Standard
Bit structure:
0 DigitalOutput01 0 Digital output 01 reset
1 Digital output 01 set
Data sheet V 3.10 5

X20DO2649
Minimum cycle time
100 μs
Equal to the minimum cycle time
6 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO4529
X20DO4529
The module is equipped with 4 relay outputs.
• Relay module for 115 VAC
• 4 change over contacts
Danger!
is removed.
2 Order data
X20DO4529 X20 digital output module, 4 relays, changeover contacts, 115
VAC / 0.5 A, 24 VDC / 1 A
Bus modules
Terminal blocks
3 Technical data
Brief description
General information
B&R ID code 0x20D9
Diagnostics
Power consumption
Bus 0.8 W
Internal I/O -
Channel - Bus Yes
Data sheet V 3.10 1

X20DO4529
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Digital outputs
Design Relay / Changeover contact
Contact resistance 75 mΩ at 6 VDC / 1A
Switching delay
0 -> 1 ≤4 ms
1 -> 0 ≤4 ms
Isolation voltage
Service life
Electrical 2) Min. 100 x 10³ ops.
Mechanical Min. 50 x 106 ops. (3 Hz)
Switching capacity
Minimum 0.01 mA / 10 mV DC
Maximum 30 W / 62.5 VA
Protective circuit
Internal None
External
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Derating -
Relative humidity

module.)
2 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO4529
4 Status LEDs
On RUN mode
5 Pinout
r e
X20 DO 4529
1 2
34
NC 1 NC 2
COM 1 COM 2
NO 1 NO 2
NC 3 NC 4
COM 3 COM 4
NO 3 NO4
Figure 1: Pinout
DO
115 VAC 24 VDC
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Data sheet V 3.10 3

X20DO4529
NC x
COM x
NO x
Output status
I/O status
LED (orange)
8 Maximum switching power

Maximum switching power
2
AC resistive
0.5
DC resistive
0.3
0.2
0.1
1 2 5 10 20 30 50 100 200
Switching voltage [V]
Figure 4: Maximum switching power

100
70
50
40
30
30 VD
C
re
sis
20
12
tiv
e
5V
DC
re
10
sis
tiv
e
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
4 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO4529
... ...

... ...
10.3 Digital outputs
(SyncOut).
Name:
DigitalOutput
The switching state of digital outputs 1 to 4 are stored in this register.
Bit structure:
... ...
Data sheet V 3.10 5

X20DO4529
Minimum cycle time
100 μs
6 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO6529
X20DO6529
The module is equipped with 6 relay outputs.
• Relay module for 115 VAC
• 6 normally open contacts
Danger!
is removed.
2 Order data
X20DO6529 X20 digital output module, 6 relays, normally open contacts, 115
VAC / 0.5 A, 30 VDC / 1 A
Bus modules
Terminal blocks
3 Technical data
Brief description
General information
B&R ID code 0x2019
Diagnostics
Power consumption
Bus 1.1 W
Internal I/O -
Channel - Bus Yes
Data sheet V 3.10 1

X20DO6529
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
Digital outputs
Design Relay / Normally open contact
Contact resistance 75 mΩ at 6 VDC / 1A
Switching delay
0 -> 1 ≤4 ms
1 -> 0 ≤4 ms
Isolation voltage
Service life
Electrical 2) Min. 100 x 10³ ops.
Mechanical Min. 50 x 106 ops. (3 Hz)
Switching capacity
Minimum 0.01 mA / 10 mV DC
Maximum 30 W / 62.5 VA
Protective circuit
Internal None
External
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Relative humidity

module.)
2 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO6529
4 Status LEDs
On RUN mode
5 Pinout
r e
X20 DO 6529
1 2
3 4
5 6
NO 1 NO 2
COM 1 COM 2
NO 3 NO 4
COM 3 COM 4
NO 5 NO 6
COM 5 COM 6
Figure 1: Pinout
DO
115 VAC 24 VDC
+24 VDC +24 VDC

GND GND
Data sheet V 3.10 3

X20DO6529
NO x
COM x
Output status
I/O status
LED (orange)
8 Maximum switching power

Maximum switching power
2
AC resistive
0.5
DC resistive
0.3
0.2
0.1
1 2 5 10 20 30 50 100 200
Switching voltage [V]
Figure 4: Maximum switching power

100
70
50
40
30
30 VD
C
re
sis
20
12
tiv
e
5V
DC
re
10
sis
tiv
e
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
4 Data sheet V 3.10

X20DO6529
... ...

... ...
10.3 Digital outputs
(SyncOut).
Name:
DigitalOutput
The switching state of digital outputs 1 to 6 are stored in this register.
Bit structure:
... ...
Data sheet V 3.10 5

X20DO6529
Minimum cycle time
100 μs
6 Data sheet V 3.10

X20PS9500
X20PS9500
The X20PS9500 supply module is used together with an X20 compact or fieldbus CPU. It has a feed for the compact
or fieldbus CPU, the X2X Link and the internal I/O supply.
• Supply for the compact or fieldbus CPU, X2X Link, and internal I/O supply
• Electrical isolation of feed and CPU / X2X Link supply
• Redundancy of CPU / X2X Link supply possible by operating multiple supply modules simultaneously
• RS232 interface configurable as online interface
• CAN bus
2 Order data
X20PS9500 X20 supply module for compact and fieldbus CPUs and internal
I/O supply, X2X Link supply
X20BB22 X20 compact CPU base, for compact CPU and compact CPU
supply module, base for integrated RS232 interface, X20 con-
nection, X20 locking plates X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 (left and
right) included
X20BB27 X20 compact CPU base, for compact CPU and compact CPU
supply module, base for integrated RS232 and CAN interface,
X20 connection, X20 locking plates X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1
(left and right) included
System modules for fieldbus CPUs
X20BB32 X20 fieldbus CPU base, for fieldbus CPU and compact CPU
supply module, base for integrated RS232 interface, slot for
X20 interface module, X20 connection, X20 locking plates
X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 (left and right) included
X20BB37 X20 fieldbus CPU base, for fieldbus CPU and compact CPU sup-
ply module, base for integrated RS232 and CAN interface, slot
for X20 interface module, X20 connection, X20 locking plates
supply module, base for integrated RS232 interface, 2 slots
for X20 interface modules, X20 connection, X20 locking plates
supply module, base for integrated RS232 and CAN interface,
2 slots for X20 interface modules, X20 connection, X20 locking
plates X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 (left and right) included
Terminal blocks
Table 1: X20PS9500 - Order data
Data sheet V 3.00 1

X20PS9500
3 Technical data
Product ID X20PS9500
Short description
Power supply module 24 VDC supply module for compact or fieldbus CPU, X2X Link supply and I/O
Interfaces 1x RS232, 1x CAN bus 1)
General information
B&R ID code 0x2018
Status indicators Overload, operating state, module status, RS232, CAN bus 1)
Diagnostics
CAN bus data transfer 1) Yes, using status LED
RS232 data transfer Yes, using status LED
Overload Yes, using status LED and software
Power consumption 2)
Bus 1.42 W
Internal I/O 0.6 W
CPU/X2X Link feed - CPU/X2X Link supply Yes
I/O feed - I/O supply No
Certification
CE Yes
cULus Yes
ATEX Zone 2 Yes
KC Yes
GL Yes
GOST-R Yes
CPU / X2X Link supply input
Input current Max. 0.7 A
Fuse Integrated, cannot be replaced
Reverse polarity protection Yes
CPU / X2X Link supply output
Nominal output power 7.0 W
Parallel operation Yes 3)
Redundant operation Yes
Overload behavior Short circuit / temporary overload protection
Input I/O supply
Fuse Required line fuse: Max. 10 A, slow-blow
Reverse polarity protection No
Output I/O supply
Rated output voltage 24 VDC
Behavior if a short circuit occurs Required line fuse
Permitted contact load 10.0 A
Interfaces
IF1 interface
Signal RS232
Design Connection made using 12-pin X20TB12 terminal block
Transfer rate Max. 115.2 kbit/s
IF3 interface 1)
Signal CAN bus
Design Connection made using 12-pin X20TB12 terminal block
Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s
Horizontal Yes
Vertical Yes
Temperature
Operation
Table 2: X20PS9500 - Technical data
2 Data sheet V 3.00

X20PS9500
Product ID X20PS9500
Relative humidity
Order 1x X20BB22 or X20BB27 compact CPU base separately
Order 1x X20BB3x/4x fieldbus CPU base separately
Table 2: X20PS9500 - Technical data

1) CAN bus only when used with the X20BB27, X20BB37 or X20BB47 bus module.
2) The specified values are maximum values. The calculation is also available for download as a data sheet with the other module documentation on the B&R
website.
3) In parallel operation, only 75% of the rated power can be assumed. It is important to make sure that all power supplies operating in parallel are switched
on and off at the same time.

On RUN mode
Double flash LED indicates one of the following states:
• The CPU / X2X Link supply for the power supply is overloaded
• I/O supply too low
• Input voltage for CPU / X2X Link supply too low
l Red Off The CPU / X2X Link supply is within the valid limits
On The CPU / X2X Link supply for the power supply is overloaded
S Yellow Off The CPU does not send data via the RS232 interface.
On The CPU sends data via the RS232 interface.
C Yellow Off The CPU is not sending data via the CAN bus interface.
On The CPU is sending data via the CAN bus interface.
T Yellow Off The terminating resistor integrated in the BB27 or BB37 bus module is turned off.
On The terminating resistor integrated in the BB27 or BB37 bus module is turned on.
Table 3: LED status indicators
5 Pinout
r e
X20 PS 9500
S I
C T
RS232 TxD RS232 RxD
CAN GND RS232 GND
CAN high CAN low
+24 V CPU/X2X L. +24 V I/O
+24 V CPU/X2X L. +24 V I/O
GND GND
Figure 1: Pinout
Data sheet V 3.00 3

X20PS9500
6 Connection examples
With 2 separate supplies
PS
10 A slow-blow
CPU/X2X Link + + I/O-
Power supply _ _ Power supply
+24 VDC
GND
Figure 2: Connection example with 2 separate supplies
With a supply and jumper
PS
Jumper
10 A slow-blow
+ I/O-
_ Power supply
+24 VDC
GND
Figure 3: Connection example with a supply and jumper
7 Derating
The rated output current for the supply is 7.0 W. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting
orientation.
Installation position
Horizontal
Vertical
7
Nominal output power
4
[W]
0
-25 40 45 50 55 60
Ambient temperature [°C]
4 Data sheet V 3.00

Product data sheet XB4BS8442
Characteristics Red Ø40 Emergency stop, switching off Ø22
latching turn release 1NC
Main
Range of product Harmony XB4
Product or component Complete emergency switching off pushbutton
type
Device short name XB4
Bezel material Chromium plated metal
Fixing collar material Zamak
Mounting diameter 22 mm
Sale per indivisible 1
quantity
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
Shape of signaling unit Round
head
Type of operator Trigger action and mechanical latching
Reset Turn to release
Operator profile Red mushroom Ø 40 mm unmarked
Contacts type and com- 1 NC
position
Contacts operation Slow-break
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
Connections - terminals Screw clamp terminals : >= 1 x 0.22 mm² without ca-
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
ble end conforming to EN 60947-1
Screw clamp terminals : <= 2 x 1.5 mm² with cable
end conforming to EN 60947-1
Complementary
Height 47 mm
Width 40 mm
Depth 82 mm
Terminals description ISO n°1 (21-22)NC
Product weight 0.118 kg
Resistance to high pressure washer 7000000 Pa at 55 °C,distance: 0.1 m
Contacts usage Standard contacts
Positive opening With positive opening conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix K
Operating travel 4.3 mm (total travel)
1.5 mm (NC changing electrical state)
Mechanical durability 300000 cycles
Tightening torque 0.8...1.2 N.m conforming to EN 60947-1
Shape of screw head Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 5.5 mm screwdriver
Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 4 mm screwdriver
Cross head compatible with pozidriv No 1 screwdriver
Cross head compatible with Philips no 1 screwdriver
Contacts material Silver alloy (Ag/Ni)
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current 10 A conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ui] rated insulation voltage 600 V (degree of pollution: 3) conforming to EN 60947-1
[Uimp] rated impulse withstand voltage 6 kV conforming to EN 60947-1
[Ie] rated operational current 1.2 A at 600 V, AC-15, A600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
0.55 A at 125 V, DC-13, Q600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
6 A at 120 V, AC-15, A600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
3 A at 240 V, AC-15, A600 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Nov 18, 2014

1
Electrical durability 1000000 cycles, DC-13, 0.5 A at 24 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor: 0.5
conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
1000000 cycles, DC-13, 0.2 A at 110 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor:
0.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
1000000 cycles, AC-15, 4 A at 24 V, operating rate: 3600 cyc/h, load factor: 0.5
Electrical reliability IEC 60947-5-4 Λ < 10exp(-8) 17 V 5 mA in clean environment EN/IEC 60947-5-4
Λ < 10exp(-6) 5 V 1 mA in clean environment EN/IEC 60947-5-4
Environment
Protective treatment TH
Ambient air temperature for storage -40...70 °C
Ambient air temperature for operation -25...70 °C
Class of protection against electric shock Class I conforming to IEC 60536
IP degree of protection IP66 conforming to IEC 60529
NEMA degree of protection NEMA 4X
NEMA 13
IK degree of protection IK03 conforming to IEC 50102
Standards EN/IEC 60204-1
EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
EN/ISO 13850
IEC 60364-5-53
JIS C 4520
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No 14
Product certifications BV
CSA
DNV
GL
LROS (Lloyds register of shipping)
RINA
UL listed
Vibration resistance 5 gn (f = 2...500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 50 gn (duration = 11 ms) for half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC
60068-2-27
30 gn (duration = 18 ms) for half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC
60068-2-27
Offer Sustainability
Sustainable offer status Green Premium product
REACh Reference not containing SVHC above the threshold
Product environmental profile Available
Product end of life instructions Need no specific recycling operations
2
Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions
e: clamping thickness: 1 to 6 mm / 0.04 to 0.24 in.
3
Mounting and Clearance
Panel Cut-out for Pushbuttons, Switches and Pilot Lights (Finished Holes, Ready for Installation)
Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals or Plug-in Connectors or on Connection by Faston Connectors

Printed Circuit Board
(1) Diameter on finished panel or support

(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
(4) Ø 22.5 mm / 0.89 in. recommended (Ø 22.3 mm 0
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
4
11. Component documentation
11.1. Strainer - Fig 16 - Spirax Sarco

11.3. Flow restrictor - REG - Kobold
11.5. Pressure Switch - PN5004 - IFM
11.9. Sample valve - PEC-15L - Parth
11.10. Electromagnetic Flowmeter – 50H - E+H
11.13. Backpressure valve 6DPVRQ
11.14. Ball Valve- Unison
11.15. Turbidity transmitter - Phase Guard T - Sigrist
11.16. Solenoid valve - VX21 - SMC

11.1. Strainer - Fig 16 - Spirax Sarco
- Technical information
- Installation & Maintenance instructions

TI-P160-01
ST Issue 7
Cert. No. LRQ 0963008 Fig 16 and Fig 16L

ISO 9001
Austenitic Stainless Steel
Strainers
Description
The Fig 16 and Fig 16L are austenitic stainless steel screwed Y-type
strainers. The Fig 16 is 316 and the Fig 16L is 316L. The standard
stainless steel screen is 0.8 mm perforations. As options, other
perforations and mesh sizes are available as well as monel screens.
The strainer cap can be drilled and tapped for blowdown and drain
valves if required.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97 /23 /EC.
Certification
The Fig 16 is available with a manufacturers Typical Test Report. 4
The Fig 16L is available with certification to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be stated at
the time of order placement.
Sizes and pipe connections 1

", ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
Screwed BSP or NPT
Socket weld ends to BS 3799 Class 3000 lb (Fig 16L only).
Optional extras
Strainer screens 3
Perforations 1.6 mm and 3 mm
Stainless steel screens
Mesh 40, 100 and 200 2
Perforations 0.8 mm and 3 mm
Monel screens
Mesh 100
Blowdown or drain valve connections
The cap can be drilled to the following sizes to enable a blowdown
or drain valve to be fitted at extra cost.
Strainer size Blowdown valve Drain valve
" and ½" ¼" ¼"
¾" ½" "
1" ½" ½"
1¼" and 1½" 1" ¾"
2" 1¼" ¾"
Pressure /temperature limits

��
Temperature °C
��
��
Steam
�� saturation
curve
�
��
� ��
Pressure bar g Materials
The product must not be used in this region. No. Part Material
ASTM A351
Body design conditions ANSI 600 Fig 16 Austenitic stainless steel
Gr. CF8M (316)
PMA Maximum allowable pressure 82.7 bar g @ 37.7°C 1 Body
ASTM A351
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 398.8°C @ 46.2 bar g Fig 16L Austenitic stainless steel
Gr. CF3M (316L)
Minimum allowable temperature -29°C ASTM A351
Fig 16 Austenitic stainless steel
PMO Maximum operating pressure 82.7 bar g @ 37.7°C Gr. CF8M (316)
2 Cap
TMO Maximum operating temperature 398.8°C @ 46.2 bar g ASTM A351
Fig 16L Austenitic stainless steel
Minimum operating temperature -29°C Gr. CF3M (316L)
Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco 3 Cap gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 125 bar g 4 Strainer screen Austenitic stainless steel 316L
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice. © Copyright 2006
Kv values For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156
Size ¼" " ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Perforations 0.8, 1.6 and 3 mm 1 2.6 3.6 11 15.5 26 41 68
Mesh 40 and 100 1 2.6 3.6 11 15.5 26 41 68
Mesh 200 1 2.6 2.6 9 13.0 21 33 55
Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg Spare parts

Screening The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn
Size A B C D area cm² Weight in broken line are not supplied as spares.
" 69 55 87 26 25 0.32 Available spares
½" 76 55 87 32 25 0.38 Strainer screen 4
(state material, size of perforation or mesh and size of strainer)
¾" 88 65 110 38 42 0.51
Cap gasket (packet of 3) 3
1" 106 78 125 46 71 0.87
How to order spares
1¼" 133 103 155 56 135 1.56 Always order spares by using the description given in the column
1½" 146 115 190 62 161 2.10 headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of strainer and
perforation or mesh required.
2" 172 140 230 76 251 3.46 Example: 1 off Stainless steel strainer screen, having 1.6 mm
perforations, for a ¾" Spirax Sarco Fig 16 strainer with screwed BSP
connections.
A Note: When replacing the strainer cap coat the thread only with
anti-seize compound, making sure none gets on the gasket or
gasket faces.
Withdrawal
B distance C
Safety information, installation and maintenance

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
(IM-S60-17) supplied with the product.
Warning:
The strainer cap gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring, 3
which may cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of
carefully. 4
Disposal
The product is recyclabe. No ecological hazard is anticipated with
disposal of this product, providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1½" Fig 16 strainer with screwed BSP 2
connections and a stainless steel screen having 0.8 mm
perforations.
Recommended tightening torques
or
Item Size Nm
mm
" 22 A /F 45 - 50
½" 22 A /F 45 - 50
¾" 27 A /F 60 - 66
2 1" 27 A /F 100 - 110
1¼" 46 A /F 240 - 260
1½" 46 A /F 260 - 280
2" 60 A /F 310 - 340
Fig 16 and Fig 16L Austenitic Stainless Steel Strainers TI-P160-01 ST Issue 7
1630055/11 IM-S60-17
ST Issue 11
Fig 12, Fig 14HP,

Fig 16, Fig 16HP and Fig 16L Strainers
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
1. Safety information
2. General
product information
3. Installation
4. Commissioning
5. Operation
6. Fault finding
7. Maintenance
8. Available spares
© Copyright 2015
IM-S60-17 ST Issue 11 1
Printed in France
1. Safety information
Safe operation of these products can only be guaranteed if they are properly installed,
commissioned, used and maintained by qualified personnel (see Section 1.11) in
compliance with the operating instructions. General installation and safety
instructions for pipeline and plant construction, as well as the proper use of tools
and safety equipment must also be complied with.
1.1 Intended use

Referring to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, name-plate and
Technical Information Sheet, check that the product is suitable for the intended
use/application. The products listed below comply with the requirements of the
European Pressure Equipment Directive 97 / 23 / EC and carry the mark when so
required. The products fall within the following Pressure Equipment Directive
categories:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2

Product
Gases Gases Liquids Liquids
" - 1" SEP SEP SEP SEP
Fig 12GM 1¼" - 1½" 1 SEP SEP SEP
2" - 2½" 2 1 SEP SEP
½" - 1" SEP SEP SEP SEP
Fig 12SG 1¼" - 1½" 1 SEP SEP SEP
2" - 3" 2 1 SEP SEP
¼" - 1" SEP SEP SEP SEP
Fig 14HP 1¼" 2 SEP 2 SEP

1½" - 2" 2 1 2 SEP
Fig 16 1¼" 2 SEP 2 SEP
1½" - 2" 2 1 2 SEP
¼" - 1" SEP SEP SEP SEP
Fig 16HP 1¼" 2 SEP 2 SEP
1½" - 2" 2 1 2 SEP
Fig 16L 1¼" 2 SEP 2 SEP
1½" - 2" 2 1 2 SEP
i) The products have been specifically designed for use on propane or methane
gases which are in Group 1 of the above mentioned Pressure Equipment
Directive. They can also be used on steam, air or water/condensate which are
in Group 2 of the Pressure Equipment Directive. The products’ use on other
fluids may be possible but, if this is contemplated, Spirax Sarco should be
contacted to confirm the suitability of the product for the application being
considered.
2 IM-S60-17 ST Issue 11
ii) Check material suitability, pressure and temperature and their maximum and
minimum values. If the maximum operating limits of the product are lower than
those of the system in which it is being fitted, or if malfunction of the product
could result in a dangerous overpressure or overtemperature occurrence,
ensure a safety device is included in the system to prevent such over-limit
situations.
iii) Determine the correct installation situation and direction of fluid flow.
iv) Spirax Sarco products are not intended to withstand external stresses that
may be induced by any system to which they are fitted. It is the responsibility of
the installer to consider these stresses and take adequate precautions to
minimise them.
v) Remove protection covers from all connections and protective film from all
name-plates, where appropriate, before installation on steam or other high
temperature applications.
1.2 Access
Ensure safe access and if necessary a safe working platform (suitably guarded)
before attempting to work on the product. Arrange suitable lifting gear if required.
1.3 Lighting
Ensure adequate lighting, particularly where detailed or intricate work is required.
1.4 Hazardous liquids or gases in the pipeline

Consider what is in the pipeline or what may have been in the pipeline at some
previous time. Consider: flammable materials, substances hazardous to health,
extremes of temperature.
1.5 Hazardous environment around the product

Consider: explosion risk areas, lack of oxygen (e.g. tanks, pits), dangerous gases,
extremes of temperature, hot surfaces, fire hazard (e.g. during welding),
excessive noise, moving machinery.
1.6 The system

Consider the effect on the complete system of the work proposed. Will any
proposed action (e.g. closing isolation valves, electrical isolation) put any other part
of the system or any personnel at risk?
Dangers might include isolation of vents or protective devices or the rendering
ineffective of controls or alarms. Ensure isolation valves are turned on and off
in a gradual way to avoid system shocks.
1.7 Pressure systems

Ensure that any pressure is isolated and safely vented to atmospheric pressure.
Consider double isolation (double block and bleed) and the locking or labelling
of closed valves. Do not assume that the system has depressurised even when
the pressure gauge indicates zero.
1.8 Temperature
Allow time for temperature to normalise after isolation to avoid danger of burns.
1.9 Tools and consumables
Before starting work ensure that you have suitable tools and / or consumables
available. Use only genuine Spirax Sarco replacement parts.
1.10 Protective clothing

Consider whether you and / or others in the vicinity require any protective clothing
to protect against the hazards of, for example, chemicals, high / low temperature,
radiation, noise, falling objects, and dangers to eyes and face.
1.11 Permits to work

All work must be carried out or be supervised by a suitably competent person.
Installation and operating personnel should be trained in the correct use of the
product according to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
Where a formal 'permit to work' system is in force it must be complied with.
Where there is no such system, it is recommended that a responsible person
should know what work is going on and, where necessary, arrange to have an
assistant whose primary responsibility is safety.
Post 'warning notices' if necessary.
1.12 Handling
Manual handling of large and / or heavy products may present a risk of injury.
Lifting, pushing, pulling, carrying or supporting a load by bodily force can cause
injury particularly to the back. You are advised to assess the risks taking into
account the task, the individual, the load and the working environment and use the
appropriate handling method depending on the circumstances of the work
being done.
1.13 Residual hazards

In normal use the external surface of the product may be very hot. If used at the
maximum permitted operating conditions the surface temperature of some
products may reach temperatures of 538°C (1000°F).
Many products are not self-draining. Take due care when dismantling or removing
the product from an installation (refer to 'Maintenance instructions').
1.14 Freezing
Provision must be made to protect products which are not self-draining against
frost damage in environments where they may be exposed to temperatures
below freezing point.
1.15 Disposal
Unless otherwise stated in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, this
product is recyclable and no ecological hazard is anticipated with its disposal
providing due care is taken.
1.16 Returning products

Customers and stockists are reminded that under EC Health, Safety and
Environment Law, when returning products to Spirax Sarco they must provide
information on any hazards and the precautions to be taken due to contamination
residues or mechanical damage which may present a health, safety or
environmental risk. This information must be provided in writing including
Health and Safety data sheets relating to any substances identified as hazardous
or potentially hazardous.
2. General product information
2.1 General description
The products detailed are all Y-type strainers with screwed connections. They are used
to protect other pipeline items from damage due to debris and dirt in the system.
Note:
For additional information see the following Technical Information Sheets:
Products Body material Technical information sheet

Fig 12GM Bronze TI-P164-02
Fig 12SG SG iron TI-P163-01
Fig 14HP Carbon steel TI-P169-03
Fig 16 Stainless steel TI-P160-01
Fig 16HP Stainless steel TI-P169-08
Fig 16L Stainless steel TI-P160-01
As standard they are fitted with 0.8 mm perforated stainless screens. Optional screens
are available, which can incur an extra cost:
Optional screens in stainless steel
Perforations 1.6 mm and 3.0 mm
Mesh 40, 100 and 200
Optional screens in monel

Perforations 0.8 mm and 3.0 mm
Mesh 100
2.2 Options
The cap can be drilled to the following sizes to enable a blowdown or drain cock to be fitted:
Strainer Blowdown Drain valve
size valve valve
¼" - ½" ¼" ¼"
¾" - 1" ½" ½"
1¼" - 1½" 1" ¾"
2" - 3" 1¼" ¾"

2.3 Limiting conditions (ISO 6552) / operating ranges
Fig 12GM
Body design conditions PN25
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 25 bar g (362 psi g)
TMA - Maximum allowable temperature 210°C (410°F)
Minimum operating temperature -198°C (-325°F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 38 bar g (551 psi g)
The product must

Temperature °C
not be used in this

Steam region.
saturation
curve
*PMO Maximum
operating
pressure for
saturated steam.
Pressure bar g
Fig 12SG
Body design conditions PN25
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 25 bar g (362 psi g)
Minimum operating temperature 0°C (32°F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 38 bar g (551 psi g)
The product must

Temperature °C
not be used in

this region.
Steam
saturation *PMO Maximum
curve
operating
pressure for
saturated steam.
Pressure bar g
Fig 14HP
Body design conditions ASME Class 800
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 136.1 bar g (1 973 psi g)
Minimum operating temperature -10°C (14°F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 205 bar g (2 973 psi g)
The product must

Temperature °C
not be used in this

region.
Steam
saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
Fig 16
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 83 bar g (1 203 psi g)

The product must
Temperature °C
not be used in this

region.

Steam
saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
Note: See pages 8 for

Fig 16HP and Fig 16L
limiting conditions and operating ranges.
Fig 16HP
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 132.4 bar g (1 920 psi g)
TMA - Maximum allowable temperature 538°C (1 000°F)

The product must
Temperature °C
not be used in this

region.

Steam
saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
Fig 16L
PMA - Maximum allowable pressure 83 bar g (1 203 psi g)

The product must
Temperature °C
not be used in this

region.

Steam
saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
3. Installation
Note: Before actioning any installation observe the 'Safety information in Section 1.
Referring to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, name-plate and Technical

Information Sheet, check that the product is suitable for the intended installation:
3.1 Check materials, pressure and temperature and their maximum values. If the maximum
operating limit of the product is lower than that of the system in which it is being fitted,
ensure that a safety device is included in the system to prevent overpressurisation.
3.2 Determine the correct installation situation and the direction of fluid flow.
3.3 Remove protective covers from all connections.
3.4 Strainers can be fitted on liquid or steam/gas systems in either horizontal pipework
or vertical pipework where the flow is downward. In a horizontal line on steam / gases
the strainer pocket should be in the horizontal plane as this reduces the possibility of
waterhammer. On liquid systems the strainer pocket should point downwards.
3.5 The strainers may be lagged if required.
Strainer installed on steam or gas line
Strainer installed on liquid line

 
Flow upwards Flow downwards
4. Commissioning
After installation or maintenance ensure that the system is fully functioning. Carry out
tests on any alarms or protective devices.
5. Operation
Strainers are passive items and will prevent the onward movement of dirt and debris, which
is larger than the holes in the screen. The pressure drop across the strainer will increase
as the screen becomes blocked. Regular cleaning / blowdown is recommended to keep
the screen clean.
6. Fault finding
Symptom Possible cause Remedy
Blocked screen Clean or replace screen
No flow through strainer
System is isolated Check isolation valves
Increased pressure drop
Screen is blocking up Clean or replace screen
across the strainer
7. Maintenance
Note:Before actioning any maintenance observe the 'Safety information 'in Section 1.
WARNING:
The strainer cap gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical
injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.
7.1 Before undertaking any maintenance of the strainer it must be isolated from both the
supply line and return line and any pressure allowed to safely normalise to atmosphere.
The trap should then be allowed to cool. When reassembling, ensure that all joint faces are
clean.
7.2 How to clean or replace the strainer screen:

Remove the strainer cap. On most sizes the cap is simply unscrewed. However the cap on
the 2½" and 3" Fig 12SG strainer is retained by four bolts. Once the cap is removed the
strainer screen can be taken out. Clean the screen or replace with a new one. Reassemble
the screen into the cap by pushing the end into the recess. Always fit a new strainer cap
gasket ensuring the jointing faces are clean. Refit the strainer cap and tighten to the
recommended torque. On sizes above 2" ensure that the nuts are tightened equally before
final torque is applied. Check for leaks.
Size " to 2" Size 2½" and 3"
Recommended tightening torques
No or
Product Item Size Nm (lbf ft)
off mm
" - ½" 1 22 M28 38 - 40 28 - 29

¾" 1 27 M32 42 - 48 31 - 35
1" 1 27 M42 70 - 80 51 - 59
Fig 12
2 1¼" 1 41 M56 124 - 144 91 - 106
Bronze
1½" 1 41 M60 164 - 184 121 - 135
2" 1 55 M72 234 - 264 172 - 194
2½" 1 55 3¼"-16 UNS 300 - 330 221 - 242
½" 1 36 M28 38 - 40 28 - 29
¾" 1 38 M32 42 - 48 31 - 35
1" 1 50 M42 70 - 80 51 - 59
2
Fig 12SG 1¼" 1 46 M56 124 - 144 91 - 106
1½" 1 50 M60 164 - 184 121 - 135
2" 1 60 M72 234 - 264 172 - 194
5 2½" - 3" 4 19 M12 50 - 55 37 - 40
¼" - ½" 1 36 50 - 55 37 - 40
¾" 1 38 60 - 66 44 - 49
1" 1 50 100 - 110 74 - 81
Fig 14HP 2
1¼" 1 46 180 - 200 132 - 147
1½" 1 50 230 - 250 169 - 184
2" 1 60 330 - 360 243 - 265
" - ½" 1 22 45 - 50 33 - 37
¾" 1 27 60 - 66 44 - 49
Fig 16
1" 1 27 100 - 110 74 - 81
and 2
1¼" 1 46 240 - 260 176 - 191
Fig 16L
1½" 1 46 260 - 280 191 - 206
2" 1 60 310 - 340 228 - 250
¼" - ½" 1 36 50 - 55 37 - 40
¾" 1 38 60 - 66 44 - 49
1" 1 50 100 - 110 74 - 81
Fig 16HP 2
1¼" 1 46 180 - 200 132 - 147
1½" 1 46 230 - 250 169 - 184
2" 1 60 330 - 360 243 - 265
8. Available spares
The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not
supplied as spares.
Available spares
Strainer screen (always state material, size of perforation / mesh and size of strainer) 4
Cap gasket (packet of 3) 3
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and
state the material, size of perforation / mesh, model No. and size of strainer.
Example: 1 off strainer screen in stainless steel with 100 mesh to suit ¾" Fig 14 steel strainer.
Size " to 2" Size 2½" and 3"
3
3 4
4
Screen interchangeability chart

Screen size Brass / Carbon
SG iron Stainless steel
Dimensions (mm) Bronze steel
Fig 16 and
Length Diameter Fig 12GM Fig 12SG Fig 14HP Fig 16L Fig 16HP
¼" ¼"
46 18.3 " " " "
½" ½" ½" ½"
60 23.0 ¾" ¾" ¾" ¾" ¾"
71 32.5 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
98 43.5 1¼" 1¼" 1¼" 1¼" 1¼"
108 48.5 1½" 1½" 1½" 1½" 1½"
139 57.0 2" 2" 2" 2" 2"
152 69.5 2½"
168 77.0 2½" and 3"
Note: Screen size is the same regardless of design or material.

KIESELMANN GmbH Operating Instructions Translation of the original
ak 9.5.06 / 15.3.12
Paul-Kieselmann-Str.4-10
D - 75438 Knittlingen 7005 xxx 000-xxx
 +49 (0) 7043 371-0
Fax: +49 (0) 7043 371-125 Sight glass S - S
www.kieselmann.de NBR
sales@kieselmann.de pressed hard glass
❒ Field of Application ❒ Disassembly and assembly

Fitting to be built into pipe conduits to allow the inspection of Disassembly
liquids. • Unscrew the nut (2).

ATTENTION • Dismount the sliding ring (3), the pressed hard glass (4)
To avoid danger and damage, the fitting must be and the seal (5).
used in accordance with the safety instructions and Assembly
technical data contained in the operating instructions.
• Thoroughly clean and slightly lubricate mounting areas and
❒ Safety Instructions running surfaces.
• Assemble in reverse order.

DANGER

Lubricants
• If the maximum permissible working pressure is exceeded, EPDM; Viton®; K-flex Klüber Paraliq GTE 703
accident hazard due to bursting of the glass cylinder or dis- NBR; HNBR; Silicone Klüber Paraliq GB 363
charge of liquids into the atmosphere is possible. In order to Thread Teflongrease Interflon
avoid excess pressure install overpressure protections.
The fitting position has to be chosen in such a way as to
exclude danger of accident. In order to prevent accident ❒ Technical data
hazards, provide appropriate protective devices.
Model: Sight glass
• Dismantling the valve or valve assemblies from the plant
can cause injuries from fluids or gases flowing out. Valve size: DN 25 - 250
Dismantle the valve or valve assembly only when the plant Connection: Welding end DIN11850
has been rendered pressure-less and free of liquid and gas.
Temperature: +95°C medium dependent
+140°C (sterilisation) cyclic
❒ Function Operating pressure: see table 1
Fitting to be built into pipe conduits to allow the inspection of
liquids. Material: in prodact contact not in prodact contact
❒ Welding Guidelines Stainless steel: 1.4301 AISI304 1.4301 AISI304
1.4404 AISI316L
• Sealing elements integrated in weld components must gen-
erally be removed prior to welding. Surfaces: RA 0,8µm RA 1,5 - 2,5µm E-polished
• To prevent damage, welding should be undertaken by cer- Bullet-proof Pressed hard glass -
tified personnel (EN287). glass:
• Use the TIG (tungsten inert gas) welding process.
Seals: NBR PTFE

NOTE
Impurities can cause damage to the seals.
Clean inside areas prior to assembly.
❒ Installation instructions
The installation position is without import. External forces due
to the installation must always be avoided.
Dimensions Operating
pressure
DN d1 d2 L1 L2 B S (bar)
25 Ø29x1,5 Ø26 87 43,5 100 8 20

Ø35x1,5
32 Ø33 93 46,5 110 8 12
40 Ø41x1,5 Ø38 100 50 120 8 12

50 Ø53x1,5 Ø50 116 58 140 8 12
65 Ø70x2 Ø66 142 71 160 10 10
80 Ø85x2 Ø81 170 80,5 180 10 6
100 Ø104x2 Ø100 192 96 200 12 8
125 Ø129x2 Ø125 257 128,5 375 15 7
150 Ø154x2 Ø150 290 145 450 15 5
200 Ø204x2 Ø150 340 170 450 15 5
250 Ø254x2 Ø150 390 195 450 15 5
Measures in mm Tab.1
All data are in line with the current state of development. Subject to change as a result of technical progress.
1/2
KIESELMANN GmbH Operating Instructions Translation of the original
ak 9.5.06 / 15.3.12
Paul-Kieselmann-Str.4-10
D - 75438 Knittlingen 7005 xxx 000-xxx
 +49 (0) 7043 371-0
Fax: +49 (0) 7043 371-125 Sight glass S - S
www.kieselmann.de NBR
sales@kieselmann.de pressed hard glass
❒ Spare parts list

Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5
Article-No. Housing Nut Sliding ring Bullet-proof glass Seal
DIN11851 (2x) (2x) (2x) DIN11851 (2x)
1.4301/1.4404 1.4301 PTFE Pressed hard glass NBR
7005 025 000-021 E-polished 7005 025 001-021
7005 025 000-022 mat 7005 025 001-022 8040 052 026-053 7002 025 000-072
7001 025 002-021 2005 025 000-056
7005 025 000-041 E-polished 7005 025 001-041 ø52xø26x1 ø42x8
7005 025 000-042 mat 7005 025 001-042
7005 032 000-021 E-polished 7005 032 001-021
7005 032 000-022 mat 7005 032 001-022 8040 058 032-053 7002 032 000-072
7005 032 000-041 E-polished 7005 032 001-041 7001 032 002-021 ø58xø32x1 ø48x8 2005 032 000-056
7005 032 000-042 mat 7005 032 001-042
7005 040 000-021 E-polished 7005 040 001-021
7005 040 000-022 mat 7005 040 001-022 7001 040 002-021 8040 065 038-053 7002 040 000-072 2005 040 000-056
7005 040 000-042 mat 7005 040 001-042
7005 050 000-021 E-polished 7005 050 001-021
7005 050 000-022 mat 7005 050 001-022 8040 078 050-053 7002 050 000-072
7001 050 002-021 2005 050 000-056
7005 050 000-042 mat 7005 050 001-042
7005 065 000-021 E-polished 7005 065 001-021
7005 065 000-022 mat 7005 065 001-022 8040 095 066-053 7002 065 000-072
7005 065 000-042 mat 7005 065 001-042
7005 080 000-021 E-polished 7005 080 001-021
7005 080 000-022 mat 7005 080 001-022 5091 065 006-021 8040 110 081-053 7002 080 000-072 2005 080 000-056
7005 080 000-042 mat 7005 080 001-042
7005 100 000-021 E-polished 7005 100 001-021
7005 100 000-022 mat 7005 100 001-022 8040 130 100-053 7002 100 000-072
7001 100 002-021 2005 100 000-056
7005 100 000-042 mat 7005 100 001-042
7005 125 000-021 E-polished 7005 125 001-021
7005 125 000-022 mat 7005 125 001-022 8040 160 125-053 7002 125 000-072
7005 125 000-042 mat 7005 125 001-042
7005 150 000-021 E-polished 7005 150 001-021
7005 150 000-022 mat 7005 150 001-022 7001 150 002-021 8040 190 150-053 7002 150 000-072 2005 150 000-056
7005 150 000-042 mat 7005 150 001-042
7005 200 000-021 E-poliert 7005 200 001-021
7005 200 000-022 matt 7005 200 001-022 8040 190 150-053 7002 150 000-072
7001 150 002-021 2004 150 000-056
7005 200 000-041 E-poliert 7005 200 001-041 ø190xø150x1 ø173x15
7005 200 000-042 matt 7005 200 001-042
7005 250 000-021 E-poliert 7005 250 001-021
7005 250 000-022 matt 7005 250 001-022 8040 190 150-053 7002 150 000-072
7001 150 002-021 2004 150 000-056
7005 250 000-041 E-poliert 7005 250 001-041 ø190xø150x1 ø173x15
7005 250 000-042 matt 7005 250 001-042
All data are in line with the current state of development. Subject to change as a result of technical progress.
2/2
11.3. Flow restrictor - REG - Kobold

measuring
Flow Restrictors •
monitoring
for Flow Rates •
0.5 l/min ... 560 l/min analysing
REG
OO pmax: 200 bar; tmax: +300 °C

OOConnections:
Screw thread G ½, G ¾,
G 1 ½, G 2, G 2 ¼,
G 2 ½ and ¾" NPT
OO no auxiliary power required
OO easy to assemble
OO compact design
P?
Z1
OO reliable - no wearing parts
OO energy-saving
OO easy to fit
KOBOLD companies worldwide: KOBOLD Messring GmbH

Nordring 22-24
ARGENTINA, AUSTRIA, AUSTRALIA, BELGIUM, BULGARIA, CANADA, CHILE, CHINA, COLoMBIA, D-65719 Hofheim/Ts.
CZECHIA, EGYPT, FRANCE, GERMANY, GREAT BRITAIN, HUNGARY, INDIA, INDONESIA, ITALY, Head Office:
MALAYSIA, MEXICO, NETHERLANDS, PERU, POLAND, ROMANIA, SINGAPORE, SOUTH KOREA, +49(0)6192 299-0
+49(0)6192 23398
SPAIN, SWITZERLAND, TAIWAN, THAILAND, TUNISIA, turkey, USA, VIETNAM info.de@kobold.com
1/05- 2015
www.kobold.com
1
Flow Restrictors Model REG
Design Technical Details

KOBOLD model REG flow restrictors serve to keep constant Connections: female thread G ½, G ¾
quantities of liquids in pipework systems. The REG rate female/male thread G ½ ... G ¾
regulators are ideally suited for the simple restriction to a male thread G ¾
preset value of throughputs of water, or of liquids similar to female thread ¾" NPT
water. The flow restrictors ensure equilibrium, particularly in female/male thread ¾" NPT
systems with many users and resulting pressure fluctuations
multiple element
caused by random flow conditions. In other words, the
G 1 ½, G 2, G 2 ¼, G 2 ½
desired throughput is not exceeded.
male thread
Constant flow is achieved by two stainless steel diaphragms
flange version
that are crosswise mounted and riveted together. The gap
DN 20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 / 65 / 80 / 100
between the spring-loaded stainless steel plate and seal face
is continuously varied as the differential pressure changes. Service temperature: -10 ... 300 °C
As the differential pressure decreases the gap widens, and it Operating pressure: max. 200 bar
closes as the pressure increases, thus maintaining a constant Differential pressure: min. 2.0 bar
flow volume through the device. max. 10 bar
L L
Materials (see drawing for details)
GT GT GT GL
Notable benefits ••Brass-version: brass and stainless steel
OO no auxiliary power required ••Stainless steel-version: all stainlessHsteel
OO easy to assemble
Viscosity: max. 30 mm2/s
OO compact design GA
OO reliable - no wearing parts
GI
GI
GI
OO energy-saving
OO easy to fit
Differential pressure curve REG-1x/REG-2x/REG-5x REG-3x/REG-4x/REG-6x

H
L/min
L L
30 L L
GT GT GT GL
25 GT GT GT GL
Fixed
feste orifice
Blende plate
H
20 H
15
Wasser-Durchfluss-
Water flow restrictor
Begrenzer
GA
GA
GI
GI
GI
GI
GI
GI
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 bar
REG-0x with design and materials

H
1 Valve
L/min body Brass Ms 58 1
H
30 or st. steel 1.4301 L/min
30
25
2 Pan St.feste
steel 1.4301
Blende
2
25
20
feste Blende
3 Spring
15
star St. steel 1.4310 20 3
Wasser-Durchfluss-
Begrenzer
10 15
4 Ring St. steel 1.4301 4 Wasser-Durchfluss-
Begrenzer
5 10
5 Circlip
0 St. steel 1.4122 5 5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 bar
0
1/05- 2015
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 bar
2 www.kobold.com No responsibility taken for errors;

subject to change without prior notice.
Flow Restrictors ∙ Single Elements Model REG
Dimensions and Order Details Single Elements G screw thread (Example: REG-0101)
Female/female Female/female
Male thread Female/male thread Female/male thread
Dimensions thread thread
G ¾ G ½ G ¾
G ½ G ¾
L [mm] - 42 50 42 50
GT [mm] - 14 16 14 16
GL [mm] - - - 14 16
GI - G ½ G ¾ G ½ G ¾
GA - - - G ½ G ¾
AF [mm] - 27 36 27 36
H [mm] 15 - - - -
Flow
Tolerance Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless
rate Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
[l/min] steel steel steel steel steel
[l/min]
0.5 ± 0.2 REG-0100 REG-0200 REG-1100D REG-1200D REG-2100D REG-2200D REG-3100D REG-3200D REG-4100D REG-4200D
1 ± 0.2 REG-0101 REG-0201 REG-1101D REG-1201D REG-2101D REG-2201D REG-3101D REG-3201D REG-4101D REG-4201D
40 ± 2 REG-0140 REG-0240 REG-1140D REG-1240D REG-2140D REG-2240D REG-3140D REG-3240D REG-4140D REG-4240D
Single Element Multiple Element

1/05- 2015
No responsibility taken for errors; www.kobold.com 3

Flow Restrictors ∙ Single Elements Model REG
Dimensions and Order Details Single Elements NPT screw thread (Example: REG-5101)
Female/female Model Weight
Female/male thread
Dimensions thread
¾" NPT REG-0xxx approx. 35 g
¾" NPT
L [mm] 45 45 REG-1xxxD approx. 130 g
GT [mm] 14 14 REG-2xxxD approx. 300 g
GL [mm] - 17 REG-3xxxD approx. 110 g
GI ¾" NPT ¾" NPT REG-4xxxD approx. 250 g
GA - ¾" NPT
AF [mm] 30 30
H [mm] - -
Flow
Tolerance Stainless Stainless
rate Brass Brass
[l/min] steel steel
[l/min]
0,5 ± 0,2 REG-5100 REG-5200 REG-6100 REG-6200
1 ± 0,2 REG-5101 REG-5201 REG-6101 REG-6201
2 ± 0,2 REG-5102 REG-5202 REG-6102 REG-6202
3 ± 0,4 REG-5103 REG-5203 REG-6103 REG-6203
4 ± 0,4 REG-5104 REG-5204 REG-6104 REG-6204
5 ± 0,5 REG-5105 REG-5205 REG-6105 REG-6205
6 ± 0,5 REG-5106 REG-5206 REG-6106 REG-6206
8 ± 0,5 REG-5108 REG-5208 REG-6108 REG-6208
9 ± 0,7 REG-5109 REG-5209 REG-6109 REG-6209
10 ± 0,7 REG-5110 REG-5210 REG-6110 REG-6210
11 ± 0,7 REG-5111 REG-5211 REG-6111 REG-6211
12 ± 0,7 REG-5112 REG-5212 REG-6112 REG-6212
16 ± 1,2 REG-5116 REG-5216 REG-6116 REG-6216
20 ± 1,2 REG-5120 REG-5220 REG-6120 REG-6220
25 ± 1,5 REG-5125 REG-5225 REG-6125 REG-6225
30 ± 1,5 REG-5130 REG-5230 REG-6130 REG-6230
40 ± 2 REG-5140 REG-5240 REG-6140 REG-6240 1/05- 2015

Flow Restrictors ∙ Multiple Element Model REG
Order Details Multiple Element (Example: REG-92 R402 080)

Design Size Flow rate* in l/min
..R402..= G 1 ½; 2-fold 1 ... 080
..R403..= G 1 ½; 3-fold 1.5 ... 120
..R503..= G 2; 3-fold 1.5 ... 120
REG-92...
Multiple element made of ..R504..= G 2; 4-fold 2 ... 160
stainless steel 1.4301
..R585..= G 2 ¼; 5-fold 2.5 ... 200
..R656..= G 2 ½; 6-fold 3 ... 240
..R657..= G 2 ½; 7-fold 3.5 ... 280
*The flow rate is calculated by adding the regulating inserts (see also single elements).
Example: The flow rate 55 l/min is obtained with one restrictor with two regulating inserts (30 plus 25 l/min).
Dimensions
REG-92R402 REG-92R403 REG-92R503 REG-92R504
G 11/2 G 1 1 /2 G2 G2
21 23,3 24 32
18,7 18,7 18,7 18,7
REG-92R585 REG-92R656 REG-92R657

G 21/4 G 21/2 G 2 1 /2
36 46 46
18,7 18,7 18,7
Thickness: 15 mm
1/05- 2015
No responsibility taken for errors; www.kobold.com 5

Flow Restrictors ∙ Multiple Element ∙ Flange version Model REG
Order Details Multiple Element (Example: REG-82 F32 2 080)

Design Flange Number of elements Flow rate* in l/min
..F20.. = DN 20
REG-82... ..1.. = 1-fold 0.5 ... 040
..F25.. = DN 25
Multiple element with flange
..F32.. = DN 32 ..2.. = 2-fold 1 ... 080
EN 1092-1, PN 16-40 made of
stainless steel 1.4301 / 1.4571 ..2.. = 2-fold 1 ... 080
..F40.. = DN 40
..3.. = 3-fold 1.5 ... 120
..2.. = 2-fold 1 ... 080
..3.. = 3-fold 1.5 ... 120
..F50.. = DN 50
..4.. = 4-fold 2 ... 160
..5.. = 5-fold 2.5 ... 200
..4.. = 4-fold 2 ... 160
..5.. = 5-fold 2.5 ... 200
..F65.. = DN 65
..6.. = 6-fold 3 ... 240
..7.. = 7-fold 3.5 ... 280
REG-82... ..5.. = 5-fold 2.5 ... 200
Multiple element with flange
..6.. = 6-fold 3 ... 240
EN 1092-1, PN 16 made of
stainless steel 1.4301 / 1.4571 ..F80.. = DN 80 ..7.. = 7-fold 3.5 ... 280
..8.. = 8-fold 4 ... 320
..9.. = 9-fold 4.5 ... 360
..6.. = 6-fold 3 ... 240
..7.. = 7-fold 3.5 ... 280
..8.. = 8-fold 4 ... 320
..F1H.. = DN 100
..Z.. = 10-fold 5 ... 400
..B.. = 12-fold 6 ... 480
..D.. = 14-fold 7 ... 560
*The flow rate is calculated by adding the regulating inserts (see also single elements).
Example: The flow rate 55 l/min is obtained with one restrictor with two regulating inserts (30 plus 25 l/min).
Dimensions
A
Example: REG-82F322 L
D
t = 18
t = 18 for DN 20 ... DN 65
t = 20 for DN 80 / DN 100
B
REG-82 Fxx-Flange dimensions for PN 16-40
Outer-Ø Hole circle-Ø Hole-Ø Sealing surfaces-Ø*
DN PN Screws
[A] [L] [B] [D]
20 16-40 105 75 14 4 x M12 58

25 16-40 115 85 14 4 x M12 68
32 16-40 140 100 18 4 x M16 78
40 16-40 150 110 18 4 x M16 88
50 16 165 125 18 4 x M16 102
65 16 185 145 18 8 x M16 122
80 16 200 160 18 8 x M16 138
100 16 220 180 18 8 x M16 158
* Sealing surfaces on both sides

1/05- 2015

for
Flow Restrictors
Model: REG
REG
1. Contents
1. Contents ........................................................................................................ 2
2. Note .............................................................................................................. 3
3. Instrument Inspection .................................................................................... 3
4. Regulation Use.............................................................................................. 3
5. Operating Principle........................................................................................ 4
6. Mechanical Connection ................................................................................. 4
7. Technical Information .................................................................................... 5
8. Differential Pressure Curve ........................................................................... 5
9. Dimensions and Order Codes ....................................................................... 6
Herstellung und Vertrieb durch:
Kobold Messring GmbH

Nordring 22-24
D-65719 Hofheim
Tel.: +49 (0)6192-2990
Fax: +49(0)6192-23398
E-Mail: info.de@kobold.com
Internet: www.kobold.com
page 2 REG K02/1107

REG
2. Note
Please read these operating instructions before unpacking and putting the unit
into operation. Follow the instructions precisely as described herein.
The devices are only to be used, maintained and serviced by persons familiar
with these operating instructions and in accordance with local regulations
applying to Health & Safety and prevention of accidents.
When used in machines, the measuring unit should be used only when the
machines fulfil the EWG-machine guidelines.
as per PED 97/23/EG

In acc. with Article 3 Paragraph (3), "Sound Engineering Practice", of the
PED 97/23/EC no CE mark.
Diagram 8, Pipe, Group 1 dangerous fluids
3. Instrument Inspection
All instruments are inspected before shipping and sent out in perfect condition.
Should damage to a device be visible, we recommend a thorough inspection of
the delivery packaging. In case of damage, please inform your parcel service /
forwarding agent immediately, since they are responsible for damages during
transit.
Scope of delivery:
The standard delivery includes:
• Flow Restrictors model: REG
• Operating Instructions
4. Regulation Use
Any use of the Flow Restrictor, model: REG, which exceeds the manufacturers
specification may invalidate its warranty. Therefore, any resulting damage is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer. The user assumes all risk for such usage.
REG K02/1107 page 3

REG
5. Operating Principle
KOBOLD model REG flow restrictors serve to keep constant quantities of liquids
in pipework systems. The REG rate regulators are ideally suited for the simple
restriction of a preset value of throughputs of water or of liquids similar to water.
The flow restrictors ensure an equilibrium, particularly in systems with many
consumers and resulting pressure fluctuations caused by random flow conditions.
In other words, the desired throughput is not exceeded.
Constant flow is achieved by two stainless steel spring plates that are crosswise
mounted and riveted together. The gap between the spring-loaded stainless steel
plate and the seal-surface is continuously varied as the differential pressure
changes. As the differential pressure decreases, the gap widens, and it closes as
the pressure increases, thus maintaining a constant flow volume through the
device.
6. Mechanical Connection
Before installation:
• Remove all transport securing devices and make sure that there are no more
packaging parts left in the device.
• Make sure that the permitted maximum operating pressures and temperatures
for the device are not exceeded (see 7 Technical Information)
• Install the flow limiter into the piping without mechanical stress.
• Protect the measuring pipe against external damage.
• Avoid pressure surges in the measuring pipe e.g. by blocking the flow quickly.
• If possible, after mechanical installation, make sure that the connection
between screw connection and pipe is tight and does not leak.
Maximum tightening torques for process connection:
G½ 30 Nm
G¾ 30 Nm
G1 38 Nm
Warning! The differential pressure must not exceed 10 bar.
page 4 REG K02/1107

REG
7. Technical Information
Connections: female thread G ½, G ¾
female/male thread G 1/2-G ¾
male thread G ¾
female thread ¾ NPT

female/male thread ¾ NPT
multiple element
male thread
G 1 ½, G 2, G 2 ¼, G 2 ½
Flange DN 20/25/32/40/50
Service temperature: -10...+300 °C
Operating pressure: max. 200 bar
Differential pressure: min. 2.0 bar
Differential pressure: max. 10 bar
Materials
(see drawing for details):
Brass-version brass and stainless steel
Stainless steel-version all stainless steel
Viscosity: max. 30 mm2/s
8. Differential Pressure Curve
REG K02/1107 page 5

REG
9. Dimensions and Order Codes
page 6 REG K02/1107

REG
Dimensions and Order Details G screw thread (example: REG-0101)
Female/female
Male thread Female/female thread Female/male thread Female/male thread
Dimensions thread*
G 3/4 G 3/4 G 1/2 G 3/4
G 1/2
L [mm] - 36 (42) 45 (50) 36 (42) 45 (50)
GT [mm] - 12 (14) 14 (16) 13 (14) 14 (16)
GL [mm] - - - 12 (14) 17 (16)
GI - G 1/2 G 3/4 G 1/2 G 3/4
GA - - - G 1/2 G 3/4
AF [mm] - 24 (27) 30 (36) 24 (27) 30 (36)
H [mm] 15 - - - -
Through-
Tolerance Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless
put Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
L/min steel steel steel steel steel
L/min
0,5 ± 0.2 REG-0100 REG-0200 REG-1100 REG-1200 REG-2100 REG-2200 REG-3100 REG-3200 REG-4100 REG-4200
1 ± 0.2 REG-0101 REG-0201 REG-1101 REG-1201 REG-2101 REG-2201 REG-3101 REG-3201 REG-4101 REG-4201
40 ±2 REG-0140 REG-0240 REG-1140 REG-1240 REG-2140 REG-2240 REG-3140 REG-3240 REG-4240 REG-4240
*Values in brackets for versions with extended thread (please add D to the order number)
REG K02/1107 page 7

REG
Dimensions and Order Details NPT screw thread (example: REG-5101)
Female/female thread Female/male thread
Dimensions
¾ NPT ¾ NPT
L [mm] 45 45
GT [mm] 14 14
GL [mm] - 17
GI ¾ NPT ¾ NPT
GA - ¾ NPT
AF [mm] 30 30
H [mm] - -
Throughput Tolerance Stainless Stainless
Brass Brass
L/min L/min steel steel
0,5 ± 0,2 REG-5100 REG-5200 REG-6100 REG-6200
1 ± 0,2 REG-5101 REG-5201 REG-6101 REG-6201
2 ± 0,2 REG-5102 REG-5202 REG-6102 REG-6202
3 ± 0,4 REG-5103 REG-5203 REG-6103 REG-6203
4 ± 0,4 REG-5104 REG5204 REG-6104 REG-6204
5 ± 0,5 REG-5105 REG-5205 REG-6105 REG-6205
6 ± 0,5 REG-5106 REG-5206 REG-6106 REG-6206
8 ± 0,5 REG-5108 REG-5208 REG-6108 REG-6208
9 ± 0,7 REG-5109 REG-5209 REG-6109 REG-6209
10 ± 0,7 REG-5110 REG-5210 REG-6110 REG-6210
11 ± 0,7 REG-5111 REG-5211 REG-6111 REG-6211
12 ± 0,7 REG-5112 REG-5212 REG-6112 REG-6212
16 ± 1,2 REG-5116 REG-5216 REG-6116 REG-6216
20 ± 1,2 REG-5120 REG-5220 REG-6120 REG-6220
25 ± 1,5 REG-5125 REG-5225 REG-6125 REG-6225
30 ± 1,5 REG-5130 REG-5230 REG-6130 REG-6230
40 ±2 REG-5140 REG-5240 REG-6140 REG-6240
page 8 REG K02/1107

REG
Order Details multiple element (example: REG-92 R402 080)
Design Size Throughput* in L/min
..R402..=G 1 1.2; 2-fold 1.0...080
..R403..=G 1 1.2; 3-fold 1.5...120
..R503..= G 2; 3-fold 1.5...120

REG-92...
Multiple element made of ..R504..= G 2; 4-fold 2.0...160
stainless steel 1.4301
..R585..=G 2 1.4; 5-fold 2.5...200
..R656..=G 2 1.2; 6-fold 3.0...240
..R657..=G 2 1.2; 7-fold 3.5...280

*The throughput is calculated by adding the regulating inserts (see also single elements).
Example: The throughput 55 L/min is obtained with one restrictor
with two regulating inserts (30 plus 25 L/min).
Thickness: 15 mm
REG K02/1107 page 9

REG
Order Details multiple element – flange version
(example: REG-82 F20 2 080)
Number of
Design Flange regulating Throughput* in L/min
inserts
..2.. = 2 fold 040...080
..F20..= DN 20
..3.. = 3 fold 040...120
..2.. = 2 fold 040...080
..3.. = 3 fold 040...120
..F25..= DN 25
..4.. = 4 fold 040...160
REG-82...
Multiple element with flange ..5.. = 5 fold 040...200
EN 1092-1, PN 16-40 ..2.. = 2 fold 040...080
stainless steel 1.4301/1.4571
..3.. = 3 fold 040...120
..F32..= DN 32 ..4.. = 4 fold 040...160
..F40..= DN 40
..5.. = 5 fold 040...200
..F50..= DN 50
..6.. = 6 fold 040...240
..7.. = 7 fold 040...280
*The throughput is calculated by adding the regulating inserts (see also single elements).
Example: The throughput 55 L/min is obtained with one restrictor
with two regulating inserts (30 plus 25 L/min).
REG-82F325
REG-82 Fxx-Flange-dimensions for PN 16-40
DN Außen-Ø Lochkreis-Ø Bohrungs- Ø Schrauben Dichtflächen- Ø*

[A] [L] [B] [D]
20 105 75 14 4 x M 12 58
25 115 85 14 4 x M 12 68
32 140 100 18 4 x M 16 78
40 150 110 18 4 x M 16 88
50 165 125 18 4 x M 16 102
page 10 REG K02/1107

• Diaphragm seal - 990.52

Mechanical
pressure measurement
Bourdon tube pressure gauge

Stainless steel version
Models 232.50, 233.50
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02
for further approvals

see page 2
Applications
■■ With liquid-filled case for applications with high dynamic
pressure loads or vibrations 1)
■■ For gaseous and liquid aggressive media that are
not highly viscous or crystallising, also in aggressive
ambience
■■ Process industry: Chemical/petro-chemical, power
stations, mining, on- and offshore, environmental techno-
logy, machine building and general plant construction
Special features
■■ Excellent load-cycle stability and shock resistance
■■ All stainless steel construction
■■ German Lloyd, Gosstandart and DVGW approval
■■ Scale ranges up to 0 … 1,600 bar Bourdon tube pressure gauge model 232.50
Description Pressure limitation

NS 63: Steady: 3/4 x full scale value
Design Fluctuating: 2/3 x full scale value
EN 837-1 Short time: Full scale value
Nominal size in mm NS 100, 160: Steady: Full scale value
63, 100, 160 Fluctuating: 0.9 x full scale value
Short time: 1.3 x full scale value
Accuracy class
NS 63: 1.6 Permissible temperature
NS 100, 160: 1.0 Ambient: -40 ... +60 °C without liquid filling
-20 ... +60 °C gauges with glycerine filling 1)
Scale ranges
Medium: +200 °C maximum without liquid filling
NS 63: 0 ... 1 to 0 ... 1,000 bar
+100 °C maximum with liquid filling 1)
NS 100: 0 ... 0.6 to 0 ... 1,000 bar
NS 160: 0 ... 0.6 to 0 ... 1,600 bar Temperature effect
or all other equivalent vacuum or combined pressure and When the temperature of the measuring system deviates
vacuum ranges from the reference temperature (+20 °C):
max. ±0.4 %/10 K of full scale value
Ingress protection
1) Model 233.50 IP 65 per EN 60529 / lEC 60529
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 06/2015 Page 1 of 3
Data sheets showing similar products:

Stainless steel, safety version; model 232.30; see data sheet PM 02.04
Standard version Special versions
Process connection Gauges for ammonia plants (NS 100 and 160)
Stainless steel 316L (NS 63: 1.4571), With temperature scale for refrigerant R 717 (NH3) in °C,
Lower mount (LM) or lower back mount (LBM), NS 63 centre Scale ranges: -1 ... 0 ... 15 bar or -1 ... 0 ... 26 bar
back mount (CBM)
NS 63: G ¼ B (male), 14 mm flats
NS 100, 160: G ½ B, 22 mm flats
Pressure element
Stainless steel 316L
CE conformity
C-type or helical type
Pressure equipment directive
Movement 97/23/EC, PS > 200 bar, module A, pressure accessory
Stainless steel
ATEX directive (option)
Ignition protection type „c“, constructive safety
Dial
Aluminium, white, black lettering,
NS 63 with pointer stop pin
Approvals
Pointer
Aluminium, black ■■ GL, ships, shipbuilding (e.g. offshore), Germany
■■ DVGW, safety (e.g. electrical safety, overpressure, ...),
Case Germany
Stainless steel, with pressure relief at case circumference, ■■ EAC, import certificate, customs union Russia/Belarus/
12 o'clock (NS 63) and on the back of the case (NS 100 Kazakhstan
and 160), ■■ GOST, metrology/measurement technology, Russia
Scale ranges ≤ 0 ... 16 bar with compensating valve to vent ■■ KBA, automotive, European Community
case ■■ CRN, safety (e.g. electr. safety, overpressure, ...), Canada
■■ KOSHA, ignition protection type „i“ - intrinsic safety,
Window South Korea
Laminated safety glass
(NS 63: Polycarbonate)
Ring
Certificates (option)
Cam ring (bayonet type), stainless steel
■■ 2.2 test report per EN 10204 (e.g. state-of-the-art
Filling liquid (for model 233.50) manufacturing, material proof, indication accuracy)
■■ 3.1 inspection certificate per EN 10204 (e.g. indication
Glycerine 99.7 %
(Glyzerine 86.5 % for scale range ≤ 0 ... 2.5 bar) accuracy)
1) Option
Approvals and certificates, see website

Options
■■ Other process connection
■■ Sealings (model 910.17, see data sheet AC 09.08)
■■ Assembly on diaphragm seals see product review DS
■■ Measuring system Monel (model 26x.50, not with NS 160
back mount connection)
■■ Surface or panel mounting flange, stainless steel
■■ Panel mounting flange, polished stainless steel
■■ Triangular bezel, polished stainless steel, with clamp
■■ Ambient temperatures -40 °C: Silicone oil filling
■■ Limit indicator at NS 100 and 160, see data sheet
SP 09.03
■■ Pressure gauge with switch contacts, see model
PGS23.1x0, data sheet PV 22.02
■■ Pressure gauge with electrical output signal, see model
PGT23.100/160, data sheet PV 12.04
Page 2 of 3 WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 06/2015

Dimensions in mm
Standard version
Lower mount (LM)
≤ 16 bar with compensating valve
1520806.03
> 16 bar without compensating valve
NS 63, centre back mount (CBM) NS 100, 160, lower back mount (LBM)
14112247.01
≤ 16 bar with compensating valve ≤ 16 bar with compensating valve
1520814.03
> 16 bar without compensating valve > 16 bar without compensating valve
NS Dimensions in mm Weight in kg
a b b1 b2 D1 D2 e f G h ±1 SW Model 232.50 Model 233.50
63 9.5 33 33 57 63 62 11.5 - G¼B 54 14 0.16 0.20
100 15.5 49.5 49.5 83 101 99 17.5 30 G½B 87 22 0.60 0.90
160 15.5 49.5 2) 49.5 2) 83 1) 161 159 17.5 50 G½B 118 22 1.10 2.00
Process connection per EN 837-1 / 7.3
1) Plus 16 mm with scale ranges ≥ 100 bar

2) Plus 16 mm with scale range 1,600 bar
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Connection size / Connection location / Options
© 2000 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, all rights reserved.
The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing.
We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
WIKA data sheet PM 02.02 ∙ 06/2015 Page 3 of 3

06/2015 EN
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel. +49 9372 132-0
Fax +49 9372 132-406
info@wika.de
www.wika.de
Diaphragm seals
Diaphragm seal with sterile connection

For sanitary applications
Models 990.22, 990.52 and 990.53, clamp connection
WIKA data sheet DS 99.41
®
for further approvals
see page 3
74 - 06
Applications
■■ Food and beverage production

■■ Pharmaceutical industry, biotechnology, production of
active ingredients
■■ Aseptic applications
Special features
■■ For cleaning easy to open

■■ Quick cleaning of measuring point, without residue Diaphragm seal with sterile connection, model 990.22
■■ Suitable for SIP and CIP
■■ 3-A compliant
■■ Compliant per ASME BPE
Description The models 990.22, 990.52 and 990.53 diaphragm seals

with clamp connection have been specifically developed for
Diaphragm seals are used to protect the pressure measuring use in sterile processes and are integrated into the process
instrument from aggressive, adhesive, crystallising, by means of a clamp. This enables a hygienic integration of
corrosive, highly viscous, environmentally hazardous or the measuring instrument into the process.
toxic media. A diaphragm made of the appropriate material
provides for the separation from the medium to be measured. The diaphragm seal systems can withstand the cleaning
Thus even the most difficult measuring requirements can be vapour temperatures occurring in the SIP processes and
met by combining measuring instruments with diaphragm thus ensure a sterile connection between the medium to be
seals. measured and the diaphragm seal.
A fluid inside the system, which can be chosen to suit the Assembly of the diaphragm seal and measuring instrument
particular application, hydraulically transmits the pressure to is made via a direct assembly as standard or optionally via a
the measuring instrument. cooling element or a flexible capillary.
Almost limitless application possibilities exist due to the For the material selection WIKA offers a variety of solutions,
large number of available variants, such as diaphragm seal in which the upper part and the diaphragm are made of
designs or materials. The type of process connection (flange, identical materials. Stainless steel 316L (1.4435) is used as
threaded and sterile connection) and the basic method of standard material, other special materials are available on
manufacture are important design differentiation criteria. request.
For further technical information on diaphragm seals and Measuring systems with model 990.22, 990.52 and 990.53
diaphragm seal systems see IN 00.06 "Application, operating WIKA diaphragm seals are successfully used in the life
principle, designs". science industry, in food production, pharmaceutical and
biotechnology applications.
WIKA data sheet DS 99.41 ∙ 02/2014 Page 1 of 5
Data sheets showing similar products:

Versions with thread; model 990.18 ... 21; see data sheet DS 99.40
Versions with pressure transmitter; model SA-11; see data sheet PE 81.80
Standard version Options
Type of process connection ■■ Higher nominal pressures on request (for maximum

Model 990.22: Clamp connection pressure range consider pressure rating of clamp)
Model 990.52: Clamp connection per DIN 32676 ■■ Surface roughness of the wetted parts Ra ≤ 0.38 μm per
Model 990.53: Clamp connection per ISO 2852 ASME BPE SF4, only with electropolished surface (except
For exact designs and nominal widths see tables on page 4 for weld seam)
■■ Sealing from EPDM or PTFE
Nominal pressure ■■ Connection to measuring instrument
See tables on page 4 G 1/2, G 1/4, 1/2 NPT or 1/4 NPT (female)
■■ Origin of wetted parts (EU, CH, USA)
Measuring ranges ■■ Marking of the diaphragm seal with 3-A standard 74-06
min. 0 ... 0.6 bar, max. 0 ... 40 bar
(also vacuum and +/- measuring ranges)
Material of upper body

CrNi-Stahl 1.4435 (316 L)
Material of wetted parts

Diaphragm: Stainless steel 1.4435 (316L)
Surface roughness of the wetted parts

Ra ≤ 0.76 µm per ASME BPE SF3 (except for weld seam)
Level of cleanliness of wetted parts

Oil and grease free per ASTM G93-03 level E (WIKA
standard) and ISO 15001 (< 550 mg/m2)
Connection to measuring instrument

Axial weld-in connection
Installation example
Diaphragm seal, sterile connection, model 990.22 with
directly assembled pressure gauge on a pipe socket
Pressure measuring instrument

(pressure gauge or transmitter)
Direct assembly
Diaphragm seal
Diaphragm
(welded with diaphragm seal) Ø Mb
Ø d2
Clamp
Not included Ø d1
Sealing in delivery
Welding socket Ø d3
Legend:
Ø Mb Effective diameter of diaphragm
P4_Z_1672.01
Ø d2 Inner diameter of pipe

Ø d1 Outer diameter of pipe
Ø d3 Flange diameter
h Installation height
Page 2 of 5 WIKA data sheet DS 99.41 ∙ 02/2014

Additional information for diaphragm Materials
seal systems
Upper body Wetted part
See Technical information IN 00.06 "Diaphragm seals Diaphragm
- Diaphragm seal systems, application, operating Standard
principle, designs"
Stainless steel 1.4435 (316L) Stainless steel 1.4435 (316L)
■■ Pressure measuring instrument model Option

■■ Connection to the measuring instrument: Direct assembly Stainless steel 1.4435 Stainless steel 1.4435 (316L),
(316L), electropolished electropolished
(calibrated in vertical mounting position, process
connection facing downwards) Stainless steel 1.4539 (904L) Stainless steel 1.4539 (904L)
■■ Process temperature Hastelloy C276 (2.4819) Hastelloy C276 (2.4819)
■■ Ambient temperature Hastelloy C22 (2.4602) Hastelloy C22 (2.4602)
■■ System fill fluid
- Recommendation for the food and beverage production: Further material combinations on request
Neobee® KN 59 (FDA 21 CFR 172.856, 21 CFR 174.5)
- Recommendation for pharmaceutical and cosmetics
applications: Medicinal white mineral oil KN 92 (FDA 21
CFR 172.878, 21 CFR 178.3620(a); USP, EP, JP)
Options for diaphragm seal systems Approvals

■■ Connection to the measuring instrument via cooling ■■ GOST-R, import certificate, Russia
element or capillary ■■ CRN, safety (e.g. electr. safety, overpressure, ...), Canada
■■ Vacuum service (suitable for vacuum operation)
■■ Higher level of cleanliness of wetted parts
Oil and grease free per ASTM G93-03 level C and Certificates 2)
ISO 15001 (< 66 mg/m2)
■■ Height difference between measuring point and pressure ■■ 2.2 test report per EN 10204 (e.g. state-of-the-art
measuring instrument with capillary in metre increments manufacturing, material proof, indication accuracy for
(max. 7 m with silicone oils/edible oils) diaphragm seal systems)
■■ Mounting bracket (required for connection to the measu- ■■ 3.1 inspection certificate per EN 10204 (e.g. material
ring instrument via capillary) proof for wetted metallic parts, indication accuracy for
- Form H per DIN 16281, 100 mm, aluminium, black diaphragm seal systems)
- Form H per DIN 16281, 100 mm, stainless steel ■■ FDA conformity of the system fill fluid
- Bracket for pipe mounting, for pipe Ø 20 ... 80 mm, steel ■■ 3-A conformity of the diaphragm seal, based on a third
party verification, in accordance with 3-A standard 74-06
■■ EHEDG conformity of the model 990.53 diaphragm
seal (only in combination with a Kalrez® stainless steel
gasket from Dupont de Nemours or with a T-ring seal from
Combifit International B.V.)
■■ Manufacturer's declaration regarding EU regulation
1935/2004 EC
■■ Others on request
2) Option
For approvals and certificates see website

Dimensions in mm
Model 990.22
Type of process connection: Clamp connection per Type of process connection: Clamp connection per
DIN 32676 DIN 32676
Pipe standard: Pipes per DIN 11866 row B or ISO 1127 Pipe standard: Pipes per DIN 11866 row C or ASME BPE
row 1
DN For pipe PN 1) Dimensions in mm DN For pipe PN 1) Dimensions in mm

Outer Ø x Outer Ø x
wall thickness d3 d2 Mb wall thickness d3 d2 Mb
26.9 26.9 x 1.6 40 50.5 23.7 22 1" 25.4 x 1.65 40 50.5 22.1 22
33.7 33.7 x 2 40 50.5 29.7 25 1 ½" 38.1 x 1.65 40 50.5 34.8 32
42.4 42.4 x 2 40 64 38.4 32 2" 50.8 x 1.65 40 64 47.5 40
48.3 48.3 x 2 40 64 44.3 40 2 ½" 63.5 x 1.65 40 77.5 60.2 52
60.3 60.3 x 2 40 77.5 56.3 52 3" 76.2 x 1.65 25 91 72.9 59
76.1 76.1 x 2 25 91 72.1 59
1) For maximum pressure range consider pressure rating of clamp.
Type of process connection: Clamp connection

Pipe standard: Pipes per BS4825 part 3 and O.D.-Tube
DN For pipe PN 1) Dimensions in mm

Outer Ø x
wall thickness d3 d2 Mb
1" 25.4 x 1.6 40 50.5 22.1 22
1 ½" 38.1 x 1.6 40 50.5 34.9 32
2" 50.8 x 1.6 40 64 47.6 40
2 ½" 63.5 x 1.6 40 77.5 60.3 52
3" 76.2 x 1.6 25 91 73.0 59
Model 990.52 Model 990.53

Type of process connection: Clamp connection per Type of process connection: Clamp 2)
DIN 32676 connection per ISO 2852

Pipe standard: Pipes per DIN 11866 row A or DIN 11850 Pipe standard: Pipes per ISO 2037 and
row 2 BS 4825 part 1
DN For pipe PN 1) Dimensions in mm DN For pipe PN 1) Dimensions in mm
Outer Ø x Outer Ø x
wall thickness d3 d2 Mb wall thickness d3 d2 Mb
25 29 x 1.5 40 50.5 26 25 25 25 x 1.2 40 50.5 22.6 22
32 35 x 1.5 40 50.5 32 29 28 28 x 1.2 40 50.5 25.6 22
40 41 x 1.5 40 50.5 38 32 33.7 33.7 x 1.2 40 50.5 31.3 25
50 53 x 1.5 40 64 50 40 38 38 x 1.2 40 50.5 35.6 32
65 70 x 2 25 91 66 59 40 40 x 1.2 40 64 37.6 32
80 85 x 2 25 106 81 72 51 51 x 1.2 40 64 48.6 40
100 104 x 2 25 119 100 89 63.5 63.5 x 1.6 40 77.5 60.3 52
70 70 x 1.6 25 91 66.8 59
76.1 76.1 x 1.6 25 91 72.9 59
88.9 88.9 x 2 25 106 84.9 72
101.6 101.6 x 2 25 119 97.6 89

2) Observe the note on EHEDG conformity on page 3 under "Certificates".
Page 4 of 5 WIKA data sheet DS 99.41 ∙ 02/2014

Ordering information
Diaphragm seal:
Diaphragm seal model / Process connection (type of process connection, pipe standard, pipe dimension) / Material
(upper body, diaphragm) / Surface roughness of wetted parts / Sealing / Connection to the measuring instrument / Level of
cleanliness of wetted parts / Origin of wetted parts / Certificates
Diaphragm seal system:

Diaphragm seal model / Process connection (type of process connection, pipe standard, pipe dimension) / Material (upper
body, diaphragm) / Surface roughness of wetted parts / Sealing / Pressure measuring instrument model (per data sheet) /
Assembly (direct assembly, cooling element, capillary) / min. and max. process temperature / min. and max. ambient
MM/YYYY country code based on 02/2014 GB
temperature / Vacuum service / System fill fluid / Certificates / Height difference / Level of cleanliness of wetted parts / Origin
of wetted parts / Mounting bracket
© 2004 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, all rights reserved.
The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing.
We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel. +49 9372 132-0
Fax +49 9372 132-406
info@wika.de
www.wika.de
11.5. Pressure switch – PN5004 - IFM

PN5004 Pressure sensors
1: 4-digit alphanumeric display

2: LEDs (display unit / switching status)
3: Programming button
Made in Germany
Product characteristics
Electronic pressure monitor
Connector
Process connection: G¼ I
Function programmable
1 switching output
4-digit alphanumeric display
Measuring range: -1...10 bar / -14.5...145 psi / -0.1...1.0 MPa
Application
Application Type of pressure: relative pressure
Liquids and gases
Pressure rating 75 bar 1087 psi 7.5 MPa
Bursting pressure min. 150 bar 2175 psi 15 MPa
Medium temperature [°C] -25...80
Electrical data
Electrical design DC PNP
Operating voltage [V] 18...36 DC ¹)
Current consumption [mA] < 50
Insulation resistance [MΩ] > 100 (500 V DC)
Protection class III
Reverse polarity protection yes
Overvoltage protection [V] up to 40 V
Outputs
Output 1 switching output
Output function normally open / closed programmable
Current rating [mA] 250
Voltage drop [V] <2
Short-circuit protection pulsed
Switching frequency [Hz] ≤ 170
Measuring / setting range
Measuring range -1...10 bar -14.5...145 psi -0.1...1.0 MPa
Setting range
Set point, SP -0.90...10.00 bar -12...145 psi -0.090...1.000 MPa
Reset point, rP -0.95...9.95 bar -13...144 psi -0.095...0.995 MPa
in steps of 0.05 bar 1 psi 0.005 MPa
Factory setting SP1 = 2.50 bar; rP1 = 2.30 bar
Accuracy / deviations
Accuracy / deviations
(in % of the span)
Switch point accuracy < ± 0.5
Characteristics deviation *) < ± 0.25 (BFSL) / < ± 0.5 (LS)
Hysteresis < ± 0.25
Repeatability **) < ± 0.1
Long-term stability ***) < ± 0.05
Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the temperature range -20...80° C (in % of the span per 10 K)
Greatest TEMPCO of the zero point 0.2
Greatest TEMPCO of the span 0.2
Reaction times
Power-on delay time [s] 0.3
Delay time programmable dS, dr [s] 0; 0.2...50
Integrated watchdog yes
Software / programming
Programming options hysteresis / window function; N.O. / N.C; on delay, off delay; damping; display unit
Environment
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...80 (UB < 32 V) / -25...60 (UB > 32 V)
Storage temperature [°C] -40...100
Protection IP 65
Tests / approvals
EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD: 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: 2 kV
EN 61000-4-5 Surge: 0.5/1 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: 10 V
Shock resistance DIN IEC 68-2-27: 50 g (11 ms)
Vibration resistance DIN IEC 68-2-6: 20 g (10...2000 Hz)
MTTF [Years] 231
Mechanical data
Process connection G¼ I
Materials (wetted parts) stainless steel (303S22); ceramics; FPM (Viton)
Housing materials stainless steel (304S15); stainless steel 316L / 1.4404; PC (Makrolon); PBT (Pocan);
PEI; FPM (Viton); PTFE
Switching cycles min. 100 million
Weight [kg] 0.257
Displays / operating elements
Display Display unit 3 x LED green
Switching status LED yellow
Function display 4-digit alphanumeric display
Measured values 4-digit alphanumeric display
Electrical connection
Connection M12 connector; gold-plated contacts
Wiring
Remarks
Remarks ¹) to EN50178, SELV, PELV
*) BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line / LS = Limit Value Setting
**) with temperature fluctuations < 10 K
***) in % of value of measuring range / 6 months
Pack quantity [piece] 1
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. — GB — PN5004 — 06.09.2010
Operating instructions
Pressure sensor
UK
PN50xx
05 / 2010
704789 / 00
Contents
1 Preliminary note��3
1.1 Symbols used��3
2 Safety instructions��3
3 Functions and features��4
4 Function��5
4.1 Processing of the measured signals��5
4.2 Switching function��5
5 Installation��6
6 Electrical connection��6
7 Operating and display elements ��7
8 Menu��8
8.1 Menu structure ��8
8.2 Explanation of the menu��9
9 Parameter setting��10
9.1 Parameter setting general��10
9.2 Configuring the display (optional)��12
9.3 Setting the output signal��12
9.3.1 Setting the output function ��12
9.3.2 Setting the switching limits ��12
9.4 User settings (optional)��12
9.4.1 Setting the delay time for OUT1��12
9.4.2 Setting the damping for OUT1��12
9.5 Service functions��13
9.5.1 Reading the min./max. values for the system pressure��13
10 Operation��13
10.1 Read the set parameter values��13
10.2 Fault indication��13
11 Scale drawing��14
12 Technical data��14
12.1 Setting ranges��16
13 Factory setting��17
2
1 Preliminary note
1.1 Symbols used
► Instruction
> Reaction, result
[…] Designation of buttons, switches or indications
→ Cross-reference
Important note
Non-compliance can result in malfunctions or interference. UK
2 Safety instructions
• Read this document before installing the unit. Ensure that the product is suita-
ble for your application without any restrictions.
• Non-adherence to the operating instructions or technical data can lead to
personal injury and/or damage to property.
• In all applications check compliance of the product materials (→ chapter 12
Technical data) with the media to be measured.
• Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer ifm.
For units with cULus approval and the scope of validity cULus:
The device shall be supplied from an isolating transformer having a secondary
Listed fuse rated as noted in the following table.
Overcurrent protection
Control-circuit wire size Maximum protective device rating
AWG (mm2) Ampere
26 (0.13) 1
24 (0.20) 2
22 (0.32) 3
20 (0.52) 5
18 (0.82) 7
16 (1.3) 10
The Sensor shall be connected only by using any R/C (CYJV2) cord, having
suitable ratings.
3
3 Functions and features
The unit monitors the system pressure of machines and installations.
Applications
Type of pressure: relative pressure
Permissible
Order no. Measuring range Bursting pressure
overload pressure
bar PSI bar PSI bar PSI
PN5000 0...400 0...5 800 600 8 700 1 000 14 500
PN5001 0...250 0...3 625 400 5 800 850 12 300
PN5002 0...100 0...1 450 300 4 350 650 9 400
PN5003 0...25 0...363 150 2 175 350 5 075
PN5004 -1...10 -14.5...145 75 1 087 150 2 175
PN5006 0...2.5 0...36.3 20 290 50 725
PN5007 0...1 0...14.5 10 145 30 450
MPa = bar ÷ 10 / kPa = bar × 100
Static and dynamic overpressures exceeding the indicated overload pres-
sure are to be avoided by taking appropriate measures.
The indicated bursting pressure must not be exceeded. Even if the bur-
sting pressure is exceeded only for a short time, the unit can be destroyed.
NOTE: Risk of injury!
Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer
ifm.
High-pressure units (400 bar) are supplied with an integrated damping device to
comply with the regulations for UL approval and to avoid any risk of injury in case
of bursting when bursting pressure is exceeded.
• When the damping device is removed the damping device can become unus-
able.
• When the damping device is removed the unit can no longer be used under UL
conditions,
If you have any questions, please contact ifm electronic’s sales specialists.
4
4 Function
4.1 Processing of the measured signals
• The unit shows the current system pressure on its display.
• It generates 1 output signal according to the parameter setting.
OUT1 switching signal for pressure limit values
4.2 Switching function

OUT1 changes its switching state if it is above or below the set switching limits
(SP1, rP1). The following switching functions can be selected: UK
• Hysteresis function / normally open: [OU1] = [Hno] (→ fig. 1).
• Hysteresis function / normally closed: [OU1] = [Hnc] (→ fig. 1).
First the set point (SP1) is set, then the reset point (rP1) at the requested distance.
• Window function / normally open: [OU1] = [Fno] (→ fig. 2).
• Window function / normally closed: [OU1] = [Fnc] (→ fig. 2).
The width of the window can be set by means of the distance between SP1 and
rP1. SP1 = maximum value, rP1 = minimum value.
� 1 � �� 2
��
��
��
� �
� �
� ��
�
� �
� ��
��
P = system pressure; HY = hysteresis; FE = window
5
5 Installation
Before mounting and removing the sensor, make sure that no pressure is
applied to the system.
► Insert the unit in a G¼ process connection.
► Tighten firmly.
6 Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
► Disconnect power.
► Connect the unit as follows:
2 1 BN
L
3 1 4 BK
4 3 BU
L
Pin 1 Ub+
Pin 3 Ub-
Pin 4 switching output for pressure monitoring
Pin 2 not connected
Core colours of ifm sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black).
6
7 Operating and display elements
� � � � � � � �
��
��
�� UK
1 to 8: Indicator LEDs
-- LED 1 to LED 4 = system pressure in unit of measurement as indicated on the label.
-- LED 4 not used for units with 3 adjustable units of measurement.
-- LEDs 5 to 7 not used.
-- LED 8 = switching state of the output.
9: Alphanumeric display, 4 digits
-- Indication of the current system pressure.
-- Indication of the parameters and parameter values.
10: Set pushbutton
-- Setting of the parameter values (scrolling by holding pressed, incremental by pressing
briefly).
11: Mode/Enter pushbutton
-- Selection of the parameters and acknowledgement of the parameter values.
7
8 Menu
8.1 Menu structure
�
��
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
�
� �
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
8
8.2 Explanation of the menu
SP1/rP1 Maximum / minimum value for system pressure, at which output 1 changes
its switching status.
OU1 Output function for OUT1:
• Switching signal for the limit values: hysteresis function [H ..] or window
function [F ..], normally open [. no] or normally closed [. nc] each.
EF Extended functions / Opening menu level 2.
Uni Standard unit of measurement for the system pressure.
HI Maximum value memory for the system pressure. UK
LO Minimum value memory for the system pressure (only PN5004).
dS1 Switch-on delay for für OUT1.
dr1 Reset delay für OUT1.
dAP Damping for OUT1.
diS Update rate and orientation of the display.
9
9 Parameter setting
During the parameter setting process the unit remains in the operating mode.
It continues its monitoring function with the existing parameters until parameter
setting has been terminated.
9.1 Parameter setting general
Each parameter setting requires 3 steps:
1 Selecting parameter
►► Press [Mode/Enter] until the reque-
��
sted parameter is displayed.
2 Setting the parameter value

►► Press [Set] and keep the buton
pressed. ��
>> Current setting value of the parame-
ter bit flashes for 5 s.
>> After 5 s: Setting value is changed:
incremental by pressing briefly or
scrolling by holding pressed.
The numerical values are incremented continuously. If the value is to be reduced: Let
the display move to the maximum setting value. Then the cycle starts again at the
minimum setting value.
3 Acknowledge parameter value
►► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
��
>> The parameter is displayed again.
The new setting value is stored.
Set more parameters:
►► Start again with step 1.
Finishing parameter setting:
►► Press [Mode/Enter] several times until the current measured value is displayed or wait
for 15 s.
>> The unit returns to the operating mode.
10
• Changing from menu level 1 to menu level 2:
►► [Press [Mode/Enter] until [EF] is
displayed.
If the submenu is protected with an ac-
cess code, [Cod1] flashes in the display.
►► Press [Set] and hold it pressed until ��
the valid code no. is shown.
►► Then briefly press [Mode/Enter].
Delivery by ifm electronic: no access
restriction.
►► Press [Set] briefly. UK
>> The first parameter of the submenu is
��
displayed (here: [Uni]).
• Locking / unlocking
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional wrong settings.
►► Ensure that the unit is in the normal
operating mode.
��
►► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s.
>> [Loc] is displayed.
��
During operation [Loc] is displayed briefly when you try to change parameter values.
For unlocking:
►► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s.
��
>> [uLoc] is displayed.
��
On delivery: Unlocked.
• Timeout:
If no button is pressed for 15 s while the parameters are being set, the unit returns to
the operating mode with unchanged values.
11
9.2 Configuring the display (optional)
►► Select [Uni] and set the unit of measurement:
[bar], [mbar], [MPa], [kPa], [PSI], for PN5007 in addition [inHg].
►► Select [diS] and set update rate and orientation of the display:
-- [d1]: Update of the measured value every 50 ms.
-- [rd1], [rd2], [rd3]: Display like d1, d2, d3; rotated by 180°.
-- [OFF]: The display is deactivated in the operating mode.
9.3 Setting the output signal

9.3.1 Setting the output function
►► Select [OU1] and set the switching function:
-- [Hno] = hysteresis function / normally open,
-- [Hnc] = hysteresis function / normally closed,
-- [Fno] = window function / normally open,
-- [Fnc] = window function / normally closed.
9.3.2 Setting the switching limits

►► Select [SP1] and set the value at which the output switches.
►► Select [rP1] and set the value at which the output switches back.
rP1 is always lower than SP1. The unit only accepts values which are lower
than SP1.
9.4 User settings (optional)

9.4.1 Setting the delay time for OUT1
[dS1] = switch-on delay, [dr1] = switch-off delay.
►► Select [dS1] or [dr1] set value between 0.1 und 50 s (at 0.0 the delay
time is not active).
9.4.2 Setting the damping for OUT1

►► Select [dAP], set value.
dAP-value = response time between pressure change and change of the
switching status in milliseconds (ms). The following values can be set. They
define the switching frequency (f) of the output:
dAP 3 6 10 17 30 60 125 250 500
f [Hz] 170 80 50 30 16 8 4 2 1
12
9.5 Service functions
9.5.1 Reading the min./max. values for the system pressure
►► Select [HI] or [LO], press [Set] briefly.
[HI] = maximum value, [LO] = minimum value.
Delete memory:
►► Select [HI] or [LO].
►► Press [Set] until [----] is displayed.
►► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
[LO] is available only for PN5004.
UK
10 Operation
After power on of the supply voltage the unit is in the Run mode (= normal operati-
on). It carries out its measurement and evaluation functions and generates output
signals according to the set parameters.
Operation indication → chapter 7 Operating and display elements.
10.1 Read the set parameter values
►► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly until the requested paramerter is displayed.
►► Press [Set] briefly.
>> The unit indicates the corresponding parameter value for 15 s. After another
15 s the unit returns to the Run mode.
10.2 Fault indication
[OL] overload pressure (measuring range exceeded)
[UL] underpressure range (measuring range below the minimum value)
[SC1] short circuit in OUT1; the output is switched off as long as the short circuit
exists
[Err] (flashing) internal fault
The faults SC1 and Err are indicated even if the display is deactivated.
13
11 Scale drawing
� �
��
��
�
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
Dimensions are in millimeters

1)
= dimensions for PN5000
1: display
2: LED’s
3: programming button
12 Technical data

Operating voltage [V].......................................................................................... 18...36 DC1)
Current rating [mA].......................................................................................................... 250
Current consumption [mA].............................................................................................. < 50
Reverse polarity and overload protected.............................................................. up to 40 V
Short-circuit protected; Watchdog
Voltage drop [V] ............................................................................................................... < 2
Power-on delay time [s] ................................................................................................... 0.3
Switching frequency [Hz] ........................................................................................ max.170
14
Accuracy / deviations (in % of the span)
- Accuracy of switch point .......................................................................................... < ± 0.5
- Characteristics deviation..................................................... < ± 0.25 (BFSL) / < ± 0.5 (LS)
- Hysteresis.................................................................................................................. < 0.25
- Repeatability (with temperature fluctuations < 10K)................................................. < ± 0.1
- Long-time stability (in% of the span per year)........................................................ < ± 0.05
- Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the compensated
temperature range 0 ... +80°C (in% of the span per 10 K)
- greatest TEMPCO of the zero point / of the span .................................... < ± 0.2 / < ± 0.2
Materials (wetted parts) .............................stainless steel (303S22); ceramics; FPM (Viton)
Housing material ...........................stainless steel (304S15); stainless steel 316L / 1.4404; UK
PC (Makrolon); PBTP (Pocan); PEI; FPM (Viton); 2)
Protection.............................................................................................................. IP 67 III 3)
Protection.............................................................................................................. IP 65 III 4)
Insulation resistance [MΩ]......................................................................... > 100 (500 V DC)
Shock resistance [g] ............................................................... 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11ms)
Vibration resistance [g] ................................................ 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 10 - 2000 Hz)
Switching cycles min. .......................................................................................... 100 million
Operating temperature [°C] ............................. -20...80 (UB < 32 V) / -20...60 (UB > 32 V)
Medium temperature [°C]...................................................................................... -25 ... +80
Storage temperature[°C]................................................................................... -40 ... +100
EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD: ........................................................................................4 / 8 KV
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: ............................................................................. 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: ............................................................................................2 KV
EN 61000-4-5 Surge: ...................................................................................0.5 / 1 KV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: ............................................................................. 10 V
1)
to EN50178, SELV, PELV
2)
in addition PTFE for PN5003...PN5007
3)
for PN5000...PN5002
4)
for PN5003...PN5007
BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line / LS = Limit Value Setting
15
12.1 Setting ranges
SP1 / SP2 rP1 / rP2
ΔP
min max min max
bar 4 400 2 398 2
PN5001 PN5000
PSI 60 5790 30 5760 30

MPa 0.4 40.0 0.2 39.8 0.2
bar 2 250 1 249 1
PSI 40 3620 20 3600 20
MPa 0.2 25.0 0.1 24.9 0.1
bar 1.0 100.0 0.5 99.5 0.5
PN5002
PSI 20 1450 10 1440 10

MPa 0.10 10.00 0.05 9.95 0.05
bar 0.2 25.0 0.1 24.9 0.1
PN5003
PSI 4 362 2 360 2

MPa 0.02 2.50 0.01 2.49 0.01
bar -0.90 10.00 -0.95 9.95 0.05
PN5004
PSI -12 145 -13 144 1

MPa -0.090 1.000 -0.095 0.995 0.005
bar 0.02 2.50 0.01 2.49 0.01
PN5006
PSI 0.4 36.2 0.2 36.0 0.2

kPa 2 250 1 249 1
mbar 10 1000 5 995 5
PN5007
PSI 0.2 14.5 0.1 14.4 0.1

kPa 1.0 100.0 0.5 99.5 0.5
inHg 0.3 29.5 0.2 29.4 0.1
ΔP = increments
16
13 Factory setting
Factory setting User setting
SP1 25% VMR*
rP1 23% VMR*
OU1 Hno
dS1 0,0
dr1 0,0 UK
dAP 60
diS d2
Uni bAr / mbAr
* = the indicated percentage of the final value of the measuring range (VMR) of the
corresponding sensor in bar / mbar is set.
More information at www.ifm.com
17
- Instruction manual
- Spare parts

.
ky Manual or Automatic - it’s your Choice

LKB Automatic or Manual Butterfly Valve
Concept
LKB is a sanitary automatically or manually operated butterfly valve for
use in stainless steel pipe systems.
Working principle
LKB is either remote-controlled by means of an actuator or manually
operated by means of a handle.
The actuator is made in three standard versions, normally closed (NC),
normally open (NO) and air/air activated (A/A).
The actuator is designed so that an axial movement of a piston is
transformed into a 90° rotation of a shaft. The torque of the actuator is
increased when the valve disc contacts the seal ring of the butterfly
valve.
The handle for manual operation mechanically locks the valve in its
open or closed position. The handles for the valve sizes DN125 and
DN150, which are designed for locking in two intermediate positions,
enable adjusting of the valve, so that the flow rate can be regulated.
.TECHNICAL DATA PHYSICAL DATA

Valve Valve bodies
Max. product pressure: . . . . . . . . . . 1000 kPa (10 bar) Product wetted steel parts: . . . 1.4307 (304L) or 1.4404 (316L)
Min. product pressure: . . . . . . . . . . Full vacuum Disc: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4301 (304) or 1.4404 (316L)
Temperature range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10°C to +95°C Other steel parts: . . . . . . . . . 1.4301 (304)
max. temperature if valve Rubber grades: . . . . . . . . . . Q, EPDM, FPM, HNBR or PFA
operates Bushes for valve disc: . . . . . . PVDF
Actuator Finish: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Semi-bright
Max. air pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 kPa (7 bar) Actuator
Min. air pressure, NC and NO: . . . . . 400 kPa (4 bar) Actuator body: . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4307 (304L).
Temperature range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25°C to +90°C Piston: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light alloy (for ø85 mm:
Air consumption (litres free air) - ø85 Bronze) Air/air version
mm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.24 x p (bar) Seals: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NBR
Air consumption (litres free air) - ø133
mm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.95 x p (bar)
Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - ø85 mm: 3 kg.
- ø133 mm: 12 kg.
O C T O B E R 2008
Standard design 1)
LKB is available in three versions, LKB for ISO tubes, LKB-2 for DIN
tubes and LKB-F for flange connection.
The valve consists of two valve body halves, valve disc, bushes for the
disc stem and seal ring. LKB-F also consists of two flanges and two
flange seal rings. The valve is assembled by means of screws and nuts.
TD 403-246
Two actuator sizes, ø85 mm and ø133 mm, cover all valve sizes. The
Fig. 1. Lockable Multiposition Handle with padlock.
actuator is available in two versions, LKLA and LKLA-T.
1. Padlock
The actuator is fitted onto the valve by means of a bracket and screws.
(The actuator can also be fitted onto ball valves by means of special A 1)
brackets).
The handle for manual operation is fitted onto the valve by means of a C
cap/block system and a screw.
B
The valve has welding ends as standard, but LKB and LKB-2 can also
be supplied with fittings. 2)
Options TD 403-200
A. Male parts or clamp liners in accordance with required standard. TD 403-199

15°
B. ThinkTop® for control and indication.* Fig. 2. Dimensions - padlock. Fig. 3. Positioning cap.
C. Indication unit with micro switches.*
A. Min. 20 mm 1. On/Off
D. Indication unit with inductive proximity switches.*
E. Indication unit with Hall proximity switches.* B. Min. 35 mm 2. Multi positioning
F. Explosion proof indication unit with inductive proximity switches.* C. ø6 mm
G. Bracket for actuator. (Also for ball valves).
H. Handle with two or four positions (standard on DN125 and DN150).
I. Handle for electrical position indication. Capacity/Pressure drop diagrams
J. Handle with infinite intermediate positions (not for DN125 and
DN150).
TD 403-188/1
K. Multipositioning handle**.
L. Lockable Multiposition Handle. Padlock can be mounted as shown
in fig. 3.
Note! Padlock is not delivered.
M. Special cap for 90° turned handle position.
N. Service tool for actuator.
O. Service tool for fitting 25-38 mm (DN25 - DN40) valve discs.
* For further information see Product Catalogue chapter "Control
& Indication".
** A padlock can be mounted on the Lockable Multiposition
Handle as shown in the opposite figure.
Note! Padlock is not delivered.
LKB and LKB-F fully open
Note!
TD 403-187/1
For further details, see also IM 70730.
LKB-2 and LKB-F fully open
NOTE!
For the diagrams the following applies:
Medium: Water (20°C).
Measurement: In accordance with VDI 2173.
Torque diagrams - Actuator
LKLA ø85 mm: LKLA ø133 mm:

NC NC
2100-0004
2100-0001
A
A
C
C
NO NO
2100-0005
2100-0002
A A
A/A A/A
2100-0006
2100-0003
D D
E
F G
E
G
A = 6 bar air pressure D = 6 bar air pressure connection on top Angular motion of actuator:
B = 5 bar air pressure E = 6 bar air pressure connection on bottom 1. Closing - Spring activated
2. Opening - Air activated
C = Closing/opening with spring F = 5 bar air pressure connection on top
3. Closing - Air activated
G = 5 bar air pressure connection on bottom 4. Opening - Spring activated
5. Closing
6. Opening
Torque values (for rotating the valve disc in a dry seal ring)
Size Max. Nm
25mm/DN25 15
DN32 15
38mm/DN40 15
51mm/DN50 20
63.5mm/DN65 25
76mm/DN80 30
101.6mm/DN100 35
DN125 50
DN150 120
Valve Dimensions (mm)
Fig. 1. Dimensions - valve. Fig. 2. Dimensions - actuator
H2
P
A □G
B
C
E
N
2100-0008
OD
ID
2100-0000
A3 (LKLA-T)
A4 (LKLA-T)
t
TD 432-013
A6 (LKLA)
F
A1 (LKLA-T)
TD 432-014
A2 (LKLA-T)
a. LKB-F.
A5 (LKLA)
K
J
H1
I
TD 403-141
d □S
TD 403-086 M L D D
b. LKB with welding ends. a. Without coupling. b. With coupling.

Note! LKB sizes DN 125 and a1 = d b1 = S
150 are with six screws. c. LKB with male part/nut and liner.
Dimensions (mm) - Valve

LKB, LKB-2, LKB-F:
Size 25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN

mm mm mm mm mm mm 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
A 42.0 42.0 61.0 61.0 79.5 106.0 42.0 42.0 42.0 61.0 61.0 79.0 106.0 106.0 98.0
B 15.5 16.7 16.6 17.5 16.6 16.0 14.7 15.9 16.7 16.6 17.5 16.0 16.0 18.0 18.0
C 49.0 49.0 58.5 69.5 73.5 93.0 48.0 49.0 54.0 63.0 75.0 79.0 93.0 115.0 122.0
OD 25.6 38.6 51.6 64.1 76.6 102.2 30.0 36.0 42.0 54.0 70.0 85.0 104.0 129.0 154.0
ID 22.5 35.5 48.5 60.5 72.0 97.6 26.0 32.0 38.0 50.0 66.0 81.0 100.0 125.0 150.0
t 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
E 32.5 32.5 42.0 52.0 57.0 77.0 33.3 33.3 37.7 46.6 57.3 63.0 77.0 96.7 104.0
F 78.0 78.0 99.0 117.0 132.0 169.0 79.0 79.0 86.5 105.7 125.0 143.0 169.0 199.0 216.0
G 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 15.0
H1 47.0 47.0 52.0 54.0 62.0 80.0 47.0 47.0 47.0 52.0 62.0 64.0 80.0 110.0 80.0
H2 83.0 83.0 92.0 92.0 114.0 132.0 83.0 83.0 83.0 92.0 114.0 116.0 132.0 136.0 152.0
J 82.0 82.0 92.0 102.0 107.0 127.0 74.0 74.0 78.0 88.0 98.0 104.0 118.0 150.0 161.0
K 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 162.0 162.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 162.0 162.0 162.0 223.0 338.0
L IDF/ISO 45.0 45.0 47.5 48.5 52.5 61.5 - - - - - - - - -
M IDF/ISO 55.5 55.5 58.0 59.0 63.0 81.5 - - - - - - - - -
L DS 42.0 43.5 46.0 51.0 55.0 64.0 - - - - - - - - -
M DS 54.5 54.5 57.0 59.0 63.0 72.0 - - - - - - - - -
L SMS 38.5 43.5 46.0 51.0 55.0 75.0 - - - - - - - - -
M SMS 51.0 52.5 55.0 56.0 61.0 72.0 - - - - - - - - -
L BS 45.7 45.7 48.2 49.2 53.2 67.0 - - - - - - - - -
M BS 50.5 50.5 53.0 54.0 58.0 71.8 - - - - - - - - -
L DIN 45.5 45.5 48.0 52.0 61.0 70.0 40.0 40.0 37.0 37.0 43.0 48.0 51.0 55.0 115.0
M DIN 61.5 61.5 66.0 67.0 71.0 83.0 45.5 48.5 49.5 54.0 63.0 69.0 84.0 89.0 77.0
L Clamp 45.0 45.0 47.5 48.5 52.5 61.5 - - - - - - - - -
N 26.5 26.5 30.5 40.5 43.5 53.0 27.3 27.3 31.7 35.1 45.8 49.5 53.0 72.7 85.0
P 42.0 42.0 46.0 46.0 58.0 58.0 42.0 42.0 42.0 46.0 58.0 58.0 58.0 62.0 78.0
Weight LKB-F (kg) 1.6 1.3 2.1 2.9 5.0 7.9 1.6 1.6 1.7 2.6 4.7 5.8 7.9 11.7 12.3
Weight LKB/
1.2 1.0 1.5 2.1 3.0 4.7 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.8 3.0 3.5 5.1 7.5 9.0
LKB-2 (kg)
NOTE! Weights are for valves with welding ends and handles.
Dimensions (mm) - Actuator
LKLA and LKLA-T:
Valve 25-63.5 76.1 101.6 101.6 DN125 DN125 DN150 DN150

size DN25-50 DN65-80 DN100 DN100
A1 244 242 242 363 246 363 246 363
A2 193 191 191 316 195 316 195 316
A3 244 244 244 337 244 337 244 337
A4 173 173 173 290 173 290 173 290
D 85 85 85 133 85 133 85 133
d 17 17 17 30 20 30 20 30
I 16.5 16.5 16.5 34 16.5 34 16.5 34
S 8 10 12 12 14 14 15 15
Function NC,NO,A/A NC,NO,A/A NC,NO,A/A NC,NO,A/A A/A NC,NO,A/A A/A NC,NO,A/A
Connections
Compressed air
R1/8" (BSP), internal thread.
. .
. .
.
Alfa Laval reserves the right to change specifications without prior

notification. ALFA LAVAL is a trademark registered and owned by Alfa Laval
ESE00285EN 1308 Corporate AB. © Alfa Laval
How to contact Alfa Laval

Contact details for all countries
are continually updated on our website.
Please visit www.alfalaval.com to
access the information direct.
Instruction Manual
LKB Automatic or Manual Butterfly Valve and LKB-LP Low Pressure Butterfly Valve
TD 403-262 TD 403-263 TD 458-002

TD 403-284
ESE02446-EN9 2015-04
Original manual
Table of contents
The information herein is correct at the time of issue but may be subject to change without prior notice
1. EC Declaration of Conformity ....................................................................... 5
2. Safety .................................................................................................... 6
2.1. Important information ............................................................................. 6
2.2. Warning signs ..................................................................................... 6
2.3. Safety precautions ................................................................................ 7
3. Installation .............................................................................................. 8
3.1. Unpacking/Delivery ............................................................................... 8
3.2. General installation ................................................................................ 9
3.3. Welding ............................................................................................ 11
3.4. Fitting actuator/bracket/handle on the valve (optional extras) ................................ 12
3.5. Recycling information ............................................................................. 13
4. Operation ............................................................................................... 14
4.1. Operation .......................................................................................... 14
4.2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 15
4.3. Recommended cleaning ......................................................................... 16
5. Maintenance ........................................................................................... 17
5.1. General maintenance ............................................................................. 17
5.2. Dismantling of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP .................................................... 19
5.3. Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP ....................................................... 20
5.4. Dismantling of valve - LKB-F .................................................................... 22
5.5. Assembly of valve - LKB-F ....................................................................... 23
5.6. Dismantling of actuator ........................................................................... 24
5.7. Assembly of actuator ............................................................................. 25
6. Technical data ......................................................................................... 26

6.1. Technical data ..................................................................................... 26
7. Parts list / Service kits ................................................................................ 28

7.1. LKB, LKB-2, LKB-F Butterfly valves, drawings ................................................ 28
7.2. LKB-LP Butterfly valve, drawing ................................................................. 29
7.3. LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø85 mm, drawings ............................................. 30
7.4. LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø133 mm, drawings ............................................ 33
7.5. LKB Butterfly valve, ISO .......................................................................... 34
7.6. LKB-F Butterfly valves, ISO ...................................................................... 36
7.7. LKB-F Butterfly valves, DIN ...................................................................... 38
7.8. LKB-2 Butterfly valves ............................................................................ 40
7.9. LKB-LP Butterfly valve ........................................................................... 42
7.10. LKLA ø85 mm (NO/NC) .......................................................................... 44
7.11. LKLA ø85 mm (A/A) .............................................................................. 46
7.12. LKLA DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A) ............................................................... 48
7.13. LKLA ø133 mm (NO/NC) ........................................................................ 50
7.14. LKLA ø133 mm (A/A) ............................................................................. 52
7.15. LKLA-T ø85 mm (NO/NC) ....................................................................... 54
7.16. LKLA-T ø85 mm (A/A) ............................................................................ 56
7.17. LKLA-T DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A) ............................................................ 58
7.18. LKLA-T ø133 mm (NO/NC) ...................................................................... 60
7.19. LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A) .......................................................................... 62
3
Table of contents
7.20. LKB Lockable Multiposition Handle for valve .................................................. 64

7.21. LKB Handle 1.1 for butterfly valve .............................................................. 66
7.22. Handle 1.1 for indication unit .................................................................... 68
4
1 EC Declaration of Conformity
Revision of Declaration of Conformity 2009-12-29
The Designated Company
Alfa Laval Kolding A/S

Company Name
Albuen 31, DK-6000 Kolding, Denmark

Address
+45 79 32 22 00
Phone No.
hereby declare that

Valve actuator
Designation
LKLA NC, LKLA NO, LKLA A/A, LKLA-T NO, LKLA-T NC, LKLA-T A/A
Type
is in conformity with the following directive with amendments:
- Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

- Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004
The person authorised to compile the technical file is the signer of this document
QHSE Manager, Quality, Health and safety & Environment Annie Dahl
Title Name
Kolding 2013-12-03
Place Date Signature
5
2 Safety
Unsafe practices and other important information are highlighted in this manual.
Warnings are emphasized by means of special signs.
2.1 Important information
Always read the manual before using the valve!
WARNING
Indicates that special procedures must be followed to avoid serious personal injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that special procedures must be followed to avoid damage to the valve.
NOTE
Indicates important information to simplify or clarify procedures.
2.2 Warning signs
General warning:
Caustic agents:
6
2 Safety
All warnings in the manual are summarised on this page.
”Mushrooms” = Fastening connections on the end cap.
Pay special attention to the instructions below so that severe personal injury and/or damage to the valve are avoided.
2.3 Safety precautions
Installation
Always read the technical data thoroughly (See chapter 6 Technical data).
Always release compressed air after use.
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
Operation
Always read the technical data thoroughly (See chapter 6 Technical data).
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids or when sterilising.
Always handle lye and acid with great care.
Maintenance
Always observe the technical data thoroughly (See chapter 6 Technical data)
Never service the valve when it is hot.
The valve/actuator and the pipelines must never be pressurised when servicing the valve/actuator.
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if the actuator is supplied with compressed air.
The actuator springs are not caged (ø85 mm, NC/NO).
Never use compressed air for removing the end caps of the actuator.
Always fit the end cap with the “mushrooms” turned outwards and position it correctly before supplying compressed
air to the actuator.
Transportation
Always ensure that compressed air is released.

Always ensure that all connections are disconnected before attempting to remove the valve from the installation.
Always drain liquid out of valves before transportation.
Always used predesigned lifting points if defined.
Always secure sufficient fixing of the valve during transportation - if specially designed packaging material is available, it
must be used.
7
3 Installation
The instruction manual is part of the delivery. Read the instructions carefully.
The items refer to parts list and service kits sections.
The valve is supplied as separate parts as standard (for welding)
The valve is assembled before delivery, if it is supplied with fittings (LKB/LKB-2)
3.1 Unpacking/Delivery
Step 1
CAUTION
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect unpacking.
Check the delivery:
1. Complete valve (see Step 2).
2. Complete actuator, if supplied (see Step 3).
3. Bracket for actuator, if supplied (see Step 3).
4. Complete handle, if supplied.
5. Delivery note.
6. Instruction manual.
Step 2 Separate parts for welding

Standard delivery of valve parts:
1. Two valve body halves (1). 1 5 2 4 3 6 3 4 2 5 7 1 8 6
2. Valve disc (2) fitted in seal ring (5).
3. Two bushes (3, 4) fitted on the disc stem.
4. A set of screws and nuts (6).
5. Two flanges (7) and two flange seal rings (8), (LKB-F).
TD 403-102
TD 403-285
LKB/LKB-2 LKB-F (only for welding)
Step 3 LKLA Bracket LKLA

Delivery of actuator and bracket: ø85mm with screws ø133mm
1. Complete actuator with coupling and activating ring (ø85 mm)
or indication pin (ø133 mm).
2. Bracket with screws for the actuator.
3. Water rejector (if not mounted)
TD403-103
Coupling
Step 4 Handle Valve Actuator

1. Clean the valve/valve parts for possible packing materials.
2. Clean the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
TD 403-090
Remove packing materials!
Step 5 Handle Valve Actuator

Inspection!
1. Inspect the valve/valve parts for visible transport damage.
2. Inspect the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
Caution!
Avoid damaging the valve/valve parts.
Avoid damaging the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
TD 403-090
8
3 Installation
Read the instructions carefully. The valve has welding ends as standard but can also be supplied with fittings (not LKB-F).
NC = Normally closed.
NO = Normally open.
A/A = Air/air activated.
3.2 General installation
Step 1
Always read the technical data thoroughly.

See chapter 6 Technical data

CAUTION
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect installation.
Step 2 Risk of damage!

Avoid stressing the valve.
Pay special attention to:
- Vibrations
- Thermal expansion of the tubes
- Excessive welding
- Overloading of the pipelines
TD 403-091
Step 3 Remember seal rings!

Fittings:
Ensure that the connections are tight.
TD 403-092
Step 4 Turn the ventilation opening downwards!

Position of actuator:
TD 403-286
Position the water rejector on the actuator correctly.

(The actuator can be installed in any position).
Important!
9
3 Installation
Read the instructions carefully. The valve has welding ends as standard but can also be supplied with fittings (not LKB-F).
NO = Normally open.
Air Air Air

Air connection of actuator: R⅛” (BSP)
Connect compressed air correctly.
Pay special attention to the warnings!
TD 403-107
NC NO A/A
Pre-use check:
Open and close the valve several times to ensure that the valve disc
moves smoothly against the seal ring.
10
3 Installation
Read the instructions carefully. The valve is supplied as separate parts to facilitate welding.
LKB: for ISO tubes.
LKB-2: for DIN tubes.
LKB-F: with flange connection.
3.3 Welding
Step 1
LKB/LKB-2
1. Weld the valve body halves into the pipelines.
2. Maintain the minimum clearance (A) so that the actuator can be removed.
3. If welding both valve body halves, ensure that they can be moved axially B1 mm, so that the valve parts can be removed.
4. After welding, assemble the valve according to steps 1-5, chapter 5.3 Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP
LKB-F
1. Weld the flanges into the pipelines.
2. Maintain the minimum clearances (A and B2) so that the actuator and the valve parts can be removed.
3. After welding, assemble the valve according to steps 1-5, chapter 5.3 Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP
Pre-use check - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-F

Open and close the valve several times to ensure that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.
B2
A
TD 403-088
B1 B1
Caution!
A
Size (mm) B1 (mm) B2 (mm)
Ø85 Ø133
LKLA LKLA-T LKLA LKLA-T
1” 245 20 43
1½” 245 20 43
2” 255 20 47
2½” 265 24 46
3” 265 24 59
4” 290 420 37 59
DN25 245 + 172 + 172 20 43
DN32 245 20 43
DN40 250 (incl. top unit) (incl. top unit) 20 43
DN50 260 20 47
DN65 270 24 59
DN80 275 23 59
DN100 290 420 37 59
DN125 315 440 40 63
DN250 325 445 41 79
11
3 Installation
Read the instructions carefully and pay special attention to the warnings!
NO = Normally open.
3.4 Fitting actuator/bracket/handle on the valve (optional extras)
Step 1 Screw for bracket

Bracket/indication: Bracket
1. Fit the bracket as shown.
2. Fit and tighten the screws.
3. Fit the activating ring/indication pin as shown.
TD 403-121
Drain hole Direction Activating ring/

of rotation indication pin
Step 2 NC actuator No pressure!

Actuator/bracket - NC:
1. Ensure that the valve is closed by checking the position of the
groove of the disc stem top.
2. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with chapter 5.3
Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP, Step 4.
Closed
TD 403-122
Step 3 NC actuator No pressure!

Actuator/bracket - NO:
1. Ensure that the valve is open by checking the position of the
2. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with chapter 5.3
Open
TD 403-123
Step 4 A/A actuator

Actuator/bracket - A/A:
1. Ensure that the valve is open by checking the position of the
2. Supply compressed air to the actuator. Air pressure!
3. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with chapter 5.3 Open
TD 403-124
12
3 Installation
Step 5 Standard handle Handle with position

Handle/indication: indication
1. Fit the standard handle on the valve so that the screw can enter
the hole in the disc connection.
2. Fit the handle with position indication as shown and
in accordance with chapter 5.3 Assembly of valve -
LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP, Step 3 + Step 4.
Pre-use check:
Open and close the valve several times to ensure that it operates smoothly.
3.5 Recycling information
• Unpacking
- Packing material consists of wood, plastics, cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps
- Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused, recycled or used for energy recovery
- Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed waste incineration plant
- Metal straps should be sent for material recycling
• Maintenance
- During maintenance, oil and wear parts in the machine are replaced
- All metal parts should be sent for material recycling
- Worn out or defective electronic parts should be sent to a licensed handler for material recycling
- Oil and all non-metal wear parts must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations
• Scrapping
- At end of use, the equipment must be recycled according to the relevant local regulations. Beside the equipment itself, any
hazardous residues from the process liquid must be considered and dealt with in a proper manner. When in doubt, or in the
absence of local regulations, please contact your local Alfa Laval sales company
13
4 Operation
The valve is automatically or manually operated by means of an actuator or a handle.
4.1 Operation
Step 1

See chapter 6 Technical data
CAUTION
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect operation.
Step 2
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids Danger of burns!
or when sterilising.
TD 403-110
Step 3 Air
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator
if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
Rotating parts
TD 403-111
Step 4 Air
Operation by means of actuator:
Automatic on/off operation by means of compressed air.
Rotating parts
TD 403-111
Step 5 Closed valve

Operation by means of standard handle:
1. Manual on/off operation.
2. Pull the handle outwards while rotating it.
NOTE!
Open valve Open valve
This also applies for the Lockable Multiposition Handle.
TD 403-114
Closed valve
14
4 Operation
Pay attention to possible breakdown.
Read the instructions carefully.
LKB-F: With flange connection.
NC = Normally closed. NO = Normally open. A/A = Air/air activated.
Step 6 Closed valve

Operation by means of regulating handle:
1. Manual flow regulation because of infinite locking positions.
2. Loosen the handle, rotate it and tighten again.
Open valve Open valve
Closed valve
4.2 Troubleshooting
Step 1
NOTE!
Read the maintenance instructions carefully before replacing worn parts. - See chapter 5.1 General maintenance
Problem Cause/result Repair
- External leakage - Worn seal ring Replace the seal ring and the bushes
- Internal leakage by closed valve - Worn flange seal ring (LKB-F)
(normal wear)
- External leakage - High pressure - Change rubber grade

- Internal leakage by closed valve (too - High temperature - Change the operating conditions
early) - Aggressive liquids
- Many activations
- Difficult to open/close Incorrect seal ring (swelling) Replace by a seal ring of a different rubber
- Damage to disc connection (high grade
torque)
Difficult to open/close - 90° displacement of the actuator - Fit correctly (see chapter 3.4 Fitting
- Incorrect actuator function (NC,NO) actuator/bracket/handle on the valve
- Worn actuator bearings (optional extras))
- Dirt penetration into the actuator - Change from NC to NO or vice versa
- Replace the bearings
- Service the actuator
15
4 Operation
The valve is designed for Cleaning In Place (= CIP).
NaOH = Caustic Soda.
HNO3 = Nitric acid.
4.3 Recommended cleaning
Step 1 Caustic danger!
Always handle lye and acid with great care.
Always use Always use

rubber gloves! protective goggles!
Step 2
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when sterilising.
Danger of burns!
TD 403-110
Step 3
Examples of cleaning agents:
Use clean water, free from chlorides.
1. 1% by weight NaOH at 70o C (158o F) 2. 0.5% by weight HNO3 at 70o C (158o F)
1 kg (2.2 lbs) 100 l (26.4 gal) 0.7 l (0.2 gal) 100 l (26.4 gal)
+ = Cleaning agent. + = Cleaning agent.
NaOH water 53% HNO3 water
2.2 l (0.6 gal) 100 l (26.4 gal)

+ = Cleaning agent.
33% NaOH water
Step 4 Always rinse!

1. Avoid excessive concentration of the cleaning agent.
⇒ Dose gradually
2. Adjust the cleaning flow to the process.
⇒ Sterilisation of milk/viscous liquids
⇒ Increase the cleaning flow
Clean water Cleaning agents
3. Always rinse well with clean water after the cleaning.
Step 5
NOTE
The cleaning agents must be stored/disposed of in accordance with current regulations/directives.
16
5 Maintenance
Maintain the valve and the regulator carefully.
Always keep spare seal rings, rubber seals, bushes and actuator bearings in stock.
”Mushrooms” = fastening connections on the end cap.
5.1 General maintenance
Step 1

See section 6 Technical data
NOTE
All scrap must be stored/disposed of in accordance with current regulations/directives.
Step 2
Atmospheric
Never service the valve when it is hot. pressure
required!
Never service the valve with valve and pipelines under pressure. Danger of burns!
TD 403-139
Step 3 Air
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if the actuator is
supplied with compressed air. Cutting danger!
TD 403-112
Step 4 Air
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator
if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
Rotating parts
TD 403-112
Step 5
Actuator size ø85 mm (NC/NO):

Springs
The actuator springs are not caged.
Caution!
TD 403-118
17
5 Maintenance
Maintain the valve and the regulator carefully.
Always keep spare seal rings, rubber seals, bushes and actuator bearings in stock.
”Mushrooms” = fastening connections on the end cap.
Step 6 Caution!
End cap “Mushrooms”

End cap of actuator:
- Never remove the end cap by using compressed air.
- Always fit the end cap with the “mushrooms” turned outwards
and position it correctly before supplying compressed air to
the actuator.
TD 403-113
Recommended spare parts: Service kits (see chapter 7 Parts list / Service kits).
Order service kits from the service kits list (see chapter 7 Parts list / Service kits)
Ordering spare parts

Contact the Sales Department.
Valve seal rings Valve bushes Actuator rubber seals Actuator bearings
Preventive maintenance Replace after 12 Replace when replacing Replace after 24

months the valve seal rings months
Maintenance after Replace by the end of Replace when replacing Replace when possible
leakage (leakage the day the valve seal rings
normally starts slowly)
Planned maintenance - Regular inspection Replace when replacing - Regular inspection Replace when they
for leakage and the valve seal rings for leakage and become worn
smooth operation smooth operation
- Keep a record of the - Keep a record of the
valve actuator
- Use the statistics for - Use the statistics
inspection planning for planning of
inspections
Replace after leakage Replace after air
leakage
Lubrication Before fitting None Before fitting When replacing

(use USDA-H1 - Molycote Long term 2 actuator rubber seals
approved) Plus (Δ) - Molycote Long term
- Unisilcon L641(*) - Molycote 1132(Δ) (for 2 Plus (Δ)
- Paraliq(*) GTE 703 aggressive environment) - Molycote 1132
- Molycote 111(D) (Δ) (for aggressive
environment)
18
5 Maintenance
Read the instructions carefully. The items refer to the parts list and service kits section.
Handle scrap correctly.
LKB: for ISO tubes.
LKB-2: for DIN tubes.
5.2 Dismantling of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP
Step 1
Valve with actuator:
1. Remove screws and nuts (6).
2. Remove the bracket with the actuator.
TD 403-093
Step 2
Valve with handle:
1. Remove the complete handle.
2. Remove screws and nuts (6).
TD 403-094
Step 3
Remove seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2).
TD 403-096
Step 4
Remove bushes (3, 4) from the disc stems.
TD 403-096
Step 5
Remove valve disc (2) from seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For valve sizes 25-38 mm and DN25-40, it is recommended to
remove the valve disc by using a special service tool.
TD 403-097
19
5 Maintenance
LKB: for ISO tubes. LKB-2: for DIN tubes.
Lubricate the seal ring before fitting it.
Lubricate the disc stem before fitting the bushes.
5.3 Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP

Step 1
1. Lubricate the pin holes in seal ring (5), (important for Silicone
and Viton).
2. Fit valve disc (2) in the seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For the valve sizes 25-38 mm and DN25-40, it is recommended to TD 403-265
fit the valve disc by using a special service tool.
Step 2
1. Fit bushes (3,4) on the disc stem.
2. Fit seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2) between the two
valve body halves (1).
CAUTION!
Rotate the valve disc so that the valve is open before tightening
screws and nuts (6).
TD 403-266
Step 3
Valve with handle:
1. Fit screws and nuts (6) and torque tighten in accordance with
the requirements (see Step 5).
2. Fit the complete handle on the disc connection and tighten
the screw on the handle.
NOTE!
TD 403-267
This also applies for the Lockable Multiposition Handle.
Step 4 Fit correctly!

Valve with actuator: See chapter 3.4 Fitting
1. Fit the actuator with the bracket so that the disc actuator/bracket/handle on
connection enters the coupling (see Chapter 3.4 Fitting the valve (optional extras)
actuator/bracket/handle on the valve (optional extras)).
2. Fit screws and nuts (6) and torque tighten in accordance with
the requirements so that the bracket is fixed to the valve (see
Step 5).
TD 403-268
20
5 Maintenance
LKB: for ISO tubes. LKB-2: for DIN tubes.
Lubricate the seal ring before fitting it.
Step 5
Pre-use check:
Check that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.

Tools/torque values for assembly of the valve body halves:
Valve size 25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm

DN 25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN 125 DN150
5 mm 5 mm 5 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm
Allen Key
(0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.24”) (0.24”) (0.24”) (0.3”) (0.3”) (0.3”)
Recomm. 18 Nm 18 Nm 18 Nm 20 Nm 20 Nm 20 Nm 38 Nm 38 Nm 38 Nm
Torque (13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft)
21
5 Maintenance
The items refer to the parts list and service kits section.
LKB-F: with flange connection.
5.4 Dismantling of valve - LKB-F

Step 1
1. Loosen the two upper screws and nuts (6).
2. Loosen and remove the two lower screws and nuts (6).
3. Remove the valve unit from flanges (7).
Step 2
1. Remove the two upper screws and nuts (6), (4 nuts).
2. If supplied, remove the actuator from the valve body unit.
3. If supplied, loosen the screw and remove the handle from the
valve body unit.
Step 3
1. Loosen and remove the two centre screws and nuts (6).
2. Remove seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2).
3. Remove flange seal rings (8).
Step 4
Remove bushes (3,4) from the disc stems.
TD 403-096
Step 5
Remove valve disc (2) from seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For valve sizes 25-38 mm and DN25-40, it is recommended to
remove the valve disc by using a special service tool.
TD 403-097
22
5 Maintenance
LKB-F: With flange connection.
Lubricate the seal rings before fitting them.
5.5 Assembly of valve - LKB-F

Step 1
1. Lubricate the pin holes in seal ring (5), (important for Silicone
and Viton).
2. Fit valve disc (2) on seal ring (5).
3. Fit bushes (3,4) in the disc stem.
NOTE! TD 403-265
For valve size 25-38 mm and DN25-40, it is recommended to fit

the valve disc by using a special service tool.
Step 2
1. Lubricate flange seal rings (8) with water and fit them.
2. Fit seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2) between the valve
body halves (1).
3. Fit and tighten the two centre screws and nuts (6).
CAUTION!
Rotate the valve disc so that the valve is open before tightening
screws and nuts (6).
Step 3
1. If supplied, fit the handle and tighten the screw.
2. If supplied, fit the actuator.
3. Fit the two upper screws and nuts (6), (4 nuts).
Step 4
1. Fit the valve unit between flanges (7).
2. Fit and tighten the two lower screws and nuts (6).
3. Tighten the two upper screws and nuts (6).
Step 5
Pre-use check: Check that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.
Tools/torque values for assembly of the valve body halves:
Valve size 25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm

DN 25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN 125 DN150
Spanner 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 13 mm 13 mm 13 mm 17 mm 17 mm 17 mm
flats (0.4”) (0.4”) (0.4”) (0.5”) (0.5”) (0.5”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”)
Recomm. 18 Nm 18 Nm 18 Nm 20 Nm 20 Nm 20 Nm 38 Nm 38 Nm 38 Nm
torque (13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft)
23
5 Maintenance
5.6 Dismantling of actuator
Step 1
1. Press end cap (5) into air cylinder (1).
Use a press!
2. Remove retaining ring (6).
TD 403-099
Step 2
NC/NO actuator:
Release the pressure on end cap (5) carefully and remove the end
TD 403-100
cap.
Pay special attention to the warning!
Step 3
A/A actuator:
Remove end cap (5) by hand.
Pay special attention to the warning!
TD 403-101
Step 4
Remove piston (3) and the springs.
NOTE!
- The actuator size ø133 mm has a caged spring assembly.
- The air/air actuator has no springs.
TD 403-271
Step 5
Remove connex pin (16) and coupling (17) from rotating cylinder
stem (2).
TD 403-119
Step 6
Remove rotating cylinder (2) and the remaining internal parts from
air cylinder (1).
TD 403-120
24
5 Maintenance
Lubricate the rubber seals before fitting them. Lubricate the bearings.
Clean the piston before assembly.
5.7 Assembly of actuator
Step 1
Fit rotating cylinder (2) in air cylinder (1).
TD 403-269
Step 2
Fit coupling (17) on rotating cylinder stem (2) and fit connex pin
Fit the connex pin
(16).
correctly!
TD 403-270
Step 3
Fit the springs in rotating cylinder (2) and fit piston (3) carefully.
CAUTION!
Fit the piston correctly in relation to the bearings.
NOTE! Fit correctly!
The air/air actuator has no springs.
TD 403-274
Step 4
A/A actuator:
1. Fit end cap (5) sufficiently into air cylinder (1) so that retaining
ring (6) can be fitted in the air cylinder.
2. Position the end cap correctly by hand.
Pay special attention to the warning! TD 403-272
Step 5
1. Fit end cap (5) in air cylinder (1) and press down sufficiently so
Use a press!
that retaining ring (6) can be fitted in the air cylinder.
2. Release the pressure on the end cap.
Pay special attention to the warning! NC/NO actuator
TD 403-273
Step 6
Pre-use check:
1. Supply compressed air to the actuator.
2. Activate the actuator several times to ensure that it operates smoothly.
25
6 Technical data
It is important to observe the technical data during installation, operation and maintenance.
Inform personnel about the technical data.
6.1 Technical data
LKB is a sanitary automatically or manually operated butterfly valve for use in stainless steel pipe systems.
LKB is either remote-controlled by means of an actuator or manually operated by means of a handle.

The actuator is made in three standard versions, normally closed (NC), normally open (NO) and air/air activated (A/A).
The actuator is designed so that an axial movement of a piston is transformed into a 90° rotation of a shaft. The torque of the
actuator is increased when the valve disc contacts the seal ring of the butterfly valve.
The handle for manual operation mechanically locks the valve in its open or closed position. The handles for the valve sizes
DN125 and DN150, which are designed for locking in two intermediate positions, enable adjusting of the valve, so that the
flow rate can be regulated.
Valve - data
Max. product pressure 1000 kPa (10 bar) (145 psi)
Min. product pressure Full vacuum
Temperature range -10° C to +95° C* (14°F to 203°F )
Product acc. to PED 97/23/EC Fluids group 2
Valve - materials
Product wetted steel parts AISI 304 or AISI 316L
Other steel parts AISI 304
Rubber grades EPDM, Silicone (Q), Viton (FPM), HNBR, PFA
Bushes for valve disc PVDF
Finish Semi bright, RA 3.2 µm
Actuator - data
Max. air pressure 700 kPa (7 bar) (101.5 psi)
Min. air pressure, NC or NO 400 kPa (4 bar) (58 psi)
Temperature range -25° C to +90° C (-13°F to + 94°F )
Air consumption (litres free air) - ø85 mm 0.24 x p (bar)
- ø133 mm 0.95 x p (bar)
Actuator - materials
Actuator body AISI 304
Piston Light alloy, bronze for ø85 mm A/A
Seals Nitrile (NBR)
Housing for switches Noryl (PPO)
Finish Semi bright
26
6 Technical data
It is important to observe the technical data during installation, operation and maintenance.
Inform personnel about the technical data.
Weight (kg)
25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN DN

Size
mm mm mm mm mm mm 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Weight LKB-F with welding
1.6 1.3 2.1 2.9 5.0 7.9 1.6 1.6 1.7 2.6 4.7 5.8 7.9 11.7 12.3
ends and handle
Weight LKB/LKB-2 with
1.2 1.0 1.5 2.1 3.0 4.7 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.8 3.0 3.5 5.1 7.5 9.0
welding ends and handle
Weight LKB-F with welding

4.3 4.0 4.8 5.6 7.6 19.5 4.3 4.3 4.4 5.3 7.3 8.4 19.5 23.3 23.9
ends and LKLA/LKLA-T ø85
Weight LKB/LKB-2
with welding ends and 3.9 3.7 4.2 4.8 5.6 16.3 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.5 5.6 6.1 16.7 19.1 20.6
LKLA/LKLA-T ø133
Noise
One metre away from - and 1.6 metre above the exhaust, the noise level of a valve actuator will be approximately 77dB(A)
without noise damper and approximately 72 dB(A) with noise damper - Measured at 7 bars air pressure.
27
7 Parts list / Service kits
The drawings include all parts of the valves.
For the parts list, please see chapters 7.5 LKB Butterfly valve, ISO, 7.6 LKB-F Butterfly valves, ISO, 7.7 LKB-F Butterfly
valves, DIN, 7.8 LKB-2 Butterfly valves
7.1 LKB, LKB-2, LKB-F Butterfly valves, drawings
LKB/LKB-2
LKB-F
28
The drawings include all parts of the actuators.
For the parts list, please see chapter 7.9 LKB-LP Butterfly valve
7.2 LKB-LP Butterfly valve, drawing
29
For the parts list, please see chapters 7.10 LKLA ø85 mm (NO/NC) - 7.19 LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A).
7.3 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø85 mm, drawings
LKLA-T (NC-NO) LKLA-T (A/A)
21
20
TD 403-132
TD 403-137
LKLA (NC-NO) LKLA (A/A)
5 23
6 22
3 7
4
1
11
10
9 2
12
8
19 14
23
15
16 14
18
TD 403-136
17
TD 403-133
30
DN 125-150 (A/A)
403-138
31
.
32
7.4 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø133 mm, drawings
LKLA-T (NC-NO) LKLA-T (A/A)
21
20
24
25 3
TD 403-135 TD 403-134
LKLA (NC-NO) LKLA (A/A)

6 23
7
22
5
1
3
10
11
8
2
12
14
14
19
15
18
16
18
17 TD 403-083 13
TD 403-082
33
The drawing and parts list include all items of the valve.
7.5 LKB Butterfly valve, ISO
_1
34
Parts list
Pos. Qty Denomination
1 2 Valve body half
2 1 Disc
3  1 Bush
4  1 Bush
5  1 Seal ring
6 1 Set of screws
Service kits
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm
DN25 DN40 DN50 DN65
Denomination Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8
Service Kits for product wetted parts

 Service kit EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923028 9611923029 9611923030 9611923031
 Service kit Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923034 9611923035 9611923036 9611923037
 Service kit FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923040 9611923041 9611923042 9611923043
 Service kit HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923160 9611923161 9611923162 9611923163
 Service kit PFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923183 9611923184 9611923185
Service kits
76mm 101.6mm 101.6mm

DN80 DN80 DN100 DN100 DN150
Denomination Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 15

 Service kit EPDM ............................ 9611923032 9611923051 9611923033 9611923033 9611923046
 Service kit Q ................................. 9611923038 9611923039 9611923039 9611923047
 Service kit FPM .............................. 9611923044 9611923045 9611923045 9611923048
 Service kit HNBR ............................ 9611923164 9611923165 9611923165 9611923197
 Service kit PFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923186 9611923187 9611923187
NB: * Disc connection □ 10 for 101.6 mm and DN100 is no longer available. Please rebuild the airactuator or/and handle to: disc connection □ 12
1)Seal ring is delivered assembled with disc.
Reg. 2.14.1 9805 / Intro. 8001
Parts marked with  are included in the service kits. Recommended spare parts: Service kits.
900069/3
35
7.6 LKB-F Butterfly valves, ISO
36
Parts list
1 2 Valve body half
2 1 Disc
3  1 Bush
4  1 Bush
5  1 Seal ring (EPDM)
6 1 Set of screws and nuts
7 2 Flange (AISI 316L)
8  2 Seal ring (EPDM)
Service kits
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
Denomination Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 10 Disc 12

 Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . 9611923058 9611923059 9611923060 9611923061 9611923062 9611923063
 Service kit, Silicone (Q) .... 9611923064 9611923065 9611923066 9611923067 9611923068 9611923069
 Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923070 9611923071 9611923072 9611923073 9611923074 9611923099
 Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . 9611923310 9611923311 9611923312 9611923313 9611923314 9611923315
NB:
* Disc connection □ 10 for 101.6 mm and DN 100 is no longer available. Please rebuild the air-actuator or/and handle to: disc connection □ 12
1) Seal ring is delivered assembled with disc.
Parts marked with  are included in the service kits.

Recommended spare parts: Service kits.
900529/2
37
The drawing and parts list include all items.
7.7 LKB-F Butterfly valves, DIN
38
Parts list
1 2 Valve body half
2 1 Disc
3  1 Bush
4  1 Bush
5  1 Seal ring
6 1 Set of screws and nuts
7 2 Flange
8  2 Seal ring
Service kits
DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50

 Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923100 9611923101 9611923102 9611923103
 Service kit, Silicone (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923109 9611923110 9611923111 9611923112
 Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923118 9611923119 9611923120 9611923121
Service kits
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150

Denomination Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 14 Disc □ 15
 Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923104 9611923105 9611923106 9611923107 9611923108

 Service kit, Silicone (Q) ...................... 9611923113 9611923114 9611923115 9611923116 9611923117
 Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923122 9611923123 9611923124 9611923125 9611923126
1) Seal ring is delivered assembled with disc.

900529/1
39
7.8 LKB-2 Butterfly valves
TD 403-231_2
40
Parts list
1a 2 Valve body half
1 2 Valve body half
2 1 Disc
3  1 Bush
4  1 Bush
5  1 Seal ring
6 1 Set screw
Service kits
DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50


 Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923075 9611923076 9611923077 9611923078
 Service kit, Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923083 9611923084 9611923085 9611923086
 Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923091 9611923092 9611923093 9611923094
 Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923210 9611923211 9611923212 9611923213
 Service kit, PFA ................................................ 9611923191 9611923192
Service kits
DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125


 Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923079 9611923080 9611923081 9611923082
 Service kit, Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923087 9611923088 9611923089 9611923090
 Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923095 9611923096 9611923097 9611923098
 Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923214 9611923215 9611923216 9611923217
 Service kit, PFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923193 9611923194 9611923195
NB:
1)Seal ring is delivered assembled with disc.

900245/3
41
7.9 LKB-LP Butterfly valve
TD 458-001_1
42
Parts list
1 2 Valve body half
2 1 Disc
3  1 Bush
4  1 Bush
5  1 Seal ring
6 1 Set screw
7 1 Handle
7a 1 Lockable multiposition handle
(only ISO)
Service kits
Denomination 25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76.1 mm 101.6 mm
Service Kits for product wetted parts, ISO

 Service kit EPDM .......... 9611923028 9611923204 9611923205 9611923031 9611923032 9611923033
Service kits
Denomination DN25 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100
Service Kits for product wetted parts, DIN

 Service kit EPDM .......... 9611923206 9611923207 9611923208 9611923079 9611923209 9611923218

TD 900-204/4
43
The drawing and the parts list include all items.
NO = Normally open.
7.10 LKLA ø85 mm (NO/NC)
44
NO = Normally open.
Parts list Service kits

Service Kit for actuator
1 1 Air cylinder
2 1 Rotating cylinder Service kits, Air/Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923010
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5a 1 End cap
5b 1 End cap, Mark lll
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
8 1 Inner spring
9 1 Outer spring
10  2 Needle bearing
12  2 Thrust bearing
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring, Noryl with screw
19 1 Water rejector (period 8310-)
Note:
Butterfly valve 101.6 mm / DN100 sold before 8906 = □ 10 mm
Butterfly valve DN 65 (ISO) sold before 8910 = □ 8 mm
Please check the square size of the disc when ordering spares.
Parts marked with  are included in the service kit.

Recommended spare parts: Service kit.
900128/2
45
7.11 LKLA ø85 mm (A/A)
46

Service kits, Air/Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923011
1 1 Air cylinder
2 1 Rotating cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5a 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring with screw
22*** 1 Retaining plate
23 2 Threaded plug
Note:

900129/1
47
The drawing and the parts list include all items
7.12 LKLA DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A)
TD 407-023_1
48
The drawing and the parts list include all items

Service Kits for Actuator
1 1 Air cylinder
2 1 Rotating cylinder Service kits, Air/Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611923012
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5a 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
22*** 1 Retaining plate
23 2 Threaded plug

900130/1
49
NO = Normally open.
7.13 LKLA ø133 mm (NO/NC)
TD 407-022_1
50
NO = Normally open.

1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
8 1 Spring assembly
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
19 1 Water rejector

900131
51
7.14 LKLA ø133 mm (A/A)
23
TD 407-021_1
52

Denomination
1 1 Air Cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
13 2 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 2 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
22 1 Retaining plate
23 1 Threaded plug

900132/1
53
NO = Normally open.
7.15 LKLA-T ø85 mm (NO/NC)
19
TD 407-020_2
54
NO = Normally open.

1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
8 1 Inner spring
9 1 Outer spring
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
19 1 Water rejector (period 8310- )
20  1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting

900133/1
55
7.16 LKLA-T ø85 mm (A/A)
56

1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
20  1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting
23 1 Threaded plug

900134/1
57
7.17 LKLA-T DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A)
58

1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
20  1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting
23 1 Threaded plug

900135/1
59
NO = Normally open.
7.18 LKLA-T ø133 mm (NO/NC)
TD 407-017_2
60
NO = Normally open.

1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
8 1 Spring assembly
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
19 1 Water rejector (period 8310- )
20  1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting
24  1 Guiding ring
25 1 Spring

900136
61
7.19 LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A)
23
TD 407-016_2
62

Denomination
1 1 Air cylinder
3 1 Piston
4  1 O-ring
5 1 End cap
6 1 Retaining ring
7  1 O-ring
13 2 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15  1 O-ring
16 2 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
20  1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting
23 1 Threaded plug
24  1 Guiding band
25 1 Spring

190137/1
63
7.20 LKB Lockable Multiposition Handle for valve
64
Parts list
1 1 Insert
2 1 Positioning cap
3 1 Screw
65
7.21 LKB Handle 1.1 for butterfly valve
Handle 1.1 for LKB butterfly valve
6
2
5
1a
1b
TD 403-227_1
Handle 1.1 with infinite positions for LKB Butterfly valve
TD 403-228_1
66
Parts list
2 1 Transfer block
3 1 Handle
4 1 Screw with pin
5 1 Spring
6 1 Ball
67
7.22 Handle 1.1 for indication unit
TD 403-226_1
68
Parts list
1 1 Location cap with 2 pos.
2 1 Transfer block
3 1 Handle
4 1 Screw with pin
5 1 Spring
6 1 Ball
8 1 Bracket
9 2 Screw
10 1 Coupling
69
Contact details for all countries are
continually updated on our website.
Please visit www.alfalaval.com to access the information directly.
© Alfa Laval Corporate AB

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval Corporate AB and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights. It is the responsibility of the user of this
document to comply with all applicable intellectual property laws. Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval Corporate AB. Alfa Laval Corporate AB
will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.
Spare Parts
LKB Automatic and Manual Butterfly Valve
TD 403-262_1 TD 403-263
ESE00779-EN5 2013-01
Original manual
Table of contents
1. LKB Butterfly Valve, ISO ............................................................................. 4
2. LKB-2 Butterfly Valve, DIN ........................................................................... 6
3. LKB-F Butterfly Valve, ISO ........................................................................... 8
4. LKB-F Butterfly Valve, DIN ........................................................................... 10
5. LKB Lockable Multiposition Handle for Valve .................................................... 12
6. LKB Handle 1.1 for Butterfly Valve ................................................................. 14
7. Handle 1.1 for Indication Unit ....................................................................... 16
8. LKLA Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø85 ........................................................... 18
9. LKLA Actuator Air/Air ø85 ........................................................................... 20
10. LKLA Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85 ............................................................ 22
11. LKLA Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø133 .......................................................... 24
12. LKLA Actuator Air/Air ø133 .......................................................................... 26
13. LKLA-T Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø85 ......................................................... 28
14. LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air ø85 ......................................................................... 30
15. LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85 .......................................................... 32
16. LKLA-T Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø133 ....................................................... 34
17. LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air ø133 ....................................................................... 36
3
LKB Butterfly Valve, ISO
_1
4 Intro 1980-01
LKB Butterfly Valve, ISO
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm
Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8
1 2l Valve body half, (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-44-365-0 9611-44-322-0 9611-44-323-0

2l Valve body half, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-44-365-1 9611-44-322-1 9611-44-323-1
2 1l Disc, (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-368-0 9611-41-169-0 9611-41-177-0
1l Disc, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-368-1 9611-41-169-1 9611-41-177-1
1l Disc, 12 (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1l Disc, 12 (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-173-0 9611-41-181-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-376-0 9611-41-173-0 9611-41-181-0
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-0 9611-41-409-0 9611-41-410-0
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-372-0 9611-41-174-0 9611-41-182-0
1l Seal ring, (Viton FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-3 9611-41-409-3 9611-41-410-3
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-4 9611-41-409-4 9611-41-410-4
1l Seal ring, (PFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-32021) 9612-9006-01
6 1l Set of screws, M6 + Nut M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-734-0 9611-41-734-0
1l Set of screws, M8 + Nut M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-735-0
63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm 101.6 mm

Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 8 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12
1 2l Valve body half, (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-44-324-0 9611-44-307-0 9611-41-325-0 9611-41-325-0

2l Valve body half, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-44-324-1 9611-44-307-1 9611-41-325-1 9611-41-325-1
2 1l Disc, (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-185-0 9611-41-193-0
1l Disc, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-185-1 9611-41-193-1
1l Disc, 12 (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0463-01
1l Disc, 12 (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0463-02
1l Disc, 10 (AISI 316) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9611-41-206-0 9611-41-206-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9611-41-205-0 9611-41-205-0
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-411-0 9611-41-406-0 9611-41-412-0 9611-41-412-0
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-190-0 9611-41-198-0 9611-41-207-0 9611-41-207-0
1l Seal ring, (Viton FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-411-3 9611-41-406-3 9611-41-412-3 9611-41-412-3
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-411-4 9611-41-406-4 9611-41-412-4 9611-41-412-4
1l Seal ring, (PFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-9007-01 9612-9008-01 9612-9009-01 9612-9009-01
6 1l Set of screws, M8 + Nut M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-735-0 9611-41-736-0
1l Set of screws, M10 + Nut M10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-737-0 9611-41-737-0
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm
DN25 DN40 DN50 DN65
Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8
Service Kits for Product wetted parts

a Service kit EPDM. .............................................. 9611-92-3028 9611-92-3029 9611-92-3030 9611-92-3031
a Service kit Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3034 9611-92-3035 9611-92-3036 9611-92-3037
a Service kit FPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3040 9611-92-3041 9611-92-3042 9611-92-3043
a Service kit HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3160 9611-92-3161 9611-92-3162 9611-92-3163
a Service kit PFA ................................................. 9611-92-3183 9611-92-3184 9611-92-3185
76mm 101.6mm 101.6mm

DN80 DN80 DN100 DN100 DN150
Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 15

a Service kit EPDM. .............................. 9611-92-3032 9611-92-3051 9611-92-3033 9611-92-3033 9611-92-3046
a Service kit Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3038 9611-92-3039 9611-92-3039 9611-92-3047
a Service kit FPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3044 9611-92-3045 9611-92-3045 9611-92-3048
a Service kit HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3164 9611-92-3165 9611-92-3165 9611-92-3197
a Service kit PFA ................................. 9611-92-3186 9611-92-3187 9611-92-3187
NB: * Disc connection □ 10 for 101.6 mm and DN100 is not available anymore, please rebuild the air-actuator or/and handle to: disc
connection □ 12
1)Seal-ring is delivered assembled with disc.
Reg. 2.14.1 9805 / Intro. 8001
Parts marked with  are included in the service kits. Recommended spare parts: Service kits.
900069/3
5
LKB-2 Butterfly Valve, DIN
TD 403-231_2
6 Intro 1989-01
LKB-2 Butterfly Valve, DIN
For valves with bushes (Period 9301-)
DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50
1 2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3236-01 9612-3237-019612-3238-01 9612-3239-01

2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3236-02 9612-3237-029612-3238-02 9612-3239-02
1a 2l Valve body half, male part (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3243-01 9612-3244-019612-3245-01 9612-3246-01
2l Valve body half, male part (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3243-02 9612-3244-029612-3245-02 9612-3246-02
2 1l Disc , (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0736-05 9612-0737-059612-0738-05 9612-0739-05
1l Disc , (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0736-04 9612-0737-049612-0738-04 9612-0739-04
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0
9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0
9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0700-01 9612-0701-019612-0702-01 9612-0703-01
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0709-01 9612-0710-019612-0711-01 9612-0712-01
1l Seal ring, (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0718-01 9612-0719-019612-0720-01 9612-0721-01
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0700-02 9612-0701-029612-0702-02 9612-0703-02
l Seal ring, (PFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-32031) 9612-9011-01
6 1l Set screw, M6 + Nut M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-734-0 9611-41-734-0 9611-41-734-0
1l Set screw, M8 + Nut M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-735-0
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125
1 2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3240-01 9612-3241-01 9612-3242-01 9612-0774-01
2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3240-02 9612-3241-02 9612-3242-02 9612-0774-02
1a 2l Valve body half , male part (AISI 304L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3247-01 9612-3248-01 9612-3249-01 9612-0772-01
2l Valve body half, male part (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3247-02 9612-3248-02 9612-3249-02 9612-0772-02
2 1l Disc , (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0740-05 9612-0741-05 9612-0742-05 9612-0769-05
1l Disc , (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0740-04 9612-0741-04 9612-0742-04 9612-0769-04
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9612-0785-01
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9612-0785-01
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0704-01 9612-0705-01 9612-0706-01 9612-0771-01
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0713-01 9612-0714-01 9612-0715-01 9612-0783-01
1l Seal ring, (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0722-01 9612-0723-01 9612-0724-01 9612-0784-01
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0704-02 9612-0705-02 9612-0706-02 9612-0771-02
0l Seal ring, (PFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-9012-01 9612-9013-01 9612-9014-01
6 1l Set screw, M8 + Nut M8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-736-0 9611-41-736-0
1l Set screw, M10 + Nut M10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-737-0
1l Set screw, M10 + Nut M10 (6pcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-777-0
DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50


a Service kit, EPDM. ............................................. 9611-92-3075 9611-92-3076 9611-92-3077 9611-92-3078
a Service kit, Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3083 9611-92-3084 9611-92-3085 9611-92-3086
a Service kit, FPM. ............................................... 9611-92-3091 9611-92-3092 9611-92-3093 9611-92-3094
a Service kit, HNBR .............................................. 9611-92-3210 9611-92-3211 9611-92-3212 9611-92-3213
a Service kit, PFA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3191 9611-92-3192
DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125


a Service kit, EPDM .............................................. 9611-92-3079 9611-92-3080 9611-92-3081 9611-92-3082
a Service kit, Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3087 9611-92-3088 9611-92-3089 9611-92-3090
a Service kit, FPM. ............................................... 9611-92-3095 9611-92-3096 9611-92-3097 9611-92-3098
a Service kit, HNBR .............................................. 9611-92-3214 9611-92-3215 9611-92-3216 9611-92-3217
a Service kit, PFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3193 9611-92-3194 9611-92-3195
NB:
1)Seal-ring is delivered assembled with disc.
900245/3
7
LKB-F Butterfly Valve, ISO
8 Intro 1994-08
LKB-F Butterfly Valve, ISO
LKB-F ISO
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 8 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12
1 2l Valve body half, welding, (AISI 316

L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-10 9612-4024-11 9612-4024-12 9612-4024-13 9612-4024-14 9612-4024-15
2l Valve body half, welding, (AISI
304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-10 9612-4024-11 9612-4024-12 9612-4024-13 9612-4024-14 9612-4024-15
2 1l Disc, (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-368-0 9611-41-169-0 9611-41-177-0 9611-41-185-0 9611-41-193-0 9612-0463-01
1l Disc , (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-368-1 9611-41-169-1 9611-41-177-1 9611-41-185-1 9611-41-193-1 9612-0463-02
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-173-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9611-41-206-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-376-0 9611-41-173-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9611-41-205-0
5  1l Seal ring (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-0 9611-41-409-0 9611-41-410-0 9611-41-411-0 9611-41-406-0 9611-41-412-0
1l Seal ring (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-372-0 9611-41-174-0 9611-41-182-0 9611-41-190-0 9611-41-198-0 9611-41-207-0
1l Seal ring (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-3 9611-41-409-3 9611-41-410-3 9611-41-411-3 9611-41-406-3 9611-41-412-3
1l Seal ring (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-413-4 9611-41-409-4 9611-41-410-4 9611-41-411-4 9611-41-406-4 9611-41-412-4
1l Seal ring (PFA on EPDM) . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-32021) 9612-9006-01 9612-9007-01 9612-9008-01 9612-9009-01
6 1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-01 9612-4001-01
1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-02 9612-4001-02
1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-03
1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-04
7 2l Flange (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-10 9612-4025-11 9612-4025-12 9612-4025-13 9612-4025-14 9612-4025-15
2l Flange (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-10 9612-4025-11 9612-4025-12 9612-4025-13 9612-4025-14 9612-4025-15
8  2l Seal ring (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-31 9612-4026-32 9612-4026-33 9612-4026-34 9612-4026-35 9612-4026-36
2l Seal ring (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-41 9612-4026-42 9612-4026-43 9612-4026-44 9612-4026-45 9612-4026-46
2l Seal ring (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-51 9612-4026-52 9612-4026-53 9612-4026-54 9612-4026-55 9612-4026-56
2l Seal ring (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-61 9612-4026-62 9612-4026-63 9612-4026-64 9612-4026-65 9612-4026-66
25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 8 Disc 10 Disc 12

a Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3058 9611-92-3059 9611-92-3060 9611-92-3061 9611-92-3062 9611-92-3063
a Service kit, Silicone (Q) . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3064 9611-92-3065 9611-92-3066 9611-92-3067 9611-92-3068 9611-92-3069
a Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3070 9611-92-3071 9611-92-3072 9611-92-3073 9611-92-3074 9611-92-3099
a Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3310 9611-92-3311 9611-92-3312 9611-92-3313 9611-92-3314 9611-92-3315
NB:
* Disc connection □ 10 for 101.6 mm and DN 100 is not available anymore, please rebuild the air-actuator or/and handle to: disc connection □ 12
1) Seal-ring is delivered assembled with disc.
900529/2
9
LKB-F Butterfly Valve, DIN
10 Intro 1994-08
LKB-F Butterfly Valve, DIN
LKB-F DIN
DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50
1 2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-01 9612-4024-02 9612-4024-03 9612-4024-04
2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-01 9612-4024-02 9612-4024-03 9612-4024-04
2 1l Disc, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0736-04 9612-0737-04 9612-0738-04 9612-0739-04
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-181-0 9611-41-189-0
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0700-01 9612-0701-01 9612-0702-01 9612-0703-01
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0709-01 9612-0710-01 9612-0711-01 9612-0712-01
1l Seal ring, (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0718-01 9612-0719-01 9612-0720-01 9612-0721-01
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0700-02 9612-0701-02 9612-0702-02 9612-0703-02
1l Seal ring, (PFA on EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-92-32031) 9612-9011-01
6 1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-01 9612-4001-01 9612-4001-01
1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-02
7 2l Flange, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-01 9612-4025-02 9612-4025-03 9612-4025-04
2l Flange, (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-01 9612-4025-02 9612-4025-03 9612-4025-04
8  2l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-01 9612-4026-02 9612-4026-03 9612-4026-04
2l Seal ring, (Silicone, Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-11 9612-4026-12 9612-4026-13 9612-4026-14
2l Seal ring, (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-21 9612-4026-22 9612-4026-23 9612-4026-24
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN150

Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 14 Disc □ 15
1 2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 316 L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-05 9612-4024-06 9612-4024-07 9612-4024-08 9612-4024-09
2l Valve body half, welding (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4024-05 9612-4024-06 9612-4024-07 9612-4024-08 9612-4024-09
2 1l Disc, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0740-04 9612-0741-04 9612-0742-04 9612-0769-04 9611-41-370-1
3  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9612-0785-01 9611-41-379-0
4  1l Bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-189-0 9611-41-197-0 9612-0785-01 9611-41-379-0
5  1l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0704-01 9612-0705-01 9612-0706-01 9612-0771-01 9611-41-415-0
1l Seal ring, (Silicone Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0713-01 9612-0714-01 9612-0715-01 9612-0783-01 9611-41-374-0
1l Seal ring (FPM), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0722-01 9612-0723-01 9612-0724-01 9612-0784-01 9611-41-415-3
1l Seal ring, (HNBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0704-02 9612-0705-02 9612-0706-02 9612-0771-02 9611-41-415-4
1l Seal ring, (PFA on EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-9012-01 9612-9013-01 9612-9014-01
6 1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-03 9612-4001-03
1l Set of screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4001-04
7 2l Flange, (AISI 316L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-05 9612-4025-06 9612-4025-07 9612-4025-08 9612-4025-09
2l Flange, (AISI 304) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4025-05 9612-4025-06 9612-4025-07 9612-4025-08 9612-4025-09
8  2l Seal ring, (EPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-05 9612-4026-06 9612-4026-07 9612-4026-08 9612-4026-09
2l Seal ring, (Silicone, Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-15 9612-4026-16 9612-4026-17 9612-4026-18 9612-4026-19
2l Seal ring, (FPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-4026-25 9612-4026-26 9612-4026-27 9612-4026-28 9612-4026-29
DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50

a Service kit, EPDM .............................................. 9611-92-3100 9611-92-3101 9611-92-3102 9611-92-3103
a Service kit, Silicone (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3109 9611-92-3110 9611-92-3111 9611-92-3112
a Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3118 9611-92-3119 9611-92-3120 9611-92-3121
DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150

Disc □ 10 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 14 Disc □ 15
a Service kit, EPDM .............................. 9611-92-3104 9611-92-3105 9611-92-3106 9611-92-3107 9611-92-3108

a Service kit, Silicone (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3113 9611-92-3114 9611-92-3115 9611-92-3116 9611-92-3117
a Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3122 9611-92-3123 9611-92-3124 9611-92-3125 9611-92-3126
1) Seal-ring is delivered assembled with disc.
900529/1
11
LKB Lockable Multiposition Handle for Valve
12 Intro 1999-06
LKB Lockable Multiposition Handle for Valve

1 1l Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1l Positioning cap, (76-101.6 mm/DN65-100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l Positioning cap, (25-63.5 mm/DN25-50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 1l Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0453-02 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01
900530
13
LKB Handle 1.1 for Butterfly Valve
Handle 1.1 for Butterfly valve LKB
6
2
5
1a
1b
TD 403-227_1
Handle 1.1 with infinite positions for Butterfly valve LKB
TD 403-228_1
14 Intro 1988-02
LKB Handle 1.1 for Butterfly Valve
Handle 1.1 for Butterfly valve LKB (standard)
25 - 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25 - 50 DN 65 - 80 DN 100 DN 125 DN 150
Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 8 Disc □ 10 Disc □ 12 Disc □ 14 Disc □ 15
1a 1l Location cap , with 2 pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1b 1l Location cap , with 4 pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1l Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 1l Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 1l Screw with pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0452-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01
5 1l Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1982 9612-0781-01 9612-3651-01
6 1l Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1981 9611-99-2512 9611-99-2713
Handle 1.1 for Butterfly valve LKB (cap turned 90 o)
25 - 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25 - 50 DN 65 - 80 DN 100
1a 1l Location cap turned 900 2 pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1b 1l Location cap turned 900 4 pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1l Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 1l Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 1l Screw with pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0452-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01
5 1l Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1982
6 1l Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1981
Handle 1.1 with infinite positions for Butterfly valve LKB
25 - 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25 - 50 DN 65 - 80 DN 100
1 1l Location cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1l Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 1l Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 1l Screw with pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0452-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01
7 1l Crosshead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NB:
1) Handle 1.1 with □ 10 connection can also be used for old version 101.6 mm DN 100 LKB valve.
1) Handle 1.1 with □ 8 connection can also be used for old version DN 65 LKB valve.
900265
15
Handle 1.1 for Indication Unit
TD 403-226_1
16 Intro 1990-06
Handle 1.1 for Indication Unit
25 - 63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm DN 65
DN 25-50 DN 80 DN 100 (LKB-DIN)
1 1l Location cap with 2 pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1l Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 1l Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 1l Screw with pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-0452-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01 9612-0453-01
5 1l Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1998 9611-99-1982 9611-99-1998
6 1l Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1970 9611-99-1981 9611-99-1970
8 1l Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-647-0 9611-41-648-0 9611-41-648-0 9612-0815-02
9 2l Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1686 9611-99-1686 9611-99-1686 9611-99-1686
10 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0
900167/1
17
LKLA Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø85
18 Intro 1981-01
NC NC NC NO NO NO
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm 25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100 DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1944-01 9612-1944-01 9612-1944-01 9612-1943-01 9612-1943-01 9612-1943-01
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5a 1l End cap, (Period 0011-) . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0
1l End cap, (Period 8301-0011) . . . . 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
8 1l Inner spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629
9 1l Outer spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  2l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-644-0 9611-41-645-0 9612-0447-03 9611-41-644-0 9611-41-645-0 9612-0447-03
18 1l Activating ring, Noryl with screw . 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0
19 1l Water rejector (Period 8310-) . . . . 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0
NC/NO for Altop
NC NC NC NO NO NO
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm 25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100 DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
5b 1l End cap, Mark lll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0
All other parts as above.
Service Kit for Actuator

Service kits, Air/Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3010
Note:
900128/2
19
LKLA Actuator Air/Air ø85
20 Intro 1981-01
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
1 1l Air Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-744-1 9611-41-744-1 9611-41-744-1
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-752-0 9611-41-752-0 9611-41-752-0
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5a 1l End cap, (Period 0011-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0
1l End cap, (Period 8301-0011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021 9611-40-2021
7  1l O-ring , NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-757-0 9611-41-757-0 9611-41-757-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-755-1 9611-41-756-1 9612-0448-02
18 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0
22*** 1l Retaining plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-437-0 9611-41-437-0 9611-41-437-0
23 2l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221
*** Up to 8910 supplied without holes, not available anymore
Air/Air for Altop
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
5b 1l End cap, Mark lll ................................................... 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0

Service kits, Air/Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-3011
Note:
900129/1
21
LKLA Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85
TD 407-023_1
22 Intro 1985-01
LKLA Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85
DN 125 DN 150
Pos Qty Denomination Disc □ 14 Disc □ 15
1 1l Air Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-742-0 9611-41-742-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-744-0 9611-41-744-0
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-752-0 9611-41-752-0
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5a 1l End cap, (Period 0011-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-633-0 9611-41-633-0
1l End cap, (Period 8301-0011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31357-0740-1 31357-0740-1
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
13 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1314 9611-99-1314
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-754-0 9611-41-754-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0030 9611-99-0030
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1313 9611-99-1313
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2856-02 9611-41-747-1
18 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-665-0 9611-41-665-0
22*** 1l Retaining plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-437-0 9611-41-437-0
23 2l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221
*** Up to 8910 supplied without holes, not available anymore
Air/Air for Altop

5b 1l End cap, Mark lll ................................................... 9611-41-674-0 9611-41-674-0

900130/1
23
TD 407-022_1
24 Intro 1991-09
NC NO
101.6 mm 101.6 mm NC NO NC NO
DN 100 DN 100 DN 125 DN 125 DN 150 DN 150
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2700-01 9612-2680-01 9612-2700-01 9612-2680-01 9612-2700-01 9612-2680-01
4  1l O-ring , NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367
5 1l End cap, (Period: 0011- ) . . . . . . . . 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01
1l End cap, (Period:9001 - 0011) . . . 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035
8 1l Spring assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355
12  2l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347
13 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2715-01 9612-2715-01 9612-2715-02 9612-2715-02 9612-2715-03 9612-2715-03
18 1l Indication pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01
19 1l Water rejector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0

900131
25
23
TD 407-021_1
26 Intro 1991-09
101.6 mm
DN 100 DN 125 DN 150
1 1l Air Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2680-01 9612-2680-01 9612-2680-01
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367
5 1l End cap, (Period: 0011- ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01 9612-2675-01
1l End cap, (Period:9001 - 0011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01 9612-2714-01
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01
7  1l O-ring , NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347
13 2l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2804-01 9612-2804-01 9612-2804-01
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079
16 2l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2827-01 9612-2827-02 9612-2827-03
18 1l Indication pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01
22 1l Retaining plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3486-01 9612-3486-01 9612-3486-01
23 1l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221

900132/1
27
LKLA-T Actuator Air/Spring (NC-NO) ø85
19
TD 407-020_2
28 Intro 1990-09
NC NC NC NO NO NO
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm 25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100 DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0 9611-41-638-0
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1939-02 9612-1939-02 9612-1939-02 9612-1939-01 9612-1939-01 9612-1939-01
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5 1l End cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
8 1l Inner spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629 9611-99-1629
9 1l Outer spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631 9611-99-1631
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  2l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0 9611-41-646-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-644-0 9611-41-645-0 9612-0447-03 9611-41-644-0 9611-41-645-0 9612-0447-03
18 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0
19 1l Water rejector (period 8310- ) . . . . 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0
20  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21
21 1l Air fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988

900133/1
29
LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air ø85
30 Intro 1990-09
25-63.5 mm 76 mm 101.6 mm
DN 25-50 DN 65-80 DN 100
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0 9611-41-758-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-744-1 9611-41-744-1 9611-41-744-1
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1939-03 9612-1939-03 9612-1939-03
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5 1l End cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-757-0 9611-41-757-0 9611-41-757-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233 9611-99-1233
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235 9611-99-1235
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-755-1 9611-41-756-1 9612-0448-02
18 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0 9611-41-669-0
20  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21
21 1l Air fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988
23 1l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221

900134/1
31
LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85
32 Intro 1990-09
LKLA-T Actuator Air/Air DN125-150 ø85
DN 125 DN 150
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-742-0 9611-41-742-0
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-744-0 9611-41-744-0
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1939-03 9612-1939-03
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0052 9611-99-0052
5 1l End cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-1936-01 9612-1936-01
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-40-202-1 9611-40-202-1
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0396 9611-99-0396
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1230 9611-99-1230
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1236 9611-99-1236
13 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1314 9611-99-1314
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-754-0 9611-41-754-0
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0030 9611-99-0030
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1313 9611-99-1313
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2856-02 9611-41-747-1
18 1l Activating ring with screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-41-665-0 9611-41-665-0
20  1l O-ring , NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223404-21 223404-21
21 1l Air fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988
23 1l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221

900135/1
33
TD 407-017_2
34 Intro 1990-09
NC NO
101.6 mm 101.6 mm NC NO NC NO
DN 100 DN 100 DN 125 DN 125 DN 150 DN 150
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01
2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3699-01 9612-3699-02 9612-3699-01 9612-3699-02 9612-3699-01 9612-3699-02
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367
5 1l End cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035
8 1l Spring assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01 9612-2701-01
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355
12  2l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347
13 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01 9612-2671-01
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079
16 1l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2715-01 9612-2715-01 9612-2715-02 9612-2715-02 9612-2715-03 9612-2715-03
18 1l Indication pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01
19 1l Water rejector (period 8310- ) . . . . 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0 9611-41-775-0
20  1l O-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21
21 1l Air fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988
24  1l Guiding ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01
25 1l Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01

900136
35
23
TD 407-016_2
36 Intro 1990-09
9612-3749-08
101.6 mm 9612-3749-13 9612-3749-18
DN 100 DN 125 DN 150
1 1l Air cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01 9612-2685-01

2 1l Rotating cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01 9612-2678-01
3 1l Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3699-02 9612-3699-02 9612-3699-02
4  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367 9611-99-2367
5 1l End cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02 9612-2714-02
6 1l Retaining ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01 9612-2682-01
7  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035 9611-99-0035
10  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231 9611-99-1231
11  2l Needle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355 9611-99-2355
12  1l Thrust bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347 9611-99-2347
13 2l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358 9611-99-2358
14 1l Thrust plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2804-01 9612-2804-01 9612-2804-01
15  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079 9611-99-0079
16 2l Connex pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357 9611-99-2357
17 1l Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2827-01 9612-2827-02 9612-2827-03
18 1l Indication pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01 9612-2719-01
20  1l O-ring, NBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223404-21 223404-21 223404-21
21 1l Air fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988 9611-99-1988
23 1l Threaded plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221 9611-99-1221
24  1l Guiding band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01 9612-3698-01
25 1l Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01 9612-3700-01

190137/1
37
Contact details for all countries are
continually updated on our website.
Please visit www.alfalaval.com to access the information directly.
© Alfa Laval Corporate AB

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval Corporate AB and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights. It is the responsibility of the user of this
document to comply with all applicable intellectual property laws. Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval Corporate AB. Alfa Laval Corporate AB
will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.

Motorized quarter
turn actuator
Construction
The GEMÜ 9428 motorized quarter turn actuator is a compact design. The
motor and gear are combined as one unit in a plastic housing. The quarter
turn actuator is designed for use with AC or DC voltages and utilises a DC
motor with a secondary spur gear. The 90° movement is achieved by a ball
screw and lever based on the scotch yoke principle.
Features
• Low maintenance actuator
• Optical position indicator
• Quiet operation
• Optional mounting position
• Manual override
Actuator version 1006, 1015
• Electrical protection class IP 65 (voltages 12 V, 24 V)
• Adjustable limit switches
Advantages
• Low weight
• Optical position indicator as standard
• A manual override is integrated.
• With the 24V DC design an emergency power supply is possible by
means of GEMÜ 1570 emergency power supply module
Actuator version 2006, 2015

(voltages 100 - 250 V, 50- 60 Hz)
Dimensions [mm]
Actuator version 1006, 1015, 2006, 2015
80 145
62* C 55 40
A
Actuator version 3035

B
(voltages 24 V / 100 - 250V)
* Standard with supply voltage code O4
Actuator
A B C
version
9428
1006, 1015 69 94 49
2006, 2015 96 122 53
Technical data
Protection class to EN 60529 Actuator material

IP 65 Housing cover
Actuator version
1006, 1015, 2006, 2015 PPE + 30 % glass fibre reinforced
3035 PP + 20 % glass bead reinforced
Permissible temperatures Housing base
Actuator version
Ambient temperature -10 to +60 °C 1006, 1015, 2006, 2015 PP + 30 % glass fibre reinforced
3035 PP + 20 % glass bead reinforced
Storage temperature -20 to +60 °C
Optical position indicator PP-R natural
Weight
Travel
Supply voltage 12 V / 24 V 1.0 kg
Nominal travel 90°
Supply voltage 100-250 V 1.2 kg
Max. travel 93°
Supply voltage 24 V / 100-250 V
Actuator version 3035 2.4 kg Setting range limit switch Min. -2 to 12°
Setting range limit switch Max. 76 to 91°
Mounting position
Optional Torque
Actuator version 1006, 2006 6 Nm
Actuator version 1015, 2015 15 Nm
Manual override Actuator version 3035 35 Nm
with Allen key SW3
Operating times
Actuator version 1006, 2006 approx. 4 sec
Actuator version 1015, 2015 approx. 11 sec
Actuator version 3035 approx. 15 sec
Correlation
Actuator version / Connection size
Actuator Connection size (code)
version G05 F03 F04 F05
1006 S08 S09 S09 S09/S11
1015 S08 S09 S09 S09/S11
2006 S08 S09 S09 S09/S11
2015 S08 S09 S09 S09/S11
3035 - - - S09/S11/S14
S08, S09, S11, S14 - square drive (code)
9428 2
Technical data
Power supply Output signals (option)

Rated voltage 12 V / 24 V AC or DC Potential-free limit switches Change-over contact
100 - 250 V AC 250 V AC/6A
Rated frequency (at AC rated voltage) 50/60 Hz
Voltage tolerance ± 10 %
Power and current consumption

Actuator 12 V DC 24 V DC 12 V AC 24 V AC 100-250 V AC
version Code B1 Code C1 Code B4 Code C4 Code O4
Code Power consumption [W]
1006 26 29 24 36 -
1015 26 15 - - -
2006 - - - - 58
2015 - - 24 29 46
3035 - 31 - 26 46
Current consumption - Rated current [A]
1006 2.2 1.2 2 1.5 -
1015 2.2 0.6 - - -
2006 - - - - 0.25
2015 - - 2 1.2 0.20
3035 - 1.3 - 1.1 0.20
Current consumption - max. current at start up [A]
1006 6.3 4.0 2.4 1.8 -
1015 9.2 3.8 - - -
2006 - - - - 0.3
2015 - - 2.3 1.8 0.4
3035 - 3.3 - 1.5 0.2
Duty cycle Electrical protection

Supply voltage 12 V / 24 V Continuous duty Supply voltage 12 V / 24 V
Motor protective system by customer
Supply voltage 100 - 250 V 40 % duty Supply voltage 100 - 250 V
Integrated stall and overload protection
plus excess current release T 1A 5x20 mm
Electrical connection
Supply voltage 12 V/ 24 V
Connection Cable gland PG 13.5 Protection class to DIN EN 61140
Cable diameter 7.5 ... 12.5 mm
Max. cross section of wire 1.5 mm² I
Recommended connection cable 5x1 mm²
Supply voltage 100 - 250 V
Connection Hirschmann plug
Type N6RFFS11 (PG 11)
Cable diameter 7 ... 9 mm
Max. cross section of wire 1.5 mm²
Recommended connection cable 1 connector.
(Standard): 7x1 mm²
Recommended motor protection

Voltage Motor protection switch Type Set current
12 V DC Siemens 3RV 1011-1CA10 2.20 A
12 V AC Siemens 3RV 1011-1CA10 2.00 A
24 V DC Siemens 3RV 1011-1BA10 1.70 A
24 V AC Siemens 3RV 1011-1BA10 1.60 A
120 V AC Siemens 3RV 1011-OGA10 0.60 A
230 V AC Siemens 3RV 1011-OGA10 0.45 A
3
9428
Order data
Fieldbus Code Voltage/frequency Code

Without 000 12 V DC B1
12 V AC 50/60 Hz B4
24 V DC C1
Accessory Code 24 V AC 50/60 Hz C4
Accessory Z 100-250 V AC 50/60 Hz O4
Connection size Code Functional module Code

Flange type F03 F03 OPEN/CLOSE control standard A0
Flange type F04 F04 OPEN/CLOSE control
with 2 additional potential-free limit switches AE
Flange type F05 F05
Flange type G05 G05
see Coordination -Actuator version / Connection size-
on page 2 Actuator version Code
6 Nm (supply voltage B1,C1,B4,C4) 1006
6 Nm (supply voltage O4) 2006
Location spigot Code 15 Nm (supply voltage B1,C1) 1015
Actuator without location spigot N 15 Nm (supply voltage B4,C4,O4) 2015
Actuator with location spigot Y 35 Nm (supply voltage C1,C4,O4) 3035
Square drive socket Code

Star-shaped, SW8 S08
see Coordination -Actuator version / Connection size-
on page 2
Special version K-No.

Parallel operation* 6410
Connection with 1 Hirschmann socket DIN 43651 Type N6RFFS11
Cable diameter 7...9 mm; wire cross section up to 1.5 mm²; PG11)* 6598
Connection with 2 Harting plugs HAN 7D (only functional code AE) 6722
* not possible for supply voltage code O4
Order example 9428 000 Z G05 Y S08 C1 A0 1006 -

Type 9428
Fieldbus (code) 000
Accessory (code) Z
Connection size (code) G05
Location spigot (code) Y
Square drive socket (code) S08
Voltage/frequency (code) C1
Functional module (code) A0
Actuator version (code) 1006
Special version (K-No.) -
9428 4
Dimensions [mm]
Actuator version 3035
172 208
66 76 94 Voltage B
24 V 100.5
100V - 250 V 124.5
B
Valve connection dimensions [mm]
Actuatorversion Connection size Location

SW G LK
(Code) (Code) spigot
LK 10XX / 20XX G05 Y S08 Ø5,5 48
SW
10XX / 20XX F03 N S09 M5 36

10XX / 20XX F04 N S09 M5 42
10XX / 20XX F05 N S09 M6 50
10XX / 20XX F05 N S11 M6 50
3035 F05 Y S14 M6 50
G
Electrical connections [mm]
OPEN / CLOSE version - 12 / 24 V DC (Code A0)
Limit switch open

External
Term. block
wiring
ZU 1
Closed 2
3 1
Open
AUF 4 2
PE 5 3
4 Motor
5
CLOSED
0
OPEN
+ − PE
Limit switch close
Terminals must not be bridged!

If parallel connection of several actuators is required, the variant with K-No. 6410 must be used.
5
9428
OPEN / CLOSE control - 12 / 24 V AC (Code A0)
External wiring Terminal block Top

1
1* 2 1
2* 3
4 S1 S2
PE 5 2
1*) Motor voltage
12/24 V AC L1 3
2*) Change-over: Uv
Direction open/close
12V/24V AC N 4
Uv = 12V AC or 24V AC depending
on rated voltage of actuator
PE
Ad 2*) Change-over voltage: On = direction of travel „Open“
S1 = Actuator ON/OFF
Off = direction of travel „Closed“
S2 = Selection of direction
S2 = Off position = Direction „CLOSE
S2 = Working position = Direction „OPEN
2 potential-free limit switches - 12 / 24 V DC (Code AE)
X1 Power connector PinSignal name

4 5 1 L+, Direction of travel OPEN
3 6 2 L-, Direction of travel OPEN
3 L+, Direction of travel CLOSE
2 1 4 L-, Direction of travel CLOSE
5 n.c.
6 n.c.
○ PE, Protective earth conductor
X2 Connector Pin Signal name
4 5 (Additional potential-
1 S 1:1, Change-over contact limit switch CLOSE
3 6 free limit switches)
2 S 1:4, Make-contact limit switch CLOSE
3 S 1:2, Break-contact limit switch CLOSE
2 1
4 S 2:2, Break-contact limit switch OPEN
5 S 2:4, Make-contact limit switch OPEN
6 S 2:1, Change-over contact limit switch OPEN
X1, X2 = Connector Type Hirschmann N6RAM2931592-001 ○ PE, Protective earth conductor
2 potential-free limit switches - 12 / 24 V AC (Code AE)
X1 Power connector Pin Signalname

4 5 1 L1 / L+, Supply voltage
3 6 2 N1 / L-, Supply voltage
3 L1 / L+, Direction of travel OPEN
2 1 4 N / L-, Direction of travel OPEN
5 n.c.
6 n.c.

4 5 (Additional potential- 1 S 1:1, Change-over contact limit switch CLOSE
3 6 free limit switches) 2 S 1:4, Make-contact limit switch CLOSE
2 1 3 S 1:2, Break-contact limit switch CLOSE
Without signal „direction of travel OPEN“ the actuator closes. ○ PE, Protective earth conductor
X1, X2 = Connector Type Hirschmann N6RAM2931592-001
9428 66
OPEN / CLOSE control - 100-250 V AC (Code A0)
X1 Power connector Pin Signal name

4 5 1 L1 / L+, Supply voltage
3 6 2 N1 / L-, Supply voltage
All rights including copyright and industrial

property rights are expressly reserved.
3 L1 / L+, Direction of travel CLOSE
2 1 4 N / L-, Direction of travel CLOSE
6 N / L-, Direction of travel OPEN
X1 = Connector type Hirschmann N6RAM2931592-001 N/L signals in the unit are separated.
Potential assignment by customer.
2 potential-free limit switches - 100-250 V AC (Code AE)
Pin Signal name

X1 Power connector 1 L1 / L+, Supply voltage
4 5
2 N1 / L-, Supply voltage
3 6 3 L1 / L+, Direction of travel CLOSE
2 1 4 N / L-, Direction of travel CLOSE
6 N / L-, Direction of travel OPEN
Should there be any doubts or misunderstandings, the German

N/L signals in the unit are separated.
version of this data sheet is the authoritative document!

Potential assignment by customer.

4 5
(Additional potential- 1 S 1:1, Change-over contact limit switch CLOSE
3 6 free limit switches) 2 S 1:4, Make-contact limit switch CLOSE
2 1 3 S 1:2, Break-contact limit switch CLOSE
X1, X2 = Connector type Hirschmann N6RAM2931592-001 ○ PE, Protective earth conductor
Accessories
Emergency power supply

7-pin cable socket
module GEMÜ 1570
Order no. 88084955
(only for 24V DC design)
Subject to alteration · 05/2015 · 88048797
suitable for K-No. 6598 and

functional module AE
For further actuators and other products, please see our Product Range catalogue and Price List.
Contact GEMÜ.
VALVES, MEASUREMENT
AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
GEMÜ Gebr. Müller · Apparatebau GmbH & Co. KG · Fritz-Müller-Str. 6-8 · D-74653 Ingelfingen-Criesbach · Tel. +49 (0) 7940/123-0 · Telefax +49 (0) 7940/123-224
info@gemue.de · www.gemu-group.com
423, 723, 9428
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE d’INSTALLATION
GEMÜ 423 GEMÜ 723
GEMÜ 9428 GEMÜ 9428

Antriebsgröße 1 Antriebsgröße 2
(Spannungen 12 V, 24 V) (Spannungen 100-250 V, 50-60 Hz)
Actuator size 1 Actuator size 2
(Voltages 12 V, 24 V) (Voltages 100-250 V, 50-60 Hz)
Taille actionneur 1 Taille actionneur 2
(Tension 12 V, 24 V) (Tension 100-250 V, 50-60 Hz)
423, 723, 9428

Inhaltsverzeichnis
1. Funktionsbeschreibung
1.1 Geräteaufbau und Einstellvorschrift ............................................... 3
2. Anschlusspläne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
3. Drehmoment-Diagramm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
4. Hinweis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Table of contents
1. Installation and operating instructions
1.1 Assembly and setting ................................................ 3
2. Terminal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
3. Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
4. Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Sommaire
1. Description fonctionelle
1.1 Conception des appareils et instructions de réglage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2. Schéma de Raccordement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
3. Couple de Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
4. Recommandation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Hinweis zur EG-Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG:

Eine Einbauerklärung gemäß EG-Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG liegt dem Produkt bei.
Beim Einbau in eine als Maschine geltende Installation:
Inbetriebnahme ist untersagt, bis festgestellt wurde, dass die Maschine (Anlage), in die dieses
Produkt eingebaut wird, den Bestimmungen der EG-Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG entspricht.
Die Handhabung, Montage und Inbetriebnahme, sowie Einstell- und Justierarbeiten, dürfen
ausschließlich von autorisiertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Note concerning the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC:

A Declaration of Incorporation in accordance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
accompanies this product.
For incorporation in an installation classed as a machine:
The commissioning is prohibited until it has been determined that the machine (plant) in which this
product is to be incorporated complies with the provisions of the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Handling, assembly and commissioning, in addition to setting and adjustment of the machine must
be performed only by authorized specialist staff.
Remarque concernant la Directive Machines CE 2006/42/CE :

Une déclaration de montage selon la Directive Machines CE 2006/42/CE est jointe au produit.
Lors d’un montage dans une application considéree en tant que machine :
La mise en service est interdite tant qu'il n'a pas été vérifié que la machine dans laquelle
ce produit doit être monté, est conforme aux prescriptions de la Directive Machines CE 2006/42/CE.
La manutention, le montage et la mise en service, de même que les opérations de réglage et
d'ajustage, ne doivent être assurés que par un personnel qualifié autorisé.
423, 723, 9428 2

1. Funktionsbeschreibung
1.1 Geräteaufbau und Einstellvorschrift.
Der Motorantrieb wird über einen Gleichstrommotor mit nachgeschaltetem Stirnradgetrie-
be angetrieben. Mit Hilfe von Gewindespindel, Gewindemutter und Schwinge wird eine
90°-Schwenkbewegung realisiert. Die Endlagenschaltung erfolgt über Microschalter. In
den Endlagen wird der Motor mittels Kurzzschluss des Läufers sofort gestoppt. Die End-
schalter sind auf einer Schalterhalteplatte verstellbar angebaut. Somit ist eine Öffnungs-
bzw. Schließbegrenzung möglich.
Bei der Endlageneinstellung ist in der Schwinge der jeweiligen Endlagen ca. 0,5-1 mm
Luft zu gewährleisten.
Die Spannungsversorgung kann je nach Variante 12 V/24 VDC, 12 V/24 VAC oder 100-
250 VAC betragen.
Eine Notstromversorgung bei der 24 VDC-Version kann mittels GEMÜ 1570 erfolgen.
Die Handnotbetätigung kann über Imbusschlüssei SW 3 seitlich am Antrieb vorgenom-
men werden.
Achtung! Handnotbetätigung nur spannungsfrei betätigen.
1. Installation and operating instructions

1.1 Assembly and setting instructions
The valve is actuated by means of a d.c. motor operating via a spur gear. A 900 rotation is
produced with a threaded spindle, nut and rotation arm. The end of stroke positions are
switched off by microswitches. At the end position, the motor is immediately stopped by
short-circuiting the rotor. The adjustable limit switches are mounted on a switch mounting
plate, so enabling the opening and closing limits to be set.
When setting the limiting positions, a gap of appr 0. 5 to 1 mm should be allowed for the
rotating arm at the respective end positions.
Depending on the design, the voltage supply can be 12 V/24 VDC, 12 V/24 VAC or 100-
250 VAC.
A stand-by supply for the 24 VDC design can be provided by means of the GEMÜ 1570
unit.
Manual operation is possible in emergencies using an SW 3 Allen key at the side of the
actuator
Note! Only manually operate when power is off.
1. Description fonctionelle
1.1 Conception des appareils et instructions de réglage
L’entraînement est assuré par un moteur à courant continu et un réducteur à engrenage
droit. Une rotation de 900 est réalisée à l’aide d’une vis sans fin taraudé et d’une bielle
oscillante. Les positions de fin de course sont réalisées par l’intermédiaire de microrup-
teurs. Aux positions de fin de course, le moteur est immédiatement arrêté par court-circuit
du rotor. Les contacts de fin de course permettant de limitee l’ouverture et la fermeture
sont montrés sur un support réglable.
Lors du réglage des fins de course, il convient de tenir compte d’un jeu de 0,5 à 1 mm
environ de la bielle oscillante, pour positionner les fins de course correspondantes.
La tension d’alimentation peut être réalisée 12/24 VDC ou 12/24 VAC. D’autres tensions
telles que 100-250 VAC sont à votre disposition.
Une alimentation de secours est possible avec la version 24 VDC à l’aide du GEMÜ 1570.
Une commande manuelle de secours est possible, au moyen d’une clé mâle coudée pour
vis à six pans creux (ouverture 3, sur le côté de l’entraînement).
Attention! N’actionner la commande manuelle de secours qu’à I’état hors tension.
3 423, 723, 9428

2. Anschlusspläne
Anschlussplan für Ausführung Anschlussplan für Ausführung
12 V/24 V DC (Standard) 12 V/24 V AC
Klemmen dürfen nicht gebrückt werden!
Bei gewünschter Parallelschaltung

mehrerer Antriebe muss die Variante
mit der K-Nr. 6410 eingesetzt werden.
Anschlussplan für Ausführung 12 V/24 V DC (K-Nr. 6597)
Anschlussplan für Ausführung 12 V/24 V AC (K-Nr. 6597)
423, 723, 9428 4

Anschlussplan für Ausführung 12 V/24 V AC (K-Nr. 6722)
Anschlussplan für Ausführung 12 V/24 V DC (K-Nr. 6722)
Anschlussplan für Ausführung Anschlussplan für Ausführung

100-250 V AC (K-Nr. 6597) 100-250 VAC (Standard)
Anschlussvariante mit 2 Anschlusssteckern, Anschlussvariante mit 1 Anschlussstecker 100-250 VAC
zusätzliche potentialfreie Endschalter
Richtungs-
umschal-
tung mit
Vorzugs- Richtungsum-
richtung schaltung mit
„Zu“ Vorzugsrichtung
„Zu“. Klemmen
2, 4 und 6 kön-
nen im kunden-
seitigen An-
schlussstecker
Klemmen 2, 4 und verbunden werden.
6 können im kun-
denseitigen An-
schlussstecker ver-
bunden werden.
Anschlussplan für Ausführung 100-250 V AC (K-Nr. 6722)

Anschlussvariante mit 2 Anschlusssteckern, zusätzliche potentialfreie Endschalter
5 423, 723, 9428

2. Connection diagrams
Connection diagram for Connection diagram for
12 V/24 V DC (standard) 12 V/24 V AC
Closed
Open
If parallel connection of several ac-

tuators is required, the variant with
K-no. 6410 must be used.
Connection diagram for 12 V/24 V DC (K-no. 6597)
Connection diagram for 12 V/24 V AC (K-no. 6597)
423, 723, 9428 6

Connection diagram for 12 V/24 V AC (K-no. 6722)
Connection diagram for 12 V / 24 V DC (K-no. 6722)
Connection diagram for Connection diagram for

100-250 V AC (K-no. 6597) 100-250 VAC (standard)
using 2 connectors using 1 connector 100-250 VAC
additional potential-free limit switches
Direction
Open Closed
change-over
with preferred
Open Closed
direction
Open
Closed
“Closed“ Direction change-

over with preferred
direction “Closed“.
Terminals 2, 4
and 6 can be
connected in the
customer’s
Terminals 2, 4 and connection plug.
6 can be connected
in the customer’s
connection plug.
Connection diagram for 100-250 V AC (K-no. 6722)

using 2 connectors, additional potential-free limit switches
7 423, 723, 9428

2. Plan de raccordement
Plan de raccordement pour exécution Plan de raccordement pour exécution
12 V/24 V DC (STANDARD) 12 V/24 V AC
fermé
ouvert
Attention: Respecter le plan de raccorde-

ment. Ne ponter pas les fils.
Pour une mise en parallèle de plusieurs

actionneurs, utilisez l’exécution K 6410.
Plan de raccordement pour exécution 12 V/24 V DC (K 6597)
Plan de raccordement pour exécution 12 V/24 V AC (K 6597)
423, 723, 9428 8

Plan de raccordement pour exécution 12 V/24 V AC (K 6722)
Plan de raccordement pour exécution 12 V/24 V DC (K 6722)
Plan de raccordement pour exécution Plan de raccordement pour exécution

100-250 V AC (K 6597) 100-250 VAC (STANDARD)
raccordement avec 2 connecteurs 100-250 VAC raccordement avec connecteur 100-250 VAC
avec fin de course libre de potentiel
Inversion
sens de
ouvert fermé
marche
ouvert fermé
(priorité
fermé
ouvert
contact Inversion sens de

fermé) marche (priorité
contact fermé).
Les bornes 2, 4
et 6 peuvent être
raccordées
Alimentation/Commande
entre-elles dans
Les bornes 2, 4 et le connecteur de
6 peuvent être l’utilisateur.
raccordées entre-
elles dans le connec-
teur de l’utilisateur.
Plan de raccordement pour exécution 100-250 V AC (K 6722)

raccordement avec 2 connecteurs 100-250 VAC, avec fins de course libre de potentiel
9 423, 723, 9428

3. Drehmomentverlauf/Torque/Couple
423, 723, 9428 10

Hinweis:
Antriebsseitig ist das Öffnen nur zulässig um die Verdrahtung gemäß unseres beiliegen-
den Anschlussplanes durchzuführen. Für Reklamationen, welche durch weitere kunden-
seitige Eingriffe hervorgerufen werden, übernehmen wir keinerlei Haftung.
Please note:
The actuator cover may only be removed for wiring of the actuator as per enclosed
instructions.
No claims resulting from unauthorized handling are acceptable.
No user replaceable parts are contained in the unit and unauthorized handling will ren-
der our manufacturer’s warranty null and void.
Recommandation:
Le capot de l’actionneur ne doit être démonté que pour réaliser le branchement électri-
que de l’actionneur conformément au schéma de câblage ci-joint.
Notre garantie ne s’applique pas en cas d’autres manipulations par le client.
11 423, 723, 9428

Änderungen vorbehalten · Subject to alteration · Sujet à modofication · 12/2009 · 88048562
VENTIL-, MESS- UND REGELSYSTEME

VALVES, MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
VANNES, MESSURE ET RÉGULATION
GEMÜ Gebr. Müller Apparatebau GmbH & Co. KG · Fritz-Müller-Str. 6-8 · D-74653 Ingelfingen-Criesbach
Telefon +49 (0) 7940/123-0 · Telefax +49 (0) 7940/123-192 · e-mail: info@gemue.de · http://www.gemue.de
- Installation & Operating instructions

Diaphragm Valve,
Metal
Construction
The GEMÜ 601, 612 and 673 manually operated diaphragm valves have a
temperature resistant plastic handwheel, GEMÜ 602 has a stainless steel GEMÜ 601
handwheel. Bonnet and internals are made all of stainless steel.
An integral optical position indicator and a seal adjuster to increase service
life of the diaphragm are included as standard.
Features
Ʒ Suitable for inert and corrosive* liquid and gaseous media
Ʒ Chemical resistance of bonnet
Ʒ CIP/SIP cleaning and sterilizing capabilities
Ʒ Autoclave capability
GEMÜ 602
Ʒ Insensitive to particulate media
Ʒ Valve body and diaphragm available in various materials and designs
Ʒ Compact design (ideal when space is at a premium)
Ʒ Stepless minimum flow regulation due to seal adjuster
Advantages
Ʒ Hermetic separation between medium and actuator
Ʒ Optional flow direction
Ʒ Installation for an optimized draining is possible
Ʒ Long service life of the diaphragm due to patented seal adjuster
(US-Pat. 5 377 956)
Ʒ Valve body also available in multi-port designs (M-block and T-body) or
as tank bottom valve body
*see information on working medium on page 2
GEMÜ 612
Sectional drawing
GEMÜ 601
GEMÜ 673
GEMÜ 612
601, 602, 612, 673

Technical data
Working medium
Corrosive, inert, gaseous and liquid media which have no negative impact on the physical and chemical properties of the body
and diaphragm material.
Temperatures
Media temperature
FPM (Code 4/4A) -10 ... 90 °C
EPDM (Code 13/3A) -10 ... 100 °C
EPDM (Code 17) -10 ... 100 °C
PTFE (Code 52/5A) -10 ... 100 °C
PTFE (Code 5E) -10 ... 100 °C
Sterilisation temperature
FPM (Code 4/4A) not applicable
EPDM (Code 13/3A) 150 °C, max. 60 min
EPDM (Code 17) 150 °C, max. 180 min
PTFE (Code 52/5A) Constant temperature* 150 °C
PTFE (Code 5E) Constant temperature* 150 °C
The sterilisation temperature is valid for steam or superheated water
* The valves concerned must be serviced regulary if steam is applied continuously
Ambient temperature 0 ... 60 °C
Type Diaphragm size Nominal size Max. operating pressure [bar]

DN EPDM / FPM PTFE
GEMÜ 601/602 8 4, 6, 8, 10, 15 10 6
GEMÜ 612 10 10, 12, 15, 20 10 6
25 15, 20, 25 10 6
GEMÜ 673 40 32, 40 10 6
50 50 10 6
All pressures are gauge pressures. Operating pressure values were determined with static operating pressure applied on one side of a closed
valve. Sealing at the valve seat and atmospheric sealing is ensured for the given values.
Information on operating pressures applied on both sides and for high purity media on request.
Kv values [m³/h]
DIN DIN 11850 DIN 11850 DIN 11850 SMS 3008 ASME BPE EN ISO
Type MG DN Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 1127
Code 0 Code 16 Code 17 Code 18 Code 37 Code 59 Code 60
4 0.5 - - - - - -
6 1.1 - - - - - 1.2
GEMÜ
8 8 1.3 - - - - 0.6 2.2
601/602
10 - 2.1 2.1 2.1 - 1.3 -
15 - - - - - 2.0 -
10 - 2.4 2.4 2.4 - 2.2 3.3
GEMÜ
10 15 3.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 - 2.2 4.0
612
20 - - - - - 3.8 -
15 4.1 4.7 4.7 4.7 - - 7.4
25 20 6.3 7.0 7.0 7.0 - 4.4 13.2
GEMÜ 25 13.9 15.0 15.0 15.0 12.6 12.2 16.2
673 32 25.3 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.2 - 30.0
40
40 29.3 30.9 30.9 30.9 30.2 29.5 32.8
50 50 46.5 48.4 48.4 48.4 51.7 50.6 55.2
ÌÌ·ÂË»Éº»Ê»ÈÃ¿Ä»º·¹¹ƔÊÅʼʺʻÉÊ·Äº·ÈºƑ¿ÄÂ»ÊÆÈ»ÉÉËÈ»ʽ¸·ÈƑ͍Æʸ¸·ÈƑÉÊ·¿ÄÂ»ÉÉÉÊ»»ÂÌ·ÂÌ»¸ÅºÏ·ÄºÉÅ¼Ê»Â·ÉÊÅÃ»Èº¿·Æ¾È·½ÃƔ
MG = diaphragm size
601, 602, 612, 673

2
Order data
Valve type Code Valve body material Code

GEMÜ 601 diaphragm size 8 601 EN-GJS-400-18-LT (SG iron 40.3) PFA lined 17
GEMÜ 602 diaphragm size 8 stainless st. handwheel 602 EN-GJS-400-18-LT (SG iron 40.3) PP lined 18
GEMÜ 612 diaphragm size 10 612 1.4435 - BN2 (CF3M), investment casting Fe<0.5% 32
GEMÜ 673 diaphragm size 25 - 50 673 1.4435 (ASTM A 351 CF3M, ԑ 316L), investment casting 34
1.4408, investment casting 37
1.4435 (316L), forged body 40
Body conŰguration Code
1.4435 (BN2), forged body Fe<0.5% 42
Tank valve body B**
2/2-way body D
Multi-port design M**
Diaphragm material Code
T body T*
FPM 4 4A*
* For dimensions see T Valves brochure
EPDM 13 3A*
** Dimensions and versions on request
EPDM 17 17*
PTFE/EPDM convex, PTFE loose 5E -
Connection Code PTFE/EPDM, PTFE lamin. 52** 5A*
Butt weld spigots * for diaphragm size 8 ** for diaphragm size 10
Spigots DIN 0 Material complies with FDA requirements, except codes 4 and 4A
Spigots DIN 11850, series 1 16
Spigots DIN 11866, series A 1A
Spigots DIN 11866, series B 1B Control function Code
Spigots JIS-G 3447 35 Manually operated 0
Spigots JIS-G 3459 36
Spigots SMS 3008 37
Spigots BS 4825, Part 1 55
Spigots ASME BPE 59
Spigots EN ISO 1127 60
Bonnet version Code
Spigots ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 10s 63 With seal adjuster, black handwheel
Spigots ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 40s 65 GEMÜ 601 diaphragm size 8 0TS
Threaded connections With seal adjuster, metal handwheel
Threaded sockets DIN ISO 228 1 GEMÜ 602 diaphragm size 8 0TM
Threaded spigots DIN 11851 6 With seal adjuster, black handwheel
One side threaded spigot, other side GEMÜ 612 diaphragm size 10 1TS
cone spigot and union nut, DIN 11851 62 With seal adjuster, black handwheel
Aseptic unions on request GEMÜ 673 diaphragm size 25 2TS
Flanges (GEMÜ 673) With seal adjuster, black handwheel
Flanges EN 1092 / PN16 / form B, GEMÜ 673 diaphragm size 40 3TS
length EN 558, series 1, With seal adjuster, black handwheel
ISO 5752, basic series 1 8 GEMÜ 673 diaphragm size 50 4TS
Flanges ANSI CLASS 150 RF,
length MSS SP-88 38
Flanges ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF,
length EN 558, series 1,
ISO 5752, basic series 1 39
Clamp connections
Clamps ASME BPE for pipe ASME BPE,
length ASME BPE 80
Clamps DIN 32676 series B for pipe EN ISO 1127,
length EN 558, series 7 82
Clamps DIN 32676 series A for pipe DIN 11850,
length EN 558, series 7 8A
Clamps SMS 3017 for pipe SMS 3008,
length EN 558, series 7 8E
For overview of available valve bodies see page 12 For further order data see page 4
601, 602, 612, 673

3
Order data
Valve body surface finish, internal contour

Forged body Investment casting
Code
Code 40, 42 Code 32, 34
·̞ʽƔʺ·Ã blasted internal/external - X 1500
·̞ʽƔʺ·Ã optical electropolishing - X 1509
·̞ʷƔʿ·Ã mechanically polished internal, blasted external X X 1502
·̞ʷƔʿ·Ã electropolished internal/external X - 1503
·̞ʷƔʽ·Ã mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* X* 1507
·̞ʷƔʽ·Ã electropolished internal/external X* - 1508
·̞ʷƔʻ·Ã mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* - 1536
·̞ʷƔʻ·Ã electropolished internal/external X* - 1537
·̞ʷƔʹʼ·Ã mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* - 1527
·̞ʷƔʹʼ·Ã electropolished internal/external X* - 1516
ǆÅÊÆÅÉÉ¿¸Â»¼ÅÈ¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄÉʿ¹Åº»ʼʼ·ÄºʼˀƑʻ¹Åº»ʷ·Äº·ÂÂÅÊ¾»È¹ÅÄÄ»¹Ê¿ÅÄÉ͌̐ʽÃÃƔ
Ra acc. to DIN 4768; at defined reference points
Surface finish data refer to medium wetted surfaces
Special function Code

3-A compliant design M
Order example 601 8 D 60 34 17 0 0TS 1500 M

Type 601
Nominal size 8
Body configuration (code) D
Connection (code) 60
Valve body material (code) 34
Diaphragm material (code) 17
Control function (code) 0
Bonnet version (code) 0TS
Surface finish (code) 1500
Special function (code) M
601, 602, 612, 673

4
Dimensions [mm]
Bonnet dimensions
Type Diaphragm size A ͌B Weight [kg]
GEMÜ 601 8 58 32 0.10
GEMÜ 602 8 54 32 0.15
GEMÜ 612 10 80 60 0.40
25 102 90 0.70
GEMÜ 673 40 119 114 1.30
50 136 140 2.05
GEMÜ 601 / 602
øB
øB
A
CT*
A
CT*
GEMÜ 601 GEMÜ 602
GEMÜ 612 / 673
B
CT*
* CT = A + H1 (see body dimensions)
601, 602, 612, 673

5
Body dimensions [mm]
Butt weld spigots, connection code 0, 16, 17, 18

Valve body material: investment casting (code 34), forged body (code 40)
DIN DIN 11850 DIN 11850 DIN 11850
Series 0 Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Weight
Code 0 Code 16 Code 17 Code 18 [kg]
Type MG DN NPS f* øg* L c H1* H1** ød s ød s ød s ød s
4 - - - 72 20 8.5 6 1.0 - - - - - - 0.09
GEMÜ 601, 602
6 - - - 72 20 8.5 8 1.0 - - - - - - 0.09

8 8 1/4” - - 72 20 8.5 10 1.0 - - - - - - 0.09
10 3/8” - - 72 20 8.5 - - 12 1.0 13 1.5 14 2.0 0.09
15 1/2” - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - - - 0.09
10 3/8” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - 12 1.0 13 1.5 14 2.0 0.30
GEMÜ 612
10 15 1/2” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 18 1.5 18 1.0 19 1.5 20 2.0 0.30

20 3/4” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - - - - - - - 0.30
15 1/2” 40 13.5 120 25 13.0 19.0 18 1.5 18 1.0 19 1.5 20 2.0 0.62
25 20 3/4” 40 13.5 120 25 16.0 19.0 22 1.5 22 1.0 23 1.5 24 2.0 0.58
GEMÜ 673
25 1” 40 13.5 120 25 19.0 19.0 28 1.5 28 1.0 29 1.5 30 2.0 0.55

32 11/4” 68 13.5 153 25 24.0 26.0 34 1.5 34 1.0 35 1.5 36 2.0 1.45
40
40 11/2” 75 13.5 153 25 26.0 26.0 40 1.5 40 1.0 41 1.5 42 2.0 1.32
50 50 2” 90 13.5 173 30 32.0 32.0 52 1.5 52 1.0 53 1.5 54 2.0 2.25
* only for investment cast design ** only for forged design MG = diaphragm size
For materials see overview on last page
Butt weld spigots, connection code 1A, 1B, 60

DIN 11866 DIN 11866 EN ISO
Series A Series B 1127 Weight
Code 1A Code 1B Code 60 [kg]
Type MG DN NPS f* øg* L c H1* H1** ød s ød s ød s
4 - - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - 0.09
GEMÜ 601, 602
6 - - - 72 20 8.5 8 1.0 10.2 1.6 10.2 1.6 0.09

8 8 1/4” - - 72 20 8.5 10 1.0 13.5 1.6 13.5 1.6 0.09
10 3/8” - - 72 20 8.5 13 1.5 - - - - 0.09
15 1/2” - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - 0.09
10 3/8” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 13 1.5 17.2 1.6 17.2 1.6 0.30
GEMÜ 612
10 15 1/2” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 19 1.5 21.3 1.6 21.3 1.6 0.30
20 3/4” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - - - - - 0.30
15 1/2” 40 13.5 120 25 13.0 19.0 19 1.5 21.3 1.6 21.3 1.6 0.62
25 20 3/4” 40 13.5 120 25 16.0 19.0 23 1.5 26.9 1.6 26.9 1.6 0.58
GEMÜ 673
25 1” 40 13.5 120 25 19.0 19.0 29 1.5 33.7 2.0 33.7 2.0 0.55
32 11/4” 68 13.5 153 25 24.0 26.0 35 1.5 42.4 2.0 42.4 2.0 1.45
40
40 11/2” 75 13.5 153 25 26.0 26.0 41 1.5 48.3 2.0 48.3 2.0 1.32
50 50 2” 90 13.5 173 30 32.0 32.0 53 1.5 60.3 2.0 60.3 2.0 2.25
601, 602, 612, 673

6
Butt weld spigots, connection code 35, 36, 37

JIS-G JIS-G SMS
3447 3459 3008 Weight
Code 35 Code 36 Code 37 [kg]
Type MG DN NPS f* øg* L c H1* H1** ød s ød s ød s
4 - - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - 0.09
GEMÜ 601, 602
6 - - - 72 20 8.5 - - 10.5 1.20 - - 0.09

8 8 1/4” - - 72 20 8.5 - - 13.8 1.65 - - 0.09
10 3/8” - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - 0.09
15 1/2” - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - 0.09
10 3/8” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - 17.3 1.65 - - 0.30
GEMÜ 612
10 15 1/2” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - 21.7 2.10 - - 0.30

20 3/4” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 - - - - - - 0.30
15 1/2” 40 13.5 120 25 13.0 19.0 - - 21.7 2.10 - - 0.62
25 20 3/4” 40 13.5 120 25 16.0 19.0 - - 27.2 2.10 - - 0.58
GEMÜ 673
25 1” 40 13.5 120 25 19.0 19.0 25.4 1.2 34.0 2.80 25.0 1.2 0.55
32 11/4” 68 13.5 153 25 24.0 26.0 31.8 1.2 42.7 2.80 33.7 1.2 1.45
40
40 11/2” 75 13.5 153 25 26.0 26.0 38.1 1.2 48.6 2.80 38.0 1.2 1.32
50 50 2” 90 13.5 173 30 32.0 32.0 50.8 1.5 60.5 2.80 51.0 1.2 2.25
Butt weld spigots, connection code 55, 59, 63, 65

ANSI/ASME ANSI/ASME
BS 4825 ASME BPE
B36.19M 10s B36.19M 40s Weight
Code 55 Code 59
Code 63 Code 65 [kg]
Type MG DN NPS f* øg* L c H1* H1** ød s ød s ød s ød s
4 - - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - - - - - 0.09
GEMÜ 601, 602
6 - - - 72 20 8.5 - - - - 10.3 1.24 10.3 1.73 0.09

8 8 1/4” - - 72 20 8.5 6.35 1.2 6.35 0.89 13.7 1.65 13.7 2.24 0.09
10 3/8” - - 72 20 8.5 9.53 1.2 9.53 0.89 - - - - 0.09
15 1/2” - - 72 20 8.5 12.70 1.2 12.70 1.65 - - - - 0.09
10 3/8” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 9.53 1.2 9.53 0.89 17.1 1.65 17.1 2.31 0.30
GEMÜ 612
10 15 1/2” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 12.70 1.2 12.70 1.65 21.3 2.11 21.3 2.77 0.30
20 3/4” 30 13.5 108 25 12.5 19.05 1.2 19.05 1.65 - - - - 0.30
15 1/2” 40 13.5 120 25 13.0 19.0 - - - - 21.3 2.11 21.3 2.77 0.62
25 20 3/4” 40 13.5 120 25 16.0 19.0 19.05 1.2 19.05 1.65 26.7 2.11 26.7 2.87 0.58
GEMÜ 673
25 1” 40 13.5 120 25 19.0 19.0 - - 25.40 1.65 33.4 2.77 33.4 3.38 0.55
32 11/4” 68 13.5 153 25 24.0 26.0 - - - - 42.2 2.77 42.2 3.56 1.45
40
40 11/2” 75 13.5 153 25 26.0 26.0 - - 38.10 1.65 48.3 2.77 48.3 3.68 1.32
50 50 2” 90 13.5 173 30 32.0 32.0 - - 50.80 1.65 60.3 2.77 60.3 3.91 2.25
601, 602, 612, 673

7
Threaded sockets, connection code 1

valve body material: investment casting (code 37)
Number of Weight
Type MG DN R H H1 t L SW2 flats [kg]
GEMÜ
8 8 G 1/4 19 9 11 72 18 6 0,09
601/602
GEMÜ 12 G 3/8 25 13 12 55 22 2 0,17
10
612 15 G 1/2 30 15 15 68 27 2 0,26
15 G 1/2 29 16 15 85 27 6 0,32
25 20 G 3/4 32 16 16 85 32 6 0,34
GEMÜ 25 G1 37 16 13 110 41 6 0,39
673 32 G 11/4 49 24 20 120 50 8 0,88
40
40 G 11/2 52 24 18 140 55 8 0,93
50 50 G2 68 33 26 165 70 8 1,56
MG = Diaphragm size For materials see overview on last page
H1
R
H
SW2
t
L
601, 602, 612, 673

8
Threaded connections, connection code 6, 62

Thread to DIN 405 Code 6 Code 62 Weight
Type MG DN H1* H1** f* øg* ød1
R L L [kg]
GEMÜ
8 10 8.5 - - - 10.0 RD 28 x 1/8 92 90 0.21
601/602
GEMÜ 10 12.5 - 30.0 13.5 10.0 RD 28 x 1/8 118 116 0.33
10
612 15 12.5 - 30.0 13.5 16.0 RD 34 x 1/8 118 116 0.35
15 13.0 19 40.0 13.5 16.0 RD 34 x 1/8 118 116 0.71
25 20 16.0 19 40.0 13.5 20.0 RD 44 x 1/6 118 114 0.78
GEMÜ 25 19.0 19 40.0 13.5 26.0 RD 52 x 1/6 128 127 0.79
673 32 24.0 26 68.0 13.5 32.0 RD 58 x 1/6 147 147 1.66
40
40 26.0 26 75.0 13.5 38.0 RD 65 x 1/6 160 160 1.62
50 50 32.0 32 90.0 13.5 50.0 RD 78 x 1/6 191 191 2.70
* only for investment cast design ** only for forged design MG = diaphragm size For materials see overview on last page
Code 6
H1
d1
R
g*
f*
Code 62
H1
ød1
R
øg*
f*
601, 602, 612, 673

9
Flanges - DIN EN 1092, connection code 8

Valve body material: GGG 40.3 (code 17, 18), 1.4435 (code 34, 40)
H1
Number Weight
Type MG DN øD øk øL Material Material Material FTF
of bolts [kg]
code 17, 18 code 34 code 40
15 95 65 14 4 18.0 13.0 19.0 130* 1.85

25 20 105 75 14 4 20.5 16.0 19.0 150 2.35
GEMÜ 673
25 115 85 14 4 23.0 19.0 19.0 160 2.85

32 140 100 18 4 28.7 24.0 26.0 180 4.90
40
40 150 110 18 4 33.0 26.0 26.0 200 5.65
50 50 165 125 18 4 39.0 32.0 32.0 230 7.45
*Material code 34, 40 FTF = 150 (no DIN length)
MG = diaphragm size For materials see overview on last page
Flanges - ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF, connection code 38. 39

Valve body material: GGG 40.3 (code 17, 18), 1.4435 (code 34, 40)
H1 FTF
Number Weight
Type MG DN øD øk øL Material Material Material Connection Connection
of bolts [kg]
code 17, 18 code 34 code 40 code 38 code 39
15 90 60.3 15.9 4 18.0 13.0 19.0 - 130 1.85

25 20 100 69.9 15.9 4 20.5 16.0 19.0 146 150 2.35
GEMÜ 673
25 110 79.4 15.9 4 23.0 19.0 19.0 146 160 2.85

32 115 88.9 15.9 4 28.7 24.0 26.0 - 180 4.90
40
40 125 98.4 15.9 4 33.0 26.0 26.0 175 200 5.65
50 50 150 120.7 19.0 4 39.0 32.0 32.0 200 230 7.45
MG = diaphragm size For materials see overview on last page
L
H1
D
k
FTF
601, 602, 612, 673

10
Clamp connections, connection code 80, 82, 88, 8A, 8E

Valve body material: forged body (code 40)
for pipe for pipe for pipe for pipe for pipe
ASME BPE EN ISO 1127 ASME BPE DIN 11850 SMS 3008 Weight
Code 80 Code 82 Code 88 Code 8A Code 8E [kg]
Type MG DN NPS H1 ød1 ød3 L ød1 ød3 L ød1 ød3 L ød1 ød3 L ød1 ød3 L
6 1/8 ” 8.5 - - - 7.0 25.0 63.5 - - - 6 25.0 63.5 - - - -
601/602
8 1/4” 8.5 4.57 25.0 63.5 10.3 25.0 63.5 - - - 8 25.0 63.5 - - - 0.15
GEMÜ
8
10 3/8” 8.5 7.75 25.0 63.5 - - - - - - 10 34.0 88.9 - - - 0.18
15 1/2” 8.5 9.40 25.0 63.5 - - - 9.40 25.0 108 - - - - - - 0.18
10 3/8” 12.5 - - - 14.0 25.0 108.0 - - - 10 34.0 108.0 - - - 0.30
GEMÜ
612
10 15 1/2” 12.5 9.40 25.0 88.9 18.1 50.5 108.0 9.40 25.0 108 16 34.0 108.0 - - - 0.43
20 3/4” 12.5 15.75 25.0 101.6 - - - 15.75 25.0 117 - - - - - - 0.43
15 1/2” 19.0 - - - 18.1 50.5 108.0 - - - 16 34.0 108.0 - - - 0.75
25 20 3/4” 19.0 15.75 25.0 101.6 23.7 50.5 117.0 15.75 25.0 117 20 34.0 117.0 - - - 0.71
25 1” 19.0 22.10 50.5 114.3 29.7 50.5 127.0 22.10 50.5 127 26 50.5 127.0 22.6 50.5 127 0.63
GEMÜ
673
32 1 1/4” 26.0 - - - 38.4 64.0 146.0 - - - 32 50.5 146.0 31.3 50.5 146 1.62
40
40 1 1/2” 26.0 34.80 50.5 139.7 44.3 64.0 159.0 34.80 50.5 159 38 50.5 159.0 35.6 50.5 159 1.50
50 50 2” 32.0 47.50 64.0 158.8 56.3 77.5 190.0 47.50 64.0 190 50 64.0 190.0 48.6 64.0 190 2.50
MG = Diaphragm size
601, 602, 612, 673

11
Overview of valve bodies for GEMÜ 601, 602, 612, 673
Spigots
Connection code 0 16 17 18 1A 1B 35 36 37 55 59 60 63 65
All rights including copyright and industrial

Type
34 40 34 40 34 40 34 40 40 40 34 40 40 34 40 34 40 34 40 34 40 40 40
property rights are expressly reserved.

Material code
MG DN
4 X X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GEMÜ 601/602
6 X X - - - - - - X X - - X - - - - - - - X X X
8 8 X X - - - - - - X X - - X - - X X X X X X X X
10 - - X X X X X X X - - - - - - X X X X - - - -
15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - X X X X - - - -
10 - - X X X X X X X X - - X - - - X - X X X X X
GEMÜ
10 15 X X X X X X X X X X - - X - - X X - X X X X X
612
20 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - X X X X - - - -
15 X X X X X X - X X X - - X - - - - - - X X X X
25 20 X X X X X X - X X X - - X - - X X X X X X X X
GEMÜ 673
25 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X - - X X X X X X
32 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X - - - - X X X X
40
40 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X - - X X X X X X
50 50 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X - - X X X X X X
X = Standard W = Welded construction MG = diaphragm size
Should there be any doubts or misunderstandings, the German

version of this data sheet is the authoritative document!
Threaded connections Clamps Flanges
Connection code 1 6 62 80 82 88 8A 8E 8 38 39
Type
Material code 37 34 40 34 40 40 40 40 40 40 17 18 34 40 17 18 17 18 34 40
MG DN
6 - - - - - - K - K - - - - - - - - - - -
601/602
8 X - - - - K K - K - - - - - - - - - - -
GEMÜ
8
10 - W W W W K - - W - - - - - - - - - - -
15 - - - - - K - W - - - - - - - - - - - -
10 - W W W W - K - K - - - - - - - - - - -
GEMÜ 612
12 X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
10
15 X W W W W K W K K - - - - - - - - - - -
20 - - - - - K - K - - - - - - - - - - - -
15 X W W W W - W - K - X X W W - - X X W W
25 20 X W W W W K K K K - X X W W X X X X W W
GEMÜ 673
25 X W W W W K K K K K X X W W X X X X W W
32 X W W W W - W - K K X X W W - - X X W W
40
40 X W W W W K W K K K X X W W X X X X W W
50 50 X W W W W K W K K K X X W W X X X X W W
X = Standard
K = Connections completely machined (not welded)
Subject to alteration · 08/2015 · 88318767
W = Welded construction MG = diaphragm size

Connection code 38 / material code 18 on request
Availability of material code 32: same as code 34, availability of material code 42: same as code 40
For further metal diaphragm valves, accessories and other products,

please see our Product Range catalogue and Price List. Contact GEMÜ.
VALVES, MEASUREMENT
AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
GEMÜ Gebr.Müller · Apparatebau GmbH & Co.KG · Fritz-Müller-Str. 6-8 · D-74653 Ingelfingen-Criesbach · Telefon +49(0)7940/123-0 · Telefax +49(0)7940/123-192
info@gemue.de · www.gemu-group.com
673
Membranventil
Metall, DN 15 - 50
Diaphragm Valve
Metal, DN 15 - 50
DE ORIGINAL EINBAU- UND MONTAGEANLEITUNG

GB INSTALLATION, OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
673
Inhaltsverzeichnis 1 Allgemeine Hinweise
1 Allgemeine Hinweise 2 Voraussetzungen für die einwandfreie
2 Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise 2 Funktion des GEMÜ-Ventils:
2.1 Hinweise für Service- Sachgerechter Transport und Lagerung
und Bedienpersonal 3 Installation und Inbetriebnahme durch
2.2 Warnhinweise 3 eingewiesenes Fachpersonal
2.3 Verwendete Symbole 4 Bedienung gemäß dieser Einbau- und
3 BegriŮsbestimmungen 4 Montageanleitung
4 Vorgesehener Einsatzbereich 4 Ordnungsgemäße Instandhaltung
5 Technische Daten 5 Korrekte Montage, Bedienung und Wartung
6 Bestelldaten 6 oder Reparatur gewährleisten einen
7 Herstellerangaben 8 störungsfreien Betrieb des Membranventils.
7.1 Transport 8
7.2 Lieferung und Leistung 8 Beschreibungen und
7.3 Lagerung 8 Instruktionen beziehen sich auf
7.4 Benötigtes Werkzeug 8 Standardausführungen. Für
8 Funktionsbeschreibung 8 Sonderausführungen, die in dieser
9 Geräteaufbau 8 Einbau- und Montageanleitung
10 Montage und Bedienung 9 nicht beschrieben sind, gelten die
10.1 Montage des Membranventils 9 grundsätzlichen Angaben in dieser
10.2 Bedienung 10 Einbau- und Montageanleitung in
10.3 Einstellung der Verbindung mit einer zusätzlichen
Schließbegrenzung 11 Sonderdokumentation.
11 Montage / Demontage
von Ersatzteilen 12 Alle Rechte wie Urheberrechte
11.1 Demontage Ventil oder gewerbliche Schutzrechte
(Antrieb vom Körper lösen) 12 werden ausdrücklich vorbehalten.
11.2 Demontage Membrane 12
11.3 Montage Membrane 13
11.3.1 Allgemeines 13 2 Allgemeine
11.3.2 Montage der Konkav-Membrane 13 Sicherheitshinweise
11.3.3 Montage der Konvex-Membrane 14 Die Sicherheitshinweise berücksichtigen
11.4 Montage Antrieb auf Ventilkörper 14 nicht:
12 Inbetriebnahme 15 Zufälligkeiten und Ereignisse, die bei
13 Inspektion und Wartung 15 Montage, Betrieb und Wartung auftreten
14 Demontage 16 können.
15 Entsorgung 16 die ortsbezogenen
16 Rücksendung 16 Sicherheitsbestimmungen, für
17 Hinweise 16 deren Einhaltung – auch seitens des
18 Fehlersuche / hinzugezogenen Montagepersonals –
Störungsbehebung 17 der Betreiber verantwortlich ist.
19 Schnittbild und Ersatzteile 18
20 EG-Konformitätserklärung 19
673 2 / 40
2.1 Hinweise für Service- 2.2 Warnhinweise
und Bedienpersonal Warnhinweise sind, soweit möglich, nach
Die Einbau- und Montageanleitung enthält folgendem Schema gegliedert:
grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise, die bei
Inbetriebnahme, Betrieb und Wartung zu SIGNALWORT
beachten sind. Nichtbeachtung kann zur Art und Quelle der Gefahr
Folge haben: ® Mögliche Folgen bei Nichtbeachtung.
Gefährdung von Personen durch
G Maßnahmen zur Vermeidung der
elektrische, mechanische und chemische Gefahr.
Einwirkungen.
Gefährdung von Anlagen in der Warnhinweise sind dabei immer mit
Umgebung. einem Signalwort und teilweise auch
Versagen wichtiger Funktionen. mit einem gefahrenspezifischen Symbol
Gefährdung der Umwelt durch Austreten gekennzeichnet.
gefährlicher StoŮe bei Leckage. Folgende Signalwörter bzw.
Gefährdungsstufen werden eingesetzt:
Vor Inbetriebnahme:
G Einbau- und Montageanleitung lesen. GEFAHR
G Montage- und Betriebspersonal
ausreichend schulen. Unmittelbare Gefahr!
G Sicherstellen, dass der Inhalt der Einbau-
® Bei Nichtbeachtung sind Tod oder
und Montageanleitung vom zuständigen schwerste Verletzungen die Folge.
Personal vollständig verstanden wird.
G Verantwortungs- und
WARNUNG
Zuständigkeitsbereiche regeln. Möglicherweise gefährliche Situation!
® Bei Nichtbeachtung drohen schwerste
Bei Betrieb: Verletzungen oder Tod.
G Einbau- und Montageanleitung am
Einsatzort verfügbar halten. VORSICHT
G Sicherheitshinweise beachten.
G Nur entsprechend der Leistungsdaten
Möglicherweise gefährliche Situation!
betreiben. ® Bei Nichtbeachtung drohen mittlere bis
G Wartungsarbeiten bzw. Reparaturen,
leichte Verletzungen.
die nicht in der Einbau- und
Montageanleitung beschrieben sind
VORSICHT (OHNE SYMBOL)
dürfen nicht ohne vorherige Abstimmung Möglicherweise gefährliche Situation!
mit dem Hersteller durchgeführt werden. ® Bei Nichtbeachtung drohen
Sachschäden.
GEFAHR
Sicherheitsdatenblätter bzw. die für
die verwendeten Medien geltenden
Sicherheitsvorschriften unbedingt
beachten!
Bei Unklarheiten:
Bei nächstgelegener GEMÜ-
Verkaufsniederlassung nachfragen.
3 / 40 673
2.3 Verwendete Symbole 4 Vorgesehener Einsatzbereich
Gefahr durch heiße OberŲächen! Das GEMÜ-Membranventil 673 ist für
den Einsatz in Rohrleitungen konzipiert.
Es steuert ein durchŲießendes Medium
Gefahr durch ätzende StoŮe! durch Handbetätigung.
Das Ventil darf nur gemäß den
technischen Daten eingesetzt werden
Quetschgefahr! ƺsiehe Kapitel 5 "Technische Daten"ƻ.
Schrauben und KunststoŮteile am
Membranventil nicht lackieren!
Hand: Beschreibt allgemeine
Hinweise und Empfehlungen. WARNUNG
G Punkt: Beschreibt auszuführende Membranventil nur
Tätigkeiten. bestimmungsgemäß einsetzen!
® Sonst erlischt Herstellerhaftung und
® Pfeil: Beschreibt Reaktion(en) auf Gewährleistungsanspruch.
Tätigkeiten. G Das Membranventil ausschließlich
entsprechend den in der
Aufzählungszeichen Vertragsdokumentation und in der
Einbau- und Montageanleitung
festgelegten Betriebsbedingungen
verwenden.
3 Begriffsbestimmungen G Das Membranventil darf nur in
Betriebsmedium explosionsgefährdeten Zonen

Medium, das durch das Membranventil verwendet werden, die auf der
fließt. Konformitätserklärung (ATEX) bestätigt
wurden.
673 4 / 40
5 Technische Daten
Betriebsmedium
Aggressive, neutrale, gasförmige und flüssige Medien, die die physikalischen und chemischen Eigenschaften des jeweiligen
Gehäuse- und Membranwerkstoffes nicht negativ beeinflussen.
Temperaturen
Medientemperatur
FPM (Code 4) -10 bis 90 °C
EPDM (Code 13) -10 bis 100 °C
EPDM (Code 17) -10 bis 100 °C
PTFE (Code 5E) -10 bis 100 °C
Sterilisationstemperatur
FPM (Code 4) nicht einsetzbar
PTFE (Code 5E) Dauertemperatur* 150 °C
Die Sterilisationstemperatur gilt für Dampf oder überhitztes Wasser
* Bei einer dauerhaften Beaufschlagung mit Dampf sind die betroffenen Ventile regelmäßig zu warten
Umgebungstemperatur 0 bis 60 °C
Membrangröße Nennweite Max. Betriebsdruck [bar]

DN EPDM PTFE
25 15, 20, 25 10 6
40 32, 40 10 6
50 50 10 6
Sämtliche Druckwerte sind in bar - Überdruck, Betriebsdruckangaben wurden mit statisch einseitig anstehenden Betriebsdruck bei
geschlossenem Ventil ermittelt. Für die angegebenen Werte ist die Dichtheit am Ventilsitz und nach außen gewährleistet. Angaben zu
beidseitig anstehenden Betriebsdrücken und für Reinstmedien auf Anfrage.
Kv-Werte [m³/h]
Membran- DIN DIN 11850 DIN 11850 DIN 11850 SMS 3008 ASME BPE EN ISO
DN Reihe 1 Reihe 2 Reihe 3 1127
größe Code 0 Code 16 Code 17 Code 18 Code 37 Code 59 Code 60
15 4,1 4,7 4,7 4,7 - - 7,4
25 20 6,3 7,0 7,0 7,0 - 4,4 13,2
25 13,9 15,0 15,0 15,0 12,6 12,2 16,2
32 25,3 27,0 27,0 27,0 26,2 - 30,0
40
40 29,3 30,9 30,9 30,9 30,2 29,5 32,8
50 50 46,5 48,4 48,4 48,4 51,7 50,6 55,2
Kv-Werte ermittelt gemäß Norm IEC 534, Eingangsdruck 6 bar, ͍p 1 bar, Ventilkörperwerkstoff Edelstahl und Weichelastomermembrane.
5 / 40 673
6 Bestelldaten
Gehäuseform Code Ventilkörperwerkstoff Code
Behälterkörper B** EN-GJS-400-18-LT (GGG 40.3) PFA-Auskleidung 17
Durchgang D EN-GJS-400-18-LT (GGG 40.3) PP-Auskleidung 18
Mehrwegeausführung M** 1.4435 - BN2 (CF3M) - Feinguss Fe<0,5% 32
T-Körper T*
1.4435 (ASTM A 351 CF3M ԑ 316L), Feinguss 34
* Abmessungen siehe Broschüre T-Ventile
** Abmessungen und Ausführungen auf Anfrage
1.4408, Feinguss 37
1.4435 (316L), Schmiedekörper 40
1.4435 (BN2), Schmiedekörper Fe<0,5% 42
Anschlussart Code
Schweißstutzen
Stutzen DIN 0 Membranwerkstoff Code
Stutzen DIN 11850, Reihe 1 16 FPM 4
Stutzen DIN 11850, Reihe 2 17
Stutzen DIN 11850, Reihe 3 18 EPDM 13
Stutzen DIN 11866, Reihe A 1A EPDM 17
Stutzen DIN 11866, Reihe B 1B
Stutzen JIS-G 3447 35 PTFE/EPDM konvex, PTFE lose 5E
Stutzen JIS-G 3459 36 Material entspricht FDA Vorgaben, ausgenommen Code 4
Stutzen SMS 3008 37
Stutzen BS 4825, Part 1 55
Stutzen ASME BPE 59
Stutzen EN ISO 1127 60
Stutzen ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 10s 63
Stutzen ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 40s 65 Steuerfunktion Code
Gewindeanschluss Manuell betätigt 0
Gewindemuffe DIN ISO 228 1
Gewindestutzen DIN 11851 6
Eine Seite Gewindestutzen, andere Seite
Kegelstutzen und Überwurfmutter, DIN 11851 62
Sterilverschraubung auf Anfrage Antriebsausführung Code
Flansch Mit Schließbegrenzung Handrad schwarz
Flansch EN 1092 / PN16 / Form B, Membrangröße 25 2TS
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 1, Mit Schließbegrenzung Handrad schwarz
ISO 5752, basic series 1 8 Membrangröße 40 3TS
Flansch ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF, Mit Schließbegrenzung Handrad schwarz
Baulänge MSS SP-88 38 Membrangröße 50 4TS
Flansch ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF,
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 1,
Clamp-Stutzen
Clamp ASME BPE für Rohr ASME BPE,
Baulänge ASME BPE 80
Clamp DIN 32676 Reihe B für Rohr EN ISO 1127,
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 7 82
Clamp ASME BPE für Rohr ASME BPE,
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 7 88
Clamp DIN 32676 Reihe A für Rohr DIN 11850,
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 7 8A
Clamp SMS 3017 für Rohr SMS 3008,
Baulänge EN 558, Reihe 7 8E
Übersicht der verfügbaren Ventilkörper siehe Datenblatt S. 12
673 6 / 40
Ventilkörper-Oberflächengüten, Innenkontur
Schmiedekörper Feinguss
Code
Code 40, 42 Code 32, 34
Ra ̞ 6,3 ·m innen/außen gestrahlt - X 1500
Ra ̞ 6,3 ·m optische E-Polierung - X 1509
Ra ̞ 0,8 ·m innen mechanisch poliert, außen gestrahlt X X 1502
Ra ̞ 0,8 ·m innen/außen elektropoliert X - 1503
Ra ̞ 0,6 ·m innen mechanisch poliert, außen gestrahlt X* X* 1507
Ra ̞ 0,6 ·m innen/außen elektropoliert X* - 1508
Ra ̞ 0,4 ·m innen mechanisch poliert, außen gestrahlt X* - 1536
Ra ̞ 0,25 ·m innen mechanisch poliert, außen gestrahlt X* - 1527
* Nicht möglich für Anschlüsse DN 8 Code 55 und 59, DN 4 Code 0 sowie alle weiteren Anschlüsse ͌ < 6 mm.
Ra nach DIN 4768; gemessen an definierten Referenzpunkten
Oberflächenangaben beziehen sich auf medienberührte Oberflächen
Sonderfunktion Code
Ausführung 3-A-konform M
Bestellbeispiel 673 25 D 60 40 17 0 2TS 1503 M

Typ 673
Nennweite 25
Gehäuseform (Code) D
Anschlussart (Code) 60
Ventilkörperwerkstoff (Code) 40
Membranwerkstoff (Code) 17
Steuerfunktion (Code) 0
Antriebsausführung (Code) 2TS
Oberflächenqualität (Code) 1503
Sonderfunktion (Code) M
7 / 40 673
7 Herstellerangaben 8 Funktionsbeschreibung
GEMÜ 673 ist ein Metall-Membranventil
mit Durchgangs-, T- oder Behälterboden-
7.1 Transport Ablasskörper bzw. Ausführung in
G Membranventil nur auf geeignetem Mehrwegeausführung. Antriebsgehäuse
Lademittel transportieren, nicht stürzen, und -mechanik sind komplett aus Edelstahl.
vorsichtig handhaben. Das Ventil verfügt serienmäßig über eine
G Verpackungsmaterial entsprechend Schließbegrenzung und eine integrierte
den Entsorgungsvorschriften / optische Stellungsanzeige. Ventilkörper
Umweltschutzbestimmungen entsorgen. und Membrane sind gemäß Datenblatt in
verschiedenen Ausführungen erhältlich.
Das Ventil ist CIP- / SIP-reinigungsfähig und
7.2 Lieferung und Leistung sterilisierbar.
G Ware unverzüglich bei Erhalt auf
Vollständigkeit und Unversehrtheit
überprüfen.
9 Geräteaufbau
G Lieferumfang aus Versandpapieren,
Ausführung aus Bestellnummer
ersichtlich.
G Das Membranventil wird im Werk auf Handrad
Funktion geprüft. A
Optische
Stellungs-
7.3 Lagerung anzeige
G Membranventil staubgeschützt und

trocken in Originalverpackung lagern.
G Membranventil in Position "oŮen" lagern.
G UV-Strahlung und direkte
Sonneneinstrahlung vermeiden.
G Maximale Lagertemperatur: 40 °C.
G Lösungsmittel, Chemikalien, Säuren,
Geräteaufbau
KraftstoŮe u.ä. dürfen nicht mit Ventilen
und deren Ersatzteilen in einem Raum
gelagert werden. 1 Ventilkörper
2 Membrane
A Antrieb
7.4 Benötigtes Werkzeug
G Benötigtes Werkzeug für Einbau und
Montage ist nicht im Lieferumfang
enthalten.
G Passendes, funktionsfähiges und
sicheres Werkzeug benutzen.
673 8 / 40
10 Montage und Bedienung Installationsort:
Vor Einbau: VORSICHT

G Ventilkörper- und MembranwerkstoŮ
entsprechend Betriebsmedium auslegen. G Ventil äußerlich nicht stark beanspruchen.
G Eignung vor Einbau prüfen! G Installationsort so wählen, dass Ventil
Siehe Kapitel 5 "Technische Daten". nicht als Steighilfe genutzt werden kann.
G Rohrleitung so legen, dass Schub- und
Biegungskräfte, sowie Vibrationen
10.1 Montage des und Spannungen vom Ventilkörper
Membranventils ferngehalten werden.
G Ventil nur zwischen zueinander
WARNUNG passenden, Ųuchtenden Rohrleitungen
montieren.
Unter Druck stehende Armaturen!
® Gefahr von schwersten Verletzungen Richtung des Betriebsmediums:
oder Tod! Beliebig.
G Nur an druckloser Anlage arbeiten. Einbaulage des Membranventils:
Beliebig.
WARNUNG
Montage:
Aggressive Chemikalien!
1. Eignung des Ventils für jeweiligen
® Verätzungen!
Einsatzfall sicherstellen. Das Ventil
G Montage nur mit geeigneter
muss für die Betriebsbedingungen
Schutzausrüstung.
des Rohrleitungssystems (Medium,
Mediumskonzentration, Temperatur
VORSICHT und Druck) sowie die jeweiligen
Heiße Anlagenteile! Umgebungsbedingungen geeignet sein.
® Verbrennungen! Technische Daten des Ventils und der
G Nur an abgekühlter Anlage WerkstoŮe prüfen.
arbeiten. 2. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil stilllegen.
3. Gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern.
VORSICHT 4. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil drucklos
Ventil nicht als Trittstufe oder schalten.
Aufstiegshilfe benutzen! 5. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil vollständig
® Gefahr des Abrutschens / der entleeren und abkühlen lassen bis
Beschädigung des Ventils. Verdampfungstemperatur des Mediums
unterschritten ist und Verbrühungen
VORSICHT ausgeschlossen sind.
6. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil fachgerecht
Maximal zulässigen Druck nicht
dekontaminieren, spülen und belüften.
überschreiten!
® Eventuell auftretende Druckstöße Montage bei Schweißstutzen:
(Wasserschläge) durch 1. Schweißtechnische Normen einhalten!
Schutzmaßnahmen vermeiden. 2. Antrieb mit Membrane vor Einschweißen
G Montagearbeiten nur durch geschultes des Ventilkörpers demontieren (siehe
Fachpersonal. Kapitel 11.1).
G Geeignete Schutzausrüstung gemäß 3. Schweißstutzen abkühlen lassen.
den Regelungen des Anlagenbetreibers 4. Ventilkörper und Antrieb mit Membrane
berücksichtigen. wieder zusammen bauen (siehe Kapitel
11.4).
9 / 40 673
Montage bei Clampanschluss: Entsprechende Vorschriften für
G Bei Montage der Clampanschlüsse Anschlüsse beachten!
entsprechende Dichtung zwischen
Ventilkörper und Rohranschluss einlegen Nach der Montage:
und mit Klammer verbinden. Die Dichtung G Alle Sicherheits- und Schutzeinrichtungen
sowie die Klammer der Clampanschlüsse wieder anbringen bzw. in Funktion setzen.
sind nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten.
Wichtig: 10.2 Bedienung

Schweißstutzen /
Clampanschlüsse: Optische Stellungsanzeige
Drehwinkel für das
entleerungsoptimierte
Einschweißen entnehmen Sie
bitte der Broschüre "Drehwinkel
für 2/2-Wege-Ventilkörper"
(auf Anfrage oder unter
www.gemu-group.com).
Ventil oŮen Ventil geschlossen
Montage bei Flanschanschluss:
1. Auf saubere und unbeschädigte VORSICHT
DichtŲächen der AnschlussŲansche Heißes Handrad während
achten. Betrieb!
2. Flansche vor Verschrauben sorgfältig ® Verbrennungen!
ausrichten. G Handrad nur mit
3. Dichtungen gut zentrieren. Schutzhandschuhen
4. VentilŲansch und RohrŲansch mit betätigen.
geeignetem Dichtmaterial und
passenden Schrauben verbinden. VORSICHT
Dichtmaterial und Schrauben sind nicht
im Lieferumfang enthalten. Steigendes Handrad!
5. Alle Flanschbohrungen nutzen. ® Gefahr von Quetschungen der Finger.
6. Nur Verbindungselemente aus
zulässigen WerkstoŮen verwenden!
7. Schrauben über Kreuz anziehen!
Montage bei Gewindeanschluss:

G Gewindeanschluss entsprechend der
gültigen Normen in Rohr einschrauben.
G Membranventilkörper an Rohrleitung
anschrauben, geeignetes
Gewindedichtmittel verwenden.
Das Gewindedichtmittel ist nicht im
Lieferumfang enthalten.
673 10 / 40
10.3 Einstellung der
Schließbegrenzung
Wichtig:
Einstellung der Schließbegrenzung
nur bei komplett montiertem Ventil
(mit Membrane und Ventilkörper)
und in kaltem Zustand!
Zum Schutz der Dichtmembrane verfügen
die Ventile der Baureihe GEMÜ 673
serienmäßig über eine mechanisch
einstellbare Schließbegrenzung.
5. Gewindespindel entsprechend den
Standardeinstellung: Einsatzbedingungen nachfetten,
Das Ventil ist bei komplett zugedrehtem besonders wenn das Ventil autoklaviert
Handrad dicht. wird. GEMÜ empŰehlt das Fett
"TUNGREASE DAB" der Fa. TUNAP.
Einstellung der Schließbegrenzung:
Vorgehensweise:
1. Ventil ca. 50 % öŮnen.
H 6. Handrad H 180° verdreht auf den

Vierkant der Gewindespindel aufsetzen.
7. Ventil behutsam mit Handrad H
2. Arretierungsschraube 6 lösen, heraus schließen ("ZU").
drehen und entfernen. 8. Handrad H von Gewindespindel
3. Handrad H nach oben abziehen. abziehen.
4
4
4. Einstellring 4 lösen, heraus drehen und

9. Einstellring 4 auf die Gewindespindel
entfernen.
11 / 40 673
aufsetzen (Fase unten) und soweit 11.1 Demontage Ventil
aufschrauben bis er auf dem ƺAntrieb vom Körper lösenƻ
Ventilantrieb anliegt.
1. Antrieb A in OŮen-Position bringen.
2. Antrieb A vom Ventilkörper 1
6 demontieren.
3. Antrieb A in Geschlossen-Position
bringen.
Wichtig:
Nach Demontage alle Teile von
Verschmutzungen reinigen (Teile
dabei nicht beschädigen). Teile
auf Beschädigung prüfen, ggf.
H auswechseln (nur Originalteile von
GEMÜ verwenden).
10. Handrad H in richtiger Position auf den
Vierkant der Gewindespindel aufstecken
(Verzahnung des Einstellrings 4 11.2 Demontage Membrane
und des Handrads H beachten). Mit
Arretierungsschraube 6 befestigen. Wichtig:
Vor Demontage der Membrane
bitte Antrieb demontieren, siehe
11 Montage / Demontage "Demontage Ventil (Antrieb vom
von Ersatzteilen Körper lösen)".
1. Membrane herausschrauben.
2. Alle Teile von Produktresten und
Verschmutzungen reinigen. Teile dabei
nicht zerkratzen oder beschädigen!
3. Alle Teile auf Beschädigungen prüfen.
4. Beschädigte Teile austauschen (nur
Originalteile von GEMÜ verwenden).
A
20
19
2
19
18 1
673 12 / 40
11.3 Montage Membrane Druckstück und Antriebsflansch von unten
gesehen:
11.3.1 Allgemeines
Wichtig:
Für Ventil passende Membrane
einbauen (geeignet für Medium,
Mediumkonzentration, Temperatur
und Druck). Die Absperrmembrane
ist ein Verschleißteil. Vor
Inbetriebnahme und über gesamte
Einsatzdauer des Membranventils
technischen Zustand und Funktion
überprüfen. Zeitliche Abstände
der Prüfung entsprechend den
Einsatzbelastungen und / oder
der für den Einsatzfall geltenden
Regelwerken und Bestimmungen
Das Druckstück ist bei allen
festlegen und regelmäßig
Membrangrößen fest montiert.
durchführen.
Wichtig:
Ist die Membrane nicht weit 11.3.2 Montage der
genug in das Verbindungsstück Konkav-Membrane
eingeschraubt, wirkt die Druckstückaussparung
Schließkraft direkt auf den
Membranpin und nicht über
das Druckstück. Das führt zu
Beschädigungen und frühzeitigem
Ausfall der Membrane und Membranpin
Undichtheit des Ventils. Wird die
Membrane zu weit eingeschraubt,
erfolgt keine einwandfreie
Dichtung mehr am Ventilsitz. Die Membrandom
Funktion des Ventils ist nicht mehr 1. Antrieb A in Geschlossen-Position
gewährleistet. bringen.
2. Neue Membrane von Hand fest in
Wichtig:
Druckstück einschrauben.
Falsch montierte Membrane führt
3. Kontrollieren ob Membrandom in
ggf. zu Undichtheit des Ventils /
Druckstückaussparung liegt.
Mediumsaustritt. Ist dies der Fall
4. Bei Schwergängigkeit Gewinde prüfen,
dann Membrane demontieren,
beschädigte Teile austauschen (nur
komplettes Ventil und Membrane Originalteile von GEMÜ verwenden).
überprüfen und erneut nach obiger 5. Beim Verspüren eines deutlichen
Anleitung montieren. Widerstands Membrane soweit
zurückschrauben, bis Membran-Lochbild
mit Antriebs-Lochbild übereinstimmt.
13 / 40 673
11.3.3 Montage der 11.4 Montage Antrieb
Konvex-Membrane auf Ventilkörper
1. Antrieb A in Geschlossen-Position 1. Antrieb A in Geschlossen-Position
bringen. bringen.
2. Neuen Membranschild von Hand 2. Antrieb A ca. 20 % öŮnen.
umklappen; bei großen Nennweiten 3. Alle Teile von Produktresten und
saubere, gepolsterte Unterlage Verschmutzungen reinigen. Teile dabei
verwenden. nicht zerkratzen oder beschädigen!
I. 4. Antrieb A mit montierter Membrane 2
auf Ventilkörper 1 aufsetzen, auf
Übereinstimmung von Membransteg und
Ventilkörpersteg achten.
II. 5. Schrauben 18, Scheiben 19 und
Muttern 20 handfest montieren.
6. Schrauben 18 mit Muttern 20 über Kreuz
festziehen.
Membranschild Membranpin
III.
7. Auf gleichmäßige Verpressung der
3. Neue Stützmembrane auf Druckstück Membrane 2 achten (ca. 10-15 %,
auŲegen. erkennbar an gleichmäßiger
4. Membranschild auf Stützmembrane Außenwölbung).
auŲegen. 8. Komplett montiertes Ventil auf Dichtheit
5. Membranschild von Hand fest prüfen.
in Druckstück einschrauben.
Der Membrandom muss in der Wichtig:
Druckstückaussparung liegen. Wartung und Service:
Verbin- Druckstückaussparung Membranen setzen sich im Laufe
dungs-
stück der Zeit. Nach Demontage /
Montage des Ventils Schrauben 18
Druck- und Muttern 20 körperseitig auf
stück
festen Sitz überprüfen und ggf.
nachziehen (spätestens nach dem
ersten Sterilisationsprozess).
Stützmembrane Membranpin
Membranschild Membrandom
6. Bei Schwergängigkeit das Gewinde
prüfen, beschädigte Teile austauschen.
7. Beim Verspüren eines deutlichen
Widerstands Membrane soweit
zurückschrauben, bis Membran-Lochbild
mit Antriebs-Lochbild übereinstimmt.
8. Membranschild von Hand fest auf die
Stützmembrane drücken, so dass sie
zurückklappt und an der Stützmembrane
anliegt.
673 14 / 40
12 Inbetriebnahme 13 Inspektion und Wartung
WARNUNG WARNUNG
Aggressive Chemikalien! Unter Druck stehende Armaturen!
® Verätzungen! ® Gefahr von schwersten Verletzungen
G Vor Inbetriebnahme Dichtheit oder Tod!
der Medienanschlüsse G Nur an druckloser Anlage arbeiten.
prüfen!
G Dichtheitsprüfung VORSICHT
nur mit geeigneter
Heiße Anlagenteile!
Schutzausrüstung.
® Verbrennungen!
G Nur an abgekühlter Anlage
VORSICHT
arbeiten.
Gegen Leckage vorbeugen!
G Schutzmaßnahmen gegen VORSICHT
Überschreitung des maximal
Wartungs- und
zulässigen Drucks durch eventuelle
G
Instandhaltungstätigkeiten nur durch
Druckstöße (Wasserschläge) vorsehen.
geschultes Fachpersonal.
Vor Reinigung bzw. vor Inbetriebnahme G Für Schäden welche durch
der Anlage: unsachgemäße Handhabung oder
G Membranventil auf Dichtheit und Funktion Fremdeinwirkung entstehen, übernimmt
prüfen (Membranventil schließen und GEMÜ keinerlei Haftung.
wieder öŮnen). G Nehmen Sie im Zweifelsfall vor
G Bei neuen Anlagen und nach Inbetriebnahme Kontakt mit GEMÜ auf.
Reparaturen Leitungssystem bei voll
1. Geeignete Schutzausrüstung gemäß
geöŮnetem Membranventil spülen (zum
den Regelungen des Anlagenbetreibers
Entfernen schädlicher FremdstoŮe).
berücksichtigen.
Reinigung: 2. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil stilllegen.
Betreiber der Anlage ist verantwortlich für 3. Gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern.
Auswahl des Reinigungsmediums und 4. Anlage bzw. Anlagenteil drucklos
Durchführung des Verfahrens. schalten.
Wichtig: Der Betreiber muss regelmäßige
Wartung und Service: Sichtkontrollen der Ventile entsprechend
Membranen setzen sich im Laufe den Einsatzbedingungen und des
der Zeit. Nach Demontage / Gefährdungspotenzials zur Vorbeugung
Montage des Ventils Schrauben 18 von Undichtheit und Beschädigungen
und Muttern 20 körperseitig auf durchführen. Ebenso muss das Ventil in
festen Sitz überprüfen und ggf. entsprechenden Intervallen demontiert
nachziehen (spätestens nach dem und auf Verschleiß geprüft werden (siehe
ersten Sterilisationsprozess). Kapitel 11 "Montage / Demontage von
Ersatzteilen").
15 / 40 673
Wichtig: 16 Rücksendung
Wartung und Service: G Membranventil reinigen.
Gewindespindel entsprechend den G Rücksendeerklärung bei GEMÜ
Einsatzbedingungen nachfetten, anfordern.
besonders wenn das Ventil G Rücksendung nur mit vollständig
autoklaviert wird. ausgefüllter Rücksendeerklärung.
Siehe Kapitel 10.3, Punkt 5.
Ansonsten erfolgt keine
Gutschrift bzw. keine
Erledigung der Reparatur
14 Demontage
sondern eine kostenpflichtige Entsorgung.
Demontage erfolgt unter den gleichen
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen wie die Montage. Hinweis zur Rücksendung:
G Membranventil demontieren (siehe Aufgrund gesetzlicher
Kapitel 11.1 "Demontage Ventil (Antrieb Bestimmungen zum Schutz
vom Körper lösen)"). der Umwelt und des Personals
ist es erforderlich, dass die
Rücksendeerklärung vollständig
15 Entsorgung ausgefüllt und unterschrieben
den Versandpapieren beiliegt.
G Alle Ventilteile Nur wenn diese Erklärung
entsprechend den vollständig ausgefüllt ist, wird die
Entsorgungsvorschriften / Rücksendung bearbeitet!
Umweltschutzbestimmungen
entsorgen.
G Auf Restanhaftungen 17 Hinweise
und Ausgasung von
eindiŮundierten Medien Hinweis zur Richtlinie 94/9/EG
achten. ƺATEX Richtlinieƻ:
Ein Beiblatt zur Richtlinie 94/9/EG
liegt dem Produkt bei, sofern es
gemäß ATEX bestellt wurde.
Hinweis zur
Mitarbeiterschulung:
Zur Mitarbeiterschulung nehmen
Sie bitte über die Adresse auf der
letzten Seite Kontakt auf.
Im Zweifelsfall oder bei Missverständnissen

ist die deutsche Version des Dokuments
ausschlaggebend!
673 16 / 40
18 Fehlersuche / Störungsbehebung
Fehler Möglicher Grund Fehlerbehebung
Medium entweicht aus Absperrmembrane auf Beschädigungen

Absperrmembrane defekt
Leckagebohrung* prüfen, ggf. Membrane tauschen
Antrieb defekt Antrieb austauschen

Ventil öffnet nicht bzw. nicht
vollständig Absperrmembrane nicht korrekt Antrieb demontieren, Membranmontage
montiert prüfen, ggf. austauschen
Ventil mit Betriebsdruck laut Datenblatt

Betriebsdruck zu hoch
betreiben
Antrieb demontieren, Fremdkörper

Fremdkörper zwischen entfernen, Absperrmembrane und
Absperrmembrane und Ventilkörpersteg Ventilkörpersteg auf Beschädigungen
Ventil im Durchgang untersuchen, ggf. austauschen
undicht (schließt nicht bzw.
nicht vollständig) Ventilkörpersteg undicht bzw. Ventilkörpersteg auf Beschädigungen
beschädigt prüfen, ggf. Ventilkörper tauschen
Absperrmembrane auf Beschädigungen

prüfen, ggf. Membrane tauschen
Schließbegrenzung ist falsch eingestellt Schließbegrenzung neu einstellen
Antrieb demontieren, Membranmontage

Absperrmembrane falsch montiert
prüfen, ggf. austauschen
Verschraubung zwischen Ventilkörper Verschraubung zwischen Ventilkörper und

Ventil zwischen Antrieb und und Antrieb lose Antrieb nachziehen
Ventilkörper undicht
Absperrmembrane auf Beschädigungen
prüfen, ggf. Membrane tauschen
Ventilkörper / Antrieb beschädigt Ventilkörper / Antrieb tauschen
Unsachgemäße Montage Montage Ventilkörper in Rohrleitung prüfen
Verbindung Ventilkörper - Verschraubungen / Gewindeanschlüsse Verschraubungen / Gewindeanschlüsse

Rohrleitung undicht lose festziehen
Dichtmittel defekt Dichtmittel ersetzen
Ventilkörper auf Beschädigungen prüfen,

Ventilkörper undicht Ventilkörper defekt oder korrodiert
ggf. Ventilkörper tauschen
Antrieb defekt Antrieb austauschen

Gewindespindel entsprechend den
Handrad lässt sich nicht Einsatzbedingungen nachfetten,
drehen Gewindespindel sitzt fest besonders wenn das Ventil autoklaviert
wird; ggf. Antrieb austauschen.
Siehe Kapitel 10.3, Punkt 5.
* siehe Kapitel 19 "Schnittbild und Ersatzteile"
17 / 40 673
19 Schnittbild und Ersatzteile
20 Leckagebohrung
19
19
1
18
Pos. Benennung Bestellbezeichnung
1 Ventilkörper K600...
2 Membrane 600...M
}
18 Schraube
19 Scheibe 673...S30...
20 Mutter
A Antrieb 9673...
673 18 / 40
20 EG-Konformitätserklärung
Konformitätserklärung
Gemäß Anhang VII der Richtlinie 97/23/EG
Wir, die Firma GEMÜ Gebr. Müller Apparatebau GmbH & Co. KG
Fritz-Müller-Straße 6-8
D-74653 Ingelfingen
erklären, dass unten aufgeführte Armaturen die Sicherheitsanforderungen der Druckgeräte-

richtlinie 97/23/EG erfüllen.
Benennung der Armaturen - Typenbezeichnung
Membranventil
GEMÜ 673
Benannte Stelle: TÜV Rheinland

Berlin Brandenburg
Nummer: 0035
Zertifikat-Nr.: 01 202 926/Q-02 0036
Konformitätsbewertungsverfahren:
Modul H
Hinweis für Armaturen mit einer Nennweite ̞ DN 25:

Die Produkte werden entwickelt und produziert nach GEMÜ eigenen Verfahrensanweisungen
und Qualitätsstandards, welche die Forderungen der ISO 9001 und der ISO 14001 erfüllen.
Die Produkte dürfen gemäß Artikel 3, Absatz 3 der Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG keine CE-
Kennzeichnung tragen.
Joachim Brien
Leiter Bereich Technik
Ingelfingen-Criesbach, Oktober 2014
19 / 40 673
Contents 1 General information
1 General information 20 Prerequisites to ensure that the GEMÜ valve
2 General safety information 20 functions correctly:
2.1 Information for service Correct transport and storage
and operating personnel 21 Installation and commissioning by trained
2.2 Warning notes 21 personnel
2.3 Symbols used 22 Operation according to these installation,
3 DeŰnition of terms 22 operating and maintenance instructions
4 Intended area of use 22 Recommended maintenance
5 Technical data 23
Correct installation, operation, servicing and
6 Order data 24
repair work ensure faultless diaphragm valve
7 Manufacturer’s information 26
operation.
7.1 Transport 26
7.2 Delivery and performance 26 The descriptions and instructions
7.3 Storage 26 apply to the standard versions.
7.4 Tools required 26 For special versions not described
8 Functional description 26 in these installation, operating
9 Construction 26 and maintenance instructions the
10 Installation and operation 27 basic information contained herein
10.1 Installing the diaphragm valve 27 applies in combination with any
10.2 Operation 28 additional special documentation.
10.3 Setting the seal adjuster 29
11 Assembly / disassembly All rights including copyright
of spare parts 30 and industrial property rights are
11.1 Valve disassembly expressly reserved.
(removing bonnet from body) 30
11.2 Removing the diaphragm 30
11.3 Mounting the diaphragm 30 2 General safety information
11.3.1 General information 30
The safety information does not take into
11.3.2 Mounting a concave diaphragm 31
account:
11.3.3 Mounting a convex diaphragm 32
Unexpected incidents and events, which
11.4 Bonnet mounting
may occur during installation, operation
on the valve body 32
and servicing.
12 Commissioning 33
Local safety regulations which must be
13 Inspection and servicing 33
adhered to by the operator and by any
14 Disassembly 34
additional installation personnel.
15 Disposal 34
16 Returns 34
17 Information 34
18 Troubleshooting /
Fault clearance 35
19 Sectional drawing
and spare parts 36
20 EC Declaration of conformity 37
673 20 / 40
2.1 Information for service 2.2 Warning notes
and operating personnel Wherever possible, warning notes are
The installation, operating and maintenance organised according to the following
instructions contain fundamental safety scheme:
information that must be observed during
commissioning, operation and serving. SIGNAL WORD
Non-compliance with these instructions may Type and source of the danger
cause: ® Possible consequences of non-
Personal hazard due to electrical, observance.
mechanical and chemical eŮects. G Measures for avoiding danger.
Hazard to nearby equipment. Warning notes are always marked with a

Failure of important functions. signal word and sometimes also with a
Hazard to the environment due to the symbol for the specific danger.
leakage of dangerous materials. The following signal words and danger
Prior to commissioning: levels are used:
G Read the installation, operating and
maintenance instructions. DANGER
G Provide adequate training for the Imminent danger!
installation and operating personnel. ® Non-observance will lead to death or
G Ensure that the contents of the severe injury.
installation, operating and maintenance
instructions have been fully understood WARNING
by the responsible personnel.
Potentially dangerous situation!
G DeŰne the areas of responsibility.
® Non-observance can cause death or
During operation: severe injury.
G Keep the installation, operating and
maintenance instructions available at the CAUTION
place of use. Potentially dangerous situation!
G Observe the safety information. ® Non-observance can cause moderate
G Use only in accordance with the to light injury.
speciŰcations.
G Any servicing work and repairs not CAUTION (WITHOUT SYMBOL)
described in the installation, operating
Potentially dangerous situation!
and maintenance instructions must not
® Non-observance can cause damage to
be performed without consulting the
property.
manufacturer Űrst.
DANGER
Strictly observe the safety data sheets
or the safety regulations that are valid
for the media used.
In cases of uncertainty:
Consult the nearest GEMÜ sales oůce.
21 / 40 673
2.3 Symbols used 4 Intended area of use
Danger - hot surfaces! The GEMÜ 673 diaphragm valve is
designed for installation in piping
systems. It controls a Ųowing medium by
Danger - corrosive materials! manual operation.
The valve may only be used providing
the product technical criteria are
Danger - maiming! complied with ƺsee chapter 5
"Technical Data"ƻ.
Do not paint the bolts and plastic parts of
Hand: indicates general information the diaphragm valve!
and recommendations.
G Bullet point: indicates the tasks to

WARNING
be performed. Use the diaphragm valve only for the
intended purpose!
® Arrow: indicates the response(s) to ® Otherwise the manufacturer liability and
tasks. guarantee will be void.
G Use the diaphragm valve only in
Enumeration sign accordance with the operating
conditions speciŰed in the contract
documentation and in the installation,
operating and maintenance
3 Definition of terms instructions.
Working medium G The diaphragm valve may only be used
The medium that flows through the in potentially explosive zones conŰrmed
diaphragm valve. in the declaration of conformity (ATEX).
673 22 / 40
5 Technical data
Working medium
Corrosive, inert, gaseous and liquid media which have no negative impact on the physical and chemical properties of the body
and diaphragm material.
Temperatures
Media temperature
FPM (Code 4) -10 to 90 °C
EPDM (Code 13) -10 to 100 °C
EPDM (Code 17) -10 to 100 °C
PTFE (Code 5E) -10 to 100 °C
Sterilisation temperature
FPM (Code 4) not applicable
PTFE (Code 5E) Constant temperature* 150 °C
The sterilisation temperature is valid for steam or superheated water
* The valves concerned must be serviced regulary if steam is applied continuously
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 °C
Diaphragm size Nominal size Max. operating pressure [bar]

DN EPDM PTFE
25 15, 20, 25 10 6
40 32, 40 10 6
50 50 10 6
All pressures are gauge pressures. Operating pressure values were determined with static operating pressure applied on one side of a closed
valve. Sealing at the valve seat and atmospheric sealing is ensured for the given values.
Information on operating pressures applied on both sides and for high purity media on request.
Kv values [m³/h]
DIN DIN 11850 DIN 11850 DIN 11850 SMS 3008 ASME BPE EN ISO
Diaphragm DN Series 1 Series 2
size Series 3 1127
Code 0 Code 16 Code 17 Code 18 Code 37 Code 59 Code 60
15 4.1 4.7 4.7 4.7 - - 7.4
25 20 6.3 7.0 7.0 7.0 - 4.4 13.2
25 13.9 15.0 15.0 15.0 12.6 12.2 16.2
32 25.3 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.2 - 30.0
40
40 29.3 30.9 30.9 30.9 30.2 29.5 32.8
50 50 46.5 48.4 48.4 48.4 51.7 50.6 55.2
Kv values determined acc. to IEC 534 standard, inlet pressure 6 bar, ͍p 1 bar, stainless steel valve body and soft elastomer diaphragm.
23 / 40 673
6 Order data
Body configuration Code Valve body material Code
Tank valve body B** EN-GJS-400-18-LT (SG iron 40.3) PFA lined 17
2/2-way body D EN-GJS-400-18-LT (SG iron 40.3) PP lined 18
Multi-port design M** 1.4435 - BN2 (CF3M), investment casting Fe<0.5% 32
T body T* 1.4435 (ASTM A 351 CF3M, ԑ 316L), investment casting 34
* For dimensions see T Valves brochure 1.4408, investment casting 37
** Dimensions and versions on request 1.4435 (316L), forged body 40
1.4435 (BN2), forged body Fe<0.5% 42
Connection Code
Butt weld spigots Diaphragm material Code
Spigots DIN 0
Spigots DIN 11850, series 1 16 FPM 4
Spigots DIN 11850, series 2 17 EPDM 13
Spigots DIN 11866, series A 1A EPDM 17
Spigots DIN 11866, series B 1B PTFE/EPDM convex, PTFE loose 5E
Material complies with FDA requirements, except code 4
Spigots SMS 3008 37
Spigots BS 4825, Part 1 55
Spigots ASME BPE 59
Spigots EN ISO 1127 60
Spigots ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 10s 63 Control function Code
Spigots ANSI/ASME B36.19M, Schedule 40s 65
Manually operated 0
Threaded connections
Threaded sockets DIN ISO 228 1
Threaded spigots DIN 11851 6
One side threaded spigot, other side
cone spigot and union nut, DIN 11851 62
Bonnet version Code
Aseptic unions on request
With seal adjuster, black handwheel
Flanges diaphragm size 25 2TS
Flanges EN 1092 / PN16 / form B,
length EN 558, series 1, With seal adjuster, black handwheel
ISO 5752, basic series 1 8 diaphragm size 40 3TS
Flanges ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF, With seal adjuster, black handwheel
length MSS SP-88 38 diaphragm size 50 4TS
Flanges ANSI CLASS 125/150 RF,
length EN 558, series 1,
Clamp connections
length ASME BPE 80
Clamp DIN 32676 series B for pipe EN ISO 1127,
Clamp ASME BPE for pipe ASME BPE,
Clamps DIN 32676 series A for pipe DIN 11850,
length EN 558, series 7 8A
Clamps SMS 3017 for pipe SMS 3008,
length EN 558, series 7 8E
For overview of available valve bodies see data sheet page 12
673 24 / 40
Valve body surface finish, internal contour
Forged body Investment casting
Code
Code 40, 42 Code 32, 34
Ra ̞ 6.3 ·m blasted internal/external - X 1500
Ra ̞ 6.3 ·m optical electropolishing - X 1509
Ra ̞ 0.8 ·m mechanically polished internal, blasted external X X 1502
Ra ̞ 0.8 ·m electropolished internal/external X - 1503
Ra ̞ 0.6 ·m mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* X* 1507
Ra ̞ 0.6 ·m electropolished internal/external X* - 1508
Ra ̞ 0.4 ·m mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* - 1536
Ra ̞ 0.25 ·m mechanically polished internal, blasted external X* - 1527
* Not possible for connections DN 8 code 55 and 59, DN 4 code 0 and all other connections ͌ < 6 mm.
Ra acc. to DIN 4768; at defined reference points
Surface finish data refer to medium wetted surfaces
Special function Code

3-A compliant design M
Order example 673 25 D 60 40 17 0 2TS 1503 M

Type 673
Nominal size 25
Body configuration (code) D
Connection (code) 60
Valve body material (code) 40
Diaphragm material (code) 17
Control function (code) 0
Bonnet version (code) 2TS
Surface finish (code) 1503
Special function (code) M
25 / 40 673
7 Manufacturer’s information 8 Functional description
GEMÜ 673 is a metal diaphragm valve with
a 2/2-way, T or tank bottom valve body or
7.1 Transport in multi-port design. Bonnet and internals
G Only transport the diaphragm valve by are made all of stainless steel. An integral
suitable means. Do not drop. Handle optical position indicator and a seal adjuster
carefully. are included as standard. The valve body
G Dispose of packing material according and the diaphragm are available in various
to relevant local or national disposal designs as shown in the data sheet. The
regulations / environmental protection valve has CIP / SIP cleaning and sterilizing
laws. capabilities.
7.2 Delivery and performance 9 Construction

G Check that all parts are present and
check for any damage immediately upon
receipt.
G The scope of delivery is apparent from Handwheel
the dispatch documents and the design A
from the order number. Optical
G The performance of the diaphragm valve position
is checked at the factory. indicator
7.3 Storage
G Store the diaphragm valve free from dust
and moisture in its original packaging.
G Store the diaphragm valve in "open"
position.
Construction
G Avoid UV rays and direct sunlight.
G Maximum storage temperature: 40 °C.
G Solvents, chemicals, acids, fuels or 1 Valve body
similar Ųuids must not be stored in the 2 Diaphragm
same room as valves and their spare
A Bonnet
parts.
7.4 Tools required

G The tools required for installation and
assembly are not included in the scope
of delivery.
G Use appropriate, functional and safe
tools!
673 26 / 40
10 Installation and operation Installation location:
Prior to installation: CAUTION

G Ensure that valve body and diaphragm
material are appropriate and compatible G Do not apply external force to the valve.
to handle the working medium. G Choose the installation location so that
G Check the suitability prior to the the valve cannot be used as a foothold
installation. (climbing aid).
See chapter 5 "Technical data". G Lay the pipeline so that the valve body
is protected against transverse and
bending forces, and also vibrations and
10.1 Installing the tension.
diaphragm valve G Only mount the valve between matching
aligned pipes.
WARNING Direction of the working medium:
The equipment is subject to pressure! optional.
® Risk of severe injury or death! Mounting position of the diaphragm valve:
G Only work on depressurized plant. optional.
WARNING Installation:
1. Ensure the suitability of the valve for
Corrosive chemicals!
each respective use. The valve must
® Risk of caustic burns!
be appropriate for the piping system
G Wear appropriate protective
operating conditions (medium, medium
gear when installing.
concentration, temperature and
pressure) and the prevailing ambient
CAUTION conditions. Check the technical data of
Hot plant components! the valve and the materials.
® Risk of burns! 2. Shut oŮ plant or plant component.
G Only work on plant that has 3. Secure against recommissioning.
cooled down. 4. Depressurize the plant or plant
component.
CAUTION 5. Completely drain the plant (or plant
Never use the valve as a step or an aid component) and let it cool down until
for climbing! the temperature is below the media
® This entails the risk of slipping-oŮ or vaporization temperature and scalding
damaging the valve. can be ruled out.
6. Correctly decontaminate, rinse and
CAUTION ventilate the plant or plant component.
Do not exceed the maximum
Installation - Butt weld spigots:
permissible pressure!
1. Adhere to good welding practices!
® Take precautionary measures to
2. Disassemble the bonnet with the
avoid possible pressure surges
diaphragm before welding the valve body
(water hammer).
into the pipeline (see chapter 11.1).
G Installation work must only be performed 3. Allow butt weld spigots to cool down.
by trained personnel. 4. Reassemble the valve body and the
G Use appropriate protective gear as bonnet with diaphragm (see chapter
speciŰed in plant operator's guidelines. 11.4).
27 / 40 673
Installation - Clamp connections: After the installation:
G When assembling clamp connections, G Reactivate all safety and protective
insert a gasket between the body clamp devices.
and the adjacent piping clamp and join
them using the appropriate clamp Űtting.
The gasket and the clamp for clamp 10.2 Operation
connections are not included in the scope
Optical position indicator
of delivery.
Important:
Butt weld spigots /
Clamp connections:
Angle of rotation for welding into
pipeline to enable optimised
draining see brochure "Angle of
rotation" (on request or Valve open Valve closed
www.gemu-group.com).
CAUTION
Installation - Flange connection: Handwheel can become hot
1. Pay attention to clean, undamaged during operation!
sealing surfaces on the mating Ųanges. ® Risk of burns!
2. Align Ųanges carefully before installing G Ensure protective gloves
them. are worn when operating

3. Centre the seals accurately. handwheel.
4. Connect the valve Ųange and the piping
Ųange using appropriate sealing material CAUTION
and matching bolting. Sealing material Rising handwheel!
and bolts are not included in the scope ® Danger of crushing Űngers.
of delivery.
5. Use all Ųange holes.
6. Only use connector elements made of
approved materials!
7. Tighten the bolts diagonally!
Installation - Threaded connections:

G Screw the threaded connections into the
piping in accordance with valid standards.
G Screw the diaphragm valve body into the
piping, use appropriate thread sealant.
The thread sealant is not included in the
scope of delivery.
Observe appropriate regulations for

connections!
673 28 / 40
10.3 Setting the seal adjuster
Important:
Only set the seal adjuster when
the valve is completely assembled
(with diaphragm and valve body)
and in a cold condition!
The valves type GEMÜ 673 have a
mechanical seal adjuster as standard to
protect the sealing diaphragm.
Standard setting:
The valve is sealed when the handwheel is 5. Dependent on the operating conditions,
completely closed. regrease the threaded spindle,
especially a valve that is autoclaved.
Setting the seal adjuster: GEMÜ recommends the grease
Procedure: "TUNGREASE DAB" from TUNAP.
1. Open the valve approx. 50%.
H
6. Place the handwheel H upside down on
2. Unscrew the locking screw 6 and remove the square of the threaded spindle.
it. 7. Close the valve gently by turning
3. Pull oŮ the handwheel H. handwheel H ("CLOSED").
8. Pull oŮ handwheel H from the threaded
spindle.
4. Unscrew the adjusting ring 4 and remove

it.
9. Position adjusting ring 4 (bevel
downwards) and screw it clockwise onto
29 / 40 673
the threaded spindle until it sits on the 3. Move bonnet A to the closed position.
valve bonnet. Important:
After disassembly, clean all parts
6 of contamination (do not damage
parts). Check parts for potential
damage, replace if necessary (only
use genuine parts from GEMÜ).
11.2 Removing the diaphragm

Important:
H
Before removing the diaphragm,
please remove the bonnet, see
10. Push handwheel H in its original position "Valve disassembly (removing
on the square of the threaded spindle bonnet from body)".
(observe the teeth of the adjusting ring 4
and the handwheel H). Tighten it with 1. Unscrew the diaphragm.
locking screw 6. 2. Clean all parts of the remains of product
and contamination. Do not scratch or
damage parts during cleaning!
11 Assembly / disassembly 3. Check all parts for potential damage.
of spare parts 4. Replace damaged parts (only use
genuine parts from GEMÜ).
11.3 Mounting the diaphragm
11.3.1 General information
A
Important:
Mount the correct diaphragm
20
that suits the valve (suitable for
19 medium, medium concentration,
2 temperature and pressure). The
19 diaphragm is a wearing part.
Check the technical condition and
18 function of the diaphragm valve
1
before commissioning and during
the whole term of use. Carry out
checks regularly and determine the
check intervals in accordance with
the conditions of use and / or the
11.1 Valve disassembly regulatory codes and provisions
ƺremoving bonnet from applicable for this application.
bodyƻ
1. Move bonnet A to the open position.
2. Remove bonnet A from valve body 1.
673 30 / 40
Important: 11.3.2 Mounting a
If the diaphragm is not screwed concave diaphragm
into the adapter far enough, the Recess of compressor
closing force is transmitted directly
onto the diaphragm pin and not
via the compressor. This will cause
damage and early failure of the
diaphragm and thus leakage of the Diaphragm pin
valve. If the diaphragm is screwed
in too far no perfect sealing at the
valve seat will be achieved. The
function of the valve is no longer Diaphragm boss
ensured. 1. Move bonnet A to the closed position.

2. Screw new diaphragm tightly into the
Important:
compressor manually.
Incorrectly mounted diaphragm
3. Check if the diaphragm boss Űts closely
may cause valve leakage /
in the recess of the compressor.
emission of medium. In this case
4. If it is diůcult to screw it in, check the
remove the diaphragm, check the
thread, replace damaged parts (only use
complete valve and diaphragm and
genuine parts from GEMÜ).
reassemble again proceeding as
5. When clear resistance is felt turn back
described above.
the diaphragm anticlockwise until its bolt
holes are in correct alignment with the
Compressor and bonnet flange seen from
bolt holes of the bonnet.
below:
The compressor is fixed to the spindle for all

diaphragm sizes.
31 / 40 673
11.3.3 Mounting a 11.4 Bonnet mounting
convex diaphragm on the valve body
1. Move bonnet A to the closed position. 1. Move bonnet A to the closed position.
2. Invert the new diaphragm face manually; 2. Open bonnet A approx. 20 %.
use a clean, padded mat with bigger 3. Clean all parts of the remains of product
nominal sizes. and contamination. Do not scratch or
I. damage parts during cleaning!
4. Position bonnet A with the mounted
diaphragm 2 on the valve body 1,
aligning the diaphragm weir and valve
body weir.
II. 5. Tighten the bolts 18, washers 19 and
nuts 20 by hand (hand tight only).
6. Fully tighten the bolts 18 with nuts 20
Diaphragm face Diaphragm pin
diagonally.
III.
3. Position the new backing diaphragm 7. Ensure that the diaphragm 2 is

onto the compressor. compressed evenly (approx. 10-15 %,
4. Position the diaphragm face onto the visible by an even bulge to the outside).
backing diaphragm. 8. Check tightness of completely
5. Screw diaphragm face tightly into the assembled valve.
compressor manually. The diaphragm
boss must Űt closely in the recess of the Important:
compressor. Service and maintenance:
Adapter Recess of compressor Diaphragms degrade in the course
of time. After valve disassembly /
assembly check that the bolts 18
Com- and nuts 20 on the body are tight
pressor and retighten as necessary (at the
very latest after the first sterilisation
process).
Backing Diaphragm pin
diaphragm
Diaphragm face Diaphragm boss

6. If it is diůcult to screw it in, check the
thread, replace damaged parts.
7. When clear resistance is felt turn back
the diaphragm until its bolt holes are in
correct alignment with the bolt holes of
the bonnet.
8. Press the diaphragm face tightly onto
the backing diaphragm manually so that
it returns to its original shape and Űts
closely on the backing diaphragm.
673 32 / 40
12 Commissioning 13 Inspection and servicing
WARNING WARNING
Corrosive chemicals! The equipment is subject to pressure!
® Risk of caustic burns! ® Risk of severe injury or death!
G Check the tightness of the G Only work on depressurized plant.
media connections prior to
commissioning! CAUTION
G Use only the appropriate
Hot plant components!
protective gear when ® Risk of burns!
performing the tightness G Only work on plant that has
check. cooled down.
CAUTION CAUTION
Protect against leakage!
G Servicing and maintenance work may
G Provide precautionary measures
only be performed by trained personnel.
against exceeding the maximum
G GEMÜ shall assume no liability
permitted pressures caused by
whatsoever for damages caused
pressure surges (water hammer).
by improper handling or third-party
actions.
Prior to cleaning or commissioning the G In case of doubt, contact GEMÜ before
plant: commissioning.
G Check the tightness and the function of
the diaphragm valve (close and reopen 1. Use appropriate protective gear as
the diaphragm valve). speciŰed in plant operator's guidelines.
G If the plant is new and after repairs rinse 2. Shut oŮ plant or plant component.
the piping system with a fully opened 3. Secure against recommissioning.
diaphragm valve (to remove any harmful 4. Depressurize the plant or plant
foreign matter). component.
Cleaning: The operator must carry out regular visual
The plant operator is responsible for examination of the valves dependent on
selecting the cleaning material and the operating conditions and the potential
performing the procedure. danger in order to prevent leakage
and damage. The valve also has to be
Important: disassembled in the corresponding intervals
Service and maintenance: and checked for wear (see chapter 11
Diaphragms degrade in the course "Assembly / Disassembly of spare parts").
of time. After valve disassembly /
assembly check that the bolts 18 Important:
and nuts 20 on the body are tight Service and maintenance:
and retighten as necessary (at the Dependent on the operating
very latest after the first sterilisation conditions, regrease the threaded
process). spindle, especially a valve that is
autoclaved.
See chapter 10.3, point 5.
33 / 40 673
14 Disassembly 17 Information
Disassembly is performed observing Note on Directive 94/9/EC
the same precautionary measures as for ƺATEX Directiveƻ:
installation. A supplement to Directive 94/9/EC
G Disassemble the diaphragm valve
is included with the product if it was
(see chapter 11.1 "Valve disassembly ordered according to ATEX.
(removing bonnet from body)").
Note on staff training:
Please contact us at the address
15 Disposal on the last page for staff training
information.
G All valve parts must be
disposed of according to Should there be any doubts or
relevant local or national misunderstandings in the preceding text,
disposal regulations / the German version of this document is the
environmental protection authoritative document!
laws.
G Pay attention to adhered
residual material and gas
diŮusion from penetrated
media.
16 Returns
G Clean the diaphragm valve.
G Request a goods return declaration form
from GEMÜ.
G Returns must be made with a completed
declaration of return.
If not completed, GEMÜ cannot process
credits or
repair work
but will dispose of the goods at the
operator's expense.
Note for returns:

Legal regulations for the protection
of the environment and personnel
require that the completed and
signed goods return declaration
is included with the dispatch
documents. Returned goods can
be processed only when this
declaration is completed.
673 34 / 40
18 Troubleshooting / Fault clearance
Fault Possible cause Fault clearance
Medium escapes from leak Check valve diaphragm for damage,

Valve diaphragm faulty
detection hole* replace diaphragm if necessary
Bonnet faulty Replace bonnet

Valve doesn't open or
doesn't open fully Remove bonnet, check diaphragm
Valve diaphragm incorrectly mounted
mounting, replace if necessary
Operate valve with operating pressure

Operating pressure too high
specified in data sheet
Remove bonnet, remove foreign matter,

Foreign matter between valve
check valve diaphragm and valve body
diaphragm and valve body weir
Valve leaks downstream weir for damage and replace if necessary
(doesn't close or doesn't
Check valve body weir for damage, if
close fully) Valve body weir leaking or damaged
necessary replace valve body
Check valve diaphragm for damage,

replace diaphragm if necessary
Seal adjuster is incorrectly adjusted Readjust the seal adjuster
Remove bonnet, check diaphragm

Valve diaphragm incorrectly mounted
mounting, replace if necessary
Bolting between valve body and bonnet Retighten bolting between valve body and
Valve leaks between loose bonnet
bonnet and valve body
Check valve diaphragm for damage,
replace diaphragm if necessary
Valve body / bonnet damaged Replace valve body / bonnet
Incorrect installation Check installation of valve body in piping

Valve body connection to
Bolting / threaded connections loose Tighten bolting / threaded connections
piping leaks
Sealing material faulty Replace sealing material
Check valve body for damage, replace

Valve body leaks Valve body faulty or corroded
valve body if necessary
Bonnet faulty Replace bonnet

Dependent on the operating conditions,
Handwheel cannot be regrease the threaded spindle, especially
turned Threaded spindle seized a valve that is autoclaved; replace bonnet
if necessary.
See chapter 10.3, point 5.
* see chapter 19 "Sectional drawing and spare parts"
35 / 40 673
19 Sectional drawing and spare parts
20 Leak detection hole
19
19
1
18
Item Name Order description
1 Valve body K600...
2 Diaphragm 600...M
}
18 Bolt
19 Washer 673...S30...
20 Nut
A Bonnet 9673...
673 36 / 40
20 EC Declaration of conformity
According to annex VII of the Directive 97/23/EC
Hereby we, GEMÜ Gebr. Müller Apparatebau GmbH & Co. KG

Fritz-Müller-Straße 6-8
D-74653 Ingelfingen
declare that the equipment listed below complies with the safety requirements of the Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Description of the equipment - product type
Diaphragm Valve
GEMÜ 673
Notified body: TÜV Rheinland

Berlin Brandenburg
Number: 0035
Certificate no.: 01 202 926/Q-02 0036
Conformity assessment procedure:

Module H
Note for equipment with a nominal size ̞ DN 25:

The products are developped and produced according to GEMÜ process instructions and
quality standards which comply with the requirements of ISO 9001 and of ISO 14001.
According to section 3, paragraph 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC these
products must not be identified by a CE-label.
Joachim Brien
Head of Technical Department
Ingelfingen-Criesbach, October 2014
37 / 40 673
673 38 / 40
39 / 40 673

Änderungen vorbehalten · Subject to alteration · 08/2015 · 88251330
GEMÜ Gebr. Müller Apparatebau GmbH & Co. KG · Fritz-Müller-Str. 6-8 · D-74653 IngelŰngen-Criesbach
Telefon +49(0)7940/123-0 · Telefax +49(0)7940/123-192 · info@gemue.de · www.gemu-group.com
11.9. Sample valve - PEC-15L - Parth

Alfa Laval Support Services Pvt. Ltd.
A) SAMPLING VALVE
SIZE 1/2" MODEL PEC15
Body :SS316L
HOUSING CAP SS316L
POPPET SS316L
CHECK NUT PLUG /CAP PLASTIC
SEAL PTFE EPDM/VITON
Seat test Pressure : 10 kg/cm2.
Ends : WELD END
Rating : PN 10
Leakage Class : VI
Temperature : 100 Deg Cel
Max Pressure : 10 BAR
Method Of Operation : MANUAL
MAKE PARTH
CERTIFICATION : EN10204 - 3.1. -- 2005
PARTH ENTERPRISES
“Parshva Nagari” Bldg No 1, Shop No 4 & 5 ,
,,Infront of Chandrarang Park ,Pimple Gurav, Pune 411027. Mobile : 9881236139
Office 020 20270493 Email : pramod@parth-valves.com (MFG of Food Grade hoses , Sampling valves, Gate Globe,
Check valves, Diaphragm operated pumps, Dairy valves & Fittings
Deltech make butterfly valve , +GF+ Georg Fischer PVDF/PP/PVC U & C Piping Systems)
VAT TIN 27680594184 V W.E.F DT 03/03/2007

CST TIN 27680594184 C W.E.F DT 03/03/2007
11.10. Electromagnetic Flowmeter - 50H – E+H


Instructions for Use and Spare Parts List
A & T Schneider Impeller Pump
Model Reform B 5000-FU, 400 V, 100 – 5000 l/h
Pump No.: ................................
Date of Sale: ............................
Andreas & Thomas Schneider

Maschinenbau GmbH
In den zehn Morgen 13
D-55559 Bretzenheim
Phone 0671/31561
Fax 0671/45352
Info@pumpen-schneider.de
www.pumpen-schneider.de
- subject to modification -
Imp5+10+15-FU/2006
1
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
1.1 Personnel Qualifications and Training
1.2 Dangers Resulting from Failure to Observe Safety Instructions
1.3 Safety-conscious Working
1.4 The manufacturer shall be discharged from all liability for either or all of the follow-
ing cases
2. Use for Intended Purpose Only
3. Design
3.1 Operational Characteristics
3.2 Impeller
3.3 Pump Shaft
3.4 Shaft Seal
4. Range of Application
5. Putting Pump into Operation

5.1 General Instructions
5.2 Suction Line
5.3 Discharge Line
5.4 Bypass Control System
6. Maintenance
6.1 Cleaning
6.2 Changing the Impeller and Seals
7. Technical Data
7.1 General Data
7.2 Spare Parts
7.3 Dimensions
7.4 Capacity Curve
8. Frequency Converter
8.1 General Information
8.2 Functions
8.3 Changing the Sense of Rotation
8.4 Functional Description
8.5 Additional Information
9. Safety Instructions
9.2 Special Notes
2
1.Introduction
This Operating Manual should be carefully read before using the pump for the first time.
Strict observance of the instructions contained therein helps to prevent accidents and en-
sure trouble-free operation, maintenance and repair procedures, thus avoiding detrimental
consequences.
This Operating Manual shall be kept in safe custody all during the service life of the pump.
The period of guarantee is 2 years from the date of purchase. Parts subject to wear are
excluded from the guarantee.
1.1 Personnel Qualifications and Training

Personnel charged with operation, maintenance, inspection and assembly must be in pos-
session of the appropriate qualifications for the tasks. The company operating the ma-
chine must define exact areas of responsibility, accountabilities and personnel supervision
schemes. Personnel lacking the required skills and knowledge must receive training and
instruction. If necessary, the operating company may commission the manufacturer / sup-
plier to conduct these training courses. Furthermore, the operating company must ensure
that the personnel fully understand the contents of the operating instructions.
1.2 Dangers Resulting from Failure to Observe Safety Instructions

Failure to comply with the safety instructions may lead to hazards to life and limb as well
as dangers for the environment and the machine. Non-observance of safety instructions
can invalidate the right of claim to damages.
The following are just some examples of possible dangers resulting from failure to
comply with the safety instructions:
• Failure of important machine/plant functions
• Failure of prescribed methods of service and maintenance
• Danger of life and limb due to electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
• Danger to the environment due to the leakage of hazardous substances
1.3 Safety-conscious Working

Always comply with the safety instructions listed in this document, the existing national
accident prevention regulations and any company-internal work, operating and safety
rules.
1.4 The manufacturer shall be discharged from all liability for either or all of the fol-
lowing cases:
Improper use of the pump
Use in violation of the special regulations in the country of use
Incorrect installation
Incorrect feeding
Undue modification or intervention
Use of spare parts other than genuine spare parts
Non-observance of the Operating Manual, or any parts thereof
Inexpert repair by any person except the manufacturer
Any use of the pump inconsistent with the intended purpose.
2. Use for Intended Purpose Only
The impeller pump shall be used for the only purpose of pumping liquids in the fields of
application defined by the manufacturer. The manufacturer’s prior written consent shall be
required for any use inconsistent with the intended purpose (manufacturer’s written ap-
proval).
3
3. Design
3.1 Operational Characteristics
A & T Schneider impeller pumps are self-priming rotary pumps which, at a pump flow sub-
jected to low-level pulsation, follows the displacement principle. The attached bypass line
enables precise adjustment of both the pumping capacity and the feed pressure.
As the impeller revolves in the pump casing, a partial vacuum is created at the suction
side of the pump by an increase in volume, drawing in fluid. This fluid is then transported
to the other side of the pump in the spaces between the vanes and the fixed casing. At the
discharge side, the available volume is decreased, and the resultant increase in pressure
forces the fluid into the outlet line. The change in volume is the result of a curvature of the
vanes in the casing.
The pump can pump liquids in both directions.
3.2 Impeller
The impeller is made of snappy rubber which is lubricated and cooled while being in con-
tact with the pumping medium. Under no circumstances must the impeller run dry,
because it may be destroyed under the effect of the frictional developed.
3.3 Pump Shaft

The pump and motor shafts consist of a single piece. The pump shaft is protected by a
replaceable protecting sleeve against the formation of run-in phenomena.
3.4 Shaft Seal

Depending on the model, the shaft seal is a radial packing ring or a floating ring seal. The
seal type can be adjusted to each specific pumping medium.
4. Range of Application
Pumping Medium
Only those liquids must be pumped that have no aggressive effect upon the pump parts
and components. In the case of doubt, contact the manufacturer of the pump.
Viscosity
The pump can be used for liquids in the viscosity range between 1.0 and 600 mPas, at a
rotational speed of 1400 l/min.
Solids Content
The pumping medium may contain low quantities of solids, free from abrasives, up to a
maximum particle size of 3 mm. In such a case, the pump will be subject to elevated wear.
The manufacturer’s prior approval is required for any such use.
Viscid Products
The pump is not suited for pumping viscid products, such as pastes, glue, honey etc. If the
pump is equipped with a slowly running motor the viscosity upper limit is 1000 mPas
(manufacturer’s approval).
Density
4
The density of the pumping medium must not be in excess of 1.2 kg/dm³.
Temperature
The temperature of the pumping medium must be in the range between 5 °C and 60 °C.
Stainless-Steel Pump Casing (1.4301 / 1.4308)

Being highly resistant to corrosion and wear, the stainless-steel pump casing is best suited
for use in the food-processing industries and for certain aggressive liquids.
Perishable Foodstuff
We do not recommend the use of the pump for perishable goods, such as milk, unless the
pump were frequently disassembled and all of its parts and components carefully steril-
ised in an appropriate fluid. The manufacturer’s approval is required.
Medico-Pharmaceutical Field
The manufacturer’s approval is required, before the pump is used in the medico-
pharmaceutical field of application.
CAUTION !
Danger ! ! ! !
» Do not use the pump in rooms where there is the risk of fire and explosion,
especially not if liquids are pumped which require the use of an explosion-
proof motor.
» The pump must not be used for pumping gasoline, fuel, acetone, solvents,
alcohol, or any other highly explosive and inflammable substances.
» The pump is not of the submergible type.
5. Putting Pump into Operation
5.1 General Instructions

Impeller pumps, being highly sensitive to dry running, must not be allowed to run dry dur-
ing the suction cycle for more than 30 seconds.
The pump shall be installed in a perfectly horizontal position, and connected to the suction
and discharge lines without restraint. In case the pump were fit into a rigidly mounted pipe-
line system, up- and downstream shutoff devices should be provided enabling the pump to
be dismounted, e.g. in the case of defect or failure, without having all fluid discharged
from the pipeline. The pump must not be put into operation while the valves mounted on
the suction and discharge lines are shut.
All electric connecting work must be executed by a qualified electrician.
Prior to the first start-up, or following a prolonged shutdown, the pump casing shall be
filled up with the pumping medium, in order to provide sufficient lubrication for the impeller.
5
5.2 Suction Line
The suction line should be as short and as direct as possible, and the joints be absolutely
airtight, in order to avoid the loss of prime. If possible, the cross section of the suction line
should be slightly larger than the inlet opening, in no case smaller.
If conditions are optimal, the pump may generate a suction head of up to 4 to 5 metres.
5.3 Discharge Line

The discharge line should be as short and as direct as possible, with its cross section be-
ing the same as that of the pipe socket.
It should be taken into account that the presence of elbows, valves, filters, flow meters,
and the like, will result in a loss of the pumping capacity and pumping head.
The pump must not be operated while the valves are shut.
5.4 Bypass Control System

The bypass control system remains closed (giving the control valve mounted on the pump
casing a right turn) during normal suction and delivery. If different pumping capacities or
delivery pressures are required, e.g. for filter feeding or filling purposes, these can be ad-
justed - while pumping - by turning the control valve to the left.
It should not be forgotten, however, that the pump is deprived of its priming capacity while
the bypass is open. Furthermore, if the pump is turned off while the bypass is still open,
the pumping medium will flow back through the pump.
CAUTION !
6. Maintenance
»Disconnect mains plug and wear protective gloves before doing any maintenance
or repair job«
6.1 Cleaning
a. In the case of less perishable foodstuff (e.g. wine, vinegar), cleaning should be
effected by pumping a suitable disinfecting solution first, then clean water.
b. In the case of perishable foodstuff (e.g. milk), disassemble the pump casing and
clean all parts and components in a suitable disinfecting solution.
c. In the case of acids, toxic and harmful substances, cleaning is left to the user’s
discretion who shall decide which is the best cleaning method, since it is the user who
is alone familiar with the properties of the pumping medium.
At any rate, it is indispensable that the legal regulations pertaining to a specific use, as
well as the compatibility of the pump with a specific cleaning agent, be observed.
Do not use a water jet to clean switches and the electric motor (protection system IP 55).
The manufacturer/supplier does not assume any liability for damage to the motor caused
by liquid penetrating into the motor.
The pump must not be cleaned by having steam passed through it!
CAUTION !
6
6.2 Changing the Impeller and Seals
1. Unscrew screw of tension bracket (no. 13) and push tension bracket down.
2. Remove front cover (no. 1) with its O-ring (no. 2) and pull pump casing (no. 3), with its
rear cover (no. 5), to remove it from the shaft. The impeller can be pulled off the shaft
by substituting a longer screw for the shorter one visible at the front end of the impel-
ler. The longer screw will press against the shaft thus driving the impeller forward, and
off its seat on the shaft.
3. Push impeller (no. 4) out of the casing and screw in a new impeller by applying
enough pressure while screwing it on.
4. Pull the shaft seal (no. 11) out of the drill hole (be careful not to damage the sealing
contact surface) and insert a new seal (with fitting sleeve) into the drill hole.
5. A run-in shaft protection sleeve (no. 18) should be pulled off the shaft and replaced
6. Apply new O-rings onto the casing and re-assemble the pump in an inverse order.
7. Make sure all seals are correctly put in place, as were the original seals, without being
squeezed.
8. Re-tighten (without applying too much of a torque) the tension bracket screw and
check the pump for tightness on the occasion of the first pumping cycle following its
disassembly and re-assembly.
9. Do not use any grease or oil for the re-assembly of the pump.
10. It is strongly recommended to have the pump repaired in a specialised repair shop, in
order to ensure a smooth and trouble-free operation of the pump at all times. In the
case of doubt, do not hesitate to ask your specialist dealer.
7. Technical Data
7.1 General Data

B 5000-FU, 400 V B 10000-FU, 400 V B 15000-FU, 400 V
1. Pump casing AISI 1.4301 / 1.4308 AISI 1.4301 / 1.4308 AISI 1.4301 / 1.4308
2. Pump shaft AISI 1.4301 AISI 1.4301 AISI 1.4301
3. Impeller
4. Shaft seal Rotary shaft seal rotary shaft seal rotary shaft seal
5. Control system Bypass control valve bypass control valve bypass control valve
6. Protection system IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
7. Protection switch Reversing switch Reversing switch Reversing switch
8. Suction head max. 4 - 5 meter max. 4 - 5 meter max. 4-5 meter
9. Manometric head max. 4 bar max. 4 bar max. 4 bar
10. Pumping capacity max. 5 m³/h max. 10 m³/h max. 15 m³/h
11. Motor 400 V; 7-50 Hz; 0,75 kW- 400 V; 7-50 Hz; 1,5 kW – 400 V; 7-50 Hz; 2,2 kW
12. Speed 190 – 1400 revs/min 190 - 1400 revs/min 190 – 1400 revs/min
13. Connections Variable Variable variable
7.2 Spare Parts
7
7.2 Spare parts B 5000-FU, 400 V B 10000-FU, 400 V B 15000-FU, 400 V
1. Front cover 5000-1 10000-1 10000-1
2. O-ring 70x3 99x3 99x3
3. Casing 5000 VA 10000 VA 15000 VA
4. Impeller 5000B 10000-B 15000-B
5. Rear cover 5000-8 10000-8 15000-8
6. Control valve 5000-15 10000-15 10000-15
7. 0-Ring 5000-16 – 19x3 10000-16 – 24x3 10000-16 – 24x3
8. Locking ring 5000-17 10000-17 10000-17
9. Adjusting handle 5000-21 10000-22 15000-22
10. Spring pin 4x40 4x40 4x40
11. Shaft seal 25x35 30x45 30x45
12.Intermediate flange 5000-20 10000-20 10000-20
13. Tension bracket 5000-22 10000-23 15000-23
14. Moving handle Moving handle Moving handle moving handle
15. Wheels RAD 125x15 RAD 140x15 RAD 140x15
17. Frequency converter
18. Protection sleeve 10000-21 15000-21
19. Electric motor
20. Control unit = switch/potentiometer = switch/potentiometer =switch/potentiometer
7.3 Dimensions
7.3 Dimensions B 5000-FU, 400 V B 10000-FU, 400 V B 15000-FU, 400 V
A = about 670 mm 770 mm 820 mm
B = about 410 mm 510 mm 520 mm
C = about 620 mm 640 mm 610 mm
D = about 280 mm 330 mm 330 mm
Weight – about 21 kg 35 kg 39 kg
8
Determined values ± 5 %, based on water + 20° C with short pipelines DN40, open passage. The values
represent only an application case and can differ depending on type of pipeline. The maximum flow rate is
variable depending on the rubber hardness of the rotor. In case you need an exact operating point with a
new rotor please inform us before delivery.
-7-
8. Frequency Converter
The frequency converter is integrated into the motor with which it forms a complete unit.
The internal programming of the motor has been designed in such a way as to enable the
operation of the pumps within a prescribed range. The frequency converter is equipped
with a switching/potentiometer unit enabling all necessary controls.
8.2 Functions
9
FUNCTIONS: on/off – forward/reverse – high/low speed (using a reversing switch)
-- by means of potentiometer = rotary switch -+
8.3 Changing the Sense of Rotation
In the case of a phase shift with a view to changing the sense of rotation, this is achieved
by actuating the toggle switch e.g. from position 1 to position 2. It is the user’s responsibil-
ity to check which position corresponds to which sense of rotation.
8.4 Functional Description
Please refer to the original Operating Manual of Messrs. Lenze.
8.5 Additional Information
This information is accompanied and complemented by the original Summary Commis-

sioning Manual issued by Messrs. Lenze (being the manufacturer/suppliers of the fre-
quency-controlled motor).
The notes contained therein are identified by the relevant symbols.
The attached Operating Manual of Messrs Lenze shall have full validity and shall in all
cases be observed.
We shall not be liable for the consequences of any failure to comply with the prescribed
procedures of manipulation or handling.
CAUTION !
9. Safety Instructions
The operating personnel must be advised of the potential dangers inherent to the pump.
Be circumspect, careful, and attentive, while working, in order to avoid accidents.
» Do not wear loose-fitting clothes that might be caught in by the moving parts of the
pump. Make sure all rotating parts of the pump be sufficiently protected or covered.
» After working with acids or carcinogenic substances, the pump and the entire plant
shall be flushed and the rinsing liquid be disposed of in accordance with the legal regu-
10
lations.
The legal regulations shall also be observed while handling toxic substances.
» Before turning the pump on, make sure it is connected to ground.

Make also sure that the electric connection conforms to the provisions of the country in
which the pump is used.
» In the case of soiling, or if the pump stops for an unknown reason, or in the case of
any other irregularity during operation, make sure the mains plug is disconnected be-
fore doing any repair work, inspection, or intervention.
» The pump shall be subjected to maintenance at regular intervals, and damaged or

worn-out parts be replaced immediately.
» The pump shall be put into operation, handled, maintained, or repaired, by a previously
trained or instructed personnel only.
» In order to ensure a trouble-free operation of the pump at all times, and to maintain the
manufacturer’s guarantee, only genuine spare parts should be used.
Delivery:
Check, upon receipt of the pump, whether the data provided on the nameplate conform to
those specified in your order. Check the consignment for completeness or damage in
transit and immediately report any complaints to the carrier.
CAUTION !
9.2 Special Notes
» Do not touch switches or connecting cables while your hands are wet (danger of elec-
trocution).
» Do not put any parts of your body or any objects into the suction or discharge socket
while the pump is running (danger of injury).
» The pump must not run dry.
» If the pump accidentally happens to run dry, the following must be observed:
- Turn pump off and let it cool down.
- Do not touch the pump casing or motor (danger of burns).
- Do not use the pump any more, but have it repaired instead, in order to avoid soil-
ing and to prevent the pumping medium from being affected by detrimental altera-
tions of taste.
» Have leaky or damaged pumps repaired immediately, in order to avoid further dam-
age.
» The outlet opening at the bottom of the intermediate flange (no. 12) shall at all times
remain unobstructed.
» Beware of unsecured delivery hoses; these may get loose at the pumping stage and
thrash about in a whip-like movement (danger of injury).
11
!!! This model of the device has no homologation for export to the U.S.A. or Canada. In
the case of non-compliance, Andreas & Thomas Schneider Maschinenbau GmbH does
not assume any liability - and the seller shall be liable - under the product liability regula-
tions!!!
We, Andreas & Thomas Schneider Maschinenbau GmbH, declare under our own respon-
sibility that the pumps Reform B 5000-FU + B 10000-FU + B 15000-FU, to which the pre-
sent Declaration refers, conforms, in its conception and design, as well as in the embodi-
ment put on the market by us, to the fundamental safety and health protection require-
ments under the EC Machine Directive 89/392. This Declaration shall no longer be effec-
tive, if the pump were subjected to alteration without our prior approval.
Managing Directors: Andreas & Thomas Schneider
12

I N S T RU C T I O N M A N UA L
FIP - series
flexi b le i m pe lle r pu m ps
A . 010 0 . 3 01 – IM - FIP / 0 8 . 0 0 E N ( 0 2 / 2 014 ) O RI G I N A L I N S T RU C T I O N S / T R A N SL AT I O N O F O RI G I N A L I N S T RU C T I O N S
RE V ISI O N : 0 8 . 0 0 RE A D A N D U N D ERS TA N D T H IS M A N UA L PRI O R TO O PER AT I N G O R SER V I C I N G T H IS PR O D U C T.

EC-Declaration of conformity
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex IIA
Manufacturer
SPX Flow Technology Sweden AB
P.O. Box 1436
SE-701 14 Örebro, Sweden
We hereby guarantee that
FIP-range – Flexible Impeller Pumps
are in conformity with the relevant provisions of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex I.
Manufacturer Declaration
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex IIB
The product must not be put into service until the machinery into which it is to be incorporated has been
declared to conform with the provisions of the Directive.
Örebro, Sweden, 1 March 2011
Michael Strålman
Managing Director
Declaration of Compliance for food contact materials

We hereby certify the compliance of the materials coming into contact with food during the intended use
with the general requirements as of the date of this Declaration of
Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004 of 27 October 2004 on materials and articles intended to come
into contact with food and repealing Directives 80/590/EEC and 89/109/EEC.
This Declaration applies to the following product(s):
FIP, Flexible Impeller Pump SH-execution and spare parts for FIP SH-execution
FIP 20 SH
FIP 25 SH
FIP 40 SH
FIP 50 SH *)
FIP 65 SH
*) impeller is only FDA milk approved
This Declaration shall be valid for a period of three years from the date written below.
This Declaration does not modify any contractual arrangements, in particular regarding warranty and
liability.
Örebro, Sweden, 26 February 2014
Michael Strålman
Managing Director
Contents
1.0 Introduction....................................................................................5
1.1 General....................................................................................................5
1.2 Reception, handling and storage......................................................5
1.2.1 Reception....................................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 Handling.......................................................................................................... 5
1.2.3 Storage........................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Safety.......................................................................................................6
1.3.1 General........................................................................................................... 6
1.3.2 Pump units..................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2.1 Pump unit handling.................................................................................................. 7
1.3.2.2 Installation.................................................................................................................. 7
1.3.2.3 Before commissioning the pump unit.................................................................. 8
1.3.2.4 Disassembly/assembly of the coupling guard................................................... 8
1.3.2.5 Name plate – CE Declaration of Conformity..................................................... 8
1.4 Function and operating principle.......................................................9

1.4.1 Operating principle....................................................................................... 9
1.5 Model Specifications.........................................................................10
1.6 Impeller data....................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 Pump sizes FIP20S – FIP65S................................................................12
1.6.2 Pump sizes FIP25B and FIP40B............................................................12
1.6.3 Capacity range FIP20S – FIP65S.........................................................13
1.6.4 Capacity range FIP25B............................................................................14
1.6.4.1 Neoprene standard pressure impellers............................................................ 14
1.6.4.2 Neoprene high pressure impellers ................................................................... 14
1.6.5 Capacity range FIP40B............................................................................15
1.6.5.1 Neoprene standard pressure impellers .......................................................... 15
1.6.5.2 Neoprene high pressure impellers ................................................................... 15
2.0 Technical information................................................................. 16

2.1 Dry running.......................................................................................... 16
2.2 Pump body.......................................................................................... 16
2.2.1 Body executions..........................................................................................16
2.3 Shaft material...................................................................................... 16
2.4 Shaft seals........................................................................................... 17
2.4.1 Mechanical seals.........................................................................................17
2.4.2 Lip seals........................................................................................................17
2.5 Impellers............................................................................................... 17
2.5.1 Liquid temperature and impeller life.......................................................18
2.6 Storage................................................................................................. 18
2.7 Sound level.......................................................................................... 18
2.8 Pressure............................................................................................... 19
2.8.1 Max operating pressure.............................................................................19
2.9 Tightening torque for cap screws.................................................. 19
2.10 Motor size............................................................................................ 19
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 3

3.0 Installation, operation and maintenance............................... 20
3.1 Pumping of foodstuffs....................................................................... 20
3.2 Pumping of corrosive liquids........................................................... 20
3.3 Installation and piping....................................................................... 20
3.4 Starting up........................................................................................... 21
3.5 Frequent check points...................................................................... 21
4.0 Disassembly and assembly..................................................... 22

4.1 Assembly of head kit (pump without motor) to IEC-motor...... 22
4.2 Disassembly of impeller and shaft seal......................................... 22
4.3 Assembly of shaft seal and impeller ............................................. 22
4.4 Disassembly of pedestal.................................................................. 23
4.5 Assembly of pedestal........................................................................ 23
4.6 Waste handling/material recycling................................................. 23
5.0 Sectional drawings and Spare part lists............................... 24

5.1 Drawing – Bronze pumps (B) – Flange mounted ..................... 24
5.2 Spare part list – FIP25B and FIP40B – Flange mounted....... 25
5.3 Drawing – Bronze pumps (B) – Pedestal mounted.................. 26
5.4 Spare part list – FIP25B and FIP40B –
Pedestal mounted.............................................................................. 27
5.5 Drawing – Stainless steel pumps (S) – Flange mounted........ 28
5.6 Spare part list – FIP20S, FIP25S, FIP40S, FIP50S –
Flange mounted................................................................................. 29
5.7 Drawing – Stainless steel pumps (S) – Pedestal mounted..... 30
5.8 Spare part list – FIP20S, FIP25S, FIP40S, FIP50S, FIP65S –
Pedestal mounted ............................................................................. 31
6.0 Dimensions and weights.......................................................... 32

6.1 FIP25B and FIP40B – Flange and Pedestal mounted............. 32
6.2 FIP20S-FIP65S – Flange mounted.............................................. 33
6.3 FIP20S-FIP65S – Pedestal mounted.......................................... 34
7.0 Trouble shooting chart.............................................................. 35

7.1 Pump..................................................................................................... 35
7.2 Impeller................................................................................................. 37
4 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

1.0 Introduction
1.1 General
This instruction manual contains necessary information on the impeller pumps and must
be read carefully before installation, service and maintenance. The manual must be kept
easily accessible to the operator.
Important!
The pump must not be used for other purposes than recommended and quoted for without
consulting your supplier.
Liquids not suitable for the pump can cause damages to the pump unit and imply risk of
personal injury.
1.2 Reception, handling and storage

1.2.1 Reception
Remove all packing materials immediately after reception. Check the consignment for
damage immediately on arrival and make sure that the name plate/type designation is in
accordance with the packing slip and your order.
In case of damage and/or missing parts, a report should be drawn up and presented to the
carrier at once. Notify your supplier.
All pumps have the article/serial number on the front cover or on a name plate. This
number should be stated in all correspondence with your supplier.
The manufacturing code, e.g. 9707, states the year and week of production.
Nameplate Bronze and Industrial pumps Nameplate Hygienic pumps
SPX Flow Technology Sweden AB SPX Flow Technology Sweden AB

Örebro, Sweden, Tel. +46 (0)19 21 83 00 Örebro, Sweden, Tel. +46 (0)19 21 83 00
www.spx.com www.johnson-pump.com www.spx.com www.johnson-pump.com
Type: FIP20SI-BSP 62 M01 P80 Type: FIP20SH-PLN 02 M01 P80

No.: 10-24543-01 9707 Serial No.: 2011-12345-1
Loosen cover to drain
Loosen cover to drain
Article number Manufacturing code Manufacturing year Manufacturing number
1.2.2 Handling
Check the weight of the pump unit. All parts weighing more than 20 kg must be lifted
using lifting slings and suitable lifting devices, e.g. overhead crane or fork lift. See section
6.0 for the weights.
Always use two lifting slings. Make sure that they Never lift the pump unit with only one fastening point.
are secured in such a way as to prevent them from Incorrect lifts can cause personal injury and/or damage
slipping and that the pump unit is hanging straight. to the product.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 5

1.2.3 Storage
A pump which is not installed immediately should be stored in a cool and dark room and
the impeller should be removed. The rubber material of the impeller ages and should be
treated as perishables. The storage should not exceed 2 years. If the pump has been
out of operation for a longer period of time, the impeller should be greased (for foodstuff
applications use appropriate food grease) before use to obtain optimal suction ability.
1.3 Safety
1.3.1 General
Important!
The pump must not be used for other purposes than recommended and quoted for
without consulting your supplier.
A pump must always be installed and used in accordance with existing national and local
sanitary and safety regulations and laws.
• Always wear suitable safety clothing when handling the pump.
• Anchor the pump properly before start-up to avoid personal injury and/or damage to
the pump unit.
• Install shut-off valves on both sides of the pump to be able to shut off the in- and outlet
before service and maintenance. Check to see that the pump can be drained without
injuring anyone and without damaging the environment or nearby equipment.
• Make sure that all movable parts are properly covered to avoid personal injury.
• All electrical installation work must be carried out by authorized personnel in
accordance with EN60204-1. Install a lockable circuit breaker to avoid inadvertent
starting. Protect the motor and other electrical equipment from overloads with suitable
equipment. The electric motors must be supplied with ample cooling air.
In environments where there is risk of explosion, motors classified as explosion-safe
must be used, along with special safety devices. Check with the governmental agency
responsible for such precautions. Improper installation can cause fatal injuries.
• Dust, liquids and gases that can cause overheating, short circuits, corrosion damage
and fire must be kept away from motors and other exposed equipment. If the pump
handles liquids hazardous for person or environment, some sort of container must be
installed into which leakage can be led.
• If the surface temperature of the system or parts of the system exceeds 60°C, these
areas must be marked with warning text reading ”Hot surface” to avoid burns.
• The pump unit must not be exposed to rapid temperature changes of the liquid without
prior pre-heating/pre-cooling. Absolutely forbidden to flush a hot pump with cold water.
Big temperature changes can cause crack formation or explosion, which in turn can
entail severe personal injuries.
• The pump must not operate above stated performance.
• Before intervening in the pump/system, the power must be shut off and the starting
device be locked. When intervening in the pump unit, follow the instructions for
disassembly/assembly, section 4.0. If the instructions are not followed, the pump or
parts of the pump can be damaged. It will also invalidate the warranty.
• Impeller pumps must not be run dry. Dry running will create friction heat which will
damage the impeller and other parts sensitive to extreme heat. If there is a risk of dry
running, install a suitable dry running protection.
• If the pump does not function satisfactorily, contact your supplier.
6 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

1.3.2 Pump units
1.3.2.1 Pump unit handling
Use an overhead crane, forklift or other suitable lifting device
Secure lifting slings around the front part of the Warning

pump and the back part of the motor. Make sure Never lift the pump unit with only one fastening
that the load is balanced before attempting the point. Incorrect lifts can result in personal injury
lift. NB! Always use two lifting slings. and/or damage to the unit.
1.3.2.2 Installation
All pump units should be equipped with a locking safety switch to prevent accidental start
during installation, maintenance or other work on the unit.
Warning
The safety switch must be turned to off and locked before any work is carried out on the
pump unit. Accidental start can cause serious personal injury.
The pump unit must be mounted on a level surface and either be bolted to the foundation
or be fitted with rubber-clad feet.
The pipe connections to the pump must be stress-free mounted, securely fastened to the
pump and well supported. Incorrectly fitted pipe can damage the pump and the system.
Warning
Electric motors must be installed by authorized personnel in accordance with EN60204-1.
Faulty electrical installation can cause the pump unit and system to be electrified, which
can lead to fatal injuries.
Electric motors must be supplied with adequate cooling ventilation. Electric motors must
not be enclosed in airtight cabinets, hoods etc.
Dust, liquids and gases which can cause overheating and fire must be diverted away from
the motor.
Warning
Pump units to be installed in potentially explosive environments must be fitted with an
Ex-class (explosion safe) motor. Sparks caused by static electricity can give shocks and
ignite explosions. Make sure that the pump and system are properly grounded. Check
with the proper authorities for the existing regulations. A faulty installation can lead to fatal
injuries.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 7

1.3.2.3 Before commissioning the pump unit
Read the pump’s operating and safety manual. Make sure that the installation has been
correctly carried out according to the relevant pump’s manual.
Check the alignment of the pump and motor shafts. The alignment may have been altered
during transport, lifting and mounting of the pump unit. For safe disassembly of the
coupling guard see below: Disassembly/assembly of the coupling guard.
Warning
The pump unit must not be used with other liquids than those for which it was
recommended and sold. If there are any uncertainties contact your sales representative.
Liquids, for which the pump is not appropriate, can damage the pump and other parts of
the unit as well as cause personal injury.
1.3.2.4 Disassembly/assembly of the coupling guard
The coupling guard is a fixed guard to protect the users and operator from fastening and
injuring themselves on the rotating shaft/shaft coupling. The pump unit is supplied with
factory mounted guards with certified maximum gaps in accordance with standard
DIN EN ISO 13857.
Warning
The coupling guard must never be removed during operation. The locking safety switch
must be turned to off and locked. The coupling guard must always be reassembled after it
has been removed. Make sure to also reassemble any extra protective covers. There is a
risk of personal injury if the coupling guard is incorrectly mounted.
a) Turn off and lock the power switch.
b) Disassemble the coupling guard.
c) Complete the work.
d) Reassemble the coupling guard and any other protective covers. Make sure that the
screws are properly tightened.
1.3.2.5 Name plate – CE Declaration of Conformity
Always quote the article/serial number on the name plate together with questions
concerning the pump unit, installation, maintenance etc.
When changing the operating conditions of the
pump please contact your supplier to ensure a safe
and reliable working pump. SPX Flow Technology Sweden AB
Örebro, Sweden, Tel. +46 (0)19 21 83 00
www.spx.com www.johnson-pump.com
This also applies to modifications on a larger scale,
Type: FIP25SI-BSP 72 M01 F80
such as a change of motor or pump on an existing No.: 11-13212-01/3F
pump unit. Loosen cover to drain
8 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

1.4 Function and operating principle
The impeller pump is designed for circulation, transport, emptying, filtration and dosing of
liquids.
The pumps are self-priming. The suction capacity is related to speed, viscosity and pipe
dimension. An untight suction pipe will reduce the suction capacity considerably.
The impeller pump can handle both high and low viscous liquids as well as liquids
containing solid particles, air and gases.
1.4.1 Operating principle

Due to the eccentric interior cross-section
of the pump body, a partial vacuum is
created as the volume increases between
the flexible impeller wings at the inlet port.
The resulting suction draws the liquid into
the pump.
The rotating impeller carries the liquid from

the inlet towards the outlet port. During this
part of the cycle, the volume between the
wings remains virtually constant. The
distance between the wings allows fairly
large solids to pass through the pump
without any harm being done to the liquid.
The liquid is discharged from the pump in

a continuous, uniform flow when the wings
bend, thus decreasing the volume between
them, as they come into contact with the
flattened part of the eccentric interior walls
of the body.
Liquids can be pumped in the opposite direction by reversing the rotation of the pump.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 9

1.5 Model Specifications
Example: FIP 20 SH – DIN 4 2 M01 P80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Family name
FIP = Flexible Impeller Pump
}
2. Pump size
20 =
25 =
40 = Average inlet and outlet port diameter, mm
50 =
65 =
See dimensional drawings, section 6.0
3. Material of pump body and cover

SH = Stainless steel, hygienic version
SI = Stainless steel, industrial version
B = Bronze
4. Port/connection
FIP 20/25SI, FIP 25/40B
BSP = BSP thread/hose combination
NPTF = NPTF thread/hose combination
FIP 40/50/65SI
BSP = BSP thread
NPTF = NPTF thread
FIP 20/25/40/50/65SH
DIN = DIN 11851
SMS = SMS 1145
PLN = Plain without threaded ports
CLP = Clamp according to SMS 3017 (TriClamp)
5. Impeller code
0 = Neoprene industrial version – standard pressure
3 = EPDM, FDA, food grade – high pressure
4 = Neoprene, FDA, milk grade
6 = Neoprene, industrial version – high/intermediate pressure
7 = EPDM, FDA, food grade – standard pressure
9 = Nitrile, splined drive – standard pressure
10 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

Example: FIP 20 SH – DIN 4 2 M01 P80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6. Shaft
Bronze
0 = Splines – Stainless steel
Stainless steel pumps

0 = Splines – Stainless steel
2 = Double flat – Stainless steel
7. Shaft seals
M = Single mechanical seal
L = Lip seal
Material of single mechanical seals

01 = Carbon/ceramic/nitrile
03 = Silicon carbide/silicon carbide/FPM (DIN/ISO) / FKM (ASTM)
(on request only)
06 = FDA Approved mechanical seal
8. Shaft end
P = Pedestal
F = Flange for IEC motor
80 = FIP 20/25 – Pedestal; shaft height, mm
Flange; IEC motor size
90 = FIP 40 – Pedestal; shaft height, mm
100 = FIP 50 – Pedestal; shaft height, mm
112 = FIP 65 – Pedestal only; shaft height, mm
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 11

1.6 Impeller data
1.6.1 Pump sizes FIP20S – FIP65S
Max
Pump Impeller Impeller Min. start Min. reverse Max. head
Hub type Impeller material suction
size No code torque (Nm) torque (Nm) (bar)
lift dry (m)
FIP20S 832S-7 Double flat EPDM, FDA, Food 7 2.2 5.2 2.5 4.5
FIP20S 833S-4 Double flat Neoprene, FDA, Milk 4 2.2 5.2 2.5 4.5
FIP20S 833S-7 Double flat EPDM, FDA, Food HP 3 3.0 6.0 4.0 4.5
FIP25S 837S Double flat Neoprene HP 6 7.2 12.0 4 5.0
FIP25S 836S-7 Double flat EPDM, FDA, Food 7 4.6 8.3 2.5 5.0
FIP25S 1028S-9 Splined Nitrile 9 4.6 8.3 1.75 4.0
FIP40S 835S-7 Double flat EPDM, FDA Food HP 3 19.0 32.5 4 5.0
FIP40S 838S Double flat Neoprene Std 0 11.0 25.0 2.5 5.0
FIP40S 1029S-9 Splined Nitrile 9 8.8 25.0 1.75 4.0
FIP50S 809S Double flat Neoprene IP 6 22.2 42.0 1.8 5.0
FIP65S 840S-7 Double flat EPDM, FDA, Food HP 7 30.3 65.0 2.5 4.0
Hub material in all impellers = SS

Std = Standard pressure
IP = Intermediate pressure
HP = High pressure
1.6.2 Pump sizes FIP25B and FIP40B

Min.
Min. start
Pump Impeller Hub Hub Impeller Impeller reverse Max. head Max suction
torque
size No material type material code torque (bar) lift dry (m)
(Nm)
(Nm)
FIP25B 1028B Bronze Splined Neoprene Std 0 4.6 8.3 2.5 5.0
FIP25B 1028S SS Splined Neoprene Std 0 4.6 8.3 2.5 5.0
FIP25B 816B Bronze Splined Neoprene HP 6 7.2 12.0 4.0 5.0
FIP25B 816S SS Splined Neoprene HP 6 7.2 12.0 4.0 5.0
FIP25B 1028B-9 Bronze Splined Nitrile 9 4.6 8.3 1.75 4.0
FIP25B 1028S-9 SS Splined Nitrile 9 4.6 8.3 1.75 4.0
FIP40B 819B Bronze Splined Neoprene Std 0 11.0 25.0 2.5 5.0
FIP40B 1029S SS Splined Neoprene Std 0 8.8 25.0 2.5 5.0
FIP40B 818B Bronze Splined Neoprene HP 6 19.0 32.5 4.0 5.0
FIP40B 819B-9 Bronze Splined Nitrile 9 11.0 25.0 1.75 4.0
FIP40B 1029S-9 SS Splined Nitrile 9 8.8 25.0 1.75 4.0
Std = Standard pressure

IP = Intermediate pressure
HP = High pressure
12 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

1.6.3 Capacity range FIP20S – FIP65S
Neoprene/EPDM high pressure impellers – Curves based on water at 20°C
Bar FIP-range at 1450 rpm

FIP20
4,0 FIP25 FIP40
3,5
3,0
2,5 FIP65
2,0
FIP50
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
l/min

4,0 FIP25
FIP40
3,5
3,0 FIP20
2,5 FIP65
2,0
FIP50
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
l/min

4,0 FIP25
FIP40
3,5
3,0
2,5 FIP20 FIP65
2,0
FIP50
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250
l/min
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 13

1.6.4 Capacity range FIP25B
1.6.4.1 Neoprene standard pressure impellers – Curves based on water at 20°C
Bar
2,000 rpm 2,500 rpm 2,800 rpm 3,000 rpm
2,5
1,400 rpm
900 rpm
2,0
700 rpm
500 rpm
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
l/min
1.6.4.2 Neoprene high pressure impellers – Curves based on water at 20°C
Bar
1,400 rpm 2,000 rpm
4,0
700 rpm 900 rpm

3,5
500 rpm
3,0
2,5
2,0
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
l/min
14 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

1.6.5 Capacity range FIP40B
1.6.5.1 Neoprene standard pressure impellers – Curves based on water at 20°C
Bar
1,400 rpm 2,000 rpm 2,500 rpm
2,5 900 rpm
700 rpm
500 rpm
2,0
250 rpm
1,5
100 rpm
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow(lit/min) l/min
1.6.5.2 Neoprene high pressure impellers – Curves based on water at 20°C
Bar 1,400 rpm 2,000 rpm 2,500 rpm

4,0
900 rpm
3,5 700 rpm
500 rpm
3,0
2,5
250 rpm
2,0
100 rpm
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
l/min
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 15

2.0 Technical information
Important!
The pump must not be used for other applications than recommended and quoted for
without consulting your supplier.
2.1 Dry running

Thanks to the self-priming ability of the pump it will only take a few seconds before the
pump starts to prime. The small amount of friction heat that is being created during these
few seconds will not damage the pump.
Bronze and stainless steel pumps can withstand a dry running period of 30 seconds
without damaging the impeller or the pump. Frequent dry running will however shorten the
service life of the impeller.
2.2 Pump body

2.2.1 Body executions
The FIP-range is available in 3 different
pump body executions:
• Hygienic stainless steel, AISI 316, Stainless steel
polished according to sanitary standards
• Stainless steel, AISI 316
• Bronze, dezincification resistant brass
Bronze
2.3 Shaft material

• Hygienic stainless steel and industrial
stainless steel pumps are supplied with
double flat drive, stainless steel AISI 329
shafts. The double flat drive is designed
to avoid growth of bacteria in pockets of
stagnant media, and is easy to clean.
Double flat drive – stainless shaft
• Bronze pumps are supplied with splined

drive stainless steel AISI 329 shafts. The
splined drive ensures that the drive torque
is distributed evenly over an increased area
between the impeller and the shaft.
Splined drive – stainless shaft
16 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

2.4 Shaft seals
2.4.1 Mechanical seals
Recommended for foodstuffs, solvents and
heavier chemicals. Only FDA mechanical seals
are approved for food applications. Delivered
as standard with seal surfaces in carbon vs
ceramic.
The mechanical seal for hygienic stainless
steel pumps are supplied with an extra O-ring
to seal off the area behind the stationary seal
part. This will allow easy cleaning with seal in
place, and eliminate liquid to remain behind the
seal. Only FDA O-rings are approved for food
applications.
2.4.2 Lip seals

Recommended for sticky and viscous liquids as
lip seals do not require as much lubrication as
mechanical seals.
2.5 Impellers
The impeller is a wearing part and the
performance of the pump will change with the
wear. Flow and pressure will be reduced with
the length of the duty.
Abrasive liquids will shorten the service life of
the impeller, and low speed is recommended.
With low speed, a constant flow will be Double flat
achieved during a longer period of time.
Following factors will effect the service life:
• Temperature, see next page
• The working pressure of the pump
• The speed of the pump
• Impeller material properties Splines
• Lubrication properties of the liquid being

pumped
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 17

2.5.1 Liquid temperature and impeller life
The service life indicated below is based on several tests with water at 20°C at continuous
duty.
Continuous duty will not effect the service life of the impeller, but in installations with
frequent change of rotation, the service life of the impellers will decrease.
Neoprene end EPDM
• Temperature range +3° to +65°C
• When operating in the lower and upper areas of the indicated temperature range,
performance will be reduced and the service life of the impeller will be shortened
Nitrile
• Temperature range -15° to +65°C
• When operating in the lower and upper areas of the indicated temperature range,
performance will be reduced and the service life of the impeller will be shortened
For higher temperatures please consult your supplier.
2.6 Storage
A pump which is not installed immediately should be stored in a cool and dark room, and
the impeller be removed. The rubber material of the impeller ages and should be treated as
perishables. The storage should not exceed 2 years. If the pump has been out of operation
for a longer period of time, the impeller should be greased (for foodstuff applications use
appropriate food grease) before use, to receive optimal suction ability.
2.7 Sound level

Noise declaration
Speed Head Sound pressure level Sound effect level
Pump size in accordance with
rpm bar dB (A) dB (A)
ISO 4871, dB (A)
FIP20 2 800 4.0 79.8 – –
FIP25 1 450 4.0 79.9 – –
FIP40 2 800 4.0 85.8 85.3 88.3/92.3
FIP50 1 450 1.8 86.3 85.8 88.8/92.8
FIP65 1 450 2.5 89.9 89.4 92.4/96.4
18 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

2.8 Pressure
The pump may not be operating above its performance - see max pressure, etc. see
section 1.6.
If the pump is operating above these data, there will be a risk of shaft breakage, leaking
shaft seal, impeller breakage or total wreckage of the pump.
Max recommended inlet pressure is 0.5 bar.
2.8.1 Max operating pressure

Flange mounted pumps
FIP20 - 4.0 bar at max 2 800 rpm
Pedestal mounted pumps
2.9 Tightening torque for cap screws

Tightening torque
Pump size (Nm)
Min Max
FIP20S 2.5 8
FIP25S, -B 2.5 8
FIP40S, -B 5 10
FIP50S 12 16
FIP65S 15 20
2.10 Motor size

Flange mounted pumps are to be mounted to IEC standard motors with foot and small
flange (B3/B14):
FIP20 = Motor size 80
Pedestal pumps shall be mounted on a suitable base plate and be connected to any
type of drive.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 19

3.0 Installation, operation and maintenance
Note! See also section 1.3 Safety.
3.1 Pumping of foodstuffs

When pumping foodstuffs and other liquids with hygienic demands, the pump and the
system must always be drained and cleaned after every use.
3.2 Pumping of corrosive liquids

Corrosive and sometimes even relatively neutral liquids will attack the material of pump
and pump system. Draining and flushing of the pump and the system are recommended
after every use or after each working day. This is also recommended for liquids that has a
tendency to solidify at a lower temperature than the pumping temperature.
3.3 Installation and piping

• Anchor the pump unit and check that it is properly aligned.
• Install the pump closest possible to the tank to be pumped from.
• Use at least the same diameter of the pipes from and
to the pump as for the diameter of the in- and outlet
ports of the pump.
• If hose is used on the suction side, it ought to be
reinforced.
• Make sure that all pipes to and from the pump are
clean from scraps, slag and other particles that would
damage the pump.
• See to it that all pipe lines are correctly aligned with
the pump connections and unloaded to prevent
loads from being applied to the pump.
• Install shut-off valves on both sides of the pump to be
able to shut off the in- and outlet before service and
maintenance. Check to see that the pump can be drained without injuring anyone and
without damaging the environment or nearby equipment.
• Protect the pump from excessive pressure by installing a suitable safety valve in the
system. Install meters/sensors in the in- and outlet of the system to monitor the system.
• Check the rotation of the pump.
• If there is a risk of dry running, install a suitable dry running protection. Contact your
supplier for advice.
• All electrical installation work must be carrried out by authorized personnel in
accordance with existing regulations.
Important!
Improper installation, operation, service and/or maintenance can cause serious personal
injury and/or material damage. It will also invalidate the warranty.
20 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

3.4 Starting up
• Make sure that all valves are open.
• Check that all safety devices are in place, e.g. coupling guards, lockable circuit
breakers and other safety guards keeping personnel from coming into contact with the
rotating parts of the unit.
• Check the rotation of the pump by turning the pump on briefly once. Clock-wise
rotation involves priming at the right port, when the pump is viewed from the motor end.
Reversed rotation gives reversed flow direction.
• Start the pump and check the liquid flow rate. If the pump does not function within the
dry running limitations (30 seconds for bronze and SS pumps), turn off the pump and
follow the instructions in the trouble shooting chart, section 7.0.
• Check the pressure, temperature and flow and make sure that the pump is operating
within the limits.
• Before intervening in the pump/system, the power must be shut off and the starting
device be locked.
• If the pump has not been in operation for a longer period of time, grease the impeller
before start. For foodstuff applications use appropriate food grease.
• If the pump does not function satisfactorily, contact your supplier for further advice.
• When returning a pump for repair, investigation or other reason, it must be cleaned and
wrapped up in a proper way. Documention stating pumped liquid, operating conditions,
your own opinion of fault/failure reason and your contact person must be included in the
pump package. Also contact the consignee before returning the pump.
3.5 Frequent check points

• Check regularly that noise level, vibrations and bearing temperature are normal.
• Check that there is no leakage.
• Check pressure and flow. Change impeller if performance is dropping.
• Check shaft seal and other wearing parts and replace when needed.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 21

4.0 Disassembly and assembly
4.1 Assembly of head kit (pump without motor) to IEC-motor
See drawing sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1) Clean the motor shaft and make sure that the surface does not have any cuts or marks.
2) Put the pump and motor shaft together by using a plastic hammer or equivalent. Make sure
not to damge the pump shaft.
3) Clean the surface area of the rotating seal part and assemble to the pump shaft.
4) Bolt the flange to the motor.
5) Clean the surface area of the stationary seal part, which is assembled in the pump body.
6) Slide the complete pump head kit onto the flange, taking care not to damage the seals.
Twist the pump back and forth to get the shaft connected correctly in the impeller. In
case of necessity, pull out the impeller and assemble the pump body separately.
7) Tighten the cap screws according to section 2.9.
4.2 Disassembly of impeller and shaft seal

See drawing sections 5.1, 5.3, 5.5 and 5.7.
1) If check valves are installed, close the valves on both sides of the pump and drain the
pump.
2) Remove the front cover (2) and gasket.
3) Remove the impeller (3) from the pump
body (4) by using suitable pliers or two
levers. Take care not to damage the
pump body.
4) Separate the pump body from the
pedestal/flange (6). Check for wear
inside the pump body and replace
wearing parts if necessary (bronze
pumps only).
5) Press out the seal seat from the pump body. Remove the seal assembly from the shaft.
6) Inspect and clean all parts which will be reused.
4.3 Assembly of shaft seal and impeller

See drawing sections 5.1, 5.3, 5.5 and 5.7.
1) Slide the rotating seal part onto the shaft with a twisting movement, and press the
stationary seal part into the pump body. Lubrication with soap solution (for foodstuff
applications use appropriate food grease) will ease the assembly.
2) Bronze pumps: Change wear plate (22) and cam (21) if worn. Before assembling, apply
sealing compound onto cam, e.g. Permatex Form-a-gasket No. 3, and cam screw, e.g.
Permatex Form-a-gasket No. 2.
22 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

3) Assemble the pump body to the pedestal/
flange, taking care not to damage the
seal.
4) Lubricate the impeller with grease or
vaseline. For foodstuff applications use
appropriate food grease.
Push the impeller into the pump

body with a twisting movement in the
operating direction, centralizing the
impeller hub.
5) Assemble the front cover gasket and the front cover
(see section 2.9 Tightening torque for cap screws).
4.4 Disassembly of pedestal

1) Remove the pump with its components following the instructions in section 4.2.
2) Prize out the outer bearing seal (20).
3) Remove the retaining ring (19) from the pedestal.
4) Press on the impeller drive end of the shaft to remove the shaft (7) and bearing assembly.
5) Press off the ball bearings from the shaft and remove the retaining ring (17) and
spacer (18).
6) Press out the lip seal (14) if necessary to change.
7) Clean all parts that are going to be reused and check the shaft for wear.
4.5 Assembly of pedestal

1) Mount ball bearings, spacer and retaining ring on the shaft (see pos 16, 17 and 18).
2) Mount lip seal (14). Lubrication with soap solution will ease the assembly.
3) Press in the shaft including the bearing assembly into the pedestal.
4) Mount the retaining ring (19) and the new lip seal (20). Lubrication with soap solution (for
foodstuff applications use appropriate food grease) will ease the assembly.
5) Assemble the pump according to the instructions in section 4.3.
4.6 Waste handling/material recycling

At the products end of life, please dispose of the product according to applicable law.
Where applicable, please disassemble the product and recycle the parts material.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 23

5.0 Sectional drawings and Spare part lists
5.1 Drawing – Bronze pumps (B) – Flange mounted
31
30
7
28
29
6
27
8
26
4
24
22
23
21
3
9
2
24 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

5.2 Spare part list
FIP25B and FIP40B – Flange mounted
Drawing: Page 24
FIP25B FIP40B
Pos Nos Description Version*)
10-45874 10-45880
1 2 Cap screw (front cover) 01-46505 01-46505
2 1 Front cover 01-45781 01-45778
3 1 Impeller - Neoprene 0 09-1028B 09-819B
1 Impeller - Neoprene, high pressure 6 – –
1 Impeller - Nitrile 9 09-1028B-9 09-819B-9
4 1 Pump body - BSP 01-24250-1 (1") 01-24251-1 (1.1/2")
1 Pump body - NPTF 01-24250-2 (1") 01-24251-2 (1.1/2")
Mechanical seal (SS-shaft)
5 1 M01 09-45860-01 09-45860-13
Carbon/Ceramic/Nitrile
6 1 Motor flange Flange 01-24252 01-24255
7 1 Shaft (SS) 01-45780 01-45766
8 2 Screw stud 01-45779 01-45765
9 1 O-ring - Nitrile (front cover) 0.2172.024 0.2173.459
21 1 Cam - 1/1 01-42679 01-45771
1 Cam - 1/2 01-42584 –
1 Cam - 2/3 01-42442 –
22 1 Wear plate 01-42443 01-42423
23 1 Pin 01-42400 01-42426
24 1 Cam screw - 1/1 01-46794-01 01-46794-02
1 Cam screw - 1/2 01-46794-06 –
1 Cam screw - 2/3 01-46794-07 –
26 2 Screw Flange 0.0141.911 0.0257.036
27 4 Washer Flange 0.0350.116 01-45767
28 4 Screw Flange 0.0150.001 0.0278.802
29 1 Washer Flange 01-45782 01-45768
30 4 Lock screw Flange 0.0300.943 0.0300.943
31 1 Sleeve Flange 01-45214 –
*) See key to model specification system, chapter 1.5
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 25

5.3 Drawing – Bronze pumps (B) – Pedestal mounted
32
20
19
16
18
17
6
15
14
13
8
4
24
22
23
21
3
9
26 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

5.4 Spare part list
FIP25B and FIP40B – Pedestal mounted
Drawing: Page 26
FIP25B FIP40B
Pos Nos Description Version*)
10-45875 10-45881
1 2 Cap screw (front cover) 01-46505 01-46505
2 1 Front cover 01-45781 01-45778
3 1 Impeller - Neoprene 0 09-1028B 09-819B
1 Impeller - Neoprene, high pressure 6 09-816B 09-818B
1 Impeller - Nitrile 9 09-1028B-9 09-819B-9
4 1 Pump body - BSP 01-24250-1 (1") 01-24251-1 (1.1/2")
1 Pump body - NPTF 01-24250-2 (1") 01-24251-2 (1.1/2")
Mechanical seal (SS-shaft)
5 1 M01 09-45860-02 09-45860-14
6 1 Pedestal Pedestal 01-24248 01-24249
7 1 Shaft (SS) 01-35072 01-35041
8 2 Screw stud 01-45784 01-45770
9 1 O-ring - Nitrile (front cover) 0.2172.024 0.2173.459
O-ring - FPM (DIN/ISO) / FKM (ASTM)
1 0.2172.023 –
(front cover)
13 1 Retaining ring Pedestal 0.0370.516 0.0370.525
14 1 Lip seal Pedestal 0.2233.014 0.2233.008
15 2 Nut Pedestal 0.0195.100 0.0195.100
16 1 Ball bearing Pedestal 0.3431.778 0.3431.001
18 1 Spacer Pedestal 01-42583 01-42747
20 1 Lip seal Pedestal 0.2234.004 0.2233.013
21 1 Cam - 1/1 01-42679 01-45771
1 Cam - 1/2 01-42584 –
1 Cam - 2/3 01-42442 –
22 1 Wear plate 01-42443 01-42423
23 1 Pin 01-42400 01-42426
24 1 Cam screw - 1/1 01-46794-01 01-46794-02
1 Cam screw - 1/2 01-46794-06 –
1 Cam screw - 2/3 01-46794-07 –
32 1 Key Pedestal – 0.0502.231
*) See key to model specification system, chapter 1.5
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 27

5.5 Drawing – Stainless steel pumps (S) – Flange mounted
15
14
17
12
13
11
16
6
8
11
5 (SH)
5 (SI)
10
2
1
28 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

5.6 Spare part list
FIP20S, FIP25S, FIP40S, FIP50S – Flange mounted
Drawing: Page 28
FIP20SI/SH FIP25SI/SH FIP40SI/SH FIP50SI/SH

Pos Nos Description Version *) 10-13211 SI 10-13212 SI 10-13214 SI 10-13218 SI
10-13210 SH 10-13213 SH 10-13215 SH 10-13216 SH
1 2 Cap screw (cover) 01-46505 01-46505 01-46505 01-46505
2 1 Cover SI SI 01-35817 01-35818 01-35822 01-24532
1 Cover SH SH 01-35849 01-35850 01-35851 01-24549
3 1 Impeller - Neoprene 0 – – 09-838S 09-803S
1 Impeller - Neoprene, high 6 – 09-837S – 09-809S
pressure
1 Impeller - FDA, Neoprene 4 09-833S-4 09-837S-4 09-835S-4 09-809S-4
1 Impeller - FDA, EPDM 7 09-832S-7 09-836S-7 – –
1 Impeller - FDA, EPDM 3 09-833S-7 – 09-835S-7 –
high pressure
1 Impeller - Nitrile, splined 9 – 09-1028S-9 09-1029S-9 –
4 1 Pump body - BSP SI SI-BSP 01-24525-1 01-24527-1 01-24529-1 01-13190
1 Pump body - NPTF SI SI-NPTF 01-24525-4 01-24527-4 01-24529-4 01-13190-4
1 Pump body - Plain SH SH-PLN 01-24526-1 01-24528-1 01-24530-1 01-13191
1 Pump body - SMS SH SH-SMS 09-46687-01 09-46687-05 09-46687-09 09-46687-13
1 Pump body - DIN SH SH-DIN 09-46687-03 09-46687-07 09-46687-11 09-46687-14
1 Pump body - CLP SH SH-CLP 01-24774-1 01-24775-1 01-24776-1 01-24777
5 1 Mechanical seal SI M01 09-46686-02 09-46686-02 09-46686-06 09-46686-05
1 Mechanical seal SH FDA M06 09-46686-04 09-46686-04 09-46686-08 09-46686-07
Carbon/Ceramic/EPDM
6 1 Motor flange Flange 01-24252 01-24252 01-24255 01-24079
7 1 Shaft 2 01-46633 01-46634 01-46635 01-35040
8 2 Screw stud Flange 01-46636 01-46638 01-46640 01-46642
9 1 O-ring - Nitrile (cover) SI SI 0.2173.446 0.2172.013 0.2173.441 0.2173.437
1 O-ring - FDA (cover) SH SH 0.2174.100 0.2173.523 0.2174.105 0.2174.110
10 2 Screw Flange 0.0141.911 0.0141.911 0.0257.036 0.0141.918
11 4 Washer Flange 0.0350.116 0.0350.116 01-45767 0.0350.118
12 4 Screw Flange 0.0150.001 0.0150.001 0.0278.802 –
13 1 Washer Flange 01-45782 01-45782 01-45768 01-45692
14 4 Lock screw Flange 0.0300.943 0.0300.943 0.0300.943 0.0300.943
15 1 Sleeve Flange 01-45214 01-45214 – –
16 1 Lip seal set Flange 09-46688-01 09-46688-01 09-46688-03 09-46688-01
17 1 Lip seal retainer Flange 01-46900 01-46900 01-46901 01-46900
*) See key to model specification system, chapter 1.5.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 29

5.7 Drawing – Stainless steel pumps (S) – Pedestal mounted
32
20
19
16
18
17
21
6
15
22
13
14
5a
5 (SH)
8
5 (SI)
23
12
3
9
2
1
30 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

5.8 Spare part list
FIP20S, FIP25S, FIP40S, FIP50S, FIP65S – Pedestal mounted
Drawing: Page 30
FIP20SI/SH FIP25SI/SH FIP40SI/SH FIP50SI/SH FIP65SI/SH

Pos Nos Description Version *) 10-24544 SI 10-24546 SI 10-24548 SI 10-13219 SI 10-13220 SI
10-24543 SH 10-24545 SH 10-24547 SH 10-13217 SH 10-13221 SH
1 2 Cap screw (cover) 01-46505 01-46505 01-46505 01-46505 0.0195.200
2 1 Cover SI SI 01-35817 01-35818 01-35822 01-24532 01-24533
1 Cover SH SH 01-35849 01-35850 01-35851 01-24549 01-24550
3 1 Impeller - Neoprene 0 – – 09-838S 09-803S 09-815S
1 Impeller - Neoprene, 6 – 09-837S – 09-809S –
high pressure
1 Impeller - FDA, Neoprene 4 09-833S-4 09-837S-4 09-835S-4 09-809S-4 –
1 Impeller - FDA, EPDM 7 09-832S-7 09-836S-7 – – 09-840S-7
1 Impeller - FDA, EPDM, 3 09-833S-7 – 09-835S-7 – –
high pressure
1 Impeller - Nitrile, splined 9 09-1028S-9 – 09-1029S-9 – –
4 1 Pump body - BSP SI SI-BSP 01-24525-3 01-24527-3 01-24529-3 01-13190 01-13192
1 Pump body - NPTF SI SI-NPTF 01-24525-5 01-24527-5 01-24529-5 01-13190-4 01-13192-4
1 Pump body - Plain SH SH-PLN 01-24526-3 01-24528-3 01-24530-3 01-13191 01-13193
1 Pump body - SMS SH SH-SMS 09-46687-02 09-46687-06 09-46687-10 09-46687-13 09-46687-15
1 Pump body - DIN SH SH-DIN 09-46687-04 09-46687-08 09-46687-12 09-46687-14 09-46687-16
1 Pump body - CLP SH SH-CLP 01-24774-3 01-24775-3 01-24776-3 01-24777 01-24778
5 1 Mechanical seal SI M01 09-46686-01 09-46686-01 09-46686-05 09-46686-05 09-46686-09
1 Mechanical seal SH FDA M06 09-46686- 09-46686-03 09-46686-07 09-46686-07 09-46686-10
Carbon/Ceramic/EPDM 03
5a 1 Washer Pedestal 01-46632 01-46632 01-45692 01-45692 01-46631
6 1 Pedestal Pedestal 01-24248 01-24248 01-24249 01-24012 01-13204
7 1 Shaft 2 01-35835 01-35836 01-35837 01-32609 01-35840
8 2 Screw stud Pedestal 01-46637 01-46639 01-46641 01-46642 01-46643
9 1 O-ring - Nitrile (cover) SI SI 0.2173.446 0.2172.013 0.2173.441 0.2173.437 0.2173.467
1 O-ring - FDA (cover) SH SH 0.2174.100 0.2173.523 0.2174.105 0.2174.110 0.2174.111
12 1 Retainer Pedestal 01-46632 01-46632 01-45692 01-45692 01-46631
13 1 Retaining ring Pedestal 0.0370.516 0.0370.516 0.0370.525 – –
14 1 Lip seal Pedestal 0.2233.014 0.2233.014 0.2233.008 0.2234.002 0.2234.012
15 2 Nut Pedestal 0.0195.100 0.0195.100 0.0195.100 0.0195.100 0.0195.200
16 2 Ball bearing Pedestal 0.3431.778 0.3431.778 0.3431.001 0.3431.488 0.3431.741
1 Roller bearing Pedestal – – – 0.3428.570 0.3428.570
17 1 Retaining ring Pedestal 0.0370.516 0.0370.516 0.0370.525 0.0370.040 0.0370.040
18 1 Spacer Pedestal 01-42583 01-42583 01-42747 01-45005 01-46656
19 1 Retaining ring Pedestal 0.0371.047 0.0371.047 0.0371.052 0.0371.080 0.0371.090
20 1 Lip seal Pedestal 0.2234.004 0.2234.004 0.2233.013 0.2234.003 0.2233.201
21 1 Lip seal retainer Pedestal – – – – 01-46902
22 1 Lip seal set Pedestal – – – – 09-46688-04
23 1 Screw Pedestal – – – – 0.0279.300
32 1 Key Pedestal – – 0.0502.231 0.0502.03 0.0502.038
*) See key to model specification system, chapter 1.5.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 31

6.0 Dimensions and weights
6.1 FIP25B and FIP40B – Flange and Pedestal mounted
B1 B2
R
P
C
A
D J K
E L
M
F
Bronze Version – Flange

IEC- Weight, kg
A B1 B2 C D E F J K L M N P R
motor size pump+motor,
FIP25B 80 68 75 13 ø10 125 150 100 140 140 126 50 ø38 BSP 1" / 80 12.8
NPTF 1"
FIP40B 90 85 85 16 ø10 140 167 100 165 167 127 58 ø63 BSP 1.1/2" / 90 18.2
NPTF 1.1/2"
U
U
T T
B1 B2
R
P
C
A
E M
F G H J K
L
Bronze Version – Pedestal

Weight, kg
A B1 B2 C D E F G H J K L M P R T U V
pump
FIP25B 80 68 75 13 ø9 70 90 40 41 30 66 227 50 ø38 BSP 1" / ø17 16 – 3.4
NPTF 1"
FIP40B 90 85 85 16 ø10.5 80 105 50 24.5 45 93 270 70 ø63 BSP 1.1/2" / ø24 24 8 6.4
NPTF 1.1/2"
32 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

6.2 FIP20S-FIP65S – Flange mounted
Stainless Steel Industrial Version – Flange
P
B C
R
B
C
A
D J K N
E M L
F
Stainless Steel Hygienic Version – Flange

Q S
R
B3
B1
B2
P
B C
B
C
A
D J K N
E
M L
F
A B B1 B2 B3 C D E F J K L M N P
FIP20SI 80 70 – – – 2.5 ø10 125 150 100 123 114 126 41 ø31.8
FIP20SH 80 62 62 74 75.5 2.5 ø10 125 150 100 123 114 126 41 ø22.2
FIP25SI 80 76 – – – 2 ø10 125 150 100 133 133 126 50 ø38
FIP25SH 80 62 62 76 82 2 ø10 125 150 100 133 133 126 50 ø25
FIP40SI 90 87 – – – 5 ø10 140 167 100 157 155.5 127 55 ø55
FIP40SH 90 80 80 94 99 5 ø10 140 167 100 157 155.5 127 55 ø38
FIP50SI 100 110 – – – 6.5 ø12 160 188 140 208 214 167 69 ø67
FIP50SH 100 110 110 124 121.5 6.5 ø12 160 188 140 208 214 167 69 ø51
Weight, kg
Q R S IEC motor size
pump+ motor
FIP20SI – BSP 3/4" / NPTF 3/4" – 80 10.5
FIP20SH ø50.5 25/SMS1145 NW20/DIN11851 80 10.5
FIP25SI – BSP 1" / NPTF 1" – 80 11.8
FIP25SH ø50.5 25/SMS1145 NW25/DIN11851 80 11.8
FIP40SI – BSP 1.1/2" / NPTF 1.1/2" – 90 16.7
FIP40SH ø64 38/SMS1145 NW40/DIN11851 90 16.7
FIP50SI – BSP 2" / NPTF 2" – 100 29.5
FIP50SH ø64 51/SMS1145 NW50/DIN11851 100 29.5
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 33

6.3 FIP20S-FIP65S – Pedestal mounted
S V
R
Stainless Steel Industrial Version – Pedestal
U
P
B C T T
B1
B1
P
B C R
B
C
B
C
A
N
D
A
E D M
F G H J K
L
E M
F G H J K
L
Stainless Steel Hygienic Version – Pedestal

Q S
R
P
B C
B3
B1
B2
B
V
C
U
T T
A
E M
F G H J K
L
A B B1 B2 B3 C D E F G H J K L M P
FIP20SI 80 70 – – – 2.5 ø9 70 90 40 41 30 48 200 50 ø31.8
FIP20SH 80 62 62 74 75.5 2.5 ø9 70 90 40 41 30 48 200 50 ø22.2
FIP25SI 80 76 – – – 2 ø9 70 90 40 41 30 58 219 50 ø38
FIP25SH 80 62 62 76 82 2 ø9 70 90 40 41 30 58 219 50 ø25
FIP40SI 90 87 – – – 5 ø10.5 80 105 50 24.5 45 84 259 70 ø55
FIP40SH 90 80 80 94 99 5 ø10.5 80 105 50 24.5 45 84 259 70 ø38
FIP50SI 100 110 – – – 6.5 ø11 75 105 70 25 75 91.5 331 105 ø67
FIP50SH 100 110 110 124 121.5 6.5 ø11 75 105 70 25 75 91.5 331 105 ø51
FIP65SI 112 115 – – – 10 ø11 100 130 70 45 70 97.5 357 100 ø84
FIP65SH 112 115 115 130 126 10 ø11 100 130 70 45 70 97.5 357 100 ø63.5
Q R S T U V Weight, kg - pump
FIP20SI – BSP 3/4" / NPTF 3/4" – ø17 16 – 2.4
FIP20SH ø50.5 25/SMS1145 NW20/DIN11851 ø17 16 – 2.4
FIP25SI – BSP 1" / NPTF 1" – ø17 16 – 2.7
FIP25SH ø50.5 25/SMS1145 NW25/DIN11851 ø17 16 – 2.7
FIP40SI – BSP 1.1/2" / NPTF 1.1/2" – ø24 27 8 5
FIP40SH ø64 38/SMS1145 NW40/DIN11851 ø24 27 8 5
FIP50SI – BSP 2" / 2" – ø28 31 8 9
FIP50SH ø64 51/SMS1145 NW50/DIN11851 ø28 31 8 9
FIP65SI – BSP 2.1/2" / NPTF 2.1/2" – ø28 31 8 13.5
FIP65SH ø77.5 63.5/SMS1145 NW65/DIN11851 ø28 31 8 14.2
34 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

7.0 Trouble shooting chart
7.1 Pump
Cause Remedy
Pump is not starting
No electric power Check/replace the fuse. Check that the

electric system is not overloaded.
Low voltage Check that the wiring is not too long and that
it has the right dimension.
Unsufficient starting torque of motor Check starting torque required, change the
motor if necessary
Unnormal swelling of the impeller Change the impeller. Contact your supplier
for suitable impeller material.
Pump is not priming
Wrong rotation of the pump Reverse rotation
Loose front cover screws Tighten the screws according to section

2.9 Tightening torque for cap screws.
Torn front cover gasket Replace
Blocked inlet/outlet pipes Flush and clean pipings and connections.

Open all valves
Suction lift too high Fill suction pipe/reduce suction lift
Motor speed too low Increase speed
Air leakage in suction line Seal the line and the connection ports
Worn or damaged impeller Replace impeller
Worn or damaged front cover, wear plate, Replace parts

cam
Worn or damaged shaft seal Replace shaft seal
No sealing compound on cam and cam screw Apply recommended sealing compound
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 35

Cause Remedy
Pump is leaking
Pressure too high Decrease pressure by increasing the

diameter of the pipings and also on any filters
installed. Clean filter if installed
Worn shaft seal Replace shaft seal
Worn ball bearings, shaft deflection Replace ball bearings
Common reasons for unnormal wear of the Contact your supplier for further advice.
mechanical seal
• Abrasive liquid
• Liquid is crystallizing
• Sticky liquids
Insufficient flow
System pressure too high Increase diameter of the pipings, clean filter if
installed.
Pump too small Choose other pump size
Worn pump Replace worn parts
Suction line too small or blocked Increase diameter
Pump speed too low Increase pump speed
Air leakage in suction line Seal the line and the connection ports
Suction hose sucked against tank wall Angle cut the hose
Diameter of suction/discharge line too small Increase the diameter of the pipings
for specified capacity/viscosity
36 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

7.2 Impeller
This guide is designed to help you to identify typical application problems that now and
then occur in flexible impellers during normal use.
Rubber is a “living” material and impellers should be kept in a dark and cool place for
long term storage. The impeller life is strongly reduced by frequent dry running excessive
pressure and/or temperature. It is advised to operate between +10° to +50° C to obtain a
long life.
Problem 1
Pieces are missing from vanes/tips, especially in
centre of impeller.
Edges eaten away, hollowed out.
Pitting on ends of impeller.
Causes
Cavitation, i.e. pressure too low at pump inlet, fluid
evaporates locally.
Precautions
Reduce pump speed. Increase inlet pipe diameter.
Reduce inlet pipe length and restrictions.
Problem 2
End faces hard, polished, cracked, looks like carbon.
Some or all vanes completely missing in severe
cases.
Causes
Dry running.
Precautions
Do not run more for than 30 seconds without liquid
in the pump. Stop the pump as soon as liquid is
exhausted. Arrange the pipe work to trap liquid in the
pump on the discharge side. Prevents dry running
for several minutes. Install a dry running protection
device, i.e. an electronic pump guard.
Problem 3
Vanes cracked half way up their height. Pieces of
vanes are missing.
Causes
Normal end of useful life. Excessive outlet pressure
reduces impeller life. A crease on trailing side of each
vane can indicate excessive pressure. Liquid temp
above 55° C reduces impeller life.
Precautions
Reduce the discharge pressure by reducing the
pump speed and/or increase the outlet pipe diameter.
Reduce the pipe length and restrictions. Reduce the
liquid temperature.
A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014) 37

Problem 4
Vanes permanently and excessively curved.
Causes
Long term storage in pump. Normal end of useful life.
(Especially for Nitrile impellers.)
Precautions
Always remove the impeller for long term storage.
Keep it in a dark and cool place. Refit the impeller to
rotate in opposite direction.
Problem 5
Worn vane tips and faces. Worn impeller drive.
Causes
Abrasive wear from pump or fluid. Worn impeller drive
can also be due to excessive pressure.
Precautions
Pump should continue to operate satisfactorily in
worn condition. Replace severely worn pump parts.
Reduce the pump speed to prolong the service life.
38 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN (02/2014)

”Johnson Pump” and the stylized JP logo are
registered trademarks of SPX Corporation
FIP - series
flexi b le i m pe lle r pu m p
SPX FLOW T E C H N O LO GY S W E D E N A B
Nastagatan 19, P.O. Box 1436

SE-701 14 Örebro, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0)19 21 83 00
Fax: +46 (0)19 27 23 72
Email: johnson-pump.se.support@spx.com
SPX reserves the right to incorporate our latest design and material changes without notice or obligation.
Design features, materials of construction and dimensional data, as described in this bulletin, are provided for your
information only and should not be relied upon unless confirmed in writing. Please contact your local sales representative
for product availability in your region. For more information visit www.johnson-pump.com and www.spx.com.
“The green “>” is a trademark of SPX Corporation, Inc.”
ISSUED 02/2014 A.0100.301 – IM-FIP/08.00 EN

COPYRIGHT © 2005, 2008, 2011, 2012, 2014 SPX Corporation
11.13. Backpressure valve 6DPVRQ
- 7HFKQLFDOLQIRUPDWLRQ

Series 2371 Self-operated Pressure Regulators
Excess Pressure Valves for food and pharmaceutical industries
Type 2371-00 · Pneumatic set point adjustment
Type 2371-01 · Manual set point adjustment
Application
Excess pressure valves for set point ranges 0.3 to 6 bar
(5 to 90 psi) · KVS 0.1 to 25 (CV 0.12 to 30) · DN 15 to 50
(NPS ½ to 2) · Suitable for liquids and gases from 0 to 160 °C
(32 to 320 °F) · Max. operating pressure (inlet pressure) 10 bar
(150 psi) The valve opens as the inlet pressure
rises
Special features
• Proportional pressure regulators for use in the food process-
ing and pharmaceutical industries
• Wetted inside surfaces with a surface roughness Ra ≤ 0.8 µm;
outside surface glass bead blasted
• Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L) or 1.4409 (CF3M)
• FDA-compliant materials
• Angle-style valve body
• Body free of cavities
• Diaphragm leakage monitoring
Versions
Excess pressure valves with a diaphragm for controlling the
inlet pressure p1 to the adjusted set point.
Fig. 1 · Type 2371-00
The set point of Type 2371-00 is adjusted pneumatically 1). The
set point of Type 2371-01 is adjusted manually by the set point
spring.
Angle valve · Version in bar stock · DN 15 to 50 (NPS ½ to
2) · Metal-seated plug or optionally special soft-seated plug
Maximum pressure 10 bar (150 psi)
The regulator can be fitted with a stem locking facility to keep
the plug open during CIP (cleaning in place) or SIP (sterilization
in place).
Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 · Additional version with
pneumatic stem locking
Type 2371-01 · Additional version with manual stem locking
Connections
Welding ends: DIN 11866 Series A = DIN 11850 Series 2/
DIN 11866 Series B/DIN EN ISO 1127 Series 1/DIN 11866
Series C = ASME-BPE 2007 = ASTM A-270 = BS 4825/
DIN EN ISO 1127/ISO 2037/SMS 3008 = NF A 49-249
Threaded connections: DIN 11864-1 GS Form A, Series A, B,
C/DIN 11887 A Series 1/ISO 2853 = IDF/SMS 1146
Clamp connections: DIN 11864-3 NKS Form A, Series A, B,
C/DIN 32676 Series A, B, C/ISO 2852/BS 4825 Part 3 =
ASME BPE
Flange connections: DIN 11864-2 NF Form A, Series A, B, C
Fig. 2 · Type 2371-01 with manual stem locking
1) External compressed air source is required in this case
Associated Information Sheet T 2500 EN Edition September 2014
Data Sheet T 2642 EN

Special versions
6.1
Material: Body and plug in 1.4435, other materials on request
Valve size: Body DN 50 with DN 65 connections
Plug sealing: Pure PEEK (Victrex® 450G)
Surface finish: Inside roughness: Ra ≤ 0.6 µm (polished) or 6
Ra ≤ 0.4 µm (satin finish or mirror finish); outside roughness: Ra
8
≤ 0.6 µm (polished)
End connections: Flanges DIN EN 1092-1 B2, ASME B16.5
7
Class 150, other end connections on request
Principle of operation
The process medium flows through the valve body (1) in the di- 7.1
rection indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug

(3) determines the flow rate across the cross-sectional area re- 12
leased between the plug and the valve seat (2). 5
In the idle state, the valve is closed. The valve opens when the 9
11
upstream pressure p1 rises above the adjusted set point pres-
4
sure. The resulting inlet pressure p1 depends on the flow rate.
Any medium escaping from the test connection (11) in the hous-
ing indicates that the operating diaphragm (4/4.1) may be 3
leaking or the diaphragm has ruptured. The test connection of p1
1
Type 2371-00 (KVS 25/CV 30) is connected to a flexible pipe
2
elbow to discharge any medium escaping.
Type 2371-01 - Version with manual set point adjustment

(Fig. 3) p2
The valve is normally closed by the set point spring (7). The valve
starts to open when the inlet pressure p1 applied to the dia-
phragm (4) and the resulting force exceed the force of the Fig. 3 · Type 2371-01 Excess Pressure Valve
springs. with manual set point adjustment
The set point is adjusted by an Allen key (8 mm), which is in-
serted through the adjustment opening (6.1) on top of the hous-
ing onto the set point screw (6). The blanking plug must first be
removed. If necessary, the set point screw (6) can be secured by
the locking screw (12) in the upper plug section (5) to prevent
the set point screw from loosening due to vibrations, causing the
set point to change.
Turning the set point screw clockwise causes the spring plate
(7.1) to move upwards and increases the spring force and the
set point. Turning the set point screw counterclockwise relieves
the spring tension, reducing the set point.
pc 10
1 Valve body
2 Seat
4.1
3 Plug
4 Diaphragm (Type 2371-01) 11
4.1 Twin diaphragms (Type 2371-00) p1
5 Upper plug section 3
6 Set point screw
6.1 Adjustment opening with blanking plug 2
7 Set point spring(s)
7.1 Spring plate
8 Actuator housing (manual set point adjustment)
9 Clamp fitting
10 Actuator housing (pneumatic set point adjustment)
11 Test connection (leakage monitoring) p2
12 Locking screw
pc Set point pressure (external)

p1 Inlet pressure (upstream pressure) Fig. 4 · Typ 2371-00
p2 Outlet pressure (downstream pressure) with pneumatic set point adjustment
2 T 2642 EN
Type 2371-00 - Version with pneumatic set point adjustment Pneumatic unit
(Fig. 4) for stem locking
In the idle state, the valve is closed by the set point pressure pc 16
(pc max = 8 bar).
17
When the inlet pressure p1 applied to the diaphragm (4.1) ex-
ceeds the set point pressure pc, the force exerted on the dia-
phragm by the pressure of the medium makes the diaphragm pV
6
move. As a result, the plug (3) moves out of the normally closed
Stem locking
position and the valve opens. In this case, the ratio between p1 engaged 8
and pc is not necessarily 1:1.
As the inlet pressure p1 drops, the resulting force reduces again. Fig. 5 · Functional diagram of the stem locking
The valve is closed when the pressure falls below the set point
pressure pc.
The twin diaphragms (4.1) provide restricted safety when one of
the diaphragms ruptures and prevents the process medium and
external pressure medium from mixing.
The screw (12) prevents parts from falling apart inadvertently 6 Set point screw
while the regulator is being dismantled. 8 Actuator housing (Type 3271-01)
16 Spring
17 Diaphragm
Stem locking for CIP and SIP pv Pressure for stem locking
The stem locking is designed to keep the plug in the open posi-
tion. This allows safe and effective cleaning (CIP or SIP) while the
valve is open.
The stem can be locked pneumatically (Type 2371-00/-01) or
manually using a lever (Type 2371-01).
The pneumatic and manual stem locking do not effect the control
function, provided the stem locking is not engaged. Manual stem locking (for Type 2371-01)
The pneumatic unit for the pneumatic stem locking is located on Type 2371-01 can also be fitted with a manually operated stem
top of the regulator. The unit can be mounted in any position locking.
since the axial fixture of the unit allows it to turn 360°. The lever together with the clamping
fixture is directly connected with the Clamping
The clamping fixture of the manual stem locking is directly con-
fixture
nected with the plug over the set point screw, causing the plug plug over the set point screw (1).
stem and plug to axially shift when the lever is actuated. When the lever is pushed manually to
the other side, the plug is pushed, op- Lever (1)
Pneumatic stem locking (for Type 2371-00) posing the spring force, into the open
To open the valve, a pressure pv (= 1 bar) is applied to the pneu- position and locked in place (2).
matic unit. This causes the plug stem to move together with the Pushing the lever back allows the reg-
plug out of the valve seat. A set point pressure pc must not be ap- ulator to continue its control task. Set point
plied to the regulator in this case. screw
(2)
To switch the valve back to its control function, the pressure pv
(= 1 bar) merely needs to be removed. The spring (16) pulls the Stem locking engaged
actuating unit back, allowing the plug stem to move again for
the control task.
The set point pressure pc must be applied for the regulator to
function again.
Pneumatic stem locking (for Type 2371-01)

To open the valve, a pressure pv (= 6 bar) is applied to the pneu- Installation
matic unit. This causes the plug stem to move together with the The regulator has an angle-style valve body.
plug out of the valve seat. – Install the valve into the pipeline without any tension.
To switch the valve back to its control function, the pressure pv Observe the following points:
(= 6 bar) merely needs to be removed. The spring (16) pulls the – The valve must be installed with
actuating unit back, allowing the plug stem to move again for actuator housing facing upwards
the control task and the inlet port in the horizontal
position.
– The medium must flow through the
valve in the direction indicated by
the arrow on the valve body (inlet
port at the side and outlet port at the
bottom).
3 T 2642 EN
Table 1 · Technical data · All pressures specified as gauge pressures
Type 2371-... Excess Pressure Valve DIN ANSI
Nominal size DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50 NPS½ NPS¾ NPS 1 NPS1¼ NPS1½ NPS 2
Type 2371-00 0.3 to 6 bar 5 to 90 psi
Set point
ranges 0.3 to 1.2 bar · 1 to 3 bar · 2.5 to 4.5 bar 5 to 18 psi · 15 to 45 psi · 35 to 65 psi
Type 2371-01
4 to 6 bar 60 to 90 psi
Maximum pressure 10 bar 150 psi
Max. perm. Operating temp. range 0 to +160 °C 32 to 320 °F
temperatures Sterilizing temperature 180 °C for max. 30 minutes 356 °F for max. 30 minutes
Leakage rate acc. to Metal-seated plug: Class I (≤ 0.05 % of KVS or CV coefficient)
IEC 60534-4 and ANSI/FCI 70-2 Soft-seated plug: Class IV (≤ 0.01 % of KVS or CV coefficient)
Peak-to-valley External Glass bead blasted 1) · Ra ≤ 0.6 µm, polished
height and sur- Ra ≤ 0.8 µm, smooth finish 1) · Ra ≤ 0.6 µm, polished · Ra ≤ 0.4 µm, satin finish
face treatment Internal Ra ≤ 0.4 µm, mirror finish
1) Standard version
Table 2 · KVS and CV coefficients

Type 2371-00
Verison DIN (KVS) ANSI (CV)
Nominal size DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 NPS 1¼ NPS 1½ NPS 2
– 25 – 30
0.1 to 0.25 1 0.12 to 0.3 1.2
KVS/CV coeffi-
0.4 to 0.63 1.6 to 2.5 0.5 to 0.75 2 to 3
cients
1 to 2.5 4 1.2 to 3 5
– 6.3 · 10 – 7.5 to 12
Type 2371-01
0.1 to 0.25 1 0.12 to 0.3 1.2
KVS/CV 0.4 to 0.63 1.6 to 2.5 0.5 to 0.75 2 to 3
coefficients 1 to 1.6 4 1.2 to 2 5
2.5 6.3 to 10 3 7.5 to 12
Table 3 · Materials · Material number according to DIN EN

Type … 2371-00 (KVS 25/CV 30) 2371-00/-01
Version DIN ANSI DIN ANSI
Body 1.4409 CF3M 1.4404 316L
Metal-seated 1.4409 CF3M 1.4404 316L
Plug
Seal with soft-seated plug EPDM
Diaphragm PTFE-coated EPDM
Cap 1.4409 CF3M 1.4404 316L
Springs 1.4310
4 T 2642 EN
Dimensions – Type 2371-00 – · Dimensions in Tables 4 to 8
Type 2371-00 · Regulator with pneumatic set point adjustment
H3 ØD H3
7 mm
18 mm
Clamp
fitting
H
H1
Clamp
fitting
H1
L
A L
L
Type 2371-00 · DN 15 to 25/NPS ½ to 1

– without stem locking –
A L
The clamp fitting is turned by 90° in the drawing
Type 2371-00 · DN 32 to 50/NPS 1¼ to 2
– with pneumatic stem locking –
H3 ØD H3
7 mm 18 mm
H
H1
H1
L1
A L2 L1
Type 2371-00 · DN 32 to 50; KVS 25/NPS 1¼ to 2; CV 30

– without stem locking –
A L2
Type 2371-00 · DN 32 to 50; KVS 25/NPS 1¼ to 2; CV 30

The dimensions of the stem locking are identical for all nominal sizes of the
– with pneumatic stem locking –
regulator.
Fig. 6 · Dimensional diagrams of Type 2371-00
5 T 2642 EN
Dimensions
Type 2371-01 · Regulator with manual set point adjustment
H3
H3
7 mm
7 mm
H1
H1
Clamp
fitting Clamp
fitting
L1
A L2 L
Type 2371-01 · DN 15 to 25/NPS ½ to 1
A L
Type 2371-01 · DN 32 to 50/NPS 1¼ to 2
ØD H3
145 160
18 mm
250
185
Type 2371-01 · with manual stem locking Type 2371-01 · with pneumatic stem locking
The Type 2371-01 Regulators in the drawings have welding

ends.
The dimensions of the stem locking are identical for all nominal
sizes of the regulator.
Fig. 7 · Dimensional diagrams of Type 2371-01
6 T 2642 EN
Dimensions – End connections – · See in Tables 4 to 8
Welding end
Øext
e
L/L1/L2
Clamp
connection
Øint Øext
L/L1/L2
Threaded connection
Øint Øext
L/L1/L2
Flange connection
Øint Øext
L/L1/L2
Fig. 8 · Dimensional drawings of end connections
Ordering text
Type 2371-00/Type 2371-01 Excess Pressure Valve
Type 2371-00 · Pneumatic set point adjustment
Set point range 0.3 to 6 bar (5 to 90 psi)
Type 2371-01 · Manual set point adjustment
Set point range 0.3 to 1.2 bar (5 to 18 psi)/1.0 to 3.0 bar
(15 to 45 psi)/2.5 to 4.5 bar (35 to 65 psi)/4.0 to 6.0 bar
(60 to 90 psi)
Nominal size DN (NPS) …
Metal-seated or soft-seated plug
Type of connections: Threaded connection acc. to .../clamp
connection acc. to .../flange connection acc. to …/welding
ends acc. to ...
Stem locking: Pneumatic/manual
7 T 2642 EN
Table 4 · Clamp connections · All dimensions in mm
Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 Type 2371-00 (KVS 25/CV 30)
DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50
Standard
NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 NPS 1¼ NPS 1½ NPS 2 NPS 1¼ NPS 1½ NPS 2
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 88.9 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 11864-3 L1 60 60 60 88.9 88.9 88.9 105 105 105
NKS Form A
Series A L2 90 90 90 88.9 88.9 88.9 155 155 155
∅int 16 20 26 32 38 50 32 38 50
∅ext 34 50.5 50.5 50.5 64 77.5 50.5 64 77.5
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 88.9 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 11864-3 L1 60 60 60 88.9 88.9 88.9 105 105 105
NKS Form A
Series B L2 90 90 90 88.9 88.9 88.9 155 155 155
∅int 18.1 23.7 29.7 38.4 44.3 56.3 38.4 44.3 56.3
∅ext 34 50.5 50.5 64 64 91 64 64 91
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 – 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 11864-3 L1 55 55 60 – 88.9 88.9 – 105 105
NKS Form A
Series C L2 90 90 90 – 88.9 88.9 – 155 155
∅int 9.4 15.75 22.1 – 34.8 47.5 – 34.8 47.5
∅ext 34 34 50.5 – 64 77.5 – 64 77.5
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 88.9 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 32676 L1 60 60 60 88.9 88.9 88.9 105 105 105
Reihe A L2 90 90 90 88.9 88.9 88.9 155 155 155
∅int 16 20 26 32 38 50 32 38 50
∅ext 34 34 50.5 50.5 50.5 64 50.5 50.5 64
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 88.9 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 32676 L1 60 60 60 88.9 88.9 88.9 105 105 105
Series B L2 90 90 90 88.9 88.9 88.9 155 155 155
∅int 18.1 23.7 29.7 38.4 44.3 56.3 38.4 44.3 56.3
∅ext 50.5 50.5 50.5 64 64 77.5 64 64 77.5
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 60.3 60.3 – 88.9 88.9 – – –
DIN 32676 L1 60 60 60 – 88.9 88.9 – 105 105
Series C L2 90 90 90 – 88.9 88.9 – 155 155
∅int 9.4 15.75 22.1 – 34.8 47.5 – 34.8 47.5
∅ext 25 25 50.5 – 50.5 64 – 50.5 64
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L – – 60.3 88.9 88.9 88.9 – – –
L1 – – 60 88.9 88.9 88.9 105 105 105
ISO 2852
L2 – – 90 88.9 88.9 88.9 155 155 155
∅int – – 22.6 31.3 35.6 48.6 31.3 35.6 48.6
∅ext – – 50.5 50.5 50.5 64 50.5 50.5 64
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 60.3 1) 60.3 1) 60.3 – 88.9 88.9 – – –
BS 4825
Part 3 L1 60 1) 60 1) 60 – 88.9 88.9 – 105 105
= L2 90 1) 90 1) 90 – 88.9 88.9 – 155 155
ASME BPE
∅int 9.4 1) 15.75 1) 22.2 – 34.9 47.6 – 34.9 47.6
∅ext 25 1) 25 1) 50.5 – 50.5 64 – 50.5 64
1) Only for version according to ASME BPE
8 T 2642 EN
Table 5 · Welding ends · All dimensions in mm
Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 Type 2371-00 (KVS 25/CV 30)
Standard
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
DIN 11866 L 70 70 70 105 105 105 – – –

Series A L1 70 70 70 105 105 105 105 105 105
=
DIN 11850 L2 90 90 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
Series 2 ∅ext 19 23 29 35 41 53 35 41 53
e 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 70 70 70 105 105 105 – – –
DIN 11866 L1 70 70 70 105 105 105 105 105 105

Series B L2 90 90 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
∅ext 21.3 26.9 33.7 42.4 48.3 60.3 42.4 48.3 60.3
e 1.6 1.6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
DIN 11866 L 70 70 70 – 105 105 – – –
Reihe C
= ASME-BPE L1 70 70 70 – 105 105 – 105 105
2007 L2 90 90 90 – 105 105 – 155 155
= ASTM A-270
= BS 4825 ∅ext 12.7 19.05 25.4 – 38.1 50.8 – 38.1 50.8
e 1.65 1.65 1.65 – 1.65 1.65 – 1.65 1.65
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 70 70 70 105 105 105 – – –
DIN EN L1 70 70 70 105 105 105 105 105 105
ISO 1127
Series 1 L2 90 90 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
∅ext 21.3 26.9 33.7 42.4 48.3 60.3 42.4 48.3 60.3
e 1.6 1.6 2 2 2 2.6 2 2 2.6
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 70 70 70 105 105 105 – – –
L1 70 70 70 105 105 105 105 105 105
ISO 2037
L2 90 90 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
∅ext 17.2 21.3 25 33.7 38 51 33.7 38 51
e 1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L – – 70 105 105 105 – – –
SMS 3008 L1 – – 70 105 105 105 105 105 105
=
NF A 49-249 L2 – – 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
∅ext – – 25 33.7 38 51 33.7 38 51
e – – 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
9 T 2642 EN
Table 6 · Threaded connections · All dimensions in mm
Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 Type 2371-00 (KVS/CV 25/30)
Standard
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 64 64 64 100 100 100 – – –
DIN 11864-1 L1 60 60 60 100 100 100 105 105 105
GS Form A
Series A L2 90 90 90 100 100 100 155 155 155
∅int 16 20 26 32 38 50 32 38 50
∅ext RD 34x1/8“ RD 44x1/6“ RD 52x1/6“ RD 58x1/6“ RD 65x1/6“ RD 78x1/6“ RD 58x1/6“ RD 65x1/6“ RD 78x1/6“
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 64 64 64 100 100 100 – – –
DIN 11864-1 L1 60 60 60 100 100 100 105 105 105
GS Form A
Series B L2 90 90 90 100 100 100 155 155 155
∅int 18.1 23.7 29.7 38.4 44.3 56.3 38.4 44.3 56.3
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 64 64 64 – 100 100 – – –
DIN 11864-1 L1 60 60 60 – 100 100 – 105 105
GS Form A
Series C L2 90 90 90 – 100 100 – 155 155
∅int 9.4 15.75 22.1 – 34.8 47.5 – 34.8 47.5
∅ext RD 28x1/8“ RD 44x1/6“ RD 52x1/6“ – RD 65x1/6“ RD 78x1/6“ – RD 65x1/6“ RD 78x1/6“
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 64 64 64 100 100 100 – – –
DIN 11887 A L1 60 60 60 100 100 100 105 105 105

Series 1 L2 90 90 90 100 100 100 155 155 155
∅int 16 20 26 32 38 50 32 38 50
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L – – 64 100 100 100 – – –
ISO 2853 L1 – – 60 100 100 100 105 105 105
=
IDF L2 – – 90 100 100 100 155 155 155
∅int – – 22.6 31.3 35.6 48.6 31.3 35.6 48.6
∅ext – – 37x1/8“ 45.9x1/8“ 50.6x1/8“ 64.1x1/8“ 45.9x1/8“ 50.6x1/8“ 64.1x1/8“
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L – – 55 105 105 105 – – –
L1 – – 60 105 105 105 105 105 105
SMS 1146
L2 – – 90 105 105 105 155 155 155
∅int – – 22.6 29.6 35.6 48.6 29.6 35.6 48.6
∅ext – – RD 40x1/6“ RD 48x1/6“ RD 60x1/6“ RD 70x1/6“ RD 48x1/6“ RD 60x1/6“ RD 70x1/6“
10 T 2642 EN
Table 7 · Flange connections · All dimensions in mm
Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 Typ 2371-00 (KVS/CV 25/30)
Standard
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 90 95 100 105 115 125 – – –
DIN 11864-2 L1 90 95 100 105 115 125 105 105 105
NF Form A
Series A L2 90 95 100 105 115 125 155 155 155
∅int 16 20 26 32 38 50 32 38 50
∅ext 59 64 70 76 82 94 76 82 94
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 90 95 100 105 115 125 – – –
DIN 11864-2 L1 90 95 100 105 115 125 105 105 105
NF Form A
Series B L2 90 95 100 105 115 125 155 155 155
∅int 18.1 23.7 29.7 38.4 44.3 56.3 38.4 44.3 56.3
∅ext 62 69 74 82 88 103 82 88 103
pmax 10 bar/150 psi
L 90 90 100 – 115 125 – – –
DIN 11864-2 L1 90 90 100 – 115 125 – 105 105
NF Form A
Series C L2 90 90 100 – 115 125 – 155 155
∅int 9.4 15.75 22.1 – 34.8 47.5 – 34.8 47.5
∅ext 54 59 66 – 79 92 – 79 92
DIN EN 1092-1 B2
or On request
ASME B16.5 CI 150
Table 8 · General · All dimensions in mm

Type 2371-00 and Type 2371-01 Typ 2371-00 (KVS/CV 25/30)
Nominal size
A (Type 2171-00) 70 100 145
A (Type 2171-01) 85 100 –
H 80
Common
H1 (Type 2171-00) 80 120 135
dimensions
H1 (Type 2171-01) 240 290 –
H3 ≥ 200
∅D 150
Weight, approx.
Type 2371-00 3 kg 11 kg 15 kg
Type 2371-01 8.5 kg 12 kg –
Stem locking
Pneumatic unit 2.5 kg
Manual stem locking 0.7 kg
11 T 2642 EN
Specifications subject to change without notice
SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK

Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany
2014-09
Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507

Internet: http://www.samson.de T 2642 EN
11.14. Ball Valve - Unison

11.15. Turbidity transmitter – Phase Guard T – Sigrist

P ha seGuard
In - l i n e I nte r f a c e Monitor
for Tu r bid i t y or C olour
Applications Advantages
ñ Monitoring and controlling of interfaces in ñ Sealless design
beverages such as beer, fruit juices, etc. ñ Extremely low maintenance
ñ Optimization of beer / yeast separation steps ñ Recognition of interfaces by turbidity or colour
ñ Monitoring of clean in pipe processes (CIP), e.g. ñ Easy selection of the right model due to fix
in the dairy industry pathlengths
ñ Minimizing product losses and increasing yields ñ Easy configuration and system integration
ñ Recognition of interfaces for product change over
or product push-out
ñ Faster processing time due to better resolution Industries
of start-stop conditions ñ Beverage
ñ Food and Dairy Industry
ñ Chemical Industry
ñ Pharmaceutical Industry
Pha seGuard
In-li ne Inter face Monitor for Turbidit y or Colour
Innovations with tangible benefits

Technical Data
Sealless Design Sensor:
The days of spending time doing Measuring principle: Absorption
routine maintenance for regular Wavelength: LED 880 nm (turbidity)
LED 430 nm (colour)
replacement of seals have gone.
Measuring range: 0 .. 100 % Absorption
The sealless design with sapphire Resolution: 0.5 % Absorption
windows is well-proven and Path-length: 10 mm (models T & C)
established. The PhaseGuard can be 5mm (model HT)
applied in virtually all interface moni- Outputs: 1 x 4 .. 20mA
2x Open-Collector-Transistor
toring/switching application in many Installation: In-line housing Varivent® or
different industries. compatible
Pipe diameter: ≥ DN 40 (models T&C)
≥ DN 65 (model HT)
Simple Concept Material sensor head: Stainless steel, 316L
Material housing: Stainless steel, 304
Three models cover all possible appli-
Windows: Sapphire
cations: phase switching for turbidity Sample temperature: -10 .. +100 °C
(model T), for colour (model C) for Cleaning: CIP/SIP compatible up to 120 °C / 2 h
high turbidity, like for example beer/ Pressure: 1 MPa (10 bar) / 100 °C
yeast (model HT). Selecting the right Ambient temperature: -10 .. +50 °C
Ambient humidity: 0 .. 100 % RH
model is easy thanks to fixed path- Protection degree: IP 66
lengths and appropriate materials. Power supply: 9 .. 30 VDC
Power consumption max: 2 W (3 W with Profibus DP)
Operation:
Configuration: USB Interface and parameter file
Quality- and Cost Optimized Communication (optional): Profibus DP, Modbus RTU
The PhaseGuard is factory adjusted Control unit SICON (optional):
with an optimized universal measuring Power supply: 9 .. 30 VDC
range based on absorption percentage. Power consumption max.: 8 W
Once installed it is only necessary to Display: 1/4 VGA, 3.5“
Operation: Touch screen
perform an occasional zero check. The Ambient temperature: -10 .. +50 °C
use of well-proven optical components Ambient humidity: 0 .. 100 % RH
guarantees the quality and reduces Protection degree: IP 66
costs of purchase and maintenance. Outputs: 4x 0/4 .. 20 mA, galvanic separated,
7x digital outputs, 5x digital inputs,
This results in a favourable total cost of
freely configurable
ownership. Digital Interface: Ethernet, SD-card
Optional: Profibus DP, Modbus RTU,
Connection of several sensors
PhaseGuard Configuration
Flexible Configuration
-------------------------------- For simple applications and system in-
Language 0:Deutsch, 1:English
=1
tegration the instrument configuration
   
and communication can be easily done
--------------------------------------------------------
Limits Mode 1:Off, 1:Exceeded, 2:Undershot. 
=0
using the integrated USB interface
with a parameter file in combination
--------------------------------------------------------
Limits Upper limit with the existing outputs.

=1.000
-------------------------------- For a more comfortable installation
Limits Lower limit and operation the optional control unit

=0.900
SICON with touch screen technology

--------------------------------
Integration and colour display can be connected.
=1 s
--------------------------------
Output 1 Invert 0:No, 1:Yes
=0
--------------------------------
Output 2 Invert 0:No, 1:Yes
=0 M16x1.5
--------------------------------
Subject to change without notice, Doc. No. 11018 E/1
Your representative:
SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG
Hofurlistrasse 1 · CH-6373 Ennetbürgen
Tel. +41 41 624 54 54 Fax +41 41 624 54 55
Document number: 11026E
Version: 2
Valid from: Software V121
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
In-line Interface Monitor

Copyright© SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG, subject to changes without notice 11/2013
SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG Tel. +41 41 624 54 54

Hofurlistrasse 1 Fax +41 41 624 54 55
CH-6373 Ennetbürgen info@photometer.com
Switzerland www.photometer.com
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
Content
1. Notes to the user ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. General information .............................................................................................. 1
1.2. Explanation of symbols ......................................................................................... 2
2. Instrument description ................................................................................................... 3
2.1. General information about the PhaseGuard .......................................................... 3
2.2. Technical data ....................................................................................................... 7
3. General safety pointers .................................................................................................. 9
3.1. Behavior in emergency .......................................................................................... 9
3.2. Dangers when using properly.............................................................................. 10
3.3. Residual risk ........................................................................................................ 11
3.4. Warning and danger symbols on the instrument .................................................11
4. Mechanical mounting .................................................................................................. 12
5. Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 13
5.1. Safety pointers for the electrical installation ........................................................13
5.2. Installation of the PhaseGuard ............................................................................ 14
5.3. Installation of the SICON control unit, field bus ...................................................15
6. Initial start-up .............................................................................................................. 16
6.1. Commissioning procedure .................................................................................. 16
6.2. Perform zero calibration ...................................................................................... 18
7. Operation .................................................................................................................... 19
8. Servicing ...................................................................................................................... 20
9. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 21
10. Customer service information ...................................................................................... 21
11. Decommissioning & storage ........................................................................................ 22
12. Packaging & transport ................................................................................................. 23
13. Disposal ....................................................................................................................... 24
14. Spare parts .................................................................................................................. 25
15. Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 26
16. Index ........................................................................................................................... 27
11026E/2 i
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
Terms used in this document (glossary)

Please refer to our website for specialist terms: www.photometer.com
ii 11026E/2
Notes to the user Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
1. Notes to the user

1.1. General information
Purpose of the This Instruction Manual provides the user with the most important information up to and in-
Instruction Manual cluding commissioning. Information such as operation, servicing, troubleshooting and more
are described in greater detail in the Reference Manual.
Target group The Instruction Manual is intended for all persons who are responsible for mounting,
installing and commissioning the instrument.
Additional DOC. NO. TITLE CONTENT

documentation
11027E Reference Manual More sophisticated menu functions and work-
steps for advanced users.
This document can be downloaded from
www.photometer.com (first time registration re-
quired).
11018E Data sheet Descriptions and technical data about the pho-
tometer.
11052E Service Manual Repair and conversion instructions for service
engineers.
11050DEF Declaration of conformity Compliance with the underlying directives and
standards.
Copyright regulations This Instruction Manual has been written by SIGRIST PHOTOMETER AG. Copying or modify-
ing the content or giving this document to third parties is permitted only with express writ-
ten consent.
Storage location of The Instruction Manual is a component of the product and should always be close at hand.
the Instruction Registered uses can download the latest version (color) at www.photometer.com.
Manual It can also be ordered from our representative in your country. → Section 10
11026E/2 1
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Notes to the user
1.2. Explanation of symbols

Danger symbols Below is a description of all danger symbols that occur in this Instruction Manual.
Danger due to electrical shock that may result in serious bodily injury or
death.
Non-observance of this danger warning may lead to electrical shocks and death.
DANGER!
Danger due to explosion that may result in serious bodily injury or death.
Non-observance of this notice may cause explosions resulting in serious material damage and
death.
EXPLOSION
HAZARD!
Warning about bodily injury or hazards to health with long-term effects.

Non-observance of this warning may lead to injuries with possible long-term effects.
WARNING!
Notice about possible material damage.

Non-observance of this notice may cause material damage to the instrument and its periph-
erals.
CAUTION!
Pictograms Below is an explanation of all pictograms that occur in this Instruction Manual.
Additional information about the current topic.
Practical procedures when working with the photometer and control unit.
Work on the PC.
2 11026E/2
Instrument description Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
2. Instrument description
2.1. General information about the PhaseGuard
2.1.1. View of a measuring station
Figure 1: Overview of PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
 Photometer PhaseGuard
 USB interface for configuring the
instrument
 Connection cable between the

instrument and the customer-side  Customer-side control system
control system
 Varivent® in-line housing or

compatible (optional)  Sample line
2.1.2. Proper use

The PhaseGuard and its peripherals are designed to detect phase transitions in liquids.
Possible areas of application:
Food and beverage industry

Milk processing industry
Chemical and pharmaceutical industry
2.1.3. User requirements

The instrument may be operated only by trained technical personnel.
The instrument may be operated only by persons who are familiar with the content of
the Instruction Manual and Reference Manual.
11026E/2 3
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Instrument description
2.1.4. Conformity
Current technological principles were followed in designing and manufacturing the photom-
eter. They comply with the usual guidelines concerning duty to take due care and safety.
The system meets the requirements applicable within the European Union (EU) for electro-
magnetic compatibility (EMC) and low voltage directives (LVD) and has the CE mark.
Please refer to the separate declaration of conformity for details (document 11050DEF).
2.1.5. Use restrictions

Explosion hazard during operation in an inappropriate environment.
Use in explosion hazardous areas may cause explosions that could be lethal to persons in the
vicinity.
EXPLOSION
It is not permitted to operate the instrument in explosion hazardous areas
HAZARD! or rooms.
It is not permitted to use the instrument with explosive media.
Danger during operation with inappropriate media.

The use of too hot or aggressive media may cause leakage that could be lethal to persons in
the vicinity.
DANGER!
It is not permitted to use the measuring instrument for applications in which the medium
can attack it. Parts which contact the media: stainless steel, sapphire, gaskets.
2.1.6. Dangers when not used properly

Operation when not used properly.
Improper use can cause injuries to persons, process-related consequential damage and dam-
age to the instrument itself and its peripherals.
DANGER!
In the following cases the manufacturer cannot guarantee the protection of persons and the
instrument and therefore assumes no legal responsibility:
The instrument is used in a way not included in the described area of application.
The instrument is not properly mounted.
The instrument is not installed and operated in accordance with the Instruction Man-
ual.
If the instrument has been operated with accessories which SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG
has not expressly recommended.
Improper changes to the instrument have been performed.
The instrument has not been operated within the specifications, in particular concern-
ing pressure and temperature.
4 11026E/2
2.1.7. Identification of the PhaseGuard

The photometer displays the following rating plate:
Figure 2: PhaseGuard rating plate
 Manufacturer  Country of origin
 Product name  Serial number
 Date of manufacture  Service voltage
 Frequency range  Power
 Observe the Instruction Manual.  Disposal information → Section 13
11026E/2 5
2.1.8. Scope of delivery and accessories

Scope of delivery PCS. ART. NO. NAME VIEW VARIANT
1 118676 PhaseGuard C Detection of phase tran-
sitions based on color
change
or
1 118677 PhaseGuard T Detection of phase
transitions in media with
mid-range turbidities
or
1 118678 PhaseGuard HT Detection of phase tran-
sitions with high turbidi-
ties
1 20012 Instruction 11026D German

Manual
11026E English
11026F French
1 118730 USB cable
1 119329 Instrument cable Length 5 m
Optional accessories: PCS. ART. NO. NAME VIEW VARIANT

1 118695 PhaseGuard with inte- Profibus DP
grated fieldbus inter-
face, recognizable by
the larger housing and
118696 the three cable glands. RTU Modbus
1 118342 SICON control unit

1 119040 SICON M
Multichannel control
unit
6 11026E/2
PCS. ART. NO. NAME VIEW VARIANT

1 Various Varivent® in-line Various nominal
housing widths
1 118740 Uncoated blanking

plate
1 20012 Reference Manual as
PDF 11027D German
11027E English
2.2. Technical data

TURBIDITY MEASUREMENT VALUES
Measuring principle Absorption
at 880 nm (T/HT)
at 430 nm (C)
Measurement span 0 .. 100% absorption
Measuring range 0 .. 100% absorption
Sample temperature -10 .. +100°C
120°C max. 2 hr
Ambient temperature -10 .. +50°C
Pressure 1 MPa (10 bar) / 100°C
Resolution 0.5% absorption
Warm-up time < 3 min
Repeatability (2 measurements 0.5% absorption
with 1 instrument)
Linearity 0.5% absorption
Temperature stability ±0.05%/K (full scale)
Reaction time < 0.3 s at 0 seconds integration time (step response →
limit switch)
Ambient humidity 0 .. 100% relative humidity
11026E/2 7
TURBIDITY MEASUREMENT VALUES

Path lengths 10 mm (T/C)
5 mm (HT)
Outputs 1 x 4 .. 20 mA, galvanically separated up to max.
35 VDC relative to ground and max. 500 Ω burden
2 x switching transistor with open collector
UEXT 3 .. 30 VDC, IL max. 8 mA
Interfaces USB (for configuration via text file)
Modbus RTU / Profibus DP (both optional)
To optional SICON control unit
PHOTOMETER VALUES
Service voltage 9 .. 30 VDC, 2 W (3 W with Profibus DP)
Material Housing: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4307
Sensor head stainless steel 1.4404 or better
Window Sapphire
Weight Approx. 2.1 kg
Approx. 2.5 kg (PhaseGuard with interface card)
Dimensions Ø 120 x 143 mm for instrument types T and C
Ø 120 x 164.5 mm with interface card
Ø 120 x 166.5 mm for instrument type HT
Ø 120 x 188 mm with interface card
Detailed dimension drawing PHASEGUARD-MB
Pipe connections Minimum DN 40 for instrument types T and C with
Varivent® or compatible connections
Minimum DN 65 for instrument type HT with
Varivent® or compatible connections
Protection type IP66
8 11026E/2
3. General safety pointers

3.1. Behavior in emergency
Behavior in emergency:
SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG instruments have no on/off switch. This is installed customer-side.
Before commissioning, clarify the following points:
CAUTION!
Position of the on/off switch and the way it works.

Where and how the sample supply can be stopped.
Who the responsible authorities are.
PROCEDURE IN MEASURE NOTES

AN
1. Interrupt the service voltage to the
EMERGENCY! measuring station.
2. Interrupt sample supply.
3. Secure emergency location.
4. Notify responsible institution.
11026E/2 9
3.2. Dangers when using properly

Electrical shock due to damaged instrument or cabling.
Touching damaged cables may lead to electrical shocks with lethal consequences.
DANGER! The instrument may be operated only when the cables are undamaged.
The instrument may be operated only if it has been properly installed or repaired.
Dangerous voltage inside the instrument due to galvanically separated current

output.
Touching the galvanically isolated current output may lead to electrical shocks with lethal
DANGER!
consequences.
The instrument must never be operated when the housing is removed.
The instrument may be opened only by trained personnel.
Bodily injury due to escaping sample liquid.

Contact with the medium may lead to burns, caustic irritations or poisoning with lethal con-
sequences.
DANGER!
The instrument must never be connected to leaking sample lines and operated.
The local clothing regulations must be observed during operation.
The local safety precautions must be observed during operation.
Damage due to incorrect power supply.

If the instrument is connected to an incorrect service voltage, it can be damaged.
WARNING! The instrument may be connected only to voltage sources as specified on the rating plate.
Damage to the instrument caused by humidity or condensation entering the in-

strument when it is opened:
If moisture enters the instrument, it can be damaged.
CAUTION!
Work on the inside of the instrument may be performed only in a dry room and at
room temperature. The instrument should be warm from operation or at room tem-
perature. (Condensation on optical and electrical surfaces must be avoided.)
The instrument may be opened only under these conditions (e.g. removing cover to
the usb interface).
Use of aggressive chemicals.

The use of aggressive cleaning agents can destroy surfaces on the instrument that are rele-
vant to measurement.
CAUTION!
Do not use aggressive chemicals or cleaning agents when cleaning.
Thoroughly clean the instrument with a neutral cleaning agent if it has come into con-
tact with aggressive chemicals.
If the instrument changes hands, always include the Instruction Manual.

If the Instruction Manual is lost, you can request a replacement.
Registered users can download the current version at www.photometer.com.
CAUTION!
10 11026E/2
3.3. Residual risk

During operation with hot or dangerous media, the possibility of leakage cannot be
completely excluded.
DANGER! Contact with the medium may lead to burns, caustic irritations or poisoning with lethal con-
sequences.
The operator is responsible for using the instrument for this purpose.
The operator must ensure that additional protection measures such as safety clothing
and similar items are available and are put to use.
To avoid faulty measurement values as much as possible, the maintenance duties
must be carried out according to the servicing schedule.
Evaluate digital output warnings and error messages to recognize them.
3.4. Warning and danger symbols on the

instrument
There are no warning or danger symbols on the PhaseGuard.
Users must ensure that they observe the safety measures as specified in the Instruction Man-
ual when working with the photometer and its peripheral equipment at all times.
CAUTION!
Important to note:
Sections 1.2 and 3.2.
Observe local safety pointers when performing the described procedures.
11026E/2 11
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Mechanical mounting
4. Mechanical mounting
The instrument can be installed in horizontal or vertical sample lines using the standards-
compliant in-line housing. → Figure 4
The mounting dimensional drawing (PHASEGUARD-MB) provides detailed information about

the dimensions.
Figure 3: Position of the sensor in horizontal mounting
 Photometer  Centering pin on the instrument
 Sensor with measurement opening

pointing downward  Varivent® sample line
Basics of mounting The photometer must be mounted in the line at least 0.5 m away from sight glasses
the photometer and other unwanted light sources.
In the vertical mounting position, the centering pin (2, Figure 3) must point upward
(X, Figure 4).
In the horizontal mounting position, the centering pin (2, Figure 3) must point to the
right (Y, Figure 4).
12 11026E/2
Mechanical mounting Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
Mounting position of
the photometer
Figure 4: Correct installation in the vertical or horizontal sample lines Figure 5: Incorrect
mounting position
5. Electrical installation
5.1. Safety pointers for the electrical installation
Dangerous voltage inside the instrument:
Connecting electrical lines can be life threatening. Parts of the system can also be damaged.
Local regulations for electrical installations must be observed at all times.
DANGER!
Further, the following basic principles must be observed:
The power supply 9 .. 30 VDC is to be provided by the customer. It must be stable,

low noise voltage.
Only voltages complying with the local regulations for low voltage may be used as
power supply and on the galvanically separated current output.
Because the unit has no main switch, a suitable disconnection device (switch, plug)
must be installed near the power supply.
If faults cannot be remedied, the unit must be put out of operation and protected
against inadvertent operation.
11026E/2 13
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Mechanical mounting
5.2. Installation of the PhaseGuard

Connecting the The wires of the 8-pin cable of the photometer have the following functions:
photometer
.
WIRE COLOR DESCRIPTION REMARKS

White-green GND supply
Green 9 .. 30 VDC supply
White-orange RS 485 A Serial interface for SICON

Alternative: initiate zero calibration
Orange RS 485 B → Reference Manual
White-blue Digital output 1 (alarm) Open collector to GND

Blue Digital output 2 (limit) Open collector to GND
White-brown Current output + Max. 35 V to ground

Max. 500 Ω burden
Brown Current output - 0 .. 100% absorption
Shielding Must be connected to protective ground
Cross section for The standard length of the connection cable is 5 m. For greater distances, a junction box
greater distances must be inserted between the instrument and a customer-side control system or, as shown
in the figure below, with a SICON.
Figure 6: Installation of the photometer with junction box
 Photometer  Junction box
 Customer-side control system or

SICON.
14 11026E/2
Mechanical mounting Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
Cross-section The maximum distance (X) between SICON or a customer-side system (3) and the junction
specifications box (2) depends on the power supply and the cross-section in use:
CROSS-SECTION MAX. DISTANCE MAX. DISTANCE REMARKS
FOR 12 VDC FOR 24 VDC
(WITH PROFIBUS) (WITH PROFIBUS)
[mm ] 2
[m] [m]
0.14 40 (20) 150 (100) Standard version
0.20 60 (30) 250 (150)
0.34 100 (50) 400 (250)
0.50 140 (70) 600 (350)
0.75 210 (110) 800 (500)
1.00 280 (140) 800 (700)
1.50 400 (200) 800 (800)
Cable structure Paired cable, complete copper-braided shielding, impedance 100-165 Ω, capaci-
tance < 60 pF/m
5.3. Installation of the SICON control unit, field bus

Installation of the optional SICON control unit as well as installation and commissioning of
the field bus interfaces are described in the Reference Manual.
11026E/2 15
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Initial start-up
6. Initial start-up
6.1. Commissioning procedure
WORKSTEP PROCEDURE
1. Check mounting and in- Ensure that the photometer and components are correct-
stallation. ly mounted and connected. → Section 4, 5
2. Connect power supply to → Section 5
the photometer.
3. Connect photometer to 3.1: Remove cover (arrow) of the USB interface.
PC.
Damage to the photometer caused by
moisture inside the instrument:
The cover to the USB interface may be removed only un-
der dry conditions.
3.2: Connect the PhaseGuard via USB cable to the PC.

The PhaseGuard registers itself as a removable disk in the
Windows operating system.
3.3: Depending on the Windows configuration, a win-
dow opens automatically with the removable removal
disk or you have to open the removal disk manually using
Windows Explorer.
The following files appear:
Info.txt: information data about the PhaseGuard, e.g.
serial number, software version, hours of operation.
Config.txt: configuration file.
Zero.txt: file with which a zero calibration can be initiat-
ed.
16 11026E/2
Initial start-up Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
WORKSTEP PROCEDURE
4. Configure. 4.1: Open the Config.txt file.
The following functions 4.2: Change the desired parameter. Enter number after
can be set as described in “=“.
4.1 to 4.4: e.g. 0 for German or 1 for English
Language: 0: German,
4.3: Close the file after the entry. Changes are saved au-
1: English – setting the
tomatically.
operating language
Limits mode: The window of the removable disk disappears and then
0: inactive; 1: exceeded; 2: reappears in a moment.
undershot; 4.4: If the configuration is successful, the file Config.OK
default = 0 appears.
Upper limits: 0.000
Enter limits with upper
threshold. If the configuration is not successful, the file Config.ERR
Lower limits: 0.000 appears.
Enter limits with lower
threshold. The configuration may fail if the entered values
Integration: 0 s are not within the permitted range or if text areas have
Integration time of the been deleted or changed.
measuring value of If the configuration is faulty, the file Config.txt is auto-
0 .. 60000 seconds. matically generated again and the procedure can be re-
Output 1 invert: peated.
0: No, 1: Yes
Invert: inverts output 1
(alarm)
Output 2 invert:
0: No, 1: Yes
Invert: inverts output 2
(limit)
Factory set.: 0: No; 1: Yes
With Yes the factory set-
ting is loaded.
5. Carry out zero calibration
as described in Section 6.2.
6. Complete procedure. After successfully setting all parameters, remove the USB
connector from the instrument and screw on the cover
again.
If malfunctions occur, please refer to the Reference Manual.
11026E/2 17
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Initial start-up
6.2. Perform zero calibration

WORKSTEP PROCEDURE
1. Prepare system 1.1: Prepare photometer as described in Section 6.1.
for zero
calibration.
1.2a: Zero calibration in the sample line:
If clean, bubble-free water is in the sample line (e.g. after CIP clean-
ing), a zero calibration can be performed without disassembling the
instrument. If this is not possible, proceed according to step 1.2b.
1.2b: Zero calibration outside the sample line:
Remove photometer without previously emptying the

sample line.
The photometer can be removed from a line only when the line is
completely empty. If this is not the case, flooding and damage to
equipment as well as bodily injury may occur.
1. Ensure that the sample line is empty.
2. Remove the photometer (1) from the sample line and submerge
the measurement opening (2) in clean, bubble-free water.
The measurement opening (2) must be completely submerged

in the water and no external light is allowed to penetrate. If
necessary, cover with a black cloth or use a non-transparent
container (3). A transparent container is used here only for illustrative
purposes.
 Photometer
 Measurement opening (completely in the water)
 Container with clean water
18 11026E/2
Initial start-up Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
WORKSTEP PROCEDURE
2. Perform zero 2.1: Open the “Zero.txt” file.
calibration.
2.2: Enter the number 1 after the “=” symbol.
0 for Adjustment no or 1 for Adjustment yes
2.3: After entry, close the file to save the changes. Changes are
saved automatically.
The window of the removable disk disappears and then reappears in
a moment.
2.4: If the adjustment is successful, the file Zero.OK appears.
If the configuration is not successful, the file Zero.ERR appears. In
this case, repeat adjustment and check the points in the following list
one after the other:
Soiled window on the sensor head. → Reference Manual
Air bubbles in the water.
Soiled optics in the instrument. → Reference Manual
If the check was not successfully completed, contact your

country representative. → Section 10
3. Complete Put the instrument in its initial state.
procedure.
If malfunctions occur, please refer to the Reference Manual.
7. Operation
The PhaseGuard can be operated with a SICON (control unit). Handling and parameteriza-
tion of the menu functions are described in detail in the Reference Manual.
11026E/2 19
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Servicing
8. Servicing
It is absolutely necessary to observe relevant information when performing
servicing duties:
The instrument must never be operated when the housing is removed.
DANGER!
The instrument may be opened only by trained personnel.
The instrument may be opened only in dry conditions.
The servicing duties are described in detail in the Reference Manual.
Servicing schedule WHEN WHO WHAT PURPOSE

Annually or if Operator Change desiccant Obligatory measure for maintaining
HUMIDITY → Reference Manual the measuring accuracy and for pro-
warning tecting the electronics. Interval de-
pends on operating and ambient
conditions.
Annually or Operator Check the sensor win- Obligatory measure for maintaining
as needed dow for soiling measuring accuracy.
→ Reference Manual Interval depends on the sample.
Annually or Operator Clean the sensor head Obligatory measure for maintaining
as needed → Reference Manual measuring accuracy.
Interval depends on the sample.
Annually or Operator Zero calibration of the Maintain measuring accuracy.
as needed photometer
→ Section 6.2
As needed Operator Replace gaskets on Maintain sealing of the process line.
Varivent® housing
→ Reference Manual
Table 1: Servicing schedule
20 11026E/2
Troubleshooting Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
9. Troubleshooting
The following measures can be used for troubleshooting.
A SICON control unit or web browser is required to analyze warning and error messages; this
is described in detail in the → Reference Manual.
DETECTABLE FAULT MEASURES

Occurrence of a warning or Analyze this message as described in the Reference Manual or
error message take the following steps.
The measuring value is Make sure that the medium in the product line
wrong corresponds to the operating conditions.
→ Section 2.2
Check whether the photometer is correctly mounted.
→ Section 4
Ensure that the maintenance duties have been
performed according to the maintenance schedule.
→ Section 8
Perform a zero calibration of the photometer.
→ Section 6.2
Check the dry chamber in the housing.
Clean the sensor head.
No display or indication Check whether the service voltage is correctly connect-

ed to the SICON.
(only with SICON) → Reference Manual
If the listed measures do not result in the desired results, please consult with
customer service. → Section 10
10. Customer service information

Should you have any questions, please contact the responsible service center in your country
or region. If this is not known, SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG customer service in Switzerland
would be glad to provide you with a contact address.
A current list of all SIGRIST country representatives is available in the Internet at

www.photometer.com.
Please have the following information ready when you contact a SIGRIST service point or
customer service:
The serial number of the PhaseGuard. → Section 2.1.7

A description of instrument behavior and the work steps when the problem occurred.
A description of what you did when trying to solve the problem yourself.
The documentation of the third-party products you use in conjunction with the pho-
tometer or peripheral devices.
11026E/2 21
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Customer service information
11. Decommissioning & storage

Life threatening voltage inside the instrument:
Connecting electrical lines is extremely dangerous. Parts of the system can also be damaged.
Local regulations for electrical installations must be observed at all times.
DANGER!
Remove photometer without previously emptying the sample line:

The photometer can be removed from a line only when the line is completely empty. If this is
not the case, flooding and damage to equipment as well as bodily injury may occur.
WARNING!
The aim of decommissioning is to prepare the photometer properly for storage and to con-
serve it during storage.
WORKSTEP REMARKS
1.
Dangerous voltage inside the instrument:
Connecting electrical lines is extremely dangerous. Parts
of the system can also be damaged. Local regulations
for electrical installations must be observed at all times.
Interrupt the power supply to the control unit and re-
move electrical connections.
2. → Reference Manual
Remove photometer without previously emp-
tying the sample line:
The photometer can be removed from a line only when
the line is completely empty. If this is not the case,
flooding and damage to equipment as well as bodily in-
jury may occur.
Interrupt the flow rate through the sample line and then
empty it.
Remove the photometer from the sample line and clean
the sensor head.
3. Check the dry chamber of the instrument. Replace → Reference Manual
desiccant if necessary.
4. Disassemble the control unit. → Reference Manual
5. Make sure that all covers are closed and all locks on the
instrument and control unit are locked.
22 11026E/2
Customer service information Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
Storage There are no special requirements for storing the instruments. However, please note the fol-
lowing information:
The photometer and the control unit contain electronic components. Storage for such
components must fulfill the usual conditions. It is important to note that the storage
temperature must be between -20 and +50°C.
All components that come into contact with the sample during operation have to be
dry and clean for a long period of time before being put into storage.
The photometer, control unit and accessories must be protected from weather fac-
tors, condensing humidity, and aggressive gases.
12. Packaging & transport

The original packaging materials of the photometer should be used for packaging the pho-
tometer and its peripheral components if possible. If the original packaging is no longer
available, note the following information:
Before packaging the photometer, close the openings on the photometer with adhe-
sive tape or plugs so that no packaging materials can enter the instrument.
The photometer contains optical and electronic components. Make sure that the
packaging protects the instrument from damaging impact during transport.
Package all peripheral devices and accessory parts separately and label each part with
the serial number (serial no. → Section 2.1.7). This prevents confusion and mix-ups
later while also making it easier to identify parts.
When packaged in the way described above, the photometer and control unit can be trans-
ported by the usual shipping methods and in all positions.
11026E/2 23
Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT Customer service information
13. Disposal
Disposal of the photometer and its peripheral devices is to be carried out in compliance with
regional legal regulations.
The photometer and control unit have no environmentally damaging sources of radiation.
The materials listed below should be disposed of or recycled as described in the following
table:
CATEGORY MATERIALS DISPOSAL POSSIBILITIES

Packaging Cardboard, paper Reuse as packaging material, local dis-
posal points, incineration plants
Protective foils, polystyrene shells Reuse as packaging material, recycling
Electronics Printed circuit boards, To be disposed of as electronic waste
electro-mechanical components
Desiccant Rubingel Residual waste (chemically harmless)
Optics Glass, sapphire Recycling via centers for recycling glass
and waste metal
Housing Stainless steel Waste metal disposal centers
ABS Incineration plants, garbage dumping
site
Table 2: Materials and their disposal
24 11026E/2
Spare parts Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
14. Spare parts

The following table lists the spare parts and their article numbers. The detailed worksteps for
replacing spare parts are described in the → Reference Manual.
ART. NO. ARTICLE NAME REMARKS

108247 O-ring EPDM 60 x 3, 75 shore A Material EPDM, 60 x 3 mm
111391 Desiccant bag, 30 g Sealed packaging, unlimited shelf life
112379 O-ring NBR 60 x 3, 70 shore A Material Nitril/NBR, 60 x 3 mm
112698 O-ring FPM 60 x 3, 75 shore A Material Viton/FPM, 60 x 3 mm
114446 O-ring FFPM 60 x 3, 80 shore A Material FFPM, 60 x 3 mm
119329 Instrument cable 5m for TurbiGuard/PhaseGuard
Table 3: Spare parts and article numbers
11026E/2 25
Appendix Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
15. Appendix
Mounting dimensional drawing for PHASEGUARD-MB
26 11026E/2
Index Instruction Manual PhaseGuard C/ T/ HT
16. Index
A M
Article numbers ............................... 25 Mounting ....................................... 13
Mounting position .......................... 13
B
Behavior in emergency ...................... 9 P
Packaging ....................................... 23
C
Pictograms ........................................ 2
CE mark ............................................ 4
Proper use ........................................ 3
Commissioning ............................... 16
Conformity of the product ................ 4 R
Connections, length ........................ 14 Rating plate ...................................... 5
Cross-section ............................. 14, 15 Residual risk .................................... 11
Customer service ............................. 21
S
D Scope of delivery............................... 6
Dangers ...................................... 4, 10 Service center ................................. 21
Decommissioning ............................ 22 Servicing duties ............................... 20
Disposal .......................................... 24 Servicing schedule........................... 20
Spare parts ..................................... 25
E
Storage ........................................... 23
EMC .................................................. 4
Environmental damage.................... 24 T
EU, European Union .......................... 4 Technical data ................................... 7
Explanation of symbols ...................... 2 Terminal junction box ..................... 14
Terms, glossary .................................. ii
G
Transport ........................................ 23
Guidelines ......................................... 4
U
H
Use restrictions ................................. 4
Horizontal ....................................... 12
V
I
Vertical ........................................... 12
In-line housing ................................ 12
View of a measuring station ............. 3
Installation, electrical ....................... 14
Internet ........................................... 21 W
Warning symbols on the instrument 11
L
Limits, definition .............................. 17 Z
Zero calibration ............................... 18
11026E/2 27
Pos : 279 /Steuer module/Adressbl oc k @ 0\mod_1341480540857_6.doc x @ 4061 @ @ 1
SIGRIST-PHOTOMETER AG Tel.+41 41 624 54 54

Hofurlistrasse 1 Fax+41 41 624 54 55
CH-6373 Ennetbürgen info@photometer.com
Switzerland www.photometer.com
11.16. Solenoid valve - VX21 - SMC

Direct Operated 2 Port Solenoid Valve New ® Note)
Note) For air and

water only
Air Medium Water Oil Steam RoHS

vacuum ∗ Can be used with
heated water.
Large flow rate Compact Lightweight

Height Weight
Flow rate
20% More flow 10

10 30
∗ ∗
∗ %%Smaller
Smaller % Lighter
%
(Size 1) (Size 1, Aluminum body)
(Size 1)
New VX
∗ Comparison with SMC conventional model Conventional model
Body
material
Air
Aluminum, Resin
Enclosure
Water/Oil/
Medium vacuum/Steam IP65∗
C37 (Brass), ∗ Electrical entry
Stainless steel Flat terminal type
terminal is IP40.
With One-touch fittings

68 mm
61 mm
(Resin body)
Power
consumption
4.5 W (Size 1)
7W (Size 2)
10.5 W (Size 3)
(DC/N.C. valve)
Bracket
Standard
equipment
Air Medium
vacuum
Manifold Solenoid coil type Valve type

Material • Body/PPS • Insulation type Class B/H N.C. N.O.
• Base/Aluminum • Fluid temperature
• Seal/NBR, FKM Class B/Max. 140°F (60°C)
Class H/Max. 361°F (183°C)
Class B Class H
Series VX21/22/23 CAT.NAS70-44D

Direct Operated 2 Port Solenoid Valve
Clearance
By providing a bumper and clearance, we
Air Medium Water Oil Steam
vacuum ∗ Can be used with reduced the collision sound of the core when
heated water. ON (when the valve is open). Because of the
Enclosure clearance, when using highly viscous fluids
such as oil, the armature does not get stuck
IP65 and the responsiveness when OFF (when
the valve is closed) is improved.
Flame resistance Power consumption
UL94V-0 conformed ∗ DC/Class B, N.C. valve
Flame resistant mold coil material 4.5 W (Size 1)

Low-noise
7 W (Size 2)
construction
10.5 W (Size 3)
Metal noise reduced Improved armature
by the rubber bumper
durability
Piping variations Body material
Thread piping, One-touch fitting
Air Aluminum, Resin
Water/
Oil/ C37 (Brass),
Medium
vacuum/ Stainless steel
Steam
Full-wave rectifier type (AC specification: Insulation type Class B/H)

Improved durability Improved OFF response
Service life is extended by the special construction. Specially constructed to improve the OFF response
(compared with current shading coil) when operated with a higher viscosity fluid such as oil.
Reduced buzz noise Low-noise construction
Rectified to DC by the full-wave rectifier, resulting in a Specially constructed to reduce the metal noise
buzz noise reduction. during operation.
Reduced apparent power ∗ Class B, N.C. valve
10 VA → 7 VA (Size 1) 20 VA → 9.5 VA (Size 2)
32 VA → 12 VA (Size 3)
Variations <Fluid>
∗ Can be used with
Applicable fluid ∗1 heated water.
Model
Air Medium vacuum Water Oil Steam
For Air
— — — —
VX20 Page 5
For Medium vacuum ∗2
— — —
VX24 Page 10
For Water ∗2
— — —
VX22 Page 14
For Oil ∗2 ∗2
— —
VX23 Page 16
∗ Can be used with
For Steam heated water. ∗2 ∗2 ∗2
—
VX25 Page 18
∗1 For details, refer to pages 45 and 46. ∗2 Refer to the individual specifications for each fluid.
<Body Size>
Orifice diameter
Model Body size Port size
2 mmø 3 mmø 4 mmø 5 mmø 7 mmø 8 mmø 10 mmø Note)
VX214
1/8, 1/4
Size 1 — — — —
One-touch fitting: ø6, ø8
VX225
1/4, 3/8
Size 2 — — — — —
VX236
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Size 3 — — — — —
Note) N.C. only
Features 1
INDEX Series VX21/22/23
Specifications
Single Unit/Manifold: Specifications ......................................................................................... 2
Common Specifications................................................................................................................ 3
Selection Steps ................................................................................................................................ 4
For Air
For Air
Model/Valve Specifications, Fluid and Ambient Temperature, Valve Leakage Rate ..... 5, 6
How to Order (Single Unit) ....................................................................................................... 7
Model/Valve Specifications, Fluid and Ambient Temperature, Valve Leakage Rate........... 8
How to Order (Solenoid Valve for Manifold, Manifold Base),
Blanking Plate Assembly Part No., How to Order Manifold Assembly (Example) ............... 9
For Medium
Vacuum
For Medium Vacuum (0.1 Pa·abs or more)
Model/Valve Specifications, Fluid and Ambient Temperature, Valve Leakage Rate......... 10
How to Order (Single Unit) ..................................................................................................... 11
For Water
How to Order (Solenoid Valve for Manifold, Manifold Base),
Blanking Plate Assembly Part No., How to Order Manifold Assembly (Example) ............. 13
For Water
For Oil
For Oil
For Steam
For Steam ∗ Can be used with heated water.
Special Options
Special Options............................................................................................................................... 21
UL-compliant 24
Construction
Single Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Manifold ............................................................................................................................................. 27 Construction
Dimensions (Single Unit) Body material: Aluminum......................................................... 28
Body material: Resin ........................................................................................... 30
Body material: C37, Stainless steel ............................................................... 32
(Manifold) Base material: Aluminum ................................................................................. 35
Dimensions
Replacement Parts........................................................................................................................ 36
Glossary of Terms ......................................................................................................................... 37
Solenoid Valve Flow-rate Characteristics ............................................................................. 38
Flow-rate Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 43
Specific Product Precautions .................................................................................................... 45
1
Series VX21/22/23
For Air, Medium Vacuum, Water, Oil and Steam
Variations
Single Unit (For Air, Medium Vacuum, Water, Oil and Steam)
Valve type Electrical entry
Normally Closed (N.C.) Grommet
Normally Open (N.O.) Conduit
DIN terminal
Solenoid coil type Conduit terminal
Insulation type: Class B, Class H Flat terminal
Rated voltage
Normally Closed (N.C.) Normally Open (N.O.)
100 V/200 V/110 V/230 VAC
(220 V/240 V/48 V/24 VAC) Size Size 1 Size 2 Size 3
24 VDC (12 VDC) 2 mmø — —
Voltage in ( ) indicates special voltage. 3 mmø — —
Material 4 mmø — —
Orifice diameter 5 mmø —
Body — Aluminum, Resin, C37 (Brass),
Stainless steel 7 mmø — —
Seal — NBR, FKM∗ 8 mmø — —
∗ Refer to individual pages for details of each fluid. 10 mmø — — ∗
1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Port size
ø6, ø8 ø8, ø10 ø10, ø12
∗ N.C. only
Manifold (For Air, Medium Vacuum)

Valve type Electrical entry
Normally Closed (N.C.) Grommet
Normally Open (N.O.) Conduit
DIN terminal
Manifold type Conduit terminal
Common SUP type Flat terminal
Individual SUP type
Solenoid coil type Manifold

Insulation type: Class B Size Size 1 Size 2 Size 3
2 mmø — —
Rated voltage 3 mmø — —
100 V/200 V/110 V/230 VAC Orifice diameter 4 mmø — —
(220 V/240 V/48 V/24 VAC) 5 mmø —
24 VDC (12 VDC)
7 mmø —
Voltage in ( ) indicates special voltage.
Common SUP type IN 3/8
Port size
Material (Air) OUT 1/8, 1/4

Body — Resin Individual SUP type IN 1/8, 1/4
Base — Aluminum (Medium vacuum) OUT 3/8
Seal — NBR, FKM
2
Series VX21/22/23
Common Specifications
Specifications
Standard Specifications
Valve construction Direct operated poppet

Withstand pressure 290 psi (2.0 MPa) (Resin body type 218 psi [1.5 MPa])
Valve Body material Aluminum, Resin, C37 (Brass), Stainless steel
For Air
specifications Seal material Note 3) NBR, FKM
Enclosure Dust-tight, Water-jet-proof type (IP65) Note 1)
Environment Location without corrosive or explosive gases
AC 100 VAC, 200 VAC, 110 VAC, 230 VAC, (220 VAC, 240 VAC, 48 VAC, 24 VAC) Note 2)
Rated voltage
DC 24 VDC, (12 VDC) Note 2)
Allowable voltage fluctuation ±10% of rated voltage
For Medium
Coil
Vacuum
specifications Allowable leakage AC 5% or less of rated voltage
voltage DC 2% or less of rated voltage
Coil insulation type Class B, Class H
Note 1) Electrical entry flat terminal type terminal is IP40.
Note 2) Voltage in ( ) indicates special voltage. (Refer to page 21.)
For Water
Note 3) For seal material/EPDM, refer to X332. (Refer to page 23.)
Be sure to read “Specific Product Precautions” before handling.
Solenoid Coil Specifications

Normally Closed (N.C.) Normally Open (N.O.)
DC Specification DC Specification
For Oil
Class B Class B
Size Power consumption (W) Note 1) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 2) Size Power consumption (W) Note 1) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 2)
Size 1 4.5 122 [50] Size 1 7.5 140 [60]
Size 2 7 131 [55] Size 2 8.5 158 [70]
Size 3 10.5 149 [65] Size 3 12.5 158 [70]
For Steam
Class H Class H
Size Power consumption (W) Note 1) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 2) Size Power consumption (W) Note 1) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 2)
Size 1 9 212 [100] Size 1 9 212 [100]
Size 2 12 212 [100] Size 2 12 212 [100]
Size 3 15 212 [100] Size 3 15 212 [100]
Note 1) Power consumption: The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) Note 1) Power consumption: The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C)
and when the rated voltage is applied. (Variation: ±10%) and when the rated voltage is applied. (Variation: ±10%)
Note 2) The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) and when the rated Note 2) The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) and when the rated
Special Options
voltage is applied. The value depends on the ambient environment. voltage is applied. The value depends on the ambient environment.
This is for reference. This is for reference.
AC Specification (Built-in Full-wave Rectifier Type) AC Specification (Built-in Full-wave Rectifier Type)
Class B Class B
Size Apparent power (VA) Note 1) 2) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 3) Size Apparent power (VA) Note 1) 2) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 3) Construction
Size 1 7 140 [60] Size 1 9 140 [60]
Size 2 9.5 158 [70] Size 2 10 158 [70]
Size 3 12 158 [70] Size 3 14 158 [70]
Class H Class H
Size Apparent power (VA) Note 1) 2) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 3) Size Apparent power (VA) Note 1) 2) Temperature rise °F [°C] Note 3)
Dimensions
Size 1 9 212 [100] Size 1 9 212 [100]

Size 2 12 212 [100] Size 2 12 212 [100]
Size 3 15 212 [100] Size 3 15 212 [100]
Note 1) Apparent power: The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) Note 1) Apparent power: The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C)
and when the rated voltage is applied. (Variation: ±10%) and when the rated voltage is applied. (Variation: ±10%)
Note 2) There is no difference in the frequency and the inrush and energized Note 2) There is no difference in the frequency and the inrush and energized
apparent power, since a rectifying circuit is used in the AC. apparent power, since a rectifying circuit is used in the AC.
Note 3) The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) and when the rated Note 3) The value at ambient temperature of 68°F (20°C) and when the rated
voltage is applied. The value depends on the ambient environment. voltage is applied. The value depends on the ambient environment.
This is for reference. This is for reference.
3
Series VX21/22/23
Selection Steps
Selection Steps
Step 1 Select the fluid.
Item Selection item Page Symbol
Air Page 5, 6 0
Water Page 14 2
Select the fluid.
Medium
Oil Page 16 3 q VX2 3 0 A A
vacuum Page 10 4 q
Steam Page 18 5
∗ Can be used with heated water.
Step 2 Select “Body material”, “Port size” and “Orifice diameter” from “Flow rate — Pressure” of each fluid.
Item Selection item Symbol
Select from “Flow Size Size 3 3 w

e
rate — Pressure.”
VX2 3 0 A A
Body material Aluminum
Body material
Port size Port size 1/8 A e
Orifice diameter w
Orifice diameter 2
Step 3 Select electrical specification.

Item Selection item Symbol
VX2 3 0 A A
Select electrical Voltage 24 VDC
A r
specification. Electrical entry Grommet
r
Step 4 For special options, refer to pages 21 to 23.
4
Direct Operated 2 Port Solenoid Valve Series VX21/22/23
For Air Single Unit
Specifications
Model/Valve Specifications
N.C.
Symbol
For Air
1 2
For Medium
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2. However, if the pressure in port 2 is
Vacuum
higher than port 1, the valve will not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.
AIuminum Body Type

Flow-rate characteristics Maximum operating Note)
Orifice diameter Max. system pressure Weight
Size Port size Model pressure differential
(mmø) C [dm3/(s·bar)] b Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (g)
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 145 (1.0) 220
For Water
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX210 1.05 0.68 0.41 87 (0.6) 220
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2) 220
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 145 (1.0) 340
2 1/4, 3/8 VX220
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15) 145 (1.0) 340
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 145 (1.0) 450
1/4, 3/8 8 5.67 0.33 1.58 44 (0.3) 450
3 VX230
10 5.74 0.64 2.21 15 (0.1) 450
For Oil
1/2 10 8.42 0.39 2.21 15 (0.1) 470
Resin Body Type (Built-in One-touch Fittings)

Orifice diameter Flow-rate characteristics Maximum operating Max. system pressure
Note)
Size Port size Model pressure differential Weight
For Steam
2 0.82 0.44 0.23 145 (1.0) 220
ø6 3 1.25 0.34 0.35 87 (0.6) 220
5 1.45 0.43 0.40 29 (0.2) 220
1 VX210 145 (1.0)
2 0.82 0.44 0.23 220
ø8 3 1.81 0.40 0.41 87 (0.6) 220
5 2.11 0.32 0.56 29 (0.2) 220
4 1.69 0.40 0.47 145 (1.0) 340
ø8
7 3.14 0.34 0.84 22 (0.15) 340
2 VX220 145 (1.0)
145 (1.0)
4 1.68 0.49 0.50 340
ø10
Special Options
7 3.54 0.36 0.90 22 (0.15) 340
5 2.50 0.44 0.70 145 (1.0) 460
ø10 8 2.77 0.82 1.22 44 (0.3) 460
10 5.69 0.46 1.54 15 (0.1) 460
3 VX230 145 (1.0)
5 2.50 0.44 0.70 460
ø12 8 2.56 0.88 1.38 44 (0.3) 460
10 5.69 0.64 1.76 15 (0.1) 460
Construction
Note) Weight of grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, 60 g for conduit terminal type respectively.
Refer to “Glossary of Terms” on page 37 for details on the maximum operating pressure differential.
Fluid and Ambient Temperature Valve Leakage Rate

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Air) Note 1)
Dimensions
14 to 140 (−10 Note) to 60) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) 1 cm3/min or less (AIuminum body type)
NBR (FKM)
Note) Dew point temperature: 14°F (−10°C) or less 15 cm3/min or less (Resin body type)
External Leakage
Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Air) Note 1)
1 cm3/min or less (AIuminum body type)
NBR (FKM)
15 cm3/min or less (Resin body type)
Note 1) Leakage is the value at ambient temperature 68°F (20°C).
Note 2) For seal material/FKM, refer to “Other Options” on page 21 for the
selection.
5
Series VX21/22/23
For Air Single Unit
N.O.
Symbol
1 2
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2. However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher
than port 1, the valve will not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.
AIuminum Body Type

Note)
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 131 (0.9) 240
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX240 1.05 0.68 0.41 65 (0.45) 240
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2) 240
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0) 370
2 1/4, 3/8 VX250
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15) 370
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 116 (0.8) 490
3 1/4, 3/8 VX260
8 5.67 0.33 1.58 44 (0.3) 490
Resin Body Type (Built-in One-touch Fittings)

2 0.82 0.44 0.23 131 (0.9) 240
ø6 3 1.25 0.34 0.35 65 (0.45) 240
5 1.45 0.43 0.40 29 (0.2) 240
1 VX240
2 0.82 0.44 0.23 131 (0.9) 240
ø8 3 1.81 0.40 0.41 65 (0.45) 240
5 2.11 0.32 0.56 29 (0.2) 240
4 1.69 0.40 0.47 116 (0.8) 370
ø8 145 (1.0)
7 3.14 0.34 0.84 22 (0.15) 370
2 VX250
4 1.68 0.49 0.50 116 (0.8) 370
ø10
7 3.54 0.36 0.90 22 (0.15) 370
5 2.50 0.44 0.70 116 (0.8) 500
ø10
8 2.77 0.82 1.22 44 (0.3) 500
3 VX260
5 2.50 0.42 0.70 116 (0.8) 500
ø12
8 2.56 0.88 1.38 44 (0.3) 500
Refer to “Glossary of Terms” on page 37 for details on the maximum operating pressure differential.

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Air) Note 1)
14 to 140 (−10 Note) to 60) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) 1 cm3/min or less (AIuminum body type)
NBR (FKM)
Note) Dew point temperature: 14°F (−10°C) or less 15 cm3/min or less (Resin body type)
External Leakage
Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Air) Note 1)
1 cm3/min or less (AIuminum body type)
NBR (FKM)
15 cm3/min or less (Resin body type)
selection.
6
For Air Single Unit
® Note) Refer to the table on
page 24 for RoHS
Specifications
How to Order (Single Unit) UL-compliant.
VX2 1 0 A A Common Specifications

Seal material NBR
Coil insulation type Class B
Fluid Thread type Rc∗
0 Air ∗ One-touch fittings are attached to
the resin body type.
For Air
Coil size/Valve type Body material/Port size/Orifice diameter Voltage/Electrical entry
Body Port Orifice
Size Symbol Valve type Symbol Symbol Voltage Electrical entry
material size diameter
A 2 Grommet
1 N.C.
B 1/8 3
For Medium
Size 1
C
Vacuum
5 A 24 VDC
4 N.O. Aluminum
D 2
E 1/4 3
F 5 B 100 VAC Grommet
H 2 With surge
C 110 VAC voltage
J
For Water
ø6 3
D 200 VAC suppressor
K Resin 5
L (With bracket) 2 E 230 VAC
M ø8 3 F 24 VDC
N 5
G 24 VDC DIN terminal
With surge
A 4 H 100 VAC
2 N.C. 1/4 voltage
B
For Oil
7
Size 2 Aluminum J 110 VAC suppressor
D 4
5 N.O. 3/8 K 200 VAC
E 7
H 4 L 230 VAC
ø8
J Resin 7 M 24 VDC Conduit terminal
L (With bracket) 4 With surge
For Steam
ø10 N 100 VAC voltage
M 7
P 110 VAC suppressor
A 5
Q
3 N.C. 200 VAC
B 1/4 8
Size 3 R 230 VAC
C 10 (N.C. only)
6 N.O.
S
D Aluminum 5 24 VDC Conduit
With surge
E 3/8 8 T 100 VAC voltage
F 10 (N.C. only)
U 110 VAC suppressor
Special Options
G 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
V 200 VAC
H 5
J ø10 8 W 230 VAC
K Resin 10 (N.C. only) Flat terminal
L (With bracket) 5
M ø12 8 Y 24 VDC
Construction
N 10 (N.C. only)
Z Other voltages
For special options, refer to pages 21 to 23.

24 VAC Low concentration ozone resistant
Dimensions
48 VAC (Seal material: FKM)

Special voltage 220 VAC Seal material: EPDM
240 VAC Oil-free
12 VDC G thread
DIN terminal with light NPT thread
Conduit terminal with light With bracket (Aluminum body only)
Without DIN connector Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body
(Aluminum body only)
Special electrical entry direction
Dimensions → Pages 28 to 31 (Single unit) 7
Series VX21/22/23
For Air Manifold

∗ For other fluids, please contact SMC.
N.C.
Symbol
2 (OUT) 2 (OUT)
1 (IN)
Common SUP type
N.O.
Symbol
2 (OUT) 2 (OUT)
1 (IN)
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2. However, if
the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will not be able to block
Common SUP type the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.
Normally Closed (N.C.)

Size Model pressure differential
(mmø) C [dm3/(s·bar)] b Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 145 (1.0)
1 3 VX2A0 1.05 0.68 0.41 87 (0.6)
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2)
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 145 (1.0) 145 (1.0)
2 VX2B0
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15)
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 145 (1.0)
3 VX2C0
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 44 (0.3)
Normally Open (N.O.)

Flow-rate characteristics Maximum operating Max. system pressure
Size Orifice diameter Model pressure differential
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 131 (0.9)

1 3 VX2D0 1.05 0.68 0.41 65 (0.45)
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2)
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0)
2 VX2E0
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15)
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 116 (0.8)
3 VX2F0
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 44 (0.3)

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate Note 1)
14 to 140 (−10 Note) to 60) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) NBR (FKM) 1 cm3/min or less
Note) Dew point temperature: 14 (–10°C) or less
External Leakage
Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate Note 1)
NBR (FKM) 1 cm3/min or less
selection.
8
For Air Manifold
RoHS
Specifications
How to Order (Solenoid Valve for Manifold)
VX2 A 0 A A Common Specifications

Seal material NBR
Fluid Coil insulation type Class B
0 Air
Coil size/Valve type Body material/Orifice diameter Voltage/Electrical entry
For Air
Body
Size Symbol Valve type Symbol material Orifice diameter Symbol Voltage Electrical entry
A N.C. A 2 Grommet
Size 1
D N.O. B Resin 3
C 5 A 24 VDC
For Medium
B A
Vacuum
N.C. 4
Size 2 Resin
E N.O. B 7
B 100 VAC Grommet
C N.C. A 5 C 110 VAC With surge
Size 3 Resin voltage
F N.O. B 7 D 200 VAC suppressor
E 230 VAC
For special options,
F
For Water
refer to pages 21 to 23. 24 VDC
Caution
24 VAC
48 VAC H 100 VAC With surge
Mounting orientation voltage
Special voltage 220 VAC J 110 VAC suppressor
exists when mounting
240 VAC K 200 VAC
12 VDC valves onto manifold
L 230 VAC
DIN terminal with light base. Refer to page 48
for details. M 24 VDC Conduit terminal
Conduit terminal with light
For Oil
Without DIN connector N 100 VAC With surge
voltage
Seal material: EPDM P 110 VAC suppressor
Low concentration ozone resistant (Seal material: FKM) Q 200 VAC
Oil-free R 230 VAC
Special electrical entry direction S 24 VDC Conduit
T With surge
For Steam
100 VAC
voltage
Manifold Base/How to Order U 110 VAC suppressor
V 200 VAC
VVX2 1 0 A 02 W 230 VAC

Flat terminal
Fluid
0 Air Y 24 VDC
Base material
Coil size /Port size/Base type Stations
Special Options
Z Other voltages
Base Individual Base Special
Size Symbol Symbol material port size type Symbol Stations Symbol Oil-free thread
How to Order Manifold Assembly (Example)
Size 1 1 A 1/8 Common 02 2 stations Nil — Rc
Aluminum
Size 2 2 B 1/4 SUP 03 3 stations A — G
Enter the valve and blanking plate to be mounted under the manifold
Size 3 3 Common port size: 3/8 04 4 stations B — NPT
base part number.
(IN port) 05 5 stations D G
06 6 stations E NPT <Example> Construction
07 7 stations Z Rc VVX210B05………...1
∗VX2A0AA ………….4
08 8 stations
∗VVX021S-4A-N ……1
09 9 stations
10 10 stations “∗” is the symbol for mounting.
Add an “∗” in front of the part numbers for solenoid
Blanking Plate Assembly Part No. valves etc. to be mounted.
Dimensions
D side Stations 1 2 3 4 5 U side

For size 1 VVX021S 4A N
When mounting a blanking plate
assembly, if the solenoid valve for
the manifold is ozone resistant,
Seal material 5 x Rc1/4
(Individual port)
(Seal material: FKM), please select N NBR Enter the product’s part number in order, counting the 1st station from the D side
FKM. F FKM (left in the manifold arrangement, when viewing the individual port in front).
Dimensions → Page 35
9
Series VX21/22/23
For Medium Vacuum (0.1 Pa·abs or more) Single Unit

∗ This valve can also be used with air.
(Refer to the valve specifications for air.)
Symbol (Application example) Symbol (Application example)
N.C. N.O.
q Used with w Used with q Used with w Used with
vacuum pressure vacuum pressure
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2. When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2.
However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will not However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will not
be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1. be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.

Flow-rate characteristics Operating pressure range Note)
Size Port size Model
(mmø) C [dm3/(s·bar)] b Cv q Used with vacuum (Pa·abs) w Used with pressure psi (MPa·G) psi (MPa) (g)
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 0 to 145 (0 to 1.0) 300
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX214 1.05 0.68 0.41 0 to 87 (0 to 0.6) 300
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 0 to 29 (0 to 0.2) 300
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 0 to 145 (0 to 1.0) 460
2 1/4, 3/8 VX224 0.1 to
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 atmospheric 0 to 22 (0 to 0.15) 145 (1.0) 460
pressure
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 0 to 145 (0 to 1.0) 580
1/4, 3/8 8 5.67 0.33 1.58 0 to 44 (0 to 0.3) 580
3 VX234
10 5.74 0.64 2.21 0 to 15 (0 to 0.1) 580
1/2 10 8.42 0.39 2.21 0 to 15 (0 to 0.1) 630

Flow-rate characteristics Operating pressure range Note)
Size Port size Model
(mmø) C [dm3/(s·bar)] b Cv q Used with vacuum (Pa·abs) w Used with pressure psi (MPa·G) psi (MPa) (g)
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 0 to 131 (0 to 0.9) 320
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX244 1.05 0.68 0.41 0 to 65 (0 to 0.45) 320
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 0.1 to 0 to 29 (0 to 0.2) 320
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 atmospheric 0 to 116 (0 to 0.8) 145 (1.0) 490
2 1/4, 3/8 VX254 pressure
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 0 to 22 (0 to 0.15) 490
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 0 to 116 (0 to 0.8) 620
3 1/4, 3/8 VX264
8 5.67 0.33 1.58 0 to 44 (0 to 0.3) 620

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Leakage rate Note)
34 to 140 (1 to 60) Note) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) FKM 10−6 Pa·m3/sec or less
Note) With no freezing
External Leakage
Seal material Leakage rate Note)
FKM 10−6 Pa·m3/sec or less
Note) Leakage (10−6 Pa·m3/sec) is the value at differential pressure 15 psi (0.1
MPa) and ambient temperature 68°F (20°C).
10
For Medium Vacuum Single Unit
RoHS
How to Order (Single Unit)
Specifications
Common Specifications
VX2 1 4 A A Seal material FKM
Coil insulation type Class B
Thread type Rc
Fluid
Oil-free
4 Medium vacuum
Non-leak
For Air
Body Orifice
Size Symbol Valve type Symbol Port size Symbol Voltage Electrical entry
material diameter
A 2 Grommet
1 N.C.
B 1/8 3
For Medium
Size 1
C A
Vacuum
5 24 VDC
4 N.O. C37
D 2
E 1/4 3
H 2 With surge
C 110 VAC
J 1/8 3 voltage
For Water
K Stainless 5
L steel
2 E 230 VAC
M 1/4 3 F 24 VDC
N 5
A 4 H 100 VAC
With surge
2 N.C. 1/4 voltage
B
For Oil
7
Size 2 C37 J 110 VAC suppressor
D 4
5 N.O. 3/8 K 200 VAC
E 7
H 4 L 230 VAC
1/4
J Stainless 7 M 24 VDC Conduit terminal
L steel 4 With surge
For Steam
3/8 N 100 VAC
M 7 voltage
A 5
Q
3 N.C. 200 VAC
B 1/4 8
Size 3 R 230 VAC
C 10 (N.C. only)
6 N.O.
D C37 5 S 24 VDC Conduit
E With surge
3/8 8 T 100 VAC
voltage
F 10 (N.C. only)
Special Options
G 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
V 200 VAC
H 5
J 1/4 8 W 230 VAC
K 10 (N.C. only) Flat terminal
Stainless
L steel 5
M 3/8 8 Y 24 VDC
Construction
N 10 (N.C. only)
P 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
Z Other voltages

Dimensions
24 VAC Without DIN connector

48 VAC Seal material: EPDM
Special voltage 220 VAC G thread
240 VAC NPT thread
12 VDC With bracket
DIN terminal with light Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body
Conduit terminal with light Special electrical entry direction
Dimensions→ Pages 32, 33 (Single unit) 11

Series VX21/22/23
For Medium Vacuum (0.1 Pa·abs or more) Manifold

∗ For other fluids, please contact SMC.
N.C.
Symbol
1 (IN) 1 (IN)
2 (OUT)
Individual SUP type
N.O.
Symbol
1 (IN) 1 (IN)
2 (OUT)
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2.
However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1,
Individual SUP type the valve will not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.

Size Model pressure differential
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 145 (1.0)

1 3 VX2A4 1.05 0.68 0.41 87 (0.6)
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2)
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 145 (1.0) 145 (1.0)
2 VX2B4
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15)
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 145 (1.0)
3 VX2C4
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 44 (0.3)

Flow-rate characteristics Maximum operating Max. system pressure
Size Orifice diameter Model pressure differential
2 0.63 0.63 0.23 131 (0.9)

1 3 VX2D4 1.05 0.68 0.41 65 (0.45)
5 2.20 0.39 0.62 29 (0.2)
4 1.90 0.52 0.62 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0)
2 VX2E4
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 22 (0.15)
5 1.96 0.55 0.75 116 (0.8)
3 VX2F4
7 3.99 0.44 1.08 44 (0.3)

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Leakage rate Note)
34 to 140 (1 to 60) Note) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) FKM 10−6 Pa·m3/sec or less
Note) With no freezing
External Leakage
Seal material Leakage rate Note)
FKM 10−6 Pa·m3/sec or less
Note) Leakage (10−6 Pa·m3/sec)
is the value at differential pressure 15
psi (0.1 MPa) and ambient temperature 68°F (20°C).
12
For Medium Vacuum Manifold
RoHS
Specifications
How to Order (Solenoid Valve for Manifold)
VX2 A 4 A A Common Specifications

Seal material FKM
4 Medium vacuum Oil-free
Non-leak
Coil size/Valve type Body material/Orifice diameter Voltage/Electrical entry
For Air
Body Orifice
Size Symbol Valve type Symbol material diameter Symbol Voltage Electrical entry
A N.C. A 2 Grommet
Size 1
D N.O. B Resin 3
C 5 A 24 VDC
For Medium
Vacuum
B N.C. A 4
Size 2 Resin B 100 VAC
E N.O. B 7 Grommet
C 110 VAC With surge
C N.C. A 5 D 200 VAC voltage
Size 3 Resin suppressor
F N.O. B 7 E 230 VAC
F 24 VDC
For Water
For special options, G 24 VDC DIN terminal
refer to pages 21 to 23. H 100 VAC With surge
24 VAC
Caution J 110 VAC voltage
suppressor
48 VAC
Mounting orientation exists K 200 VAC
Special voltage 220 VAC when mounting valves onto L 230 VAC
240 VAC manifold base. Refer to page M 24 VDC Conduit terminal
12 VDC 48 for details. N
For Oil
100 VAC With surge
DIN terminal with light P 110 VAC voltage
suppressor
Conduit terminal with light Q 200 VAC
Without DIN connector R 230 VAC
Seal material: EPDM S 24 VDC Conduit
Special electrical entry direction T 100 VAC With surge
For Steam
U 110 VAC voltage
Manifold Base/How to Order V 200 VAC
suppressor
W 230 VAC
VVX2 1 4 A 02 Flat terminal
Y 24 VDC
Fluid
4 Medium vacuum
Z Other voltages
Special Options
Base material
Coil size /Port size/Base type Stations How to Order Manifold Assembly (Example)
Base Individual Base Special
Size Symbol Symbol material port size type Symbol Stations Symbol thread
Enter the valve and blanking plate to be mounted under the manifold
Size 1 1 A 1/8 Individual 02 2 stations Nil Rc base part number.
Aluminum
Size 2 2 B 1/4 SUP 03 3 stations A G
<Example>
Size 3 3 Common port size: 3/8 04 4 stations B NPT VVX214B05……......1
Construction
(OUT port) 05 5 stations ∗VX2A4AA ………….4
06 6 stations ∗VVX021S-4A-F ……1
07 7 stations “∗” is the symbol for mounting.
Add an “∗” in front of the part numbers for solenoid
08 8 stations
valves etc. to be mounted.
09 9 stations
D side Stations 1 2 3 4 5 U side
10 10 stations
Dimensions
Blanking Plate Assembly Part No.

For size 1 VVX021S 4A F SMC SMC SMC SMC
For size 2 VVX022S 4A F 5 x Rc1/4

For size 3 VVX023S 4A F (Individual port)
Enter the product’s part number in order, counting the 1st station from the D side (left
in the manifold arrangement, when viewing the individual port in front).
Dimensions→Page 35
13
Series VX21/22/23
For Water Single Unit

∗ This valve can also be used with air.
(Refer to the valve specifications for air.)
Symbol Symbol
N.C. N.O.
1 2 1 2
However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will not However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will not
be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1. be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.

Note)
(mmø) AV (x 10−6 m2) Conversion Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (g)
2 5.5 0.23 145 (1 ) 300
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX212 10.0 0.42 87 (0.6) 300
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 300
4 15.0 0.63 145 (1 ) 460
2 1/4, 3/8 VX222
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 145 (1.0) 460
5 18.0 0.75 145 (1 ) 580
1/4, 3/8 8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 580
3 VX232
10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 580
1/2 10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 630

Note)
(mmø) AV (x 10−6 m2) Conversion Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (g)
2 5.5 0.23 131 (0.9) 320
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX242 10.0 0.42 65 (0.45) 320
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 320
4 15.0 0.63 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0) 490
2 1/4, 3/8 VX252
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 490
5 18.0 0.75 116 (0.8) 620
3 1/4, 3/8 VX262
8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 620
• Refer to “Glossary of Terms” on page 37 for details on the maximum operating pressure differential.

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Water) Note 1)
34 to 140 (1 to 60) Note) – 4 to 140 (−20 to 60) NBR (FKM) 0.1 cm3/min or less
Note) With no freezing External Leakage
Seal material Note 2) Leakage rate (Water) Note 1)
NBR (FKM) 0.1 cm3/min or less
selection.
14
For Water Single Unit
® Note) Refer to the table
on page 25 for RoHS
Specifications
UL-compliant.

Seal material NBR
2 Water Thread type Rc
For Air
Body Orifice
material diameter
A 2 Grommet
1 N.C.
B 1/8 3
Size 1
C 5 A 24 VDC
4
For Medium
N.O. C37
D
Vacuum
2
E 1/4 3
H 2 With surge
C 110 VAC
J 1/8 3 voltage
K 5
For Water
Stainless
L steel 2 E 230 VAC
M 1/4 3 F 24 VDC
N 5
A 4 H 100 VAC
With surge
2 N.C. 1/4 voltage
B 7
J 110 VAC suppressor
Size 2 C37
D
For Oil
4
5 N.O. 3/8 K 200 VAC
E 7
H 4 L 230 VAC
1/4
L steel 4
N 100 VAC
With surge
3/8 voltage
M 7
For Steam
A 5
Q
3 N.C. 200 VAC
B 1/4 8
Size 3 R 230 VAC
C 10 (N.C. only)
6 N.O.
E With surge
3/8 8 T 100 VAC
voltage
F 10 (N.C. only)
G 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
V 200 VAC
Special Options
H 5
J 1/4 8 W 230 VAC
Stainless
L steel 5
M 3/8 8 Y 24 VDC
N 10 (N.C. only)
Construction
P 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
Z Other voltages

24 VAC Applicable to deionized water (Seal material: FKM)
Dimensions
48 VAC Seal material: EPDM

Special voltage 220 VAC Oil-free
240 VAC G thread
12 VDC NPT thread
DIN terminal with light With bracket
Conduit terminal with light Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body
Without DIN connector Special electrical entry direction
Dimensions→Pages 32, 33 (Single unit) 15

Series VX21/22/23
For Oil Single Unit

∗ This valve can also be used with air or water. When the fluid is oil.
(Refer to the valve specifications for air or water.) The kinematic viscosity must not exceed 50 mm2/s.
The special construction of the armature adopted in the built-in
full-wave rectifier type gives an improvement in OFF response by
providing clearance on the absorbed surface when it is switched ON.
Symbol Symbol
N.C. N.O.
1 2 1 2
However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1, the valve will
not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1. not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.

Orifice diameter Flow-rate characteristics Maximum operating Max. system pressure Note)
(mmø) AV (x 10−6m2) Conversion Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (g)
2 5.5 0.23 145 (1) 300
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX213 10.0 0.42 87 (0.6) 300
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 300
4 15.0 0.63 145 (1) 460
2 1/4, 3/8 VX223
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 145 (1.0) 460
5 18.0 0.75 145 (1) 580
1/4, 3/8 8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 580
3 VX233
10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 580
1/2 10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 630

Note)
(mmø) −6
AV (x 10 m ) 2
Conversion Cv psi (MPa) psi (MPa) (g)
2 5.5 0.23 131 (0.9) 320
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX243 10.0 0.42 65 (0.45) 320
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 320
4 15.0 0.63 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0) 490
2 1/4, 3/8 VX253
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 490
5 18.0 0.75 116 (0.8) 620
3 1/4, 3/8 VX263
8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 620
• Refer to “Glossary of Terms” on page 37 for details on the maximum operating pressure differential.

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature °F (°C) Ambient temperature °F (°C) Seal material Leakage rate (Oil) Note)
23 to 140 (−5 Note) to 60) –4 to 140 (−20 to 60) FKM 0.1 cm3/min or less
mm2/s
Note) Kinematic viscosity: 50 or less
External Leakage
Seal material Leakage rate (Oil) Note)
FKM 0.1 cm3/min or less
Note) Leakage is the value at ambient temperature 68°F (20°C).
16
For Oil Single Unit
RoHS
How to Order
Specifications
Seal material FKM
3 Oil Thread type Rc
For Air
Body Orifice
material diameter
A 2 Grommet
1 N.C.
B 1/8 3
Size 1
C 5 A 24 VDC
For Medium
4 N.O. C37
D
Vacuum
2
E 1/4 3
H 2 With surge
C 110 VAC
J 1/8 3 voltage
K 5
For Water
Stainless
L steel 2 E 230 VAC
M 1/4 3 F 24 VDC
N 5
A 4 H 100 VAC
With surge
2 N.C. 1/4 voltage
B 7
J 110 VAC suppressor
Size 2 C37
D
For Oil
4
5 N.O. 3/8 K 200 VAC
E 7
H 4 L 230 VAC
1/4
L steel 4
N 100 VAC
With surge
3/8 voltage
M 7
For Steam
A 5
Q
3 N.C. 200 VAC
B 1/4 8
Size 3 R 230 VAC
C 10 (N.C. only)
6 N.O.
E With surge
3/8 8 T 100 VAC
voltage
F 10 (N.C. only)
G 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
V 200 VAC
Special Options
H 5
J 1/4 8 W 230 VAC
Stainless
L steel 5
M 3/8 8 Y 24 VDC
N 10 (N.C. only)
Construction
P 1/2 10 (N.C. only)
Z Other voltages

24 VAC Without DIN connector
Dimensions
48 VAC Oil-free
Special voltage 220 VAC G thread
240 VAC NPT thread
12 VDC With bracket
DIN terminal with light Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body
Conduit terminal with light Special electrical entry direction
Dimensions → Pages 32, 33 (Single unit)

17
Series VX21/22/23
For Steam Single Unit

∗ This valve can also be used with air, water, oil or heated water.
(Refer to the valve specifications for air, water or oil.)
Symbol Symbol
N.C. N.O.
1 2 1 2
When the valve is closed, flow is blocked from port 1 to port 2.

However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher than port 1,
the valve will not be able to block the fluid and it will flow from port 2 to port 1.

(mmø) AV (x 10−6 m2) Conversion Cv psi (MPa) (g)
psi (MPa)
2 5.5 0.23 145 (1) 300
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX215 10.0 0.42 87 (0.6) 300
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 300
4 15.0 0.63 145 (1) 460
2 1/4, 3/8 VX225
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 145 (1.0) 460
5 18.0 0.75 145 (1) 580
1/4, 3/8 8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 580
3 VX235
10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 580
1/2 10 53.0 2.21 15 (0.1) 630

(mmø) −6
AV (x 10 m ) 2
Conversion Cv psi (MPa) (g)
psi (MPa)
2 5.5 0.23 131 (0.9) 320
1 1/8, 1/4 3 VX245 10.0 0.42 65 (0.45) 320
5 15.0 0.63 29 (0.2) 320
4 15.0 0.63 116 (0.8) 145 (1.0) 490
2 1/4, 3/8 VX255
7 26.0 1.08 22 (0.15) 490
5 18.0 0.75 116 (0.8) 620
3 1/4, 3/8 VX265
8 38.0 1.58 44 (0.3) 620
Note) Weight of grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 60 g for conduit terminal type respectively.

Internal Leakage
Fluid temperature Ambient temperature Fluid Seal material Leakage rate
Steam: 361°F (183°C) or less Steam 1.0 cm3/min or less
–4 to 140°F (−20 to 60°C) FKM for high temperature
Heated water: 210°F (99°C) or less Heated water 0.1 cm3/min or less
External Leakage
Fluid Seal material Leakage rate
Steam 1.0 cm3/min or less
FKM for high temperature
Heated water 0.1 cm3/min or less
18
For Steam Single Unit
RoHS
Specifications
VX2 1 5 A B Common Specifications

Seal material FKM for high temperature
Coil insulation type Class H
Fluid
Thread type Rc
5 Steam
For Air
Body Orifice
Size Symbol Valve type Symbol Port size Symbol Voltage Electrical entry Note 3)
material diameter
A 2 Grommet
1
For Medium
N.C.
B
Vacuum
1/8 3
Size 1
C 5 A 24 VDC
4 N.O. C37
D 2
E 1/4 3
H 2 With surge
For Water
C 110 VAC voltage
J 1/8 3 suppressor
K 5
D 200 VAC
Stainless
L steel 2 E 230 VAC
M 1/4 3 G 24 VDC DIN terminal
N 5 With surge voltage
H 100 VAC suppressor Note 1) 2)
A J
For Oil
4 110 VAC
2 N.C. 1/4
B 7
K 200 VAC
Size 2 C37
D 4
5 N.O. 3/8 L 230 VAC
E 7
H 4 N 100 VAC Conduit terminal
1/4 With surge
J Stainless 7 P 110 VAC
For Steam
voltage
L steel 4
Q 200 VAC
suppressor
3/8
M 7
R 230 VAC
A 5
T
3 N.C. 100 VAC Conduit
B 1/4 8 With surge
Size 3 U 110 VAC voltage
C 10 (Only N.C.)
6 N.O. suppressor
D C37 5 V 200 VAC
E 3/8 8 W 230 VAC
Special Options
F 10 (Only N.C.)
Z Other voltages
G 1/2 10 (Only N.C.)
Note 1) AC voltage coil for “H” of DIN terminal type does not have
H 5
full-wave rectifier. Full-wave rectifier is built on the DIN
J 1/4 8 connector side. Refer to page 36 to order it as an
K 10 (Only N.C.) accessory.
Stainless Note 2) DIN connector insulation class is Class “B”.
L steel 5
Note 3) Flat terminal is not available. Construction
M 3/8 8
N 10 (Only N.C.) For special options, refer to pages 21 to 23.
P 1/2 10 (Only N.C.) 24 VAC
48 VAC
Special voltage
220 VAC
240 VAC
Dimensions
DIN terminal with light

Conduit terminal with light
Seal material: EPDM
Oil-free
G thread
NPT thread
With bracket
Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body
Dimensions → Page 34 (Single unit)
19
Series VX21/22/23
Special Options
Specifications
Electrical Options Other Options
(Special voltage, With light, Without DIN connector)
VX2 1 0 A Z 1A Low concentration ozone resistant and applicable to deionized water

Oil-free
Enter standard product Port thread
For Air
number.
Electrical option
Electrical specification/Voltage/Electrical entry
VX2 1 0 A A Z
Specification Symbol Class H∗ Voltage Electrical entry
1A 48 VAC Enter standard product
For Medium
1B 220 VAC Grommet number.
Vacuum
1C 240 VAC (With surge voltage suppressor)
1U 24 VAC Other option
1D — 12 VDC Grommet Low concentration ozone resistant and applicable to deionized water/
Grommet Oil-free/Port thread
1E — 12 VDC
(With surge voltage suppressor) Low concentration ozone resistant
1F 48 VAC Symbol and applicable to deionized water∗1 Oil-free Port thread
For Water
1G 220 VAC (Seal material: FKM)
DIN terminal
Nil Rc, One-touch fitting∗2
Special voltage
1H 240 VAC
(With surge voltage suppressor)
— —
1V 24 VAC A G
— —
1J — 12 VDC B NPT
1K 48 VAC C — Rc, One-touch fitting∗2
1L 220 VAC D G
Conduit terminal —
1M 240 VAC E NPT
1W 24 VAC F G

For Oil
—
1N — 12 VDC G NPT
1P 48 VAC H Rc, One-touch fitting∗2
1Q 220 VAC K G
Conduit
1R 240 VAC L NPT
1Y 24 VAC Z — Rc, One-touch fitting∗2
1S — 12 VDC ∗1 Applicable to air (VX20) and water (VX22).
1T
For Steam
— 12 VDC Flat terminal ∗2 When the body is resin, One-touch fittings are equipped.
2A 24 VDC
2B 100 VAC
2C 110 VAC
2D 200 VAC
∗ Enter symbols in the order below when ordering a combination of
2E 230 VAC DIN terminal
electrical option, other option, etc.
2F 48 VAC (With surge voltage suppressor)
2G 220 VAC Example) VX2 1 2 A Z 1A Z
2H 240 VAC
2V 24 VAC Electrical option
Special Options
With light
2J — 12 VDC
Other option
2K — 24 VDC
2L 100 VAC
2M 110 VAC
2N 200 VAC
2P 230 VAC Conduit terminal
2Q 48 VAC (With surge voltage suppressor) Construction
2R 220 VAC
2S 240 VAC
2W 24 VAC
2T — 12 VDC
— 3A
24 VDC
3B
Without DIN connector
— 100 VAC
— 3C
110 VAC
Dimensions
— 3D
200 VAC
— 3E
230 VAC DIN terminal
— 3F
48 VAC (With surge voltage suppressor)
— 3G
220 VAC
— 3H
240 VAC
— 3V
24 VAC
— 3J
12 VDC
∗ Options marked with are available for Class “H” coil.
Applicable for all when the coil insulation class is Class “B”.
21
Series VX21/22/23
Installation Options
(Mounting Option/Special Electrical Entry Direction)
The following shows combinations that can be selected using installation options.
Combinations
Symbol Special electrical entry direction With bracket Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body Seal material: EPDM
XC
XB
XNB
X332
With Bracket/
Special Electrical Entry Direction Special Electrical Entry Direction
VX2 XC A VX2 XB A
Enter standard product Enter standard product
number. number. With bracket/Special
Special electrical entry direction electrical entry direction
Electrical entry direction Symbol Electrical entry direction Symbol Electrical entry direction
Symbol
Single unit Manifold Standard
IN OUT
90°
90°
90° Nil
IN OUT 270°
A 90° 90° 270°
A IN OUT
90° Individual port IN OUT C
180° 180°
180° 180° 180°
IN OUT B
B 180° IN OUT
Individual port
(mm)
270° 270° Size Port size U W X
270°
1 1/8, 1/4 46 36 11
W
U
IN OUT 2 1/4, 3/8 56 46 13

C 270° 1/4, 3/8 56 46 13
3
1/2 — — —
Individual port X
∗1 Bracket is attached as standard with the resin body, so there are no XB settings.
∗ Enter symbols in the order below when ordering a combination of ∗2 When the orifice is ø8, ø10, and the body port size is 1/4 or 3/8, use a foot type
electrical option, other option and special electrical entry direction. bracket. (The L-bracket of the old VX series is not compatible.) If the body port size
is 1/2, there are no XB settings. (Refer to the following.)
Example) VX2 1 2 A Z 1A Z XC A ∗3 On the bottom side of the standard body, there is no female thread for mounting a
bracket. Please be careful because the bracket cannot be retrofit.
Electrical option Special electrical ∗4 Bracket is packed in the same container as the main body.
Other option entry direction
Bracket Interchangeable with an Old Type
Size Port size Orifice diameter (mmø) Bracket interchangeable with an old type
2 (Interchangeable)
1 1/8, 1/4 3 (Interchangeable)
5 (Interchangeable)
∗ Enter symbols in the order below when ordering a combination of 4 (Interchangeable)
electrical option, other option and with bracket. 2 1/4, 3/8
7 (Interchangeable)
Example) VX2 1 2 A Z 1A Z XB A 5 (Interchangeable)
1/4, 3/8 8 (Not interchangeable)∗2
3
Electrical option With bracket/Special 10 (Not interchangeable)∗2
Other option electrical entry direction 1/2 10 — (Not available)∗2
22
Special Options Series VX21/22/23
Installation Options
Specifications
(Mounting Option/Special Electrical Entry Direction)
Mounting Holes on the Bottom Seal Material: EPDM/With Bracket/

Mounting Holes on the Bottom
Side of the Body/ Side of the Body/
Special Electrical Entry Direction Special Electrical Entry Direction
VX2 XNB A VX2 X332 A
For Air
Enter standard product Enter standard product Seal material:
number. number. EPDM
When the fluid is oil, enter the part number
For Medium
Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body/ for water (VX22).
Vacuum
Special electrical entry direction ∗ VX2 3 VX2 2
Symbol Electrical entry direction Symbol Electrical entry direction Refer to page 15 for model selection.
Standard
IN OUT
Nil With bracket/Mounting holes on the bottom side of the body/
For Water
90° 90° 270° Specifications
270° Symbol
Electrical entry direction Bracket
A IN OUT C Nil IN side (Standard)
IN OUT
A 90°
None
B 180°
C 270°
180° 180° D IN side (Standard)
For Oil
B E 90°
With bracket∗1
IN OUT
F 180°
G 270°
H IN side (Standard)
(mm) J 90° Mounting holes on the
Size Port size M D P K 180° bottom side of the body∗1
For Steam
1 1/8, 1/4 M4 6 12.8 L 270°
P
2 1/4, 3/8 M5 8 19 ∗1 Resin body is not available.

1/4, 3/8 M5 8 19 ∗2 “Other Options”, which can be combined, are A, B, D, E, Z.
2 x M thread 3 ∗3 Electrical entry direction
1/2 M5 8 23
Depth D
Note) Resin body is not available. Standard 90°
IN OUT IN OUT
∗ Enter symbols in the order below when ordering a combination of
electrical option, other option and mounting holes on the bottom side
of the body. 180° 270°
Special Options
IN OUT IN OUT
Example) VX2 1 2 A Z 1A Z XNB A
Electrical option Mounting holes on the
Other option bottom side of the body/
Special electrical entry
direction ∗ Enter symbols in the order below when ordering a combination of Construction
electrical option, other option, seal material: EPDM, with bracket,
mounting holes on the bottom side of the body and special electrical
entry direction.
Example) VX2 1 2 A Z 1A Z X332 A

Electrical option Seal material: EPDM/
Dimensions
Other option With bracket/Mounting

holes on the bottom side
of the body/
Special electrical entry
direction
23
Series VX21/22/23
UL-compliant
∗ Refer to the table shown below for UL-compliant.
Refer to pages 21 to 23 for electrical options, other options, and
bracket/electrical entry direction.
For Air
VX210 Valve type: N.C. VX220 Valve type: N.C. VX230 Valve type: N.C.
Size, Voltage, Size, Voltage, Size, Voltage,
Body Other With Note) Body Other With Note) Body Other With Note)
Valve type, Electrical entry, Valve type, Electrical entry, Valve type, Electrical entry,
material options bracket material options bracket material options bracket
Fluid Electrical options Fluid Electrical options Fluid Electrical options
VX210 A A Nil Nil VX220 A A Nil Nil VX230 A A Nil Nil
B B A XB B B A XB B B A XB
C C B D C B C C B
D D C E D C D D C
E E D H Note) E D E E D
F F E J Note) F E F F E
H Note) M F L Note) M F G M F
J Note) N G M Note) N G H Note) N G
K Note) P H P H J Note) P H
L Note) Q K Q K K Note) Q K
M Note) R L R L L Note) R L
N Note) S Z S Z M Note) S Z
T Note) Since the
T Note) Since the
N Note) T Note) Since the
U bracket is U bracket is U bracket is
V attached to the V attached to the V attached to the
W resin body type W resin body type W resin body type
H, J, K, L, M, N, H, J, L, M, “XB” H, J, K, L, M, N,
Y “XB” cannot be Y cannot be Y “XB” cannot be
Z1A selected. Z1A selected. Z1A selected.
Z1B Z1B Z1B
Z1C Z1C Z1C
Z1U Z1U Z1U
Z1D Z1D Z1D
Z1E Z1E Z1E
Z1K Z1K Z1K
Z1L Z1L Z1L
Z1M Z1M Z1M
Z1W Z1W Z1W
Z1N Z1N Z1N
Z1P Z1P Z1P
Z1Q Z1Q Z1Q
Z1R Z1R Z1R
Z1Y Z1Y Z1Y
Z1S Z1S Z1S
Z1T Z1T Z1T
Z2K Z2K Z2K
Z2L Z2L Z2L
Z2M Z2M Z2M
Z2N Z2N Z2N
Z2P Z2P Z2P
Z2Q Z2Q Z2Q
Z2R Z2R Z2R
Z2S Z2S Z2S
Z2W Z2W Z2W
Z2T Z2T Z2T
Z3A Z3A Z3A
Z3B Z3B Z3B
Z3C Z3C Z3C
Z3D Z3D Z3D
Z3E Z3E Z3E
Z3F Z3F Z3F
Z3G Z3G Z3G
Z3H Z3H Z3H
Z3V Z3V Z3V
Z3J Z3J Z3J
24
UL-compliant Series VX21/22/23
Refer to pages 21 to 23 for electrical options, other options,
and bracket/electrical entry direction.
Specifications
For Water
VX212 Valve type: N.C. VX222 Valve type: N.C. VX232 Valve type: N.C.
Size, Voltage, Size, Voltage, Size, Voltage,
Body Other With Body Other With Body Other With
Valve type, Electrical entry, Valve type, Electrical entry, Valve type, Electrical entry,
material options bracket material options bracket material options bracket
Fluid Electrical options Fluid Electrical options Fluid Electrical options
VX212 A A Nil Nil VX222 A A Nil Nil VX232 A A Nil Nil
B B A XB B B A XB B B A XB
C C B D C B C C B
For Air
D D C E D C D D C
E E D H E D E E D
F F E J F E F F E
H M F L M F G M F
J N G M N G H N G
For Medium
K P H P H J P H
Vacuum
L Q K Q K K Q K
M R L R L L R L
N S Z S Z M S Z
T T N T
U U P U
For Water
V V V
W W W
Y Y Y
Z1A Z1A Z1A
Z1B Z1B Z1B
Z1C Z1C Z1C
Z1U Z1U Z1U
For Oil
Z1D Z1D Z1D
Z1E Z1E Z1E
Z1K Z1K Z1K
Z1L Z1L Z1L
Z1M Z1M Z1M
For Steam
Z1W Z1W Z1W
Z1N Z1N Z1N
Z1P Z1P Z1P
Z1Q Z1Q Z1Q
Z1R Z1R Z1R
Z1Y Z1Y Z1Y
Z1S Z1S Z1S
Z1T Z1T Z1T
Special Options
Z2K Z2K Z2K
Z2L Z2L Z2L
Z2M Z2M Z2M
Z2N Z2N Z2N
Z2P Z2P Z2P
Z2Q Z2Q Z2Q Construction
Z2R Z2R Z2R
Z2S Z2S Z2S
Z2W Z2W Z2W
Z2T Z2T Z2T
Z3A Z3A Z3A
Z3B Z3B Z3B
Dimensions
Z3C Z3C Z3C

Z3D Z3D Z3D
Z3E Z3E Z3E
Z3F Z3F Z3F
Z3G Z3G Z3G
Z3H Z3H Z3H
Z3V Z3V Z3V
Z3J Z3J Z3J
25
Series VX21/22/23
Construction/Single Unit
Body material: AIuminum, C37, Stainless steel Body material: Resin
q q
w w
e e
r r
t t
y y
IN OUT IN OUT
u
u
Component Parts Component Parts
No. Description Material No. Description Material
1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin 1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin
2 Core Fe 2 Core Fe
3 Tube Stainless steel 3 Tube Stainless steel
4 Spring Stainless steel 4 Spring Stainless steel
5 Armature assembly NBR, FKM, Stainless steel 5 Armature assembly NBR, FKM, Stainless steel
6 Seal NBR, FKM 6 Seal NBR, FKM
7 Body Aluminum, C37, Stainless steel 7 Body Resin (PBT)

Body material: AIuminum, C37, Stainless steel Body material: Resin
q t q t
w y w y
e u e u
r i r i
IN OUT IN OUT
o o
Component Parts Component Parts
1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin 1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin
2 Sleeve assembly Stainless steel, Resin (PPS) 2 Sleeve assembly Stainless steel, Resin (PPS)
3 Push rod assembly Resin (PPS), Stainless steel, NBR, FKM 3 Push rod assembly Resin (PPS), Stainless steel, NBR, FKM
4 Spring Stainless steel 4 Spring Stainless steel
5 O-ring A NBR, FKM 5 O-ring A NBR, FKM
6 O-ring B NBR, FKM 6 O-ring B NBR, FKM
7 Adapter Resin (PPS) 7 Adapter Resin (PPS)
8 O-ring C NBR, FKM 8 O-ring C NBR, FKM
9 Body Aluminum, C37, Stainless steel 9 Body Resin (PBT)
26
Construction/Manifold
Normally Closed (N.C.) Common SUP type (for air)
Specifications
Individual SUP type (for medium vacuum)
Base material: Aluminum
q q
w w
e e
r r
For Air
t t
y y
u u
i i
For Medium
Vacuum
OUT IN
o o
IN port OUT port
Component Parts
For Water
No. Description Material
1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin
2 Core Fe
3 Tube Stainless steel
4 Spring Stainless steel
5 Armature assembly NBR, FKM, Stainless steel
6 Seal NBR, FKM
For Oil
7 Body Resin (PPS)
8 Gasket NBR, FKM
9 Base Aluminum
For Steam
Base material: Aluminum Common SUP type (for air) Individual SUP type (for medium vacuum)
q q
t t
Special Options
w y w y
e u e u
r i r i
o o Construction
!0 !0
OUT !1 IN !1
Dimensions
IN port OUT port
Component Parts
1 Solenoid coil Cu + Fe + Resin 7 Adapter Resin (PPS)
2 Sleeve assembly Stainless steel, Resin (PPS) 8 O-ring C NBR, FKM
3 Push rod assembly Resin (PPS), Stainless steel, NBR, FKM 9 Body Resin (PPS)
4 Spring Stainless steel 10 Gasket NBR, FKM
5 O-ring A NBR, FKM 11 Base Aluminum
6 O-ring B NBR, FKM
27
Series VX21/22/23
For Air
Dimensions/Body Material: Aluminum

Grommet Grommet (with surge voltage suppressor)
D ≈ 300 Q F D ≈ 300 Q F
R
C
C
R
(1.5)
(1.5)
E
E
Y
Y
2xP A B1 2xP A B1
Port size B Port size B
W
M
M
U
U
2 x ø5.3 X 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting hole Mounting hole
DIN terminal Conduit terminal

Cable ø6 to ø12 Q F
D S Q±2 F
G1/2 S±2
(44)
31.5
32
25
T
C
C
R
R
G1/2
(1.5)
(1.5)
E
Y
2xP A B1 2xP A B1
W
W
M
M
U
2 x ø5.3 X 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting hole Mounting hole
(mm)
Port size Mounting bracket dimensions
Size
P A B B1 C D E F
M U W X Y
1 1/8, 1/4 19 43 21 61 (67) 30 9.5 20 12.8 46 36 11 6
2 1/4, 3/8 24 45 22.5 76 (84) 35 12 22 19 56 46 13 7
1/4, 3/8 24 45 22.5 81 (89) 40 12 24.5 19 56 46 13 7
3
1/2 30 50 25 86.5 40 15 24.5 — — — — —
Electrical entry
Port size Grommet
Size Grommet DIN terminal Conduit terminal
P (with surge voltage suppressor)
Q R Q R Q R S Q R S T
1 1/8, 1/4 27 42 (47.5) 30 28.5 (34) 64.5 34 (39.5) 52.5 99.5 36 (41.5) 68.5 77 (83)
2 1/4, 3/8 29.5 53.5 (61.5) 32.5 39.5 (47.5) 67 45 (53) 55 102 47 (55) 71 91 (99)
1/4, 3/8 32 58 (66) 35 44.5 (52.5) 69.5 50 (58) 57.5 104.5 52 (60) 73.5 96 (104)
3
1/2 32 61 35 47.5 69.5 53 57.5 104.5 55 73.5 101.5
( ): Denotes the Normally Open (N.O.) dimensions.
28
Air
Dimensions/Body Material: Aluminum
Specifications
Conduit Flat terminal type
≈ 280 Q F 11 Q F
G1/2
23
For Air
R
C
C
R
(1.5)
(1.5)
E
Y
Y
A B1 A B1
2xP 2xP
For Medium
B B
Vacuum
Port size Port size
Terminal part
W
W
M
M
U
U
Flat terminal connector
For Water
250 Series
2 x ø5.3 X 11 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting hole 9 Mounting hole
6.5
For Oil
15
For Steam
Special Options
(mm)
Size A B B1 C D E F
P M U W X Y
1 1/8, 1/4 19 43 21 61 (67) 30 9.5 20 12.8 46 36 11 6
2 1/4, 3/8 24 45 22.5 76 (84) 35 12 22 19 56 46 13 7
1/4, 3/8 24 45 22.5 81 (89) 40 12 24.5 19 56 46 13 7 Construction
3
1/2 30 50 25 86.5 40 15 24.5 — — — — —
Electrical entry
Port size
Size Conduit Flat terminal type
P
Q R Q R
1 1/8, 1/4 47.5 36 (41.5) 23 42 (47.5)
2 1/4, 3/8 50 47 (55) 25.5 53.5 (61.5)
Dimensions
1/4, 3/8 52.5 52 (60) 28 58 (66)

3
1/2 52.5 55 28 61
29
Series VX21/22/23
For Air
Dimensions/Body Material: Resin

Y Y
Grommet W
Grommet (with surge W
voltage suppressor)
U
U
X
X
U1
U1
X1
X1
D ≈ 300 Q F 2 x ø3.4 D ≈ 300 Q F 2 x ø3.4
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
R
C
C
R
1.2
1.2
E
E
2xP B1 2xP B1
DIN terminal Y Conduit terminal Y

W W
U
U
X
X
U1
U1
X1
X1
Cable ø6 to ø12
Q F 2 x ø3.4 2 x ø3.4
D S Mounting D Mounting
G1/2 34 Q±2 F
hole hole
(44)
31.5
32
25
T
C
C
R
R
G1/2
1.2
1.2
E
S±2
2xP B1 2xP B1
(mm)
One-touch Mounting bracket dimensions
Size B B1 C D E F
fitting P U U1 W X X1 Y
For information on handling 1 ø6, ø8 53.5 29 65.5 (71.5) 30 13.5 20 45 22.5 22 52 26 30
One-touch fittings and appropriate 2 ø8, ø10 66 36 76.5 (84.5) 35 15 22 53 26.5 27 62 31 35
tubing, refer to page 48 and KQ2 3 ø10, ø12 68 37 84 (92) 40 16.5 24.5 58 29 31 67 33.5 40
series One-touch fittings in Best Electrical entry
Pneumatics No. 6. One-touch Grommet (with surge
The KQ2 series information can be fitting P voltage suppressor)
downloaded from the following Q R Q R Q R S Q R S T
SMC website, 1 ø6, ø8 27 42.5 (48) 30 29 (34.5) 64.5 34.5 (40) 52.5 99.5 36.5 (42) 68.5 81.5 (87)
2 ø8, ø10 29.5 51 (59) 32.5 37 (45) 67 43 (50.5) 55 102 45 (52.5) 71 91.5 (99.5)
http://www.smcworld.com
3 ø10, ø12 32 56.5 (64.5) 35 43 (51) 69.5 48.5 (56.5) 57.5 104.5 50.5 (58.5) 73.5 98.5 (106.5)
30
Air
Dimensions/Body Material: Resin
Specifications
Conduit Flat terminal
Y Y
W W
U
X
For Air
U1
U1
X1
X1
2 x ø3.4 2 x ø3.4
Mounting Mounting
D ≈ 280 Q F hole D 11 Q F hole
G1/2
For Medium
Vacuum
23
R
C
C
R
1.2
1.2
For Water
E
E
2xP B1 2xP B1
Terminal part
For Oil
250 Series
11
9
6.5
For Steam
15
Special Options
(mm)
Electrical entry
One-touch Mounting bracket dimensions
Size
fitting P
B B1 C D E F Conduit Flat terminal
U U1 W X X1 Y Q R Q R
1 ø6, ø8 53.5 29 65.5 (71.5) 30 13.5 20 45 22.5 22 52 26 30 47.5 36.5 (42) 23 42.5 (48)
2 ø8, ø10 66 36 76.5 (84.5) 35 15 22 53 26.5 27 62 31 35 50 45 (52.5) 25.5 51 (59)
3 ø10, ø12 68 37 84 (92) 40 16.5 24.5 58 29 31 67 33.5 40 52.5 50.5 (58.5) 28 56.5 (64.5)
Construction
Dimensions
31
Series VX21/22/23
For Medium Vacuum, Water, Oil
Dimensions/Body Material: C37, Stainless Steel

Grommet Grommet (with surge voltage suppressor)
D ≈ 300 Q F D ≈ 300 Q F
C
C
R
R
1.5
1.5
E
E
A B1 A B1
Y
Y
2xP B 2xP B
Port size Port size
W
M
W
U
M
X X
2 x ø5.3 2 x ø5.3
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
DIN terminal Conduit terminal
D Cable ø6 to ø12 Q F
S D
G1/2
34 Q±2 F
(44)
31.5
32
25
T
C
C
R
R
1.5
1.5
S±2
E
A B1 A
E
Y
2xP B 2xP B1
Port size Port size B
W
M
W
M
2 x ø5.3 X 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
(mm)
Size
P A B B1 C D E F
M U W X Y
1 1/8, 1/4 19 43 21 61 (67) 30 9.5 20 12.8 46 36 11 6
2 1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 74.5 (82.5) 35 10.5 22 19 56 46 13 7
1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 79 (87) 40 10.5 24.5 19 56 46 13 7
3 — — — — —
1/2 29.5 50 25 85.5 40 14 24.5
Electrical entry
Port size Grommet (with surge
P voltage suppressor)
Q R Q R Q R S Q R S T
1 1/8, 1/4 27 42 (47.5) 30 28.5 (34) 64.5 34 (39.5) 52.5 99.5 36 (41.5) 68.5 77 (83)
2 1/4, 3/8 29.5 53.5 (61.5) 32.5 39.5 (47.5) 67 45 (53) 55 102 47 (55) 71 89.5 (97.5)
1/4, 3/8 32 57.5 (65.5) 35 44 (52) 69.5 49.5 (57.5) 57.5 104.5 51.5 (59.5) 73.5 94 (102)
3
1/2 32 61 35 47.5 69.5 53 57.5 104.5 55 73.5 100.5
32
Medium Water Oil
vacuum
Specifications
Conduit Flat terminal
G1/2 D ≈ 280 Q F D 11 Q F
For Air
C
C
R
R
1.5
1.5
A B1 A B1
E
E
Y
Y
B B
For Medium
2xP 2xP
Vacuum
Port size Port size
Terminal part
For Water
W
W
M
M
U
U
250 Series
11
2 x ø5.3 X 9 2 x ø5.3 X
6.5
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
15
For Oil
For Steam
Special Options
Construction
(mm)
Size
P A B B1 C D E F
M U W X Y
1 1/8, 1/4 19 43 21 61 (67) 30 9.5 20 12.8 46 36 11 6
2 1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 74.5 (82.5) 35 10.5 22 19 56 46 13 7
1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 79 (87) 40 10.5 24.5 19 56 46 13 7
3
Dimensions
1/2 29.5 50 25 85.5 40 14 24.5 — — — — —

Electrical entry
Port size
Size Conduit Flat terminal
P
Q R Q R
1 1/8, 1/4 47.5 36 (41.5) 23 42 (47.5)
2 1/4, 3/8 50 47 (55) 25.5 53.5 (61.5)
1/4, 3/8 52.5 51.5 (59.5) 28 57.5 (65.5)
3
1/2 52.5 55 28 61
33
Series VX21/22/23
For Steam

Grommet Conduit terminal
D
≈ 300 Q F 34 Q±2 F
D (42) ≈ 40
32
25
T
C
C
R
R
For steam and heated water
With full-wave rectifier
(AC type only)
1.5
1.5
A B1 A S±2
E
E
Y
Y
B B1
2xP 2xP
B
Port size Port size
W
W
M
M
U
U
2 x ø5.3 X 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
Conduit DIN terminal
D Cable ø6 to ø12 Q F
≈ 280 Q F S
D G1/2
G1/2 (42) ≈ 45
(44)
31.5
23
C
R
For steam and heated water

C
R
With full-wave rectifier

(AC type only)
1.5
1.5
B1
E
A
Y
B A B1
Y
2xP
Port size 2xP B
Port size
W
W
M
M
U
2 x ø5.3 X 2 x ø5.3 X
Mounting Mounting
hole hole
(mm)
Size
P A B B1 C D E F
M U W X Y
1 1/8, 1/4 19 43 21 61 (67) 30 9.5 20 12.8 46 36 11 6
2 1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 74.5 (82.5) 35 10.5 22 19 56 46 13 7
1/4, 3/8 22 45 22.5 79 (87) 40 10.5 24.5 19 56 46 13 7
3
1/2 29.5 50 25 85.5 40 14 24.5 — — — — —
Electrical entry
Size Port size Grommet Conduit terminal Conduit DIN terminal
P
Q R Q R S T Q R Q R S
1 1/8, 1/4 27 42 (47.5) 108 36 (41.5) 77 77 (83) 47.5 36 (41.5) 64.5 34 (39.5) 52.5
2 1/4, 3/8 29.5 53.5 (61.5) 110.5 47 (55) 79.5 89.5 (97.5) 50 47 (55) 67 45 (53) 55
1/4, 3/8 32 57.5 (65.5) 113 51.5 (59.5) 82 94 (102) 52.5 51.5 (59.5) 69.5 49.5 (57.5) 57.5
3
1/2 32 61 113 55 82 100.5 52.5 55 69.5 53 57.5
Flat terminal is not available for valves for steam and heated water.
34
Air Medium
vacuum
Specifications
Dimensions/Manifold/Base Material: Aluminum
2 x 3/8 <Common port>

IN port (For common SUP type)
OUT port (For individual SUP type)
L2
K L1 K Plug∗
2 x øM
Mounting P F N D
hole
For Air
C
H
B
A
Q6
Q1
Q2
J
Q5
S1
Q3
S2
For Medium
11
Vacuum
Q4
≈ 300
≈ 300
≈ 280
G1/2
For Water
32 25
∗ D side port does not have a plug.

D side Stations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 U side
Cable ø6 to ø12
G1/2
G1/2
For Oil
(44)
T
R1, R6
R4
R5
R3
R2
For Steam
E
D
F F
n x 1/8,1/4 <Individual port>
OUT port (For common SUP type)
IN port (For individual SUP type)
Special Options
(mm)
n (stations)
Size Dimensions
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L1 86 122 158 194 230 266 302 338 374
1
L2 100 136 172 208 244 280 316 352 388
L1 90 126 162 198 234 270 306 342 378
2
L2 108 144 180 216 252 288 324 360 396
Construction
L1 103 144 185 226 267 308 349 390 431
3
L2 121 162 203 244 285 326 367 408 449
Size A B C D E F H J K M N P
1 38 15.5 10.5 11 25 32 20 12 7 6.5 50.5 (56.5) 36
2 49 18 13 13 30 36 22 15 9 8.5 60.5 (68.5) 36
3
Dimensions
49 20.5 13 13 30 40 24.5 15 9 8.5 65.5 (73.5) 41
DIN terminal∗
Grommet (With surge
Grommet Conduit terminal Conduit Flat terminal
Size voltage suppressor)
Q1 R1 Q2 R2 Q3 R3 S1 Q4 R4 S2 T Q5 R5 Q6 R6
1 27 40.5 (46.5) 30 27 (33) 64.5 32.5 (38.5) 52.5 99.5 34.5 (40.5) 68.5 66.5 (72) 47.5 34.5 (40.5) 23 40.5 (46.5)
2 29.5 49.5 (57.5) 32.5 36 (44) 67 41.5 (49.5) 55 102 43.5 (51.5) 71 75.5 (83.5) 50 43.5 (51.5) 25.5 49.5 (57.5)
3 32 54.5 (63) 35 41 (49) 69.5 46.5 (54.5) 57.5 104.5 48.5 (56.5) 73.5 80.5 (89.5) 52.5 48.5 (56.5) 28 54.5 (63)
∗ When using a DIN terminal that faces downward, be careful of interference in the electrical wires and piping.
35
Series VX21/22/23
For Air, Medium Vacuum, Water, Oil and Steam
Replacement Parts
¡DIN Connector Part No.
<For Class B Coil> <For Class H Coil>
Electrical option Rated voltage Connector part no. Electrical option Rated voltage Connector part no.
24 VDC 24 VDC GDM2A-G-S5
12 VDC 100 VAC
100 VAC 110 VAC
110 VAC 200 VAC
200 VAC None 220 VAC
None C18312G6GCU GDM2A-R
220 VAC 230 VAC
230 VAC 240 VAC
240 VAC 24 VAC
24 VAC 48 VAC
48 VAC 24 VDC GDM2A-G-Z5
24 VDC GDM2A-L5 100 VAC GDM2A-R-L1
12 VDC GDM2A-L6 110 VAC GDM2A-R-L1
100 VAC GDM2A-L1 200 VAC GDM2A-R-L2
110 VAC GDM2A-L1 With light 220 VAC GDM2A-R-L2
With light
24 VAC GDM2A-L5
48 VAC GDM2A-L15
∗ Select an appropriate DIN connector suitable for the coil insulation type.
¡Gasket Part No. for DIN Connector

VCW20-1-29-1 (For Class B Coil)
VCW20-1-29-1-F (For Class H Coil)
¡Lead Wire Assembly for Flat Terminal

(Set of 2 pcs.)
VX021S-1-16FB
¡Bracket Assembly Part No. (for Metal Body)

VX02 N 12A
1 For VX2 14
For VX2 25
2
For VX2 36
∗ 2 mounting screws are shipped together with the bracket assembly.

∗ On the bottom side of the standard body, there is no female thread for mounting a bracket.
Please select XNB.
36
Series VX21/22/23
Glossary of Terms
Pressure Terminology Electrical Terminology
1. Maximum operating pressure differential Second Characteristics:
The maximum pressure differential (the difference between the in- Degrees of protection against water
let and outlet pressure) which is allowed for operation. When the 0 Non-protected —
1 Protected against vertically falling water drops Dripproof type 1
outlet pressure is 0 MPa, this becomes the maximum operating
Protected against vertically falling water drops
pressure. 2 when enclosure tilted up to 15° Dripproof type 2
2. Minimum operating pressure differential 3 Protected against rainfall when enclosure tilted up to 60° Rainproof type
4 Protected against splashing water Splashproof type
The minimum pressure differential (the difference between the in-
5 Protected against water jets Water-jet-proof type
let pressure and outlet pressure) required to keep the main valve 6 Protected against powerful water jets Powerful water-jet-proof type
fully open. 7 Protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water Immersible type
8 Protected against the effects of continuous immersion in water Submersible type
3. Maximum system pressure
The maximum pressure that can be applied inside the pipelines Example) IP65: Dust-tight, Water-jet-proof type
(line pressure). “Water-jet-proof type” means that no water intrudes in-
[The pressure differential of the solenoid valve portion must not side an equipment that could hinder from operating nor-
mally by means of applying water for 3 minutes in the
exceed the maximum operating pressure differential.]
prescribed manner. Take appropriate protection mea-
4. Withstand pressure sures, since a device is not usable in an environment
The pressure in which the valve must be withstood without a drop where a droplet of water is splashed constantly.
in performance after holding for one minute under prescribed
pressure and returning to the operating pressure range. [value un-
Others
der the prescribed conditions] 1. Material
NBR: Nitrile rubber
Electrical Terminology FKM: Fluororubber
EPDM: Ethylene propylene rubber
1. Apparent power (VA)
2. Oil-free treatment
Volt-ampere is the product of voltage (V) and current (A).
The degreasing and washing of wetted parts
Power consumption (W): For AC, W = V·A·cos θ.
For DC, W = V·A. 3. Symbol
Note) cos θ shows power factor. cos θ ≈ 0.9 In the symbol ( ), when the valve is closed, flow is blocked
from port 1 to port 2. However, if the pressure in port 2 is higher
2. Surge voltage
than port 1, the valve will not be able to block the fluid and it will flow
A high voltage which is momentarily generated by shutting off the
from port 2 to port 1.
power in the shut-off area.
3. Degree of protection
A degree defined in the “JIS C 0920: Waterproof test of electric
Flat Terminal
machinery/appliance and the degree of protection against the in- Flat terminal/Electrical connection size of molded coil
trusion of solid foreign objects.”
Verify the degree of protection for each product.
IP
6.35
First Second
characteristic characteristic
numeral numeral
3.4
First Characteristics: 8
Degrees of protection against solid foreign objects
0 Non-protected
1 Protected against solid foreign objects of 50 mmø and greater
0.8
2 Protected against solid foreign objects of 12 mmø and greater

3 Protected against solid foreign objects of 2.5 mmø and greater
Chamfer
4 Protected against solid foreign objects of 1.0 mmø and greater
5 Dust-protected
6 Dust-tight
37
Series VX21/22/23
Solenoid Valve Flow-rate Characteristics
(How to indicate flow-rate characteristics)
1. Indication of flow-rate characteristics
The flow-rate characteristics in equipment such as a solenoid valve etc. are indicated in their specifications as
shown in Table (1).
Table (1) Indication of Flow-rate Characteristics
Corresponding Indication by Other
Conformed standard
equipment international standard indications
ISO 6358: 1989
C, b —
JIS B 8390: 2000
Pneumatic
JIS B 8390: 2000
equipment S
— Equipment: JIS B 8373, 8374, 8375, 8379, 8381
Cv ANSI/(NFPA)T3.21.3: 1990
Process fluid Av — IEC60534-2-3: 1997
control JIS B 2005: 1995
equipment — Cv Equipment: JIS B 8471, 8472, 8473
2. Pneumatic equipment
2.1 Indication according to the international standards
(1) Conformed standard
ISO 6358: 1989 : Pneumatic fluid power—Components using compressible fluids—
Determination of flow-rate characteristics
JIS B 8390: 2000 : Pneumatic fluid power—Components using compressible fluids—
How to test flow-rate characteristics
(2) Definition of flow-rate characteristics
The flow-rate characteristics are indicated as a result of a comparison between sonic conductance C and
critical pressure ratio b.
Sonic conductance C : Value which divides the passing mass flow rate of an equipment in a choked flow
condition by the product of the upstream absolute pressure and the density in a
standard condition.
Critical pressure ratio b : Pressure ratio (downstream pressure/upstream pressure) which will turn to a choked
flow when the value is smaller than this ratio.
Choked flow : The flow in which the upstream pressure is higher than the downstream pressure and
where sonic speed in a certain part of an equipment is reached.
Gaseous mass flow rate is in proportion to the upstream pressure and not dependent
on the downstream pressure.
Subsonic flow : Flow greater than the critical pressure ratio
Standard condition : Air in a temperature state of 68°F (20°C), absolute pressure 15 psi [0.1 MPa] (= 100
kPa = 1 bar), relative humidity 65%.
It is stipulated by adding the “(ANR)” after the unit depicting air volume.
(standard reference atmosphere)
Conformed standard: ISO 8778: 1990 Pneumatic fluid power—Standard reference
atmosphere, JIS B 8393: 2000: Pneumatic fluid power—Standard reference atmosphere
(3) Formula for flow rate
It is described by the practical units as following.
P2 + 0.1
When ———— ≤ b, choked flow
P1 + 0.1
293
Q = 600 x C (P1 + 0.1) ———— ································································ (1)
273 + t
When P 2 + 0.1
———— > b, subsonic flow
P1 + 0.1
2
P2 + 0.1
———— – b
P1 + 0.1 293
Q = 600 x C (P1 + 0.1) 1 – —————— ———— ···························· (2)
1–b 273 + t
Q : Air flow rate [dm3/min (ANR)], dm3 (Cubic decimeter) of SI unit are also allowed to be described by L (liter).
1 dm3 = 1 L
38
Solenoid Valve Flow-rate Characteristics Series VX21/22/23
C : Sonic conductance [dm3/(s·bar)]

b : Critical pressure ratio [—]
P1 : Upstream pressure [MPa]
P2 : Downstream pressure [MPa]
t : Temperature [°C]
Note) Formula of subsonic flow is the elliptic analogous curve.
Flow-rate characteristics are shown in Graph (1) For details, please make use of SMC’s “Energy Saving
Program.”
Example)
Obtain the air flow rate for P1 = 0.4 [MPa], P2 = 0.3 [MPa], t = 20 [°C] when a solenoid valve is performed in
C = 2 [dm3/(s·bar)] and b = 0.3.
293
According to formula 1, the maximum flow rate = 600 x 2 x (0.4 + 0.1) x ————— = 600 [dm3/min (ANR)]
273 + 20
0.3 + 0.1
Pressure ratio = ————— = 0.8
0.4 + 0.1
Based on Graph (1), the flow rate will be 0.7 when the pressure ratio is 0.8 and b = 0.3.
Hence, flow rate = Maximum flow rate x flow rate ratio = 600 x 0.7 = 420 [dm3/min (ANR)]
1 0.5
0.9
b = 0.1 0.6
0.8
0.2
0.7
Flow rate ratio
0.3
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.3 P1 Equipment P2
0.2 C, b
Q
0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Pressure ratio (P2 + 0.1) / (P1 + 0.1)
(4) Test method Graph (1) Flow-rate characteristics

Attach a test equipment with the test circuit shown in Fig. (1) while maintaining the upstream pressure to a
certain level which does not go below 0.3 MPa. Next, measure the maximum flow to be saturated in the first
place, then measure this flow rate at 80%, 60%, 40%, 20% and the upstream and downstream pressure. And
then, obtain the sonic conductance C from this maximum flow rate. Besides that, substitute each data of
others for the subsonic flow formula to find b, then obtain the critical pressure ratio b from that average.
Pressure gauge or
pressure convertor
Thermometer
Differential pressure gauge or
differential pressure converter
ød1
Pressure control
equipment ød3 ≥ 3d1
Flow control
3d3
valve
ød2
Air Filter Shut off

≥ 10d3 10d1 3d1 10d2 3d2 Flow meter
supply valve
Pipe for measuring Equipment
temperature for test
Pipe for Pipe for
measuring measuring
pressure in the pressure in the
upstream side downstream side
Fig. (1) Test circuit based on ISO 6358, JIS B 8390
39
Series VX21/22/23
2.2 Effective area S

JIS B 8390: 2000: Pneumatic fluid power—Components using compressible fluids—
Determination of flow rate characteristics
Equipment standards: JIS B 8373: 2 port solenoid valve for pneumatics
JIS B 8374: 3 port solenoid valve for pneumatics
JIS B 8375: 4 port, 5 port solenoid valve for pneumatics
JIS B 8379: Silencer for pneumatics
JIS B 8381: Fittings of flexible joint for pneumatics
Effective area S : The cross-sectional area having an ideal throttle without friction deduced from the calcula-
tion of the pressure changes inside an air tank or without reduced flow when discharging
the compressed air in a choked flow, from an equipment attached to the air tank. This is the
same concept representing the “easy to run through” as sonic conductance C.
(3) Formula for flow rate
When P2 + 0.1
———— ≤ 0.5, choked flow
P1 + 0.1
293
Q = 120 x S (P1 + 0.1) ———— ··································································(3)
273 + t
When P 2 + 0.1
———— > 0.5, subsonic flow
P1 + 0.1
293
Q = 240 x S (P2 + 0.1) (P1 – P2) ———— ··············································(4)
273 + t
Conversion with sonic conductance C :
S = 5.0 x C·······································································································(5)
Q : Air flow rate[dm3/min(ANR)], dm3 (cubic decimeter) of SI unit are also allowed to be described by L (liter)
1 dm3 = 1 L
S : Effective area [mm2]
P1 : Upstream pressure [MPa]
t : Temperature [°C]
Note) Formula for subsonic flow (4) is only applicable when the critical pressure ratio b is the unknown
equipment. In the formula (2) by the sonic conductance C, it is the same formula as when b = 0.5.
(4) Test method
Attach a test equipment with the test circuit shown in Fig. (2) in order to discharge air into the atmosphere
until the pressure inside the air tank goes down to 0.25 MPa (0.2 MPa) from an air tank filled with the
compressed air at a certain pressure level (0.5 MPa) which does not go below 0.6 MPa. At this time, measure
the discharging time and the residual pressure inside the air tank which had been left until it turned to be the
normal values to determine the effective area S, using the following formula. The volume of an air tank should
be selected within the specified range by corresponding to the effective area of an equipment for test. In the
case of JIS B 8373, 8374, 8375, 8379, 8381, the pressure values are in parentheses and the coefficient of the
formula is 12.9.
V Ps + 0.1
t (
P + 0.1
293
T )
S = 12.1 — log10 ————— —— ·················(6)
Thermometer
Pressure switch
Power
supply
Solenoid
S : Effective area [mm2] Pressure control
equipment
Control
circuit
valve
V : Air tank capacity [dm3] Equipment
for test
t : Discharging time [s] Air tank
Ps : Pressure inside air tank
Rectifier tube on the
Rectifier tube on the
Air Filter Shut off Pressure gauge

downstream side
before discharging [MPa] supply valve or pressure

upstream side
P : Residual pressure inside air tank convertor

Timer (Clock)
after discharging [MPa] Pressure recorder
T : Temperature inside air tank
before discharging [K]
Fig. (2) Test circuit based on JIS B 8390
40
Solenoid Valve Flow-rate Characteristics Series VX21/22/23
2.3 Flow coefficient Cv factor

The United States Standard ANSI/(NFPA)T3.21.3: 1990: Pneumatic fluid power—Flow rating test proce-
dure and reporting method for fixed orifice components
Defines the Cv factor of flow coefficient by the following formula which is based on the test conducted by the
test circuit analogous to ISO 6358.
Q
Cv = ——————————— ·········································································(7)
∆P (P2 + Pa)
114.5 ——————
T1
∆P : Pressure drop between the static pressure tapping ports [bar]
P1 : Pressure of the upstream tapping port [bar gauge]
P2 : Pressure of the downstream tapping port [bar gauge]: P2 = P1 – ∆P
Q : Flow rate [dm3/s standard condition]
Pa : Atmospheric pressure [bar absolute]
T1 : Upstream absolute temperature [K]
Test conditions are < P1 + Pa = 6.5 ±0.2 bar absolute, T1 = 297 ±5 K, 0.07 bar ≤ ∆P ≤ 0.14 bar.
This is the same concept as effective area A which ISO 6358 stipulates as being applicable only when the
pressure drop is smaller than the upstream pressure and the compression of air does not become a problem.
3. Process fluid control equipment
IEC60534-2-3: 1997: Industrial process control valves. Part 2: Flow capacity, Section Three-Test proce-
dures
JIS B 2005: 1995: Test method for the flow coefficient of a valve
Equipment standards: JIS B 8471: Solenoid valve for water
JIS B 8472: Solenoid valve for steam
JIS B 8473: Solenoid valve for fuel oil
Av factor: Value of the clean water flow rate represented by m3/s which runs through a valve (equipment for
test) when the pressure difference is 1 Pa. It is calculated using the following formula.
ρ
Av = Q ———— ····························································································(8)
∆P
Av : Flow coefficient [m2]
Q : Flow rate [m3/s]
∆P : Pressure difference [Pa]
ρ : Fluid density [kg/m3]
(3) Formula of flow rate
It is described by the practical units. Also, the flow-rate characteristics are shown in Graph (2).
In the case of liquid:
∆P
Q = 1.9 x 106Av ———— ···············································································(9)
G
Q : Flow rate [L/min]
∆P : Pressure difference [MPa]
G : Relative density [water = 1]
In the case of saturated aqueous vapor:
Q = 8.3 x 106Av ∆P(P2 + 0.1) ·······································································(10)
Q : Flow rate [kg/h]
∆P : Pressure difference [MPa]
P1 : Upstream pressure [MPa]: ∆P = P1 – P2
41
Series VX21/22/23
Conversion of flow coefficient:

Av = 28 x 10–6 Kv = 24 x 10–6 Cv ···········································································(11)
Here,
Kv factor : Value of the clean water flow rate represented by m3/h which runs through a valve
at 5 to 40°C, when the pressure difference is 1 bar.
Cv factor (Reference values): Figures representing the flow rate of clean water by US gal/min which runs
through a valve at 60°F, when the pressure difference is 1 lbf/in2 (psi).
Value is different from Kv and Cv factors for pneumatic purpose due to different test method.
3 3
Water flow rate Q0 [L/min] (When Av = 1 x 10–6 [m2])

Saturated steam flow rate Q0 [kg/h] (when Av = 1 x 10–6 [m2])
2 Upstream pressure 2
P1 = 1 MPa
P1 = 0.8 MPa
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 Example 2 P1 = 0.6 MPa 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 P1 = 0.5 MPa 0.6
P1 = 0.4 MPa
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
P1 = 0.3 MPa Example 1
0.3 0.3
P1 = 0.2 MPa
0.2 0.2
P1 = 0.1 MPa
0.1 0.1
0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.1
Pressure differential ∆P [MPa]
Graph (2) Flow-rate characteristics

Example 1)
Obtain the pressure difference when water 15 [L/min] runs through a solenoid valve with an Av = 45 x 10–6 [m2].
Since Q0 = 15/45 = 0.33 [L/min], according to Graph (2), if reading ∆P when Q0 is 0.33, it will be 0.031 [MPa].
Example 2)
Obtain the saturated steam flow rate when P1 = 0.8 [MPa], ∆P = 0.008 [MPa] with a solenoid valve with an
Av =1.5 x 10–6 [m2 ].
According to Graph (2), if reading Q0 when P1 is 0.8 and ∆P is 0.008, it is 0.7 [kg/h]. Hence, the flow rate
Q = 0.7 x 1.5 = 1.05 [kg/h].
(4) Test method
Attach a test equipment with the test circuit shown in Fig. (3). Next, pour water at 5 to 40°C, then measure the
flow rate with a pressure difference of 0.075 MPa. However, the pressure difference needs to be set with a
large enough difference so that the Reynolds number does not go below a range of 4 x 104 .
By substituting the measurement results for formula (8) to figure out Av.
Thermometer Test range
Equipment
Pressure Pressure
for test
tap tap
Restrictor Flow Restrictor

on the meter 2d 6d on the
upstream side downstream side
≥ 20d ≥ 10d
Fig. (3) Test circuit based on IEC60534-2-3, JIS B 2005
42
Series VX21/22/23
Flow-rate Characteristics 1
Note) Use this graph as a guide. In the case of obtaining an accurate flow rate, refer to pages 38 through to 42.
For Air
Upst
Downstream pressure of valve (P2) [MPa]
1.0 ream
pres
sure
of va
lve P
0.8 1 ≈ 1.0
MPa
0.6 0.9 Subsonic

cal
0.8 Critissure
p r e
0.7
0.4 0.6 Sonic
0.5
0.4
0.2 0.3
0.2
0.1
0
ø2
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
ø3
100 200 300 400 500
ø4
400 600 800 1,000 1,200
ø5
200 600 1,000 1,400
ø7
350 700
ø8
400 700 1,000 1,300
ø10 (Connection: 1/4)
500 700
ø10 (Connection: 3/8, 1/2)
700 1,000
Flow rate Q [L/min (ANR)]
How to read the graph

The sonic range pressure to generate a flow rate of 14.1 scfm [400 L/min] (ANR) is P1 ≈ 29 psi (0.2 MPa) for a ø4 orifice and P1 ≈ 84
psi (0.58 MP)a for a ø3 orifice.
For Water
30 ø10 ø8 ø7
ø5
20 ø4, ø3
10 ø2
5
Flow rate Q [L/min]
4
3
2
0.1
0.001 (0.0018) (0.0054) 0.01 0.05 (0.07)
(0.013)
Pressure differential ∆P = (P1 − P2) [MPa]

When a water flow of 0.07 scfm (2 L/min) is generated, ∆P ≈ 1.9 psi (0.013 MPa) for a valve with ø3 orifice.
43
Series VX21/22/23
Flow-rate Characteristics 2
Note) Use this graph as a guide. In the case of obtaining an accurate flow rate, refer to pages 38 through to 42.
For Saturated Steam

(664)(183) Upst
Downstream pressure of valve (P2) [MPa]
1.0 ream
pres
(663)(179) sure
of va
0.8 (662)(174) lve P
1 ≈ 1.0
(661)(170)
MPa
0.6 (660)(164) 0.9 Subsonic cal

Criti sure
(658)(158)
0.8
pr e s
0.7
0.4 (656)(151) 0.6 Sonic
0.5
(654)(143)
0.4
0.2 (650)(133) 0.3
(646)(120) 0.2
0.1
0
ø2
5 10 15 20 25
ø3
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
ø4
10 20 30 40 50 60
ø5
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ø7
20 30
ø8
40 60
ø10 (Connection: 1/4)
30 45
ø10 (Connection: 3/8, 1/2)
35 50
Flow rate Q [kg/h]

The sonic range pressure to generate a flow rate of 15 kg/h is P1 ≈ 0.55 MPa for a ø2 orifice and P1 ≈ 0.28 MPa for a ø3 orifice.
The amount of potential heat varies somewhat based on the pressure P1. At 15 kg/h, there will be approximately 9700 kcal/h of heat.
44
VX21/22/23
Series
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read this before handling.
Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For 2 Port Solenoid Valves for Fluid Control Precautions, refer to “Handling
Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website, http://www.smcworld.com
Design Selection
Warning Warning
1. Cannot be used as an emergency shutoff valve etc. 2. Fluid quality
The valves presented in this catalog are not designed for safety
applications such as an emergency shutoff valve. If the valves are <Air>
used in this type of system, other reliable safety assurance mea- 1) Use clean air.
sures should also be adopted. Do not use compressed air that contains chemicals, synthetic
oils including organic solvents, salt or corrosive gases, etc., as
2. Extended periods of continuous energization it can cause damage or malfunction.
The solenoid coil will generate heat when continuously energized.
Avoid using in a tightly shut container. Install it in a well ventilated 2) Install an air filter.
area. Furthermore, do not touch it while it is being energized or Install air filters close to the valves on the upstream side. A fil-
right after it is energized. tration degree of 5 µm or less should be selected.
3) Install an aftercooler or air dryer, etc.
3. Liquid rings
Compressed air that contains excessive drainage may cause
In cases with a flowing liquid, provide a bypass valve in the system
malfunction of valves and other pneumatic equipment. To pre-
to prevent the liquid from entering the liquid seal circuit.
vent this, install an aftercooler or air dryer, etc.
4. Actuator drive 4) If excessive carbon powder is generated, eliminate it by in-
When an actuator, such as a cylinder, is to be driven using a valve, stalling mist separators at the upstream side of valves.
take appropriate measures to prevent potential danger caused by If excessive carbon powder is generated by the compressor, it
actuator operation. may adhere to the inside of the valves and cause a malfunction.
5. Pressure (including vacuum) holding Refer to Best Pneumatics No.5 for further details on compressed
It is not usable for an application such as holding the pressure (in- air quality.
cluding vacuum) inside of a pressure vessel because air leakage
is entailed in a valve.
6. When the conduit type is used as equivalent to an IP65 <Vacuum>
enclosure, install a wiring conduit etc. Please be aware that there is a range of pressure that can be
7. When an impact, such as water hammer etc., caused used.
by the rapid pressure fluctuation is applied, the sole- Atmospheric pressure Extreme
noid valve may be damaged. Give an attention to it. Low Medium High Ultra high high
Air pressure vacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
Hydraulic pressure
Differential
<Suction filtration, Vacuum bottle set, Suction cup>
Selection pressure
Drying
Warning Discharge/Plasma
Vapor
deposition
Neon tube/Fluorescent light
Surface
physics
1. Fluid <Accelerator, Electron microscope>
Charged
Torr particle beam
1) Type of fluid (mmHg) 102 10 1 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-12
Before using a fluid, check whether it is compatible with the ma-
terials of each model by referring to the fluids listed in this cata- Pa 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 1 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-12
log. Use a fluid with a kinematic viscosity of 50 mm2/s or less. If
there is something you do not know, please contact SMC. Vacuum piping direction: if the system uses a vacuum pump, we
2) Flammable oil, Gas ask that you install the vacuum pump on the secondary side.
Check the specifications for leakage in the interior and/or exte- Also, install a filter on the primary side, and be careful that no for-
rior area. eign object is picked up.
3) Corrosive gas Please replace the valve after operating the device approximately
Cannot be used since it will lead to cracks by stress corrosion 300,000 times.
or result in other incidents.
4) When a brass body is used, then depending on water quality,
corrosion and internal leakage may occur. If such abnormalities
occur, exchange the product for a stainless steel body.
5) Use an oil-free specification when any oily particle must not en-
ter the passage.
6) Applicable fluid on the list may not be used depending on the
operating condition. Give adequate confirmation, and then de-
termine a model, just because the compatibility list shows the
general case.
45
VX21/22/23
Series
Selection Selection
Warning Warning
<Water> 5. Low temperature operation
The use of a fluid that contains foreign objects can cause 1) The valve can be used in an ambient temperature of between
problems such as malfunction and seal failure by promoting –4 to 14°F (–20 to –10°C). However, take measures to prevent
wear of the valve seat and armature and by sticking to the freezing or solidification of impurities, etc.
sliding parts of the armature etc. Install a suitable filter (strainer) 2) When using valves for water application in cold climates, take
immediately upstream from the valve. As a general rule, use appropriate countermeasures to prevent the water from
100 mesh. freezing in tubing after cutting the water supply from the pump,
The supply water includes materials that create a hard sediment by draining the water etc. When warming by a heater etc., be
or sludge such as calcium and magnesium. Since this scale and careful not to expose the coil portion to a heater. Installation of
sludge can cause the valve to malfunction, install water soften- a dryer, heat retaining of the body is recommended to prevent a
ing equipment, and a filter (strainer) directly upstream from the freezing condition in which the dew point temperature is high
valve to remove these substances. and the ambient temperature is low, and the high flow runs.
Tap water pressure:
The water pressure for tap water is normally 0.4 MPa or less. Caution
However, in places like a high-rise building, the pressure may be 1. Leakage voltage
1.0 MPa. When selecting tap water, be careful of the maximum op- Particularly when using a resistor in parallel with a switching
erating pressure differential. element and using a C-R element (surge voltage suppressor) to
protect the switching element, take note that leakage current will
When using water or heated water, poor operation or leaks may
flow through the resistor, C-R element, etc., creating a possible
be caused by dezincification, erosion, corrosion, etc. The brass
danger that the valve may not turn off.
(C37) body of this product uses dezincification resistant material
Switching element
as a standard. We also offer a stainless steel body type with Leakage voltage
OFF
improved corrosion resistance. Please use the one that fits your
Power supply
needs. C R
<Oil> SOL.
Leakage current
Generally, FKM is used as seal material, as it is resistant to oil.
The resistance of the seal material may deteriorate depending
on the type of oil, manufacturer or additives. Check the AC coil: 5% or less of rated voltage
resistance before using. The kinematic viscosity must not DC coil: 2% or less of rated voltage
exceed 50 mm2/s. 2. Selecting model
<Steam> Material depends on fluid. Select optimal models for the fluid.
The use of a steam that contains foreign objects can cause 3. When the fluid is oil.
problems such as malfunction and seal failure by promoting The kinematic viscosity must not exceed 50 mm2/s.
wear of the valve seat and armature, and by sticking to the
sliding parts of the armature etc. Install a suitable filter (strainer) Mounting
immediately upstream from the valve.
As a standard, the mesh count for the strainer is 100 mesh.
However, the size and shape of foreign objects that occur Warning
depends on the operating environment. Check the fluid status 1. If air leakage increases or equipment does not operate
and choose an appropriate mesh count. properly, stop operation.
The supply water to a boiler includes materials that create a After mounting is completed, confirm that it has been done
hard sediment or sludge such as calcium and magnesium. correctly by performing a suitable function test.
Sediment and sludge from steam can cause the valve to not
operate properly. Install a water softening device, which 2. Do not apply external force to the coil section.
removes these materials. Do not use operation steam which When tightening is performed, apply a wrench or other tool to the
contains chemicals, synthetic oils containing organic solvents, outside of the piping connection parts.
salts or corrosive gases, etc., as these can cause damage or 3. Mount a valve with its coil position upward, not
deterioration. downward.
3. Ambient environment When mounting a valve with its coil positioned downward, foreign
Use within the operable ambient temperature range. Check the objects in the fluid will adhere to the iron core leading to a
compatibility between the product’s composition materials and malfunction. Especially for strict leakage control, such as with
the ambient atmosphere. Be certain that the fluid used does not vacuum applications and non-leak specifications, the coil must be
touch the external surface of the product. positioned upward.
4. Countermeasures against static electricity 4. Do not warm the coil assembly with a heat insulator
Take measures to prevent static electricity since some fluids can etc.
cause static electricity. Use tape, heaters, etc., for freeze prevention on the piping and
body only. They can cause the coil to burn out.
46
VX21/22/23
Series
Mounting Disassembly/Assembly Procedures
Warning Caution
5. Secure with brackets, except in the case of steel piping <N.C.> <N.O.>
and copper fittings.
6. Avoid sources of vibration, or adjust the arm from the body to Mounting screw
the minimum length so that resonance will not occur.
7. Painting and coating
Warnings or specifications printed or labeled on the product Mounting screw
should not be erased, removed or covered up.
Disassembly/Assembly Procedures Coil assembly
Caution O-ring A
Coil assembly
1. Before starting the disassembly work, be sure to
shut off the power supply and pressure supply, and O-ring B
then release the residual pressure.

Disassembly Seal
Adapter
<N.C.>
1) Loosen the mounting screws. Return spring
The coil assembly, seal, return spring, armature assembly and Push rod assembly
body can be removed.
<N.O.> Armature assembly
1) Loosen the mounting screws. Spring
The coil assembly, push rod assembly, O-rings, adapter and
body can be removed. O-ring C
Assembly
<Common to N.C. and N.O.>
1) Mount the components on the body in the reverse order of
disassembly.
2) When changing the electrical entry direction, turn the coil
assembly in a desired direction to mount it. Aluminum
Resin body Metal body ( C37 )
3) Push the coil assembly against the body and tighten the screws Stainless steel
two or more rounds diagonally (Fig. 2) in the status that there are
no gaps between the coil assembly and body (Fig. 1).
Tighten the screws in the order of “12341234”.
Proper Tightening Torque
VX21 0.37 lbf·ft (0.5 N·m)
VX22
0.52lbf·ft (0.7N·m) Body
VX23
Bracket
No gaps 1 3
4 2
Fig.1 Fig.2
∗ After tightening the screws, make sure that there are no gaps between the
coil and body (Fig. 1).
∗ After the disassembly and assembly have been completed, make sure that
no leak occurs from the seal. Additionally, when restarting the valve, make
sure that the valve operates correctly after checking the safety.
47
VX21/22/23
Series
Disassembly/Assembly Procedures Piping
Caution Warning
Manifold Exploded View 1. During use, deterioration of the tube or damage to the
fittings could cause tubes to come loose from their
Mounting screw
fittings and thrash about.
To prevent uncontrolled tube movement, install protective covers
or fasten tubes securely in place.
Solenoid valve for manifold 2. For piping the tube, fix the product securely using the
mounting holes so that the product is not in the air.
Caution
1. Preparation before piping
Gasket Before piping is connected, it should be thoroughly blown out with
air (flushing) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and other
debris from inside the pipe. Avoid pulling, compressing, or
bending the valve body when piping.
2. Avoid connecting ground lines to piping, as this may
cause electric corrosion of the system.
3. Always tighten threads with the proper tightening
torque.
IN port (Common SUP) When using steel piping, tighten with the proper tightening torque
OUT port (Individual SUP)
shown below.
Manifold base Lower tightening torque will lead into fluid leakage.
OUT port (Common SUP)

Tightening Torque for Piping
IN port (Individual SUP) Thread size Proper tightening torque lbf·ft (N·m)
Individual port
Rc1/8 5.2 to 6.6 (7 to 9)
Rc1/4 8.9 to 10.3 (12 to 14)
Rc3/8 16.2 to 17.7 (22 to 24)
Common SUP Individual SUP Rc1/2 20.7 to 22.1 (28 to 30)
for air for medium vacuum
Gasket 4. Connection of piping to products
When connecting piping to a product, avoid mistakes regarding
Solenoid valve the supply port etc.
interface for
IN port
manifold 5. Wrapping of sealant tape
Winding
When connecting pipes, fittings, direction
etc., be sure that chips from the
IN port pipe threads and sealing material Sealant tape
do not enter the valve. Ex
Furthermore, when sealant tape is 2 t pos
hr e a
Individual port side Individual port side ea
ds ppro
used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges x.
∗ Mounting orientation exists when mounting valves onto manifold base. exposed at the end of the threads.
Mount it as shown above.
∗ Take great care when special electrical entry direction (XC) is used. 6. In applications such as vacuum and non-leak specifi-
cations, use caution specifically against the contami-
nation of foreign objects or airtightness of the fittings.
48
VX21/22/23
Series
Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For 2 Port Solenoid Valves for Fluid Control Precautions, refer to
“Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website, http://www.smcworld.com
Recommended Piping Conditions Wiring

1. When connecting tubes using One-touch fittings,
provide some spare tube length shown in Fig. 1, rec- Warning
ommended piping configuration. 1. Do not apply AC voltage to Class “H” coil AC type
Also, do not apply external force to the fittings when binding unless it is built in full-wave rectifier, or the coil will be
tubes with bands etc. (see Fig. 2.) damaged.
Caution
1. As a rule, use electrical wire with a cross sectional ar-
Straight ea of 0.5 to 1.25 mm2 for wiring.
portion
Mounting
Furthermore, do not allow excessive force to be ap-
pitch A plied to the lines.
2. Use electrical circuits which do not generate chatter-
Fig. 1 Recommended piping configuration ing in their contacts.
Unit: mm 3. Use voltage which is within ±10% of the rated voltage.
Tube Mounting pitch A Straight In cases with a DC power supply where importance is
size Nylon tubing Soft nylon tubing Polyurethane tubing portion length placed on responsiveness, stay within ±5% of the rated
ø1/8" 44 or more 29 or more 25 or more 16 or more value. The voltage drop is the value in the lead wire
ø6 84 or more 39 or more 39 or more 30 or more section connecting the coil.
ø1/4" 89 or more 56 or more 57 or more 32 or more
4. When a surge from the solenoid affects the electrical
ø8 112 or more 58 or more 52 or more 40 or more
circuitry, install a surge voltage suppressor etc., in
parallel with the solenoid. Or, adopt an option that
comes with the surge voltage protection circuit. (How-
ever, a surge voltage occurs even if the surge voltage
protection circuit is used. For details, please consult
with SMC.)
Recommended Unacceptable
Fig. 2 Binding tubes with bands
49
VX21/22/23
Series
Operating Environment Electrical Connections
Warning Caution
1. Do not use in an atmosphere having corrosive gases, Grommet
chemicals, sea water, water, water steam, or where
Class B coil: AWG20 Insulator O.D. 2.5 mm
there is direct contact with any of these.
Class H coil: AWG18 Insulator O.D. 2.1 mm
2. Do not use in explosive atmospheres.
3. Do not use in locations subject to vibration or impact.
q
4. Do not use in locations where radiated heat will be re-
ceived from nearby heat sources.
5. Employ suitable protective measures in locations
w
where there is contact with water droplets, oil or weld-
ing spatter, etc.
Lead wire color
Maintenance Rated voltage
q w
Warning DC
100 VAC
Black
Blue
Red
Blue
1. Removing the product 200 VAC Red Red
The valve will reach a high temperature when used with high Other AC Gray Gray
temperature fluids. Confirm that the valve temperature has
∗ There is no polarity.
dropped sufficiently before performing work. If touched inadver-
tently, there is a danger of being burned.
1) Shut off the fluid supply and release the fluid pressure in the DIN terminal
system. Since internal connections are shown below for the DIN terminal,
2) Shut off the power supply. make connections to the power supply accordingly.
3) Dismount the product. 1: +
2. Low frequency operation (−) +
1 3
Switch valves at least once every 30 days to prevent malfunction. 2

— 2: −
Also, in order to use it under the optimum state, conduct a regular
inspection once a half year. (+)
Caution
1. Filters and strainers
1) Be careful regarding clogging of filters and strainers.
2) Replace filter elements after one year of use, or earlier if the Terminal no. 1 2
pressure drop reaches 15 psi (0.1 MPa). DIN terminal + (−) − (+)
3) Clean strainers when the pressure drop reaches 15 psi (0.1 ∗ There is no polarity.
• Use compatible heavy duty cords with cable O.D. ø6 to ø12 mm.
MPa). • Use the tightening torques below for each section.
2. Lubrication
When using after lubricating, never forget to lubricate continuously. Binding head screw with flange
Connector Tightening torque 0.37 to 0.44 lbf·ft (0.5 to 0.6 N·m)
3. Storage
In case of long term storage after use, thoroughly remove all moisture
to prevent rust and deterioration of rubber materials etc.
4. Exhaust the drainage from an air filter periodically.
Compatible cable Note)
Operating Precautions Gasket (Cable O.D. ø6 to ø12 mm)
Washer
Warning Rubber seal
1. If there is a possibility of reverse pressure being ap- Binding head screw

plied to the valve, take countermeasures such as Tightening torque 0.37 to 0.44 lbf·ft (0.5 to 0.6 N·m)
mounting a check valve on the downstream side of the
Note) For an outside cable O.D. ø9 to ø12 mm, remove the internal parts
valve. of the rubber seal before using.
2. When problems are caused by a water hammer, install
water hammer relief equipment (accumulator etc.), or
use an SMC water hammer relief valve (Series VXR).
For details, please consult with SMC.
50
VX21/22/23
Series
Electrical Connections Electrical Circuits
Caution Caution
Conduit terminal [DC circuit]
In the case of the conduit terminal, make connections according Grommet, Flat terminal Grommet, DIN terminal,
to the marks shown below. Conduit terminal, Conduit
Varistor
• Use the tightening torques below for each section.
1 (+, –) 1 (+, –)
• Properly seal the terminal connection (G1/2) with the special
wiring conduit etc. SOL. SOL.
Terminal cover
2 (–, +) 2 (–, +)
Round head combination screw
M3 Without electrical option With surge voltage suppressor
Tightening torque 0.37 to 0.44 lbf·ft A
(0.5 to 0.6 N·m)
DIN terminal, Conduit terminal
Varistor
+ Mark
– Mark
2 1
− + 1 (+, –)
A
SOL.
G1/2 2 (–, +)
Round head
combination screw Tightening torque
Light
0.37 to 0.44 lbf ft
M3 Tightening torque
(0.5 to 0.6 N·m)
0.37 to 0.44 lbf·ft (0.5 to 0.6 N·m) Conduit terminal With light/surge voltage suppressor
View A-A
(Internal connection diagram)
[AC circuit]
∗ For AC (Class B), the standard product is equipped with surge voltage
Conduit suppressor.
When used as an IP65 equivalent, use seal to install the wiring Grommet, DIN terminal, DIN terminal, Conduit terminal
conduit. Also, use the tightening torque below for the conduit. Conduit terminal, Conduit
Varistor
Class B coil: AWG20 Insulator O.D. 2.5 mm Varistor Rectifier Rectifier
element
1 1 element
Class H coil: AWG18 Insulator O.D. 2.1 mm
Lead wire
SOL. SOL.
q
2 2
Light
Without electrical option With light/surge voltage suppressor

w
Wiring conduit
Seal One-touch Fitting
(Bore size G1/2 Tightening torque 0.37 to 0.44 lbf·ft [0.5 to 0.6 N·m])
Lead wire color

Caution
Rated voltage
q w For information on handling One-touch fittings and ap-
DC Black Red propriate tubing, refer to page 48 and the KQ2 series
100 VAC Blue Blue One-touch fittings in Best Pneumatics No. 6.
200 VAC Red Red The KQ2 series information can be downloaded from the
Other AC Gray Gray following SMC website, http://www.smcworld.com
∗ There is no polarity.
Description Part no.

Seal VCW20-15-6
Note) Please order separately.
51
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or
Safety Instructions equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with
the labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.” They are all important notes for
safety and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC)∗1),
and other safety regulations.
∗1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
Caution indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
Caution: if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines.
(Part 1: General requirements)
Warning indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which,
Warning: if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
ISO 10218-1: Manipulating industrial robots – Safety.
etc.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which,
Danger : if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning Caution
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the 1. The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
person who designs the equipment or decides its The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in
specifications. manufacturing industries.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand
its compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who and exchange specifications or a contract if necessary.
designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
analysis and test results. The expected performance and safety assurance
of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined Limited warranty and Disclaimer/
its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously
review all specifications of the product referring to its latest catalog Compliance Requirements
information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of The product used is subject to the following “Limited warranty and Disclaimer” and
equipment failure when configuring the equipment. “Compliance Requirements”.
Read and accept them before using the product.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate
machinery and equipment. Limited warranty and Disclaimer
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The
assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including
1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after
our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained
the product is delivered, whichever is first.∗2)
and experienced. Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or
replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/ 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our
equipment until safety is confirmed. responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any
performed after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven other damage incurred due to the failure of the product.
objects have been confirmed.
3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as and disclaimers noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
mentioned above are implemented and the power from any appropriate
∗2) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
of all relevant products carefully. Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of
Compliance Requirements
safety measures if the product is to be used in any of the 1. The use of SMC products with production equipment for the manufacture of
following conditions. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) or any other weapon is strictly prohibited.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use 2. The exports of SMC products or technology from one country to another are
outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight. governed by the relevant security laws and regulations of the countries involved
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air in the transaction. Prior to the shipment of a SMC product to another country,
navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, assure that all local rules governing that export are known and followed.
combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and
beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in press
applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the Caution
standard specifications described in the product catalog.
SMC products are not intended for use as instruments for legal
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or metrology.
animals requiring special safety analysis. Measurement instruments that SMC manufactures or sells have not been
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock qualified by type approval tests relevant to the metrology (measurement) laws
for possible failure by using a mechanical protective function, and of each country. Therefore, SMC products cannot be used for business or
periodical checks to confirm proper operation. certification ordained by the metrology (measurement) laws of each country.
Revision history
Edition B ∗ Added N.O. valve. Edition D ∗ Faston terminal is changed to flat terminal.
∗ Added steam as a fluid (Insulation type Class H). ∗ Added UL-compliant (For Air/Water).
∗ Added manifold. ∗ Increased pages from 52 to 56. SZ
∗ Increased pages from 32 to 48. QV
Edition C ∗ Added installation options.
∗ Added disassembly/assembly procedures.
∗ Leakage voltage (AC coil) was corrected from 10% or less to 5% or less.
∗ Increased pages from 48 to 52. RX
Safety Instructions Be sure to read “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” (M-E03-3) before using.
52
Global Manufacturing, Distribution and Service Network
Worldwide Subsidiaries
EUROPE ASIA NORTH AMERICA
AUSTRIA LATVIA CHINA CANADA
SMC Pneumatik GmbH (Austria) SMC Pneumatics Latvia SIA SMC (China) Co., Ltd. SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd.
BELGIUM LITHUANIA HONG KONG MEXICO
SMC Pneumatics N.V./S.A. SMC Pneumatics Lietuva, UAB SMC Pneumatics (Hong kong) Ltd. SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. DE C.V.
BULGARIA NETHERLANDS INDIA USA
SMC Industrial Automation Bulgaria EOOD SMC Pneumatics BV SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd. SMC Corporation of America
CROATIA NORWAY JAPAN
SMC Industrijska Automatika d.o.o. SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S SMC Corporation SOUTH AMERICA
CZECH POLAND MALAYSIA ARGENTINA
SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o. SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o. SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd. SMC Argentina S.A.
DENMARK ROMANIA PHILIPPINES BOLIVIA
SMC Pneumatik A/S SMC Romania S.r.l. SMC Pneumatics (Philippines), Inc. SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L.
ESTONIA RUSSIA SINGAPORE BRAZIL
SMC Pneumatics Estonia SMC Pneumatik LLC. SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd. SMC Pneumaticos do Brazil Ltda.
FINLAND SLOVAKIA SOUTH KOREA CHILE
SMC Pneumatics Finland OY SMC Priemyselná Automatizáciá, s.r.o. SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd. SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A.
FRANCE SLOVENIA TAIWAN PERU
SMC Pneumatique S.A. SMC Industrijska Avtomatika d.o.o. SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd. SMC Corporation Peru S.A.C.
GERMANY SPAIN / PORTUGAL THAILAND VENEZUELA
SMC Pneumatik GmbH SMC España, S.A. SMC Thailand Ltd. SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
GREECE SWEDEN OCEANIA
SMC Hellas EPE SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB
AUSTRALIA
HUNGARY SWITZERLAND SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
SMC Hungary Ipari Automatizálási Kft. SMC Pneumatik AG
NEW ZEALAND
IRELAND UK SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd. SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
ITALY
SMC Italia S.p.A.
U.S. & Canadian Sales Offices
WEST EAST
Austin Atlanta
Dallas Birmingham
Los Angeles Boston
Phoenix Charlotte
Portland Nashville
San Francisco New Jersey Toronto
Montreal
Rochester Detroit
CENTRAL Tampa
Chicago
Cincinnati CANADA
Livermore
Cleveland Vancouver Indianapolis
Detroit Toronto
Indianapolis Windsor
Milwaukee Montreal
Sales Branches
Minneapolis
Regional Distribution Centers
St. Louis
Central warehouse
Austin
© 2015 SMC Corporation of America, All Rights Reserved.

All reasonable efforts to ensure the accuracy of the information detailed in this catalog were made at the time of publishing.
However, SMC can in no way warrant the information herein contained as specifications are subject to change without notice. TQ-RRD-5M
12. Spare parts catalogue
12.1. Spare part manual - 598721-02 - R0

.
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzteilkatalog, Catalogue de piéces de rechange, Varaosaluettelo,

Catalogue de piezas de recambio, Каталог запасных частеи, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων, Reserveonderdelen-catalogus, 备件目录
Specification No. 881222-01-04/2

Book No. 598721 02 Rev. 6
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2015-09-10

Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 21
2 Machine bottom part, 60 Hz 26

2.1 Oil filling device 28
2.2 Cover with brake 30
3 Machine top part 32

3.1 Inlet and outlet device, standard 34
3.2 Inlet and outlet device, axial hermetic
seal 36
4 Machine top part 38
5 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm,

Ø 190 mm 40
6 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm,

Ø 220/ 190 mm 42
7 Set of plates 44
8 Speed sensor kit 46

8.1 Speed transmitter 48
9 Junction box kit 50
10 Unbalance sensor kit 52
11 Set of tools 54
11.1Mounting tool 56
12 Intermediate service kit 58
3
13 Major service kit 60
14 Conversion set to axial hermetic

design 62
15 Cyclone 64
15.1Cyclone 66
16 Cross reference list 68
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
The name plate - the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers. See also Warnings
in chapter ‘‘1.1 General information” on page 7.
Maskinskylten - en guide till det rätta reservdelsnumret. Se även Varningar i kapitel “1.1
Allmän information” på sidan 8.
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer. Siehe auch Warnhinweise
in Kapitel “1.1 Allgemeine Informationen” auf Seite 9.
La plaque de la machine - un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct.
Voir à ce propos les mises en garde du chapitre “1.1 Informations générales ” en page 10.
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto. Consulte también
las Advertencias del capítulo “1.1 Información General” en la página 11.
Фирменная табличка машины — указатель правилного номера запасной части. См.
также предупреждения в главе “1.1 Общие сведения” на странице 12.
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi. Vedere anche le
Avvertenze nel capitolo “1.1 Informazioni generali” a pagina 13.
A placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes.
Consultar também os Avisos no capítulo “Informação Geral 1.1” da página 14.
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon. Katso myös kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15
olevaa kohtaa “Yleiset tiedot ”.
Η πινακίδα της μηχανής είναι ο οδηγός του σωστού ανταλλακτικού. ∆είτε επίσης τις
προειδοποιήσεις του κεφαλαίου "1.1 ΓΕΝΙΚΕΣ ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΕΣ", στη σελίδα 16.
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer. Zie ook
Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk “1.1 Algemene informatie”, op blz. 17.
first Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer. Se også under Advarsler i
kapitel “1.1 Generelle oplysninger” på side 18.
zh 铭牌：用于查找正确备件号的参考。另请参见 19 页“1.1 概要信息” 一章中的“ 警告”。
Az adattábla – a segítségével megtalálhatók a megfelelő pótalkatrészszámok. Lásd még:

hu Figyelmeztetések az „1.1. Általános tudnivalók” fejezetben (20. oldal).
5
1 Read this first
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We
guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
XXXXXX
WARNING B
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly,

the vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life
time of components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe
unbalance occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into
contact with the frame causing damage to equipment and injuries
to personnel. It is strongly recommended that the exchange of
parts is supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alfa
Laval assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to
personnel resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
XXXXXX
WARNING C
Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
7
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten hos våra egna produkter.
XXXXXX
VARNING B
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsnivån

komma att öka. Detta kan i sin tur leda till förkortad livslängd
på t.ex. lager och växlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppstår, kan
den roterande kulan komma att slå i stativets delar, vilket kan
medföra allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Det är därför av stor
vikt att utbyte av kulans delar övervakas av en serviceingenjör
från Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval tar inget ansvar för maskin- eller
personskador som kan uppkomma på grund av att delar bytts ut
av icke auktoriserad personal.
XXXXXX
VARNING C
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfrästa spår som resultat

av balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut
utan att en ombalansering av kulan görs. För att bästa resultat
ska uppnås, ska den kompletta kulan sändas till en Alfa Laval
serviceverkstad för ombalansering.
8
Sichern Sie sich Ihren Anspruch auf Qualität durch

ausschließliche Verwendung von original Alfa Laval
Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daß Alfa Laval keine Verantwortung für den
Ausfall eines Separators übernimmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen
ausgestattet ist. Wir garantieren für die Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG B
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommel-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies
kann zu einer kürzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.B.
Wälzlagern und Getrieben, führen. Bei einer schweren
Unwucht kann die rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt
mit dem Gestell kommen, was zu Beschädigungen der
Ausrüstung oder Personenverletzungen führen kann. Es wird
dringend empfohlen, den Austausch von einem Alfa Laval
Service-Ingenieur beaufsichtigen zu lassen. Alfa Laval
übernimmt keine Haftung für eine Gerätebeschädigung oder
Personenverletzung aufgrund einer ungenehmigten Montage
dieser Teile.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG C
Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Fräsmarken vom Auswuchten

der kompletten Separatortrommel. Diese Teile dürfen nicht ohne
eine Neuauswuchtung der kompletten Trommel ausgetauscht
werden. Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alfa Laval
Service-werkstatt erfolgen.
9
Respectez votre engagement de qualité en utilisant toujours

des pièces de rechange d’origine Alfa Laval.
Attention, Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas de
panne d’un séparateur équipé de pièces de rechange qui ne
sont pas d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la fiabilité de
nos produits.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pièces du bol du séparateur

risque d’augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et donc de réduire la
durée de vie des composants tels que les paliers à roulements
et les engrenages. En cas de déséquilibre trop important, le
bol en rotation risque d’entrer en contact avec des pièces du
bâti, provoquant ainsi des détériorations de l’équipement et
des blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons fortement
à faire réaliser le remplacement sous la surveillance d’un
technicien de maintenance Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval n’assume
aucune responsabilité en cas de détérioration du matériel ou de
blessure du personnel résultant d’une installation non approuvée
de ces pièces.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT C
Certaines pièces du bol présentent des marques de repérage

effectuées lors de l’équilibrage du bol du séparateur. Il ne faut
pas remplacer ces pièces sans avoir au préalable procédé à un
nouvel équilibrage de l’ensemble du bol. Cet équilibrage doit
être réalisé dans un atelier de réparation Alfa Laval.
10
Proteja su compromiso con la calidad utilizando siempre

repuestos originales Alfa Laval.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad
por el fallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no
originales. Alfa Laval garantiza la calidad y la fiabilidad de sus
productos.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor

de la separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del
nivel de vibraciones, lo que puede provocar un desgaste de
algunos componentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los
engranajes. Si se produce un desequilibrado importante, el
conjunto del rotor en movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor,
causando serios daños al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda
encarecidamente que el cambio sea supervisado por un
técnico de mantenimiento de Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval no se
hace responsable de los daños materiales o daños personales
provocados por la instalación no autorizada de esas piezas.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA C
Algunas piezas del rotor llevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor completo de la separadora. Siempre que
se cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el
rotor, operación que debe ser realizada por un experto de un
centro de servicio Alfa Laval.
11
Для обеспечения качества работы вашего оборудования

используйте только подлинные запасные детали компании
Alfa Laval.
Помните: компания Alfa Laval не несет ответственность за
нарушения работы сепаратора, на котором установлены не
подлинные запасные детали. Мы гарантируем качество и
надежность нашей продукции.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ B
В случае замены некоторых частей устройства барабана

сепаратора может повыситься уровень вибрации.Это
может привести к сокращению срока службы компонентов,
таких как подшипники и привод. В случае значительного
дисбаланса, устройство вращающегося барабана может
войти в контакт со станиной, что приведет к серьезному
повреждению оборудования и травмам обслуживающего
персонала. Настоятельно рекомендуется, чтобы замена
была проконтролирована инженером по обслуживанию
компании Alfa Laval. Компания Аlfa Laval не несет никакой
ответственности за повреждения собственности или травмы
персонала в результате неразрешенной установки этих
деталей.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ C
На некоторых частях барабана поставлены отметки после

балансировки барабана сепаратора полностью. Эти части
не могут быть заменены без повторной балансировки всего
устройства барабана сепаратора. Повторная балансировка
должна быть произведена в ремонтном центре Alfa Laval.
12
Salvaguardate la qualità del vostro separatore utilizzando

sempre ricambi originali Alfa Laval.
Ricordate che la Alfa Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilità
in caso di difetti al separatore dovuti all’utilizzo di ricambi non
originali. La Alfa Laval garantisce la qualità e l’affidabilità
esclusivamente dei propri prodotti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alla sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del

separatore, il livello di vibrazioni può aumentare. Questo può
comportare la riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali
cuscinetti a rulli ed ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il
tamburo può entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando
seri danni all’attrezzatura e lesioni alle persone. Si raccomanda
caldamente di far controllare la sostituzione da un tecnico
di assistenza Alfa Laval. La Alfa Laval non assume alcuna
responsabilità per danni alle cose o lesioni al personale dovuti
all’installazione non autorizzata delle suddette parti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA C
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento

complessivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti
non possono essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo
bilanciamento. Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un
centro assistenza Alfa Laval per il ribilanciamento dell’intero
gruppo.
13
Preserve o seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando

sempre peças originais Alfa Laval.
Não se esqueça de que a Alfa Laval não assume quaisquer
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que não esteja
equipado com peças originais. Por isso, asseguramos a
garantia da qualidade e fiabilidade dos nossos produtos.
XXXXXX
AVISO B
Ao mudar determinadas peças no conjunto do rotor da

separadora, poderá provocar um aumento da vibração.
Tal poderá originar a redução do tempo de duração dos
componentes, tais como rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens.
Caso se verifique um desequilíbrio acentuado, o conjunto do
rotor giratório poderá entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo
a provocar danos no equipamento e ferimentos pessoais.
Recomenda-se vivamente que a substituição de peças seja
vistoriada por um técncico de serviço da Alfa Laval. A Alfa
Laval não assume qualquer responsabilidade por danos em
bens ou ferimentos pessoais resultantes da instalação não
autorizada daquelas peças.
XXXXXX
AVISO C
Determinadas partes do rotor contêm marcas de atrito do

balanceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas peças
não devem ser substituídas sem reequilibrar o rotor completo.
O reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistência
Alfa Laval.
14
Varmista käyttämiesi tuotteiden laatu käyttämällä aina aitoja ja

alkuperäisiä Alfa Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alfa Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toimintahäiriöstä, jossa on käytetty muita kuin alkuperäisiä
varaosia. Me takaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja
luotettavuuden.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS B
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyjä osia vaihdetaan,

sen tärinän taso voi kasvaa. Tämä voi johtaa joidenkin osien,
kuten vierintälaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, käyttöiän
lyhenemiseen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epätasapainoon,
pyörivä kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa
laite- ja henkilövahinkoja. Suosittelemme, että Alfa Lavalin
huoltoinsinööri valvoo vaihtoa. Alfa Laval ei ota vastuuta
omaisuudelle tai henkilökunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista,
mikäli ne johtuvat näiden osien väärin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS C
Tietyissä kuulan osissa on merkinnät koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Näitä osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, että koko
kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainotus on annettava Alfa Laval -
korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
15
∆ιασφαλίστε τη δέσμευσή σας για ποιότητα χρησιμοποιώντας

πάντοτε γνήσια ανταλλακτικά Alfa Laval.
Σας υπενθυμίζουμε ότι η Alfa Laval δεν αναλαμβάνει ευθύνη
για τη βλάβη διαχωριστήρα που δεν είναι εξοπλισμένος με
αυθεντικά ανταλλακτικά. Εγγυώμαστε την ποιότητα και την
αξιοπιστία των προϊόντων μας.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ B
Όταν αλλάζετε ορισμένα εξαρτήματα στο σύστημα του τυμπάνου

του διαχωριστήρα, η στάθμη κραδασμών μπορεί να αυξηθεί.
Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν αποτέλεσμα μικρότερη διάρκεια ζωής
των εξαρτημάτων, όπως ρουλεμάν και γρανάζια. Σε περίπτωση
σοβαρής έλλειψης ζυγοστάθμισης, το περιστρεφόμενο σύστημα
του τυμπάνου μπορεί να έλθει σε επαφή με το πλαίσιο,
προκαλώντας ζημιές στο μηχάνημα και τραυματισμό του
προσωπικού. Οι οποιεσδήποτε αλλαγές εξαρτημάτων
πρέπει να γίνονται υπό την επίβλεψη μηχανικού της Alfa
Laval. Η Alfa Laval δεν φέρει καμμία ευθύνη για υλικές ζημιές
ή για τραυματισμό του προσωπικού λόγω τοποθέτησης αυτών
των εξαρτημάτων από μη εξουσιοδοτημένα άτομα.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ C
Ορισμένα εξαρτήματα του τυμπάνου φέρουν ίχνη φρεζαρίσματος

από τη ζυγοστάθμιση ολόκληρου του συστήματος του
τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα. Αυτά τα εξαρτήματα δεν
πρέπει να αντικατασταθούν χωρίς να ξαναγίνει ζυγοστάθμιση
ολόκληρου του συστήματος του τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα.
Η επαναζυγοστάθμιση πρέπει να γίνει σε κάποιο από τα
επισκευαστικά κέντρα της Alfa Laval.
16
Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alfa Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop, dat Alfa Laval geen verantwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor defecten aan een separator die is uitgerust
met nietoriginele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de
kwaliteit en de betrouwbaarheid van onze producten.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING B
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden

vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden
tot een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers
en tandwielen. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van
onbalans, kan de roterende trommel in contact komen met het
frame, wat kan leiden tot ernstige schade aan goederen of tot
persoonlijk letsel. Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden
om onderdelen te laten vervangen onder supervisie van een
onderhoudstechnicus van Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval aanvaardt
geen enkele aansprakelijkheid voor schade aan goederen of
persoonlijk letsel als gevolg van onoordeelkundige installatie
van die onderdelen.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING C
Op bepaalde onderdelen van de trommel zitten freesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
onderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de
gehele trommel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw
uitbalanceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alfa Laval.
17
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele fra Alfa Laval.
Husk at Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for fejl i separatorer,
der er udstyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestår for vore
produkters kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL B
Ved udskiftning af visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan

vibrationsniveauet blive forøget. Dette kan forkorte levetiden for
komponenter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tilfælde af kraftige
vibrationer kan den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt
med rammedele, hvilket kan medføre alvorlig beskadigelse
af udstyr og personskade. Det anbefales på det kraftigste,
at udskiftningen sker under tilsyn af en servicetekniker fra
Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for ting- eller
personskade som følge af ikke-autoriseret montering af disse
dele.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL C
Visse kugledele er forsynet med mærker fra afbalanceringen af

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning af disse dele skal
der foretages en ny afbalancering af den samlede kugleenhed.
Afbalanceringen bør foretages af et Alfa Laval-servicecenter.
18
zh
请始终使用阿法拉伐真品备件以保证您产品的质量。
请注意，阿法拉伐对使用非原装备件的分离设备的故障不承担
责任。我们保证我们产品的质量与可靠性。
XXXXXX
警告 B
在更换分离器转鼓装置的某些部件后，振动水平可能会升高。
这可能会导致滚动轴承和齿轮等部件的寿命缩短。如果出现
严重不平衡状态，转鼓装置可能会碰到框架，导致设备损坏
甚至人员伤害。强烈建议由阿法拉伐服务工程师主持部件的
更换。对于非授权安装的此类部件导致的财产损失和人身伤
害，阿法拉伐不承担责任。
XXXXXX
警告 C
某些转鼓部件带有整个分离设备转鼓平衡部分的研磨痕迹。在
未重新校准整个转鼓的平衡前，不得更换这些部件。平衡校准
应由阿法拉伐服务点进行。
19
hu
Minőség iránti elkötelezettségének megfelelően mindig eredeti
Alfa Laval pótalkatrészeket használjon.
Az Alfa Laval nem vállal felelősséget a nem eredeti
pótalkatrészekkel felszerelt szeparátor meghibásodásáért. A
saját termékeink minőségét és megbízhatóságát garantáljuk.
XXXXXX
B. FIGYELMEZTETÉS
A szeparátor dobszerelvénye bizonyos alkatrészeinek cseréje

esetén emelkedhet a vibráció szintje. Ez lerövidítheti egyes
komponensek, például a görgőscsapágyak és a fogaskerekek
élettartamát. Súlyos kiegyensúlyozatlanság esetén a
forgó dobszerelvény hozzáérhet a kerethez, a berendezés
károsodását és személyi sérülést okozva. Az alkatrészek
cseréjét komolyan javasolt az Alfa Laval szervizmérnökének
felügyelete mellett végezni. Az Alfa Laval nem vállal
felelősséget az alkatrészek jogosulatlan beépítése miatt
bekövetkező vagyoni kárért vagy személyi sérülésért.
XXXXXX
C. FIGYELMEZTETÉS
A dob bizonyos alkatrészein bemart jelek láthatók az egész

szeparátordob kiegyensúlyozásához. Ilyen alkatrész cseréje
esetén az egész dobot újból ki kell egyensúlyozni. Az újbóli
kiegyensúlyozással egy Alfa Laval műhelyt bízzon meg.
20
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
21
Словарь перевда
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Деталь № Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty Кол—во Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Наименование Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Примечания Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type Машина тнпа Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Артикул № Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Наименование блока Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
машины macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Блок машины № Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Наименование группы Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Группа № Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page См. страницу Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Ссылка на зскиз Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name Наименование артикула Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates Замена требует La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl балансировки барабана la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts См. отдельный перечень Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list запасных частей parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Не поставлена вместе с Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part запасными частями ricambio de recambio
22
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
翻译列表、
zh
Part no. Λριθμός ανταλλακτικού Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer 部件号
Qty Σύνολο Hoeveelheid Antal 数量
Description Περιγραφή Beschrijving Betegnelse 说明
Notes Παρατηρήσεις Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger 注释
Machine type Τύπος μηχανήματος Machinetype Maskintype 机器类型
Product no. Αριθμός προϊόντος Produktnr. Produktnr. 产品编号
Machine unit description Περιγραφή Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse 机器说明

συγκροτήματος μηχανής
Machine unit no. Αριθμός συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr. 机器部件号

μηχανής
Subassembly description Περιγραφή Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse 子装置说明

υποσυγκροτήματος
Subassembly no. Αριθμός Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr. 子装置编号

υποσυγκροτήματος
See page Βλέπε σελίδα Zie blz. Se side 请参阅页
Fig. ref. Παραπομπή σε εικόνα Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning 图片参考
Product name Ονομασία προϊόντος Produktnaam Produktnavn 产品名
Exchange necessitates Ανταλλαγή απαιτεί Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever 更换前应校准转鼓平衡

rebalancing of bowl επαναρρύθμιση herbalanceren van de afbalcering af kuglen
ισορροπίας του τύμπανου kogel
See separate spare parts Βλέπε ειδική λίστα Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reservedelsliste 参见备件清单
list ανταλλακτικών de kogel
Not delivered as spare ∆εν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som 未作为备件提供
part ανταλλακτικό reserveonderdeel reservedel
23
Fordítási lista
hu
Part no. Cikkszám
Qty Menny.
Description Leírás
Notes Megjegyzés
Machine type Gép típusa
Product no. Termékszám
Machine unit description Gépegység leírása
Machine unit no. Gépegység száma
Subassembly description Részegység leírása
Subassembly no. Részegység száma
See page Lásd a következő oldalt:
Fig. ref. Ábra. ref.
Product name Termék neve
Exchange necessitates Csere esetén a dobot ki

rebalancing of bowl kell egyensúlyozni.
See separate spare parts Lásd a külön

list pótalkatrészjegyzéket.
Not delivered as spare Nem szállítjuk

part pótalkatrészként.
24
25
2 Machine bottom part, 60 Hz

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
548071-
Ref Part No Description -09 Notes
Quantity
1 547821 80 Frame bottom part 1
2 547850 01 Frame foot 4
3 68752 Spring washer 4
4 2210463 07 Screw 4
5 547724 80 Bottom bearing holder 1
6 9876 Ball bearing 1
7 547757 02 Lock ring 1
8 547831 01 Bowl spindle 1
9 547830 01 Oil pump 1
10 565632 02 Bearing seat 1
11 9876 Ball bearing 1
12 66366 Retaining ring 1
13 547756 06 Fan 1
14 547631 01 Buffer 8
15 260083 57 Compression spring 8
16 223406 20 O-ring 8
17 547632 02 Screw plug 8
18 223412 45 O-ring 1
19 547726 02 Top bearing cover 1
20 223406 24 O-ring 1
21 547824 02 Deflector ring 1
22 545831 80 Oil filling device 1 See page 28
24 260449 06 Countersunk cap screw 2
25 547633 81 Motor adapter 1
25A 547633 04 Motor adapter 1
25B 548591 04 Stud bolt 4
27 221803 40 Nut 4
28 547828 82 Belt tightener 1
29 567753 02 Belt pulley 1
30 547837 02 Washer 1
32 221731 19 Screw 1
33 260169 49 Flat belt 1
34 223101 35 Washer 4
35 221046 07 Screw 4
36 223406 26 O-ring 1
37 547999 01 Cap nut 1
38 223406 20 O-ring 1
43 547839 82 Cover with brake 1 See page 30
44 221036 27 Screw 8
44.1 223101 33 Washer 8
45 547945 81 Cover 1
45A 547849 02 Cover 1
45B 548682 81 Belt guide 1
45C 221031 21 Screw 3
45D 221803 28 Nut 3
46 548606 01 Cable holder 1
47 260170 04 Screw 2
48 221803 21 Nut 2
49 547632 02 Screw plug 1
50 553694 01 Plug 1
26
2 Machine bottom part, 60 Hz
1245O
27
2.1 Oil filling device

545831-
Quantity
1 545817 01 Sleeve 1
2 223406 27 O-ring 1
3 223406 27 O-ring 1
4 544024 01 Nipple 1
5 542392 02 Seal ring 1
6 545818 01 Round wire retaining ring 1
7 545819 01 Oil glass 1
8 545832 01 Plate 1
28
2.1 Oil filling device 2 Machine bottom part, 60 Hz
0640A
29
2.2 Cover with brake

547839-
Quantity
1 547840 02 Cover 1
2 547841 02 Shaft 1
3 547842 01 Compression spring 1
3.5 567616 01 Plain washer 1
4 546791 02 Handle 1
5 222137 10 Cylindrical pin 1
6 222210 21 Split pin 1
7 547843 81 Arm 1
8 222111 94 Cylindrical pin 1
9 221581 01 Hexagon socket set screw 1
10 547844 01 Tension spring 1
30
2.2 Cover with brake 2 Machine bottom part, 60 Hz
3.5
0788C
31
3 Machine top part

597352-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 -03 Notes
Quantity
Standard ↓
Axial hermetic seal ↓
Standard with cooled sludge channel ↓
1 596424 01 Frame top part 1 1 Fabricated
1 597499 01 Frame top part 1
4 221721 19 Screw 8 8 8
5 223412 45 O-ring 1 1 1
6 549857 06 Distributing cover 1 1 1
7 223412 29 O-ring 1 1 1
8 9002160 02 Injection Cover 1 1 1
9 260168 36 O-ring 1 1 1
10 221031 21 Screw 6 6 6
11 221036 02 Screw 8 8 8
12 223404 18 O-ring 1 1 1
13 9007273 01 Nipple 1 1 1
14 260190 05 O-ring 1 1 1
15 567722 01 Frame hood 1 1
15 567722 02 Frame hood 1
16 223101 61 Washer 8 8 8
17 221041 30 Screw 8 8 8
18 547896 02 Height adjusting ring 6 6 6
19 223406 43 O-ring 1 1 1
20 567751 80 Inlet and outlet device, standard 1 1 See page 34
21 223101 61 Washer 4 4
22 221041 21 Screw 4 4
23 567597 02 Ring 1
24 221721 13 Screw 4
25 223406 43 O-ring 1
26 567751 81 Inlet and outlet device, axial hermetic 1 See page 36
seal
27 223101 61 Washer 4
28 221041 21 Screw 4
30 260154 02 Lifting eye bolt 2 2 2
31 561277 03 Straight coupling 1
32 561097 01 Elbow 1
33 578667 01 Flexible hose 1
34 561206 01 Elbow 1
35 578658 01 Straight coupling 1
36 70936 O-ring 1 1 1
37 528920 11 Hose nipple 1 1 1
99 544465 03 Locking liquid 1 1 1
32
3 Machine top part
20
22
21
19
18
35
17
34 16
15
33
14
32
31 8
7
11
6
9 5
10
1 4
30
13 37
2468A
36
12
33
3.1 Inlet and outlet device, standard

567751-
Quantity
1 588011 01 Inlet pipe 1
2 570362 02 Paring disc 1
3 564044 42 O-ring 1
4 223406 16 O-ring 1
5 567473 80 Outlet housing 1
5A 565695 02 Cylindrical pin 1
6 567501 01 Nut 1
7 223406 16 O-ring 1
8 567812 02 Inlet bend 1
9 223642 22 Snap ring 1
34
3.1 Inlet and outlet device, standard 3 Machine top part
5A
1272D
35
3.2 Inlet and outlet device, axial hermetic seal

567751-
Quantity
1 588011 01 Inlet pipe 1
2 570362 02 Paring disc 1
3 564044 42 O-ring 1
4 223406 16 O-ring 1
5.1 567603 80 Outlet housing 1
5.1A 565695 02 Cylindrical pin 1
6 567501 01 Nut 1
7 223406 16 O-ring 1
8 567812 02 Inlet bend 1
9 223642 22 Snap ring 1
10 567772 03 O-ring 1
11 567773 01 Sealing, static part 1
36
3.2 Inlet and outlet device, axial hermetic seal 3 Machine top part
7
9
5.1
5.1A
10
11
1
1272F
37
4 Machine top part

597352-
Quantity
1 9004078 01 Frame top part 1 Fabricated
4 221721 19 Screw 8
5 223412 45 O-ring 1
6 549857 06 Distributing cover 1
7 223412 29 O-ring 1
8 9002160 02 Injection Cover 1
9 260168 36 O-ring 1
10 221031 21 Screw 6
11 221036 02 Screw 8
12 223404 18 O-ring 1
13 9007273 01 Nipple 1
14 260190 05 O-ring 1
15 567722 04 Frame hood 1
16 223101 61 Washer 8
17 221041 30 Screw 8
18 547896 02 Height adjusting ring 6
19 223406 43 O-ring 1
23 567597 02 Ring 1
24 221721 13 Screw 4
25 223406 43 O-ring 1
26 567751 81 Inlet and outlet device, axial hermetic 1 See page 36
seal
27 223101 61 Washer 4
28 221041 21 Screw 4
30 260154 02 Lifting eye bolt 2
36 70936 O-ring 1
37 528920 11 Hose nipple 1
99 544465 03 Locking liquid 1
38
4 Machine top part
26
28
27
19
24
23
25
18
17
16
15
14
8
7
11
6
9 5
10
1 4
30
13
37
2468D
36
12
39
5 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø 190 mm

567723-
Ref Part No Description -05 -07 Notes
Quantity
Standard, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø 190 mm ↓
Axial hermetic seal, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø ↓
190 mm
1 553651 81 Bowl body 1 1 C
1A 542336 02 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 3 3
2 548568 01 Wear liner 12 12
3 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1
4 547963 07 Rectangular ring 1 1
5 223412 15 O-ring 1 1
6 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
8 547765 01 Operating slide 1 1 B
9 547993 01 Valve plug 3 3
11 223412 48 O-ring 1 1
12 548091 80 Distributing ring 1 1
12A 222111 75 Cylindrical pin 1 1
13 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
14 546198 25 O-ring 1 1
15 547700 80 Operating water ring 1 1
15A 542336 02 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1 1
16 221046 04 Screw 3 3
18 548396 01 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1 B
19 223406 14 O-ring 1 1
20 548427 01 Liner 1 1
21 570438 80 Distributor 1 1
22 567707 80 Bowl disc 142 142
23 567707 80 Bowl disc 10 10
24 223406 40 O-ring 1 1
25 567469 02 Top disc 1 1 B
26 547728 01 Seal ring 1 1
27 546198 15 O-ring 1 1
28 547747 01 Bowl hood 1 1 C
29 573823 01 Lock ring 1 1
30 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
31 567471 02 Paring chamber cover 1
32 567725 01 Lock ring 1 1
38 567772 02 O-ring 1
39 567756 01 Sealing, rotary part 1
40 567772 01 O-ring 1
41 7007331 01 Flange 1
41.1 223130 02 Washer 6
42 221711 23 Screw 6
99 537086 07 Molykote P-1900 1 1
40
5 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø 190 mm
763P
41
6 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø 220/ 190 mm

567723-
Quantity
Standard, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø 220/ 190 ↓
mm
Axial hermetic seal, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø ↓
220/ 190 mm
1 553651 81 Bowl body 1 1 C
1A 542336 02 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 3 3
2 548568 01 Wear liner 12 12
3 2234121 40 O-ring 1 1
5 223412 15 O-ring 1 1
6 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
8 547765 01 Operating slide 1 1 B
9 547993 01 Valve plug 3 3
11 223412 48 O-ring 1 1
12 548091 80 Distributing ring 1 1
13 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
14 546198 25 O-ring 1 1
15 547700 80 Operating water ring 1 1
15A 542336 02 Nozzle Ø 1,5 mm 1 1
16 221046 04 Screw 3 3
18 548396 01 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1 B
19 223406 14 O-ring 1 1
20 548427 01 Liner 1 1
21 570438 80 Distributor 1 1
24 223406 40 O-ring 1 1
25 567469 02 Top disc 1 1 B
26 547728 01 Seal ring 1 1
27 546198 15 O-ring 1 1
28 547747 01 Bowl hood 1 1 C
29 573823 01 Lock ring 1 1
30 223412 30 O-ring 1 1
32 567725 01 Lock ring 1 1
33 567707 80 Bowl disc 43 43
34 567708 80 Bowl disc 89 89
35 567707 80 Bowl disc 8 8
36 567707 80 Bowl disc 10 10
38 567772 02 O-ring 1
40 567772 01 O-ring 1
41 7007331 01 Flange 1
41.1 223130 02 Washer 6
42 221711 23 Screw 6
43 587960 01 Bowl disc 1 1
99 537086 07 Molykote P-1900 1 1
42
6 Separator bowl, caulks 0,4 mm, Ø
220/ 190 mm
33
35
36
43
34
763Q
43
7 Set of plates
549572-
Quantity
1 557714 01 Machine plate 1
2 66169 Drive screw 4
3 1270019 Set of safety labels 1
4 956264 13 Name sign 1
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz 1
6 553272 01 Label 60 Hz 1
7 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
8 554214 02 Cable tie 1
44
7 Set of plates
1 2 3,3A-S
WARNING
Information heading Information text
Information heading
Information heading
Information text
Information text
!
Read the instruction
manuals before
Information heading Information text installation, operation If excessive vibration
Information text and maintenance. occurs, stop separator Separator must stop
and keep bowl filled rotating before any
Failure to strictly with liquid during dismantling work is
Made by Alfa Laval Tumba AB, follow instructions Out of balance
rundown.
Tumba, Sweden can lead to fatal vibration will become
worse if bowl is not
Services enquires www.alfalaval.com
1270018-02-V9
4 5 6
50 Hz
60 Hz
7 8
1. 2.
GB FR
Read instruction manual before lifting. Lire le manuel d´instructions avant le
DE SE
Vor dem Heben immer erst Anleitungen im Hand- Läs instruktionsboken före lyft.
buch lesen!
IT NL
Leggere il manuale d'istruzione prima di Lees voor het tillen eerst de

sollevare.
ES PT
Lea el manual de instrucciones antes de Leia o manual de instruções antes de qualquer

operação de elevação.
RU JP
Читайте инструкцию перед ちげるにをおみさ
FI GR
Lue käyttöohjeet ennen nostamista. Διαβάστε το εγχειρίδιο με τις οδηγίες προτού
βγάλετε τη συσκευή από το κιβώτιο.
DK
CH
Læs instruktionsmanualen, inden der

Art. No. 1270001 Rev. 5
1839C
45
8 Speed sensor kit

553663-
Quantity
1 585441 80 Speed transmitter 1 See page 48
2 260449 01 Countersunk cap screw 2
46
8 Speed sensor kit
1
1266D
47
8.1 Speed transmitter

585441-
Quantity
1 585440 01 Holder 1
2 552042 01 Inductive sensor, Namur 1
3 554112 20 Cable clamp 2
4 221121 48 Screw 2
48
8.1 Speed transmitter 8 Speed sensor kit
1266C
49
9 Junction box kit

553666-
Quantity
1 552552 83 Junction box 1
1A 552851 22 Lock nut 2
1B 556408 01 Resistor 1
1C 552738 02 Terminal row 1
1D 260253 09 Screw 2
2 221130 04 Screw 4
50
9 Junction box kit
1268F
51
10 Unbalance sensor kit
(Junction box required)

553664-
Quantity
1 547865 81 Unbalance sensor 1
2 223406 20 O-ring 1
3 547853 02 Lead-through bushing 2
52
10 Unbalance sensor kit
1267A
53
11 Set of tools
555548-
Quantity
1 414726 04 Lifting eye 1 Spindle
2 548457 81 Tool for belt pulley 1 Belt pulley
2A 548459 01 Nut 1
3 547887 80 Pin spanner 1 Lock ring and fan
4 527395 10 Hook spanner 1 Oil pump
5 66416 Hexagon socket head key 1
8 547973 80 Dismounting tool 1 Bowl body, top bearing cover
8A 547974 80 Screw 3
8B 221803 33 Nut, M12 6
9 556090 02 Spanner for lock ring 1 Lock ring small
10 547975 80 Spanner 1 Lock ring large
10A 9014650 01 Hexagon head bold flange 1
11 547928 81 Compression tool 1 Bowl
11A 223101 52 Washer, 21x37x3 1
11B 221803 35 Nut, M20 1
11C 260220 04 Lifting eye nut 1
12 547930 80 Lifting tool 1 Sliding bowl bottom
13 547932 80 Lifting tool 1 Bowl body
15 548050 04 Spanner 1 Inlet nut and cap nut
16 528927 01 Tin hammer 1
19 553805 80 Driving-off tool 1 Bowl hood
19A 548608 01 Nut 1
19B 548607 01 Screw 1
20 556096 80 Lifting tool 1 Bowl hood
22 260154 01 Lifting eye bolt 2 Frame hood
23 548569 80 Mounting tool 1 Bowl body pillar wear liner
See page 56
54
11 Set of tools
1 2 A 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14 15
16 19 20
21 22 23
1642F
55
11.1 Mounting tool
(Wear liner)

548569-
Quantity
4 74231 Cylindrical pin 1
56
11.1 Mounting tool 11 Set of tools
1271A
57
12 Intermediate service kit

548113-
Quantity
1 2234121 40 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Sliding bowl bottom
2 547963 07 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating slide
3 223412 15 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Distributing ring
5 547963 08 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating slide
6 547993 01 Valve plug 3 Operating slide/ Distributing ring
7 547963 06 Rectangular ring 1 Distributing ring/ Operating slide
9 223412 30 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating water ring
10 546198 25 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating water ring
11 547963 05 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Sliding bowl bottom
12 223406 14 O-ring 1 Sliding bowl bottom/ Liner
13 223406 40 O-ring 1 Top disc/ Bowl hood
14 547728 01 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood/ Sliding bowl bottom
15 546198 15 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Bowl hood
16 223412 30 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Paring chamber cover
17 223406 26 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Cap nut
18 564044 42 O-ring 1 Paring disc/ Outlet housing
19 223406 16 O-ring 1 Inlet pipe/ Outlet housing
20 223406 16 O-ring 1 Inlet pipe/ Inlet bend
21 569415 01 Lube grease food H1 1
22 537086 07 Molykote P-1900 1
23 546098 83 Worm gear housing oil 1
58
12 Intermediate service kit
780D
59
13 Major service kit

549210-
Quantity
Standard ↓
Axial hermetic seal ↓
1 9876 Ball bearing 2 2 Bowl spindle
2 547631 01 Buffer 8 8 Frame bottom part
3 223406 20 O-ring 8 8 Frame bottom part
4 223412 45 O-ring 1 1 Top bearing cover/ Frame bottom part
5 223406 24 O-ring 1 1 Deflector ring/ Bowl spindle
6 260169 49 Flat belt 1 1
7 547843 81 Arm 1 1 Cover with brake
8 223412 45 O-ring 1 1 Frame top part/ Distributing cover
9 223412 29 O-ring 1 1 Distributing cover/ Injection cover
10 260168 36 O-ring 1 1 Distributing cover/ Injection cover
11 223404 18 O-ring 1 1 Distributing cover/ Nipple
12 260190 05 O-ring 1 1 Frame top part/ Frame hood
13 223406 43 O-ring 1 1 Frame hood/ Outlet housing
14 223406 43 O-ring 1 Ring / Outlet housing
14 547992 02 Packing 1 Cyclone / Frame top part
15 547992 02 Packing 1 Cyclone / Frame top part
15 574251 08 Gasket 1 Cyclone / DIN connection
16 574251 08 Gasket 1 Cyclone / DIN connection
16 70939 O-ring 1
17 70939 O-ring 1
60
13 Major service kit
781A
61
14 Conversion set to axial hermetic design

567935-
Quantity
1 223412 30 O-ring 1
3 567772 02 O-ring 1
5 567772 01 O-ring 1
6 7007331 01 Flange 1
7 221711 23 Screw 6
8 223406 43 O-ring 1
9 567597 02 Ring 1
10 221721 13 Screw 4
11 223406 43 O-ring 1
12 564044 42 O-ring 1
13 223406 16 O-ring 1
14 567772 03 O-ring 1
15 567773 01 Sealing, static part 1
16 567603 80 Outlet housing 1
16A 565695 02 Cylindrical pin 1
19 223406 16 O-ring 1
20 223130 02 Washer 6
62
14 Conversion set to axial hermetic design
781G
63
15 Cyclone
588370-
Quantity
1 592053 81 Cyclone 1 See page 66
2 547992 02 Packing 1
3 221046 03 Screw 4
4 223101 11 Washer 4
64
15 Cyclone
3 4 2
2257A
65
15.1 Cyclone
592053-
Quantity
9 592053 80 Cyclone 1
10 574251 08 Gasket 1
11 574202 08 DIN blank 1
12 574204 05 DIN nut 1
66
15.1 Cyclone 15 Cyclone
12 11
10
2275C
67
16 Cross reference list
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1270001 44 7 223130 02 42 41.1 223412 30 58 9

1270019 44 3 223130 02 62 20 223412 30 58 16
221031 21 38 10 223404 18 38 12 223412 30 62 1
221031 21 26 45C 223404 18 60 11 223412 45 38 5
221031 21 32 10 223404 18 32 12 223412 45 26 18
221036 02 38 11 223406 14 40 19 223412 45 60 4
221036 02 32 11 223406 14 42 19 223412 45 60 8
221036 27 26 44 223406 14 58 12 223412 45 32 5
221041 21 38 28 223406 16 34 4 223412 48 40 11
221041 21 32 22 223406 16 34 7 223412 48 42 11
221041 21 32 28 223406 16 36 4 223412 48 58 8
221041 30 38 17 223406 16 36 7 2234121 40 40 3
221041 30 32 17 223406 16 58 19 2234121 40 42 3
221046 03 64 3 223406 16 58 20 2234121 40 58 1
221046 04 40 16 223406 16 62 13 223642 22 34 9
221046 04 42 16 223406 16 62 19 223642 22 36 9
221046 07 26 35 223406 20 26 16 260083 57 26 15
2210463 07 26 4 223406 20 52 2 260154 01 54 22
221121 48 48 4 223406 20 60 3 260154 02 32 30
221130 04 50 2 223406 20 26 38 260154 02 38 30
221581 01 30 9 223406 24 26 20 260168 36 38 9
221711 23 40 42 223406 24 60 5 260168 36 60 10
221711 23 42 42 223406 26 58 17 260168 36 32 9
221711 23 62 7 223406 26 26 36 260169 49 60 6
221721 13 38 24 223406 27 28 2 260169 49 26 33
221721 13 62 10 223406 27 28 3 260170 04 26 47
221721 13 32 24 223406 40 40 24 260190 05 38 14
221721 19 38 4 223406 40 42 24 260190 05 60 12
221721 19 32 4 223406 40 58 13 260190 05 32 14
221731 19 26 32 223406 43 38 19 260220 04 54 11C
221803 21 26 48 223406 43 38 25 260253 09 50 1D
221803 28 26 45D 223406 43 60 13 260449 01 46 2
221803 33 54 8B 223406 43 60 14 260449 06 26 24
221803 35 54 11B 223406 43 62 8 414726 04 54 1
221803 40 26 27 223406 43 62 11 527395 10 54 4
222111 75 40 12A 223406 43 32 19 528920 11 32 37
222111 75 42 12A 223406 43 32 25 528920 11 38 37
222111 94 30 8 223412 15 40 5 528927 01 54 16
222137 10 30 5 223412 15 42 5 537086 07 40 99
222210 21 30 6 223412 15 58 3 537086 07 42 99
223101 11 64 4 223412 29 38 7 537086 07 58 22
223101 33 26 44.1 223412 29 60 9 542336 02 40 1A
223101 35 26 34 223412 29 32 7 542336 02 40 15A
223101 52 54 11A 223412 30 40 6 542336 02 42 1A
223101 61 38 16 223412 30 40 13 542336 02 42 15A
223101 61 38 27 223412 30 40 30 542392 02 28 5
223101 61 32 16 223412 30 42 6 544024 01 28 4
223101 61 32 21 223412 30 42 13 544465 03 32 99
223101 61 32 27 223412 30 42 30 544465 03 38 99
223130 02 40 41.1 223412 30 58 4 545817 01 28 1
68
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
545818 01 28 6 547887 80 54 3 552738 02 50 1C

545819 01 28 7 547896 02 38 18 552851 22 50 1A
545831 80 26 22 547896 02 32 18 553171 01 44 6
545832 01 28 8 547928 81 54 11 553272 01 44 6
546098 83 58 23 547930 80 54 12 553651 81 40 1
546198 15 40 27 547932 80 54 13 553651 81 42 1
546198 15 42 27 547945 81 26 45 553694 01 26 50
546198 15 58 15 547963 05 40 17 553805 80 54 19
546198 25 40 14 547963 05 42 17 554112 20 48 3
546198 25 42 14 547963 05 58 11 554214 02 44 8
546198 25 58 10 547963 06 40 10 556090 02 54 9
546791 02 30 4 547963 06 42 10 556096 80 54 20
547631 01 26 14 547963 06 58 7 556408 01 50 1B
547631 01 60 2 547963 07 40 4 557714 01 44 1
547632 02 26 17 547963 07 42 4 561097 01 32 32
547632 02 26 49 547963 07 58 2 561206 01 32 34
547633 04 26 25A 547963 08 40 7 561277 03 32 31
547633 81 26 25 547963 08 42 7 564044 42 34 3
547700 80 40 15 547963 08 58 5 564044 42 36 3
547700 80 42 15 547973 80 54 8 564044 42 58 18
547724 80 26 5 547974 80 54 8A 564044 42 62 12
547726 02 26 19 547975 80 54 10 565632 02 26 10
547728 01 40 26 547992 02 60 14 565695 02 34 5A
547728 01 42 26 547992 02 60 15 565695 02 36 5.1A
547728 01 58 14 547992 02 64 2 565695 02 62 16A
547747 01 40 28 547993 01 40 9 567469 02 40 25
547747 01 42 28 547993 01 42 9 567469 02 42 25
547756 06 26 13 547993 01 58 6 567471 02 40 31
547757 02 26 7 547999 01 26 37 567471 02 42 31
547765 01 40 8 548050 04 54 15 567473 80 34 5
547765 01 42 8 548091 80 40 12 567501 01 34 6
547799 02 40 21A 548091 80 42 12 567501 01 36 6
547799 02 42 21A 548396 01 40 18 567597 02 38 23
547821 80 26 1 548396 01 42 18 567597 02 62 9
547824 02 26 21 548427 01 40 20 567597 02 32 23
547828 82 26 28 548427 01 42 20 567603 80 36 5.1
547830 01 26 9 548457 81 54 2 567603 80 62 16
547831 01 26 8 548459 01 54 2A 567616 01 30 3.5
547837 02 26 30 548568 01 40 2 567639 02 40 37
547839 82 26 43 548568 01 42 2 567639 02 42 37
547840 02 30 1 548569 80 54 23 567639 02 62 2
547841 02 30 2 548591 04 26 25B 567707 80 40 22
547842 01 30 3 548606 01 26 46 567707 80 40 23
547843 81 60 7 548607 01 54 19B 567707 80 42 33
547843 81 30 7 548608 01 54 19A 567707 80 42 35
547844 01 30 10 548682 81 26 45B 567707 80 42 36
547849 02 26 45A 549857 06 38 6 567708 80 42 34
547850 01 26 2 549857 06 32 6 567722 01 32 15
547853 02 52 3 552042 01 48 2 567722 02 32 15
547865 81 52 1 552552 83 50 1 567722 04 38 15
69
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
567725 01 40 32 68752 26 3
567725 01 42 32 68752 26 31
567751 80 32 20 7007331 01 40 41
567751 81 38 26 7007331 01 42 41
567751 81 32 26 7007331 01 62 6
567753 02 26 29 70936 32 36
567756 01 40 39 70936 38 36
567756 01 42 39 70939 60 16
567756 01 62 4 70939 60 17
567772 01 40 40 74231 56 4
567772 01 42 40 9002160 02 38 8
567772 01 62 5 9002160 02 32 8
567772 02 40 38 9004078 01 38 1
567772 02 42 38 9007273 01 38 13
567772 02 62 3 9007273 01 32 13
567772 03 36 10 9014650 01 54 10A
567772 03 62 14 956264 13 44 4
567773 01 36 11 9876 26 11
567773 01 62 15 9876 60 1
567812 02 34 8 9876 26 6
567812 02 36 8
569415 01 58 21
570362 02 34 2
570362 02 36 2
570438 80 40 21
570438 80 42 21
573823 01 40 29
573823 01 42 29
574202 08 66 11
574204 05 66 12
574251 08 60 15
574251 08 60 16
574251 08 66 10
578658 01 32 35
578667 01 32 33
585440 01 48 1
585441 80 46 1
587960 01 42 43
588011 01 34 1
588011 01 36 1
592053 80 66 9
592053 81 64 1
596424 01 32 1
597499 01 32 1
66169 44 2
66366 26 12
66415 54 6
66416 54 5
66432 54 14
68752 26 26
70
13. Decommissioning

DECOMMISSIONING
DECOMMISSIONING
Requirements on personnel
Electrician
Certified according to local regulations and experience of similar
decommissioning. Knowledge of local safety regulations for power
and automation.
De-erector
Experience from similar work. Proven knowledge in local and interna-
tional safety regulations concerning decommissioning, dismantling,
and disposal.

To ensure maximum safety, read the Safety Instructions before
carrying out any work on the unit.
Dismantling
For efficient dismantling use:
 installation drawing(s)
 component descriptions
 flow diagram
CAUTION! Pipes may contain corrosive/caustic media and/or equipment
may fall down.
Doc. No. DC 2010-03-EN1
www.alfalaval.com 1(1)
14. Contact Alfa Laval Service
www.alfalaval.com

Clara 80 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Clara 80 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLARA 80 High Flow

This page is intentionally left blank

1.1. Safety warnings

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

All Personnel involved in the operation, main-

The forces created due to the size,

WARNING: NON-COMPLIANCE MAY

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 1 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 2 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 3 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 4 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 5 (11)

4.4 ALWAYS check

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 6 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 7 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 8 (11)

7.7 Do not use high pressure hoses or 7.11 NEVER start a

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 9 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 10 (11)

Safety Warnings, 1777843, ver. 3.00, 2008-02-28, page 11 (11)

2.1. Declaration of Conformity

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

Søren Svendsen, Best Practice Manager, Engineering & Supply

Declare that machinery

Serial number : 4xxxxxM

Complies with the requirement of the following EC directives:

Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC,

Alfa Laval Support Services, Pvt. Ltd.

Product Responsible in Engineering & Supply for CLARA modules

© Copyright Alfa Laval

3.1. Requirements on operating water

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

Operating water is used in the separator for

Poor quality of the operating water may cause

Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

The following conditions must be fulfilled:

1. Turbidity free water, solids content <0.001% by

4.1. P&ID - CD01140 - R08

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

5.1. Connection list - 9660001297 - R03

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

Connection Description Requirements

201.1 Inlet Process Liquid ● allowed temperature: 0 - 100°C

201 Out let unclarified process liquid ● Connected to 201 on Separator

220.1 Outlet clarified liquid ● flow: 500 - 8 000 l/h

220 Inlet clarified process liquid from ● Connected to 220 on Separator

Solids outlet from cyclone or ● volume/discharge: 2.2 litres

222.1 Solids inlet solids receiving unit ● Connected to 222 on Separator

300 Inlet Water supply ● required pressure: 30 - 300 kPa,

302 Outlet to separator for Flushing ● Connected to 302 on separator

375 Outlet for discharge and make up ● Connected to 375 on separator

6.1. Installation manual - 598886-02 - R03

© Copyrights Alfa Laval CLARA 80HF

Product No. 881222-01-04/2

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB June 2013

1.1 Warning signs in text 14

2.1 Product description 17

Not following the instructions can result in

In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions

The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high

Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

 When power cables are connected,